sian aaa at eh eGah bite! ea) Vater tnaivrsyeamas ca nh te a * hearin ie ey DOO ema Cac Ta WW marasin tists feds Nea) eb sina ig Nae oy Peer Er en ee cee ee Ce Wet Mirtaranarmericaatients wee ecu ay rae ye ee ROU Stare Cana AOA Ars SUNS aay Weeping (goat ges da Panta Miia Win AWA ea as aia ania ten * oe ima tathee Vi. COR MONRO HIE WJC AE LAS LAC DA ADA ie Wea ea Rt BURNT LACE LALA pk Ut UPL UE UL eee ne Me eS Lac ete) well unr ck ete we. oan aati inaocar tate ONE RHC aOR Mir oa a Ua aly Aer ee ea eee sie eee nee ee a CATS NS MLM OI ORS DMO AGES autee anacie dtereata te aah Cm atest eyinhed ator ress stiete AROMAT Ow Me TOCA TTS Pal aaat a ane OAT NN aly id aaa my mo a my aah aad we tei us aaa toy con) aed ainh A ra yd git ek erin Pe MPa Cr bie Ripon ACen Wr EC OM NTMI ae ICM Be Rn MT RTL MCCRC DPS TCI RR IC *. pone 1 smn PR on a a An Na ae MCE aT MWe RU TCO CMC HTC UO ER MC Uy aia wed aee Fy ayy psa saath 5 Se eC Re IC DC ROM OR AR i eat a EAC wl An PU ARR UO eM DIT NOU PIC WC MRRCCRTT AC I Pe EME MURCIA HTL ALE ANCA icy aM CA NAC REA KOR IC PORK RCP NMC WR IC REC NCR I eee eick Rheh ed POST RTT TEEN ee Sa ra etn Miran yay ataey oa) ata Mee ged sta Ab aie et) Hess waa és ata barra rh) RU RN Reva MTOR CMe MHS MIE CAC ES NS TO Ata AGHA Olek geen a Aa ‘ ‘eye Hw) " TM RUN ADO RHO WOR URIS MUR RA te at NOROOR IE Norte e} ARN UAC II NSIC ACE Y wi Manes aren a Mle a eR ATICHOL Ie} N49) I Vaca vel Orie CC aL A eR Aa aa et 44st sega a tel yw at wala ’ ‘ ST Ca CD Oia etal aera aim faye ey diated fe asa aan eal aaa wn Pe i lah tr RL Nae Mir ata POC ME MCT a I MO CTC) A ey beeen dae Wei M i asad goatee ede) bid AMM Fara Rami ka in aettaag ay Abt one BARD LSP ABE Weare ma (tot hott ghetto memes es MEaMM SH Ht qmsvents Re tateseo Gala ty NM ePIC eT MTC TC NOT CS TCE MANA tai aH ON whem aa a Ne mTRL Msi WOO vas ba porirpetie th J Pye EMCEE ROPE CR TN OTT PS Te UT RR EO nits mach ray word t2iy ak waiteip site form seas dW Go Mafy Ihopraa be rts gaeme deer Greed i asarbctoiy ee Pee atria oh aa CP ani Dea dives det eM ee MOA Ge LM Heat eeNtcAieM Asn eg MNP ht ada aca Mayet Aewraniinn@nltady Lo wei ted wate iit e doris SOO Occ nonce eMC RUC En Ba eC On Woevot atheist a) 44) Quin fesdy ve tgthe peareesw cuter 7 f Re en eT ITO: Wn rer UT MAP RCTS CSO RO RTC EEC EH WC a Foheikenak ty iy Uatinyia ee Fura urate esi Ch OKs UR Ue a MIC CRC TUR RHR SRM RRS i a baialestiy omeragie sts Tb easing fa rssh mam SOK K OR HDR ALT ASLO OL RATS OR AU Act Hee kere at aan Rar yas Fay Ta lata la dhe aaa cay a Ae tn asia aie Te tate Wa alate wd a a Rate aed ren canny ayteGiede wae wien Wyte tata tt eta hity lata aga Ncinpanta casts gay irda cd tia ayo easy ok i See a " ough ae hsb a ede nm acsethen ROR WT AVN ORR MCT ICO RIN Cir Ra Vat Tavg Ate nyuaiicw tian tee hae ‘en Reena MEM Oe Oe a ive kaw io 7 feed ldran nas we ae asi gma imovee ly atten te ad ih yaaa 4 mde ie g yy a Ty tae dae "9 nian hs guar dca ene csi i Bar te Pr ten Se Aaa s , naa gt AT ATCA OIE ND SORE a a sina’ aeaea be ee ara ehtrk fd SOCOM RAO Ua OC A Pa ah vat hy aN a is isafasaai Mareen aibriincnemer teres oe ee a lay gta iat a Ting 5 Maa a HANH toa Ae MR TO CENT IOE MRR RTES Pea TAA\EH steve ann sree be sbytetcter toy a aoa s i EAA A, y bitin te As wt epee ATOR at RC cs NENT RLIO LG MOOK rine by F099 Phe Hh 9 ys tag ew oe i ato wea ‘ TETRIS ORC TER SIT SI or Doar 01 yaa haves ht eo Howto en gm ait ia Pe MCh otal yaa ya ie gy Me gee SRNR NEY RU HOC AC oe “Ah fy Abby namaste fase Ao dos Bt Ao apg NAMEN RIC KIRN VE PIRI PRC REC Ceo Mee LO 1. We iba miss anaes eke so aorta SA han RS BL Moe eee A NU NE Oe Hga Ca p Qh Ta AMAL D Oy oe gt eben erm mas injare ha men tata as Py KI ARENA SPT NW BNMRENCLN OWE RCAC WT SPO Se TS Whe thm a Canine on 8 a A iN Satay AO MALO aa my AUR NTO aN MEM xeor cd pS eG MONET TaN Ber AA Saul an st Cale Ce a bap art BAS Yee dared | Cn ay a iy nen y NAGY, are : AES Ah RA Ie OC SCH RI RAY IRON ICT RRO BOGAN) SH AN em ea ate a 1 a, Pe NTP Oe SCI OC CRE A “ean aah doen cae nuh Warburg as Bok Ae : tay cet sd lay nytt ee yy eee Pay CORI NUTEICT Wn hss Waa oghsunron sivas Goda ‘ ui a Peleus ie Ne eg tatal hy a Mig nt aac Wy ey us atee and «way eye rece t h Disha “4 ee ea APH MOM BRC Re Bnd eM CC CCE eC vernal ara St 1 Sh Hata aah aye eae aay yan a et ty aelaeaty og yn ge ea wena as bie avatitiay at et evant ‘ HC EC italy e tig ay car tet qe RATE TA Ee Hoe AISA aly tanta) weg acer ihnsirenaretigtrinee heby Lets | RG PICA RA ROR RR RGICATHG CPL OND (iat ia emit srs b seats iatey sia g a A PC MRCOG Ma ae sat {min Slag ty bom yh wns ‘ TaN aly Staten RWG ICTS CCR egy hey abla feng sey kag FT ERA aA) (LU aOR AE ID Wan ew ak waaay ee sei a ht Wain dyaety lee tyes Gale yag 1st a Ue Penne eC eR BVO MRC MESO OC MA ESE UR Ma drab hehe a yToas sys wa as Ug e Spur alee Nive at io AP Me dw ea eabs Hayle ge Hel A Hy Mya nah ay hurt ne A ‘) UNS ORmSE RNC Wea eRe aC In USAC BO TM a Aer EL BURR CTC ER OT Vishny tn Doel erases Satay ATT RIM un a RTO Ma Me) A aint lie whvlenayan Saisie) iy what a ata n a 2 OEM KORN RCO taancataey ahr eh rae Fe ee arta tel aly ala aty alae ora "itis H ae wn sty Sir VP SRIF CRONE THM AYN ili wet Pty tesa te an se MCANE pales e atau tame is gt Aad ee oe wage ALA SEN ER PM ee aE TEU TR MAI a RT) x MeN vain eee sy PROP MRR UN ise ne 1 AC Pe sate a WO Vatdaln ania ariel eg Bt ABTA AH ay Mycota Manatee eon erie Uaeth me tbatiy ene On nN a weings vault oe OOM OR CR RE He Ue PUK Jay ea y woke bea gbpieaay Wit pis tae lea smady Bitouselare ali te draetg tect ya Sur a usar ah NN RE) hy ICN OA Anca! aenshsta mh Tela rani ym eisai With nets ns en wy women 7 NL YARAY IA edhe teat Sanit dao WAR AAT Dace yay conve titers) ihe jh koh ORR tee ua Peta aig my AT He RS Por ergot ts TON terete ) OREN: WUT SIC MN WN CU nee i Mearns var a ie tea Way ay aint DE OST HN aad diem Sor nnensd yale tee ms ors etn og aa Glnsy ets e ttt ore ei eat DUNE MEET O eas RUPEE MAUR Egy ie anes sa atte NU etayistarea ant Ma fap Wa ivy ymeay eo fd alai'g ey 0 ane al eee aga ihe yea Ban aca am dw oo andes tnt eeierhe tts hath sy ler aban : oe ave 4 OTe CCRT RATION MT CRETE DIY NN ST pects av td Ot? 4 aay) Sy eM ET eat yt alee aa afi ytagat pel eermiayar ie au Qe Roe gs retsQs AON} ne h NALS AT aC USOC RN HE EC a NN RO Se CROCS CRE REAR ICM MMC RC eee | ps den way hip guy Se aS tal ssa gh 8 ea A Veco Lea ragga aly et asin ea ny Ratchet it ie atin Oe een ICC a ne TAR CM a OE AUG opie nto eh ata) ty ytlgaty Sela sasety stg 9 it hetag 10 Oe ee eae ea RH eC ne aon en coral bebe belch Tah ate ata Fe liegt tee | DE DCN Soe iy We eve ae tee awe phe th sane Daya agg Wand eda y tron ratat at athe ryeupuned an iieyeasy'y: A NATih sles ii, CoENAC YI Kt DRE SC UNI ‘in ons $01 Ay a ain yo She's Mtg cleargt eM Nea had ahaa ae mein Ayia i Wiarton ag N eee Na iene ot hod al are reels ata aes la Par RATS SR) ) ‘ see ee ee ieee eatin tals cyt a nea at Vari Ales cant yen an in sates aon giacarts ota oye CNM RMT POR Ce UR HA PRE OCR en yay COON WEE TO Hal eta aim a tena ; PRICK NH ce Mice Cee IU Ca he HAC CHEE EC ARS Rt cca i oe . ROHR CORR CARR CT ACen HM pagal isessh mane wit i) arb wee oh eh See wneees Ny SOAR RCE Ca Sia Netueyctey. Maka uae ‘ AM “aijidly Mine doe la! Naty pantie aia an ‘ ert tdi reat “4 ‘ f Var AREA vfytaa aN e§ WAL asd ae om at tg DOOR MOCHA TSEC POH CAT CM MN A PH an tt ‘ tala ge Se ye Dey ete) sis WEF 15 # Arar a RR RUR TT RCC MPT eC GBT WY nrhiet ty ah Vinrmaatoyyt wie Ma in cates at eats ern ; ‘ cael lh bebe ah Sali ‘ ~4 11 rae ie taeee|billt Deere ttt aeasawctrtelgeryy 1 PATRAS LAA AAC AAO Ae Bs ec ratte cert “ oa vyitad yh NN shecaene a Ne rete * Si hsalecanied ape eres bat t Vey eat a A PST nae DOUCRN NOH, eee Al SH 4 \ EN eat west ah arena cd to tat came Meat edge ate tna ane thin Nodearh fe ped aag ite Pets EN atte AAR aaa RCE aN ELEM ly 4 Users bi, orn 7 Pali wet vole y \ aig ve ie RNR a neat MF ate ad gest Ga ar aidesiys ‘i peers i Hatg eyes aly atatitata wan sy iuts ert tend alae tts nce mature h mettesnl ives Cet 4 ‘ + A WA og rae ggg teat ¥) a Vorihe’ masta dey te i aH aa ats ‘ ahaha eye re GOR nnn enc Hd h, yee ag AUR RCH 4 PREC EICE SR GR Nt i HS MMP ohana yeaa SONNE ea AT i Ne a RCH AAACN ER NCHS f Ny . vente aay sty aga ge te ole raIMANTaTGA getty a he iat a4 ae at ara ae Sr eV re MH Pe Tee i 6 RA Li rer Bae ty pate ey yatta tate Hy Msevariobe ts ansengaah na ui ‘ am eee Teh Cea ARM EAL UA Ly OGal't Bates Pare Bra} bt S be ASA WAND ee atea te glen er ACO en te ae eens ety Fe alan ats ytat fy teat cicyeat) yh mu gts ie CANOLA LOU al eae ne te Nya a ety bea Kit Wabiart: ya tea en ba Patigte tata ith 4 i anise hte ay bal Buchs auth Rd aid yee wat! Hee AAO AA INA AS OM tO Cota, 8 a ne a eect nh oy gis Nai) BRE eee eSAURR ED any NCR Near aCe " ati ! aKa Af 1 Hi 7 ‘4 Tae ray a's Sand vey ay olan da’e aa a 4 vi aa Pang . aie . UA his sine cas HOC Many Va gyie ' ea SS ia Sgt estes Wea K Pht Beat Hye eay ay aK . a Hot UR ty ie ytit ha Hea i SRK ER LICR mien onan MH $ yey satya ak it Soha Reta i WAG ead 4 vet oy ‘ “ 4 oy RIC UC ee ee wi i fi BL 1-44 jailrbe palate va a aly 4 ee Nea Malate uacan aaecttre ROR NN Mee ae BANS HENS PAR ORT f y Patan i COST eee) MC VOOR Kn RG CA ML Waist | HOR AHR snes tie ge Wer ea se fos Va ad a, Pa dis hd ad sialranialosn ak CHAM Dera han Ae ‘ ayy Se pr in ice i EAE ON ERS MRT in a} tay 4 i emerge ‘ Vy a neigh ty CR KIM eg) i Rite pt eer wt be ‘ A} ‘ Debaani di bs sera Jay 424 ; Pity Thais iat ha Opes Weaadn en Whee Ants Aa) ane wy ptt tebe ie eet seen nsetd'a 4 \ ‘ Pe a rh) ihe ea 3 Mes Giiau ne A a ERO Rn Be A nies CONSNET A ty bred ie j : 5 1 Copper Boulders and Reaaid | in tie Drift Sg é : . 11 Local Sections and Details Be : : : . : 12 Drift Sections . 2 : F : ; 12 Vegetable Remains of the Drift . 3 : : : : 13 Animal Remains of the Drift . 15 Shells from the Drift and other Shynnieel Niaterials of one Nowianet - 16 Ancient Terraces and Ridges . : : : : 5 17 Glacial Strie .. ; ; ; : 22 Encroachment of the Water ayer the oer é : ; 0 24 Boulders moved by Ice . : a : 5 : 6 28 Lakes of Erosion : ; : 5 ; : : 29 ARTICLE IY. Grotoaicat REsEARCHES IN CHINA, MONGOLIA, AND JAPAN, DURING THE YzEARS 1862 ro 1865, By RapHarnt Pumpeniy. Pp. 170, Nine Plates and Highteen Wood-cuts. (Published August, 1866.) CuaptTer I. On the General Outlines of Hastern Asia j 1 Cuarter II. Geological Observations in the Basin of the ematia Kiang : : ; 4 CuHapTer III. Obser vesilon in the province of, Chili . : 10 Cuapter IV. Structure of the Southern Edge of the Great Table- em and of Northern Shansi and Chihli_ . : j : ; 25 1 Each memoir is separately paged and indexed. xiv TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE Cuarter V. The Delta-Plain and the Historical Changes in the Course of the Yellow River . 46 Cuarter VI. On the General Geology of China Proper; A Generaliza- tion Based on Observations, and on the Mineral Productions, and the Configuration of the Surface . : : : 51 Cuaarrer VII. The Sinian System of Pe yation : 67 CuHartTer VIII. Geological Sketch of the Route from the Gren Wall to the Siberian Frontier. : 70 Cuarter IX. Geological Itineraries of oernene on the Island of Ye sso in Northern Japan. F B : j mo Carrer X. Mineral Erednctions of Chins : 109 Apprenpix No. 1. Description of Fossil Plants from the Ohinese Glow Bearing Rocks. By J. 8S. Newberry, M.D. . ; 119 ApprenpDIx No. 2. Analyses of Chinese and Japanese Coals. By Temas A. Macdonald, M. A. 0 123 APPENDIX No. 3. etter from Mr. ie tiar Tied mderarde on the Wesulte of an Examination under the Microscope of some Japanese Infusorial Harths, and other Deposits of China and Mongolia . 9 5 LG ARTICLE V. PasystcaL OBSERVATIONS IN THE ARcTic Seas: By Isaac I. Haygs, M. D., Commanding Expedition. Map on tHE West Coast or NortH GREEN- LAND, THE VICINITY OF Smita SrRair AND THE West SIDE OF KENNEDY CHANNEL, DURING 1860 AND 1861. REDUCED AND DIscUSSED AT THE EXPENSE OF THE SMITHSONIAN INsTITUTION by CHARLES A. Scuort, Memb. Am. Phil. Soc. Philadelphia; Assistant U. S. Coast Survey. Pp. 286, Six Plates and Fourteen Wood-cuts. (Published June, 1867). Part I. Astronomical Observations . : : : F 1 Part II. Magnetic Observations " 5 5 : : 73 Part III. Tidal Observations . : 5 5 a 1 JB Part IV. Meteorological Observations 5 : : o> . Way APPENDIX : : Pa : : 3 6 A aoa ‘ : i ; = * : é ' ~ 1 Po 4 : - : t ‘ . - - ? . - e é ‘ : i : . ’ ml f 2 x e the "3c uf = ‘ S a j = ~ ‘ = A y ‘ i. = * 4 . f A - ye | t s { = ie i ' v es - ele ue Wey adh SMITHSONIAN CONTRIBUTIONS TO KNOWLEDGE. eS AN INVESTIGATION OF THE ORBIT OF NEPTUNE, WITH GENERAL TABLES OF ITS MOTION. BY SIMON NEWCOMB, S, UNIT S NAVY. [ACCEPTED FOR PUBLICATION, MAY , 1865.] COMMISSION TO WHICH THIS PAPER HAS BEEN REFERRED, Admiral C. H. Davis, U.S.N. Prof. STEPHEN ALEXANDER. JosrpH Henry, Secretary 8. I. COLLINS, PRINTER, PHILADELPHIA. — TABLE OF CONTENTS. CHAPTER I. INTRODUCTION. i Introductory remarks . 0 : 5 . Account of Walker’s theory : : : 0 . Account of Kowalski’s theory 6 0 . Form of Kowalski’s equations of condition, ond origin of the dificulties! owiehe from it . Objects of the present Anpestiwation ¢ : : c : : CHAPTER II. PROVISIONAL THEORY OF NEPTUNE. . Formule for the perturbations of longitude and radius vector . Formule for the perturbations of latitude . Secular variations : ; . Theory of the action of an inner on an enter sera hxerelb the Sun : . Development of the preceding theory according to the powers of the ratio of the mean motions . Method of treating the tone peried santauntbnitions of the Blemente produced by Uranus . Adopted elements, masses, end eomsitems of abeony, for perturbations . Computation of the perturbations by Uranus, Saturn, and Jupiter Action of Venus, the Earth, and Mars . Indirect pertur faassen by Saino . Collection of the long-period and secular enteaniatioms of the elements . Collection of the per éurbations of the co-ordinates—Comparison with Peirce and Kowalski . Formule for computing an ) ephemeri is . Elimination of the elliptic terms . . Elements and formule of the provisional anaes . Heliocentric and geocentric positions resulting from the aortstionel geome : CHAPTER IIT. DISCUSSIONS OF OBSERVATIONS OF NEPTUNE. . Choice of observations, and method of discussing them 2. Reduction of Lalande’s observations, May 8-10, 1795 . Probable error and value of the Lalande positions . . Method of treating the modern observations : : é . 25. Mean corrections of ephemerides of Neptune, given by different observatories . Investigation of the systematic differences between the results of different obser- vatories , PAGE 20 22 32 44 45 49 49 51 53 vi “OT. 28. TABLE OF CONTENTS. Concluded Normal Right Ascensions and Declinations Systematic discrepancies still remaining between different puibonities Longitudes and latitudes compared with the theory CHAPTER IV. PAGE 56 61 62 RESULTS OF THE COMPARISON OF THE THEORETICAL WITH THE OBSERVED POSITIONS OF 29. 30. 31. 382. 33. 34. 35. 36. 37. 38. ay oJ. NEPTUNE. Formule for corrections of the elements Equations of condition—Method of treating them . Solution of the equations—Residual errors Impossibility of correcting the mass of Uranus Impossibility of yet detecting an extra-Neptunian llama henast pean ets fecord: ance of theory with Smemnsiion during the nineteen years of observations Position of the plane of the orbit Concluded corrections and final values of the dlemems of Nene CHAPTER V. TABLES OF NEPTUNE. Fundamental theory on which the tables are founded . Data given in the several tables 0 : : Bllermacmnterey precepts for the use of the fables : ; : Examples of the use of the tables : . . Tables : , ° : : . . . 76 77 82 84 88-110 —— ON THE ORBIT OF NEPTUNE CHAPTER IL. INTRODUCTION. Tue errors of the published ephemerides of Neptune are now increasing very rapidly. In 1863, Walker’s ephemeris was in error by 33’, and Kowalski’s by 22’. Both ephemerides may be 5’ in error before the end of the present century. The orbit of this planet is, therefore, more uncertain than that of any other of the larger members of our system. The uncertainty arises from the insufficiency of the data at the command of those astronomers who have hitherto investigated the motions of this planet. These motions are so slow that it is impossible to determine the elements of the orbit with accuracy from observations extending through only a few years. In Walker's investigations the errors of observation are multiplied more than a hundred times in the elements deduced from them, on account of the smallness of the arc through which the planet had moved. The time has now come when the orbit can be determined with some approach to accuracy. The planet has moved through an arc of nearly 40° since its dis- covery, and the errors of observation will be multiplied only ten or twelve times in the errors of the elements. In commencing the work of a revision of the theory of Neptune, it will be well to glance at the past and present state of our know- ledge on this subject. Approximate elements of this planet, neglecting the effect of perturbations, were computed by several astronomers within a year or two after its discovery. But the work of preparing a theory which should include the perturbations produced by all the other planets seems to have been left entirely in the hands. of Professor Peirce and Mr. Sears C. Walker. § 2. All the first approximations to the elements showed that the mean motion was very nearly half that of Uranus. It was, therefore, for some time doubtful whether the mutual action of the two planets might not be such as to render the period of Neptune exactly double that of Uranus, and thus present us, on a much grander scale, with a phenomenon similar to that exhibited by the satellites of Jupiter. Professor Peirce’s first perturbations of Neptune were computed on this hypothesis, and published in the Monthly Notices of the Royal Astronomical Society, Vol. VIII, p.40. The eccentricity of Neptune was neglected, but that of the disturbing planets was included in the perturbations, With these perturbations, the ancient observations of Lalande, and the vast number of modern observations made in nearly every active observatory in the world during 1846 and 1847, Mr, Walker computed his “ Elliptic Elements I.” of 1 May, 1865. 1 2 THE ORBIT OF NEPTUNE. Dies Neptune. The longitude of perihelion referred to the mean Equinox of Jan. 1 1847, eccentricity, and mean daily motion were as follows: 2 Gi = ABO TI? DOS: e = .00857741. = 21".55448. This mean motion rendered it certain that the supposed relation between the mean motions of the planets Uranus and Neptune had no foundation in fact. Professor Peirce thereupon revised his theory, and published the new perturb- ations in the Proceedings of the American Academy, Vol. I, p. 286. The near approach to commensurability of the mean motions renders the general theory of the mutual action of Uranus and Neptune extremely complex. Twice the mean motion of the latter exceeds that of the former by only 320” according to Walker, or 304” according to my first revision of his elements. The terms in the perturbations which contain this very small quantity as a divisor will, therefore, be very large. Considered as perturbations of the elements, their period will be more than years. We have an analogous instance in the 900 year equation of Jupiter and Saturn. But in the latter case the perturbations of the mean motion are of the third order with respect to the eccentricities and inclinations, while in Uranus and Neptune they are of the first order. From this circumstance it happens that, notwithstanding the smaller masses of the dis- turbing planets, the perturbation of the mean motion is as great in the case of the planets in question as in that of Jupiter and Saturn, and that of the other elements enormously greater. In fact, the perihelion of Neptune oscillates through a space of eight degrees in consequence of the terms in question. Such a perturb- ation as this, four degrees on each side of the mean, is, I think, found nowhere else in our system. Moreover, a change of 1” in the mean motion of the planet will produce a change of nearly 2’ in the coefficient of this perturbation. Any attempt to determine its magnitude with accuracy will, therefore, be hopeless. But the difficulties connected with these terms can be avoided in the case of a theory which is designed to be exact for a period of only a few centuries. Not- withstanding the great magnitude of the general integrals of the perturbations, if we take these integrals between limits not exceeding a couple of centtries, we shall find them so small as not to involve serious difficulty. Their effect on the co-ordinates can then be developed in powers of the time, and the values thus obtained will not be subject to any uncertainty of moment. This is substantially the course adopted by Professor Peirce. He says of the terms in question : “These coefficients will vary very sensibly by a change in the value of the mean motion of Neptune, arising from a more accurate determination of its orbit. But the principal effect of these terms can for a limited period, such as a century, for instance, be included in the ordinary forms of elliptic motion, and the residual portion will assume a secular form which is no more liable to change from a new correction of the mean motion of Neptune than the other small coefficients of the equations of perturbations.” Accordingly, subducting from the terms in question a series of expressions THE ORBIT OF NEPTUNE. 3 which would result from arbitrary changes in the elliptic orbit, there is left a small residual, mostly developed in powers of the time, and only amounting to a few seconds in a century, which alone is retained. With the new perturbations, and revised normal places of Neptune, Mr. Walker obtained the following final set of elements, which he denominated Elliptic Ele- ments II.: gh = BOUL WW) OTS 0420-8 € = 328) 32 44 .20 Cs 146 O38 9K e = .00871946. fe = 21’.50448. Hpoch, Jan.1, 1847. From these elements and perturbations we have a continuous ephemeris of Neptune since the time of its optical discovery. From 1846 till 1851 inclusive, this ephemeris is found in the Appendix to Vol. II of the Smithsonian Contri- butions to Knowledge; for 1852, im Vol. III of the same series, and also in the Astronomical Journal; and for subsequent years, in the American Ephemeris and Nautical Almanac. All the modern observations on which these elements were founded were made in the years 1846-47, while the planet was moving over an arc of only two and a half degrees. Considering that the complete determination of the elements requires, effectively, four observed longitudes, all in different parts of the orbit, and that three of these positions are included in a space of less than three degrees, it must be admitted that an accurate determination of the elements was, under the circumstances, impossible, owing to the imperfections of the observations. As already remarked, the errors of observation would be multiplied several hundred times in the elements. Hence, with the best possible observations, the elements would be uncertain by one or more minutes. But the observations themselves were mainly differential ones; and it is very doubtful whether the positions of the stars of comparison were as well determined as the position of the planet itself could be determined by a series of good meridian observations. § 3. The theory of Neptune was next taken up by Professor Kowalski, of the University of Kasan. His work was published under the title of “Recherches sur les mouvements de Neptune, suivées des tables de cette planéte, Kasan, 1855.” The long-period perturbations of the elements are here developed, in their general form, as perturbations of the co-ordinates. There are, therefore, a much larger number of terms having large coefficients in this theory than in that of Professor Peirce. Owing to this change in the form of the perturbations, the two theories cannot be directly compared. But the ephemerides resulting from each theory can be compared directly with observation, and corrections of the elements thence ob- tained. It is thus found that the elements in question require, approximately, the following corrections. in order that the ephemerides may agree with obser- vations to 1865: 4 THE ORBIT OF NEPTUNE. Theory of Walker. Theory of Kowalski. bs 421” poy e de —0 052 —0 051 OE —0 3 6 — 2 03 on — 8.4 | — 8.9 Thus, it seems that the theory of Kowalski is, on the whole, no nearer the truth than that of Walker, although it was founded on observations up to 1853, when the planet had moved through an are of sixteen degrees since its optical discovery.* The cause of this failure to derive a more accurate result is an accidental mistake in the computation of the perturbations of the radius vector by Jupiter, as I have more fully pointed out in the Monthly Notices of the Royal Astronomical Society for December, 1864. § 4. The form which Professor Kowalski finds his equations of condition to assume is illustrative of an interesting and important principle of the method of least squares. By the comparison of his provisional theory with observations, forty-four equations of condition are obtained for the corrections of the four elements 7, e, ¢, and v. It is then inquired whether it is possible to determine the orbit of Neptune from the modern observations alone, omitting that of La- lande, the planet having moved through an arc of sixteen degrees. Treating the equations derived from the modern observations alone by the method of least squares, four normal equations are obtained. Two of these equations are, omitting the terms involving the correction of the mass of Uranus, which we do not need, — 10.4994 dn — 21.2661 de + 13.0088 eda + 40.2211 de = — 324”.65, 26.9661 dn — 73.2702 de + 40.2211 eda + 139.9967 de = — 886 .63 and the other two can be transformed into the following : — 10.4994 dn — 21.2661 de + 13.0073 eda + 40.2219 de = — 324.50, — 26.9661 dn — 73.2702 de + 40.2219 eda + 140.0009 de = — 886.7 It will be seen that the last two equations are very nearly identical with the first two. Hence it is concluded that the modern observations alone give only two independent relations between the four unknown quantities sought, and do not suffice, therefore, to determine the elements of Neptune. Now, the identity in question does not prove that the modern observations are insufficient to determine the elements, because it is the necessary result of the mode of treating equations of the kind in question by the method of least squares. This can be most easily shown by a theorem in determinants. By the elementary principle of determinants, if we have a number of linear equations between the same number of unknown quantities, of the form * The differences of the two values of dr and de, which are so small, do not correctly represent the absolute differences of the two theories, owing to the great difference of longitude of perihelion in the two theories proceeding from the different forms given to the perturbations. The real difference Kowalski—Walker is given by the equations desint=+ 177, 0.e cos 7 = — 13. THE ORBIT OF NEPTUNE. 5 ac+by+ez+ete..... =n, aye + by + e2+ete..... =m, ete. etc. etc. ete. etc. ; each unknown quantity is given in the form A A, A, oi R Ny —+- 7 Nz + R nN; + etc., in which & represents the determinant formed from all the coefficients a, 6, ete. in the given equations, and A,, A,, etc. the partial determinants, obtained by omitting column a, row 1, column a, row 2, etc. If, now, the number of equations is greater than that of the unknown quantities, and they are solved by the method of least squares, the form of the solution will be the same as the above, except that for & will be substituted the sum of the squares of all the determinants f, formed by solving separately every combination of such number of the given equations as is equal to the number of unknown quantities, and for A,, A,, ete., certain powers and products of the partial deter- minants which enter into the separate solutions. Hence, if these determinants are very small, the corresponding determinants in the solution by least squares will be very small quantities of the second order. But the determinants will all be very small if the equations are nearly equivalent to a number less than that of the unknown quantities; that is, if they can be put into the form AC= ibe Nee = Wee aX-—-GY+yZ- ete. +9 =m, HACE (BY CAG AOS, SA) ie Cu, CW CW Cw Cue, Gwe the quantities X, Y, Z, etc. being less in number than the unknown quantities, and p being a very small linear function of the unknown quantities. If the p’s vanish, all the determinants will vanish with it; whence, if they are very small, the determinants will be very small likewise. Calling a system of equations identical when they really give fewer independent relations than there are un- known quantities, the theorem sought may be expressed as follows : Tf a system of equations differ from identity by a very small quantity, the normal equations derived from them will be identical to small quantities of the second order. Hence, if such a system of equations is to be solved by least squares, it will be necessary to carry the solution to nearly twice as many decimals as are necessary in the original coefficients. Thus, in the case under consideration, as Professor Kowalski considered it necessary to retain four places of decimals in the coefficients of the unknown quantities, it would have been necessary to include at least six or seven decimals in the normal equations, instead of only four. But the necessity for so long a numerical calculation can be avoided by a suitable transformation of the equations of condition. If the equations are identical, they really give certain linear functions of the unknown quantities less in number 6 THE ORBIT OF NEPTUNE. than the unknown quantities. We may then substitute these linear functions themselves in place of an equal number of the unknown quantities. If the equations are not absolutely identical, the coefficients of the other unknown quan- tities will not entirely vanish by the substitution, and thus we shall still have the whole number of unknown quantities, only the coefficients of certain of them will be very small. The solution by least squares can then be performed without trouble, because the extra decimals will be necessary only in multiplying by the very small coefficients, when they can be introduced with ease. Afterward the values of the original unknown quantities can be deduced from those of the linear functions, and the unknown quantities which have been retained. Suppose, for example, that the equations of condition are aext+ by t+ezg= ny aye + by + 6.2 = nz ase + byy + 632 = irs ae + by + e214, ° ° ° 0 oF by are Che — Ny A simple inspection, or, at least, an attempt to solve three of the most diverse of the equations, will show if the given m equations are really equivalent to only one or two. Then we should put X= ax + By + yz Yoox+ Py +yz the coefficients a, 2, y, being entirely arbitrary, and so taken that when Y and Y were substituted for # and y the coefficients of z should be as small as possible. It would conduce to simplicity if a and 3, or a’ and @, could each be made zero, which could always be done. If we attempt to correct the elements of a planet’s orbit by observations extending over only a few degrees, the equations of condition will necessarily be of the kind referred to. Hence a transformation of this kind will be advisable. An example will be given in the correction of the orbit of Neptune from observation. § 5. Ten years have elapsed since the publication of Kowalski’s theory, and no general revision of the orbit has been published by any astronomer, so far as the writer is aware. The observations which have accumulated in the mean time would seem sufficient to fix the elements exactly enough to give the place of the planet within 5” during the remainder of the present century. It is, therefore, proposed, 1. To determine the elements of the orbit of Neptune with as much exactness as a series of observations extending through an are of forty degrees will admit of. 2. To inquire whether the mass of Uranus can be concluded from the motions of Neptune. THE ORBIT OF NEPTUNE. vi - ae 3. To inquire whether those motions indicate the action of an extra-Neptunian planet, or throw any light on the question of the existence of such a planet. 4. To construct general tables and formule by which the theoretical place of Neptune may be found at any time, and, more particularly, at any time Between the years 1600 and 2000. In giving the steps of an investigation like this, the true end should be to furnish the means whereby every step can be corrected, or verified if already correct, and to start only from admitted data. Sometimes a result will necessarily depend, to a certain extent, on an act of judgment, as in assigning relative values to different determinations of the same element. In this case data should be given for a revision of the judgment, as far as this may be thought desirable. Such, with very few exceptions, is the rule adhered to in the present paper. The data are the published volumes of astronomical observations, and the funda- mental formulee of celestial mechanics. The steps will nearly or quite always be so short that any one may be verified from the preceding one without much labor. The author is indebted to the courtesy of the Astronomer Royal, of the late Captain James M. Gilliss, and of Professor G. W. Hough, for the observations made at Greenwich, Washington, and Albany in the years 1863 and 1864, which have added greatly to the reliableness of the results of his investigation. Wasuincton, April, 1865. THE ORBIT OF NEPTUNE. eZ CHAPTER IL. PROVISIONAL THEORY OF NEPTUNE. § 6. Att the perturbations have been computed by formule founded on the method of La Grange; the development of the perturbative function in scries, and the variation of arbitrary constants. The following notation is used : 2 =mean longitude. 4 = mean longitude, counted from ascending node of inner clunit on outer one. @ = inclination of orbit to the ecliptic. y = mutual inclination of two orbits to each other. a =ratio of the mean distances. usin }y. j = mean anomaly. @ = distance of the perihelion from the ascending node of the inner planet on the outer one. For the other elements the almost universal notation of astronomers is adopted. The elements which pertain to the outer planet (Neptune) are distinguished by an accent. The potential of the disturbing force exerted by one planet upon another, usually called the perturbative function, may be developed into an infinite series of terms, each of which shall be of the form h ; : : : m 7 cos (1 + 1A + Jo! + jo) in which %, 7’, 7, and 7’ are numerical coefficients. is a function of the ratio of the mean distances, the eccentricities, and the mutual inclination of the orbits. Then, by the theory of the variation of arbitrary constants, any term of the perturbative function in the action of an inner on an outer planet will cause the following differential variations of the four elements which determine the form of the orbit, and the position of the planet in it. Putting tH + 12+ 7o' + jo = N, e=siny, g =cosy tan id; da ! i we have = =— 2miha'n' sin N, dé’ Tain | feb eh + 05 wa | oO (1) a dé = mah | J cot Y + vg sin NV, dx dh yp = mn cot V Te °8 N. ° THE ORBIT OF NEPTUNE. 9 From the first equation and the relation between the mean distance and mean motion, we obtain dn! ai d= 3 mn” vh sin N. These equations are entirely rigorous, provided that we regard the elements in the second member as variable. But they can be integrated only by successive approximations. In a first approximation the elements are regarded as constant Equations similar to (1) for the elements of all the planets whose action is taken into account being integrated in this way, the resulting values may be substituted in the second members of (1), and a new integration be performed. In the case of Neptune, however, the variations of the elements are so slow that a single approximation will be amply sufficient for a period of several cen- turies, provided that we adopt suitable values of the elements in the second members; that.is, if we add such constants to the integrals that the latter shall , all for th t time. Putting y=" be very small for the present time. Putting v Tsoi we shall have, on the supposition that the elements as they enter into the second member are constant, logd@ =mvA cos N+ a, e¢ =mvE cos N+ ey, (2) V=mLsin N+ nit +e wv =myWsin N+ x, A, L, E,and W being given by the equations Arles th dh oe ee L=—3tyh+2h+ Oa to ae H=—h(jctY+79), (3) ,ah W=coty ae a, n', &, &>, and 7, are arbitrary constants, dependent on the position and velo- - city of the planet at a given epoch. «a and ™ are, however, dependent on each other. For the perturbations of the true longitude in orbit, and the logarithm of the radius vector, we shall have, omitting accents, 6vu= Ol +m {eL—eW— FE} sin(N— f) —temyr {eL—eW—3E} sin(N—/S) +my {eL—eW— E} sin(N+ f) —temyr {eL—eW+3E£} sin(N+/) + femv {eL—eW— E} sin(N—2/f) — ete. + femy {eL—eW+ E}sin(N-+ 2/) (4) ¥emy { el —eW— E} sin(N—3/) ¥emy {eL—eW + E£} sin(N-+ 3/) wv e'my { eL—eW— EL} sin(N—4 f/f) +- etc. 2 May, 1865. 10 THE ORBIT OF NEPTUNE. dlogr=dloga + my {2th+}ceH—téE } cos N — em { eL—eW—3E ' cos (N—/S) +4mv { eL—eW— FE }cos(N— f) + %e’my {eL—eW-+ 3E}cos(N+/) —imv{eL—eW+E}cos(N+ /f) — ete. +temy { eL—eW— E\ cos(N— 2/) (5) —femv{eL—eW + E}cos(N + 2f) emy { eL—eW— E } cos (N— 3 /f) — ete. By these formule all the perturbations of the longitude and radius vector have been computed, except that the computation was so conducted as to reject all terms above a certain order with respect to the eccentricities. The sum of all the factors (functions of the ratio of the mean distance) of any power of the eccentricity in any coefficient in the perturbations of the co-ordinates will generally be much smaller than each individual factor, as we shall presently show. If, for example, we have wre (ft+f+/") sn NV the sum f+ /’+//” will, in general, nearly destroy itself, being much smaller than the individual components, f, /’,and /”. Hence, if the computation is arranged so as to include any one of the /’s, it should include all. This end may be attained by omitting from h, its differential coefficients, and / cot, all terms of a higher order with respect to the eccentricities than the assigned limit. Thus, / being of the form hae (4, +e? x, +etx,+...} if we limit ourselves to the power s + 1, we should put B= Ca ahs = lo Oa, da da dh pai Gx natn Ge: x, + (s+ 2) ¢ Ko sh cot» = se*—' x, + ses +? (—}%, +x). § 7. Perturbations of latitude. The equations which determine the change in the plane of a planet’s orbit are dy an dk dt ~ sng’cosY dg’. dp an dk (6) di — sing’cosy di’ FR being a function of A, 4’, a, a’, and y, each of which depends on the position of the plane of the orbit, we have dR dRdz dRdo , dk dy dR do , dk dy dg’ da dy! da de ' dv dg * da dy’ * dy dy’ dR dkddz ,dkRdo ,_dRdv dR da , dk dy di ~ daz dt ' do dv a dx dd’ 7h dw do’ ' dy do’ THE ORBIT OF NEPTUNE. 11 The values of the second of each pair of differential coefficients can easily be determined geometrically. A, a, 4’, etc., it will be remembered, represent the dis- tance of certain points on each orbit from the ascending node of the disturbing planet on the disturbed one: the infinitesimal changes in those quantities, produced by infinitesimal changes in the position of the plane of either orbit, will be due entirely to the changes in the position of that node. Let us put x’ = distance of common node from ascending node of disturbed planet on the ecliptic. x —=same quantity for disturbing planet. By drawing the diagram, it will readily be seen that by a change in ¢’ the common node will be moved forward on the disturbed planet by the amount + sin x’ cot yd¢9’, and on the disturbing planet by the amount + sin x’ cosec ydq’, while y will be varied by the amount — cos xdq’. Tn like manner, by a change in 6’, the corresponding changes will be — cos x’ sin @ cot ydé’, — cos x sin ¢ cosec yd’, — sin x sin ¢'di’. We therefore have CG GS he meee dai — dq’ =— sin x’ cot y, dx doa : dq’ = da =— sin x cosec y, IL @BY Al? Giles sing’ di’ ~ sing’ di’ IL ai 1 da sing’ dé’ = sin @’ de’ = COS x’ coset Y, dy dy _ dy Chay sin 9’ d6’ = cos x’ cot y, = — Fn 4, — COs x’; Also, by the differentiation of the representative term of F, que tiple qe | Giles ay Soe ae N, Tw oe N, dk mih . di ey myl.. A= a Io = a a EE eT Te ee vy con Ny * dy ~ du dy a du 12 THE ORBIT OF NEPTUNE. Substituting these expressions for the differential coefficients in the values of ah and = we have dq dg’ dk im dh datas thsi x sin V {(v’ +’) cot y + (¢-+7) cosec y } — la da (Os tY CO8* cos NV. IL Gye 3 m dh ano) a nhecos x’sin V{ (v’-+-7') coty + ((+J) cosecy }—3 7 Tu oo hysinz’cos NV. Let us now put Coa Ca It may be remarked that 1 will then be the coefficient of the longitude of the common node of the orbits in the usual development of the perturbative function. The above equations may then be put into the form dR th ag alae th cosec 7 sin x’ sin NZ +7’) h tan dy sin x sin NV — ea a cos 1 y cos x’ cos NV. 1 dR th ) ne ae! Tal ar eh cosee C08! sin V + a + j’) h tan 4 7 cos x ‘sin N— 377 5 cos by sin x cos N. Substituting these expressions in (6), and integrating, we shall have the values of 60’ and d¢’, the perturbations of the inclination and node. For the perturbations of the latitude, counted in the direction perpendicular to the plane of the orbit, we shall have 0’ = 69’ sin (v' — 6’) — sin P56’ cos (v’ — #) = my secy {T+ I\ sin (N+ V) (7) + my sec Y {T—T} sin (V— DV) Where dh ae Dh 7 C845 I=th {cicosecy + (’ +7’) tant y} V=true distance of planet from common node. Putting B,=T-+ 1; BR=T—TL, and developing Vin terms of A and f to terms of the second order with respect to the eccentricity, we shall have (1—e”) sin (V+) (1 —e”) sin (V—A) + ¢sn(N+A+ /) + eé sin(N—a— /) 68 =mvB, (— e sin(N+aA— f)\ +mrvB, (— e sin(N—A+ /)) (8) + 3e?sin (V+2-+ 2/) + 2e? sin (N—A—2/) —{e’sin (V+ A—2/) —1e? sin (V—~ + 2/) Pe THE ORBIT OF NEPTUNE. 13 For the perturbations of the constants which determine the position of the orbit, we put p=sin osin 6; q=sin > cos 0; ¢t = longitude of common node of the two orbits. We then have dp’ =2 my {Isin c cos N— Tcosz sin NV} ; d¢ = 2 mr {Tcos¢ cos N+ Tsin ¢ sin Af}. (9) Or, dp’ = myv{(I—T) sin (N+7) — (+ T) sin (V—z)}; og = mv{(I—T) cos (N+ 7) + (+7) cos (VN—z)}; § 8. The equations (2) and (9) determine the periodic perturbations of the elements. For the secular variations, which proceed from those terms of the perturbative in which both 7 and 7 are zero, the same expressions apply, only changing ysin Ninto mnitcosN; v cos Vinto — nt sin N. We therefore have, for the secular variations, dv ; La I, cos N; dé : : dae KH, sin NV; dz! : = “ea Ml W,cos NV; (10) dp’ é : : om {fsin¢ sin V+ T cos 7 cos N}; dq seed : 3 dp = me {f, cost sin N— T, sin t cos NV}. Owing to the smallness of the eccentricity of Neptune, it will be advisable to substitute the rectangular co-ordinates of the centre of its orbit for the eccentri- city and longitude of perihelion. The perihelion itself is subject to changes so great that it would otherwise be necessary to develop the perturbations to quantities of a higher order than the first. We shall, therefore, put h=esin7; k=ecosx. For the secular variations of h and &, we then have, to a sufficient degree of approximation, = mn’ & Wy cos (N+ 7) ; dik (a) i= mie W, sin (N+7’). § 9. Development of the action of an ianer on outer planet through the Sun. The perturbations which one planet produces on another may be divided into two distinct parts. 14 THE ORBIT OF NEPTUNE. 1. Those produced by their direct attraction on each other. 2. Those produced by the displacement of the Sun by the attraction of the disturbing planet. The co-ordinates of the disturbed planet being counted from the centre of the Sun, the displacement of the Sun not only changes the value of the co-ordinates by changing their origin, but also Dy modifying the attraction of the Sun itself. The perturbations of both classes may be included in the same formule, and the total perturbations computed in the same way that those of the first class are, by a very simple modification of those functions of the ratio of the mean distances which enter into the different values of h. But in the case of the action of an inner on an outer planet more than twice as far from the Sun, this method will be subject to this serious inconvenience; that the perturbations of the elements are many times greater than those of the co-ordinates. Referring to formulee (4) and (5), it will be remembered that L, H, and W really express per- turbations of the mean longitude, perihelion, and eccentricity, and it will be seen that the perturbations of the true longitude dv are expressed as a function of the perturbations of those elements. Now, having in this way computed the perturb- ations of any co-ordinate which depend upon the different terms of the perturbative function, when we collect those coefficients which are multiplied by the sine or cosine of identical angles, we shall frequently find that their sum will nearly vanish, as has been already remarked. As this circumstance depends on a theorem of some importance, which will furnish a valuable check on the developments we shall presently give, it is worth while to trace it to its origin. The elements of a planet depend on its position and its velocity at a given epoch; each element is a function of the co-ordinates, their differential coefficients, and the time, or, representing an element by a, and putting, for shortness, dx E=ap ates. we have six equations of the form On, =) (@ Y i) & Ny & t) (12) When we express the co-ordinates as a function of the elements and the time, we have ‘ Pi 9) ©, Y, OL =H (My May As, As sy Ue, t) (13) Substituting for the elements the values just given, &, 7, and ¢ must vanish iden- tically in the value of each co-ordinate. If, now, the changes in &, », and @ are of a higher order of magnitude than those in a, y, and z, the co-ordinates will be subject to smaller variations than the elements. Suppose, now, that one of the co-ordinates is affected with an imequality of which the period is very short compared with that of the revolution of the planet. Represent it by csin (pnt+e). Its differential coefficient will be pne cos (pnt +e). e : z, ) ty THE ORBIT OF NEPTUNE. 15 Since the elements contain this coefficient, and therefore include terms in which the large number p multiplies the coefficient of the angle, their perturbations will be much larger than that of the co-ordinate. But, in passing from the perturb- ations of the elements to those of the co-ordinates, these large terms must destroy each other. Let us apply this principle to the case under consideration. That portion of the perturbative function which arises from the action of an inner planet on the Sun may be developed in a series of terms of the form mec * Q ae °o (WN +2+4+ C); ¢ representing a number, not a line. It therefore becomes infinite when a is infinitely small. The second differential coefficient of the perturbation of any rectilineal co- ordinate of the outer planet will be of the order of magnitude dR _ me Cle? “ar cos N, putting N=IVN +704 C. If we integrate this differential, and develop the quantity aaa according to UT tae Bi @ the largest terms in the first differential coefficient of the a’ r co-ordinates will be of the form nv the powers of = mec oseeL ta2 sin NV. This also will become infinite when a is infinitely small; and since the perturb- ations of the elements contain these terms, it follows that they also will be infinite in this case. Finally, by another integration, we shall have for the largest per- turbations of the co-ordinate itself med = COS ANG which will vanish when a is infinitely small. Hence, in the case under consider- ation, although the perturbations of the elements become infinite, those of the co-ordi- nates vanish. The co-ordinates referred to are linear. The order of magnitude of the angular co-ordinates, or the logarithms of any linear co-ordinate, will be given by dividing by @. We shall, therefore, have for largest term in the perturbations dv, 63, or § log 7 = mca ee WY. cos Hence, when we collect the perturbations of the co-ordinates due to the cause in question, all terms of a higher order of magnitude than this ought to destroy each other identically. 16 THE ORBIT OF NEPTUNE, § 10. That portion of the perturbative function which is due to the action of the inner planet on the sun is 7 = cos V ra V being the angular distance between the planets. Developing it in a series of terms of the form : Hoes : << cos (VA + 74 + J’o' + jo) h will be of the form = e being a numerical coefficient, multiplied by powers of the eccentricities and mutual inclinations. From this development, and the equations (3), (4), (5), (7), and (8), I have computed the following analytical values of the coefficients for the perturbations of the longitude, latitude, and logarithm of radius vector. ai ov =e oa V® sin N© m dlogr= oa > R® cos N® (16) m tage one = oa > B® sin NO VO = (t—w— se’) (By? + 2r, + 3y, + 5) + ¢? (—8 rp? —4tr,4+3 0,7 — —2,— 3+ V3) Vo == CCG ( 6 v + 3 V2 + Ca 0 V3 + 3Vg+ 1 Vy) Vo = (— 6 Vs? + 4 V3 et 2 Vv» ware: 6 V4) VO S=@ (— ao — ay == 2%, U5 4 42) VS Ce i( Bue + 8% + Brf+ Fy, +P + 3m.) (17) VO —é ( a Dy = at Ve + ay Vo == a V6) Yes (5 ar Oo a ePone f 2) VO = ee (— $x, — br + 93— Sunt Mr) Ve — é (— ves i — 3 Vy — 2 Ue 13 V5, = 2 ye ay SP t V9) PO aac | oe +159, +397, + 8r2+5, +37 v i + 2 43 + 2 rp) ViPS ( 3%5 + 2%5,— 3ry+ vy) ‘ RY =(1l—w —ie) (—2 Vy —3r,+47;) He (EM + EMr EMS — FEMA 3 Met 3 Ms) RR?) — e” R™ — ue R® =e (— Oy 3 v3) SO ap UR V1) s 130) == 2 ( + 49, — 30 IE ag (0 Aap Peas Boh ae By a we Phe! Ro =e (— SoP— 3% — $y — 2H, + FM) (18) 12) Se (— 20 y— -- a vy — $i V6) EO EG ( stg 2p —= PAP ae V7) RY =e ( Buy + 8r2— f23+ Font+ Fn) RPP ( doPt 2m +3hm +42, — Font Fr) Gat 2 4 sea een bala THE ORBIT OF NEPTUNE. 7% BO =u (— 4—:;) JB ue (— %—8%+ %5—+F¥n) (19) OR Vie, (— OF lp ee Ua V5) B® =ue( 23 — Zr) The values of V® are as follows: WO = nN—A u Ne 2N—2A—oa+a N® = —W+2A—o: INO) = A — a! NO= 2H7—1A —wa IO) == — FWP SE BA La? == Wea IO = A+ —20 IO SS BSN SO NO = —7W+ 321—20 ICO) VN+A —2a NO= 2141—o0a —a ND Ne) — 2a’ N|O=~ 3N—A —2a’ ICD) Se A+ a (20) NGS) WHA NO= 3A4—o’ —2o0 DOs BM ae Ih =a = 2G Ne) = V+ 2A4—20'—a NM—=~ 2V+A —3a’ N= 4NV—17 —3a!’ NM= 2V1A —a INO a TOM VN+A —da IY N—A —v NO a PA —— From these values of V the corresponding values of y are derived, remembering that ‘ me Tr Mars Un + im 7 and 7 being the coefficients of 2’ and 4 respectively in the value of WN. The check on the correctness of the preceding values of V, #, and B may now be applied by developing v in powers of = and retaining only the first term; that is, by putting y = = v?=0. Making these substitutions, all the values of V, R, and Bwill be found to vanish. In other words, «’ will be the lowest power of u which will enter into the values of V, F, or B, as we have already shown from a priori considerations. For convenience, we shall give the values of V, 2, and B developed according to the powers of u, the ratio of the mean motions, a form similar to that in which the lunar inequalities are developed in the theory of the moon. Putting 105 we have {l— su+ el — sue+ etc.} vo a{l—2su4 39? — 4 s'u* + etc.} z 3 May, 1865. 18 THE ORBIT OF NEPTUNE. We shall also put Vi eV Kh = 2 a R R R= =S ) ae i B=2= 9; Qa c being a constant, equal to unity if we neglect the change of mean distance pro- duced by the action of other planets. We then have dv = mact V, sin N, 6 logr = mac R, cos N, (21) 68 = mac>B, sin N. Substituting the above developments for the v’s in V, R, and B, we have VO =Q—v —4e)(—1— 2@— 6 w — 19 2) 4+ 2 (1— 2? — 30 2’) VA eee? (EP) V© =e yap uth eihse ate) Wad (— $+ WH Duet Bu) VO =e (— 3— 8W— 27 — 155 4’) (22) VO =e B+ ape gee’) mmae (— fa bet Fe) VS eC (gece) yl a sas) WCC tae ee ee) YA® = e? (— Wy sub) 2.3 we 255 u’) z LY =1—w— fe’) 1— 2 —6 f — 14 uw — 801’) +e (—1—4 @ — 24 w’) TEN tc ees ie (Eee () ie (yo Re aie) IPO) ag (2 Le Die 6u?— 17 4u') IO) (RE BP Bi) 9 TG 8) (23) RO =P ( 3—BwW— He) OBE A ee ae) RY =e (— f— FW — 3’) RP=P(— t— 2+ Be) ROP (tr — Bp? — 495 ui) RO = wv ( nena) uw + 14 w’) BO= u(2+2W+ 24) BO=edul+4wWl— 6p’) (24) BOz=eu(1+4w— 6p’) BO seu (1+ due + ae) eee THE ORBIT OF NEPTUNE. 19 Such are the formuls by which we shall proceed to compute the perturbations of Neptune by Jupiter, Saturn, and Uranus. It will be noticed that the coefficient of « vanishes identically in the last de- velopments. I have not completely investigated this law, but it seems to arise from the circumstance that that portion of the perturbation in question which proceeds from the change in the origin of co-ordinates is independent of u, while that portion which is caused by the modified attraction of the Sun is of the order of magnitude uw’. It furnishes a yet more valuable check than the last on the developments. § 11. Allusion has already been made to the complications introduced into the theory of Neptune by the near approach of its mean motion to double that of Uranus, and the consequent oscillation of all the elements of its orbit in a cycle of 4300 years of duration. In order to construct a dynamical theory which should be correct within a tenth of a second through the whole of one of these cycles, it would be necessary to include many terms dependent on the second, and perhaps some dependent on the third power of the masses of the disturbing planets. If this task were accomplished, the necessary uncertainty in the mass of Uranus and the elements of Neptune would destroy all the value of the theory. A change of one-tenth in the mass of Uranus would produce a change of 200” in the co- efficient of the perturbation of the mean longitude. The mean motions of Walker and Kowalski being each about 8” in error, the place of the planet from this cause alone would be in error by nearly 10° at the end of a cycle. After much careful consideration of different ways of relieving the theories of Uranus and Neptune from the complexities introduced by the large perturbations referred to, I finally determined to develop them not as perturbations of the co- ordinates, but of the elements. It will readily be seen that if the eccentricity or perihelion is greater than the mean during several revolutions of the planet, there will be a perturbation in the radius vector and longitude having nearly the same period with the reVolution of the planet, although the latter may really scarcely wander from a true elliptic orbit during an entire revolution. In such a case it is clearly best, in constructing a theory designed to remain of the highest degree of exactness for only a few centuries, to take not the mean values of the elements, but their values at a particular epoch during the time the theory is expected to be used. In doing this, we shall be treating the change in the elements in the same way that the secular variations are usually treated. These variations are really periodic, and in a perfect theory would have to be treated as such. But the elliptic elements on which all our planetary theories are founded are not mean elements, but elements brought up by secular variation to the epoch 1800 or 1850. Thus, our perturbations of the elements will be of the form sin dae att 3a," {ht+e}, 12 which @ is the secular variation proper, / a small coefficient equal to 2 n’/—n or its multiples, and ¢ a constant added to the integral, of such value as to make da vanish at the epoch 1850. 20 {HE ORBIT OF NEPTUNE. § 12. Adopted elements and masses. The elements of Neptune adopted in the computation of the perturbations are obtained by correcting those of Walker so as to agree with the Lalande obser- vations, and as nearly as possible with seven normal places derived from the modern observations from 1846 to 1863. The latter series is thus represented within a second of arc. As these elements are merely provisional, it is not worth while to give any details of the corrections, except their amounts, which are as follows : 67) = — 4 VI N86 ay = 43° 3718726 de =— .00025451; e = .00846495 on = — 8.406; n = 1864".368 dé =— 3! 57.92; ge == 335 6 ALO log a = 1.4780405 a LO aye 1? OP 130 yi 20 Epoch, Jan. 0, 1850, Greenwich, M. noon. To obtain the value of log a, the mean motion was diminished by the secular variation of the longitude of the epoch = 21’.354. A more exact value of this quantity will appear, in the course of our computations, to be 21”.4426. The provisional inclination and longitude have been taken from Walker without change, as the small corrections which his values of these elements me require will not affect the perturbations. The adopted elements of Uranus, Saturn, and Jupiter, with their functions used in the theory for the same epoch, are as follows : Uranus. Saturn. Jupiter. n 167° 34’ 21” 90° 4’ 0” 11¢ 54’ 51” E 28 27 14 14 48 40 159 56 20 a 0 46 30 2 29 28.8 Tk dikes 40 6 73 14 14 112 22 14 98 56 10 n 15425.030 43996.127 109256.72 e — .0466972 .0560050 0482273 log a 1.2857047 0.9802225 0.7162201 T 330°38' 77°56’ 39)°52! w 0131517 .0083880 (00827 ows a 0.638195 0.517301 0.1727703 These elements of Uranus have been obtained by applying to Peirce’s values of the mean elements (Appendix to American Ephemeris and Nautical Almanac, 1860-64, p. 4) approximate long-period perturbations of the elements produced by Neptune at the epoch 1850. The elements of Jupiter and Saturn are from Hansen’s prize memoir on the mutual perturbations of those planets, and are, sub- stantially, the same as Bouvard’s. THE ORBIT OF NEPTUNE. Oo, ai The values of those constants which depend on the ratio of the mean distances are as follows, using the notation of the Mécanique Céleste : I—URANUS AND NEPTUNE. da da da da 0 2.26969 0.72903 1.8326 6.4384 35.17 i —l@33o GOO AROS Cio — 4. 1026.84 |4 164.82 | + 39.15 457.04 |4+178.60 | + 82.47 0.780] —1.092} —1.56 —0.773}| —0.99 | —0.44 4 2167.76 |4+ 794.46 |+ 268.80 0 0.70 0.33 Coe Tesh | re SoFostte (=>) | Eh | (Jo) Srornse rPorowdc Ibo 9 mMirSonw. am ” ol sin NV : — 1.723 ov — sin (V—/f) 106 0.027 (V+/) — 0.022 | SS ms ot i) dO logr = cos NV — 21 47 6B sin(N+ V) .004} + 0.001 Nim ++ 0.005 + 0.05|— 0.0171 +0. 09 — 0.058 + 5.89|— 2.020 ++ 0.83/— 0.159 4/ ol — sin NV -+- 0.001)+ 0.002}+- 0.004 .005| — 0.004) — 0.004. wy dv-+sin(W— f) |— 0.024|—0.064|— 0.151 .183] +. 0.211] + 0.124 oi 0 |—0.001|— 0.002 .001| +0.002| + 0.001 d log r = cos (NV —f) —1 —2 0 0 Wij =— 1; 7 =0. =i 2 + 8.48 .175|— 28.49] — 18.47 =F LS 114 |— 82.54] — 28.59 || Gh (il +015] +0.52 5 | +0. + 84.5 VA |S. 0 4 —3 96 1 4 9 — 86.65|— 106.60 + 0.12) +0.11 4/ 47 // vt 4? él sin N + 0.108|-+ 0.200 .217|— 2.158] + 1.747]-++ 0.855|+ 0.101 dv-+sin(N—f) |+ 0.002|+ 0.002 .001|— 0.034] + 0.025]+ 0.007|+ 0.003 . (N+) |4.0.002/-+ 0.002 .001|— 0.020] + 0.022|+ 0.006|+ 0.003 6 log r= cos NV —1 —2 —71 | +18 +5 +1 28 THE ORBIT OF NEPTUNE. uv —3 —2 —1 0 1 2 4 5 z +4 3 2 1 0 —1 = —8 hh h — 0.07; — 0.17; —0.30) + 0.116) + 9.171} + 5.704) + 2.87) + 0.89} + 0.32 aDah — 0.50} —0.57) + 0.88 -—- 1.560) + 6.43 | +5.02} +2.8 Deth —8.1 |—19.5 |—35.5 |4 18.8 |-+ 1083.89 |+ 673.05 |+ 277.7 |+ 103.6 |+ 36.7 ib 15 || 1,0) || Seah —1.46 | + 36.64 | +186] 48.6 EL —8.1 |—19.5 |— 385.5 |4-13.8 |-+ 1083.86 | 673.10 |+- 277.8 |+ 103.6 |-+ 86.7 uy wy Ty uw yy ay uy ol sin N — 0.006/— 0.011} + 0.012} —0.086] —0.600) — 0.134} — 0.040 " dv -sin(V— f)|+ 0.049|+ 0.156]-+ 0.410) — 0.291) (— 127.63 )} + 22.056) + 3.995} + 0.955/+- 0.249 N—2f |-+0.001|-+ 0.002)-+ 0.004) —0.003} —1.348) -+ 0.233] + 0.042) + 0.010]+ 0.003 N—38f 0 0 0 0 — 0.015} + 0.008 dlogr cos N 0 0 0 0 + 29 —9 —2 —1 0 (N— f) +1 +2 +4 —3 — 1344 + 232 ++ 42 + 10 +3 (V¥— 2f) 0 0 0 0 —17 +3 +1 v oa eal 0 1 2 3 i +8 2 a 0 TAA ea De/h +0.7 | —0.04] 40.07} —0.26] —0.44] —0.39 yy 4/ 4/ 4 4/ 4/ dv-+sin(N—f) |—0.006} 0.000] — 0.002] + 0.031) — 0.014] — 0.006 iv BE pees] 0 1 2 3 i as 2 1 0 wero 22 De/h Oi) O14) c0Le 4/ di // v/ 4/ 4/ dv = sin (VW —f) 0.000} 0.000} 0.000} + 0.0138) — 0.005] + 0.007 i VuU.Wj=— 2; j=0. iv Se 0 1 2 3 4 5 i +8 2 1 Og Senay lig h +0.8 | —0.03] + 0.18) + 0.66] + 0.48] + 0.27 aDah 40.4 | —0.05| + 0.84) +1.44/ +1.51] 41.08 L TS | OO 4) Sco ea: oe) SLR ae Go) v/ 4/ (4A ‘i 4) 4) ol sin NV + 0.006} — 0.001} + 0.008) + 0.065] — 0.129) — 0.026 acer ten So i et THE ORBIT OF NEPTUNE. — 0.23 — 0.72 26.96 — 2.41 Wa ol sin NV 0 i 02 i -++ 0.020 4/7 dv = sin (VN — --+ 0.016 \ + 0.092) + 3. 2: 0.442 N— 0 0 ) QF +.0.001| +0. .023| — 0.005 6 log 7 + cos (NV —f) 0 +1 —5 ol sin (N— ff) dv—sin(N— ff) N—2f 6 log r + cos (NV —f) v =e 0 i +8 2 1 0 eee | ees 1 Duh + 0.30} +0.77| + 1.68] 40.77) + 0.30] +0.11 4) 47] ; 4/ 4/ 4/ I 6B sin (N — 2) | + 0.002] + 0.008] + 0.030] + 0.045] — 0.013] — 0.002 XI—j = — 2; y=—. v +2 3 4 5 6 soil z 0 —1 —2 —3 De/h +043] + 2.84) +244) 4.1.72] 10.7 4 aa 4/ 4 t dv + sin (N— f) |—0.007/— 0.092|+ 0.180|-+ 0 033|-+ 0.008 30 THE ORBIT OF NEPTUNE. al 6 a —3 Deth — 0.14) —1.75| — 2.00) —1.5 | —1.0 ” yw a W Wa dv sin (N—f) |4+ 0.001/-+ 0.068)/— 0.148]— 0.028/— 0.016 ' XUL—j=0; v= — 3. 4 5 6 —1 —2 —3 0.02) +.0.28] +.0.40] +.0.30] + 0.3 wy 7) y? 4) aA dv sin (NV —f) — 0.011) -+ 0.030) + 0.006) -+- 0.003 THE ORBIT OF NEPTUNE. 31 ACTION OF JUPITER. The direct action of Jupiter is so nearly insignificant that the details of the computation are omitted. The only terms in the longitude exceeding one hun- dredth of a second, and not sensibly confounded with the elliptic elements of Neptune, are 0”.278 sin (A’ — A) +0 .019 sin 2 (a’ — aA) ACTION OF VENUS, EARTH, AND MARS. The only appreciable effect of the attraction of these planets is found in the relation between the radius vector and the mean motion. The coefficients of the perturbative function which correspond to the case when both 7?’ and i are zero introduce changes as below into the secular variation of theslongitude of the epoch. Those which correspond to the term in which V = A — a’ introduce con- stants as below into the logarithm of the radius vector. For the sake of com- pleteness we include the similar perturbations produced by Jupiter, Saturn, and Uranus, as already computed : de a ) log vy) Action of Venus, -+ 0’.0403 —Ill1 arth, + 0 .0444 —12 Mars, + 0.0059 —2 Jupiter, + 15.3571 — 4240 Saturn, +4 8687 — 1544 Uranus, +1.1261 —— FU Total, 21.4425 — 5920 The principal term of e and, indeed, the entire portion not multiplied by the second power of the eccentricity, is de db — 1 (7,0) aN 5 an (69 +a Ae )e while the principal term in 6 log 7 is 6 logr=—i3 mM (b9 +aDab). The effect of these terms might, therefore, have been included in the mean distance as a single term, without appreciable error. § 14. Perturbations of Neptune by Saturn through the Sun. These perturbations, it will be remembered, have been omitted in the preceding computations, from reasons already set forth. They have been computed by formulae (16)—(19), and are as follows : THE ORBIT OF NEPTUNE. (Se) bo ACTION OF SATURN. oo) = dlogr= — 207.536 sin (A’ — 2) + 345 cos (A’— A) — (0/007 sin 2 2. 27a a) 24 0 S80 sim (a + 2A —@) + 10 cos (—4% + 22— Orr DO bb Gr or bo He oo bo bo NONRANSOWNOHYNNWORORNRHHOROONb NOR aSONUDE OVO > CO 0D CO HR Ort et bb WNW opp Re bo Newport The next step is to deduce positions of Neptune from observations, in order to compare them with the above theoretical positions. CHAPTER IIL. DISCUSSION OF THE OBSERVATIONS OF NEPTUNE. § 21. Durine the four years following the discovery of Neptune, observations of this planet, both meridian and extra-meridian, were very numerous. If the results of all these observations were free from constant errors, and, therefore, strictly comparable both with themselves and with subsequent observations, their combination would give very accurate positions of the planet. Unfortunately, however, we cannot assume that observations of different kinds, made at different observatories, are strictly comparable, nor have we, in many cases, the data for reducing them to a common standard. Let us consider, for instance, the meridian observations. Under the title of “Meridian Observations of Neptune,” we find in astronomical periodicals series of observed Right Ascensions and Declinations. But right ascensions and declinations can never be really observed with any instrument. Only times of transit, and the readings of micrometers and other instruments, are really observed. The right ascensions and declinations of the planet are concluded from the observations, by the aid of a great number of subsidiary data, some relating to the stars, others to the instrument. Respecting these data we have, in most cases, absolutely no information whatever. But a knowledge of some of them, at least, is indispen- sable. ven if we grant that the instrumental errors are in all cases perfectly known for every observation, we still do not know either the names or the assumed right ascensions of the stars used in determining clock errors. Hence we cannot use the results, because the right ascensions given in standard catalogues not unfrequently differ by a second of space. The declinations of the planet are sometimes determined by comparison with standard stars, sometimes by measures of nadir distance, combined with the lati- tude of the observatory. The Paris observations are reduced by the former method ; those of most other observatories, by the latter. Using the latter method, it would naturally be supposed that the declinations from the observations of all observatories of which the latitudes are well determined ought to agree. But such is far from being the case. Compare, for instance, the declinations of funda- mental stars concluded from observations with the great transit circle at Green- wich with those in the Tabulz Reductionum of Wolfers, and we shall find that for stars more than 45° from the pole, the Greenwich positions are systematically nearly a second south of Wolfers’, an amount greater than the probable error of a single isolated observation. We cannot impeach either authority. Wolfers’ positions depend on such authorities as Pond, Struve, Argelander, Henderson, Airy, and Bessel. The conscientious care bestowed on the reduction of the Greenwich observations would seem to render their results unimpeachable. Besides, from a comparison of Winnecke’s obseryations of his “ Mars Stars” in 44 THE ORBIT OF NEPTUNE. 45 1862 with those of Greenwich, it would seem that the meridian circle of Pulkowa gives declinations an entire second farther south than those of the great transit circle; so that had the Pulkowa instrument been employed on fundamental stars, their declinations would have been 2” less than Wolfers’. On the other hand, the Cambridge (Eng.) mural circle places the fundamental stars even farther north than Wolfers, and the Washington mural nearly as far north. It is foreign to our present purpose to speculate upon the causes of these dis- crepancies; we are concerned only with their existence and amount. Their existence renders it absolutely necessary to correct the declinations as well as the right ascensions in order to reduce them to a common standard; and no obser- vations have been used unless data for these corrections could be obtained. This rule necessitates the entire rejection of nearly all the vast mass of obser- vations on which Walker’s theory was founded. In the case of the micrometric comparisons, no sufficient data seem to exist for determining the positions of the comparison stars; the results are, therefore, heterogeneous in their character. However valuable they might have been when made, it will not be admissible to combine them with the fifteen years of meridian observations made since. Micrometric observations were almost given up after 1850, and the planet was left to be followed by the meridian instruments of the larger observatories. The superior accuracy of this class of observations may be inferred from the fact that the comparatively small error in Walker’s radius vector is made evident by them even during the period of construction of Walker’s theory. A similar remark applies to the meridian observations. Four years of obser- vations made at a great number of observatories may be indiscriminately combined on the supposition that the systematic as well as the accidental errors will destroy each other, particularly if each series extends through the entire period. But, as few or none of these series made at observatories able to publish any thing but their results are continued later than 1849, it will not do to assume that the mean of their systematic errors, as fixed by the standard we have assumed, would vanish. The observations which fulfil the conditions we have indicated are made at observatories, as follows: Ancient observations. Paris, by Lalande, May 8 and 10 1795. Modern observations. Greenwich, 1846 to 1864. Cambridge, 1846 to 1857. Paris, 1856 to 1861. Washington, 1846 to 1850. Washington, 1861 to 1864. Hamburg, 1846 to 1849. Albany, 1861 to 1864. § 22. Reduction of Lalande’s two chservations of Neptune, May 8-10, 1795. The first of these observations is found in the Comptes Rendus, tome 24, p. 667. The second is in the Histoire Céleste, p. 158, and is the eighth star of the firs! 46 THE ORBIT OF NEPTUNE. column. They were made with the large mural quadrant of the observatory attached to the Military School. The Histoire Céleste does not seem to contain any definite information as to the observer or observers by whom the observa- tions were made. The stars of comparison which I shall select for the determination of the errors of the instrument and clock are the following: May 8. Manto! @ Virginis, a Virginis, 6 Corvi, i Virginis, q Virginis, 4 Virginis, a) Virginis, 2 Libree, a Virginis, uw Libre, h Virginis, & Libre. x Virginis, 2 Virginis, 2 Libre, e Libre. - These lists, I believe, include all of Bradley’s stars observed by Lalande on the dates in question within the zone of the planet, for which reliable modern positions can readily be obtained. Their positions for the year 1795 were obtained as follows. The positions given by Bessel in the Fundamenta Astronomix were reduced by the precessions there given to the mean equinox and equator of 1795.0. The modern positions were obtained from the Greenwich Twelve Year Catalogue, the Greenwich observations, or Rumker’s Catalogue, and were also reduced to 1795.0 with Bessel’s precessions. The difference of the results, being supposed due to proper motion, was divided proportionally to the time, and the concluded true position for 1795 obtained. As Lalande’s observations are subject to errors of several seconds, any farther refinement in investigating the positions of the stars would be a waste of labor. In the following table is exhibited the position of the star at the two epochs, referred to the mean equinox and equator of 1795.0, with the modern authorities, and the concluded mean positions for 1795.0: Seconds of | Year of Seconds of’ .|R. A., modern} modern “a b . | modern epoch. epoch. BARON Aye Dec. ~ _ ~ x iheamseess i 12 19 16.15) —15 22 19.7% 12 23 12:73] —8 19 9.6% 12 48 42.34] —8 2519.53 13 15 54.66] —11 88 7. 13 2211.84 —9 618. — 9118 38: FE hemes: 8. Bd Corvi, > {1219 16.86] - 15.87 — bo Eg Virginis,|/12 23 12.94 12.50 w Virginis, |12 43 42.28 42.40 : . 2 Virginis,|13 15 54.88 54.32 Gr. Obs. 1859 A Virginis,|13 22 11.38 11.30 0 Ol f« Virginis,|14 1 58.50 58.85 ANG (Cr FA Virginis,|14 8 2.29 : WPAN OE 12 Libre, |14 12 25.07 : Rumker. ye Libre, 1438 6.33 6. 12 Y. C. Fé’ Libre, |14 43 16.60 De Rumker. F Runker. bw by a b moo re NOONE SH AW9 00 (il SS) Ba 2 OOM Oe OU ra CO.00 ROO RTO OO fH Ni cob wa Now rary — 10 46 —1317 on THE ORBIT OF NEPTUNE. 47 The above places were reduced to the dates of observation with the constants of the Tabulze Regiomontane. The apparent positions of @ Virginis and a Virginis are derived from the same work, correcting the Declination of the latter by + 0’.60. The former is not used for index error, owing to its distance from the zone of Neptune. Intervals of wires. On attempting to test the wire intervals of Lalande, H. C., p. 576, the interval of the third wire was found to exhibit well-marked systematic discrepancies. The observations of May 10 concur very well in indicating a diminution of 0°10; and this correction has been applied to Lalande’s intervals. The interval for wire 1 has not been changed. Deviation of instrument. The next quantity required is the deviation of the instrument from the circle of Right ascension of the planet. On using Lalande’s value of this correction, stars of different altitudes, even in the zone of observation, gave inadmissible dis- crepancies. It is found necessary to reduce the value to less-than half. This will be readily seen from the table below. - Clock error, Ge. The following tables give, for each star and each date— The number of wires observed, 4 meaning a doubtful observation. The concluded time of transit over the middle wire. Lalande’s correction to this time for deviation of the middle wire, this deviation being supposed to vanish at the circle reading for Neptune, viz.: 60° 7’. The correction for deviation actually applied, derived from the comparison of clock corrections given by @ Virginis and 6 Corvi. Seconds of apparent R. A. of star. The clock correction, using Lalande’s deviation. The clock correction, using the concluded deviation. The weight assigned to the result for clock correction, depending on the number of wires, and the proximity of the star to the planet. For the second observation the deviation is of less importance than for the first, the planet being near the middle of the zone, and the mean of the cor- rections, therefore, very small. 48 THE ORBIT OF NEPTUNE. 1795, May 8. h. m. s. 11 89 42.67 12 18 55.85 12 22 52.10 12 43 22.00 1814 4.23 13 21 50.55 14 1 388.57 14 7 41.80 1412. 4.45 15 12 46.07 to | 8 Virginis, ) 5 Corvi, H q Virginis, } .) Virginis, | @ Virginis, f A Virginis, | « Virginis, j 2 Virginis, 2 Libree, Be Libre, ProewbwrnNpe WABRWRENDHOS we 1314 3.55 . ; 0S 22, ais 13 15 32.90 14 7 41.20 1412 3.40 14 37 45.10 14 42 54.95 | a Virginis, 4 7 Virginis, | A Virginis, f 2 Libree, H ww Libree, h &’ Libree, Newbpbybp We have then May 8. May 10. Clock time of transit of planet, 14 11 36.50 14 11 23.50 Correction for clock and instrument, + 21 .94 + 22 .82 Concluded apparent Right Ascension, 14 11 58 44 14 11 46.32 or, 212° 59’ 36”.6 212° 56’ 34”.8 Declinations. We use Bessel’s refractions. For the height of the Barometer, and the tem- perature of the air, we have: in. © May 8, . 3 0 3 0 6 Bar. = 28 pou. 61. = 30.37 Eng.; 7—13 Reau. — 61.2 Fah. May 10. Beginning of observations, . Bar. — 28 pou. 3.11. — 30.12 Eng. ; 7 — 13.7 Reau. — 62.8 Fah. End G3 . Bar. = 28 pou. 1.51. = 30.07 Eng.; 7=13 Reau. = 61.2 Fah. The equatorial points on the circle are concluded as follows : Observed Declination, | Hauato- Observed Z. Dist. rial point. Z. Dist. Declination. rial point. 48° 49’ 48° 49’ ” fe} ” wu” ° , ” —10 517.3 18.9 —11 38 14.2 20.0 —12 25 15.4 18.1 —10 46 13.3 22.5 —18 17 10.7 19.6 —ll 3 9. 18.4 Cy De? HO Corvi, 64 9 52 Eq Virginis,) 57 711 fy Virginis,| 57 13 17 fa Virginis,| 5853 0 h Virginis,| 57 54 5 « Virginis,| 58 6 37 A Virginis,| 61 12 43 }2 Libra, | 59 33 57 he Libra, | 58 22 13 ie man boe bo AaAoodb me br b HS SADAG 20.38 |\a Virginis,| 5853 2 21.5 |\¢ Virginis,| 60 25 54 18.8 |/A Virginis,| 61 12 50 17.0 ||2 Libre, 16.6 |iw Libre, 25.4 ||&’ Libree, 11.3 20.8 =) o eo CR We BR oO MNS SR ow ono ob b Ree ee eee LS — ob oe bD Be = ER MOC SoM Solo iS) Cp. CS eI CoS OTP WHO co Re) for) ic 7 ee THE ORBIT OF NEPTUNE. 49 Taking the means of the separate results for equatorial pomt, we have, for the apparent declinations of Neptune— May 8. May 10. Observed circle reading, 60 817 60 719 Refraction, 1s) 1 39.0 Corrected circle reading, 60 9 56.0 60 8 58.0 Equatorial point, 48 49 18.4 48 49 19.6 Apparent declination, — 11 20 37.6 —11 19 38.4 § 23. Probable errors of these positions. So far as we can judge from the discordance of the clock errors, and equatorial points derived from the several stars, the probable error of a single observation over a single wire in right ascension would appear to be about 0°.27, and the pro- bable error of a single observed zenith distance about 2’.2. The agreement of the difference of the two observations with the computed motion of the planet shows that neither observation is affected with any abnormal error. We conclude, therefore, that the probable error of the normal place derived from the two obser- vations is about 2’.8 in R. A. and 1’.5 in declination. : Notwithstanding the magnitude of these probable errors, the observations will be very valuable during the remainder of the present century, owing to the weight with which they enter into the expressions of the elements. But in the twentieth century the observations made after 1846 will enable astronomers to compute the position of the planet in 1795 with a much higher degree of accuracy than La- lande could observe it. A similar remark applies to Lamont’s accidental zone observations in 1845. Valuable during the first two or three years, they afterward ceased to be so, because the theory soon became more accurate than the observation for an epoch so near the time of optical discovery. Had they been made in 1820, they would still have been valuable. Reduction of the modern observations. § 24. The modern observations will be treated in the following manner. The observations of each year will be divided into four groups, according to the time of culmination of the planet. The first group will include all observations made after Ins Sra, h. m. 13°30 met: Second, between 10 30 and 13 30. Third, a 7 30 and 10 30. Fourth, all made before (ea: The mean correction derived from each group will at first be regarded as the true correction applicable to the mean of the times of observation. This involves the supposition that the error of the ephemeris is changing uniformly during each series of observations. If we could compare with an ephemeris of the heliocentric 7 May, 1865. 50 THE ORBIT OF NEPTUNE. place of the planet, this hypothesis would be sufficiently near the truth for an entire year or more. But the error of geocentric place would be subject to an annual period though the errors of the heliocentric place should be invariable. Let us estimate the error of the hypothesis in question. Put ry =radius vector of Neptune. D = difference of longitude of Sun and Neptune. dv, dr, errors of heliocentric longitude and radius vector. Then the errors of geocentric longitude will be, approximately, sin D. dv (1 alk, oo ab - Of this expression the part * cos D+ 2 sin D will not be regularly progressive, but will change with the sine and cosine of D, the period of which is about 568 days. The integral of this expression gives for the mean value of the error, while D is Increasing from D, to D,, ov sinD,—sinD, dr cosD,—cosD, Fh DES De en ee: By putting B= Ds ID = oe 6= D, —D=D— D,, and developing according to powers of 6, this expression becomes ov OF \ OP O° i. cos D(I —7)+5 sin D(1—S). This, plus the error of heliocentric longitude, is the mean error which will be given by a series of observations equally scattered through a period + 6 on each side of the mean epoch VD. But what we really want is the error at the mean epoch itself; that is, bv + cos D+ ™ sin D; so that we must correct the mean error actually found by the quantity o° (dv or. a cos D+ sin D), or, since 6 is generally about 1’, and 7 about 30, ov on. Nal cadens Wx 027 (5 cos D+ 900 sin ) THE ORBIT OF NEPTUNE. al The maximum value of dv being less than 30’, the first term will be entirely neglected. The value of $7 sometimes amounts to .018, so that the correction arising from the second* term may sometimes amount to 0’”.11. We shall, there- fore, take account of it in a few cases. The ephemeris which will be compared with observation in order to deduce normal places of the planet will be the same with which the Greenwich obser- vations are compared, namely, Walker's ephemeris until the year 1854, and Kowalski’s ephemeris in subsequent years. It will be remembered, however, that these ephemerides are used only for the purpose of obtaining normal places, and in order to save the trouble of comparing every individual observation with the provisional theory. § 25. Mean corrections of the Ephemeris of Neptune given by observations at the different observatories, without correction for systematic differences. GREENWICH. CAMBRIDGE. Date. R.A. Dee. No. Date. R.A. No. Dec. No. u” $ nw” 1846, Oct. 14, 6) 050 +0.48 12 1846, Oct. 13, —0.014 10 + 1.51 8 Nov. 16, —.070 +0.55 a Nov. 7, 000 14 +1.48 15 1847, July 26, —.150 + 2.05 4 1847, July 27, — .062 5 -| 2.30 4 Aug. 20, —.097 +2.23 10 Aug. 22, —.090 18 +2.25 17 Oct. 3, —.145 -+1.48 10 Oct. 8, —.100 14 +2.18 138 Noy. a —.056 +1.76 8 Nov. 20 — .022. 13 +0.66 14 1848, July 28, —.062 +1.16 4 1848, July 22, — .056 8 + 0.88 8 Aug. 31, + .002 —Q0.20 8 Aug. 27, —.048 19 +1.85 19 Oct. 7, —.104 +0.01 14 Oct. 9, —.018 16 +0.75 17 Nov. 16, + .022 40.11 4 Nov. 19, +.009 10 +1.05 11 1849, Sept. 3, —.027 +0.65 6 1849, Aug. 21, — Os 5) +0.72 18 Oct. 17, +.080 +1.70 8 Oct. 15, —.038 16 —0.17 16 Nov. 28, —.060 + 1.96 5 Nov. 22, +.090 11 + 0.21 2 1850, Aug. 27, — 079° —=1-00) 18 1850, Aug. 29, —= {0ee) 10) +0.48 11 Oct. 16, +.040 +0.20 18 Oct. 16, +.011 14 —0.13 15 Nov. 24, +.020 —0.52 16 Nov. 23, +.0389 12 + 0.14 3 1851, Sept. 1, —.162 —1.07 16 1851, Sept. 4, —.054 18 1 if) Oct. 12, +.060 —0.97 4 Oct. 17, + 028 11 ——16h 10) Noy. 9, —.040 —1.94 5 Nov. 28, + .014 9 iil IK) 1852, Aug. 7, —.260 —2.3 5 1852, Aug. 29, — By 115} =i} as Sept. 11, —.160 —2.44 10 Oct. 11, —.048 10 —2.52 11 Oct. 12, —.140 —3.36 10 Dec. 4, -L .038 7 — 2599) 7 Nov. 22, —.080 —2'97 5 1853, Sept. 2, — .048 4 — 2.48 5 1853, Sept. 1, —.256 —2'59 14 Oct. 24, allyl 1183 —3.04 13 Oct. 11, —.177 —2.93 16 Nov. 27, +031 11 — 2/53 119} Nov. 19, — IG) = 27 8 1854, Sept. 4, —.314 11 — 8) IZ 1854, Aug. 30, —.420 —8.60 18 Oct. 11, == 155 — 4.38 3 Sept. 24, —.870 —8.94 11 Novy. 24, — .165 4 — 5.17 8 Oct. 27 — 310)" = 368 7 Dec. 5 —.300 —4.3 4 8 wn” 1855, Aug. 10, —.189 —0(0.84 7 1855, Sept. 8, —0.046 12 -+ 0.48 9 Sept. 8, —.046 —0.06 16 Oct. 12, -+ 0.50 6 Oct. 22, +.183 + 0.80 6 Dec. 10, + 0.206 9 + 3.07 7 Nov. 29, + .177 = 1.51 6 1856, Sept. 12, —0.099 9 + 0.05 8 1856, Aug. 8, —.220 —1.06 10 Oct. 29, + 0.120 8 + 1.73 7 Sept. 13, —.080 —1.06 7 Nov. 28, -+ 0.164 5 -| 2.50 5 Oct. 26, +.076 +1.41 9 1857, Sept. 14, —0.030 9 (3S, Nov. 17, + .128 +1.67 6 Oct. 25, + 0.104 5 — 0.34 5 1857, Aug. 14, —.356 —2.43 5 Dee. 11, + 0.175 8 + 0.16 g) Sept. 22, —.130 —0.50 12 Oct. 24, -+- .080 0.29 5 Dee. 5, +.130 40.16 10 1858, Aug. 18, — sol = Sept. 24, —'.260 —181 13 Oct. 25, —.206 —1.00 16 Dec. 10, —.058 —0.76 11 1859, Aug. 19, —.500 —3.27 9 Sept. 28, — 446 — 311 17 Nov. 3, Sil} PIS Dec. 16, — .328 —146 10 Or bo THE ORBIT OF NEPTUNE. GREENWicm (Cont.). Date. R.A. Dec No. Ss & “uw 1860, Aug. 20, — 0.760 — 5.02 4 Sept. 20, — 0.685 — 3.86 13 Oct. 31, — 0.662 — 3.38 15 Dec. 13, — 0.680 —4.73 2, 1861, Aug. 22, — 0.940 — 5.41 4 Sept. 18, — 0.861 — 5.62 16 Oct. 30, — 0.861 — 5.18 12 Dee. 7, — 0.993 — 5.14 7 1862, Aug. 24, lily — 7.20 6 Sept. 25, — 1.162 — 6.76 13 Noy. 4, —-1,139 — 7.00 11 Dee. 17, a Tilt} —7.06 4 1863, Aug. 28, — 1.585 Oeil 2 Sept. 23, — 1.461 — 8.62 9 Noy. 12, — 1.388 — 8.33 4 Dee. 15, — 1.875 — 8.41 2 1864, Oct. 3, —1.680 —11.03 3 Noy. 8, — 1.6389 — 10.52 7 Wasuineton (Walker’s Eph.). Date. R.A. No. Dee. No. s 1846, Nov. 9, + 0.096 10 = 2.16 7 1847, Aug. 28, —0.205 15 9107 6 Oct. 14, — 0.023 9 + 1.80 7 Nov. 8, + 0.052 5 + 1.96 3 1848, Aug. 30, —0.076 10 +0.80 14 Oct. 2, == Osi +1.71 10 1849, Sept. 11, —0.154 5 Oct. 12, — 0.014 8 + 1.06 6 1850, Oct. 13, — 0.032 9 +0.94 25 Nov. 11, —0.068 5 +1.25 13 1861, Oct. 29, — 1.695 6 — 8.70 5 Dec. 16, —— OOS aamelt —8.64 10 1862, Sept. 28, —2.000 2 Nov. 14, —1.860 3 — 9.85 2 Dee. 12; —1.827, 6 —10.9 1 1868, Oct. 13, 2.22, 38 —13.82 5 Nov. 12, —2.19 3) 13552 6 Dec. 8, — 2.054 5 —12.76 7 1864, Aug. 7, — 2.69 8 —15.5 4 Nov. 17, —2.52 5 —14.6 12 Dec. 20, —2.38 5 —14.0 2 AtBANny (Kowalski). Date. R. A. No. Dec. No. s ” 1861, Sept. 1, — 0.778 5 — 6.02 5 Nov. 11, —0.825 8 — 5.42 8 Dec. 14, — 0,847 9 5.44 9 1856, 1862, 1863, 1864, Date. Sept. 14, Oct. 25, Dee. 21, Sept. 19, Oct. 25, Dec. 14, Date. Sept. 21, Oct. 27, Aug. 23, Sept. 23, Nov. 17, Dee. 7, Sept. 29, Oct. 31, Sept. 28, Nov. 4, Dec. 9, Paris (Walker). R. A. No. Dec. s “uw (05669 yal) -— 3.96 —0.606 14 = Bil — 0.470 2, —0:768 10 — 4.98 — 0.825 13 — 5.95 ——0 29) 7 — 6.13 Parts (Kowalski). R. A. No. Dec s ” —0.291 18 sili ==) 281) AIG) —0.76 — 0.6380 5 — 2.64 — 0.474 9 — 2:50 — (8877 ail —= 1192 — 0.430 2 —— PEA) — 0.608 6 — 3.75 —0.618 12 — 3.51 — 0.960 7 — 5.56 —0.948 17 §.52 — 0.890 5 — 5.60 HambBura. R.A. Dec. No. Ss ” —0.098 —1.43 9 SON) SEO) 1G — 0.061 — 1.438 17 (Nl EGO « a» — 0.051 F322! 0.000 —0.20 7 OA Seal eel) —0.048 —2.15 12 —0.014 —0.92 9 —0.008 —0.50 16 *+0.071 —071 10 ABany (Walker) R. A. No. s — 1.927 —1.905 1 — 1.815 — 1.732 — 2.228 — 2.145 — 2.053 — 2.490 — 2.437 3 4 g) 6 12 10 6 6 9 - — 2.360 3 ” — 13.05 —- 15.67 — 13.46 — 12.738 — 14.96 — 15.38 — 14.80 — 17.70 — 16.29 — 16.27 Zz © aos WOARDGCHAOON THE ORBIT OF NEPTUNE. 53 § 26. Corrections to the observed positions in order to render them strictly com- parable with each other. These corrections have been derived from a comparison of the positions of the ten fundamental clock stars, from y Aquile to a Ceti inclusive, given by obser- vations at the different observatories, with the adopted standard positions. The standard right ascensions are those of Dr. Gould, prepared for the United States Coast Survey. The declinations are those of Wolfers in the “Tabulxe Reduc- tionum,” diminished by 0’.50. Both are given in the following table: Cor. to Am. Eph. Annual Annual R. A. 1850.0. carn, IGE. Dec. 1850.0. care, 160), R. A. Dec. ” + 8.41 9.13 8.62 10.77 17.28 19.30 19.91 20.04 £ 17.29 5 | 414.42 eS y Aquile, a Aquile, + Nore ius) sal goto Sx B Aquile, a? Capricorni, 20° 9 43.69 a Aquarii, 2158 4.68 a Pegasi, 2 Andromede, Pegasi, Arietis, Ceti, rary p38 or t+t++ | em Ono x i=) Depre WWRORrWAAO O go $8 99 go to go go TOTO LO, FPwoooc snows Doo* Co 02 00 CO 00 OO CO ELD ON SC He Or 0d He 01 CO CO 09 OCOROUWNOM MAN >= AOr Oe Mmwanb D 99 S 90 = toe toe bo bo oo re (men P++t++1 | +++ hae aes Tn reducing the Albany observations, it was found advisable to add @ Piscium to the number of standard stars for determining these corrections. Its assumed position is R. A. 1860.0. Declination 1860.0. 23 51 7.42 + 6° 5° 17".9 The observed mean right ascensions and declinations of these stars, reduced to the beginnings of the several years, have been compared with those derived from the above table, giving the result from each star a weight proportional to the number of observations when the observations were few in number, but giving each result equal weight when they were numerous. Thus the following sys- tematic corrections have been derived : GREENWICH. CAMBRIDGE. WASHINGTON. R. A. A R. A. R. A. Ss s + 0.044 } 6 = + 0.034 -- 0.059 rs -- 0.057 -- 0.036 + 0.039 + 0.058 ALBANY. s 1861 + 0.006 000 000 | | | S95 Sib ot co to =1 of 1860 54 THE ORBIT OF NEPTUNE. REMARKS ON THE PRECEDING CORRECTIONS. GREENWICH. The corrections actually applied to the right ascensions from 1848 to 1853 have been derived by comparing the corrections on p. LV. of the introduction to the Green- wich six-year catalogue for 1854 with the corrections given by that catalogue, namely, — 0°.020. From 1857 to 1864 the corrections have been derived in the same way from the seven-year catalogue for 1860. The entire list of corrections is as follows: 1846, + 0°.044 : | a, + 0.059 48, 4+ 0.052 10-55, 0) ONO 56, -— (0) 025 5e-61, —0.008 62-64, + 0.002 The corrections to the declination have been concluded from year to year from the table. CAMBRIDGE. One consistent set of adopted right ascensions having been used in the re- ductions of the Cambridge observations, the constant correction — 0°.046 has been applied to the right ascensions throughout. The declinations have been corrected as follows : 1846-47, —1”.12 1848-57, — 0.58 WASHINGTON. The corrections to the Washington right ascensions from 1846 to 1850 have been derived from a general comparison of twenty-five fundamental stars near the equator with the results of the Greenwich observations. The mean + 0°.042 has been adopted as the constant correction for those years. After 1861, no correction 1s needed, Dr. Gould’s Right ascensions having been adopted in the reductions. The corrections to the declinations for 1861 have been derived from those for 1862. The latter were diminished by 0”.20 for error of nadir point, while no such correction was applied to the former. HAMBuRG. ITaving applied to Charles Rumker, Esq., M.A., of the observatory at Hamburg, for information respecting the data used in the reduction of the Hamburg obser- vations of Neptune, I was informed that both right ascensions and declinations THE ORBIT OF NEPTUNE. | 55 depended on the positions of the Nautical Almanac stars. For the years 1846-47, the Nautical Almanac right ascensions require the constant correction — 0°.003, and in 1848-49 the correction + 0°.049, to reduce them to those adopted. The declinations do not seem so easily reducible to our adopted standard. They are, therefore, not included. All the Washington, and some of the Paris and Albany, observations having been compared with Walker’s Ephemeris in years subsequent to 1855, the fol- lowing corrections have been applied for differences of Ephemerides : To Paris Corrections. Date. R. A. Dee. s 1856, Sept. 14, 10.54 +4.68 Oct. 25, +0.65° -+—+5.75 1857, Sept. 19, -- 0.676 -+5.02 Out, 28, O30 Y Ree Dee, 14, LO ROP To Washington and Albany Corrections. Date. R. A. Dee. 8 1861, Oct. 29, + 0.76 + 5.5 Dec. 16, + 0.70 + 4.9 1862, Aug. 25, + 0.90 + 6.5 Sept. 21, + 0.85 + 6.2 23, + 0.85 + 6.2 Oct. 31, + 0.76 + 5.4 Nov. 14, + 0.75 + 5.0 Dee. 12, + 0.70 + 5.1 ) UG, 60:00 + 6.1 1863, Sept. 27, +0.845 +5.9 Oct. 13, + 0.81 + 5.6 Nov. 6, + 0.78 + 5.5 12, +0.77 + 5.5 Dec. 8, + 0.78 + 5.2 14, +0.73 4+ 5.2 1864, Aug. 7, + 0.91 + 6.2 Sept. 29, + 0.87 + 6.0 Nov. 9, + 0.90 + 5.9 17, +0.88 + 5.5 Dec. 14, + 0.82 + 5.8 20, + 0.82 + 5.5 56 THK ORBIT OF NEPTUNE. § 27. The concluded corrections of the ephemeris for normal dates generally near the mean of the means have been concluded by applying to the corrections of pp. 51, 52 the following corrections : 1. Correction for systematic error given by fundamental stars. 2. Reduction, when the change of error was rapid, from the dates of the means to the dates of the normals. 3. 0.027 5*, sin D for second differences of error, when dr > .01. 4. Correction just given for difference of ephemerides. The results are given in the following table. The small figures show the relative weights assigned to the separate results, which are, to a certain extent, a matter of judgment, but which are assigned without any reference to the magni- tude of the correction itself THE ORBIT OF NEPTUNE. 57 CoRRECTIONS TO THE TABULAR RiGut ASCENSIONS GIVEN BY THE DIFFERENT OBSERVATORIES, WITH THE CONCLUDED CORRECTIONS AND CONCLUDED NorMAL Rigut ASCENSIONS. (The units are hundredths of seconds of time.) x Con- | Tab. R. A. from Gr. Cam. Par. Wash. | Ham. cluded.; R. A. | Observation. : 8. h.m. gs. 1846, Oct. 14, =i, —= (5, — 10, — 4 | 55.02 21 51 54.98 Nov. 14, = 8, —= Bp + 14; — 13; ea PAYS) 21 51 23.00 1847, July 26, —, || iil, —9 | 1.94 22 8 1.85 Aug. 17, — dl), || — ill — il, — 6, —11 | 51.90 22 5 51.79 Oct. 8, —, | — 14h = 2e — 10, —6' |) 3:42 Ik BSS Noy. 18, 0, = 7p + 9; — 5, 0 | 4.28 2228 1848, July 25, —1, |— 10, + 5, — 8 | 49.85 22 16 49.82 Aug. 29, ak §, —= @, — 3, == Up — 2 | 21.55 22 13 21.53 Oct. 6, =, — (i, — 8, + 1, — 5 | 53.89 22 9 53.84 Nov. 17, + 73 =a + 3 | 38.40 22 8 38.43 1849, Sept. 1, — 4, |) — 118%, — 12; + 3, —7 | 51.43 22 21 51.36 Oct. 15, eT, — 8; + 3, 4- 4, AL | Boget Pay Ales TAG Nov. 25, ——(a + 4, —— 27 + 12, -+ 1 | 19.06 22 17 19.07 1850, Aug. 28, —=@, | —1lé), —10 | 62.59 22/3 2:49 Oct. 15, aL 8h — dl, = 1, +1 | 438.45 22 26 43.46 Noy. 20, +1, — Il, — +0 | 42.94 22 25 42.94 1851, Sept. 2, if, || = 10h —15 | 15.94 22 39 15.79 Oct. 14, aL iy, — %, + 2 | 26.94 22 35 26.96 Nov. 20, — §p — §, — 4 | 11.92 22 34 11.88 1852, Aug. 7, 26 — 27 | 25.60 22 50 25.33 Sept. 5, — 17; — 8, —15 | 34.10 22 47 33.95 Oct. 12, — 15, ==), : — 1183 || O33 22.44 9.70 Nov. 28, | — 9; —— —7 | 44.70 22 42 44.63 1853, Sept. 1, | — 26, —9, == 24" | 40014! 22 56 39.90 Oct. 15, 18, | ee —18 | 34.47 22 52 34.29 Nov. 24,| —17, — a8 || Ail 22d) 7.33 1854, Aug. 30, | —43, | — 37, hil || BAE7/ 23) 5932.06 Sept. 24, | — 88; == BB] 2s) 23} 8 OS Oct. 27, —= 8%), | — 38, —=— 8s) | BBBS 23 0 23.05 Dee. 5, — Sfilq || — Pail, — 27 | 40.04 22 59 39.77 1855, Ang. 10, | — 20, — 20) || 2°20 2316 2.00 Sept. 8, — 6), | 10, —7 | 16.50 23 13 16.48 Oct. 22, aL on + 17 | 15.60 23. 9 15.77 Nov. 29,| + 17, | + 15, + 16 | 57.83 23 7 57.49 8 May, 1865. 08 THE ORBIT OF NEPTUNE. ; CORRECTIONS TO THE TABULAR Ricut ASCENSIONS GIVEN BY THE DIFFERENT | OBSERVATORIES, WITH THE CONCLUDED CORRECTIONS AND CONCLUDED AV EILNL | Rigut Ascenstons (Cont.). Pe (The units are hundredths of seconds of time.) | 1856, Aug. 8, Sept. 13, Oct. 26, Nov. 17, | 1857, Aug. 13, Sept. 21, Oct. 24, Dec. 8, H 1858, Aug. 18, Sept. 23, Oct. 28, Dec. 12, 1859, Aug. 21, Sept. 23, Nov. 8, Dec. 14, 1860, Aug. 20, Sept. 23, Oct. 31, Dec. 13, + 1861, Aug. 22, Sept. 18, Oct. 30, Dee. 7, | 1862, Aug. 24, Sept. 28, Nov. 6, Dee. 15, 1863, Aug. 28, Sept. 27, Nov. 17, Dee. 12, | 1864, Aug. 7, Oct. 1, Nov. 12, Dee. 17, Wash. | Albany. Con- cluded. R. A. from Observation. h.m. 48. 23 24 41.43 3 21 17.83 23 17 28.82 23 16 29.01 28 32 50.58 23 29 5.96 23 26 8.93 23 24 45.21 23 40 58.06 23 27 29.11 23 84 22.73 23 383 6.83 23 49 14.30 23 46 3.05 23 42 9.62 23 41 24.94 23 57 44.52 23 54 29.85 23 51 3.23 23 49 40.28 hb . wo ) me DO bo mm 0) CD bo reat ES) COED Sven Re be acaTN anor HH OO LD H= O1ed LO Noe oo ° THE ORBIT OF NEPTUNE. 59 CoRRECTION TO THE DECLINATIONS, WITH THE CoNCLUDED D&cLINATIONS. Concluded Dee. Par. i from Obs. 1846, Oct. 14, Nov. 14, or Bs o> | +++ ++ ae oe LS) = 1847, July 26, Cy ie i AN os;s Seats o i) [J+ +444 Cet) H CO eS ee bo bo obo 09 bo SBE PEE be pb w (Se) we — 10 59 55.5 11 21 33.2 1125 4.9 ow 7) | 1849, Sept. 1, Oct. 15 oo Twn NWS WD b) Nov. 25, SSS SSHS Sees os bOu bSHOEe aS: > bo co ao > CO ao is ++ | +1 | NEES Preew WPOwW WMOWD NSS SS S809 S889 SF ©© SNSM COO CHO Heb H BYR TWH WHR Romo YY OF bo — 10 10 53.7 10 85 59.7 10 41 15.8 or 1850, Aug. 28, | Oct. 15, Novy. 20, I | o ial moan No 9 26 29.2 a | 1851, Sept. 2, Oct. 14, Nov. 20, to bo bo oo SH CHD Wha Lid I || > ws Cy Pd oop 1852, Aug. 7, Sept. 5, Oct. 12, Nov. 28, COrS ICICI MICK CACO ~ PPP DEE Poe SoS SSeF Pewee SS nom oN bei i re aS o ao P cp PICO ES COL CP) TT OEN BS CSPOC) — CO) DROW CNHHM Rom Odi Wo 1853, Sept. 1, Oct. 15, Nov. 24, a elm led ako NaS DBRS OHOoN aS ry f 1854, Aug. 30, f Sept. 24, Oct. 27, Dee. 5, oo 0o 1855, Aug. 10, Sept. 8, Oct. 22, Nov. 29, DOAN ATAD MMW ONMOMDM ON PwWeoO WHER NEP AONE wow HH om Pe ae THE ORBIT OF NEPTUNE. 60 — LS is} io) oO SZ io) a ie) 1 is < A = a oO i=) i=) (=) irl = (j=) = iS) a ie) oO ica iss] & ca) & HH e ae a fe) - [= a is a oO i¢3 A iS] x [= iS) i= 4 fe) I & iS} co ap |] | | occr is 1853, Sept. Oct. Nov. : Oren Dee on Rm BO) Cx qrenen onen DHDS HwWom WR oor St oft Wiko Hina wor Ld SIH] Seo S2 S929 SiS] 2229 S229 S229) 2925 1854, Aug. 3 Sept. : Oct. : Dec. et oo et wad won lee wnnw wWwnw aAnnwmnw An QAnDS FRNH BROMWA DOD Eee SOS COSCO COO COO ooo cooo ScoocoSo 0 8 sa A 6 4 ll ob) 5 8 all 9) 8) 0 3 0 A olf 2 0 8 2 83 8 0000 MOH BAG@o Ee bo bo bo mE oo bo EI oo DO COAT wonmy tell I | bo bo 1855, Aug. Sept. 8 Oct. 25 Nov. 29 Oren | bo OVS) ST wh ob wr oc$§. pat et ek et He OVS) Or ON NN Se 00 Lae | | me ik bo THE ORBIT OF NEPTUNE. 64 | GEOCENTRIC APPARENT LONGITUDES AND LATITUDES oF NEPTUNE DERIVED FROM OBSERVATION (Cont.). f S ES Phe ©8090 MNON SOND MOnH NAHOR HS Bonn SSSS FHSOSS SSSS SHHS Hoss a) af ae Pb 4 rete eels lela| Se [Sle sai B a BAND AMom COMM MOSM HHNS SCNOGR MEMO RaMOH Ron ® HAR O19 SSHH Hote WSHD FKONH SAHK SKHKS BONN GNOon | Sn an) HANH NOM NON m0 cD HN HNO NOAH Oata & A Zz 5 = q miQHOS COMM MANS NM SOHtr® DHSS SONHO wotHH aANDOS a aS) BOSH I9150H ASHH BAND Nig tt dHHtK SHs a aionn acan 3 ‘5 Sltcx an) HANH FOMH NON 410 6d sO ANON NOH WAKA 4 8 DARD ANNE D100 H HDHODK BHR AO HHH OnOCIN AaaADn ONHO PB SSeS e ARR SR NANA NAN ANN Baa MO i & Sn hn oe reese Sn I es Eh oes | ben he | Sane Se oe ee be I en I erste ta) fal Se) 2 } | | Cag oe POO NAS MANO HBAS ANMQ ASCNS HHAm ONSN ANSE 8 SSSS SCninH SOSH SOSH SSHS FBANH ANH CONRAN Annan >) BS Nees es sl eee fee eew lS lealiele ele lela lee ls) es) (eles ele [Eee |e is Bs iS) CO SCO 18S OS DISUSE CO SHI StH HCO SH tO NOY Or cor ® Or-OD CONRAD SrKas AHAN Hons NrKwoo ares SGAO0 SOrr : Z| oid Ams HAND SNA +H oO Ae +Ho0n AON o A s Se} AMO One moeneg MmOM1D ARNN BOOM SCHOO NAOH Wooten oN aS HRSG SHON HKD SBdSd Naomid en ROOH SHAS Naos E = oid eo aH Hod HNN tT oOo AS HisaoMN aota =] 5 HOSS WHOSOH OMMD SCrHRHN KRHODOD NHOO KHOH A2NOH Onna y 110 1H eo sean CA Ch CN OI = sH1id 10 69 Asad mon QI st co 4 1D 1 6D AOK~ Ee AntOD HAMNN OoOtH Oreo HOMD MAHA WHtMO WoO1910 Q =H OSH oH OSH 1D 10 10 =H 1D 10 10 10 1D 10 1 1 Yalta tate) enya ven) 5 joe «CNC «eto ed 6G) «OC A CD ce CO ooo a tao codotad Sedo Sata ala OX aareidD orhNoat Neat aan FANG ANAG AN A ANAM Ao ag 4 ANG a4 3 eA Ce 8S sess wees wess Ge NEES MEEPS MEE S = BESS SROs gR5S gsHO8 seES SESS Sa68 SH5S8 F568 a GnOA 4dnO0Q dno aAnZA «ano +n0AQ 4AneAQ 4neZQ sORZA Rey ~ con on S = oD co + 1d 1D Ye) Ye) Zo) ae) Oo do) ie) (e'a) io) (ve) (oe) co D (o9) CO. (oo) To fal re re re re i) re re CHAPTER IV. RESULTS OF THE COMPARISON OF THE THEORETICAL WITH THE OBSERVED POSITIONS OF NEPTUNE. § 29. Tux first question of the present chapter will be whether the observations of Neptune can be satisfied within the limits of their probable errors by suitable changes in the elements of the orbit of Neptune and the masses of the disturbing planets. No admissible change in the mass either of Jupiter or Saturn will sensibly affect the perturbations of Neptune. The mass of Uranus will, therefore, be the only one the correction of which need be taken into account. The errors of the provisional latitude of Neptune are so small that the errors of the longitude in orbit may be taken as sensibly the same with the errors of ecliptic longitude. The latter give equations of condition between the following unknown quantities. Correction of the mean longitude of Neptune. if es mean motion of Neptune. ss ct eccentricity X sin. perihelion of Neptune. oe ss eccentricity < cos. perihelion of Neptune. re ‘ mass of Uranus. But if we attempt to solve by least squares the equations between these cor- rections, we shall be met with the difficulty set forth in the introduction, and our normal equations will be equivalent to only three, unless we include a great number of decimals in the computation. We shall, therefore, make a linear transformation of the unknown quantities, on the principles already referred to, and suggested by the following considerations. The true longitude of Neptune has been less than its mean longitude, and its true motion has been greater than its mean motion, ever since its optical discovery. From these circumstances the difficulty in question arises. We may obviate it by substituting for the mean longitude.and mean motion of Neptune during an entire revolution its average longitude and heliocentric motion during the period of the modern observations. Suppose an imaginary planet to move uniformly in the orbit of Neptune in such a way that its average longitude and motion have been the same as the average longitude and motion of Neptune during the last nineteen years, and let x be its longitude, 1850, Jan. 0, and 2 its annual motion. We may then make the eccentricity and perihelion of Neptune to depend ana- lytically upon the deviation of its motion from that of the hypothetical planet, as it must depend really, because this deviation is the only real datum which we possess to reason from, the Lalande observations excepted. It 1s to be remarked 9 May, 1865. 65 6 THE ORBIT OF NEPTUNE. (or) that both the longitude and motion of the hypothetical planet are entirely arbitrary. For the differential coefficients of the elements with respect to the heliocentric co-ordinates, we have Ga Ao eos 1 21 GENE de do _, do ana miden dv : — = — 2 cos 1 — S Asin 21 — 5 kcos 2 1. dh a a = 2sin/ + $ksin21—Shecos 21. 1 Laa =ksin/—/h cos l. a dé 1 eae Qi Bie! & ~ GE ld B = —snl+h—ksin 21+ heoos 2 0. 1 dr = Se [= i — fh sin 21 —kicos 2 7. a dka cosl + k a kcos 21 In accordance with what has been proposed, we shall substitute for e and n the quantities # and 2’, connected with them by the relations x =e+ah+ (Ck 1 e=n+tah+ Ok (1) a and 2 being approximately the average values of — 2 cos / and + 2 sin / during the last nineteen years, and a’ and 3’ the average values of 2 2 sin / and 2 n cos / during the same time. We shall take @ Se of == (I), OLS . a GS-.085 B= + 0.073. (2) Then, considering v as a function of x, y, h, and /:, and enclosing the new dif- ferential coefficients in parentheses, we have, by suitable transformations, dv dv (dv dv din Nadine (z ) aie ie ~ a * ie dn’? \dx) de’ \d#) dn = i Gor GY) a (Gp=—e—-O+8 ee 1 /d dr 1 e ‘ (2 a GH=2 5 1 —(a+at): - aera! — a 1 (dr 1 } LR aie he mts a (aes ra 489 “@ Te oa a THE ORBIT OF NEPTUNE. 67 Putting 4 for the geocentric longitude, and A for the distance from the earth, the differential coefficients of the geocentric with respect to the heliocentric co- ordinates will be da du = OS (w ape A), (4) jm a a7 = a sin (v—A); and the coefficients of the equations of conditions will be dr da dv daz IL dr dz dv de Y dr ade dx _drz dv d~A 1 dr dx dv dn ain? dr adn (5) dA\ dn (dv dx 1 (dr dh }~ dw \dh ee dr a\dh da\ dara (do dx 1 (dr dk) = de \de)** dr a \dk The perturbations in the geocentric longitude of Neptune produced by Uranus will be— 1. Perturbations of the true heliocentric longitude multiplied by os : ; wes d. : 2. Perturbations of radius vector multiplied by - for which has been taken a dar S108" Xr de Of course the effect of the long-period and secular perturbations of the elements produced by the action of Uranus must be included in the perturbations of Neptune. Representing by u the factor by which the assumed mass of Uranus must be multiplied, so that the true mass shall be l+u 21000 the computed perturbations produced by Uranus will be the coefficients of « in the equations of condition. § 30. The residuals in longitude thus give the following equations between the unknown quantities, which are numbered in the order of time, but grouped somewhat differently. 68 THE ORBIT OF NEPTUNE. Date. Equation. 1 | 1795, May 9, | O=1.02d% —55.7du’ +42.4540h + 3.7420h 4 | 1847, July 26, 1.02 — 2.2 + 0.009 — 0.001 5 | 1847, Aug. 17, 1.04 — 2.4 + 0.010 -+ 0.003 5 2 | 1846, Oct. 14, 1.02 — 3.8 ++ 0.035 + 0.024 +1.79 —0.1 6} 2 6 47, Oct. 8, 1.08 —2.7 + 0.012 + 0.014 + 1.66 0.0 8] 3 3 | 1846, Noy. 14, 1.01 —3.7 -+ 0.03 + 0.025 + 1.82 —1.0 7 | +2 7 47, Nov. 18, 1.01 —2.7 -- 0.011 -+ 0.017 + 1.73 — 0.6 d\\ 2 8 | 1848, July 25, 1.04 —1.2 —0.011 — 0.008 + 1.16 —1.7 5} 2 9 | 1848, Aug. 29, 1.04 —1.4 — 0.010 0.000 + 1.39 —0.8 8| 3 12 49) Sept. 1, 1.04 — 0.4 — 0.027 — 0.006 + 1.47 —0.1 Ol) 2 15 50, Aug. 28, 1.04 + 0.7 — 0.042 — 0.011 + 1.55 0.0 5 | 2 10 | 1848, Oct. 6, 1.03 —1.7 — 0.008 ++ 0.007 +1.61 0.0 S| 8 13 49, Oct. 15, 1.03 —0.7 — 0.026 -+ 0.002 +1.69 — 0.2 8} 3 16 50, Oct. 15, 1.08 + 0.4 — 0.041 — 0.002 + 1.79 — 0.8 dg} 2 11 | 1848, Nov. 17, 1.01 —1.7 — 0.009 -++ 0.010 + 1.68 — 0.4 4/ 1 14 49, Noy. 25, 1.01 —0.7 — 0.026 + 0.005 + 1.74 — 0.4 6) 2 17 50, Nov. 20, 1.01 + 0.4 — 0.041 -- 0.001 -- 1.85 — 0.6 C2 H 21 | 1852, Aug. 7, 1.04 + 3.0 — 0.062 — 0.020 -+- 1.85 + 0.3 oh jf a 18 | 1851, Sept. 2, 1.04 +17 — 0.054 — 0.018 -+1.76 — 0.4 6 2 22 52, Sept. 5, 1.04 + 2.8 — 0.063 — 0.014 -++ 2.00 — 0.8 5] 2 25 538, Sept. 1, 1.04 + 3.9 — 0.069 — 0.016 + 2.31 — 0.3 5 | 2 H 19 | 1851, Oct. 14, 1.03 +1.4 — 0.054 — 0.005 + 1.95 —1.8 4| 1 f 23 52, Oct. 12, 1.03 + 2.5 — 0.063 — 0.008 + 2.16 — 0.2 5 | 2 H 26 53, Oct. 15, 1.04 + 3.5 — 0.070 — 0.008 + 2.44 — 0.6 6} 2 } 20 | 1851, Noy. 20, 1.01 + 1.3 — 0.053 — 0.008 +2.00 — 0.6 4 1 f 24. 52, Nov. 28, 1.01 2.4 — 0.062 — 0.004 + 2.22 — 0.6 apy) al f 27 53, Nov. 24, 1.01 + 3.4 — 0.069 — 0.004 + 2.53 —1.8 5 | 2 28 | 1854, Aug. 80, 1.04 + 5.0 — 0.072 — 0.016 + 2.62 — 0.3 (a ee f 32 55, Aug. 10, 1.04 + 6.1 — 0.071 — 0.018 + 2.89 —0.9 8] 3 36 56, Aug. 8, 1.04 + 7.2 —0.067 — 0.017 +3.31 — 0.9 8} 3 y 29 | 1854, Sept. 24, 1.04 +4.8 — 0.073 — 0.012 2.75 — 0.2 gibi f 33 55, Sept. 8, 1.04 -- 6.0 — 0.072 — 0.014 +3.11 — 0.9 8 37 56, Sept. 18, 1.05 + 7.0 — 0.070 — 0.011 + 3.44 —0.5 9) 3 f 80 | 1854, Oct. 27, 1.03 +.4.5 — 0.073 — 0.006 + 2.84 — 0.2 6] 2 34 55, Oct. 22, 1.04 + 5.6 — 0.074 — 0.006 3.14 —1.2 gb 2B } 38 56, Oct. 26, 1.03 + 6.6 — 0.072 — 0.004 8.57 — 0.7 9| 3 f 81 | 1854, Dec. 5, 1.01 + 4.4 — 0.072 — 0.004 + 2.85 — 0.3 4) 1 H 35 55, Nov. 29, 1.02 + 5.4 — 0.074 — 0.003 +3.17 —0.3 8 | 3 H 39 56, Nov. 17, 1.02 + 6.5 — 0.072 — 0.002 + 3.59 — 0.6 8} 3 40 | 1857, Aug. 13, 1.04 + 8.2 — 0.061 — 0.014 + 3.83 — 0.8 vi) 2 | 44 58, Aug. 18, 1.04 9.3 — 0.052 — 0.011 + 4.39 —0.8 Oi 8 48 59, Aug. 21, 1.04 -++ 10.8 — 0.040 — 0.007 + 4.94 — 0.8 Oi 38 41 | 1857, Sept. 21, 1.04 + 8.0 — 0.065 — 0.007 +3.97 —1.1 QO} 8 45 58, Sept. 28, 1.05 + 9.1 — 0.056 — 0.005 + 4.51 0.1 9} 3 49 59, Sept. 28, 1.05 + 10.1 — 0.044 — 0.002 + 5.05 —0.4 | 10} 8 42 | 1857, Oct. 24, 1.04 + 7.7 — 0.067 — 0.002 + 4.05 —1.1 6} 2 46 58, Oct. 28, 1.04 + 8.8 — 0.059 + 0.001 + 4.57 —0.1 LOR aS) 50 59, Nov. 8, 1.08 + 9.7 — 0.047 + 0.005 +6.11 — 0.9 9} 3 43 | 1857, Dee. 8, 1.01 + 7.5 — 0.066 + 0.001 + 4.09 —1.0 Oe -B 47 58, Dee. 12, 1.01 +8.5 — 0.058 -+ 0.004 + 4.55 —1.6 Silas, p Ol 59, Dee. 14, 1,02 9.5 — 0.047 + 0.007 + 5.09 —1.0 8 | 38 H 52 | 1860, Aug. 20, 1.04 + 11.4 — 0.024 — 0.004 + 5.56 + 0.2 2 | 56 61, Aug. 22, 1.04 -- 12.5 — 0.005 — 0.001 + 6.16 —1.2 2 q 60 62, Aug. 24, 1.04 + 13.5 ++ 0.016 + 0.063 + 6.79 — 2.3 3 THE ORBIT OF NEPTUNE. 69 {SPS SEP PEELE EEE ERLE ELD TE TE 5 I PS IE IE I PT EE EE, No. Date. Equation. P. | M. ” - ” 53 | 1860, Sept. 23, | O=1.05d2 -+11.2dx! —0.028dh +0.0026k 45.672 —O0.8 | 10] 3 57 61, Sept. 18, 1.05 + 12.8 — 0.009 + 0.004 -+ 6.26 —2.0 | 11] 3 61 62, Sept. 23, 1.05 + 18.4 + 0.012 + 0.008 + 6.88 —2.1 11} 3 54 | 1860, Oct. 31, 1.04 + 10.8 — 0.033 + 0.008 +5.71 —1.1 9} 38 58 61, Oct. 30, 1.04 + 11.9 — 0.015 + 0.011 +6.31 —2.2 |) 10] 38 62 62, Nov. 6, 1.04 + 12.9 + 0.005 + 0.015 + 6.89 — 19) 5) |) 3 55 | 1860, Dee. 18, 1.02 + 10.5 — 0.083 + 0.011 + 5.68 —0.5 4/1 59 61, Dec. 7, 1.02 + 11.6 — 0.016 ++ 0.014 + 6.25 —Lo | 1} 3 63 62, Dee. 15, 1.02 + 12.6 + 0.004 + 0.018 + 6.81 —15) >| 10) 3 64 | 1863, Aug. 28, 1.04 + 14.6 + 0.040 ++ 0.006 7.42 0.0 4) 1 68 64, Aug. 7, 1.04 + 15.6 ++ 0.070 -+ 0.007 + 7.94 — 2.2 5 | 2 65 | 1863, Sept. 27, 1.05 + 14.4 -+ 0.0386 + 0.012 + 7.50 = 272) | 10) |) 4 69 64, Oct. 1, 1.05 + 15.4 ++ 0.068 + 0.015 + 8.16 —3.1 Bi) 8 66 | 1863, Nov. 17, 1.04 + 13.9 -- 0.028 + 0.019 + 7.49 —1.6 9/ 3 70 64, Noy. 12, 1.04 + 15.0 0.054 + 0.022 + 8.18 —2.6 | 10) 4 67 | 1863, Dec. 12, 1.02 +--+ 18.7 -- 0.027 -- 0.021 -+- 7.45 —2:2 9] 3 71 64, Dec. 17, 1.02 + 14.7 + 0.052 + 0.024 +8.13 —2.6 8] 3 In order to lessen the labor of solving these equations, they have been divided into groups, with respect to the years of observation, and the difference of helio- centric longitude of the earth and planet. The nineteen years of modern obser- vations have been divided into seven groups, of which the first and last each include two years, and each of the intermediate ones three years. Then, in each group of years, the equations which pertain to corresponding times of the year are grouped together, and will be combined into one. The numbers in column P. are assumed as the “measure of precision” of the residuals of each equation. These numbers were inferred from the numbers and excellence of the observations on which each normal was founded, the unit of precision was assumed to correspond to the probable error 1”.5, and no equation was allowed to have a precision exceeding 11. Hence the assumed probable error as cee tie, Jee : : of each equation is + But the residuals left after the final solution show that the measures of precision attached to the modern positions are too. great, and VD-/, that their probable errors are really about —~. iP Column M. gives the number by which the individual equations must be mul- tiplied in order that when those of each group are added together, the precision of their sum may be 2. It is approximately 5 inn being the number of indi- Ann vidual equations in the group. To make the solution more convenient with respect to decimals, the coefficients of dx will all be multiplied by 10, and those of dh and d& divided by 10, after condensing the equations in the manner proposed. Thus the following twenty-nine homogeneous equations are obtained : 70 THE ORBIT OF NEPTUNE. O=020e — 1890” LEME -LOStr - 86n = 03 eo sO ,Aldl SE (eae sO ay By a ILS BID S20 SEUSS OG ey i 2) BO I ee INT 1.03 090 + 86 = 02 AAI Ps OS SEV. Oe Se eT) ee ay B03 => OR <2) 20 tN ONIG Were 2 8 eet TAY = O88 GIGS Vie ONS ee De ONG Be 64 LENG 1D al MNS 5 a ee OD 5.05 = O28 SE CES Fy TRIE (2) meee RS Oe LS AL TOA 0.80 P2002 (2020. (abs 0.8 GOL ILGS ARO NENG els Dy eB (0) 5a Se Tae ES) EEO OF a ede Eel AQ 5 1.08 SNUG 3 EE Qe el anes 883 4 AGO 22558) Me Siay Oke eGR) (eo Ae wees8 A 0.87 2221 — 44 230s 2 AR00 225 M0 0:3 6a 0) ewe ARO TAS ce AO eel) e tes ee ONO POS sl umes 38 () ea eal 1 15 SOB 2 ONS 2 gangs A SE, BIG OR Ou SE OG) 2S B99. Se 7.09 BAND ete OWI 4 aye Siielen eo OSLO! a Tes BOR (PSO ee LD hoe R230 ee 8:83 ONO a = OOM A Ashe ee eo OA i TULOY Oe as O48 se 5G ly 9.3 + 10.68 SONY Ay ML ois BRE 15.8 TAA CSE 3 SHO (lO te Ao 5 8) SJ = ee AS SE TO) ep AO a Ry Bi 7 (350 e038 S338) 008, ee a di eal CME TO TBO: ce Ce ABS Id 5 GM is B59) OR SO AR § 31. Treating these equations by the method of least squares, but leaving wu indeterminate for the present, we have the four normals ” ” 1277.71z += 935.29002’) —350.59. + 22.46% + 5481.72 — 1263139 —0 935.29 + 1010.58 — 190.60 ot) OLS SL GEL LS TAOS (8) — 350.59 — ‘19060 + 805.88 2190/30), =. 935.5. 4 46ers PIB Te) HLS + 90.30 ENOL 45 BQ 7D The solution of these equations gives the following values of the unknown quantities in terms of «. dx =+ 0.650 — 2.067u dx’ = + 0.0800 — 0.342u (9) dh =+ 8.76 —12.18u dk =—3.79 — 7.64u THE ORBIT OF NEPTUNE. 71 Substituting these values of the corrections in equations (7), we have the fol- lowing residuals, which are grouped, as before, according to the time of year of the normals on which the equations were founded. Thus, the first residual of each series of modern observations corresponds to positions of Neptune observed when the planet culminated after 13’ 50” during the years to which the series belongs. h. m. In, Tit, The second, to observations between 10 50 and 15 30 The third, to observations between 7 30 and 10 30 ‘ The fourth, before 7 350 We first give the residuals from the equations (7), each of which is supposed. to be of equal precision; then the numbers by which the errors of observation are multiplied to reduce them to the assumed standard of precision derived from (6), column M.; and, finally, the apparent errors of the theory derived from ob- servations themselves, formed by dividing the residuals of the equations by the measures of precision. Actual mean residuals or ap- Residuals of equations. parent errors of theory. ee |+ 088 eek BO yon /—(0.7 —O06u 2 —0.55 —0.50u 2d series, !—0.2 —O8u 5 — 0.04 —0.16u 1846-1847, ) +24 41.54 5 + 0.48 + 0.50u —ll +140 4 —0.28 + 0.554 —2.5 —O0.7u 2 —115 —0.55u dd series, \!+ 0.5 —I1.du 7 + 0.07 —0O0.21u 1848-1850, ) + 1.0 + 0.64 8 +012 + 0.08¢ —0.7 +084 5 —0.14 + 0.16u +0.8 —O04u 1 + 0.80 —0.40u 4th series, !—0.6 —O.5u 6 —010 —0.08n 1851—1853, ) —1.6 5 — 0.32 —25 +4 0.6u 4 —0.62 + 0.15 —10 —27u 8 —0.12 —0.34u 5th series, !—0.2 —1.2u 7 —0.03 —O0.17u 1854-1856, )—14 +4040 7 —0.20 + 0.06u +04 41.00 7 + 0.06 + 0.144 +28 —l17u 8 + 0.35 —0.21u 6th series, }+ 5.7 —O4u 9 + 0.41 —0.05u 1857-1859, ) +18 +090 8 + 0.22 + O0.11u —3 +2.2u 9 —0.58 + 0.240 +28 —l4u 7 +040 —0.20u 7th series, }—0.6 —O.5u 9 —0.07 —0.06u 1860-1862, ) —2.5 +160 9 —0.28 4 0.184 +22 41.7% 7 + 0.51 + 0.240 Te THE ORBIT OF NEPTUNE. Actual mean residuals or ap- Residuals of equations. : parent errors of theory. OS eile 8 LO —04n Shc, | 08 7 KOs alan IGG NAO8 Oi 004 4 Ody =) 00m 6 0.38 4 alin § 32. The coefficients of u, taken negatively, represent the changes which would be produced in the residuals if we suppose the mass of Uranus to be nothing. It will be seen that these coefficients are generally smaller than the residuals them- selves, and that their actual effect on the modern residuals never amounts to “more than four-tenths of a second. Supposing that the modern observations cannot be relied on within this limit of error, we should arrive at this remarkable result,—that if the planet Uranus were unknown, its existence could scarcely be inferred from all the observations hitherto made on Neptune, unless these were’ combined in such a way as to show the systematic error of the theoretical radius vector. In fact, the orbit of Neptune, computed without regard to the perturb- ations of Uranus, would only exhibit an error of 9” when compared with Lalande’s position ; and a discussion of the modern observations would exhibit no sensible error in the heliocentric longitudes. This circumstance furnishes a very good illustration of the propriety of developing the long-period perturbations, the co- efficients of which amount to whole minutes, as perturbations of the elements which shall vanish at the epoch 1850. Under these circumstances, no reliable correction of the mass of Uranus can be concluded from the motions of Neptune. The solution of the preceding residuals does, indeed, indicate an increase of this mass by one-third, which seems altogether inadmissible, and is certainly very unreliable. Of the twenty-nine residuals, fifteen indicate an increase of the -mass, thirteen a diminution, and for one the coefficient of w vanishes: so that the increase of the mass of Uranus is indicated only by the fact that the residuals which favor it are generally a little larger than those which do not. § 35. If Uranus could scarcely be detected from the motions of Neptune, much less can an extra-Neptunian planet, unless it happened to be nearly in conjunction with Neptune at the present time, and to have a much greater mass than Uranus, —a highly improbable combination of circumstances. That there is no present indication of any such action is shown by the smallness of the apparent mean errors of theory in heliocentric longitude and radius vector during the whole period from 1846 to 1864. The following table shows the mean value of these errors during each of the seven series of modern observations, and the error of the geocentric longitude of the Lalande observations, putting «= 0. The error of radius vector is expressed as error of annual parallax. It will be remembered that the first of the four equations of each series arise from observations made about half-way between the first quadrature and the opposition, the second at opposition, the third between opposition and last quadrature, and the fourth near the last quadrature. ach series, therefore, gives four equations of the first degree between the errors of heliocentric longitude dv, and annual parallax dp. THE ORBIT OF NEPTUNE. 73 The coefficient of dv will be sensiely unity, and that of dp will vary from about — 0.5 to + 1.0 in each series. Ps Error of theory by the Lalande observations. + 27.3 (It will be remembered that the probable error of the Lalande position was estimated at 2’.8; but, owing to the over-estimate of the comparative precision of the modern observations, the weight assigned to this position in the equations of condition corresponded to a probable error of rather more than 4”.) By modern observations. Limiting dates. Error of longitude. Error of parallax. 1846-47, — 0.05 — 0.18 1848-50, — 0.08 — 0.03 1851-53, — 0.07 + 0.55 1854-56, — 0.08 0.00 1857-59, mIEN (NO? I. (08 1860-62, + 9.11 + 0.18 1863-64, + 0.02 + 0.28 These errors are as small as could be expected if the theory were perfect. There is, therefore, no indication of the action of an extra-Neptunian planet. But this fact does not militate against the existence of such a planet. The per- turbations of a planet, and its elliptic elements, develop themselves, not in pro- portion to the time, but in proportion to the square of the are described. In order, therefore, to determine the errors of. a slow-moving planet with as much accuracy as those of a quick-moving one, we must observe it through a period pro- portioned to its time of revolution. And we cannot detect a deviation of long period from an elliptic orbit until we have accumulated data much more than suflicient for the exact determination of the elliptic elements. For example, when the position of Neptune was determined from the perturbations of Uranus, the latter planet had been regularly observed through an are of some 270°. Moreover, the two planets had been in conjunction in 1824. They are also remarkably near each other when in conjunction. Yet, with all these circumstances so favorable to the development of large perturbations, Uranus only wandered about 5” from an elliptic orbit during the entire period of the modern observations. Perturbations will, at first, be developed in proportion to the square of the are passed over. Therefore, had Uranus been observed through an are of only 120°, the perturbations by Neptune would have been indicated only by deviations in heliocentric longitude of less than 1”. It is, therefore, almost vain to hope for the detection of an extra-Neptunian planet from the motions of Neptune before the close of the present century. § 34. Determination of the position of the plane of the orbit of Neptune. To determine the corrections of the constants p and g, which determine the 10 May, 1865. 74. THE ORBIT OF NEPTUNE. position of the plane of the orbit, we shall divide the residuals of latitude into five groups, the last one including three years, and each of the others four years. To find the heliocentric angular distance of the planet above the plane of its assumed orbit, we shall take an indiscriminate mean of the errors of geocentric latitude of each group, multiply it by 0.98 to reduce it to heliocentric error, and correct it for the mean error in longitude. The mean errors of geocentric latitude, with the equations to which they give rise, are as follows. The probable errors of each modern mean is estimated at 0’.15: so that the Lalande position is entitled to a precision of =. Limiting Dates. dB Equation of Condition. 1795, 15 Ta 0=+0.0813p —0.0588¢ +011 1esg4o. 20.07 — 0.866 — 0.500 — 0.96 1850253) | == 0075 — 0.934 — 0.358 078 18545 1 Oral — 0.978 — 0.208 aval esse ene | == Oem — 0.999 we 052 — 0.68 1362264, | O56 — 0.996 + 0.084 S180 The solution of which by least squares gives ip=— 0".73; og = — 0" 41. The residuals, multiplying the first by 10 to reduce it to actual observed error, are 1795, + 0.7 1846-49, —0.13 1850-53, -+ 0.07 1854-57, + 0.09 1858-61, + 0.07 1862-64, —0.10 So that the Lalande observation is represented within 0’.7, notwithstanding the small weight with which it enters the equations. In fact, if p and q were determined from the modern observations alone, the Lalande position would still be represented within about 0”.7. § 35. Concluded elements of Neptune. From equations (1) and (2) of this chapter, we have de =dx-+1.77 dh + 0.85 dk; on = dv + 0.01852 —0.0738%; So that, making the mass of Uranus 3;1,,, the concluded corrections to the provisional eleménts of § 19 are THE ORBIT OF NEPTUNE. de =+ 12.94 din=+ 0.5144 a= 8.76 Vien B19) ép=— 0.73 og=— 0.41 Applying these corrections to the provisional elements of § 19, they become sSinn © Bs n= 7864.9354 n= ++ 1201.69 b= + 1275.57 p= + 4909.44 q= —4137.87 CORPAG Reais ave TABLES OF NEPTUNE. § 36. Hundamental theory. . The fundamental theory on which these tables are founded is as follows: 1. Undisturbed elements of Neptune, referred to the mean.ecliptic and equinox of the epoch. h = eccentricity < sine perihelion = + 1201.69 k: = eccentricity < cos perihelion = -+ 1275.57 p = sine inclination X& sine node =-+ 4909.44 g =sine inclination X cos node = =— 4137.87 2 =mean motion in 365} days = 17864.935 ¢ = mean longitude at epoch = So0? O Sel) Kpoch 1850, Jan. 0, Greenwich mean noon. From these expressions we deduce mt =A Sali 3023 € = 0.0084962 loga =1.4781414 Period = 164.782 Julian years. In log a we have included the constants of log + introduced by the action of the planets, and also the effect of the secular variation of the longitude of the epoch, both of which are computed on p. 31. 2. Secular and long-period perturbations of the above elements. These are taken without change from the table p. 59. The elements being corrected by the addition of these perturbations for the epoch of computation, we thence deduce the elliptic place of the planet. 3. Perturbations of the co-ordinates. To the elliptic place of the planet we apply corrections for periodic perturb- ations of the co-ordinates, as follows: To the longitude in orbit, IP sind 26 /2.Cos / Join A IP, Oo A se dv. To the logarithm of the radius vector, R,, sin 1+ R,, cos 1 + d7. To the north latitude, computed with the true longitude in orbit, B,, sin v + B,, cos v + do. s TABLES OF NEPTUNE. 0 All these quantities have the same values as in § 19, pp. 40 and 41. The elliptic values of the co-ordinates being thus corrected, we have the helio- centric co-ordinates resulting from the concluded theory. To facilitate this computation, the following tables are constructed. They are designed to give the means of determining, for any date between the years 1600 and 2000, the principal auxiliary quantities which will be needed in computing the place of the planet from the above theory. Many of these quantities are modified so that the computer shall be troubled as little as possible with difference of signs. Thus, to all the quantities P,, P, f,, etc. constants are added so that they shall always be positive, and so that the signs of the products which form the perturbations shall be the same as those of sin /, cos /, etc. Again, constants are added to all the perturbations of the longitude and radius vector, to make them positive. ; § 37. Data given in the several tables. Taste I. gives the values of the “epochs and arguments” for the beginning of each fourth year from 1800 to 1952 inclusive, the years 1800 and 1900 beginning with Greenwich mean noon of Jan. 0, and all the other years with that of Jan. 1. P is simply the number of the four-year cycle before 1900, by which / and 0’ mee uf adding a unit for fractions. / is the mean longitude in orbit of Neptune, affected with the long-period per- turbations of that element, p. 39, and referred to the mean equinox of 1850.0. y is the negative of the longitude of the node affected by perturbations, counted on the orbit of the planet from that pomt which is equally distant from the node of 1850 with the equinox of 1850, and diminished by 1°, the sum of the constants added to the equations of longitude. 6 is the longitude of the node, referred to the mean equinox of the epoch, and diminished by 1’, the constant added to the reduction to the ecliptic. In the arguments | to 9 inclusive, the circle is divided into 400 parts. Repre- senting the mean longitude of a planet, referred to the equinox of 1850.0 by its initial letter, the values of the different arguments are as follows : of the next table must be multiplied, or Are. 1=U —WN, . ee? — 9 Sie NE CoE Sih NE Bo Al 2S — ANG omen “« 5-8 G3 (9) > Sl NG CON == 2e— ON; “« gaVJ Se href ia aN A Thus, Arg, 1 gives the difference of the mean longitudes of Uranus and Neptune, expressed in parts 100 of which make a quadrant; and so of the other arguments. At the bottom of the table the expression Af}, is the change in the longitude or the argument during that 180 days which commences with 1850, Jan. 0. 78 TABLES OF NEPTUNE. Fact. T gives the change in Af.) during a century: so that the change in any 180-day period within one or two centuries of the epoch may be found.by mul- tiplymg Fact. 7 by the fraction of a century after 1850.0 at which the 180-day period commences, and applying it to Af}. Avi) gives the second difference for any series of 180-day periods mathe one or two centuries of 1850: so that, knowing the first value of A‘), we can find a series of values by successive addition. The period of 180 days has been selected as a convenient one for computing a heliocentric ephemeris. If any other period, represented by NV days, be preferred, the corresponding values of A® and A® are found by multiplying Ny °Y 180” and P 2 (2 Atito) 1 Ais) N by 1802 Taste IT. gives the change of each longitude and argument for the first day of each month during a four-year cycle. The change in / is given for that cycle which begins with 1900 and ends with 1904. Column 7 gives, in units of the second decimal of seconds, the change in column / during one cycle. Hence, multiplying / by the whole number P of the preceding table, and adding the units of the product to the hundredths of seconds of 7, we have the change of mean longitude during the cycle numbered P in Table I. The correction is positive for years before 1900, because the mean motion is diminishing. § must be corrected in precisely the same way; but here the correction is nega- tive before 1900. Rigorously, both y and @ require correction similar to 7. But it is not requisite that either of these quantities should be accurate within a second, so long as their sum is exactly equal to the precession diminished by 1°’. The four-year changes of both y and 0, which destroy each other, are, therefore, neglected; but the change in 9 due to the secular variation of the constant of precession (0’.0227) is allowed for by the correction P60’. Taste II. gives the reduction from the first to the subsequent days of any month, or the motion of the epochs and arguments during a number of days one less than those on the left of the table. TABLE IV. gives the corrections to be applied to the longitudes and arguments for the epochs 1800 -+¢ to reduce them to the epochs 1600+ ¢, 1700 + ¢, and 1900 + ¢, respectively. They are expressed in the form a + TX Fact. T+ T? Fact. T?, in which 7'is the fraction of a century, TABLE V. gives the expressions for the perturbations of the longitude produced by Uranus. do each of the expressions P., and P., 14” has been added, and to P,, and P., 3” has been added. Hence, when these quantities, as given in the TABLES OF NEPTUNE. 79 tables, are multiplied by sin J, cos Z, sin 2 7, and cos 2 7, the sum will be too great by the quantity 14” sin 7+ 14” cos 7 + 3” sin 27+ 3’ cos 2 1, which expression has been subtracted from the equation of the centre. The con- stant 14” has been added to 62. Taste VI. gives the principal perturbations of the longitude produced by Saturn, namely, 18”.552 sin (S— WN) — 0.141 sin 2 (S— XN) — 0 .012sin 3 (S— NV) + (const. = 19’.000) Taste VII. gives the principal perturbations of the longitude produced by Jupiter, namely, 34” 121 sin (J—W) — 0.011 sin 2 (J—WN) + (const. = 35’.000) Tasie VIII. gives the term — 0’.524 cos (2S — NV) + (const. = 0’.600) TABLE IX. gives the terms —0’.058 sin S + 0’.047 cos S + (const. = 0’.100) TABLE X. gives the terms + 0’.166 sin (S—2N) + 07.436 cos (S—2N) + (const. = 0”.500) Tasie XI. gives the terms + 0’.783 sin (2J— N) —0’.164 cos (24 — WN) + (const. = 1’.100) TABLE XII. gives the terms —0’.101lsnJ + 0’.097 cosJ + (const. = 0’.200) TABLE XIII. gives the terms + 0.326 sin (J—2N) + 0'.297 cos (J —2N) + (const. = 0’.500) Taste XIV. will be more easily understood after we have explained the table of equation of the centre. Taste XV. is composed of the four following parts : 1. The equation of the centre in the undisturbed ellipse of 1890.0, or, 80 TABLES OF NEPTUNE. + 2501” 117 sin 1 — 2403’.358 cos + 1 L63\sin' 22 == 18 580icos 2)7 — 0.088sn38/ — 0.104 cos 31 2. The change in the equation of the centre produced by the perturbations of the elements / and / during that revolution of the planet which commenced 1779, Jan. 4, and ends 1943, Oct. 15. This change is represented by 2 dk sin 1 — 2 dh cos 1, dh and dk being taken from the table on p. 39 for the times corresponding to the various values of ¢ during the period in question. 3. The terms <4 aim 7 — 14’ eos ¢ — 3sn2/ — 3 cos2/l introduced to destroy the effect of the constants added to the values of P.,, P.,, P.., and P., to render them positive. 4, The constant 5929", added to render all the numbers of the table positive. During the revolution to which Table XV. corresponds, the planet passed from 180° mean longitude, and returned to the same point in the heavens; whence the table begins and ends with this value of 7. But since the commencement of the table corresponds to the values of 4 and / in 1779, and the end to these values in 1943, they do not correspond with each other. The sum of the constants added to Tables V. to XV. inclusive is 1°, which has been subtracted from y in Table I. Table XIV. is formed by subtracting the values of df and 4% during the revo- lution of Table XV. from the values of the same elements 164.78 years earlier or later. Or, we have AP, = 2 (dk — dh) AP. =— 2 (dW — bho) dh’ and dk representing the values of df and dé at any epoch, and dh, and dh, their values at that date of the period 1779-1943 when the planet had the same mean longitude as at the epoch in question. The sum of the sixteen quantities P,, sin /, P., cos 7, P.. sin 2 1, P.. cos 2 1, dv (; to 9), (, y, and the equation of Table XV. will give the true distance of the planet from its ascending node, which we represent by w. TasLE XVI. gives the reduction to the ecliptic for the years 1800, 1900, and 2000, together with the change of the reduction for a century. The constant 60” has been added to render all the numbers of the table positive. TABLES OF NEPTUNE. 8] The sum of w, 6, and the reduction to the ecliptic gives the true ecliptic longi- tude of the planet, referred to the mean equinox of the date. Tables of the radius vector. Taste XVII. gives the values of R,, +150, and ?,, + 100. The expressions for R,, and F,, are given on p. 40, § 19, and the units are those of the seventh place of decimals. &,,-+ 150 must be multiplied by sin /, and R., + 100 by cos 7, and the products included in the perturbations of log r. Taste XVIII. gives the principal terms of the perturbations of the logarithm of the radius vector produced by Uranus, as given on p.41. The constant added is 209. Taste XIX. gives the perturbations of the same element by Saturn, namely, 397 cos (S—WN) + 4cos2(S—WN) + (const. = 400) Taste XX. gives the perturbations of the same element by Jupiter, namely, 701 cos (J—N) + (const. = 700) The units of these tables are those of the seventh place of decimals. TABLE XXI. is formed of the four following quantities. 1. A constant formed by applying the necessary corrections to the logarithm of the mean distance. We have Mean motion, including its perturbations, 7864.935 Secular var. long. epoch, + 21.443 Elliptic mean motion, 7843.492 To which corresponds log a = 1.4787334 Constants of perturbations of log r (p. 31), — 5920 Negative of constants added to Tables XVIII.-XX., — 1509 Constant to be substituted for log a in expression for log radius vector, 1.4780105 2. The elliptic log 7 — log a, namely, + .0000078 — .0026857 cos 72 —.0025301 sm 7 — .0000014 cos 22 —.0000235 sin 2 1 3. The effects of the perturbations of h, anda during the same revolution to which Table XV. corresponds, represented by Moh . Mdk aaa? 1 Tare eps 1+ log a, M being the modulus of the common system of logarithms. ll May, 1865. rey) TABLES OF NEPTUNE. 4. The terms — 150sin? —100cos7 introduced to destroy the effects of the constants added to R,, and R,,. TABLE XXII. gives the values of B,, and B,, (p.40). The constant 0.30 has been added to each of these quantities to render them positive. Tastes XXIII. and XXIV. give the perturbations of the latitude produced by Saturn and Jupiter respectively, no constants being added. TABLE XXV. gives the values of log sin 7, to be added to log sin wu in order to obtain the elliptic latitude. They, as well as 6, have been obtained from the formulae sin? sin § =p + dp+ 0’.30 sin? cos6 =q + 6q¢— 0 .30 The values of dp and dq being taken from the table p. 39, and the corrections ++ 0”.30 being applied to destroy the effect of the constants added to B,, and B,,. § 38. Elementary precepts for the use of the tables. Express the date for which the position of Neptune is required, in years, months, and days of Greenwich mean time, according to the Gregorian Calendar. If the date is between 1800 and 1955 inclusive, enter Table I. with the year, or the first preceding year found therein, and take out the values of /, y, 0, and Arguments 1-9 inclusive. Note also the value of P. If the date is not between the above limits, enter as if the number of the century were 18. Enter Table If. with the excess of the actual year above that with which Table I. was entered, and with the month. Write the values of /, y, 0, and the arguments under those from Table I. Multiply / and 6’, the former interpolated to the day of the month, by P of Table I., and write the units of the product under the hundredths of seconds of / and 6, paying attention to the algebraic signs. Enter Table III. with the day of the month, and write down /, &c., under the former values. If the date is without the limits 1800-1955, enter Table IV. with the century, write the principal quantities under their proper heads, as before ; multiply column “Fact. 7” by the entire fraction of the century represented by the date, and column “Fact. 7” by the square of this fraction, and write the products under their proper heads. Add up all the partial values of 7, y, 0, and the arguments thus obtained, attending to the algebraic signs of the products, subtracting from the arguments as many times 400 as possible, and we have the final values of those quantities. Enter Table V. with the final value of Arg. 1, and take from it the five quan- tities there found. Multiply the first four of them as follows, using logarithms or natural numbers as may be most convenient : Pjbysine of JZ P., by cosine of 1, P..by sine of 21, P.. by cosine of 2 7. TABLES OF NEPTUNE. 83 But if the date is earlier than 1779 or later than 1943, P., and P., must first be corrected from Table XIV. Write these four products under each other, remembering that their algebraic siens will be the same as those of the sine and cosine of / and 2 J, unless the cor- rections make P., or P., negative. Write under them the fifth quantity, dv. Enter Tables VI. to XIII. inclusive, with the arguments at the top of each. Take out the eight remaining values of dv. Enter Table XV. with /, first reducing the minutes and seconds to decimals of a degree, and take out the corresponding equation by interpolation to second differences. Under these fourteen quantities write 7 and y, add up the sixteen lines, and call the sum w. Under w write 6; enter Table XVI. with w (reduced to hundredths of a degree) as the side argument, and the year as the top argument, and take out the reduction to the ecliptic. Add it to w and 6, and the sum will be the heliocentric longitude of Neptune referred to the mean equinox and ecliptic of the date. Enter Table XVII. with argument 1, and take out the values of ?,, and £,;. If the date is previous to 1779 or subsequent to 1943, multiply the values of AP., and AP, from Table XIV. by 10.53, and correct R,, and #,, as follows: Raby 10.53 AP,,, TB ii TOE AP, adding the units of these products to the last figures of R,, and R,;. Then multiply R,, by sme of J, RR, by cosine of 2, and write down the products with the algebraic sign of sine / and cos / respectively. Enter Tables XVIII. to XX. with their proper arguments, and write the results under the products thus found. Enter Table X XI. with the argument /, and take out the corresponding number, the first two figures of which are at the top of each column. Write it so that the last figure (the seventh place of decimals) shall be under the last figures of the former numbers. The sum of the six numbers thus found will be the common logarithm of the radius vector of Neptune. Enter Table XXII. with argument 1, and take out B,, and B,,. Multiply the former by sin / and the latter by cos J. Enter Tables XXIII. and XXIV. with their proper arguments, and take out the corresponding numbers, applying the proper algebraic signs. Take the sine of ¢ from Table XXV., and multiply it by the sine of wu (wu having already been found). The sum of the five quantities thus found, each taken with its proper algebraic sign, will be the north latitude of Neptune above the plane of the ecliptic of the date. Thus we shall have the heliocentric co-ordinates of the planet. The computer can then pass to the geocentric place by the method which he prefers. If an ephemeris is wanted during a series of years, it will not be necessary to 84 TABLES OF NEPTUNE. take the arguments from Tables I-IV. more than once in three or four, or even five, years. The intervals of computation are first to be chosen, and need not be less than 180 days for the heliocentric place. Then compute the values of 2, y, 0, and the arguments for the first date of the series, and again for a date an integral number of intervals (not generally exceeding ten) later. The longitudes and arguments for the intermediate dates may then be found by continual addition of the differences for 180 days (if this is the interval) from the bottom of Table I. § 39. EKxamples of the use of the tables. As a first example, we will compute an ephemeris of the heliocentric positions of Neptune for the years 1865 to 1868 inclusive. The intervals of computation will be 180 days, and we commence with the date 1864, Oct. 13, and end with 1869, March 21, between which are nine of the assumed intervals. We first compute the epochs and arguments for the extreme dates as follows: y 0 Table IT., 1864, : 228 54 54.387] 180 15 49.25 Table IIL, Year 0, Oct., : 7.88 ING, S< Table IV., Day 13, | Epochs & Ares. 1864, Oct. 13, Arg. Table IL., 1864, Table III., Year 0, Oct., Table LV., Day 18, For 1864, Oct. 13. 268.36 eco bo Co 2 Lowe — fie Ja) 2. For 1869, Marcx 21. @ Table IT., 1868, : - 17.73 |228 55 36.39 | 130 18 28.26 Table IID., Year 1, March, | 2 3% : 2.25 46.25 Fact. x 8, all) == Oil Table 1V., Day 21, 7 10.64 uf 2.18 For 1869, March 21, 17 4 59.81 | 228 55 49.19 | 130 19 16.68 (e) Are. Table IL., 1868, Table III., Year 1, March, Yable LV., Day 21, For 1869, March 21, (ee) bo Oo TABLES OF NEPTUNE. 85 The epochs and arguments for the intermediate dates are now formed by suc- cessive additions of the change in 180 days, deduced from Table I. T, the fraction of a century after 1850, being 0.148, the first differences for 180 gaye with the arguments, are found to be as fallow: 1 4 35.908 — .0012 5.177 19.590 1.150 5.497 15.421 12.20 6.7 4.5 82.03 16.6 14.2 Ci oo To om Ee oo bw 1864, Oct. 18 7 25 36.69 1 435.908 228 55. 2.60 130 16 20.37 93.79 208.23 268.36 25. 216. 200. 144.9 276. 1865, Apr. 11 8 28 12.598 1 435.907 228 55 — 7.777 130 16 39.960 94.940 213.727 283.781 See) 222. 204.3 176.93 292.6 BAD 1866, Apr. 6 9 32 48.505 1 485.905 228 55 18.131 130 16 59.550 96.090 219.224 299.202 49.4 229.4 208.6 208.96 809.2 288.4 1868, Sept. 22 16 0 23.920 1 435.898 228 55 44.013 130 18 57.093 102:990 252.206 391.729 122.6 269.6 234.4 1.14 8.8 373.6 1869, Mar. 21} 17 459.818 228 55 49.189} 130 19 16.684 § 104.140} 257.703 | 7.151} 134.8 | 276.3 238.7 | 33.17 | 254 | 387.8 (in Dee. of deg.) CG / 16 56 8.4702 © 7 19.6 9.5468 f 52 1 16.0066 Caan, 54 10 17.0833 LONGITUDE. ae 24.04 25.57 19.35 4.02 1:21 i$ js oa Ts 12, in IP, COS UL P.,sin 21 P.,¢os21 Ov, Ov, Ov, Ov, OUs OV, Ov, Ovs OVg Tab. XV. l y u Red. Kel. Longitude 7.05 18.60 2.18 1.03 13.79 5.80 30.58 0.78 0.18 0.04 0.95 0.28 0.64 0 31 29.74 16 023.92 228 55 44.01 eI i aNHoNmon TINS ANW OOO Or - oo SSSSSMSSSODARONON HOON tw OHO 245 28 58.97 180 18 57.09 22.33 C OD ket OD OD OT Or Or He 15 48 18.89 86 TABLES OF NEPTUNE. Rapius Vector. 24 26 41 44 158 165 176 178 FR, sin 1 4 11 13 Ff. cos b 154 156 158 169 170 6 log ry 82 0G 73 48 44 dlog r, 10 Ny 23 129 154 6 log rs 366 524 691 1394 1396 Prin. term 1.4750064 1.4749650 1.4749250 L.4747074 1.4746754 log r 1.4750679 1.4750427 1.4750199 1.4748825 LATITUDE. log sin u 1922: 9: 9.932667 9.958964 9.962660 log sin 7 49285: AQ284: 8.492831 8.492764 8.492753 log sin /% : Az 8.425498 8.451728 8.455413 B,, sin 1 B,, cos l OF, ORs Po + 0.06 k + 0.11 § - 0.00 0.00 # + 0.26 5 : + 0.05 | —- 0.56 — 0.55 pllg + 0.25 | —130 31.03 | —131 35.09 28 |—138 7.04 | | +++ ROSSS ounwnoo ito} bo Latitude 5.22 | 180 81.27 B.3E —138 6.63 | Inserting the results for the five middle dates, the computations of which have been omitted in printing, for want of space, we have the following heliocentric ephemeris of Neptune: Date. Longitude (mean Logarithm of radius Tatiiadel i equinox of date). vector. , Ojvan?, ” 90 ” | 1864, Oct. 15, 7 016.47 1.4750679 —1 29 25.22 § 1865, Apr. 11, 8 6 7.48 1.4750427 —13031.27 | Oct. 8, 912 1.05 1.4750199 —1 3185.33 § 1866, Apr. 6, 10 17 57.51 1.4749986 —132 387.86 | Oca, 3; 11.28 56.84 1.4749778 == 11 83 By | 1867, Apr. 1, 12°29 58.92 1.4749567 —13843541 § Sept. 28, 13 36 3.52 1.4749342 —135 51.38 § 1868, Mar. 26, 14 42 10.14 1.4749097 —136 25.26 & Sept. 22, 15 48 18.39 1.4748825 —138716.98 § 1869, Mar. 21, 16 54 27.73 1.474853 —138 6.63 | These co-ordinates being interpolated to every ten days, and corrected for nutation, the geocentric co-ordinates may then be computed and corrected for aberration in the usual way. ; ee ee TABLES OF NEPTUNE. 87 As another example, let us compute the heliocentric position of Neptune for Greenwich mean noon of 1795, May 9, the epoch of the normal place derived from Lalande’s two observations. l y 0 Arg. 1] Arg. 2 OL ” i Table I., 1892, 66 5112.69 | 2285948.26 | 13034 22.60 | 157.30 Table IL., 8” May, 7 16 23.32 0 035.01 0 212.33 Colt BSP 13 —.01 Table III., Day 9, 0 252.26 0.28 0.87 0.05 0.24 § Table IV., 1700, 141 3119.97 | 35942 21.53 | 35853 55.63 | 166.69 | 85.00 § Fact. 7 X .9536, + 45.60 + 6.58 —8.75 | —.05 | —.36 Wace LE S< Oil, + 0.22 0 0; +.01) —.02 1795, May 9, 215 4234.19 | 228 4251.61 | 129380 22.67 | 331.77 20= 71.25 1 = 215.7095 Arg. 8 4 5 6 7 Table I., 1892, 320.05 298 186 38 314.2 Table IL., 3” May, 104.18 82 45 29 216.6 Table IIL., Day 9, 0.68 1 0 0 1.4 Table IV., 1700, 70.66 327 242 328 298.6 Fact. 7 X .9536, | +012 | —1 0 —1 | +0.2 1795, May 9, 95.69 307 73 394 31.0 Longitude. Latitude. i Oe lS AHS wc BOWOOENN Eq. Cent. i 1 215 423 y 228 42 5 u 85 84 8.77 0 129 80 22.67 Red. Heliptic 52.26 Long. (Mean Eq.) 215 5 23.70 Nutation 5 Long. (True Eq.) é eee Sian — 9.74 R,, sin l — 141 log sin u 9.998700 PCOS a(t — 0.51 R,, cos l — 63 log sin @ 8.494895 P., sin 21 + 4.90 ory 234 log sin f, 8.493095 P., cos 2 l + 0.63 Or. 60 |, : Ov, 24.08 or, 747 é ‘i dD, 948 | Prin. term 14816441 | Basin! — 0.22 Ov, 69.05 Be cos! —= 059 dv, 0.54 | logr 14817278 i ive 80; 0.07 Of, — 0.46 ae, 0.92 By SEW AG OW Latitude ++ 146 59.49 88 TABLES OF NEPTUNE. TABLE I. FOR THE BEGINNING OF EACH FourtH YEAR FROM | 1800 to 1952. 6 33 27.21 36 5.97 88 44.75 41 23.54 44 2.35 46 41.18 20.02 58.88 4 37.75 16.64 55.54 2 34.45 15.58 02.33 31.29 10.26 49.25 28.26 7.28 3 46.31 25.35 4.42 43.50 22.60 171 40.75 2 19.89 59.04 88.20 17.38 56.58 35.80 15.02 54.26 33.01 12.77 52.06 11 31.35 14 10.66 ” 19.583 + 0.044 + 0.0002 TABLES OF NEPTUNE. 89 TABLE L Epocus AND ARGUMENTS ror THE BEGINNING or EACH FourTH YEAR FROM } 1800 ro 1952 (Continued). Year: 2 3 4. 5 6 7 8 9 1800 285.66 241.09 22 137 35 333.1 92 390 1804 330.27 366.26 121 191 70 193.2 227 105 1808 374.88 91.44 220 245 104 3.2 362 221 1812 19.49 216.61 319 300 139 313.3 97 336 1816 64.10 341.78 18 854 174 173.3 232 52 1820 108.71 66.96 117 8 209 33.4 367 167 1824 153.32 192.13 216 63 244 293.4 101 283 1828 197.94 317.31 315 117 279 153.5 236 398 1832 242.55 42.48 14 171 314 13.5 371 114 1836 287.17 167.65 113 226 349 273.5 106 229 1840 331.78 292.82 212 280 384 133.6 241 345 1844 376.40 18.00 310 334 19 393.6 376 60 1848 21.02 143.17 9 3888 54 253.7 111 176 1852 65.64 268.34 108 43 88 113.7 245 291 1856 110.25 893.51 207 97 123 373.8 380 6 1860 154.87 118.68 306 151 158 233.8 _ 115 122 1864 199.49 243.86 5 206 193 93.9 250 237 1868 244.16 369.03 104 260 228 353.9 385 353 1872 288.73 94.20 203 314 263 214.0 120 68 1876 333.35 219.37 302 369 298 74.0 255 184 1880 | 377.98 344.54 1 3 333 334.0 390 299 1884 22.60 69.71 100 aa 368 194.1 125 15 1888 “| 67.22 194.88 199 132 3 54.1 259 130 1892 111.85 320.05 298 186 38 314.2 394 246 1896 156.47 45.22 397 240 72 174.2 129 361 1900 201.06 170.29 96 295 107 34.3 264 a 1904 245.69 295.46 195 349 142 294.3 399 192 1908 290.32 20.63 294 3 177 154.4 134 308 1912 334.94 145.80 393 58 212 14.4 269 23 1916 379.57 270.97 92 112 247 274.5 4 138 1920 24.20 396.14 191 166 282 134.5 138 254 1924 68.82 121.30 290 221 317 394.6 273 369 1928 113.45 246.47 389 ~ 275 352 254.6 8 85 1932 158.08 871.64 88 330 387 114.7 143 200 1936 202.72 96.81 187 384 22 874.7 278 316 1940 247.35 221.97 286 38 57 234.8 13 31 1944 291.98 347.14 385 92 92 94.8 148 147 1948 336.61 72.31 84 147 126 354.9 283 262 1952 381.25 197.47 182 201 162 214.9 17 378 ay 5.497 15.421 12.20 6.7 43 32.03 16.6 14.2 Fact. T | + .001 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (io) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 12 May, 1865. . 90 TABLES OF NEPTUNE. TABLE IL. : REDUCTION OF THE Epocus AND ARGUMENTS TO THE First Day or EAcH Monn | IN A Cycie or Four YEARS. SS > Negi pen eed eee pees et OI SIONS NoRNWHConnkwHoe BW AHRASWNASKONAS St Sept. 1, Oct. 1, Nov. 1, Dec. 1, Year 2, Jan. 1 Feb. NNNNYNNNNNHNNNE Ft ft fet fet fet et et et tt Le Ne a = a =a) qooocoocoocoooesoo . ANMDONINNTNNTAAD DAA2ADNAINAIMNINIT SE SP Rie coco 0D CO Cobo pO DO DO bP NRPeHHeSHSoOoOOoOSCS Oo Columns U’ and 6’ interpolated to the day of the month must be multiplied by the integer, P, of Table I. (not interpolated), and the units of the product added to the hundredths of seconds of J. TABLES OF NEPTUNE. 91 TABLE II. | Repuction or THE Epocns AND ARGUMENTS TO THE First Day or EACH MontH In A Cycie or Four Years (Continued). 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Year O, Janel 0.00 0.00 0 0 0 0.0 0 0 Feb. 1, 0.95 2.66 2 il 1 5.5 3 2 Mar. 1, 1.83 6.14 4 2 1 10.7 6 5 Apr. 1, 2.78 7.80 6 3 2 16.2 8 U May 1, 3.70 10.37 8 4 3 21.6 11 10 June 1, 4.64 13.02 10 6 4 Ziel 14 12 July 1, 5.56 15.59 12 U 4 32.4 17 14 Aug. 1, 6.50 18.25 14 8 5 37.9 20 7 Sept. 1, 7.45 20.90 16 9 6 43.5 22 19 Octs 1e 8.37 23.47 19 10 7 48.8 25 22 Nov. 1, 9.31 26.138 21 11 a 54.3 28 24 Dee. 1, 10.23 © 28.70 23 12 8 59.7 31 26 Year 1, : Jan. 15 11.18 31.36 25 14 9 65.2 34 29) Feb. 1, 12.12 34.01 26 15 9 70.7 37 31 Mar. 1, 12.98 36.41 29 16 10 Mond 39 34 Apr. 1, 13.92 39.07 31 17 11 81.3 42 36 May 1, - 14°84 41.64 33 18 12 86.6 45 38 June 1, 15.79 44,29 35 19 12 92.2 48 41 July 1, 16.70 46.86 37 20 13 97.5 50 43 Aug. 1, 17.65 49.52 39 22 14 103.0 53 + 46 Sept. 1, 18.51 52.18 41 23 15 108.5 56 48 Oct. 1; 19.51 HL 7/5) 43 24 15 113.9 59 51 Nov. 1, 20.46 57.40 45 25 16 119.4 62 53 Dee. 1, 21.38 59.97 47 26 17 124.7 65 55 Year 2, damm, I> 22.32 62.63 50 27 17 130.2 68 58 Feb. 1, 23.27 65.29 52 28 18 USY5)57/ 70 60 Mar. 1, 24.12 67.68 54 BY 19 140.7 73 62 Apr. 1, 25.07 70.34 56 30 20 146.2 76 65 May 1, 25.99 72.91 58 32 20 151.6 79 67 June 1, 26.93 75.57 60 33 21 157.1 81 70 July 1, 27.85 78.14 62 34 22 162.4 84 72 Aug. 1, 28.80 80.79 64 35 23 167.9 87 74 Sept,1, 29.74 83.45 66 36 23 173.4 90 iia Cet. 1, 30.66 86.02 68 37 24 178.8 3 79 Nov. 1, 31.60 88.67 70 38 25 184.3 96 82 Dec. 1, 32.52 91.24 72 40 25 189.6 98 84 Year 3, Vewal, 1, 33.47 93.90 74 41 26 195.1 101 87 Feb. 1, 34.42 96.56 76 42 27 200.7 104 89 Mar. 1, 35.27 98.96 78 43 28 205.7 107 91 Apr. 1, 36.22 101.61 80 44 28 211.2 110 94 May 1, 37.13 104.18 82 45 29 216.6 112 96 June 1, 38.08 106.84 84. 46 380 222.1 115 98 July 1, 39.00 109.41 87 47 30 227.4 118 01 Aug. 1, 39.94 112.06 89 49 31 232.9 121 03 Sept. 1, 40.89 114.72 91 50 32 238.4 124 106 Oct. 1, 41.81 117.29 93 51 33 243.8 126 108 Nov. 1, 42.75 119.95 95 52 34 249.3 129 111 Dee. 1, 43.67 122.52 97 53 34 254.6 132 113 92 TABLES OF NEPTUNE. TABLE (Lil REDUCTION FROM THE First TO SUBSEQUENT Days or ANY Montn. Ee i) (ev) aS a ® ay @ © RHOooo.~ bo Lei eo) oooeo OCOAwWS Noroe AOS; eb WoMlo o> Mer ke Rohe WSONS ol No eon! MANS) IS) SSS) HHHOoS SssoS SSS SS) SS) ontrkon He oo Ob DDok oo aw Pesesso Sssssso sesso MOoOomOn~I SISISISKS: ooooco oooo WWOnem RwoHoYN MARDO tt He Oooo oooso OO He o> I DOR we DANA TH He oo 09 CO NNWnNree oo Rt ooo ee $9 DS St co 02 00 I WO DWC rPrReoen SSS ih S) oooos oooeo NHSSS SSISHS AEEOS Pees Bee ee aero RSaHNS THD SS ODHRMN PwNWos ouomnt OOH Wb Or Or He ee Hy oO CO GO bO COR Be ee oo co co bob on RRO Ono mw SESS Or CMO mop Wows or Re ee Ree Ore co bo bo Borneo Pee ee See Nrwona eee [IMIS SAIS QGOOSS OGOqgeeg SeEge) bo po to bo bo AwwoHo eee eee Ore G9 CO bo AANA Hee ee POD et et RRR RR gogo gn g9 cogDtoos pototons Cmaaws awWone coco bo bo bo bo bo bo bo bo DPNwppypee brbppr bPmwpwnwre go toto tots SODAID ORO eee OH HOAHAABH OD GO oo See ODA PW rary es S9995 Ss99959 SsS959 Ssse5S Sesss Sssoo es SSe99 SS999 SS995 SSssSsS Ssesss sss es S2999S SSSsSs9 SsS9959 Sessa sos: [oe oe °) Orar-I-1c0 DADoan bobo bob bbb DS) Ly) TS i) 6 7 7 U 8 8 8 9 9 0 0 0 Nello e} OAoOxaAnNA HH o> co forer) HH boo aos a oon (ore wo bob ' In January and February of 1700, 1800, and 1900, Table ITT. must be entered | | with a number of days 1 greater than the real day of the month. TABLE IV. CorrECTIONS FoR PAst AND Furure CENTURIES. 1600 Fact. 7 | Fact. 7? Fact. 7 | Fact. 72} 1900 Fact. 7? ° , ” UA uo ” ” 283 152.88 | +.94.09 | + 1.03 | 141 81 19.5 + 47.82 + 0.17 i 859 24 35.91 | + 14.05 0 859 42 21.6 + 6.90 4 357 48 0.68 | —18.59 0 858 53 55. — 9.17 Hite ona 333.41 | —0.08 | +0.01 69 | —0.05 170.36 | —0.69 | —0.08 5. _ 0.38 +0.22 | +.0.04 +0.13 ee) sil a 42, 0 AST, aa +05 98.6 | 410.2 [gee cel SoHecossS poh at a) “1 tb ete DMOAAMDaPwbe TABLES OF NEPTUNE. 93 ODNA TN PoOMH oO oo iow ayes a i) =I lor) eH eee Oo RO be H 00 CO 6 I to ay Ree Nejio oa Ker) (oot or) wowdsd bo ooo np a oOownmsd Gr Oo orb. mown mmaokb 7 8 8 8 93 9 0 0: 1 2 (=) S S on RA 2 Or Go 09 cs to OOD eR He HE CO bo on PISS MDD D2 OOS TS Tog fH ONIN» ¢9 BO CO ONfs1 On CR CRESEA CH EONS bobo bb Lo OOo con--100 No} On oO Oe ee oO wonmtbp re eS co 0 CO 0. 0. 0. 0. 0. 0. 0. 0. i iL iL, i, 1. iL i iL 1 1. 1. il il 1. 2, 2, 2, 9. WHO o macs KANN re CO Orb ao On oo © Qwnoy PF HOE He Co COWS =D nip wn bh ONAM B SOOM Or Or Or Ov Daa oor eas or AN On oO On S or STAI cO ON SiGagece Ch Cagstays fe ES Come fo MS WoL oR AO 39/00) 09/20! 00) Hm CO bo et S pees CX ER CB RS iP Nan BOR oT te ieaten g239 KAW 109 al for) rs On (ee) on an ry 94 TABLES OF NEPTUNE. wv > 31.97 82.17 32.38 32.58 82.77 32.96 83.15 83.34 33.52 83.70 33.87 34.04 384.21 34.37 84.53 34.69 84.84 84.99 35.14 35.28 85.42 35.55 35.68 85.81 85.93 36.04 36.16 86.27 36.37 36.47 36.57 86.66 86.75 86.83 36.91 86.98 87.05 On bo go 92.9900 9 So OOND bo 09 co CO bo bo Bm wlbte Door MIMD © SCHED “I Bec LOW M tS) iS iat ONMO HH COwAANM co oOo SCHnwM © for) DOW CORN S bpppwr AAaAN I ao Soe. PF PRE PF PRR AWAD i c em ORO bNwek oa S850 PAWS oO oO 8 8 9 0 0 0 1 1 1 2 C2 E+ CO D co HOOe He Oooo © le a ee OW Ae bo OO oO co SP peso f AAA FR Bee RR noo oO So B=-100 bo re ies) ror) NAO oO 92 99 9 9 G9 So FPN we OI~1 0 POAM A IQho @ [ohana eg bo pppwr or a | =) a NO MTN gr rH “I (Je) Nii EO BE Ort io tO & oo EH OV bobopp On ive) bo rs rss SVOIOOKs Ol OO Rt et NBEO oO bon oO DAAR oo G9 9 G9 bo bo bo bo CO Lien & aruHM.S S 2000 © or bob bb BOIBICETCO, Sg bo S er peg S o © So Wb NIN #8SO0W Pie ive lve) LoS =m YW SSeS A PEER RB og WROD ® AKROS {eo} -Hppre Re pny eye 2) a to ee ; TABLES OF NEPTUNE. i i } Vance. v. VI. VII. Arg. 1 2 8 Pra Diff. || Py | Dif |] Pea || Poo dv, Diff dv, Diff dv, Diff. “uw ” u Ww” ” “” ” ” ” ” uM 100 25.10 20.48 4.28 || 1.85 || 12.96 387.56 69.12 101 95.26 | °6 llo0.08 | 235 || 4.20 |] 1.80 || 13.24 | 928 | 37.57 | °% 1 eo12 | 20° 102 TaD || C22 Iino aa | 82) Aa | Tas || TBR || C22 | ayes || | Gon || OO) 103 Omar ee toll Loesei| 2232 "| 4009) ||) dean |) T3e79) ||) S27 sz5e) |) 22° 1) eolog | 2°29 104. 25.70 aa 18.98 oes 8.93 || 1.17 || 14.08 eee 87.54 | OO* | 69.06 ao b b 7 b 04 § 105 25.82 18.61 3.84 || 1.14 || 14.84 37.53 69.02 106 25.92 | 27° Ilitg.o3 || 2:38 || 3.75 || 1.11 || 1460 | 026] 37.51 | 2-921 68.97 | &°5 § 107 96102) |) @2° Iit7ge | 237 || 3:65 ||| 109 |) tae7z | 27 | 3748 | 2931! ego1 || 20° | 108 26.10 ee 17.47 | °39 | 3.56 |] 1.07 || 15.18 0.26 | 37.45 | 2°31 @g.g5 | 2-08 | 109 AGS || oe || aewe) || 33 3.46 || 1.05 || 15.38 Boe 37.42 eee | Geis || S67 110 26.22 16.71 3.36 || 1.04 |} 15.63 37.88 68.70 11 26.96 | °° |l16.32 | °39 |) 3.97 || 1.04 || 15.87 | %24] 37.33 | o°5] o8.62 | 2-08 | 112 96,98 | 2° 115.94 | 2-28 |] 3.17 |] 1.04 16.11 0.24 1 37.98 | 2°95 | 68.52 | O10 F 113 96.30 | °° |/15.56 | 238 || 3.07 |] 1.04 GESA a C28 87.23 | 2°5 | 68.41 pune] 114 26.29 nous 15.17 a8 2.98 || 1.06 16.57 as 37.17 ee | 68.30 Es 115 26.28 14.79 2.88 || 1.07 || 16.80 87.11 68.18 116 26.25 0.03 144.41 | 2-38 || 2.78 || 1.09 Iy/0H || Ce 37.05 0.06 | 68.05 os 117 96.20 | 2°95 |/14.03 | °38 |] 2.69 |] 1.41 UX || C22 36.98 A lS 2: 118 ABS || COS |eGs | SO2 NI) AG Ij Ti || si || C29 |) Beem || CH) area | © 119 26.08 | S07 |/18.27 ne 2.51 || 1.18 || 17.65 oe 36.82 | OOF} 67.61 | > ') le 0.0 - 120 26.00 12.90 9.42 || 1.21 || 17.84 36.74 67.45 121 25.90 See 12.53 ee 2.34 1.26 18.03 CUO) 36.65 0-09 | 67.28 2 122 25.79 : 12.17 oe) 2.26 || 1.30 18.22 Gu) 36.55 Cou® |) By 2 123 De CGiagn coe pele tan mre) Real |e Teel leeds cS ceedG aa linc-CONGGroD | mcs 124 25.54 | 6-53 |/11.45 ee AHO |e | WG | EE |) BeBe ee || ae eas 5 b O.II 125, 25.40 11.10 2.08 || 1.46 || 18.74 36.24 66.53 126 95.24 | 2-16 |/10.76 | 9-34 || 1.95 || 1.52 || 18.89 | 15 | 3613 | © 66.32 | O21 5 127 25.07 | 17 {110.42 | 2-34 || 1.89 |] 1.59 || 19.05 | o26 1 36.02 | ° 66.10 | °:22 | 128 94.89 | 228 ||10.09 | 233 |/ 1.82 || 1.66 || 19.19 |. 924 # 35.90 | © 65.88 | 22 f 129 24.70 eee || 9.77 ee 1.76 || 1.73 19.33 ne ain || 2 65.65 Be : . 5 fo} b 130 24.49 9.45 1.70 || 1.80 |} 19.46 35.65 65.41 i 131 94.98 | 9:21 || 9.14 | 9-31 || 1.65 |] 1.88 || 19.59 | 9-23 | 35.51 | © 65.17 | 0-24 § 132 24.05 | 23 || 8.84 | °-3° |] 1.60 || 1.96 || 19.70 | OF! | 35.38 | © 64.91 | 0-26 J 133 93.82 | 9-23 || 8.55 | 9-29 || 1.55 || 2.04 || 19.82 | 0-12 | 35.94 | © 64.65 | 2-26 | 134 23.57 | 225 || 8.27 oe 1.51 || 2.12 || 19.92 | 9-19 | 35.09. | © 64.38 | 227 | . . 0.10 oO. 0.2 | 135 23.31 8.00 1.47 || 2.21 || 20.02 34.94 64.10 136 93.04 | °-27 || 7.73 | 9-27 || 1.44 |] 2.29 || 90.11 | 2-09 | 34.79 | © 63.81 | 0-29 137 9277 | 9:27 || 7.48 | 9-25 || 1.41 || 2.38 || 20.19 | 0-08 | 34.63 | © 63.52 | 0-29 | 138 99.49 | 9-28 || 7.93 | 0.25 || 1.89 || 2.47 ]| 90.97 | 0-08 | 34.47 | © 68.22 | 9:39 8 139 22.19 a 7.00 ne 1.37 || 2.56 || 20.84 ae 34.31- | ° 62.91 | 03! § : . Ke) ° 0.30 Ff 140 21.89 6.77 1.36 || 2.65 || 20.40 34.14 62.61 141 91.58 | 9:31 || 6.56 | 9-21 || 1.85 || 2.74 || 20.46 | 006 | 33.97 | © 62.29 | 0-32 5 _ 142 21.27 | 9-31 || 6.36 | ©-20 |] 1.34 || 2.83 || 20.50 | 0-04 3.79 -|| © 61.96 | 2-33 | 143 20.95 | 9-32 || 6.17 | 9-29 || 1.34 || 2.92 || 20.54 | 0-04 | 33.61 | © 61.63 | °-33 | 144 20.63 ae || 5.99 | 2-28 |! 1.35 |] 3.01 || 20.58 | 9-04 | 33.43 | © 61.30 | °-33 | 2 3 0.17 0.02 ° °. 145 20.29 5.82 1.35 || 3.10 |} 20.60 33.24 60.96 a 146 19.96 | °-33 || 5.67 | 15 |] 1.87 }| 3.18 || 20.68 | 2-03 | 38.05 | 60.61 | 2-35 | 147 19.61 | °35 || 5.53 | 14 |! 1.89 || 8.27 || 20.64 | 0-01 | 32.85 | 0.20} 60.25 | 0-36 148 19.26 | °-35 || 5.40 | 9-13 |] 1.41 || 3.86 || 20.65 | °-0% | 32.66 | 0-19] 59.89 | 0-36 F 149 18.91 Be || 5.28 ee 1.44 || 3.44 |] 20.65 | 0-00 | 32.45 | 0.21} 59.52 0-37 le | * | 0.00 0.20 o. 150 18.56 || 5.17 1.47 || 3.52 || 20.65 32.25 59.14 ; | | j 96 TABLES OF NEPTUNE. ms iv) Or @Qipeto H O¢ bobo bobs bo AQAunowe 10 co ante wowmc Or Or Or oT ON [J%} 3 4 6 0) 5.74 2.75 90 07 «25 44 gogo bobo Or Or or or Coe ee co 2 SSW or oo $2 99 99 g9 Cor Co or mao He HHO eR gogegaes 90 Orc ee ark wo bo co Go 09 bo bo (=) coro DOO Ce) bob top bo Beet Oo No} OsI=1 0 or ee oo LD Selo 0) oS oO =I) =) i=) oO Or [oor en) co Co DS bo ite} boo 0 ce Desc oO [oor a ns) NOoO@Oa g2 gogogogo go gogo oF OP AA FP AA Ae P PPP Pp RAR RR RRO Pee hohe ha Gaba h > het) a9 Be Ree Re oO io) eS ive) TABLES OF NEPTUNE. 97 ee OD SOO oo retorts po ptotots lore oor) ie Moeitve) S Ske & 24.96 24.45 23.94 23.43 22.93 22.48 21.93 21.44 20.95 20.46 19.98 19.50 19.03 18.56 18.09 17.62 17.16 16.71 16.26 15.82 15.37 14.94 14.50 14.08 13.66 13.24 ” 12.83 12.48 12.03 11.64 11.25 10.86 4. 8 3 8 73 9 5 2 ) DOOR MADR On or for) He bo OO mT oon (or) LOPLIbS go woedGG9 oo coEVGD09 9 90 90 He Or > DDD OC HPNNwW fF ADHD=1 Wreon OrOt Re ee He HR OL Or rt BPOoOOomo oO eo) iet) (es) bo oo bo ng or bo 8 bo bo emboOnm BOM o SIn19.90 90 COND poprr te TA719M70 © OOrFD HW WHR OD for) DOoocr on =~] ioe) oO for ieh =) “RH Db or ite | he leslie gs mM 2ANN ww wOoOoH (Je) _ DWN BH PRE e EB Hee ee eee eee ee eee ob MESS OS HHA ae eo Don bos bo ee ell orl oe lo et oS ONS Ee Boog for} =~I bo S) or io) 98 TABLES OF NEPTUNE. OH orca Wt CO COUR OF OH aI bob topo So 2OMN DASE tw Com co sT Bb CSN Welle > lor) co 09 09 0 PRON bo Oi 00 bo Or os © bo bo Oo bo bo bo bo bo NNN bo bo bob Nb fo fo 99 90 99 wm OOKtD on r=g bo or SISO co ODO OT He He OF won e Ow oa to bo bo bo 2 mM Go GAIN to wo SW Mw oo ns iss or owocwrI i) PR 08) (00)00)09)b9 DARD Ne) 5. 5. 5. 4, 4. 4. 4. 3. 3. 3. 3. 2. 2. 2. ADI0 OM DOD WO BABA Oto w AAS tw AGN DOs He OF bo ary o a wnoucown > ROO cc Ob ie) aI bo oo eo HH OS ANIOO OO OOOKY KF NHNNWKL ON Do QreOe Ors1O bo bo Qwowsl Doe ee So OOst-1 a wooo Oo BROOD ON =I co aceon SSNS ate) LS oe) bor ppo Co ROR et AAWDS a former erie | nn oo eesoS S S999 9 SSOP HF Hee » perp oO i) is ow SS co o - Or Or Or O18 (5 Tors ive) bo bo bo bo es esses Ss sess £ SSess © SBP EP Pee BH bee prop NWDAN [oS ody On rs to ie) oo TABLES OF NEPTUNE. VIII. | IX. Xx. XT. | XID. | XI. | Tare. | VIII. 4 5 6 7 8 9 4. Ov, Ov, Og Ov, Ovg Oy Ov,4 ww “uw ” ” ” ” ” 0.08 | 0.15 | 0.94 | 0.94 | 0.8 0.80 1.12 0.08 | 0.14 | 0.96 | 1.06 | 0.28 | 0.84 1.12 0.10 | 0.18 | 0.97 | 1.19 } 0.26 | 0.88 1.10 0.13 | 0.12 | 0.96 | 1.81 | 0.24 | 0.91 1.07 0.18 | 0.10 | 0.95 | 1.48 | 0.22 | 0.98 1.02 0.23 | 0.09 | 0.93 | 1.54 | 0.20 | 0.94 0.97 0.29 | 0.08 | 0.89 | 1.64 | 0.18 | 0.94 0.91 0.36 | 0.07 | 0.85 | 1.72 | 0.15 | 0.98 0.84 0.44} 0.06 | 0.79 | 1.79 | 0.18 | 0.90 0.76 0.52 | 0.05 | 0.73 | 1.85 | 0.12 | 0.87 0.68 0.60 | 0.04 | 0.67 | 1.88 | 0.10 | 0.88 0.60 0.68 | 0.04 | 0.60 | 1.90 | 0.09 | 0.78 0.52 0.76 | 0.08 | 0.52 | 1.90 | 0.08 | 0.72 0.44 0.84 | 0.03 | 0.45 | 1.87 | 0.07 | 0.66 0.86 0.91 | 0.03 | 0.38 | 1.83 | 0.06 | 0.59 0.29 0.97 ; 0.08 | 0.381 | 1.77 | 0.06 | 0.52 0.23 1.02 | 0.03 | 0.25 | 1.69 | 0.06 | 0.45 0.18 1.07 | 0.03 | 0.19 | 1.60 | 0.07 | 0.88 0.18 1.10 | 0.04 | 0.14 | 1.50 | 0.07 | 0.82 0.10 1.12 | 0.05 | 0.09 | 1.40 | 0.09 | 0.26 0.08 1.12 | 0.05 | 0.06 | 1.26 | 0.10 | 0.20 0.08 101 IX. X. XI. XII. | XIII. § 5 6 v7 8 9 Ov, Oe Ov, Ov, Ov, | ” ” ” ww” Ww i 0.05 | 0.06 | 1.26 | 0.10 |} 0.20 } 0.06 | 0.04 | 1.14 | 0.12 | 0.16 0.07 | 0.03 | 1.01 | 0.14 | 0.12 0.08 | 0.04 | 0.89 | 0.16 | 0.09 0.10 | 0.05 | 0.77 | 0.18 | 0.07 0.11 | 0.07 | 0.66 | 0.20 | 0.06 0.12 | 0.11 | 0.56 | 0.22 | 0.06 0.13 | 0.15 | 0.48 | 0.25 | 0.07 0.14 | 0.21 | 0.41 | 0.27 | 0.10 0.15 | 0.27 | 0.85 | 0.28 | 0.18 0.16 | 0.83 | 0.82 | 0.80 | 0.17 0.16 | 0.40 | 0.80 | 0.81 | 0.22 0.17 | 0.48 | 0.80 | 0.82 | 0.28 0.17 | 0.55 | 0.83 | 0.83 | 0.384 0.17 | 0.62 | 0.87 | 0.84 | 0.41 0.17 | 0.69 | 0.48 | 0.84 | 0.48 | 0.17 | 0.75 | 0.51 | 0.84 | 0.55 0.17 | 0.81 | 0.60 | 0.83 | 0.62 0.16 | 0.86 | 0.70 | 0.88 | 0.68 0.15 | 0.91 | 0.80 | 0.31 | 0.74 0.15 | 0.94 | 0.94 | 0.30 | 0.80 TABLE XIV. If the date is earlier than 1779, Jan. 4, or later than 1943, Oct. 15, the values of P., and P., must be corrected as follows, the argument being the } year: Year. APs1 AP. Year. AP.y AP. Year. AP AP. H “” "” 1614.2 — 56.838 — 31.88 1700.0 — 65.57 — 24.94 1943.8 + 72.87 -+ 16.62 1620.0 — 57.44 — 31.46 1710.0 — 66.53 — 24.02 1950.0 + 73.39 + 15.88 1630.0 — 58.49 — 80.73 1720.0 — 67.50 == 23:04 1960.0 + 74.21 + 14.68 1640.0 — 59.52 — 29.98 1730.0 — 68.46 — 22.04 1970.0 + 75.02 + 13.44 1650.0 — 60.56 —— 2918 1740.0 — 69.40 — 21.00 1980.0 + 75.81 + 12.18 1660.0 == (Fil f5%6} — 28.36 1750.0 — 08382) — 19.92 1990.0 + 76.58 + 10.88 1670.0 — 62.60 — 27.54 1760.0 ——le22, — 18.82 - 2000.0 + 77.382 + 9.52 1680.0 — 63.62 — 26.70 1770.0 — 72.10 — 17.68 1690.0 — 64.60 — 25.84 1779.0 — 72.87 — 16.62 Between 1779 and 1943, P. and P, require no correction. For dates earlier ‘than 1614 or later than 2000, the corrections must be computed from the | formule. 102 TABLES OF NEPTUNE. TABLE XV. EQuaATION OF THE CENTRE. Equation. iff, | Equation. ” i bo 4 bo e 1 pan ae eS “a ny Sar sansa sg pay Bee No a bo PWR & Se ons Oobonr rs es I ler) bo Sgr SST Sars KG} BeOS or co ebn ft ee — me bc (es) He OL OLS Hob bo bo oe (ee) monoe = rs ay ie) Bee bbb co co Ee Sa HB & 00 00 GO re bo ry bo ray = (oe) 9 3) 7 31 7 3 6 35 6 9 Syenpenn bo bo bo bo mec) SGtb=1 1 22 11.78 1 21 16.21 1 20 20.25 1 19 23.90 118 27.19 bob bb CON Hm CO be bo co co CD Se Co bo (Shores Ike's) [e-) oO by on oS aooor GS cow He COO bo OV -J Bee ca eee So Co Co He OVD phe oF i co 09 bo Onan bo co oO oO oooo So oooo i=) oooo o oooo i=) oOoceo io oOo°oSe i=) oocso (=) oococo oe oooo oo So TABLES OF NEPTUNE. 103 DA BL.H) XV. EQUATION OF THE CENTRE (Continued). 1 Equation Diff. 1 Equation. Diff. Lt Equation. Diff. fo} fe} ’ “” ww” ° ° D ” ” ° ° , ” uM 315 0 029.70 0 0 18 11.18 45 1 0 24.20 316 0 0 30.80 ae 1 01855.91 | 4473 46 Te koa || eee 317 0 032.96 Ze 2 0 19 41.40 ee 47 1 228.56 es 318 0 036.20 3:24 8 0 20 27.68 we 3 48 1 330.65 Base 319 0 0 40.50 fae 4 0 21 14.59 Fest 49 1 432.67 gis 320 0 045.88 5 022 2.26 50 1 5 34.58 321 0 052.33 6.45 6 0 22 50.63 48.37 51 1 6 36.37 pa 322 0 059.84 oes 7 0 23 39.68 Hoase) 52 1 738.02 cai. 323 01 8.42 2 8 0 24 29.40 ee 53 1 839.51 ise 324 0 118.06 aes 9 0 25 19.78 Sees 54 1 9 40.82 ane 325 0 128.76 10 0 26 10.79 55 1 10 41.93 326 0 14952 | 20 rel Oly 928.) Be 56 SL ZONE) | 8) 327 0 153.34 ee 12 0 27 54.67 Deets 57 1 12 43.46 ae 328 0 2 7.21 SPY 13 0 28 47.50 S23 58 113 43.85 fae? 329 0 222.13 meee 14 0 29 40.91 oe 59 1 14 43.96 Le 330 0 238.10 15 0 80 84.87 60 1 15 43.78 331 0 255.11 shee 16 0 31 29.3 54-51 61 1 16 43.28 S92 332 0 3 13.16 A - 17 0 32 24.41 59°23 62 117 42.45 peice 333 0 332.24 ae 18 0 33 19.95 eee 63 1 18 41.27 aa 2 334 0 352.85 Bai 19 0 34 15.97 Aes 64 119 39.71 io 335 0 413.48 20 0 35 12.47 65 1 20 87.76 336 ) AGGGR | Berry 21 036 9.42 | 5°95 66 1 21 35.41 57-65 337 ® 2bans || Eee 22 037 6.81 pee 67 1 22 32.62 Ds as 338 0 5 22.94 Ftd 23 038 4.61 o 2 68 1 23 29.39 rae 33 0 5 48.09 Bee 24 039 2.81 es 69 1 24 25.70 ae 340 0 614.24 25 040 1.40 70 1 25 21.58 341 © Guile |) eee 26 041 0.35 58.95 71 1 26 16.87 Se 342 0 7 9.47 ies iil 0 41 59.64 aed 72 1 27 11.69 54 3 348 0 7 38.54 sae 28 0 42 59.26 oe 73 128 5.97 Shee 344 0 8 8.57 he 29 0 43 59.19 203 74 1 28 59.71 cae : ' 3- 345 0 839.54 30 0 44 59.41 75 1 29.52.88 346 0 911.46 Sa 31 0 45 59.90 Sono 76 1 80 45.46 Seas 847 0 9 44.30 37-04, 32 047 0.63 pe 77 1 31 87.45 Suey 348 0 10 18.07 ie 33 048 1.60 eae 78 1 32 28.82 SOS 349 0 10 52.74 Ae 34 049 2.78 gas 79 1 33 19.55 ee ag 350 0 11 28.32 85 050 4.16 80 134 9.64 351 012 4.79 JOLY 36 O81 5.71 Eu 81 1 34 59.06 xe ae 352 0 12 42.14 aa 3 052 7.41 ae 82 1 35 47.80 Nae 353 0 13 20.35 Sri 38 053 9.25 pas 83 136 35.85 | 4°-05 354 0 18 59.42 oe 8 0 54 11.20 Gig 84 1 87 23.19 fae 355 014 39.34 40 0.55 13.25 85 138 9.80 356 01520.09 | 475 41 OB ine || ARE 86 13855.67 | 45-87 357 OMG TAs: || oH 42 0 57 17.54 pas 87 139 40.80 | 45:73 358 0 16 44.04 yale 43 0 58 19.75 fine 88 1 40 25.15 sre 359 017 27.22 43-1 44 0 59 21.98 Boe 89 141 8.73 43-5 018 11. 4 104 TABLES OF NEPTUNE. TABLE XV. EQUATION OF THE CENTRE (Concluded). 1 Equation. Diff. 1 “Equation. Equation. Diff, ° ° p ” ” fe} fe} / ” ° , ” a“ 90 1 41 51.51 120 156 10.41 154 54.44 91 14233.48 | 41-97 121 1 56 23.47 1154.35.48 | 2898 92 1 43 14.63 se 2 122 1 56 35.47 1 54 15.50 ey) 93 1 43 54.95 40-3 123 1 56 46.39 153 54.51 20-99) 94 1 44 34.42 39-47 124 1 56 56.24 153 32.52 oD) 38.62 22.99 95 1 45 13.04 125) 157) 5:02 158 9.53 | (96 1 45 50.78 ee 126 1 57 12.72 1 52 45.55 meee 1) 99 1 46 27.65 Bae 127 «| 157 19.34 1 52 20.59 oe) 98 147 8.62 ape 128 1 57 24.87 1 51 54.66 aes 99 1 47 38.69 35-07 129 1 57 29.33 151 27.76 ee 92 { 34.16 27.85 100 1 48 12.85 130 | 1457 32.70 150 59.91 101 148 46.08 | 33:73 131 1 57 34.99 HOS |) S22 102 1 49 18.38 ome 132 1 57 36.20 150 1.38 ae 103 1 49 49.73 ye o5 133 1 57 86.82 1 49 30.71 3°- i 104 150 20.13 Coes 134 1 57 35.86 1 48 59.13 3-5 29-44 32.49 105 150 49.57 185 1 57 88.31 1 48 26.64 106 1 51 18.03 ane 136 157 30.19 1 47 53.25 ose 107 1 51 45.52 shor 137 1 57 25.98 1 47 18.97 34-2 108 1 52 12.01 aoe 13 157 20.70 1 46 43.82 ine elas Q 9 r-4 42 2 ow -O2 109 1 52 87.51 Brie 139 157143 146 7.80 56 88 110 153 2.01 140 157 6.91 1 45 30.92 111 1 58 25.50 23.49 141 156 58.41 1 44 53.20 Sale } 112 1 58 47.97 ay) 142 | 156 48.84 1 44 14.65 30255 113 154 9.42 pa 148 «=| 156 38.21 1 43 35.28 eH 114 1 54 29.84 Sones 144 | 156 26.52 1 42 55.10 fox 19.38 40.97 115 1 54 49.22 145 156 13.78 1 42 14.13 116 155 7.56 1334 146 155 59.99 1 41 32:8 40-75 117 155 24.85 anes 147 155 45.16 1 40 49.85 yas j 6=«18 155 41.10 : im. 148 155 29.28 140 6.57 Boi 119 1 55 56.28 5: 149 1 55 12.38 1 89 22.55 Ta: 02 14.13 44-75 120 156 10.41 150 1 54 54.44 1 88 37.80 TABLES OF NEPTUNE. 105 TABLE XVI. REDUCTION To THE Hc.iIPric. Argument w. 1800 1900 2000 fe} ° fe} ° uu u u” 0 | 90 | 180 315 | 110.23 | 109.72 | 109.21 tees ON eels 314 | 110.20 | 109.70 | 109.18 2 | 88 182 318 | 110.11 | 109.61 | 109.10 3 | 87 183 812 | 109.96 | 109.45 | 108.95 4 | 86 |} 184 311 | 109.74 | 109.24 | 108.74 5 | 85 | 185 310 | 109.47 | 108.97 | 108.47 6 | 84 | 186 309 | 109.14 | 108.64} 108.14 7 | 88 187 308 | 108.74 | 108.25 | 107.76 8 | 82 | 188 307 | 108.29 | 107.80 | 107.382 9 | 81 | 189 806 | 107.78 | 107.80 | 106.81 10 | 80 | 190 805 | 107.21 | 106.73 | 106.25 iil |) 7@) {] ale 804 | 106.58 | 106.11 | 105.64 12 | 78 | 192 803 | 105.90 | 105.44 | 104.97 13 | 77 | 198 802 | 105.15 | 104.70 | 104.24 14 | 76 | 194 801 | 104.35 | 1038.91 | 103.46 15 | 75 | 195 800 | 103.50 | 103.06 | 102.62 16 | 74 | 196 299 | 102.60 | 102.17 | 101.74 ly |) (43 || ee 298 | 101.64 101.22 | 100.80 18 | 72 198 297 | 100.64 | 100.23 99.82 19 | 71 | 199 296 | 99.58] 99.18] 98.78 20 | 70 | 200 295 | 98.48] 98.09] 97.69 21 | 69 }, 201 294 | 97.33} 96.95 | 96.57 22 | 68 | 202 293 | 96.13 | 95.77] 95.40 23 | 67 | 203 292} 94.89] 94.54} 94.18 24 | 66 | 204 291 | 93.61] 98.27] 92.93 25 | 65 | 205 290 | 92.29] 91.96] 91.63 26 | 64 | 206 289 | 90.93} 90.61} 90.29 27 | 63 | 207 288 | 89.53] 89.22] 88.92 28) |, 62 | 208 287 | 88.09} 87.80} 87.51 29 | 61 | 209 286 | 86.62] 86.35] 86.07 30 | 60 | 210 285 | 85.12] 84.86) 84.60 31 | 59 | 211 284 | 83.58] 83.34] 83.10 382 | 58 | 212 283 | 82.02} 81.80] 81.57 3 57 | 213 282 | 80.43} 80.22} 80.02 34 | 56 | 214 281 | 78.82] 78.63] 78.44 385 | 55 | 215 280} 77.18] 77.01} 76.84 36 | 54 | 216 279] 75.52) 75.387} 75.21 37 | 53 217 278 73.85 73.71 73.57 38 | 52 | 218 277 | 72.15) 72.03) 71.91 39 | 51 | 219 276 | 70.45) 70.3 70.24 40 | 50 | 220 275 | 68.73] 68.64] 68.55 41 | 49 | 221 274] 66.99] 66.93] 66.86 42 | 48 222 273 65.25 65.20 65.16 43 | 47 223 272 63.50 63.47 63.43 44 | 46 | 224 271} 61.75} 61.74] 61.72 45 | 45 | 225 270 | 60.00} 60.00} 60.00 14 May, 1865. 106 TABLES OF NEPTUNE. TABLE XVII. COEFFICIENTS FOR PERTURBATIONS oF Loc. Rapius VEcTOR. Argument 1. 150 200 250 800 Raa Re 1 Rsi Rea Rs 1 Re 1 Rs 1 Rea 0 176 142 } 181 45 78 142 212 170 1 178 189 | 129 45 79 145 214 168 2 180 136 | 126 45 81 147 216 166 3 181 18 124 45 82 150 218 163 4 183 130 } 122 46 84 152 220 160 5 184 127 | 120 46 86 155 222 158 6 185 124 | 118 47 88 157 224 156 7 186 121 116 47 91 160 | 226 153 8 186 119 | 118 48 93 162 227 151 } 9 187 116 | 111 49 96 165 } 229 148 4 10 187 113 | 109 50 98 167 230 146 f 11 187 110 | 107 51 100 169 232 143 f 12 187 108 | 104 62 103 171 233 140 13 187 105 } 102 53 105 173 235 138 14 187 102 } 100 54 108 175 237 135 15 187 99 97 56 110 177 238 132 16 187 96 95 57 113 178 239 129 17 186 93 93 59 116 180 240 126 18 185 90 92 60 119 181 241 122 1) 184 88 90 61 122 183 241 119 20 183 85 89 63 125 184 | 242 116 21 183 83 87 65 128 185 242 1138 22 182 80 85 67 131 186 243 109 23 182 78 83 70 134 187 244 105 24 181 76 81 72 137 187 244 102 25 180 74 80 74 140 188 | 244 98 26 178 72 79 76} 148 189 | 244 95 27 177 70 78 78 146 190 4 244 92 28 175 67 77 80 150 191 244 88 29 173 65 76 83 153 192 243 85 3 171 63 75 85 156 192 243 82 3 170 61 74 88 158 192 | 243 79 } 32 168 60 73 90 161 191 242 76 3e 167 59 72 93 164 190 | 242 73 34 166 57 72 96 167 189 241 70 30 165 56 71 99 170 188 240 67 3 163 54 70 102 173 188 239 64 387 160 53 70 105 176 187 238 60 38 158 51 69 108 180 187 237 57 39 155 50 69 110 183 186 235 54 40 153 49 69 113 186 186 234 51 y 41 151 48 69 116 189 185 232 48 42 148 48 70 119 191 184 230 45 f 43 146 48 70 121 194 183 228 42 44 144 47 71 124 197 181 226 39 y 45 142 47 72 127 200 180 } 224 387 46 140 46 73 1380 202 .| 178 222 35 47 138 45 74 133 205 176 220 32 48 135 45 75 1386 207 174 218 30 49 13 45 77 139 210 172 216 28 50 131 45 78 142 212 170 214 26 Notr.—Before 1779 and after 1948, we have ies VWOSB Kien ° 1614 — 1778 dlog r=— 314. NRG — 101538 NP, 1943 — 2108 d logr = + 314. bw wwpp co co 029 CO (oo) TABLES OF NEPTUNE. 107 PERTURBATIONS OF LoGARITtHM or RaApius VECTOR. TABLE XVIII. TABLE XIX. TABLE XX. Argument 1. Argument 2. Argument 3. 100 i] oa 396 390 383 377 371 365 359 353 346 340 834 828 822 316 310 3804 298 292 286 280 274 268 262 257 251 245 239. 234 228 293 218 213 207 202 196 191 186 181 176 171 166 161 156 151 146 141 137 182 128 123 ODARD A PwWHeH © ar S oo be Bee Or He oO oo MID S100 TT aIHOO oO So CcOoOOrF WN WRENS So FPWR, ~) S o bo S (=) 108 _ TABLES OF NEPTUNE. TABLE XXII. PrincipaAL TrrmM or THe LoGaritHm or THE RaAprius VEcTOR. Argument 0. 1.4 1.4 1.4 806676 815373 788978 7112 5192 8352 7540 5001 7722 7960 4799 7089 8371 4587 6455 808775 814364 785818 9169 4130 5179 9554 38885 4538 9931 8631 8896 810299 3566 8252 810657 813092 782607 1005 2807 1961 1344 2513 1314 1674 2208 0667 1994 1894 0020 812305 811570 779373 2606 1237 8726 2897 0895 8079 3178 0543 7432 8449 0182 6786 813710 809812 776140 8961 9433 5495 4202 9045 3 4851 4432 8648 4653 8242 814864 807827 5064 7404 252: 6972 5430 6532 5597 6084 815753 805629 769767 5899 * 5166 9143 6034 4696 8522 6159 4217 ' 7904 6273 8731 7290 816376 803236 766679 6468 2735 6072 6549 2227 5470 6619 1712 4872 6678 1191 4279 816727 800668 763691 6763 0128 8108 6789 } 799588 2580 6804 : 9041 ‘ 1957 6807 8488 1889 816800 797930 760826 6782 7366 0270 6752 6796 759719 6711 6221 9174 6659 5641 8636 816596 795056 758104 6523 4467 7579 6439 3873 7061 6344 8274 6549 623: 2671 6045 816121 792063 755548 1452 0838 0221 789601 788978 PrincipAL TerM oF THE LoGaritHm or THE Rapius Vector (Continued). Poh GCom OMOND HX 744487 1.4 753181 2731 2290 1858 1434 751020 0615 0218 749830 9452 749083 8724 8375 8036 7706 747386 7076 6777 6488 6210 745942 5685 5439 5204 4980 744766 4563 4372 4191 4021 743862 8715 8580, 38456 3344 743242 8152 8073 8007 2953 742910 2879 2860 2852 2856 742872 2899 2937 2987 38048 743120 3204 3300 3408 8529 748661 8804 8958 4123 4300 TABLES OF NEPTUNE TABLE XXII. Argument J. 1.4 744487 4685 4894. 5114 5346 745588 5841 6105 6380 6665 746961 7267 7584 7910 8246 748592 8948 9314 9689 750074 750469 0873 1286 1707 2137 752576 3024 3480 8944 4417 754897 6385 5881 6384 6895 757414 7940 8472 9010 9553 760103 0660 1223 1792 2367 762948 8533 4123 4718 5317 765922 6531 7143 7759 8379 769008 9631 770262 0895 1531 772170 198 209 220 232 242 253 264 275 285. 296 306 327 326 336 346 356 366 375 385 395 404 413 421 430 439 448 456 464 473 480 488 496 593 511 519 526 532 538 543 559° 557 563 569 575 581 585 590 595 599 605 609 612 616 620 624 628 631 633 636 639 109 1.4 772170 2811 3454 4098 4744 775392 6041 6691 7343 7996 778650 9303 9956 780609 1262 781915 2567 8219 3869 4518 785166 5812 6456 7098 7738 788376 9011 9642 790271 0897 791519 2138 2753 3364 3971 794575 5174 5768 6357 6941 797519 8093 8661 9223 799779 800380 0875 1413 1944 2468 802985 8496 4000 4497 4986, 805468 5942 6408 6866 7317 807759 110 TABLES OF NEPTUNE. TABLE XXII i COEFFICIENTS FOR PERTURBATIONS OF LATITUDE. Argument 1. Arg. 0 100 200 3800 Bex Bea Ber Bea Bear Bea Ber Ber nu” ” ” ” ¥ M “" “" Ne 0 0.52 0.40 0.41 0.00 0.04 0.18 0.14 0.58 10 0.56 0.35 0.31 0.00 0.04 0.18 0.21 0.65 20 0.61 0.31 0.23 0.03 0.04 0.17 0.30 0.70 30 0.67 0.2 0.15 0.06 0.03 0.18 0.3 0.73 40 0.72 0.2 0.09 0.10 0.02 0.20 0.45 0.73 50 0.73 0.18 0.05 0.13 0.01 0.23 0.50 0.70 60 0.72 0.13 0.03 0.16 0.01 0.28 0.52 0.65 70 0.67 0.08 0.02 0.17 0.02 0.34 0.52 0.59 80 0.59 0.04 0.03 0.18 0.04 0.42 0.51 0.52" 90 0.50 0.01 0.04 0.18 0.08 0.50 0.51 0.46 100 0.41 0.00 0.04 0.18 0.14 0.58 0.52 0.40 PERTURBATIONS OF LATITUDE. TABLE XXIII. TABLE XXIV. Arg. 5. Arg. 8. Arg. 0 100 200 300 0 100 200 300 “wr u” ” ” au “” ” “” 0 — 0.30 + 0.06 + 0.30 —0.06 +0.04 | +0.56 — 0.04 — 0.56 10 —0.29 +011 + 0.29 —0.11 + 0.13 + 0.55 —0.13 — 0.55 20 — 0.27 + 0.16 + 0.27 —0.16 + 0.21 + 0.52 —0.21 = 0/7) 3 — 0.24 +0.19 ++ 0.24 —0.19 + 0.29 + 0.48 —0.29 — 0.48 40 OP ++ 0.23 + 0.21 — 0.23 + 0.36 + 0.43 — 0.36 — 0.48 50 (aly + 0.26 +0.17 — 0.26 + 0.48 + 0.87 — 0.48 = 0:37, 60 —0.12 + 0.28 + 0.12 — 0.28 + 0.48 + 0.30 — 0.48 —0.8 70 — 0.08 + 0.30 + 0.08 —0.30 + 0.52 + 0.22 == 0152 — 0.22 80 — 0.03 +0.31 -+ 0.03 —0.31 +. 0.55 +0.14 == 0155 —0.14 90 + 0.02 +0.31 — 0.02 —0.31 + 0.56 ++ 0.05 — 0.56 — 0.05 100 4- 0.06 + 0.30 — 0.06 — 0.30 + 0.56 — 0.04 — 0.56 + 0.04 TA BiH XOX Vv. VALUES OF SIN 7 FOR EVERY TEN YEARS. Year. 1600 1700 1800 1900 0 8.498705 8.496503 8.494292 8.492066 10 8485 mee 6282 BAe 4071 ae 1842 Bait 20 8265, eae 6061 nee 3849 cia 1619 ae 3 8045 eee 5840 oak 3627 ee 1395, Za 40 7825 age 5619 e2k 3404 ee) 1171 Se 220 221 222 224 50 8.497605 8.495398 8.493182 8.490947 60 7385 Rae 5177 aon 2959 eas 0723 ey 70 7165 hes 4956 eae 2736 as 0498 ce) 80 6944 ete 478 mae 2513 223 0274 pm 90 6724 rae 4513 ee 2289 oe 8.490049 225 221 221 5 223 225 8.496503 8.494292 8.492066 8.489824 7 ISHED BY THE SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION, WASHINGTON, D. C. | JANUARY, 1866. & Lake Level 564 Ocean Level > ~~ ~~ Moraine Cavities mnneb aso Potsdam . and ai L. of theWoods J, Patey T oho Metamorphic and L. Superior igneous rocks . ; Madeline I, Sand Stone Explanatory Notes. | (figures represent the height in feet above the Ocean Ash col Ne eece Boulders. ; Vertical Seale 1000 feet tothe inch. —) ‘Lith. of Bowen & Co, Philada Vx ea “er 40, 3 a | eA : : : Cra iyeeNi yt fh Satie & Prenatal yo ee Z Cal enteas: mprlacrih tl wh hy iat wenesinag Tine Sten 2 i . oh ms pROFILE OF THE FRESH WATER DRIFT DEPOSITS rROM LAKE ERIE to THE LAKE OF THE WOODS ; | < Col? Charles Whittles ey, | CLEVELAND, OHIO. a are van: hi 9 Michigan. Canada. Ohio & : a Lake Erie Port Stanley | LMichigan \ Grand Haven \ Cleveland Silurian Limestones Upper Ocean Level gS5 eS a mAs 920 Roches Moutonne 1150 a ne ( Sheboygan (<=! B E. 2 LWinnebaso S) Moraines and Cavities of the Oconto Ri L. Superior tsdam S.Stone Axoic Slates ( Siliceows ) Sienite YS ntmogon Ss Ss Potsdam Sandstone and Conglomerate . 3. Metamorphic and igneous rocks < 2 % L. of theWoods 3 y 3 aaa eae a & g eae = = FS Sienite 5 5 iS) 1120 BY 1200 I R IB tnd du Lac L.Superior L. Superior Masnesian Slates Madeline T, 3 Potsdam Sand Stone : ; Mae OnCO. OSs USO G Explanatory Notes. Ash colored ; x aegeene . Explanatory Not ed marly Clay laminated. Red laminated Clay . Blue marly € laminated Cay. Coarse Sand, Gravel & Boulder a Figures represent the height in feet above the Ocean ; + Drite. Yellow hard paw." * | + eeece Boulders. z ene aoe ae S 0 e Vertical Seale 1000 feet tothe inch. Tith. of Bowen & Co. Philada Tht a ating Limits oF tHe GLACIER DRIET or NORTH AMERICA] 8 ot | NOTE ee es The arvows show the direction \ | of the ditt torees and Gla SUA \ AL. B Tine of Section. \ 1o3%e- Moraine Knolls and Cavities Cha® Whittleser. Dec. 1864: \ > i Lith. of Bowen & Co Philada SMITHSONIAN CONTRIBUTIONS TO KNOWLEDGE. ON THE FRESH-WATER GLACIAL DRIFT NORTHWESTERN STATES. BY CHARLES WHITTLESEY. COMMISSION TO WHICH THIS PAPER HAS BEEN REFERRED. Prof. L. AGassiz. Prof. J. P. Lusney. Josrrpu Henry, Secretary S. I. COLLINS, PRINTER, PHILADELPHIA. TABLE OF CONTENTS. PAGE List of Illustrations. . 0 ¢ : : 0 9 0 vane Vv General remarks Wh : ‘ : ° 0 : f : : 1 Copper Boulders and Nuggets in the Drift . : : : : 0 : 11 Local Sections and Details. : : 0 0 5 0 6 : 12 Drift Sections . P ; ; : ; ; 0 F ; ’ 12 Vegetable Remains of the Drift : : é : 0 : é ; 13 Animal Remains of the Drift . : ; : 0 6 : o : 15 Shells from the Drift and other Superficial Materials of the Northwest ; 4 f 16 Ancient Terraces and Ridges : : : : : : , Z 17 Glacial Strie : : : : ; > Encroachment of the Water upon the Land . : A eS 3 . ‘ 24 Boulders Moved by Ice a Q . . 0 - : : : 28 Lakes of Erosion : : 9 0 . 0 0 3 : 29 ( iii ) ILLUSTRATIONS. PLATES. Map Illustrating Limits of the Glacial Drift of North America. Profile of the Fresh-Water Drift Deposits from Lake Erie to the Lake of the Woods. Figure 1. Figure 2. Figure Figure 4. Figure 5. Figure Figure Figure Figure Figure 10. Figure 11. > §9 SI WOOD-CUTS. Drift Cavities or ‘‘ Potash Kettles,” near Greenbush, Wisconsin ; Drift Cavities 15 to 60 feet deep, head-waters of Oconto river, Wisconsin Outline views of Moraine Hillocks and Cavities. Randolph, Portage County, Ohio Fac-Simile of a Slab of eet Taneraee alieted aid striated ae the drift forces; from beneath the red clay. Light House, Sheboygan, Wisconsin Profile along Bank Street, Cleveland, Ohio, representing the slides of October, 1849 Beds of Mixed Drift, Ghesaat Street Milwaukee, Wisconsin Drift Bluffs, Shore of Lake Michigan 5 miles South of Milwaukee Profile of Ancient Lake Beaches. Eagle Harbor, Lake Superior Map showing the rate of the encroachments of Lake Erie at Cleveland, Ohio Profile along Bank Street, Cleveland, Ohio, representing the slides of October, _ 1849. (Repeated from Fig 5.) : Fac-Simile of a Slab of Niagara Limerock, polished and striated byt the drift forces; from beneath the red clay. Light House, Sheboygan, Wisconsin (Repeated from Fig. 4.) 32 ON THE FRESH-WATER GLACIAL DRIFT OF THE NORTHWESTERN STATES. I wAvE had opportunities during the past twenty-five years, of examining the superficial materials which overlie the indurated rocks, in six of the Northern and Western States, and covering the territory north of the Ohio river and east of the Mississippi, to the national boundary. The length north and south of this area is about eleven degrees of latitude, from the 38th to 49th, its breadth being quite irregular. On the east its boundary is the middle line of the North American lakes from Erie to Superior, and thence northwesterly along Pigeon river and Rainy Lake river to the Lake of the Woods. Over this space I have found what I conceive to be but one formation belonging to the quaternary or post tertiary, having three members. ‘This formation is wholly of fresh water origin, having as yet furnished no specimen of a marine or salt-water character. To the eastward of Lake Erie, in the valleys of Lakes Ontario and Champlain, and along the St. Lawrence, the shells of the drift are wholly marine. ‘The external characters of the clays in which they are imbedded does not differ materially from those of Lakes Erie, Huron, and Superior, except in color. Farther examination in Northern New York, and on the Canada side of the St. Lawrence, will probably show that the terraces and sand ridges at the west end of Lake Ontario overlap the marine drift towards the east, and are therefore more recent. The ridges and ter- races of Lake Ontario extend westerly and connect with those of Lake Erie, which run into those of Lakes St. Clair, Huron, and Michigan, forming one system. They reach up the bays and indentations of the coast of all the lakes, and up the valleys of the rivers. The ridges are composed of water-washed sand, in which are buried timber, leaves and fragments of trees, of varieties now existing in North America, but principally of a northern growth. Buried timber of the same varieties is common through the entire depth of the superficial materials. Shells are not frequent, but when found are well preserved. The thickness of the drift is very variable, reaching, occasion- ally, 600 to 1,000 feet; though this is unusual, for it seldom exceeds 200 to 300 feet. This great fresh-water formation, there is reason to believe, extends northerly and westerly on this continent much farther than I have examined it. Various names have been used in describing it, some of which are local, and others intended to represent its age in the “ Geological Series.”’ I use the term “glacial drift’’ ko) to) to) 1 April, 1866. ( 1 ) 2 ON THE FRESH-WATER GLACIAL DRIFT because it expresses what I conceive to be the mode of its origin. Its epoch nearly approaches that of the alluvium. It is so recent that in many cases the buried timber is not decayed or even discolored. As it is due to glacier action from the north, a force which was universal, it must have its counterpart in Northern Europe and Asia, After these general observations I proceed with the descriptions in detail. ‘The three members are as follows, reckoning in the order of superposition from the surface downwards :— Ist. Coarse sand, gravel, loam, and hard pan, with large boulders of northern rocks, occupying the surface and the heights of land, with little stratification. 2d. Sand and gravel less coarse than No. 1, with irregular bands of clay some- what laminated, and boulders smaller than in No. 1. 3d. Fine laminated sandy and marly clay of great thickness, of a red, purple, blue, and ash color, with few boulders and little gravel, occupying the valleys of the lakes and rivers. Wherever there is a great thickness of the superficial materials these divisions can be readily traced, and always in the same order, as shown in the accompanying section. The laminated clays are invariably at the bottom where more than one member exists, and generally rest on the indurated rocks. Number one occupies the height of land, and frequently lies upon the rock for- mations without intervention of the other drift beds. It is always coarse and more or less confused. What is known among well-diggers, and canal and railroad contractors, as “hard pan,” belongs to this member. The hard pan is the result of a mixture of clay, sand, and gravel, or fragments of rocks, in a confused or imper- fectly stratified condition, rendered compact by the nature of the materials and by pressure. There is a modified form of the drift in and along the edges of the valleys of streams, heretofore known as “valley drift,” which, with the resulting terraces, is due to changes and causes, to which reference will be hereafter made. Member number one is the seat of the Moraine hillocks and depressions that mark the sum- mits of the country. It is always coarse and imperfectly stratified. The gravel is not derived wholly from distant and northern rocks. The strata, which underlie the drift at different points, are also represented. Where these strata are soft the fragments, torn off by the ice movement, are more easily pulverized, and are, there- fore, not transported as far as those of the hard, and especially of the tough igneous rocks. Sandstone, limestone, and shale from the coal series, and from the Devonian beds, are common. ‘These are in general not as completely rounded, but are more elon- gated and flatter, with their edges less worn. But representatives from all the rocky strata to the north can be found including the Potsdam sandstone, and other lower Silurian beds; also trap, trachyte, granite, sienite, gneiss, and conglome- rate, with the contents of dykes and mineral veins, pieces of iron ore, and boulders of native copper, from Lake Superior. This upper member of the drift is distinguished by evidences of violence in the action of the glacial forces. It contains the largest and most numerous boulders. OF THE NORTHWESTERN STATES. 3 The Moraine hillocks and cavities that are represented on the map near the line of the profile, in Northern Ohio, Wisconsin, and Minnesota, are in this member. It may be considered strange that the coarsest material should occupy the highest drift summits, but such is uniformly the case. These cavities extend below the general surface ten, fifteen, and even one hundred feet, their outline being rudely circular, and their sides as steep as is consistent with stability of the soil. Drier Cavitizs, or “ Porasn Kerries,” near Greenbush, Wisconsin. Range of drift hills looking west. © © © Boulders of Northern rocks—base 150 feet above Lake Michigan. About Lake Winnebago, the pebbles and boulders of the subjacent Niagara lime- stone constitute a large portion of the mass, with which sand and gravel are inti- mately mixed. I have traced them one hundred and fifty miles farther in a northerly direction to the Wissakote or Brule river. After passing northward beyond the sedimentary rocks above Lake Winnebago, the proportion of sand increases, and also the size and number of the boulders, which are mostly of igneous origin. To form an idea of the appearance of the “potash kettle” country, we may imagine a region of drift moraines inverted, and instead of a surface thickly set with rounded hillocks, suppose it to be occupied by cavities of irregular size and depth. If the grinder of a mastodon were impressed upon a piece of clay the depressions which result would represent the drift cavities as contrasted with drift elevations. In travelling through such a region the explorer frequently finds these hollows so near together that he no sooner rises out of one than he is obliged immediately to descend into another, the diameter of which may not be more than twice or thrice its depth. There is very seldom any water in the bottom, owing to the loose and porous character of the gravel drift. Boulders are found at the bottom, on the sides, and on the surface around them. Where these cavities are thickly set, as at the source of the Oconto river, and are without hillocks, the rim or edge between them is sometimes so narrow, that large boulders have not base enough to rest upon, and tumble down the sides. (See Fig. 2.) The internal slope is occasionally straight like a funnel, or inverted cone, but oftener cup-shaped or curved in a manner correctly represented by the form of a kettle. In the prairie region of Southern Wisconsin, timber grows within the cavities ; as it does on the adjacent lands in clumps, or as separate trees, under the local name of “oak orchards,” Farther north, in the thickly timbered country 4 ON THE FRESH-WATER GLACIAL DRIFT between the Fox and the Wissakote rivers, the cavities are filled with trees. Near the Wissakote in T. 40 N., R. 18 E. (Wisconsin meridian) at an elevation of 800 feet above Lake Michigan, they are broader and trough like in form; the drift is more sandy, and small lakes, ponds, or marshes, are occasionally seen at the bottom. \HorizonTat Progection of drift cavities 15 to 60 feet deep, head waters of Oconto river, Wisconsin. © © O Large Boulders of Sienite—350 feet above Lake Michigan. Of course, the boulders and the gravel are here derived from the azoic and igne- ous rocks at the north. On the line of the survey for the “ Chicago, St. Paul, and Fond du Lac Railroad,” in T. 34 N., R. 17 E., on the north of the Peshattego river, at an elevation of 660 feet, the ‘ kettles” are very numerous, and sharply defined. Proceeding southerly, a series of them occur in T. 31 N., R. 17 E., about twenty miles north of the Oconto, the summits of the country being 335 feet above Lake Michigan and 913 feet above the ocean. Those on the dividing ridge, between the waters of the west branch of the Oconto and the Wolf rivers, in T. 32 N., R. 15 E., have an elevation of 350 to 400 feet, and afford the finest instances of steep and well defined cavities. 'Ter- races and oblong ridges of sand or gravel might be formed by currents and eddies acting upon loose materials. It is not difficult to perceive how mounds, irregular elevations, and undulations, could be thus built up by gradual accretion, above the general surface. But the formation of a system of depressions of an uniform character, over large tracts of country, without natural mounds or ozars, is some- OF THE NORTHWESTERN STATES. 5 thing quite different. And yet, this has occurred in the drift, and must therefore be due to a phase of the drift phenomena. The rocks beneath the superficial materials in which these cavities are formed, are everywhere polished and grooved by the drift forces. At the foot of the Alps, moraines are formed mechanically, by the movements of glaciers, carrying forward earth and stones, which are finally left in rounded heaps on the more level country. Masses of ice become entangled with the loose materials, which in due time melt away and disappear. I assume it to be a settled point, that the moving force in the drift epoch was glacier ice. Nothing else seems to be adequate to the results we observe. The objections to this view have been removed by the observations of Dy. I. I. Hayes, of the Kane Arctic Expedition, and of Dr. Rink. On the northwest coast of Green- land, which is a vast glacier, the ice is found to be advancing toward the coast over a country comparatively level. It has accomplished a movement not only down inclined surfaces, such as the slopes of mountains and along flat land, but even up acclivities that were opposed to its progress. If the temperature of Greenland or the Arctic Circle were brought down to latitude 40° north, glaciers would exist, in fact, they now occur within 45° of the equator. It is only necessary to suppose the northern hemisphere during the ice period to have been covered with continental ice, to the depth of many hundred feet, as Greenland is now. This frozen expanse must have been attacked by the heat of the sun most power- fully on the side of the equator. Its southerly limit being at latitude 40°, it would be along this edge that it would be first melted. The conditions of movement in elacier regions would then be supplied, only the field would be a larger one. On the north, the extent of the mass would be such, that in that direction, there could be no movement, and the expansion must produce its whole effect in a south- erly direction. Thus, so far as resistance in the rear gives rise to motion in front, a fixed mass of ice may be considered equivalent to a central mountain chain. Admitting such a state of things, it follows that along the southern edge of this all-pervading glacier, fragments and masses of ice would be inclosed in, and buried beneath, the drift materials. Sir John Richardson in 1849-50, while journeying down the Mackenzie river, discovered ice at different depths beneath the surface of the earth, extending to several hundred feet. Although potatoes were raised in the soil at Fort Hope, it did not thaw during the short summer months more than two or three feet in depth. It is reported that in Patagonia, huge piles of stones and ice are seen mingled together for years. The first impression on viewing these depressions of the drift is, that they are due to subsidence. In the cases just cited, if the mixed mass consisted more of ice than of earth and stones, the surface should be one of pits and depressions. Hillocks or moraines could only occur in such materials where the earthy and imperishable parts are in excess. When the proportions are about equal, there would be both cavities and moraines. In the southerly part of Wisconsin, both forms are observed, but as we proceed northerly the depressions increase in number, and the hillocks or ozars, diminish. As we proceed northerly, there is less of stratification, and a closer approach to the true glacial moraines. The drift cavities in other parts of the 6 ON THE FRESH-WATER GLACIAL DRIFT northwest do not differ materially from those of Wisconsin. Those at the head of the Oconto river, and those between Sheboygan and Fond du Lac, are more regular in their outline than they are further north, on the Mesabi Range, in Minnesota. Here on the dividing ridge, between the St. Louis and the Vermilion rivers, the boulders are large, with less gravel and earth filling the interstices. To the west- ward of the Apostle Islands, in Lake Superior, near Bayfield, Wisconsin, there are huge terraces of boulders, with very little earth, rising from 400 to 600 feet above lake level. Fig. 3. OUTLINE VIEWS OF MorAINE Hitiocks AND Cavities. Ranponpy, PortacEe County, Outo. Base line about 500 feet above Lake Erie. View looking west. Height of summits above base 100 to 120 feet. Looking southwest. Elevation 70 to 80 feet above base. In other places, both north and south of Lake Superior, there are patches of boulders nearly level, from among which the finer materials have been washed away. A few miles to the northeast of the Twin Falls of the Menominee river, in Michigan, there is, on the northern slope of a mountain, a field of boulders, nearly a mile across. Every step in that distance might be taken without touching the soil. The boulders are smoothed and polished by attrition, and are forced OF THE NORTHWESTERN STATES. 7 compactly together, like a pavement. On the summit, between the waters of Lake Erie and the Ohio river, in Northeastern Ohio, the elevations and depressions of the upper drift, are less marked but readily distinguishable. The materials are coarse as compared with the lower members, but less coarse than upon the waters of Lake Superior. There was evidently less intensity in the glacial movement, as we approach its southern limit. Some of the boulders are as large, but their numbers are less. In the township of Green, Summit County, Ohio, there is an erratic block of granite 12 feet long, 10 feet broad, and 7 feet thick. . Along the height of land, there are also patches of boulders of northern and igneous rocks, a few rods across, resembling, on a small scale, those of the Meno- minee and St. Louis rivers. Although the transporting and sorting action appears to have been more powerful at high levels, the abrading action of the drift forces is aS conspicuous in valleys as upon mountains. ‘The limestone strata of Sandusky, Ohio, at the level of Lake Erie, which pass beneath the lake, are as thoroughly worn and striated as the conglomerate, and the coal grits 600 feet above lake level. It is the same at Sheboygan, in Wisconsin, where the Niagara limestone is covered by red clay, which the waves of Lake Michigan wash away from the rocks, leaving exposed large warped surfaces of glacial etchings and polished grooves, perfectly fresh and clean. Fac-Siminz oF A Sias or Niacara Limerock, polished and striated by the drift forces; from beneath the red clay. Sheboygan Light House, Wisconsin. Between the Menominee and the Peshattego rivers, the country is not elevated, but all the exposed knobs and floors of Sienite are thoroughly smoothed and wrought into domes and hollows by ice action from the north. 8 ON THE FRESH-WATER GLACIAL DRIFT Member Number Two. This division is not so readily made out as the others, but should not be omitted. In the general section I have not attempted to represent it, except in the space between the Apostle Islands and Flag river, of Lake Superior. It will be more apparent in the local sections. In general, this member is thin, passing into No. 1 above and No. 3 below. Its characteristics are, the finer condition of the materials, better stratification, and an alternation of layers of clay and sand. Prorine ALoNG Bank Srrvet, CLEVELAND, Onto, representing the slides of October, 1849. A. Ancient shore line. CCC. Present shore line and slides, 1849. BBB. Blue laminated clay. D. Coarse sand and gravel. EK. Alter- nate bands of clay and sand. 1. Position of cedar trees, leaves and springs. 2. Position of Elephant’s grinder. At Cleveland, the grinder and a few bones of the Elephas Primigenius were found in D, at a depth of ten feet below the natural surface. ‘The greatest devel- opment of the middle member is seen at the Grand Sable, of Lake Superior, east of Grand Island. Here the layers of coarse sand are exposed with a thickness of 300 to 400 feet overlying but a small development of clay. These layers vary from 10 to 50 feet each, having a well-defined stratification. In color, they are bright gray, white, and brown, while their edges cropping out for several miles along the shore, present a more imposing view than the Pictured Rocks. On the summit there is a large tract of treeless and barren dunes, with here and there a clump of pines, nearly covered up by the drifting sand. This tract extends southerly across the Peninsula to Lake Michigan, thence across Lake Michigan and down its eastern shore. The “Sleeping Bear” and other prominent sand mountains and dunes on that coast, extending as low as Michigan City, belong to this member of the drift formation. Member Number Three. The ash colored, the red, and the blue laminated clays, of the general profile constitute this member. 26 ON THE FRESH-WATER GLACIAL DRIFT Fig. 9. ura sal a Whey ite Wy fe : G, < ° \\ all Hy Ages Way ay a y = ome WN Ns gir” || “esc “CS igi ge Wy tin, alle, lle i all, Delroil Street NOTES. A, A, A.-—Ancient position of River and Shore line. 6, b, b. Same in 1796. ¢, ¢, c.—Lagoons, old bed of River. .—Springs. E, E, E. — Clay Bluffs with Slides, ancient and recent, 70 feet high. d.—Outlier of the Clay Bluffs E, E. [o].—Perry Monument. F, F.—Ultimate line of Shore’ unless protected. KS \\ beso MN) \s Map snowing the rate of the gutiouchments of Lake Erie at t Cleveland, Ohio. Fig. 10. PROFILE ALONG BANK STREET, CLEVELAND, Onto, representing the slides of October, 1849. A. Ancient shore line. . CCC. Present shore line and slides, 1849. BBB. Blue laminated clay. D. Coarse sand and gravel. EH. Alter- nate bands of clay and sand. 1. Position of cedar trees, leaves and springs. 2. Position of Elephant’s grinder. OF THE NORTHWESTERN STATES. oT Most of the shore of Lake Michigan is sandy, but in part it is of blue, purple, and red clay (see profiles at and near Milwaukee). At Cleveland, some deceased soldiers of the war of 1812 were buried near the margin of the bluff, and in 1836 their remains had already reached the lake level, under the operation of repeated slides. A short time prior to 1796 a British vessel was wrecked within the present limits of the city of Cleveland. ‘There were on board of it some brass field pieces, which were taken out by the captain, and buried on a bench about half way up the bank. These pieces have often been sought for without success. The encroach- ment of the water line must have reached them in about twenty years, when they would soon settle into the soft clay and quicksand out of sight. The rate of advance is, however, not uniform; it depends upon the character of the materials and the height of the water. By consulting the Smithsonian Contributions for 1860, vol. XIT., it will be seen that ail the lakes are subject to fluctuations of level varying from five to seven feet. During periods of low water, the wearing action is not rapid. There are times for many years together when there is a beach of littoral sand, along the foot of shore bluffs previously washed by the waves. The early emigrants to Ohio had the good fortune, from 1796 to 1800, to find a natural road along the beach of Lake Erie, which was soon after submerged. By turning to the profile along Bank street, Cleveland, page 26, the process of under- mining and consequent removal of the shore bluffs will be understood. There are no rocks indeed so solid but that the action of the surf destroys them more or less rapidly. Where the shore has no rocky barrier, but only a bank of clay, or of clay interstratified with sand and gravel, the work of destruction is rapid. All the drift clays are marly, and also contain sand in a fine state of division. The water softens, and dissolves these marly clays into a quicksand. A very slight motion of the water is sufficient to carry away this material, the coarser parts and the gravel remaining on the beach, while the finer parts go to form alluvium at the bottom of the lake. When the undermining process at the water line has reached so far as to destroy the equilibrium of that kind of earth, there must be a slide. The weight of the earth at the summit of the bluff carries it downward in long narrow strips of land, one, two, and three rods wide, according to the height of the shore. This movement, somewhat like a crevasse, pushes the mass of previous slides, C, C, C, forward and downward into the water. Excava- tions on the sides of the valley of the Cuyahoga river show the fissures of very ancient slides. The movements are easily traced by the position of the different strata B, C, D, which differ both in color and composition. A mere lie marks the crack along which the slide moved in its descent, unless the waters of the springs enter it, and disintegrate the beds. Some of the fissures are open, particularly at the base of the slides, and some are filled with oxide of iron deposited from solution. We have here cases of faults and dislocations oc- curring before our eyes, where the opposite surfaces are smooth, and scarcely dis- cermibless As the red clay is more tenacious than the blue, it stands at a steeper angle, but the coast-line of Lake Superior is gaining upon the land with equal rapidity. The 28 ON THE FRESH-WATER GLACIAL DRIFT force of the wave is greater in northern waters than in southern, being more dense. The wind is more powerful, and storms are more frequent. Slides occur there in the same manner as upon Lakes Erie and Michigan, carrying down standing trees and houses. On the waters of Bad river, Ashland county, Wisconsin, slides fre- quently happen at the high bluff banks, precisely like those in the bends of the Cuy- ahoga river in Ohio. In the blue, the red, and the purple clay beds there are occa- sionally inclosed patches of sand and gravel, not stratified ; but this is not common. The sand and gravel are generally in layers between beds of clay, but tapering out in distances of no great length. There are also bunches of clay inclosed in the strata of sand, though such cases are rare. Boulders Moved by Ice. Around the borders of small northern lakes, it is not unusual to see a line of boulders compactly arranged at the water level. They are usually too large to be moved by the action of waves, and are pushed up along the shore, so as to present from the water the appearance of a rude wall or fence composed of rounded rocks. More than fifty years since, President Dwight, of Yale College, described the movement of boulders towards the shore in a small lake in Salisbury, Connecticut. I once examined the place in company with the late Professor Averill, of Union College, who lived in the vicinity. He had often observed them near the shore, and near the surface of the water, and was satisfied of their motion towards the land. Where the top of the boulder was within a foot of the surface, there was a dis- tinct groove behind it, its direction being in a right line for the land. In front of it the mud was pushed up, showing that it had been forced in that direction. "We concluded that the ice in winter was equal to one foot in thickness, and generally more. As in all bodies of water, there is here some fluctuation of level. Ice a foot thick or more would envelop the upper part of the boulders in shallow water, and extend down around them below the general thickness. The increase in bulk by freezing must take place from the centre outwardly, and thus create a slow but powerful motion at the edges towards the shore. Lines of boulders may be seen on the banks of the St. Lawrence, between Mon- treal and Quebec, pushed against the shore in part by the expansion of fixed ice, and in part by masses of floating ice. There is in Iowa a small lake, which is belted by so strong a line of boulders, that it was at first supposed to be an arti- ficial fence or wall of stone, and which has thence taken the name of the “ Walled Lake.” On the shores of Mille Lac, which is at the source of the Rum river, in Min- nesota, and which is about twenty miles in diameter, there are very heavy lines of large boulders, rising five and six feet above water-level. There are also several small islands in this lake, at different distances from the shore, composed entirely of large boulders, generally more than two feet in diameter, which have accumu- lated in the same way with those on the shore. One of these has a height of twelve OF THE NORTHWESTERN STATES. 99 or fifteen feet, wholly free of gravel or earth. They are from one to four miles from the shore, and in shallow water. ‘The boulders are sienite, granite, trap, gneiss, &c., being the same with those which occur im the drift beds of the adjacent shore. As the degradation of the land goes on the number of stones increases, and the line becomes more conspicuous. In those northern latitudes the ice attains a thick- ness of two and three feet; thus reaching down to boulders which le in five and six feet water. In a low stage of the water, which occurs annually in the winter, they may be grasped and moved at a still greater depth. A progress shoreward of a foot or two in a year, would, in a few centuries, transport them many hundred feet. ‘These processes now open to observation are, like those on a more extended scale, of the drift era, slow but irresistible, and capa- ble, after long periods, of producing great results. Lakes of Erosion. Along the north shore of Point Keweenaw, there is a series of long narrow bays, the depth and contour of which are largely due to glacier excavation. Copper harbor, Agate harbor, Eagle harbor, and Cat harbor are of this class. The strata are alternately trap, sandstone, and conglomerate, the strike of the beds being nearly east and west. Their longest axis is parallel with the strike of the recks, which dip northerly. Between the lake and the waters of the harbors is a low up- lift of trap, with narrow breaks, which form the entrances to still water in the rear. ‘The course of the: glacier movement was here from northeast to southwest, somewhat oblique to the strike of the rocks. Point Keweenaw is a high and narrow mountain range, the general course of © which is northeast and southwest, except at its eastern extremity, where it curves to the east. It is at this part the harbors above named are situated. The high narrow crest of the centre line of Point Keweenaw, rising six hundred to eight hundred feet above the lake, modified somewhat the course of the movement. Lakes Schlatter, Fanny Hooe, and Upson, on the north side of the Point, are in the same elongated form east and west as the coast harbors. On the height of land are Lake Manganese, Musquito lake, and Portage lake, situated in breaks of the mountain range, where the mechanical effects are less prominent, but they show erosive action, and the change of direction due to gaps in the range. On the island of Isle Royal the same strata occur, with the same northeasterly strike. Here there is a rapid succession of hard trap with softer sandstone and conglomerate beds, their dip being to the south. This island presents the most remarkable cases of erosion. Whether upon the coast or in the interior, there is scarcely a square mile that does not exhibit distinct glacier action. Here also the bearing of the striz very nearly coincides with the strike of the rocks. At the eastern extremity is a series of narrow ledges, which might be aptly com- pared with the fingers of a hand, and which are composed of trap; the spaces between represent numerous straits and harbors, with sandstone at the bottom. There are troughs of excavation which extend southwesterly the entire length of 30 ON THE FRESH-WATER GLACIAL DRIFT the island, a distance of sixty miles. Siskowit harbor, Rock harbor, Washington * harbor, and Tod harbor are exact imitations of those on Point Keweenaw. In the interior, between the ridges, at all elevations above the lake, to the summit of the island five hundred and six hundred feet, are long narrow lakes, the longest axis being, as usual, parallel with the outcrops of the rocks. These rocks are more denuded than upon Point Keweenaw, and are everywhere rounded, scoured, and striated. ‘To the west and southwest, along the north shore of Lake Superior, the rocks have nearly the same strike, and dip towards the south and southeast, but were not as thoroughly exposed to the drift forces, owing to a mountain range on the north, ten to fifteen miles distant. The northerly and northwesterly faces of the highlands received the first and greatest pressure. To the south of Point Keweenaw, in Marquette county, is repeated what had occurred on Isle Royal. The islands,and rocky points, headlands and islets around Presque Isle bay, Riviere Des Morts, and the village of Marquette are thoroughly ground down to dome-shaped surfaces, with warped floors, troughs, grooves,. furrows, and stria, the general course of which is.southwesterly. Here the strike of the strata is nearly east and west with less difference in the beds as to hardness. On the coast north of Marquette there are outbreaks of sienite and granite, which did not resist the movements so well as the trap and iron beds. The quartz strata and the marble beds are less affected than the azoic slates, but are all highly polished, the exceedingly fine striz etched thereon remaining almost as perfect as they were when the icy graver finished. its work. On the summit, there are the Teal and Matchigummi lakes, surrounded by the same evidences of, ice action; but their form has not been as much changed by it as those on Isle Royal. To the northwest of Lake Superior, along the line of Pigeon river and Rainy lake river, this action is very conspicuous. Vermilion lake, which is in the Mesabi range, is surrounded by gneiss, granite, and slates, having a northeasterly and southwesterly trend. Rainy lake has a geology very similar. Both of them present a labyrinth of islands, inlets, bays, straits, and harbors of the most interesting and complicated character. The rocks are not bold, but mostly divested of earth, and thoroughly abraded. Qn the softer portions, such as recent granite and talcose slates, the effects are visible only in the smooth dome-like moutonnes, without striz; but on the quartzose portions the markings are yet distinct. But we must extend our ideas of glacier excavation to larger bodies of water. The basins of the North American lakes, constituting the valley of the St. Lawrence, have been modified by the same agent. By consulting the accompanying map, it will be seen that the direction of the movement was in general along their longest axes. It is remarkable that most of them have the long axis nearly in the directions of the bearing of the rocks. In some cases, the strata which have least resisting power lie at the bottom of a lake; and more than this, the course of the arrows shows that the glacier moved along the outcrop of these beds, having the same gen- eral direction, thus combining all the circumstances favorable to erosive effect. At the bottom of Lake Ontario are the rocks of the New York system, from the OF THE NORTHWESTERN STATES. él Potsdam up to the Medina sandstone, embracing the Utica slate, Shawangunk grit, and Hudson river group; beds not calculated to resist denuding forces of any kind. Lake Champlain formed a lateral channel also on the line of strike. Probably the series of interior lakes of Middle New York, with their axes north and south, will on examination show a local parallelism with the drift force. Pass- ing to Lake Erie, there is less uniformity. The course of the striz along the south shore varies from south to south 80° east. Of their bearing on Lake Huron I have no information; but what I have seen on Lake Erie indicates a meeting of forces in this neighborhood. The strata at the bottom of this lake are such as to be easily reduced; but the lake is a shallow one, nowhere reaching 300 feet in depth. Most of it is less than 150 feet. The upper silurian limestones form the shore at both ends, curving to the north into-Canada. Above these rocks are the Hamilton and Marcellus slates, more properly shales, which are soft and clayey. These shales form the southern coast from Cattaraugus creek to Huron river, and outcrop beneath the water towards the Canada shore. If there had been a steady movement from northeast to southwest, along the edges of these strata, there should have resulted a deeper depression. The same shales extend through the greater part of Lake Huron, dipping to the west and southwest. Indications are that the movement was here as on Lake Erie, across the strike of the beds, or, if not so, it was irregular. In the Straits of Mackinaw it was from east to west. There is in Central Michigan no high land to divert the glacier mass from its general southwesterly course; and the arm of Lake Huron, known as Saginaw bay, approaches very near to the central portion. It is probable that this bay will be found to be one of the channels which it fol- lowed. ‘The western outcrops of the same soft shales and sandstones lie beneath Lake Michigan. Around them are the same upper silurian limestone beds that are seen on the north shore of Lake Huron. The western coast of Lake Michigan is composed of these silurian strata, which have much more resistance than the shales. Along the western shore of this lake the glacial striz have a very uniform direction, ibid varies little from southwest. Along the north shore their bearing is more westerly. There was a defecuan to the southward along the axes of Take Michigan, Green bay, and Lake Winne- bago, which brought the motion nearly into Pernille with the outcrop of the rocks. The fac-simile of striz at Sheboygan shows two sets of lines, one more to the east than the other. That curve corresponded very closely with the change of dip and bearing of the rocks. The lower peninsula of Michigan occupies the centre of a geological basin, the surface rocks of which are the coal series. The rocks of the upper peninsula of Canada, northern Ohio, Indiana, and Wisconsin dip beneath this coal series on all sides. On the north shore of Huron and Michigan, the inclination is to the south. On the western shore of Michigan it is southeasterly, and at length eastwardly, having the slates of the Hamilton and Marcellus groups on the east and at the bottom of 32 GLACIAL DRIFT OF THE NORTHWESTERN STATES... the lake. The western half of Lake Superior occupies a synclinal basin in the Potsdam sandstone, and its long axis coincides with the glacier movement pre- cisely. Fig. 11. clay. Sheboygan Light-House, Wisconsin. The tough trap rocks rise on both sides above the sandstone. As the continental glacier pursued its course to the southwest, it was divided and resisted by the trap ranges ploughing out for itself channels such as Keweenaw bay, Chefoimegon bay, and the larger bay at the west end of the lake, which terminates at Superior city. CLEVELAND, Onto. June, 1864. PUBLISHED BY THE SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION, WASHINGTON CITY, May, 1866. a SMITHSONIAN CONTRIBUTIONS TO KNOWLEDGE. 202 GEOLOGICAL RESEARCHES CHINA, MONGOLIA, AND JAPAN, DURING THE YEARS 1862 TO 1865. BY RAPHAEL PUMPELLY. [ACCEPTED FOR PUBLICATION, JANUARY, 1866.} Tus memoir, having been approved by the National Academy of Sciences, has been accepted for publication by the Smithsonian Institution. JosEPH HENRY, Secretary S. I. COLLINS, PRINTER, PHILADELPHIA. PREFACE. Tuer material for the following pages was collected since 1860. Leaving the Eastern States in that year, and crossing the plains to Arizona, I remained there nearly a year in charge of silver mines. Being forced by the Indian troubles to abandon that territory, 1 entered Mexico, and after a midsummer journey over the deserts of the Pacific coast, between Sonora and California, reached the latter State. Leaving California with one companion, Prof. William P. Blake, both of us engaged by the Japanese Government to explore the island of Yesso, we sailed for Japan via the Sandwich islands. The engagement with the Japanese Government lasted but little more than a year, when it was suddenly brought to an end by the fierce political troubles of that time. It was during hasty journeys of reconnoissance that the notes relating to Yesso were jotted down, and at a time when I hoped to be able to make a much more thorough study of the geology of Japan. It was with true regret that I left the service of a government whose courtesy had made a lasting impression on my memory, and with whose struggles for progress as against exclusiveness I deeply sympathized. Crossing to China, after a short visit to Nagasaki, I ascended the Yangtse Kiang into Central Hunan, and to the frontier of Sz’chuen, a great part of the journey being made in a small Chinese boat, and occupying four months of the spring and summer of 1863. The autumn and winter of 1863 and spring of 1864 were spent in examining the Coal fields west of Peking, for the Chinese Government, and in journeys in Northern China and Southern Mongolia. I spent the summer of 1864 at Nagasaki. In the winter of 1864 and 1865, in company with Mr. T. Walsh, of Japan, and Mr. F. R. St. John, Secretary of the British Legation at Peking, I crossed into Siberia, and thence, alone, travelled overland to St. Petersburg and Paris. Thus the journeys which furnished the data for the following pages were as fol- lows :— I. In 1862 over the ground indicated in the sketch map of southern Yesso, PI. No. 8, and excursions in the neighborhood of Yokohama. II. In 1863 excursions in the vicinity of Nagasaki; a journey up the Yangtse Kiang to the boundary between Hupeh and Sz’chuen, and into southern Hunan ; and excursions from Peking into the mountains of northwestern Chihh. III. In 1864 a journey in southern Mongolia, along the edge of the plateau to (iii ) a PREFACE. near the great N. E. bend of the Hwang Ho, returning to Peking by a route south of the plateau and within the Great Wall; and finally, part of the joumey homeward, from China across the plateau and the Gobi desert to Siberia. With the exception of the itinerary in Yesso, which was made while in the ser- vice of the Japanese Government, and the description of the coal basin west of Peking, which was examined at the request of the Chinese Government, all the material was collected on journeys made at my expense. Ignorance of the Chinese and Mongolian languages, the difficulty of making observations in western China, owing to the hostility of the people at the time, the intense cold of the winter journey across the plateau into Siberia, and the fact that the enterprise was a private one, will, it is hoped, serve as excuses for asking the indulgence of the reader in view of the incompleteness of the work. I have attempted throughout to keep the generalizations separate from the record ef observations and other data on which they rest. I have followed, generally, the orthography of Dr. S. W. Williams for Chinese proper names, and that of Klaproth for Mongolian names, where these could be found on his great map of Central Asia, but in many instances they are written from the pronunciation of the Tartar guides. In giving Japanese and Aino names I have followed very closely the Japanese spelling. For assistance in preparing the present work I am indebted to Dr. J. 8S. Newberry for undertaking the description of the fossil plants, and to Mr. Arthur Mead Edwards for the examination of infusorial earths, etc., under the microscope, and to Prof. G. J. Brush and Mr. James A. Macdonald for analyses of coals. A considerable amount of valuable material consisting mainly of Paleozoic, 'Ter- tiary, and Post-tertiary shells, and of rocks, has not yet been worked up. T would return thanks to Prof. J. D. Whitney both for many valuable hints, and for the use of his excellent library. I am deeply indebted to Dr. W. Lockhart, Mr. C. Murray, and Dr. 8. W. Williams, and Rev. Mr. Edkins, of Peking, for valuable assistance in making re- searches in Chinese geographical literature. The diagrams in the text, and the plates, I. to VIII, at the end, are executed in copper relief engraving by Messrs. E. R. Jewett & Co. of Buffalo; plate LX. is cut in wood by Mr, C. Murry, of New York. Rea New York, Aug. 1, 1866. CON TENS: CHAPTER I. ON THE GENERAL OUTLINES OF EASTERN ASIA CHAPTER IL. GEOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS IN THE BASIN OF THE YANGTSE KIANG . CHAPTER III. OBSERVATIONS IN THE PROVINCE OF CHIHLI . CHAPTER IV. STRUCTURE OF THE SOUTHERN EDGE OF THE GREAT TABLE-LAND, AND OF NORTHERN SHANSI AND CHIHLI CHAPTER VY. THE DELTA-PLAIN AND THE HistorIcAL CHANGES IN THE COURSE OF THE YELLOW RIVER . CHAPTER VI. On THE GENERAL GEOLOGY oF CHINA PRopeR; A GENERALIZATION BASED ON OBSERVA- TIONS, AND ON THE MINERAL PRODUCTIONS, AND THE CONFIGURATION OF THE SURFACE CHAPTER VII. THE SINIAN SYSTEM OF ELEVATION CHAPTER VIII. GEOLOGICAL SKETCH OF THE ROUTE FROM THE GREAT WALL TO THE SIBERIAN FRONTIER CHAPTER IX. GEOLOGICAL ITINERARIES OF JOURNEYS ON THE ISLAND OF YESSO IN NORTHERN JAPAN . CHAPTER X. MINERAL PRODUCTIONS OF CHINA APPENDIX. ApprnpDIx No. 1.—Description of Fossil Plants from the Chinese Coal-Bearing Rocks. By J.S. Newberry, M. D. : Apprenpix No. 2. — Analyses of Chinese and Japanese Coals. By James A. Mac- donald, M. A. AppENnDIx No. 3.—Letter from Mr. Arthur Mead Edwards on the Results of an Examina- tion under the Microscope of some Japanese Infusorial Earths, and other Deposits of China and Mongolia : (wD PAGE 10 25 46 51 67 fo 19 109 126 LIST OF DIAGRAMS. ~ PAGE Figure 1. Section near Chaitang . : 3 : : : ‘ : 14 Figures 2 and 3.. Illustrating the manner_of working the Tatsau mine ; 9 : 16 Figures 4 and 5. Sections at Chingshui . : : 5 : c : 17 Figure 6. Section near Fangshan (Hien) . 9 9 20 Figure 7. Section near Siuenhwa (Fu). 3 F : : 5 : 23 Figure 8. Section near Kalgan 23 Figure 9. Section near Hakodade . : : ; : , : : 80 Figure 10. Japanese lead furnace . c : : 6 é : : 81 Figure 11. Section at Cape Wosatzube . . 5 c : : : 85 Figure 12. Sulphur furnace on Mt. Hsan . : : 5 < : : 87 Figures 13 and 14. Illustrating the Japanese method of washing auriferous deposits : 92 Figure 15. Concentrating trough of the Japanese miners. : : : ’ 92 Figure 16. Section on Mt. Iwaounobori. : : : : : j 95 Figure 17. Illustrating progressive alteration of rock under solfatara-action : 2 96 Figure 18. Lava flow near Kumaishi : : 3 : ‘ : : 102 USS Oy IP Ib VIET S Pirate 1. Section along the Yangtse Kiang, from the Pacific Ocean to Pingshan (Hien), in Western Sz‘chuema Prate 2. Route map of the Yang Ho District. PuatE 38. Geological sections in Northern Chihli and Southern Mongolia. Puates 4 and 5. Maps representing the historical changes in the course of the Yellow River or Hwang Ho. Puate 6. Hypothetical map of the geological structure of China. Puate 7. Map of the Sinian (N. E., S. W.) system of elevation of Eastern Asia. Section across the table-land of Central Asia from the Plain of Peking to near Kiachta, in Eastern Siberia. PuateE 8. Geological route-sketch. Southern Yesso, with sections. Puate 9. Fossil plants from the Chinese coal-bearing rocks. ( vil ) tid pee ess Hh aN ewe PANES Cs i CN ) hi c Ne Aaa “oe rate pean GEOLOGICAL RESEARCHES TEN} CHINA, MONGOLIA, AND JAPAN. CHHGAGE I EervE Als ON THE GENERAL OUTLINES OF EASTERN ASIA. Ir we examine a Mercator Chart of Eastern Asia, we are instantly struck with the parallelism of many of its most important features. A straight line (A, B, Pl. VII) drawn in the longer axis of the Gulf of Pechele, trending nearly northeast (N. 47° E.), if prolonged in both directions, will be found to coincide with the entire middle course of the Yangtse, between Sz‘chuen and Yunnan, with the longer axis of the great delta-plain between the highlands of Shantung and western Chihli, with the mouth and lower course of the Liau river, with the valley of the lower Amur, and finally crossing the Sea of Ochotsk, it is parallel to, and nearly coincides with, the direction of the Gulf of Penjinsk. Using this line as a standard of reference, we find that the long straight western shores of the two greatest indentations, the Sea of Ochotsk and the Bay of Bengal, are nearly in a line with each other and parallel to our standard. The same may be said of a line connecting the islands of Formosa, Kiusiu, Nippon and the Kuriles. The trend of the southeastern coast of China, the upper course of the Yellow river, the Lake Baikal, and the courses of many of the principal rivers of Eastern Siberia; that of Kamtschatka and the coast of Manchuria are all separate instances confirm- ing this rule. We are naturally led to look for the cause of this in a similar uniformity in the trend of the mountain ranges, and, indeed, although the directions of these are difficult of determination, I hope to be able to show that such a parallelism really exists. The long, submerged chain represented by the Kurile and Japanese islands is an unmistakable instance, while, in the northern part of the continent, the Stanovoi and Yablonoi ranges, and all the ridges of Trans-Baikal, are examples of mountains nearly or quite parallel to our standard, and inclosing extensive longitudinal valleys. The same may be said of the Byrranga mountains, and of almost all the ridges east of the Lena river. Indeed, while the trends of nearly all the mountains of North- eastern Asia lie between N.N. E. and E. N. E., the majority of them approach very nearly the N. EK. 8. W. direction. Having seen that this regularity exists in the ranges of the better explored parts 1 April, 1866. Gils) 2 GEOLOGICAL RESEARCHES IN of Eastern Asia, let us look for it in China also, where we have to rely on a more limited number of data, partly geological and partly topographical in their character. Where the Yangtse river crosses ahs Sz‘chuen-Hupeh frontier, it cuts through a broad mountain range whose principal axis crosses the river in long. 111° 15’, near Ichang (fu). Here the axial granite rises 600 to 1000 feet above the river, and 1s Honiced on both sides by an immense thickness of limestone and coal-bearing rocks, whose strata have here a mean trend to N.E. If, through this point, we draw a line (C, D, Pl. VII) having a similar trend, its prolongation will indicate the watershed between the Hwai river and the Han river, the watershed of Shan- tung, and following the line of islands that stretch across the entrance to the Gulf of Bechele: it will coincide with the range of mountains, which, beginning with the promontory of Liautung, divides the waters first of the Liau river and Valu river, and afterwards, of the Sungari river and Usuri river. If we prolong the line from the Yangtse to the S. W., it will nearly coincide with the mountains that part the rivers of Kweichau from those of Hunan. All these ridges I take to be members of a continuous line of elevation, extending from Southern China to the Amur river, and which, from its influence on the character of the country, may be called the central anticlinal axis of China. A line drawn from near Canton and passing through the Chusan archipelago, will represent the mean trend of the coast range, and, if prolonged to the N. E., it will cut the Corean peninsula near its southern end, in what appears to be its most mountainous point.' In the other direction, the island of Hainan, from its N. E. S. W. trend and lofty mountains, would seem to be a member of the same range. In Northwestern China, a great range crosses the Yellow river, in its course between Shansi and Shensi, and trending N. E. by E., connects the mountain knot of Northwestern Sz‘chuen with that of the Ourang daban north of the Tushikau gate of the Great Wall. Nearly parallel to this is another range which, beginning west of Singan (fu), crosses the Yellow river, forming the Lungmun gorge, and traversing, obliquely, the centre of Shansi, gradually approaches the other range in northern Chihli. These are the three principal axes, and they seem to be made up of parallel anticlinal ridges. Minor parallel axes seem to occupy the country between these larger ranges. If we examine the maps of the provinces that border on the eastern edge of the Tibetan highland, we find a system of ranges, which, branching off from the Kwenlun and following, at first, a southeasterly course, gradually merge into a N. S. trend. The easternmost of these, occupying western Sz‘chuen, divide the principal northern tributaries of the Yangtse. Those farther west form the narrow watersheds between the upper courses of the Yangtse, the Cambodia and the Salween, and, in their southern prolongation, they form the Malayan peninsula and probably that occupied by Annam and Siam. ‘The N.S. trend seems to be con- fined exclusively to the extreme west of China. * According to the great map of Kanghi this peninsula seems to have its principal mountains in the south, forming a N. H. 8. W. ridge. ‘ CHINA, MONGOLIA, AND JAPAN. 3 On the other hand the E, W. system of trends, which is so important in Central Asia, exercises an influence which is apparent much farther eastward. A range of mountains, said to have several snow-covered peaks, originating in Southern Kansuh, runs due east, separating the waters that enter the Yellow river through the Wei and the Loh, from those that flow to the Yangtse through the Ksialing and the Han, and finally disappears in western Honan. Another range, with a mean E. byS. trend, is given by Klaproth as forming the boundary between Sz‘chuen on the south and Shensi and Kansuh on the north. It is not improbable, that the country included between these two ranges in Shensi and Kansuh, is an elevated table-land. The courses of the Han and Jialing rivers and the communication between their waters, as indicated by Chinese authorities, seem to favor this idea. In the south, the Nanling mountains, a range said to have peaks that reach above the snow-line, rise in Yunnan, and, branching, form, in the northern member, the boundary between Kwangsi and Kweichau, while the southern member trends off into Kwangsi. The influence of the northern branch of the Nanling, is apparent as far as Fuhkien, in the probably comparatively low watershed north of Kwangtung. The higher portion of this range seems to be along the southern boundary of Kweichau, where it has lofty peaks and fertile elevated table-lands,? which, from difficulty of access, have been for ages the home of the aboriginal Miautsz, a race unconquered by the surrounding civilization. The two passes that cross this range in Hunan and Kiangsi, where it is called the Meiling, cannot be very high, as the portage between the head of boat navigation on the two flanks is only a few miles. According to Biot,’ the members of Lord Amherst’s embassy give the height of the Kiangsi pass as 3000 feet. The great map of Kanghi gives an uninterrupted water communication between the headwaters of the Siang river of Hunan and those of a tributary of the Si river, that flows through the city of Kweilin. I have here attempted to trace only those ridges which seem to be the most important, as exhibiting the general configuration of China. To the E. W. ranges is due the fact, that the mean courses of the great rivers of the empire lie east and west. But the total length of each river is made up of N. E. reaches, where it flows through broad and fertile longitudinal valleys, and of southeasterly or southerly reaches in which it traverses, by deep and narrow gorges, the N. E. 8. W. ridges. * All that is known of these two systems, the N. S. and the E. W. is derived from the Jesuit maps and from Chinese writers. 2 Chinese Repository, I. 40. 3 Recherches sur la hauteur, ete., Journ. Asiat., 1840. 4 GEOLOGICAL RESEARCHES IN CGA Rare aes Ce ee ease OBSERVATIONS IN THE BASIN OF THE YANGTSE KIANG. A GLANCE at the section (PL. 1) across Central China will show that the Devo- nian limestone and Chinese Coal measures seem to predominate, at least at the sur- face, over all else. There is only one point in the whole length of the section, where rocks older than the great limestone deposit rise to the surface, so that if the former exist, they are buried deep below the level of the sea. I shall give, in a subsequent chapter, reasons for believing that, at least in the valley of the Yangtse, there are also no representatives of the Mesozoic formations of later date than the Chinese Coal measures, and few, if any, of the Cenozoic. Where the Yangtse breaks through the ridges of the central anticlinal axis of elevation, in Eastern Sz‘chuen and Western Hupeh, a section, nearly eighty miles long, is exposed in the succession of deep gorges through which the river passes this barrier. Here the Devonian limestone is seen to rest almost immediately on the granite, a comparatively small development of metamorphic schists intervening. This seems to be the only point between Western Sz‘chuen and the Pacific, where the Yangtse has exposed these lower rocks, and even here they occur during only about eight miles of the river’s course, and with a maximum height of only a few hundred feet above the river. To their occurrence are due the rapids that render the navigation of this part of the “ Great River” so dangerous. The granite immediately above the first rapids consists-of a triclinic feldspar and ounces. the former predominating, a brilliant black mica and quartz with small crystals of sphene scattered through the mass. Above Shantowpien the granite becomes very fine-grained, and still further up the river it is succeeded by syenitic granite, composed of white triclinic feldspar, quartz, large laminee of brown mica, and crystals of hornblende, with minute octahedrons of magnetic iron. On its eastern and western declivities the granite supports the metamorphic strata. Those to the eastward, which could not be closely examined, seemed to be gneiss trending E. W. and dipping about 30° to 8. West of the granite the strata con- sist, where examined, of hornblendic schist and chloritic schist, the former often containing lenticular masses and cross veins of quartz, feldspar, and chlorite. Rolled fragments of diorite, probably of metamorphic origin, indicate the presence of this usual companion of these rocks. Near their contact with the granite these strata trend N. N. E., dipping about 85° to E. S. E., while further up the river their trend changes to E. N. E., and the dip to N. N. W. CHINA, MONGOLIA, AND JAPAN. 5 Flanking this granite core on both sides and covering it, is the great Devonian limestone floor of the Chinese Coal measures. On the eastern flank of the granitic axis the limestone strata trend, almost uniformly, N. E. 8. W., varying in dip from 25° to 8° towards the 8. E. as we recede from the granite. On the western flank the strike is less regular, changing from nearly N.S., at the contact with the meta- morphic schists, to N. E. 8. W, in the upper part of the limestone. In the imme- diate neighborhood of the river, over an area of forty or fifty square miles, the limestone has disappeared, but in the distance, on both sides of the Yangtse, its yellow cliffs are seen towering to a height of more than 2,000 feet above the water. I know of no limestone deposit that can rival this in thickness. Taking the length of the cross section from its contact with the younger conglomerates, near Ichang, to where it rests on the metamorphic schists, to be seven and one-half geographic miles, and the mean dip at 15°, viz., 10° for the eastern half and 20° for the western, we obtain the enormous thickness of 11,600 feet, more than two statute miles. I observed no faults in this gorge, and the great thickness observed in this same limestone in Northern China, leads me to think that the above estimate cannot be far from the truth. West of this ridge of limestone is another of about the same size, the interven- ing space being occupied by the Coal measures. Here, within a distance of eighty miles, are the principal rapids, while the river traverses the limestone through a series of five gorges unsurpassed in the grandeur of their scenery. The Yangtse, which, a few miles below the mouth of the Ichang gorge, has a width of 960 yards, is in this narrowed to 250, and in the Fungsiang gorge to 150 yards.'| In these narrow passages, whose walls are from 900 to 1200 feet high, cliffs of bare rock, often vertical or overhanging, alternate with steep declivities clothed in green from the water to the summit, and with deep, imaccessi- ble dells filled with the rich growth of a semi-tropical vegetation. Streams flowing from the mouths of caverns high above the river, cool the air in their descent, while the huge clusters of stalactite which they have formed—the work of ages—show well the chemical power of the smallest drop, side by side with the mechanical force of the rolling river. Through these gloomy chasms the skilful boatmen drag the heavy junks, now “ tracking” them from paths and steps hewn in the solid rock, now pulling them by rusty and time-worn chains clamped along the vertical walls. The depth of the water must be very great,” and the difference between high and low water is said to be as much as eighty feet in the Ichang gorge. The limestone is generally of a bluish-gray color and compact texture, though subordinate to this variety, layers occur having every shade of color and grain. A gray, compact variety, with frequent large crystals of calcite is not uncom- mon; and a very compact, almost black kind is quarried in the Ichang gorge. Indeed gray, pink, red, black, and blue varieties of this same limestone, with com- pact, porphyritic and crystalline textures, furnish in almost every province of China 1 Blackiston. Five months on the Upper Yangtse. * Blackiston’s party found no bottom with eighteen fathoms. 6 GEOLOGICAL RESEARCHES IN useful and choice marbles. Every degree of thickness occurs in the layers from lamin only one-quarter inch thick to beds of many feet. Nodules and thin layers of black chert occur throughout the limestone, but in the lower half they are remarkably frequent, becoming more common as we ap- proach the oldest beds, in which, indeed, the calcareous rock is often entirely excluded by massive layers of quartzite. At the eastern entrance to the Lucan gorge, where the limestone rests on the older rocks, the lowest beds of the former, containing lenticular masses and thin layers of chert, are soon succeeded by a bed 40 to 50 feet thick, of massive quartzite. Wherever I have had occasion to examine this limestone in place, it has invaria- bly appeared to be entirely without fossils, but this has been only in the main ridges, where metamorphic action has probably played a more important part than in the minor ridges that rise between these lines of greater elevation, and it seems to me that there can be little doubt that the fossil Brochiopoda that occur in many provinces belong to this formation. Ce Just before entering the eastern mouth of the Lucan gorge, a bed of fine-grained, micaceous, gray sandstone is observable, intervening between the metamorphic schists and the limestone. The trend of this intervening bed is N. N. W. and the dip 25° to 30° to W.S. W., the metamorphic schists striking to E. N. E. and dipping to N. N. W., while the trend of the overlying limestone strata, at the nearest point observed, was about N. by W. and the inclination about 30° to W. by 8. At the western end of the Mitan gorge we enter the coal field of Kwei. Here the limestone disappears under strata, apparently conformable with it, of a fine- grained micaceous sandstone, which, below IKwei, is succeeded by a fine-grained, gray, calcareous sandstone. The trend of the beds which, near the gorge, was N. N. E. with a dip of about 40° to W. N. W., changes here to N. with a dip to E., and further up, opposite Kwei, it is N. by W. with an inclination of 70° to E. by N. Here is the beginning of a series of those angular plications so common to Coal measures in all countries. Small beds of limestone and red argillite alternate with the sandstones until, about two miles above Kwei, the first coal seams crop out, and with the appearance of these, the trend changes to N. W. by W., more than 90° from its normal direction of N. E. 8. W. The seams of coal are of an inferior friable anthracite. Those I visited above Kwei were highly inclined between sandstone walls, and contained, according to the Chinamen, only six to eight inches of fuel. Capt. Blackiston, who took speci- mens of these rocks and noticed, with much accuracy, the general features of this region, remarks that the rocks of the coal regions of Sz‘chuen, wherever he saw them, presented the same appearance as those of the Kwei field.’ It would seem probable that in Sz‘chuen, which seems to be occupied by an immense coal basin, the Coal measures exist with a much greater thickness than in the Kwei field, where only the lower members seem to have been preserved. Deposits of iron ore occur in intimate connection with coal and limestone in Sz‘chuen,? and, as we shall 1 Five Months on the Upper Yangtse. 2 Thid. CHINA, MONGOLIA, AND JAPAN. 7 see later, it is probable that the extensive salt deposits of that province are mem- bers of the same formation. Near the city of Ichang, at the eastern mouth of the gorge, the limestone strata, trending here N. E. and dipping about 8° to 8. E., are covered by apparently conformable beds of fine-grained, gray sandstone, which, toward the top, soon merges into a coarse conglomerate. The change is very marked, the upper portion of the sandstone containing rounded fragments of chert near the contact, and the lower part of the conglomerate haying lenticular deposits of the sandstone. This transition appears to mark some important change that took place during the form- ing ofthese deposits, and the fact that, in transverse section, they border the river for twelve miles and have a great thickness, would seem to indicate that this change was not confined to the immediate neighborhood. This conglomerate is followed by a red sandstone, which above Itu dips easterly, and below that place westerly. From here eastward the country on both sides of the river is flat, the rocks being covered for the most part by alluvial deposits ; but in the neighborhood of Yangchi limestone crops out in different places, with a very irregular strike between N. and W., and a corresponding dip to between N. and E. From this point to Hankau, the country, if we except a few isolated hills, is one almost unbroken plain, the ancient bed of the Tungting lake, in which the older rocks are covered by the lake deposits. At the town of Shishan (Hien) an isolated hill rises from the plain, its almost vertical strata trending about N. 65° E., and consisting of sandstone, arenaceous shale resembling a similar rock of the Kwei coal field, and a shaly quartzose conglomerate. The outcroppings of the older rocks that appear, at intervals, between the outlet of the Tungting lake and Hankau are sandstones and argillites, which, from their general character and the fact that in one place their trend is toward a locality a few miles distant where coal is worked, would seem to belong to the Coal measures. ‘The hills immediately above Hankau are of clay slates and argillaceous sandstone, and through the cities of Wuchang and Hanyang, stretches a ridge of sandstone altered to an almost compact quartzite. The journey from Hankau to the sea was made in a steamer, stopping only at Kiukiang and Chinkiang, making the knowledge concerning this part of the river very imperfect. The only sources of information were constant observations, through a good glass, of the frequent natural sections made by the river, and the scanty remarks of a few travellers connected with Lord Amherst’s embassy. Below Sankiangkau beds of sandstone and conglomerate, trending 8. W. and dipping 40°—45° to S. E., are exposed, and a few miles further down the river the city of Hwangchau fu is built on a low ridge of ferruginous sandstone, of which the raised beds strike due N., dipping about 30° W. About twenty miles S$. E. from this city, hills of limestone, 800 to 900 feet high, form the southern bank of the river, the irregular trend of their strata varying from W. to S. W., and the dip, of about 40°, from S. to $. E. Twenty-five miles below this point the river breaks through another ridge of limestone, the strata of which have a strike to S. E. by S. and incline about 40° to S. W. by W. The rocks on the outlet to the Poyang lake have all the appearance of limestone, 8 GEOLOGICAL RESEARCHES IN and this is the case with all the exposed sections from the outlet to the Siauku shan or Little Orphan rock. Below Tungliu coarse red sandstone is exposed, its upturned edges, which are here capped with the younger terrace deposits, trending to N. E. with a dip of 15° to N. W. At Nanking there are extensive quarries of limestone, while directly opposite the city, on the left bank of the Yangtse, strata of red sand- stone trend W. 8. W., dipping about 40° to E. S. E. Coal mines are worked in the immediate neighborhood of this city, especially on its eastern side. Soon after leaving the hills of Nanking the river enters the great delta plain through which it winds to the sea. In a résumé I shall try, by means of a combination of the data given above, with information derived chiefly from native sources, to throw more light on the structure of this region. TERRACES OF THE YANGTSE VALLEY. At frequently recurring points along both the Upper and Lower Yangtse, we meet with deposits of gravel and clay, forming bluffs at the water’s edge, or fringing the hills that form the walls of the valley. They are generally stratified in horizontal beds. Differing in height and in the character of their ingredients, there seems also to be a diversity of age. The extensive plain, once occupied by the Tungting lake, before it was reduced to its present size, is fringed by these terraces; for they recur constantly from Hankau to Yochau on the right bank of the river, and from this city along the eastern border of the lake, and form a belt which extends many miles to the south, and occupies nearly all the space along the south- ern edge of the lake, between the Siang and Yuen rivers. Again, where the river enters the lake plain, the tongue of land included by the river bend between Pah- yang and Tung‘sz, consists of the same deposit. At the last named locality the deposit is made up of rounded pebbles of quartz and limestone, cemented with a stiff clay, and this is its general character at the junction of the Siang river with the lake and along the eastern shore. But the most general form of occurrence is that of a stiff blue clay, with irregular white spots. Near Tung‘sz the terraces appear to be from seventy to ninety feet high, but below the outlet of the lake they vary from thirty to sixty feet. Blackiston mentions similar terraces as occurring at various points along the Yangtse in Sz‘chuen. The village of 'Tsingtan, at the eastern end of the Mitan gorge in Western Hupeh, is built on a terrace of conglomerate-breccia formed of fragments of limestone, chert, gneiss, and other metamorphic rocks, in form of rubble and rounded and angular fragments of all sizes, the whole firmly cemented by a calcareous tufa. This formation originally filled the valley from side to side, and its bluffs rise forty to fifty feet above high-water mark. In the rapid current that must always have scoured these narrow portions of the Yangtse valley, nothing but the coarsest material could resist the onward movement; and when an increase in the velocity of the stream took place, only those portions of the deposits were preserved which CHINA, MONGOLIA, AND JAPAN. 9 were near enough to the limestone to be cemented into a hard mass by the waters flowing from it. The bed of the Yangtse must have been cut to about its present depth, when a diminution of its average fall took place, permitting the formation of these terrace deposits. Subsequently another change, by increasing the fall, caused the river to scour out, again, the greater part of the valley. As with the river so with the Tungting lake; this large sheet of water, which then occupied all the plain of Hupeh and Hunan, must have been filled up with the terrace deposit, the remains of which now form its shores. With the returning increase of fall, the lake was scoured out by the rivers Yangtse, Han, Siang, and Yuen. Since this erosion, it would seem probable that the velocity of the current has slightly diminished, as the material brought down by these rivers has converted nearly nine-tenths of the former lake into dry land. . These are in the smaller and lower seam. ) cleaned out and made regular. This done, the banks (d) are broken down into the stream where the force of the current con- centrates the gravel, carrying off the sand and clay. The workmen then place themselves in pairs up and down the stream near and below the broken-down bank. Each man is provided with a coarse mat, about two feet long by one foot broad, which he places lengthwise in the stream, keeping it down with one foot on the lower end, at the same time partially stemming the current. He then hoes the gravel on to the mat, much of the old gravel going off below as fresh arrives from up stream. At intervals the mat is carefully removed and washed out into a very shallow tray or batea (Fig. 15), a board about eighteen inches long by a foot broad, hollowed out, and having a circular depression near one end for the concentrated head. Of the black sand obtained on this board, the head contain- ing the gold is saved. In this manner the gravel is pretty well exhausted of its gold, very little being obtained “by the men farthest down the stream. The working progresses sideways, into the banks, and up stream, the current being kept near the banks as these recede from the centre of the stream. As the space between the banks widens, the coarser material that resists the force of the water is thrown up into a pile of loose masonry (¢) which increases in length and breadth as the work advances. CHINA, MONGOLIA, AND JAPAN. 93 Numerous remains of ancient workings, by this method, are found in the neigh- borhood. Throughout this region the forest is dense; among the trees I noticed elms and a wild mulberry with black fruit. Fierce, large flies, of two kinds not seen on the sea-shore, swarm in these woods, covering horse and rider, and leaving bleeding wounds wherever they strike. The creek abounds in mountain trout and salmon. August 14th. Returning to Kunnui on the sea-shore, we followed the beach to the village of Woshimanbe. : August 15th. At this village we left the bay to cross over to the west coast. For several miles the road lay over the terrace belt, here covered with drift. At the divide we found a broad, marshy tract through which a large creek winds on its way to the Japan sea. This stream we descended in a small flatboat. The prevailing rock across this low part of the ridge was, so far as I could judge, an argillaceous deposit, apparently the same that forms the terraces. The forest contained, chiefly, large beech, birch, and maple trees, with oaks and scattered firs, and the usual dense undergrowth of cane. The banks of the streams were lined with water willows. ‘The creeks abound in trout, and the gravelly bot- tom is often nearly hidden by colonies of unio. As we approached the bay of Odaszu the country became more open, and leaving the creek we descended over two ter- races of drift to the village of Odaszu on the sea. The southern shore of this small bay is shallow and shelving, with a broad beach ; but the eastern and western sides are rocky, the rocky bluffs descending into the . sea, a feature common to all the west coast, so far as we followed it, and indeed to the shores of all the Japanese islands. August 16th. Leaving Odaszu we continued our journey northward along the coast. Here, also, high terraces face the sea, but they are formed of the tufa-con- glomerate formation, the level surface being due to a recent deposit of gravel and sand. This conglomerate is traversed near Odaszu by dykes of a dark gray rock, much weathered, containing crystals of a triclinic felspar, and opalescent chalce- dony. ‘The conglomerate at Isoya is traversed by dykes of an amorphous rock containing crystals of triclinic felspar. Near Isoya there is a deposit consisting of beds of sandstone, argillaceous mate- rial, and volcanic ashes,’ with fragments of pumice, and also of the argillite which has been mentioned as occurring at Washinoki and Kunnui with a vermiform fossil. The pieces of pumice contain beautiful double-pyramid crystals of quartz. This deposit is younger than the neighboring tufa-conglomerate, which had suffered much from erosion before the deposition of the beds in question. It continues northward till it abuts against a mass of volcanic rock, that forms the headland south of the mouth of the Shiribetz river. This stream rises nearly north of Cape Edomo, and flows westward through a fine, broad valley. All the gravel brought down by the river seemed to be trachytic detritus. 1 For the interesting results of a microscopic examination of this material, see Mr. Edwards’ Letter (spec. No. 11), Appendix 3. 94 GEOLOGICAL RESEARCHES IN Crossing the valley of the Shiribetz we came to the foot of the Raiden promon- tory, a bold headland presenting vertical cliffs toward the sea, and apparently made up of lava flows and tufa-conglomerate. In crossing this mountain we frequently found fragments of a black scoria with long-drawn cells. After a laborious journey of several hours we descended into a deep and gloomy gorge containing a warm spring. Here again we found the same variety of white quartziferous porphyry that we had seen at Kakumi and elsewhere. It is im- pregnated with iron pyrites which in places is represented only by cubical cavities containing sulphur. The rock traversed by this porphyry is of a brecciated argil- laceous character, resembling that at Kakumi. It is from this rock that the springs flow, with a temperature varying, in different ones, from 46° to 50°C. These rocks are exposed only in the bottom of the ravine, on either side of which they are covered by the volcanic formation. August 17th. Rising from the ravine we continued our journey over the northern part of the Raiden, the outcrops here, as yesterday, being of a gray trachytic lava with a tendency to tabular structure. This continued till we descended at the creek Nibitzunai to a terrace that reaches many miles northward and eastward, low near the sea, but rising rapidly toward the mountains. Skirting this for a few miles we reached Iwanai. August 18th. At Iwanai we left the sea and made an excursion to the volcano Iwaounobori’ about thirteen miles inland. The first five miles of the road lay over the terrace which, as we approached the mountains, rose very rapidly. During the first mile or two, after leaving the sea, the surface was covered with a dense growth of long-jointed grass, six or seven feet high, to which succeeded the usual forest of large maples, oaks, mountain and white- ash, beech, birch, fir, and scattered magnolias, filled in with an impenetrable under- growth of cane eight to twelve, and even fifteen feet high. The road through this region, being deep with mud which was full of sharp pointed stumps of the cane, was one of the worst I have ever seen. Entering the mountains we passed through a crateriform valley, once the bed of a lake, and, ascending to a pass in the hills beyond, we saw, beneath us, a beautiful little lake. On the other side of this rose the volcano, or rather solfatara, with its yellow, sulphur-coated cliffs. Here again the regular slopes and symmetrical out- lines of an undisturbed cone are entirely wanting; the outer as well as the inner walls were rocky precipices, and the ruin seemed greater than at Esan. We reached the summit without much difficulty. The present mountain is evidently only part of the skeleton of a former cone of large size. ‘The predominating formation, from the spurs at the base to the summit, is a dark gray volcanic rock, showing in places a tendency to stratiform structure, and apparently of the trachytic family, the chief ingredient being crystals of a white felspar.* The former mantle seems to be still represented by fragmentary 1 Japanese. Jiwaou, sulphur; and nobori, a term for mountain, from noboru, to climb. 2 With the exception of one specimen of rock, and a few minerals, the entire collection of rocks, shells, ete. from north of Odaszu, was lost by the wreck of a junk on the way to Hakodade. CHINA, MONGOLIA, AND JAPAN. 95 remains of a stratified deposit seen here and there, about the base, and fragments of scoriz were found in the neighborhood. There are several small crateriform depressions at different points near the summit, filled to the level of the lip with sand and clay, and forming small plains surrounded by rocky sides. In one of the walls a compact black rock, either a dyke or the remnant of a lava flow, was observed. The Iwaounobori is the central one of three volcanoes, which lie in a straight line running about N.N. W., 8.8. E., and this is also the trend of a broad belt, within the limits of which the solfatara action is most developed, both across the summit and on the outer walls. Throughout this belt the rock, wherever not covered by the products of decom- position, is found to be traversed by countless fissures, more or less filled with sulphur. Wherever the filling is incomplete, small jets of steam and gases are still seen to issue forth. Several trials, made by inserting a long chemist’s thermometer as far as possible into different fissures, gave a constant temperature of 98° C. _ The steam has a strong odor of both sulphurous acid and sulphuretted hydrogen. It has an acid reaction on litmus paper, which is especially strong when the con- densed drops, that hang on the sulphur crystals in the cavities, are tested. Beau- tiful crystals of sulphur, a quarter of an inch long, were rapidly formed on the bulb of the thermometer. Excepting at the steam vents, which are not more than from one to five inches in diameter, the fissures are closed up with sulphur at the surface, but by breaking away a few inches deep, cavities are exposed lined with a bristling mass of most beautiful straw-colored crystals of this mineral, made up of brilliant steep pyramids connected in the line of the longer axis. Unfortunately, they were too delicate to bear transportation. On a precipitous part of the outer wall of the mountain, where a large mass of rock seemed recently to have fallen off, I saw an interesting exhibition of the action of the gases. The rock is seen to be traversed by a perfect network of sulphur veins (a) which seem to occupy the posi- tions of the cracks common to all rock. The trachytic rock (6) is tolerably well preserved in the centre of the blocks, but toward the circumference it is more and more disintegrated, and has assumed the form of concentric layers, the outer shell being changed to a white earth. It seems not improbable that this condition may exist through a large part of the moun- i tain, thus forming a great stockwerk of GA Sulphur se Rock, sulphur. The only way in which I can account for this structure is, by supposing that the disintegration of the rock, which formerly occupied the spaces now filled with sulphur, took place when the water, which now appears only as steam, stood at a 96 GEOLOGICAL RESEARCHES IN higher level in the mountain, making it a mud voleano, like Esan, and exuding the products of decomposition as fast as formed. On the withdrawal of the water to a lower level the abandoned network of fissures was filled by the decomposition of sulphuretted hydrogen. At another place, in the walls of one of the small craters near the summit, there is an instance that would seem to illustrate the action of the gases and steam without the presence of water as such. The black rock, already mentioned as occurring in the wall of one of the craters, is visible in different stages of alteration. In places it was observed to have the concentric structure assumed by many rocks during the first period of disintegration, and by which the polygonal form of the blocks, into which all bodies of rock are subdivided, is lost as each succeeding shell is removed. In this case the outer shell is - white and earthy. Again the same rock was found altered to the centre of each block, the shape re- maining, to a soft, pasty, white clay, quite tasteless. Often in the centre of a snowy white mass of this clay would lie a core, equally soft, but black, the line of separation between the colors being well marked. In places, where the alteration was in the first stage, an alum salt was found forming an efflo- rescence on the surface of this black rock, possibly as one of the first products from the decomposing felspar. An emerald-green soft mineral occurs incrusting, to the depth of a line or more, the walls of the gully where these phenomena were observed. On the west side of the peak, in the valley which drains the craters, there was formerly a spring of chalybeate water, which has left quite a deposit of oxide of iron filled with the leaves of a cane, apparently of the same species that covers the surrounding country. At present there is no cane on this part of the mountain, although it grows within a few hundred yards of the spot. This space, which is bare of cane, abounds in Winter-green (Gaultheria) with white berries. In close proximity to this deposit a white altered rock, filled with threads of sulphur, attests the former action of the gases in this spot which is now removed from the nearest field of activity. From the summit of the Iwaounobori I counted fifteen mountains, all of which seemed to be of valcanic origin. Among these I include Esan, Sawaradake, and Oussu, all solfataras, which, from their ruined condition, I would not have recog- nized as volcanoes at this distance had I not known them to be such. A few miles away to the 8.8. E., beyond the broad valley of the river Shiribetz, rose a magnificent cone also called the Shiribetz. ‘This cone is the most symmetri- cal of any that I have seen, not excepting the beautiful Fuziyama, the pride of the Empire. Of its height I had no means of judging, but I thought it could not be less than 6000 feet. It rises from a broad plain, at least the slopes visible to us merged gently into the sweeping cross curves of the valley of the Shiribetz river. The unbroken surface of its sides was covered from base to summit with vegetation, CHINA, MONGOLIA, AND JAPAN. 97 either forest or cane, which appeared to us in the distance like a mantle of green velvet. Many other well-shaped cones were visible in the distance. Just N. N. W. of the Iwaounobori there is a cone somewhat lower than the peak of the solfatara, with a well preserved crater, so near that it seems to be partly within the circumference of the foot-slope of the Iwaou mountain. As I have said before, it is in a line with its neighbor and the Shiribetz, and this direction is repeated in the zone of the solfatara activity on the Iwaou mountain, a coincidence that would seema to point to a fissure connection between the three peaks. The government has sulphur works on this mountain, in which fourteen caldrons are kept at work. The production is about 64,000 pounds per month, costing for— Labor of all kinds and for fuel per month 9 6 c . $74 50 Rice for workmen . 0 : . ¢ 0 : : . 41 00 Salt and miso for workmen . 6 5 : : 5 j 4 00 Straw sandals for workmen. ; : 3 : 6 6 6 50 Transportation by horse to Iwanai 0 : 6 : . OT 25 Total for 64,000 pounds : 0 : . $183 25 August 20th. We returned to Iwanai. August 21st. Continuing our journey northward, we rode along the beach to the mouth of the Shiribuka creek, where the coast line, turning off to the northwest, marks the southern shore of the peninsula south of Strogonof bay. Following this shore we left the terrace plain of Iwanai bay. During the rest of the day we saw only the tufa-conglomerate formation, which, traversed by numerous dykes of volcanic rock, faces the sea in bold bluffs, to pass which we were at last compelled to take a boat to carry us to Ousubetz, a small fishing village. The volcanic conglomerate of this region extends some distance inland, and con- sists almost entirely of more or less rounded fragments of black lava filled with green-coated cells. ( August 22d. Leaving the sea we made a short excursion up the bed of a creek, the Kaiyanobetz. About one mile from the shore a gray sandstone was found ex- posed for a short distance beneath the volcanic conglomerate, and about one mile and a half further we found in the bed of a rivulet the following strata, the order reading from younger to older.* 1. Fine-grained argillaceous rock with fossil plants. 2. Coarse sandstone. 3. Clay shale with Hquisetacew. 4, Coarse sandstone. 5. Three seams of bituminous coal alternating with thin beds of clay, the princi- pal seam having about four feet of good coal. The strike of these beds was N. 30° E., the dip being 50° to N. 60° W. In a neighboring ravine a white silicious rock was observed, apparently older than the coal, and made up of minute layers, the whole being hard, and having somewhat the appearance of a semi-opal. 4 Except.a small specimen of coal which was brought away by one of the Japanese officers, all the co®Bections from this region were lost in the wreck mentioned above. 13 July, 186, 98 GEOLOGICAL RESEARCHES IN Retracing our steps to Ousubetz we embarked in a boat propelled by eight oars- men, four scullers, and a large sail, and soon reached Iwanai. August 25th. Leaving Iwanai we went by boat to Isoya, passing close under the rocky cliffs of the Raiden. The northern part of this mountain is formed of the volcanic tufa-conglomerate covered by a great bed, or perhaps several flows, of lava, often exhibiting columnar structure. In places beds of lava seemed to be inter- stratified with the conglomerate. At about half the distance between the northern and southern sides of this high- land, a large amphitheatre or crateriform valley opens towards the sea. South of this the cliffs, less high, consist of the conglomerate, and in the perpendicular walls are visible many small but regular dykes with transverse columnar structure, and in places dislocated by faults. The conglomerate strata have a considerable south- westerly dip, and as we approach the southern flank of the Raiden, near the village of Hamajimé, they disappear under the sea. Overlying this formation and forming the mountain above, is a gray volcanic rock, possessing a tabular structure, which gives it often a stratiform appearance near the bottom, but in the upper half of its thickness the plates curve irregularly upwards, presenting their edges towards the upper surface of the bed. This mountain is a high, flat ridge, running nearly east and west, between the valleys of the Shiribetz and the Shiribuka rivers, and on it is the Iwaou nobori, and at least one more volcano. August 27th. Leaving Isoya, we rode around the head of Odaszu bay to Sutzu. On this side of the bay we met again terraces of conglomerete, covered with loose sand and gravel, corresponding to those mentioned as occurring on the opposite side. ° Before reaching Sutzu the conglomerate formation was found to be succeeded, for a short distance, by a gray eruptive rock, apparently a trachytic porphyry. The conglomerate in this region consists, almost entirely, of rounded fragments of a com- pact black rock, almost a pitchstone, containing crystals of white triclinic felspar. August 28th. Leaving Sutzu we rode westward, over the lower of the two terraces that rise between the sea and the hills. The highlands are wooded with small trees, but on the terraces there is generally only a heavy growth of weeds and joint- grass, often from six to ten feet high. Leaving the sea-shore, we crossed the pro- montory to its western flank, travelling over the conglomerate, upon which was seen a loose deposit of sand and gravel closely resembling the auriferous deposit of Kunnui. In one place I observed an outcrop of the argillaceous rock, with the peculiar vermiform fossil, seen at Kunnui, Washinoki, etc. At Achase the tufa-conglomerate dips inland, and beneath it there is an appa- rently conformable bed of fine-grained, brown sandstone, easily scratched with the knife, and seemingly of the same origin as the conglomerate. A few miles further southward we reached Shimakomaki. Here the semi-vitreous character of the pebbles that compose the conglomerate is better developed than usual, although a black amorphous base was found to be generally prevalent, in these fragments, in the tufa-conglomerates of the west coast. Here the base of the rock is jet black, opaque, with the lustre of pitch, and imperfect conchoidal CHINA, MONGOLIA, AND JAPAN. 99 fracture. Fragments break off with a very hackly surface. The structure varies from slightly cellular to scoriaceous, the cells being lined with a light greenish or bluish film. It contains thin crystals of white, glassy felspar, the number of which seems to be in an inverse ratio to that of the cells. The felspar is, at least in part, a triclinic variety. The Tomari creek, which enters the sea near Shimakomaki, brings down among its rubble, diorite, granular limestone containing nephrite, clay schist, and varieties of quartz and jasper. This stream rises in the hills that have furnished, in part at least, the auriferous gravels of Kunnui, and it is probable that similar deposits occur also in the valley of the Tomari. August 29th. Embarking in a large boat we sailed close under the lofty cliffs of a grandly picturesque, but dangerous coast, as far as Setanai. The volcanic conglomerate exists as the principal formation of the coast, between Shimakomaki and Setanai. At Cape Shiraita the thickness of the conglomerate, above the sea, is between 100 and 200 feet; above this is a bed, perhaps 150 feet thick, apparently of a looser material, with many white fragments scattered through it; and, finally, covering this, for a distance of one or two miles, is a bed of lava, 150 to 200 feet thick. From this point to Cape Moteta the cliffs are entirely of the volcanic conglomer- ate, of which a lower bed is sometimes visible, with white fragments, those of the upper beds being dark brown or black. At Cape Moteta the volcanic conglomerate, occupying the lower part of the cliffs to the height of between 100 and 200 feet above the sea, is covered by a thick bed of columnar lava. Near this point a broad dyke rises through the conglomerate to the overlying lava bed, but it was impossible to determine, at a distance, the relative ages of the latter and the dyke. _ Numerous dykes traverse the conglomerate between Cape Moteta and Setanai. At Abura the latter approaches sandstone in texture; at one place it was seen to pass abruptly into a white deposit, probaby a pumiceous tufa. South of Abura the conglomerate is covered by a lava bed, and this by white, apparently tufaceous, strata. Several miles north of Setanai a thick bed of columnar lava is visible, high up the face of the cliff, lying between two members of the neptuno-voleanic formation, and dipping gently toward the south. Before reaching Setanai a thick flow of lava, beautifully columnar and probably the continuation of the bed just mentioned, occupies the lower half or more of the cliff, while needles of the same rock rising high out of the sea form picturesque islands. This rock is a dark brown, much weathered, cellular lava. The cells are coated with a soft, brittle mineral, dark green in the fracture, and light bluish-green on the surface; and being flattened and parallel, with their planes at right angles to the axes of the columns, they give to the rock a slaty structure. Overlying this lava bed there are strata of tufa-conglomerate, made up mostly of fragments of cellular and scoriaceous volcanic products. Just south of Setanai the Toshibetz—here several hundred feet broad—the river, on which lie the gold washings of Kunnui, empties into the sea—its valley, here 100 GEOLOGICAL RESEARCHES IN several miles broad, being the first break, of any size, in the uninterrupted line of cliffs south of the Bay of Odaszu. August 30th. Continuing our journey southward we followed the beach, sepa- _rated here by high sand hills from the flats of the Toshibetz, till Futoro. Just before reaching this village we left the valley and came under a bluff of trachytic or phonolithic lava, with a tendency to slaty structure. It has a lght gray base, with semi-vitreous lustre, and is cellular—the cavities being very irregular in shape and lined with a grayish-blue botryoidal mineral. It contains numerous crystals of a glassy triclinic felspar. At Futoro the volcanic conglomerate reappears as a red and brown tufa, with fragments of the lava just described and other varieties that show a regular transition from this lava into a black amorphous kind closely resembling that mentioned as form- ing dykes at Isoya. The strata of this neptuno-volcanic formation strike nearly N. and dip to E. about 20°, and the cleavage planes of the lava bed described above dip in the same direction. This lava flow seems to be at least 250 or 300 feet thick. Just south of Futoro the contact between the lava and conglomerate was observed. The former rock at a little distance from the contact was found to be fresh, generally free from cells, and had a light gray compact base, abounding in crystals of triclinic, glassy felspar, with here and there a crystal of hornblende. Its appearance re- minded me strongly of some non-quartziferous felsitic porphyries. Near the contact it became more earthy, and assumed the appearance of the base of the conglomerate, from which it was here distinguishable only by the crystals of felspar. The whole appearance of the contact seemed to indicate that the lava had flowed over the surface of the older deposit before this had become compacted. August 31st. From Futoro we went by boat to Oouta. Not far from Futoro the volcanic formations were seen to rest upon a granite or syenite, which, a little further south, abuts, with a vertical line of contact, against a compact black, aphanitic rock, ‘This last was seen, in the face of a rock rising from the sea, to be traversed by veins of granite which, just south of this, was found to form the high cliffs till near Oouta. At Nichinbe, about three miles north of Oouta, the prevailing rock was found to be a very beautiful syenitic granite, composed of greenish-white triclinic felspar, brilliant hornblende, black mica, and quartz. It is traversed by a dyke of a green, micro-crystalline rock, containing felspar and hornblende. At Oouta there is an extensive development of metamorphic rocks, consisting of a fine-grained granulite of even texture, and a conglomerate-breccia of argillaceous rocks, ‘The only traces of a trend observable was in the vertical plane of contact between these two rocks, and this lay N. and 8. South of Oduta syenite reappears, and is shown to be younger than the granulite by the numerous fragments it incloses of the last-mentioned rock. The granulite is cut by dykes of an aphanitic rock similar to that observed south of Futoro, and which we have seen to be traversed by veins of granite. Finally, the conglomerate-breccia incloses fragments of amygdaloid resembling a variety found in the auriferous gravel of Kunnui, and containing nodules of chalce- dony surrounded by a soft green mineral resembling delessite. CHINA, MONGOLIA, AND JAPAN. 101 The relative ages of the metamorphic and intrusive rocks of this region appear to be as follows, reading from younger to older :— . Greenstone of Nichinbe; dyke in syenitic granite. . Syenitic granite. . Aphanitic rock. . Metamorphic conglomerate and granulite of Oduta. . Amygdaloid. September Ist. Continuing the journey by boat we reached Kudo—the syenitic granite forming high hills along the sea as far as Ouenkoto, near Kudo. At Kudo other metamorphic strata were observed, consisting of black and rose- colored quartz-schist, clay slate in thin beds, and a dark brown, micro-crystalline rock, apparently felspar and hornblende. These strata are folded and refolded, and the stratification beg well preserved, they presented the finest example of plication I had ever seen. The general trend of the folding seemed to be about E., but there was too much irregularity in this respect to make sure of the direction ; further south the trend appeared more regularly N. W. and the dip N. E. The beds are traversed by a dyke of a porphyritic rock containing crystals of green and greenish-white triclinic felspar and of hornblende, in a grayish purple base. A cold spring of chalybeate and carbonated water rises on the beach from the quartzite. September 2d. Riding along the sea-shore, a few miles, we reached the penal establishment of Ousubetz, at the mouth of a creek of the same name. Ascending this stream, which is a wild mountain torrent contained, near the sea, between cliffs of the volcanic conglomerate, we came upon an amygdaloidal rock, and beyond this a chloritic granite containing, besides quartz and chlorite, white orthoclase and a light green triclinic felspar. In this granite there is a broad belt, apparently a dyke, of a claystone-porphyry, a yellowish rock with a rough, earthy base free from visible quartz, and from which the crystals of felspar have dis- appeared, leaving only their cavities. From this porphyry issue several springs, which showed in different instances temperatures of 55°, 58°, and 584° C. These springs have formed deposits, of carbonate of lime and brown oxide of iron, which are more or less cavernous, and are the abode of a great number of snakes, which, attracted by the perpetual warmth, and being respected by the natives as the deities of the place, live unharmed. ‘The cast-off skins of these reptiles flutter, like streamers, from every hole and neighboring bush. Beyond the chloritic granite we found again the amygdaloid which, under various forms, extended as far inland as our excursion continued, about one mile beyond the chloritic granite. In one of the side ravines a bluish-white, highly silicious rock, with conchoidal fracture and impregnated with minute cubes of iron pyrites, was observed in con- tact with the amygdaloidal rock. This amygdaloid is very variable in character, in places brecciated, in others massive—the base being generally dark reddish-brown, and containing nodules of calcite and a green, soft clayey mineral, with here and there one of quartz. Frag- Oo FR WD WOR 102 GEOLOGICAL RESEARCHES IN ments of a green serpentinoidal rock, which seemed to be a variety of the amygdaloid, occur in the creek. September 4th. Descending to the sea we rode southward along the shore, under cliffs of the volcanic conglomerate, as far as the large village of Kumaishi. September 5th. Leaving Kumaishi we followed the beach southward. From the village south the shore bluff is formed by a vertical cliff of white pumice-tufa, sufficiently hard to permit the making of steps in it. It is in thick beds having a southerly dip. South of Hiratanai this pumice-tufa is covered by the usual tufa-conglomerate. A short distance east of Hiratanai a flow of amorphous lava, resembling that which occurs in fragments in the conglomerate of Isoya and Futoro, flows over the face of the bluff—the erosion of the conglomerate having progressed to nearly its present condition before the flow. A conical hill with a crateriform depression, lying several miles inland, was observed from the beach, and was possibly the source of the stream. Beyond this point, as far as To- a. Lava flow. 6. Tufa-conglomerate. marigawa, another bed of pumice- tufa, overlying the conglomerate, forms the bluff-rock and the skeleton of the terraces that extend several miles inland. At Tomarigawa we left the sea-shore and entered the mountains, and ascending to the watershed between the Japan sea and Volcano bay, we descended the eastern slope to the mines of Yurup. Our road, during this distance, lay, all the way, over the volcanic tufa-conglomer- ate formation, which extends entirely across this part of the island, and forms the ridge at a height of perhaps 2,000 feet. This deposit is cut up by deep valleys with steep sides. In these I noticed out- crops, beneath the conglomerate, of granite, two or three miles from the sea, and, further eastward, of the argillaceous rock with vermiform fossils already mentioned several times. The lead mines of Yurup are in the valley system of the river of the same name. Here a widely extended erosion has removed the volcanic conglomerate, for a considerable distance, exposing a very extensive development of a black meta- morphosed argillite, which was found to contain the vermiform fossils so often mentioned in the previous pages. ‘The strata are tilted up, often almost vertical, and are frequently connected with broad bands, apparently dykes, of greenstone. The lead-bearing veins occur in both these rocks. ‘The vein-mass consists of quartz, carbonate of manganese, calcite, and, in one vein, crystals of barytes. Besides these minerals the galena is associated with zincblende, and pyrites of iron and copper. The veins vary from two to eighteen inches in thickness, being more regular in CHINA, MONGOLIA, AND JAPAN. 103 the greenstone where, also, the gangue is chiefly quartz, and often existing as a zone, several feet broad, of parallel threads, in the argillaceous rock. The mines have been worked several years and a considerable area explored, but like those at Ichinowatari they are very poor—the highest production ever attained being about four tons per month, and at the time of my visit it was only about one and three-quarter tons. The processes of separation and smelting are the same as at Ichinowatari. The laborers are furnished, at the expense of the mine, with rice and miso, a vegetable substance used for soup. I have added a schedule of the daily expenses, more as a curiosity, and as illustrating the cost of labor, than for any other reason. Daily Expenses of the Yurup Lead Mines. Accountant clerk 5 : $ 05 Head miner . 6 : 6 : 2 : 6 . : : 07 Twenty-five miners, at 5 cts. . : 6 : é c 0 5 o) db BB) Highteen coolies, at 4 cts. : : : ; : : 0 72 Thirteen women ore dressers and washers, at 2 to 6 cents. ; 9 : 45 Daily consumption of iron. : : 6 6 C 6 : : 12 a ss steel . : : 3 : ; : : 5 04 ss os mats and ropes’. . : c 3 . . 06 Total . P : , ; : . $2 76 The working time is eight hours daily. The miners receive tasks, for all work over which they are paid extra. The task when working in the hardest rock, here a greenstone, is ;3, of one foot in five days, per man. In very soft rock five feet iu five days, per man. ‘The average is about one and one-half feet. ‘The above measures refer to galleries five feet high and three broad. The miners are required to hew the walls as smoothly, and square the angles as accurately as was the custom in Germany before the use of gunpowder. A woman’s daily task is to pulverize about 160 pounds of ore. One thousand pounds of roughly-sorted ore yields 67 pounds of schlich, from which 45 pounds of metallic lead are obtained. The charcoal for smelting is produced in vaulted furnaces, which receive daily 64 cubic feet of split wood. Both cold and warm chalybeate springs rise in the metamorphic argillite; the warm one, having the temperature of 46° C., is used in winter for washing the ore. At this place we introduced the use of gunpowder in mining—its application to that purpose being entirely unknown throughout Eastern Asia. We met with the same objection here that was used, centuries ago, against its introduction into the German mines, the fear that the mountain would fall in. One blast, however, allayed this fear, and the miners adopted it enthusiastically thenceforth. September 11th. Leaving Yurup we descended the valley to the sea. At the distance of about one mile from the mines we came again to the volcanic con- glomerate. This formation is here similar in character to that seen between the Japan sea and the mines, but differs from that generally met with along the sea- shore. It has undergone so much alteration that it is often difficult to draw the line between the inclosing mass and the fragments. These latter are of a dark, 104 GEOLOGICAL RESEARCHES IN cellular rock with amorphous base, containing abundant crystals of nornblende and felspar. ‘The cementing material is a more or less yellowish mineral, with the lustre of wax, and easily scratched with the knife. This mass also abounds in crystals of hornblende and felspar, and is cellular in the same manner as the inclosed fragments. Specimens show a transition from one to the other, and this is especially observable around the cells in the fragments. The general color of the rock is dirty yellow. If this be not a true palagonite tufa it must be closely related to it. The strata of this formation dip gently, on the western slope, towards the Japan sea, and on the eastern slope, towards Volcano bay. ‘They consist of two principal members, the lower, a fine-grained, soft tufa with black mica and fragments of nearly decomposed pumice; and the palagonite-tufa, if I may call it such, as the upper member. At about half way between the mines and the sea we came again upon the argillaceous rock of the mines, containing the same characteristic fossil, but un- metamorphosed, and presenting itself as a soft gray argillaceous shale. At the village of Yurup, on Volcano bay, we came into the road followed in going north, and completed the circuit of this itinerary. Without attempting, in the absence of necessary data, to determine more closely the ages of the rocks referred to in the preceding pages, they may be generally classed as follows :—_ I, Older metamorphic. II. Pluto-neptunian. III. Recent, including the marine terrace deposits. IV. Eruptive, of all ages. The first of these divisions contains all the sedimentary rocks that were observed to be older than the volcanic tufa-conglomerate formation. They are rocks that vary widely in character, and perhaps as widely in age. Forming the skeleton, of at least the southern part of Yesso, they are almost everywhere concealed by the younger deposits. The most highly metamorphosed and perhaps the oldest strata observed are the granulite and conglomerate-breccia beds of Oduta, on the west coast. These last are made up of older argillaceous and amygdaloidal rocks, but are also older than three varieties of eruptive rocks—aphanitic trap, syenitic granite, and a greenstone trap, apparently diorite. The greatest part of the southeast peninsula, lying between Volcano bay and the Straits of Tsungara, is formed of fissile clay slates with subordinated beds of sand- stone and conglomerates, the uplift trending nearly as the peninsula, about N. W. by W. ‘These strata are traversed by frequent dykes of the characteristic white quartziferous porphyry, and varieties of greenstone, the latter being younger than the porphyry. At Wosatzube, on the northern side of the peninsula, there are beds of silicious schist, having also a northwesterly trend, and strata of a similar character occur at Kudo, on the west coast, associated with subordinated clay slate and beds of a CHINA, MONGOLIA, AND JAPAN. 105 hornblende-felspar rock. Here also the mean trend of the highly contorted beds is between W. and N. The remaining older rocks of this part of the island belong to the Ichinowatari series, and the argillite beds containing the obscure vermiform fossil, so often men- tioned. The Ichinowatari series are black and gray metamorphosed argillacecus rocks, associated with older or younger shale containing calamites of unknown age, and with greenstone; and they are characterized by metalliferous veins occurring at least in both the argillaceous rocks and in the greenstone. The argillite beds we find at many points, throughout the region included in the above itineraries, occurring in places either as a compact gray rock or as a shale, while at Yurup it is metamorphosed to a compact black rock, tilted almost to per- pendicularity. Between Tomarigawa, on the west coast, and Yurup, on Volcano bay, it is found, excepting in one locality, to be the predominating rock wherever the ravines have cut through to the bottom of the volcanic tufa-conglomerate strata. The rocks in question have, in common with the Ichinowatari series, their argilla- ceous character, their association with dykes and great masses of greenstone and an identity of character in the metalliferous veins of the two localities, both as regards the association of minerals in these and also as regards some peculiarities in the condition of the greenstone near these veins. Finally we have seen, beyond Iwanai, near Ousubetz (north), a coal-bearing series of more or less metamorphosed rocks, containing fossil Eguwiseta. We find, in the auriferous gravel of Kunnui, representatives of another class of metamorphic rocks in the chloritic and micaceous schists, ete., which are probably the source of the gold, and evidently exist in sit# in the ridge between that place and the Japan sea. The enumerated strata form, so far as my cbservation extended, the skeleton of Southern Yesso. The local strike of the coal-bearing rocks of the Ousubetz (north) is N. 30° E., being nearly at right angles to the N. W. trend of the peninsula on which they occur. All the other beds of the older rocks seem to have been affected chiefly by-an uplift trending between N. and W., and to which that portion of the island lying between Esan volcano and the mouth of the Toshibetz, on the west coast, appears to owe its direction. ; We come now to the pluto-neptunian beds, consisting of great masses, more or less stratified, of volcanic products in the form of tufas, sandstones, and coarser conglomerates and breccias. This, by far the predominating formation, forms almost everywhere sloping plains or terraces between the mountains and the sea-shore, and extends, at least in places, entirely over the watersheds between Volcano bay and the Japan sea, form- ing peaks, as the Obokodake, several thousand feet high. The petrographical character of these beds is very different, not only in their vertical, but also in their horizontal development. Along the west coast we find thick beds of a white pumice-tufa associated with conglomerates made up of frag- ments of a black compact rock, almost a pitchstone. Along the road from Tomari- gawa to Volcano bay the lowest beds observed were of a more clayey pumiceous tufa, and above these an immense development of a scoriaceous conglomerate-. 14 July, 1866. 106 GEOLOGICAL RESEARCHES IN breccia, altered in great part to a wacke and strongly resembling palagonite-tufa. Bordering the eastern end of the southeastern peninsula, we have seen the repre- sentative beds of this formation, but differing from those of the west coast in that the inclosed fragments have more the character of quartziferous trachytic porphyry, thus approaching closely in character to the wall rock of the HEsan crater and its recent ejecta, as also to the rock of Hakodade peak. The only traces of fossils observed in this formation, were some fragments of the spines of an Echinoderm found near Washinoki. The presence of these deposits over so large an area, and the fact that they always contain beds of coarse material, points to a corresponding range of volcanic activity. ‘The same is indicated in the numerous lava flows and dykes that are intimately associated with these beds. They are probably of submarine origin, and since their formation the island has undergone many changes of level. TstnccHau (Fu). A Mt. Tie 90 li from Yrats (hien). In Kauyven (hien) and Lonaan (hien). At Mt. Chang in Linarss (hien). At Mt. Sung 60 1iS8.W. of Lind (hien) in the vicinity of silver, lead, copper, tin, and cinnabar ores and gold washings. TunecHau (Fu). In Puneuat (hien). PROVINCE OF KIANGSUH. Krananine (Fu) or Nanxina. At Tsz Mt. in Kivyune (hien), with copper ores. Lodestone at Mt. Yen in Lunuon (hien). CHINKIANG (Fu). 3011 8. W. of Lryana (hien). Hwainaan (Fu). In YEencuina (hien). Stcnau (Fu). At Mt. Pema 90 li N. HE. of Tunasan (hien). PROVINCE OF NGANHWUL. Na@ankine (Fu). Hien not indicated. Tarpina (Fu). Steel works at Tekang in Fancnana (hien). PROVINCE OF HONAN. Honan (Fu). In the hiens, Kuna, Nirvana, Tunarune, SIncAn, and Sune Nanyana@ (Fu). In the hiens, Nanyane and Nryana. KairunG (Fu). In Yu (chau). Cuanaten (Fu). In Suen (hien). Ju (chau).. Hien not given. CHINA, MONGOLIA, AND JAPAN. 111 PROVINCE OF HUPEH. Wucuane (Fu). In Kraneuta (hien) and Wucwane (hien). At Mt. Hwuilu E. of Tavs (hien). At Mt. Tsz‘hu 50 li N. EH of Tayi (hien) lodestone. At Hwangko Mt. 2 li W. of Hine- KWOH (chau), in vicinity of silver ores. Hwanecuau (Fu). At Mt. Kung 40 li W. of Macuine (hien). At Mt. Kung 15 1S. E. of Hwane- MEI (hien). PROVINCE OF SZ‘CHUEN. Cuinetu (Fu). In Tsinatstine (hien). Tsz‘ (chau). Hien not indicated. Mien (chau). Hien not indicated. NinGyuEN (Fu). In Hwuiut (chau), Miennine (hien), and YENYUEN (hien). Paunine (Fu). In KwancyveEn (hien). Suinexine (Fu). Hien not indicated. CHUNGKING (Fu). At Mt. Tie 801i S. H. of Yunatsane (hien). In Hon (chau). In Tuneuiane (hien). : Cuune (chau). In Funert (hien). KweEIcHau (Fu). In Wusuan (hien) and Yunyane (hien). Surrine (Fu). In Ku (hien) and in Tarsou (hien). Lunenean (Fu). Hien not given. TUNGCHUEN (Fu). In YEntING (hien) and SHinune (hien). Kratine (Fu). 401i N. of WetyueEN (hien). 100 li N. of Yune (hien). Kunecuau (Fu). At Kusung Mt. 101i S. of the city in vicinity of copper ore. PROVINCE OF KIANGSI. NANcHANG (Fu). In Funestn (hien) and TsinHIEN (hien). Kwanesin (Fu). In Youyane (hien), YUsHan (hien), Kweicut (hien), and SHanarsao (hien). Kancuau (Fu). At Tishan in Werrsane (hien). NaAnnGAn (Fu). In Tayu (hien). PROVINCE OF HUNAN. CHANGSHA (Fu). Hien not given. Suincwau (Fu). Hien not given. Hanecouau (Fu). Hien not given. YunecuAu (Fu). Hien not given. YUNGSHUN (Fu). Hien not given. Pauxine (Fu). Hien not given CHANGTEH (Fu). Hien not given. Cuin (chau). Hien not given. TsrnG (chau). Hien not given. Li (chau). Hien not given. KweriyAne (chau). Hien not given. Yocuau (Fu). Hien not given. PROVINCE OF KWEICHAU. Sz‘coau (Fu). At Mt. Lungtang E. of the city, in vicinity of lead ores. TuNn@JIN (Fu). 100 li W. on Sungchi river, in vicinity of gold washings. 140 li W. in the Tichi river. Lipinea (Fu). Hien not indicated. SHInTSIEN (Fu). Hien not indicated. Tartine (Fu). In Wetnine (chau). Sz‘nan (Fu). In Neanuwa (hien). 112 GEOLOGICAL RESEARCHES IN PROVINCE OF CHEHKIANG. Kranine (Fu). In Hatven (hien). TaIcHAv (Fu). At Lungsu Mt. in Ninewat (hien), in vicinity of copper ore. YeENcHAU (Fu). At Mt. Tie in Krenre (hien). Wancnau (Fu). In Pineyana (hien). In Tisune (hien). In Surnaan (hien). CuucHau (Fu). In S1enprne (hien). PROVINCE OF FUHKIEN. Funcuat (Fu). In the hien Funtstne and Mina. TsrENCHAU (Fu). In the hien TuNaNGAN and NGANCHI. Krenning (Fu). In the hien Krennaan, Tsunauo, Wunrna, and Sunecut. YeEnpPING (Fu). - In the hien Nanpine, Yun, and TstaAncLou. TinacHau (Fu). In the hien Hianauane, Nincuwa, and TsanGrine. CHANGCHAU (Fu). In Lunecut (hien). Funine (Fu). In Ninereu (hien). Yunecuun (chau). In Tenuwa (hien). PROVINCE OF KWANGTUNG. Lien (chau). In YANa@sHAN (hien). SHaucHau (Fu). In Uneyven (hien). SHAUKING (Fu). In hien Yanetsune, YANGKIANG, and SIuHING. Kiunecuau (Fu). Lodestone, locality not given. Lorine (chau). Excellent ore at Mt. Wutungtu in Tunenaan (hien). PROVINCE OF KWANGSI. Liucnau (Fu). In Yuna (hien). Pinetown (Fu). At Chingkang Mt. 12018. E. of Ho (bien). At Mt. Chaukang 45 li N. E. of Ho (hien). PROVINCE OF YUNNAN. Yunnan (Fu). In Kwunemine (hien) and YuNG@MEN (hien). Linean (Fu). In Sineo (hien) at Hungtonientsa, Sanhotsa, Liulungtsa, and Tsingtsa. In Sur- Pine (chan). : TsuniuNG (Fu). At Tsuyursune in TINGYUEN (hien). 501i W. of TsunaNAN (chau). CutnKiane (Fu). In Srvcurune (chau). — Kruursine (Fu). At Tseh Mt. in Srurnwet (chau) in vicinity of copper ore. In NANYING (hien), and in the chau Loniiana, CHENyIH, MALUNG, and NANyING. Wotine (chau). Iron ore and iron works at Tameti (tsang), Tsetse (tsang), Ineh (tsang), Loti (tsang), and Sanpu (tsang). Also in LUHKIUEN (hien) at Tsiehliu (tsang) and Tsutsu (tsang). Yunecuanea (Fu). Iron works at Aying. TUNGCHUEN (Fu). At Mokwei and Tashuitang. Moneuwa (ting) In the mountains west of the city. Yunepes (ting). Locality not indicated. CHINA, MONGOLIA, AND JAPAN 113 ORES OF COPPER, SILVER, LEAD, TIN, QUICKSILVER. PROVINCE OF CHIHLI. SHUNTIEN (Fu) or Pexine. Silver at Mt. Yinyen 15 li S. of Miyun (hien). Silver at Sz‘ling 100 li N. E. of Miyun (hien). Yunepine (Fu). Silver 130 li N. W. of TstenGaAn (hien). Silver at Mt. Tsu 15 li W. of Lutune (hien), in vicinity of gold and iron ores. Silver at Mt. Yiihwang 90 li N. E. of Funrna (bien). Tin in TsIENNGAN (hien). PautTine (Fu). Copper. SruEenHwa (Fu). Silver in Yu (chau). PROVINCE OF SHANSI. PiNGTING (chau). Copper in Yu (hien). Tal (chau). Blue and green carbonates of copper. - Pinayana@ (Fu). Copper at Mt. Kiang 20 li 8. W. of Kiuutu (hien). ~ Kratz (chau). Copper in twelve localities. Silver in Neanr (hien). In Prnauon (hien) silver in several localities, copper in forty-eight localities, and tin at Mt. Ki 60 li N. E. of the city. Krane (chau). In YuveEncuu (hien). Lead at Mt. Peh, and copper at Mt. Sanchuen 80 li N. of city. Copper in WuNeuI (hien), Lune@an (Fu). Copper in all the hien. Tsrn (chau). Tin in TsinyvEN (hien). TsEH (chau). Copper and tin in YANGcHING (hien). TatrunG (Fu). Copper. Malachite at Mt. Shilieu 5 li H. of the city. PROVINCE OF SHENSI. Sincan (Fu). Silver. Copper at Mt. Tsunanan 50 li South of city, in vicinity of jade and iron. SHANG (chau). Cinnabar. In Lounan (hien), malachite at Mt. Yih 60 li E. of city. Silver and tin at Mt. To 90 li S. W.; copper 90 li S. H., and at Sihungnien 50 li 8. E. of city. HaAncuune (Fu). Quicksilver and cinnabar at Mt. Sz'ni N. W..of Liayane (hien). HinenGan (Fu). Blue and green carbonates of copper at Mt. Curneureu 45 li H. of city. Cinna- bar and quicksilver at Mt. Shuiyin 140 li N. E. of Sinyang (hien). PROVINCE OF KANSUH. PINGLIANG (Fu). Silver and copper in PInuIANG (hien). Silver and copper in Hwartine (hien). KuNGcHANG (Fu). Silver and copper at Mt. Ningkwei 30 li S. of NrnayveEn (hien). Krar (chau). Quicksilver. Silver at Yinyu 73 li N. W. of Wan (hien). Tstn (chau). Silver at Mt. Tayang 50 li N. H. of Tstnanean (hien). Copper in Tstnanan (hien). Silver at Mt. Sungkia 90 li N. E. of Lianerane (hien). Silver in Tstnasuut (hien). In Hwut (hien) lead, and at Mt. Chichi, 8. of city, cinnabar. PROVINCE OF SHANTUNG. TAINGAN (Fu). Copper at Mt. Yingliang 30 li N. of Larwu (hien). YENCHAU (Fu). Tin in Yiu (hien). Copper at Mt. Koyeh 15 li 8S. HE. of Yiu (hien). IcHAu (Fu). Lead in Isnur(hien). Silver in vicinity of gold ores, at Mt. Pau 90 li S. W. of LANSHAN (hien). Silver, lead, copper, and tin, as well as gold and iron, at Mt. Chipau 100 li N. of Kii (chau). In Muneyine (hien), quicksilver at Mt. Hung 30 li N. of city; and silver at Mt. Leanghien 60 li N. W. of city. TstnacHau (Fu). Silver, lead, copper, tin, quicksilver, as well as iron, and gold-sand, at Mt. Sung 60 li S. W. of Linked (hien). 15 July, 1866. 114 eGEOLOGICAL RESEARCHES IN PROVINCE OF KIANGSUH. KiAnaninG (Fu). Copper at Lisuur (hien). Copper in vicinity of iron at Mt. Tsz in Kruyune (hien). Sucwau (Fu). Copper at Mt. Tung 80 li N. EH. of Tunasnan (hien). PROVINCE OF NGANHWUI. Neanxkine (Fu). Cinnabar in Tatnusz‘. Hwvicnau (Fu). Silver and lead. Ninckwou (Fu). Copper in all the hien. PROVINCE OF HONAN. Honan (Fu). Lead in Sune (hien), and tin at Mt. Lupan in the same hien. Nanyane (Fu). Copper at Mt. Chihli in Tstnepine (hien), Tin in Yu (chan). CHANGTEH (Fu). Native copper. Tin in WuNGAN (hien). Ju (chau). Tin, Swen (chau). ‘Tin in Lusur (hien) and in Lrnepav (hien). PROVINCE OF HUPEH. Wucuane (Fu). Silver at Mt. Hwanaxko 2 li W. of Hinaxwonu (chau) in vicinity of iron. Copper in Kianauta (hien). Copper in WucHane (hien). Copper at Mt. Peisuh 60 li N. of Tay& (hien). Tin at Mt. Sieh 5 li S. of Funarsune (hien). Ne@anton (Fu). Malachite in Trenmun (hien). YunyAne (Fu). Tin. PROVINCE OF SZ‘CHUEN. Curnetu (Fu). Copper in Kien (chau), and in Kinerane (hien). Mren (chau). Silver. Tin. NinGyvuen (Fu). Silver at Mt. Miloh 200 li E. of Hwurri (chau). In Hwurut (chau) copper at Fénshuiling 100 li N. of city, and “white copper” (Petung), probably a complex ore, at Mt. Haichi 120 li S. of city. In the same chau green and blue carbonates of copper. ‘‘ White copper in Mrennine (hien). Copper at Mt. Nan in SicHane (hien). Silver at Mt. Koh- sowa N. W. of YENYUEN (hien). CuuNnGKING (Fu). Copper. Cinnabar in KrK1anc (hien). Yuyane (chau). Quicksilver and Cinnabar in Panesuut (hien). Kweicuau (Fu). Tin. Lunenean (Fu). Tin and Quicksilver. TUNGCHUEN (Fu). Green and blue carbonates of copper. Copper at Mt. Komung 30 li N. W. CuunKIANG (hien), also 24 li W. at Mt. Laiyung S8., and at Mt. Tungkwei S. W. of the same hien. Kratine (Fu). Copper at Mt. Tung 12011 8. W. of Huneaya (hien). Kone (chau). Copper, in vicinity of iron, at Mt. Kusung 101i S. of city. Lu (chau). Blue and green carbonates of copper. Yacuau (Fu). Copper at Mt. Tung 30 li N. E. of Yunaxine (hien). Mav (chau). Cinnabar. PROVINCE OF KIANGSI. NANcHANG (Fu). Copper at Mt. Si. Jaucwau (Fu). In Féutne (hien), copper, and at Mt. Ying, silver. Kwanesin (Fu). Silver at Yoyane (hien) and YusHan (hien). Lead in TstensHAn (hien). KiencHANG (Fu). Silver in Nanrsune (hien). Fucwav (Fu). Copper in Lrersr (hien). In Kinxt (hien) silver, and 120 li E. at Mt. Tung copper. Linxrana (Fu). Silver in SanKkau (hien). Copper in Sinyt (hien) Kancuau (Fu). Copper in CHANGNIN (hien). NANNGAN (Fu). Lead and tin in Tsunent (hien). CHINA, MONGOLIA, AND JAPAN. 115 PROVINCE OF HUNAN. CuanasuA (Fu). Silver, copper, lead, tin, and quicksilver. SuincHau (Fu). Cinnabar. Quicksilver on Luki river. Hanecouau (Fu). Silver, tin, quicksilver. Younecuau (Fu). Silver, tin. YvENcHAU (Fu). Cinnabar and quicksilver in Tsz‘k1ane@ (hien), FUNGHWANG (ting), YUNGSUI (ting), and WuKANG (chau). \ PauKine (Fu). Silver. Cinnabar in WuKANG (hien). CuIN (chau). Copper, tin, lead, quicksilver, and cinnabar. KWweErvane (chau). Silver, copper, lead. Yoouau (Fu). Silver. PROVINCE OF KWEICHAU. Kwetyane (Fu). Cinnabar and quicksilver in Kart (chau). Sz‘cHau (Fu). Lead, in vicinity of iron, at Mt. Lungtang KE. of the city. Cinnabar and quick- silver at the Sz‘chi river. ‘Tunesin (Fu). Cinnabar and quicksilver at Mt. Tawan 3 li S. of city. SHiuTsien (Fu). Cinnabar and quicksilver. Tatine (Fu). Copper in WEINING (chau). Tsuni (Fu). Quicksilver and Cinnabar. Sz‘nan (Fu). Cinnabar at Mt. Nitan 5 li 8., at Mt. Ningtsing 30 li N. E., and 50 li N. E. of WucHuEN (hien). Quicksilver at Moyu, Pangtsang, and Nientau, in WucHUEN (hien). Hiner (Fu). Quicksilver in vicinity of realgar, at Mt. Peinien. Cinnabar at LAMoTSANG. Touyun (Fu). Lead at Mt. Hianglu in Cuineprne (hien). PROVINCE OF CHEHKIANG. Kranine (Fu). Copper at Mt. Tsang in Haryen (hien). Hocnav (Fu). Copper and tin in ANKI (hien). Copper in WuKANG (hien) and CHANGHING (hien). Ninepo (Fu). Tin, in vicinity of gold, on Mt. Kehyu. Copper in Funauwa (hien). SHavuHine (Fu). Copper at Soyachi. Tin at Mt. Tsoking. Quicksilver at Mt. Lungkien in Yuyau (hien). TartcHau (Fu). Silver and lead at Mt. Tientai and Mt. Tsz‘nien in TrenTal (hien). Copper, in vicinity of iron, at Mt. Lungsu in Nrnewat (hien). Kocnav (Fu). Silver ore, yielding $300 to the ton, at Mt. Yinkung in CHANGSHAN (hien). Cop- per at Mt. Tung in Srn@an (hien). Silver at Mt. Yinkung in Surnean (hien). YENCHAU (Fu). In KiENTE (hien) copper in Mt. Tungkwei; and silver in Mt. Yin. Wancuau (Fu). In Pineayane (hien) silver at Mt. Chauki, Mt. Tsz‘vz, and Tientsingyang. Silver on the Chauchi river in Tisune (hien). CuucHau (Fu). Copper at Mt. Tung in Lunersturn (hien). Tin and lead in Suneyane (hien). PROVINCE OF FUHKIEN. KIENNING (Fu). Silver in the hien, Krennaan, Krenyane, Pusune, and Tsuneo. Copper in KIENYANG (hien). YENPING (Fu). Copper in the hien, NAnpInG, SHA, and YUKI. YunecHun (chau). Lead in Tavtne (hien). LUNGNGAN (chau). Lead in Santsingming and Tsiweitsz‘kung. Tinacuau (Fu). Silver at Lungmuntsang in Nincuwa (hien). Silver at Wangpeitsang and Ngan- fungtsang in TSANG@TING (hien). Tin at Hiangpau Mt. in Tsanerrne (hien). PROVINCE OF KWANGTUNG. Kwanoecnau (Fu) or Canton. Silver at Tashuikung in Nanwar (hien) and at Peyinkung in SINHWUI (hien). Lrencnau (Fu). Silver. Tin at Sangpuhia and Singtanghia in YANG@sHAN (hien); in the same hien lead and cinnabar. 116 GEOLOGICAL RESEARCHES IN Hwurcwau (Fu). Tin of excellent quality in Hoven (hien) and YuNGNGAN (hien). Krayine (chau). Tin in Sanuo (hien) and Hinenine (hien). SmauKine (Fu). Silver at Yinkung in Kaumine (hien). Kiunecnau (Fu). Blue carbonate of copper. Silver at Litien in Yat (chau). PROVINCE OF KWANGSI. KwWEILIN (Fu). Silver and Cinnabar. Livcnau (Fu). Silver in Srane@ (chau). KincyvrEn (Fu).. Silver at Mt. Mongin 35 li N. W. of Hocut (chau). Tin at Kaufungkung 13 li W. and Singchaukung 21i W. of Hocur (chau). Cinnabar at Mt. Hi N. of Ishan (hien), and at Mt. Kusih in Sz‘nGan (hien). Sz‘n@an (Fu). Lead in SHaneuine (hien). PinGLou (Fu). Silver in Prnctog (hien). Silver and tin in FucHueEn (hien). Silver at Taiping- yintsang in Ho (hien). Copper at Mt. Kii 35 li N. E. of Ho (hien). Tin at Tungyuyen and at Lungtsungyen N. of Ho (hien). Yuuuin (chau). Cinnabar and quicksilver at Mt. Tungshi 15 li KH. of Puiu (hien). Sincuavu (Fu). Silver and lead in Kwet (hien). PROVINCE OF YUNNAN. Yunnan (Fu). Copper in Kwunemine (hien) and YUNGMEN (hien). Malachite in Lrursz‘ (hien), Wottne (hien), and Lurune (hien). Lin@an (Fu). Copper and Tin in Munersz‘ (hien). TsuHHIUNG (Fu). Silver in Kwanerune (hien), and at Soyangtsang and Malem etean etn in NGAN (chau), and with lead at Yuntsungtsang in TsunuiuNe (hien). CHINGKIANG (Fu). Copper in Lunan (chan). Kwanast (chau). Silver and lead at Mt. Peting. Copper at Mt. Chung. Tin at Mt. Shipau. Krunrsine (Fu). Silver and lead at Mt. Yang W. of S1urnwer (chau). Copper in Psat (hien). Wortne (chau). Silver in Sutsuweitsang. Copper at Pauhung and Olo. Lead at Mt. Kauyin. Pu’ra (Fu). Silver, lead, and copper at Pema, Kanku, and Mantau in Cram (ting). Copper of best quality at Tsilitutsz‘. Yunecuane (Fu). Silver at Mingkwang and Aying. Copper and tin at TANGYUEH (chau). TunGcHuEN (Fu). Silver in Wexrrsz‘ (hien). Mines of Petung (‘white copper’) at Tangtangtsang and Taliitsang. Cuautune (Fu). Silver at Lutientsang and Lomatsang, at Tungputsang in CurInutuNeG (chau), and at Kinshatsang in YUnsew (hien). Copper at Changfapu in Curnutune (chau), at Siaunienfang in YUnsEH (hien), and at Ninglau Mt. and Tsietsz‘tang in TAKWAN (ting). YUNGPEH (ting). Copper. KINGDOM OF COREA. Gold, silver, quicksilver, iron, coal, and sulphur. MISCELLANEOUS MINERALS. PROVINCE OF CHIHLI. TaminG (Fu). Nitre on the Siau Ho. Srurnuwa (Fu). Rock-crystal at Mt. Hwangtsie N. of city. Agates at Sz‘kiautungtsing. PROVINCE OF SHANSI. Tarune (Fu).- Agates, sulphate of iron. Kiana (chau). Sulphate of iron. Lunean (Fu). Amber. . Fancuau (Fu). Gypsum. Nitre. Rock-crystal in YuNanina (chau). TsrucHau (Fu). Rock-crystal, Realgar. CHINA, MONGOLIA, AND JAPAN. 117 — PROVINCE OF SHENSI. Sincan (Fu). Jade, in vicinity of copper and iron, at T'sungnan 50 li S. of city, at Mt. Lantien 30 li E. of LAnr1en (hien), and at Mt. Li, in vicinity of gold 2 li W. of Linetuna (hien). SHane (chau). Jade, in vicinity of gold, at Mt. Yanghwa N. EH. of Lounean (hien). Kia (chau). Agate in Fuxun (hien) and Sarnmud (hien). Hancuune (Fu). Amber in many localities. Feitsui (jadeite) in Lrayane (hien). Realgar at Mt. Futu 60 li 8, of Fune (hien). HinenGan (Fu). Jade at Yt. Ching 58 li W. of Suvyanea (hien), and at Kantientsuhtung 60 W. of PEnHo (hien). Fu (chau). Iron pyrites and sulphur. PROVINCE OF KANSUH. Kunacuane (Fu). Agates. Realgar at Mt. Leangkung 8. W. of Min (chau). Nitre in NinayvEN (bien), and Hwuvinrne (hien). Krai (chau). Realgar. Sulphate of iron. Kineyane (Fu). Nitre in every Hien. Inkstone slate in N1nG (chau). PROVINCE OF SHANTUNG. TAINGAN (Fu). Amethyst. YencHau (Fu). Amethyst. Icnau (Fu). Amethyst. TunecHau (Fu). Gypsum. - PROVINCE OF HONAN. Nitre in all parts of the province. PROVINCE OF HUPEH. IcHane (Fu). » 1.72 100.00 XV. Yinawo mine (Fangshan 8. W. of Peking). Soft crumbling anthracite. Yields considerable HO in a closed tube. Spee. grav. ? Carbon . 6 0 0 - : : 6 « 77.58 Volatile matter . . ° . 5 . 3.63 Water ¢ 6 : 6 . 0 6 0 ZbeKO) Ash . . ° . . . Ome . - 16.29 100.00 126 APPENDIX. APPENDIX No. 3. Letter from Mr. Arthur Mead Edwards on the Results of an Examination, under the Microscope, of some Japanese Infusorial Earths and other Deposits of China and Mongolia, New York, January 14, 1866. RAPHAEL PuUMPELLY, Esq. Dear Sir: I have, agreeably to your request, made a microscopical examination of the specimens of earths you submitted to me some time since, and have to report thereon as follows :— They were thirteen in number, and the results of examining each one separately and carefully is recorded below. With regard to the two specimens numbered 6 and 9, in which J have found the siliceous lorice of Diatomacez, I have to regret that the time at my disposal lately has been so short that I have been unable to identify the various species detected therein, much less have I been able to do as I would have wished, that is to say, transmit to you at this time a complete list with descrip- tions and figures of the supposed new forms. No. 1. “ Efflorescence from the plains of the Kirnoor, Mongolia.” This specimen contains some straight sponge spicule and broken crystalline particles of a deep olive-green color; otherwise it consists mostly of fine particles of sand. From the presence of the sponge-spicule I judge this deposit to be decidedly of aquatic origin and probably marine; although the form of the spicule, as well as I can tell from their generally broken condition, is such that they may have belonged to a fresh-water species of sponge. No. 2. “ Terrace deposit (loam of lower terrace) Té Hai, Mongolia.” Under the microscope this is very similar to the above, that is to say, it contains many of the green crystalline particles found in No. 1, but no sponge-spicule that I have been able to detect. No. 3. Efflorescence (with sand), from the flat at the Té Hat Mongolia.” This is also very like the first in appearance, in containing green crystals, but, like the second specimen it contains no sponge-spiculz, so that in neither of these two last numbers have I found any- thing that would assist in determining their origin. No. 4. “ Gobi limestone (steppe deposit in part), Nov. 28, 1864.” Consists almost entirely of fine white particles of calcareous matter, but shows nothing to indicate the circumstances or conditions under which it was deposited. This was to be expected as the micro- scope rarely reveals anything peculiar in limestones, their origin being best denoted by the character of the large fossils when these are present. No. 5. ‘Lake loam, Siwan, N. Chihli,” is mostly sand, and contains a few of the before men- tioned green crystals, but no traces of the remains of organized beings. No. 6. “Forming bluff near Nietanai, Yesso.” No. 9. “ From bluff near Nietanai, Yesso.” These both evidently belong to the same deposit, taken at different depths most likely, as is evident from the remains of organized forms which they contain. They are plainly from a marine tertiary stratum similar in character to that discovered by Prof. Rogers underlying the cities of Richmond and Petersburg in Virginia, and also like that found by Prof. W. P. Blake at Monterey in California. The last mentioned deposit I have at present under examination for the State survey of California, and it has been found by Prof. Whitney, and his coadjutors of the survey, at different points extending some hundreds of miles down the Pacifie coast, varying slightly in appearance, color, hardness, or the grouping of the forms contained in it, as it was collected at various localities, but plainly showing APPENDIX. 127 that there is one extended deposit covering a great extent of country. In fact the Japan specimens resemble those from California in a very marked degree, and much more so than the Virginian ones, containing almost identically the same species of Diatomacez that I have found therein. I am not, at present, prepared to give a list of those species, but the following genera have been identified, all of which, with the exception of the last, are exclusively marine, but the species of that last genus Cocco- nets, found in this deposit, are decidedly of marine origin also. Arachnoidiscus. Creswellia. Auliscus. Dictyocha. Asterolampra. Isthmia. Actinoptychus. Gephyria. Aulacodiscus. Grammatophora. Stictodiscus. Rhabdonema. Coscinodiscus. Biddulphia. Triceratium. Cocconeis. Doubtless species belonging to other genera will be detected hereafter, when I study these speci- mens more attentively, when it is my intention to make out a full list of the species I may find and publish it, with descriptions and figures of such as I consider new or undescribed, through the medium of some one of our scientific societies. Meantime I send you herewith a couple of slides of this material, mounted in such a manner that you can judge for yourself of its richness in microscopic forms and their beauty, and in many cases, identity with those found in the Californian stratum, a slide of which accompanies them. No. 7. “ Terrace deposit (loam) from the valley north of the mountains of Sinpaungan.” Contains little but sand with a very few of the green colored crystals above mentioned interspersed through it. No. 8. “ Terrace deposit (loam) from Siwan, N. Chihli, China.” This contains nothing of interest or by means of which its origin can be traced. No. 10. “ Gobi Sandstone, steppe deposit, Dec. 2, 1864.” Consists entirely of clean coarse sandy particles, semi-crystalline in character, and with, or in which the microscope reveals, no traces of organic remains, No. 11. “ From the beds of volcanic ashes at Isoya, west coast of Yesso, Japan.” This specimen was examined in a superficial manner at first, but, besides consisting for the most part of pinkish particles of minute size whose origin could hardly be guessed at, was deemed of very little interest. A closer and more thorough examination, however, with higher power glasses revealed decided traces of organic remains and those of an entirely unlooked for character, that is to say, there were found in it, although only in extremely small numbers, straight sponge spiculz as well as globular, so-called, “‘gemmules” from sponges, and at the same time dotted ducts from the woody portion of some exogenous plant. Besides these, strange to say, I found fragments of the siliceous epidermis of three or perhaps four species of Diatomacez, decidedly aquatic plants and, in this case, all marine in their habit. The genera represented in these very rare and minute fragments were Arachnoidiscus, Cyclotella, Isthmia, and probably Coscinodiscus. Besides these the green colored crystals mentioned above, as having been detected in several of the earths examined, were seen in this specimen showing that there exists some connection between these various specimens in their origin. No. 12. “ Alkaline sand from the shore of Lake Kirnoor, Mongolia.” No. 18. “Sand deposited in the valleys around Lake Bilikanoor, Gobi desert.” In neither of these specimens could I find the slightest traces of the remains of organized beings or anything else by means of which I could judge of their origin. Thus, although the results of my examination, conducted in the most careful manner, are in most cases but negative, yet, even there- fore they are of interest, and you will be better able to judge than I am of their value. The dis- 128 APPENDIX. covery of another marine stratum consisting of the siliceous epidermis of Diatomace in such an un- looked for locality, is of the greatest interest, and will, it is to be hoped, assist somewhat in deciding the true position of such commonly called ‘‘infusorial earths.” Its similarity to that found on the Pacific coast of North America, would seem to point to its identity in time with that widely extended stratum, and doubtless the results which we have a right to expect from the very complete survey of the State of California, now being carried on, will shed much light on this point. Prof. Toumey placed the stratum of Virginia much lower than had been done by Prof. Rogers, and the correctness or incorrectness of his views in this respect and as bearing on the Californian and Japan deposits, can only be demonstrated after a careful examination and comparison of the adjacent strata. It is desirable that the layer extending from Petersburg in Virginia almost to Baltimore in Maryland, should be examined by a competent observer, and its characters be carefully determined and noted so that they can be compared with those of the Pacific. I hope, ere long, to be able to contribute something towards that end, but extended suites of specimens will have to be collected before we can hope to arrive at any very definite results. Meantime the discovery of such a stratum in Japan will lead to searches for similar deposits in other parts of the world, and I trust and fully expect with success. Respectfully yours, ARTHUR MEAD EDWARDS. NSD Xt: F= fu, departmental city; C= Chau, sometimes departmental-, but generally district-city ; H= Hien, district town; T= Ting, and Ts = Tsang, smaller towns. Abel, Clarke, 51, 52, 65 on height of Lake : Lo, 48 Abura, tufa-sandstone at, 99 Achase, tufa-conglomerate near, 98 acicularis, 123 Actinoptychus, 127 Agates, 116, 117, 118 Agate pebbles on plains of Mongolia, 70 Ainos, settlement of, 90 Alacodiscus, 127 Alluvial watersheds, 28 deposits near Itu, 7 loam deposit near Bili- ka Noor, 71 Altai mountains, 67, 68 rocks of Eastern, 74 Altan Kingan mountains, 67 Alteration of rock by vol- canic gases, 96 Alum produced by altera- tion of felspar, 96 and sulphur on Esan, 86 in China, 56, 57, 58 Amaksa, limestone and sandstone on, 107 Amber, 116, 117, 118 Amethyst, 117, 118 Amherst’s embassy, ob- servations of Lord, 7 Ammonites from N. Yesso, 106 Amur river, 2, 67 recent terraces along, 108 Amyegdaloid, 22 in conglomerate of Odu- ta, 100, 104 of W. Yesso, age of, 101 of the Ousubetz creek, 101 in Kunnui gravel, 91 at Kunnui, 91 near Kunnui, 91 Analyses of Chinese and Japanese coals, 123 of Chinese coals: Futau (bitum.), 15, 123 Hsingshun (bitum.), 15 Tatsau (anthr.), 16, 123 17 Podocarpites, August, 1866. Analyses of Chingshui (bitum.), 17, 124 Tehyih, 19, 124 Yingwo, 19, 125 Tashhitang, 19, 124 Ancient lake area, present drainage of, 44 gold washings, remains of, at Kunnui, 93 method of gold wash- ing, 91 lake system of northern China, 40 lakes of northern China, islands in, 40 lake deposit independ- ent of present water- courses, 32 lake loam a river-silt, 42 lakes, extent of, 44 watch-towers near the Té Hai, 30 Angara river, tables along, 75, 76 Angouli Noor, 26 Anki (H.), 115 Anko, 58 anthracite at, 65 Anthracite, 11, 122 in China, 119 localities of, 56,57, 58 and coals, analyses of, 123, 124, 125 of Tatsau mine, 15, 123 assay, production, and cost of, 16, 123 of Kiming, 22 from Tashhitang mine, analyses of, 19, 124 of Yingwo mine, analy- ses of, 19, 125 of Kwei basin, 6, 124 Anticlinal axis of south- eastern peninsula of Yesso, 106 ridges, 44 central axis of China, 2, 63 Aphanite at Oduta, 100, 101 of western Yesso, rela- tive age of, 104 near Futoro, 100 Appalachians, 69 analogous to the Sini- ans, 62, 68 Appendix No. 1, 119 Appendix No. 2, 123 No. 3, 126 Arachnoidiscus, 127 Aralo-Caspian depression, 69, 77 Arch of marble at Kiyung- kwan, 12 Arctic Ocean, 74, 77 Arenaceous limestone of the steppe deposit, 71 Argillaceous and talco- argillaceous rocks near Nagasaki, 107 rock with fossil plants, on Kaiyanobetz, 97 schist in Kingan moun- tains, 68 Argillite with vermiform fossil, 102, 104, 105 at Kunnui, 91 at Isoya, 93 near Achase, 98 near Washinoki, 90 metamorphic, at Yu- rup, 102 Argillites of Ichinowatari, 80 Argun river, 68 Art based on the curious in nature in China and Japan, 62 Artificial deposit in a lime quarry, 12 Ascent to the plateau north of Kalgan, 25 Asterolampra, 127 Auliscus, 127 Aulopora tubeformis, 55 Auriferous gravel of Kun- nui, 91, 105, 106 Australian coal flora, 119 Ava, 66 Azial granite, 2 Axis, central anticlinal, of China, 2, 63 east of coast range, 65 coast, of elevation, 60 Aying, 112, 116 Bagley, Rev. P., 56, 57 Baikal, lake, 75 volcanic rocks of lake, 75 N.#., S. W. trend of, 1 Baltic, 69 Baltimore, 122, 128 Bamboo, species of, on Yesso, 79 Barabinski steppe, 69, 77 Barkoul, 60 Barrier range, 23, 31, 32, 63 gorge traversing, 32 metamorphic schists of, 32 hornblendic rocks of, 35, 36 Barrow’s estimate of silt discharged by Yeilow river, 49 Bars isolating lakes, 41 Barytes in Yurup veins, 102 Basalt hills, 74 Basaltic lavas of the pla- teau, 38 cones on desert, 73 Bay of Odaszu, 106 of Yeddo, 107 Beds of chert in limestone, 12 Beech trees on Yesso, 93 Belgium, 54 Betz (creek), 90 Biddulphia, 127 Bilika Noor, beds of lime- stone, gypsum, etc., near, 71 erosion near, 77 earth from, under mi- croscope, 127 Biot, E., 48, 56, 57 memoir of, on the Yellow river, 47 on the Yukung, 47 Birch trees on Yesso, 93 Bituminous coal at Ching- shui, 17, 124 Bee Capt., 5, 6, 8, 6 the Gobi observations of, in Sz‘- chuen, 62 Black slate near Kanchau, 52 Black sea, 77 Blake, Prof. W. P., 80, 126 Blast, first, made in Japan, 89 furnaces on European model smelting iron ore in Nam- bu, 88 European, at Kobi, 88 ( 129 5 - 150 Board of Foreign Affairs at Peking, 49 Bogdo oola, Mt., 74 Bohea mountains, 52 Bombs, lava, on Komanga- daki, 83 Bonny, Rev. Mr., 52 Boroseiji, lama-ionastery of, 26 Bos urus, 77 Bouran (snow-storm), 73 Brachiopods, fossil, 56, 57, 58, 62, 65 from Eastern Tibet, 55 probably from lime- stone, 6 Breccias, volcanic, of Yes- so, 105 British America, 69 Brongniart, 123 < Brown-coal basin near Kalgan, 25 tertiary, 62 Bryozoa in terrace-clay of Kunnui, 91 Buddha, figure of, sculp- tured in a cavern, 13 the living, of Urga, 75 v. Bunge, 70 Bureja mountains, 65 Byrranga mountains, N.E., S.-W. trend of, 1 Calamite, a, from Ichino- watari, 80 Calcareous deposit of former springs, 28 loam of ancient lake (terrace) deposit, 40 sandstone of the steppe deposit, 71 tufa at Tsingtan on Yangtse, 8 Calcsinter deposit, 101 Calcite in Yurup veins, 102 California, infusorial earth of, 88, 126, 127, 128 Camels used to transport coal, 20 Canton, 2, 115 graywacke and red sandstone near, 53 granite near, 53 to the sea, 53 to Hankau, 52 Cane undergrowth on Yes- so, 93 Cape Blunt (Shiwokubi), 89 Carboniferous plants in China, absence of, 119 Caspian, 76, 77 Caverns in China, 56, 57, 58, 62, 65 in Shihtsien (F) and Chinguen (F), 63 in limestone, 12 of Fangshan, 12 of Kwangyin, 52 ossiferous, 13 sacred to Buddha, 13 “Cave of the Winds,” 56 Cellular granite in Nankau pass, 21, 34 Central Asia, importance of studying its past and present physical geography, 77 INDEX. Central China, peaks in, 66 anticlinal axis of China, 9 snowy Chaganoussu, undrained lake of, 28 Chaitang, 56, 109, 122, 123 coal at, 11 description of coal dis- trict of, 14 former lake at, 14 Chalcedony, 74, 93 pebbles on plains of Mongolia, 70 on the Gobi desert, 73 in amygdaloid at Shi- rarika, 90 in Kunnui gravel, 91 amygdules at Oduta, 100 Chalybeate spring, deposit of iron-oxide from, 96 Chang mountain, 110 Chenechan (F), 58, 112, 8 Changfapu, 116 Changhing (H), 115 Changhwa (H), 57, 118 Changkiakau, 23 Changkauyu, anthracite mines at, 19 Changnin (H), 114 Changpang shan, 61 Changpeh shan, 64 Changping (C), 46 Changpu (4H), 118 Changsha (F), 52, 58, 61, 111, 115 Changshan (H), 58, 115, 117 Changteh (F), 58, 61, 110, 111, 114 Changtsing (H), 46 Changwu, 48 mouth of Yellow river at, under Han dyn, 50 Changyang (H), 57 Charcoal furnaces at Yu- rup, 103 Chatau, granite at, 22 and Kiming, recent lake between, 45 Chauchi river, 115 \ Chauchuen, metamorphic schists, limestone, porphyry-breccia, and eurite near, 34 terrace deposit in valley of, 34 Chaukang mountain, 112 Chauki mountain, 115 Chautung (F), 116 Chauyang (H), 56, 57 chechiel, Spirifer, 55 Chehkiang, province of, 57, 58, 60, 112, 115, 117 and Fuhkien, 52 river, 52 Chenyih (C), 112 Chert in lower limestone, 6, 12 Chichi mountain, 113 Chichuen (4H), 110 Chifu, metamorphic rocks at, 63 Chihli province, 5, 56, 60, 63, 109, 113, 116 Chihli, earthquakes in the province of, 76 granite and metamor- phie schists in, 10 height of granite mass in, 10 limestone in, 10 observations in, 10 volcanic rocks in, 10 mountain, 114 Chin (C), 61, 111, 115 China, fossils from, 54, 56, 57, 58 fossil plants from, 119 Chinese Coal measures, 4, histories of the Yellow river, 47 li, 50 mining, defective, 15 records of volcanic ac- tion in the Tienshan, 76 Repository, 53, 65 traditions of deluges, 144 Ching mountain, 117 Chingching (H), 56 Chingkang mountain, 112 Chingshui, 56, 109 porphyries at, 17 analysis of coal from, 124 coal mines, 17 Chinglieu mountain, 113 Chingping (H), 115 Chingteh (F), 57 Chingting (F), 46, 56 vainete (F), 59, 60, 111, 14 Chinhiung (C), 116 Chin Hu Wei, comment- ary of, on the Yukung, 47, 48 Chinkiang (F), 7, 57, 110, 112, TUG GS Chinsi, 60 Chinyuen (F), 58 marble and caverns in, 63 Chipaushan, 60, 110, 113 Chlorite in the Kakumi porphyry, 84 Chloritic and micaceous schists in Kunnui gravel, 91, 105 gneiss, 35 and chloritic schist near Siwan, 34 on the plateau, 26 granite, 27, 75 on the Ousubetz creek, 101 rocks near Shachung, 35 series of metamorphic rocks, 41 schist on the Yangtse, 4 Chuchau (F), 58, 60, 112, 115 coal field of, 65 Chung (C), 57, 59, 60, 111, 117 Chung mountain, 116 Chungking (1), 57, 59, 60, 111, 114 Chungpu (H), 110 Chunhwachen, 57 Chunkiang (H), 114 Churin chelu, Lamasery of, 74 Chusan archipelago, 2 islands, granite on, 65 Chwanchio and Kingkung, battle between, 44 Cinnabar, 110, 113, 114, 115, 116, 117 \ Clarke, Abel, 48, 51 Clay schist, 72, 75 in hills of Senji, 72 in Tomari gravel, 99 shale with Equisetacez, on Kaiyanobetz creek, 97 - slates, 74 of Yesso, 104 under basalt, 73 and quartz-schist at Kudo, 101 warm spring in, at Yunogawa, 89 near Shiwokubi, 89 Claystone porphyry on Ousubetz creek, 101 Cleavage, rectangular, in loam of terrace deposit, 40 Climate of Mongolia in winter, 70 of Yunnan, 66 Coal, table of all known localities in China, 56, 57, 58 near Kwei, 7 near Nagasaki, 107 near Pangkwang, 52 near the “ Palisade,” 64 of Chingshui mines, analyses of, 17, 124 of Fushun mine, 15 of the Futau mine, analyses of, 15, 123 of Hsingshun mine, de- scription and assay of, 15 of Tehyih mine, analy- ses of, 19, 124 on Kaiyanobetz creek, 97 price of, at the Tashhi- tang mine, 20, 124 production of, in a mine at Chingshui, 17 and anthracites, analy- ses of, 15, 16, 17, 19, 123, 124, 125 at Chaitang, 11-16, 56 at Fuhutang, 52 at Lingchi, 11 at Maiinshan, 11 at Muntakan, 11, 18 at Piytinsz,11 . at various points on Yesso, 106 basins of Pingyang (F), 64 of Tsechau (F), 64 of Kiang (C), 64 of Honan (F), 64 of Ju (C), 64 of Yihte (H), 64 of Liautung, 64 of Yungping (F), 64 of Peking, 64 of Kwangping (F), 64 Coal basins of Pingting “ (C), 64 of Taiyuen (F), 64 of Fanchau (F), 64 of Hoh (C), 64 of Ninghia (F') and Lanchau (F), 63 porphyry at Chingshui, 14 of Wangping, Fang- shan, Pingting,10 in folds of lime- stone, 10 Coal-bearing rocks, fold- ing of, 42 of China assumed to be everywhere of the same age, 62 Coal, bituminous, in China, in at Chaitang, 56 at Chingshui, 17, 56 brown, near Kalgan, 25 cost of, at Futau mine, 15 Coal district of Muntakau, of Chaitang, de- scription of, 14 of Fangshan, 19 field of Kwei, 6 floras of Australia and India, 119 in China, localities of, 56, 57, 58 in Kiangsi, Chehkiang, Nganhwui, 65 in the Kingan moun- tains, 68 Mesozoic, in China, 119 Coal-measures, 63, 68 indicatiors of, along the coast, 65 of Kiangsi, 65 in Kiangsi, Hunan, etce., 65 most important fold of the, 64 Chinese, 4, 5, 62 resting on limestone, 22 limestone floor of, in Chihli, 10 Coal mines near Nanking, 8 of Chaitang, 14 of Chingshui, 17 Coal-rocks of Sz‘chuen, 6 with Equiseta near Iwa- nai, 105 Coals, tertiary brown, 62 said to exist near Esan, 89 seams of Eastern Yesso, acne of Kaiyanobetz, 9 table of, near Pe- king, 11 strata of China, age of, 120 Triassic, Cretaceous, and Tertiary, of Ame- rica, 119 Coast axis of elevation, 65 Cocconeis, 127 Coke made at the Hsing- shun mine, 15 INDEX. Columnar lava bed near Setanai, 99 lava on mount Raiden, 98 porphyry, 84 structure in mud- stream produced by sulphur crystals, 87 structure of Kakumi porphyry, 85 Communication between the upper waters of the Han river and Kialing river, 3, 66 Comangadake, subaérial deposits around, 106 Confucius records a de- luge, 44 Conglomerate-breccia at Oduta, 100, 104 Conglomerate at Oyasu, 89 at Sankiangkau, 7 green quartzose, 12 greenstone - porphyry, 36 near Kiming, 34 of Ichang, 7 of southern Yesso, 104 of the steppe deposit, 73 porphyry, 11 quartzose, 11 sandstone, in Wuishan, 52 tufa-, near Sutzu, 98 volcanic, of Yesso, 105 volcanic tufa-, 105 Conifers, fossil, from New Mexico, 120 Coniopteris 123 Contact phenomena be- tween lava and tufa-con- glomerate, 100 Copper, 110, 111, 112, 113, 114, 115, 116, 117 Copper pyrites in lead veins, 80 in veins east of Hakodade, 89 in Yurup veins, 102 vein at Saidoma, 89 vein at Kakumi, 85 Corals in terrace-clay of Kunnui, 91 Corea, 2, 65, 116 Cornulites epithonia, 54 Coscinodiscus, 127 Cost of coal at Futau mine, 15 Crania obsoleta, 54 Crater of Komangadake, 82, 83 Crateriform hill in valley of Sitto, 27 Crater? near Hiratanai, 102 Creswellia, 127 Cretaceous coal, 119 strata, apparent ab- sence of, in China, 62 Crystalline metamorphic rocks northwest of Peking, 35 schists near Chau- chuen, 34 cuboides, Terebratula, 55 Murrayana, Cyclotella, 127 Cyrtia Murchisoniana, 54 Dana, Prof. J. D., 69 Davidson, T., on fossils from China, 54 Decrease in yolume of | lakes, 41 Deep gorges of the Upper Yangtse, 4 Deguignes, 44 Delessite in at Oduta, 100 Delta-deposit in Chihli, 10 Delta, facilities for calcu- lating the rate of growth of, 49 Delta-plain, 8, 10, 63 N. E., 5. W. trend of, 1 extent of, 46 generally below level of Hwang Ho, 46 rapid increase of, 49 rate of growth of, at Putai, 49 at Hienshuikau, 50 yearly growth of, at Shukwang, 50 Deluges, Chinese tradi- tions of, 44 dentata, Pecopteris, 122 denticulata, Pecopteris, 122 Sphenopteris, 122 Deposit, terrace, descrip- tion of, 39 ; Depression between Bar- rier range and pla- teau, 25 in surface of the desert, amygdaloid Devonian fossils from China, 54 ~ limestone, 62 elevated by the Barrier range, 63 on the Yangtse, 4 upper, fossils from Sz‘- chuen, 55 Diatomacee, 88, 125, 126, 127, 128 dichotoma, Sphenopteris, 25 Dictyocha, 127 Diorite in southern Mon- golia, 70 in Tomari gravel, 99 near Yokohama, 107 of western Yesso, 104 on the Yangtse, 4 disjunctus, Productus, 54 Dislocation along south- ern edge of plateau, 39, 42 great, cause of differ- ence in level of higher and lower plateau, 31 Distribution of lake ter- race deposit in northern China, 39 Disturbances previous to Devonian limestone, 41 Dolomitic limestone in the Wuishan, 53 Douy, analysis of coal from 125 131 “Dragon's teeth,” “dra- gon’s scales,” ‘“ dragon’s bones,” 62 Drainage of Chinese mines, 17 Du Halde, 43 Dwellings excayated in terrace deposit, 40 in the terrace de- posit at Siwan, 33 in the terrace loam in land of the Ortous, 43 Dykes of the Yellow river, 47 in walls of Komanga- dake crater, 83 of trachytic porphyry, 38 of syenitic granite near Siwan, 33 in tufa- conglomerate near Odaszu, 93 in tufa - conglomerate on Iwanai bay, 97 of columnar lava on the Raiden mountain, 98 of porphyritic rock in quartz schist at Kudo, 101 Harthquake and destruc- tion of cone of Komanga- dake, 82 Earthquakes in Siberia and northern China, 76 Hastern America, outline of, determined by Appalachian revolu- tion, 68 Asia, great geoclinal trough traceable through, 64 main line of eleva- tion in, 2 N.E.,5. W. system of mountains in, 67 prevalence of N. E. 5S. W. direction in, 62 Echinoderm, spines of fos- sil, in tufa-conglomerate, 90, 106 Edkins, Rev. Mr., 49, 56, 57 Edomo, Cape, 93 Edwards, Mr. A. M., 88, 93 examination of infuso- rial earths by A. M., 126 BHifel, the, 54 Blevation, main line of, in Eastern Asia, 2 Ellis, Mr., 52 Emerald-green mineral} on Iwaounobori, 96 Emmons, Prof., 119, 121 Emmonsii, Podozamites, 120, 121 Enosima, sandstone of, 108 epithonia, Cornulites, 54 Equisetites, 120 Equisetacee, fossil, 97 Erosion of the plateau, 42 in the steppe deposit, 77 Erosion of terrace deposit, | 40 Eruptive rock in Nankau pass, 21 rocks of Yesso, 104 Esan, coal near, 89 crater, 106 sulphur works on, 87 volcano, 86, 94, 96, 105 wall rocks of crater of, 86 Burite near Chauchuen, 34 3. W. range of mountains | between Yellow river and Yangtse river, 3 range of mountains along northern boun- dary of Sz‘chuen, 3 system of trends, 3 mountain system in southern China, 66 Excursion to west coast of Yesso, 90 Extent of ancient lakes, 44 falcatus, Pecopteris, 120, Fan river, 56, 57 lime works on, 63 Fanchang (H), 57, 110 Fanchau (F), 56, 109, 116 Fang (H), 57 Fang mountain, 57 Fangshan (H), 56 cave of, 12 coal district, 19 analyses of anthracites from, 124, 125 Fangytcchiyau, 49, 50 Fani (H), 58 Fanshui (H), 58 Fan ventilators in coal mine, 19 Fault, great, line, at edge} of plateau, 31,59 near Hiangshui (pu), 22 Fehing (H), 114 Fehshan (H), 56 FPeitsui, 117, 118 Felspar of the Kakumi porphyry, 84 of syenitic granite at) Nichinbe, 100 erystals in pumice of Komangadake, 83 in trachytic rock of | Hakodade, 79 Felsitic porphyry, 18 trachytic rock re- sembling, 100 Fenshuiling, 114 Ferques, 54 Fihkiashui river, 60 Finland, lakes of, 69 Fire wells of Sz‘chuen, 54 First excursion on Yesso, 80 Fissures of dislocation, 76 Flies in the forests of Yesso, | 93 Flint, 118 Forest trees of Yesso, 93, 94 Formations about the Té Hai, 30 Formation of sulphur veins on Iwaouno- bori, 96 INDEX. Formation of iron ore from sea-washed magnetic sand, 88 of sulphur and alum in the debris of Esan, 86 Former sea of northern Asia, 77 Formosa, Japan, and Ku- riles, N. E., 8S. W. trend of line connecting, 1 Forms of trach. hills, 24 Fortune, Robert, 52, 65 Fossil brachiopods, 62 remains in terrace de- posit, 34 plants from China, 119 on Kaiyanobetz creek, 97 from New Mexico, 120 from Virginia, 120 from Sonora, 120 Fossils, poverty of lime- stone in, 6 used as medicines in China, 13, 62 from China, 54 in China, 56, 57, 58 France, 54 Fresh-water shells in ter- race deposit near the Té Hai, 30 Fu (C), 110, 117 Fuchau (F), 60, 112, 114 Fuchuen (H), 116 Fuh (°), 60 Fuhkien province, 58, 60, 112, 115, 118 and Chehkiang, 52 mountain, axis in, 65 Fuhtsing (H), 112 Fukuh (4), 117 Fung (H), 117 Fungching, swampy plain OL near the great fault, 42 Funghwa (H), 115 Funghwang (T), 115 Fungpeh (1), crevasse of Yellow river at, 49 Fungshan (H), 60 Fungsiang gorge, 5 Fungsin (H), 58, 60, 111 Fungtsi (H), 59 Fungtsiang (IF), 56, 110 caverns, 63 Fungtsung (H), 114 Fungtu (H), 111 Fungyang (F), 57 Funing (F), 58, 112 (H), 56, 113 Fushun (H), 59 coal mine, 15 Fuss and vy. Bunge, baro- porph. metrical measurements of, 70, 75 Futau mine, 14, 123 analysis of coal from, 123 | Futoro, rocks near, 100 relation between lavas and tufa-conglomer- ate at, 100 volcanic rocks on gran- ite near, 100 Futu mountain, 117 Fuziyama volcano, 96 Gabbro near Yokohama, 107 Galena in Yurup veins, 102 in copper vein at Sai- doma, 89 in lead veins, 80 Gan river, 68 Garnetic gneiss and granu- lite near ‘I'é Hai, 30, 35 Garnets in granulite, 36 in gneiss, 36 Gashun, 72 loam deposit at, 77 Gases of the Solfatara, ac- tion of, on rock, 96 Gaultheria on Iwaouno- bori, 96 General geology of China, 51 outlines of eastern Asia, 1 Geoclinal valley of west- ern Asia and eastern Europe, 68 valleys of northern hemisphere, 68 of Europe and the Atlantic, 69 valley, the skeleton of great plateau, 75 Geographical works, na- tive Chinese, 109 Geological observations in the basin of the Yangtse, 4 itineraries in Yesso, 79 Geology, general, of China, 51 of Yesso, résumé of, 104 of route from the Great Wall to Siberia, 70 Gephyria, 127 Gerbillon, 43 germinans, Laccopteris, 121 Glaciers in Nanling moun- tains, 66 Glassy felspar in lava at Futoro, 100 Glossopteris, 119 Gneiss, 72 garnetic, 36 and granite near Kir Noor, 29 with garnets near Té Hai, 30 near Maiinmiau, 31 and hornblende schist near Hwaingan, 33 in the Kingan moun- tains, 68 chloritic, 35 and chloritic schist near Siwan, 34 in Barrier range, 32 at Yingmachuen, 36 and granulite series of metamorphie rocks, and granulite near Té Hai, 35 under limestone near Hwaingan, 35 Gobi, former sea of, 76 depression, submerg- ence of, 76 geoclinal valieyof the,68 limestone under micro- scope, 126 sandstone under microscope, 127 , desert, 44, 72, 74 deposits in, 108 Gold, 109, 110, 111, 117 table of, localities in China, 60, 61 in Shantung, 63 in central China, 66 deposits of Kunnui re worked in form times, 91 probable existence of, on the Tomar- creek, 99 Gold washings in Kwei- chau, 63 indicative of neighi borhood of meta- morphic rocks,62 of Kunnui, 91 method of, at Kun- nui, 92 Gorge, Ichang, 5 the Lucan, 6 Fungsiang, 5 of Lungmun on the Hwang Ho, 63 in trachytic porphyry, 33 Gobi, of the Hwang Ho in Barrier range, 63 in limestone, 22 traversing the Barrier range, 32 connecting the Té Hai and Sankang valleys, 31 connecting the Kir Noor valley and the Yellow river valley, 29 Gorges of Yellow river through limestone mountains, 44 forming transversal reaches of the Yangtse valley, 3 of the Yangtse, great depth of water in the, 5 of the Yangtse, differ- ence between high and low water-mark in, 5 of Lungmun, Hukau, and Sanmun, 45 Gouchouc, fossil brachio- pods from, 55 Grammatophora, 127 Granite, 63 axis, 2 red and white, 72 in Nankau pass, 34 of coast range, 53 in Kunnui gravel, 91 on the Gobi, 73 in the LiusHan, 52 in mountains west of Yurup mines, 102 in southern Mongolia, 70 under the plateau, 2' near Futoro, 100 on the Yangtsi, 4 at the head of the Min river, and ow Chusan islands, 65 Granite, near Canton, 53 of Kingteh, 65 in Great Kingan moun- tains, 68 and mica-schist, 74 and gneiss near Kir Noor, 29 and clayslate Wuishan, 52 and limestone in the Coast range, 65 at the Meiling pass, in the 65 detritus of the Kir Noor 28 green, near Yenchau (F) 52 cellular, in Nankau pass, 21 intrusive, in the coal measures, 21 axial, in Nankau pass, 21 blocks of, near Kunnui, 91 peaks of Fuhkien, 53 pavements in Cheh- kiang, 52 mass, height of, Chihli, 10 syenitic, near Siwan, 33 chloritie, 27, 75 on the Ousubetz in creek, 101 Granitic ridges in Mon- golia, 70 and schistoid rocks under plateau, 27 Granitite in Nankau pass, 34 in bed of Yang Ho, 35 Granito - metamorphic formations, 62 Granulite of Oduta, 100 age of, 101 of Yesso, relative age of, 104 and gneiss near Té Hai, 35 garnetic, near the Té Hai, 30 Graphite in limestone on the Gobi, 74 Gravel of quartziferous porphyry, 25 similar to the Kunnui deposit, 98 Graywacke near Canton, 53 Great Kingan mountains, 67 Wall of China, 23, 32, 43, 46, 67, 75, 77 view from, at Ha- noor, 25 Green quartzose conglom- erate, 12 Grcenstone of Yesso, 89 of Ichinowatari, 105 at Kakumi, 85 metamorphic, 75 of western Yesso, rela- tive age of, 104 veins in, at Yurup, 103 of Nichinbe, age of, 101 at Yurup, veins in, 102 southern | INDEX. Greenstone of Ichinowa- tari, lead veins in, 80 dykes in Nankau pass, 21 in Kakumi_ por- phyry near Oya- su, 89 in clay-slates at Oyasu, 89 in hills of Senji, 72 in limestone, 71 Greenstone - porphyry conglomerate, 36 near Kiming, 34, 36 tufa of, 22 in southern Mongolia, 70 Gullies in terrace deposit, 40 Gulf of Pechele, 49 limestone islands at mouth of, 63 growth of delta on southern shore of, 50 of Tonquin, 66 Gunpowder, introduction of, into Japanese mining, 103 Gurban. Noor, undrained lakes and marshes of, 27 Gutbiera, 120 Guyerdet, M., on fossils from Gouchoue, 55 Guyot, Prof. A., 69 Gypsum, 116, 117 beds near lake Bilika- Noor, 71 Hai mountain, 109 Haichi mountain, 114 Haidingera, 120 Hainan island, 2, 53, 65 Haishui, 43 Haiyen (H), 112, 115 Hakodade, bay of, 89 mesa between, and Shi- wokubi, 89 neck of, 80 peak, rock of, 106 return to, 89 topography of, 79 Hamajime, tufa-conglome- rate near, 98 Hanchung (F), 57, 60, 110, 113, 117 Han dynasty, mouth of Yel- low river, at Changwu under, 50 Han river, 60, 63, 66 Hanburii, Rbhynchonella, 54 Hangchau (F), 57, 58, 61, 111, 115, 117 (Hunan), analysis of coal from, 125 bay, 46 Hangshan (H), 58 Hanhaishi, 72 Hankau, 7, 65 hills of, 7 Canton to, 52 Hanoortai, Mongol village of, 25, 26 Ha Noor on line of the Great fault, 42 thickness of volcanic formation near, 38 Hanying (T), 60 Heishan (H), 57 Height of granite mass in Chihli, 10 of Barrier range, 32 Hi mountain, 116 Hiamaling porphyries, 41 Hianghang (I), 112 Hianglu mountain, 115 Hiangning (H), 109 Hiangpau mountain, 115 Hiauni (H), 109 Hingi (F), 115, 117 Hiangshui (pu), 22 Hienshuikau, rate of growth of delta at, 50 Higher plateau, southern limit of, 31 Hills of quartzif. porphyry gravel near Tutinza, 25 Himalaya, 66 Hin (C), 56, 59 Hinghwa (F), 58 coal field of, 65 Hingkwoh (C), 111, 114 Hingnan (F), 117 Hingngan (F), 113 Hingning (H), 116 Hinngan (I), 60 Hingyuen (H), 52 Hiratanai, lava flow over tufa-conglomerate, 102 Ho (C), 57, 112, 116 Hochi (C), 116 Hoh (C), 56, 59, 60, 111 Hokau, 52 Hokinhoshan, 60 Honan (F), 57, 110, 114 Honan, Prov., 57, 66, 110, 114, 117 Hongkong, 65 Horns of deer in terrace deposit at Siwan, 34 Hornblende, basaltic, 38 of syenitic granite at Nichinbe, 100 in lava of Futoro, 100 in trachytie rocks of Totohoke, 86 in trachytic rocks of Hakodade, 79 felspar rock, 105 Hornblendic and chloritic rocks east of Kalgan, 36 porphyry, 18 schist on the Yangtse, 4 series, rocks of, in the Barrier range, 32, 35, 36 series of metamorphic rocks, 41 Hornstone beds at Wo- satzube, 85 at Kudo, 101 near coal seams of East- ern Yesso, 85 Horteryndaban, 74 Hoshan (fire mountains), 55 Hoyau near Tatung (F), 55 Hoyuen (H), 61, 116 Hoyurbaishin, village of, 28 to the Té Hai, 29 Hoyur Noor, dry bed of lake of, 28 133 Hoyurtoloho Gol, valley of, 27 Msingshun coal mine, 15 Huc, Abbe, 57 description of deserts of the Ortous, 43 Huchau (Ff), 57, 115 coal field of, 65 Hukau, gorge of, 45 aaa Baron, 54, 66, 6 Hunan province, 52,58, 61, 63, 111, 115, 117 analyses of anthracites from, 124, 125 coal basins of, 64 synclinal axis in, 65 Hung mountain, 113 Hungary, trachytic rocks of, 86 Hungling mountain, 110 Hunglung, 48 Hungtonientsa, 112 Hungtung (H), 56 Hungya (4), 114 Hupeh province, 57, 60, 66, 111, 114, 117, 121 analysis of coal from, 124 Hwai river, 46, 63, 65 Hwaiking (I), 46, 48 Hwaingan (F) 110 Hwaingan (H), 32 valley of, 33 beds, 33, 36 beds deposited near the shore, 41 Hwaitsih (H), 58, 61 Hwaitsung (H), 110 Hwang (C), 61 Hwangan (H), 60 Hwangchau (F), 60, 111 built on ferruginous sandstone, 7 Hwang Hai (or Yellow Sea), 49 Hwang Ho, 57, 63 control of a constant source of care, 49 political importance of, 49 present course of, 49 recent change in the lower course of, 49 the source of ancient lake deposit, 43 Hwangkang (H), 60 Hwangkingtseh, 60 Hwangko mountain, 111, 114 Hwanglung (C), 56, 60 Hwangmei (H), 111 Hwangtsie mountain, 116 Hwanyuen (C), 59 Hwating (H), 110, 113 Hweilai (H), 22 Hwui (H), 110, 113 Hwuichau (Ff), 61, 114, 116 sandstone and near, 52 Hwuili (C), 59, 111, 114 Hwiuilu mountain, 111 Hwuining (H). 117 Hydrography of Yunnan, 66 slate Hymenophyllites, 120 tenellus, 122 134 hymenophylloides, Sphenopteris, 122 Hypersthenite in the Bar- rier range, 32. Ichau (F), 57, 60, 110, 113, 117 Ichang (F), 57, 117 gorge, 5 rocks near city of, 7 Ichibu, value of, 81 Ichinowatari, lead mines of, 80, 103 series of rocks, 105 argillites at, 80 greenstone of, 80 Calamite at, 80 Ikiun (fH), 110 Imbert, 57, 64 on the salt wells Sz‘chuen, 53 Imperial canal, 46 summit level of, 48 Indian coal-flora, 119 Ineh (Ts), 112 Infusorial earths, 126 beds of Japan, Vir- ginia and California, resemblance of, 88 earth, raised bed of near Nitanai, 88 Inkstone, 117 Irawaddi river, 66 Irkutsk, 75 Iro Gol river, 75 Tron, localities of in Chihli, 109 in Shansi, 109 in Shensi, 110 in Kansuh, 110 in Shantung, 110 in Kiangsuh, 110 in Nganhwui, 110 in Honan, 110 in Hupeh, 111 in Sz‘chuen, 111 in Kiangsi, 111 in Hunan, 111 in Kweichau, 111 of in Chehkiang, 112 | in Fuhkien, 112 in Kwangtung, 112 in Yunnan, 112 ore with coal and lime- stone in Sz‘chuen, 6 sulphate of, 116, 117, 118 works, 112 oxide deposited from springs in Iwaoun- bori, 96 pyrites in the Kakumi porphyry, 84 pyrites, 117 vein near Saidoma, 89 in Yurup vein, 102 in lead veins, 80 Ishan (H), 116 Ishui (H), 113 Islands, hills near Yedo recently, 18 ancient lakes North China, 40 Isolated lakes of Southern Mongolia, 26 Isolation of lakes, cause of in Mongolia, 41 in of INDEX. Isoya, beds of sandstone and volcanic ashes near, 93 to Sutza, 98 dykes of rock at, 100 Isthmia, 127 Itu, red sandstone of, 7 Iwanai, 94, 97 coal rocks of, 105 analysis of coal from, 125 to Isoya, 98 Iwaou (sulphur), 94 Iwaounobori, 98 volcano, excursion to, 94 summit of, 95 solfatara action on, 95 sulphur works on, 97 Jade, 117, 118 Jadeite (feitsui), 117,118 Japan sea, 67, 104, 105 Formosa and Kuriles, N. E.,S. W. trend of line connecting, 1 Japanese taste for the bi- zarre in nature, 62 mining, 80 Jasper in Tomari gravel, 99 with copper at Kunnui, 91 on the Gobi desert, 73 Jesuit map of China, accu- racy of, 62 Jinshan (H), 59 Jin Tsung, 48 Jauchau (FF), 60, 114 Ju (C), 57, 110, 114 Juning (['), 46 Jurassic strata, apparent absence of in China, 62 Juyuen (H), 58 Jehol, 10, 57, 68 Kabasima, granite intru- sive on, 107 Kai (H), 59 Kaifung (F), 47, 110 Kaikien (H), 61 Kaiping (H), 57 Kaiyanobetz coal series, 97 Kakumi porphyry, 84 cut by greenstone, 89 on the Raiden mountain, 94 product of weather-| ing of, 85 warm spring of, 85 porphyry among ejecta of Esan, 86 copper mine of, 84 Kalgan (Changkiakau), 56, 70, 72, 74 to Siwan and Sinpaun- gan, 33 road frora to Urtai, 25 metamorphi¢ region east of, 36 trachytic porphyry, 23, 74 description of, 37 Kameta, terrace deposit at, 80 Kamschatka, 106 N. E., 5. W. trend of, 1 granite axis of, 65 Kan, value of, 81 Kan river, coal measures on, 65 sandstone on, 52 Eanchau (F), 52, 60, 111, 114 Kanghi, map of the Em- peror, 66 Kanku, 116 Kansuh province, 43, 57 60, 110, 113, 117 Barrier range in, 63 Kantientsuhtung, 117 Kaolin, of Kingteh, 65 Kara sea, 69 Kara Gol river, 75 Karaoussu, communica- tion between, and valley of Kir Noor, 29 Kaufung, 57 Kaufungkung, 116 EKauhyen mountain, 58 Kauming (H), 116 Kauyin mountain, 116 Kauyuen (H) 110 Kehyu mountain, 60, 115 Kentei mountains, 74 EKeyserling, 55 Ki mountain, 113 Kia (C), 59, 117 Kiachta, Urga to, 75 Kiahing (F) 112, 115 Kiai (C), 56,59, 60, 109, 118, 117 Kialung river, 66 Kiang (H) 109 Kiang mountain, 109, 113 Kiang (C), 56, 109, 113, 116 Kiangsi province, 58, 60, 111, 114, 117 indications of limestone in, 65 Kiangsuh province, 46, 57, 110, 113, 114 synclinal axis in, 65 Kianghia (H), 111, 114 Kiangnan (H), 59 Kiangning (F) (Nanking), 57, 110, 114 Kiangpu (H), 57 Kiangshan (H), 58 Kiating (F), salt deposits of, 57, 59, 64, 111, 114 Kiaying (C), 116 Kichau, 47 Kien (C), 59, 60, 114 Kienchang (F), 114 Kienchi (H), 60 Kienngan (Hf), 112, 115 Kienning (F), 112, 115 Kientang (H), 115 Kiente (H), 112, 115 Kienwei (H), 57 Kienyang (H), 56, 115 Kih (C), lime of, 56, 63, 109 Kihngan (F), 52 Kikiang (H), 114 Kiming, 45, 56 mountain, 22 terrace deposit near, 34 Kingchau (F), 57, 60 Kingchingshi river, 117 Kingtang (H), 114 Kingyang (F), 110, 117 Kin (H), 57 Kingan mountains, coal in, 68 rocks of the, 68 made up of parallel ridges, 68 Kingkung and Chwanchio, battle between, 44 Kingteh, granite and Kao- lin of, 65 Kingtsewan, sandstone quarries near, 52 Kingtingpu, 56 Kingtung (T), 59 Kingyuen (F), 58, 116 in Kwangsi, marble mountains of, 53 Kinhwa (F), 58 Kinhwa (H), 58 Kinki (H), 114 Kinkung, 61 Kinngohshan, 61 | Kinsha Kiang, 55, 61, 118 Kinshan, 60 Kinsha (Ts), 116 Kintsung, 61 Kintsumi mountain, 58 Kintang (H), 57 Kiuhtsing (F), 112, 116 Kiuhyu (H), 109, 113 Kiukiang (F), 7, 52, 65 Kiusiu, 108 neighborhood of Naga- saki on, 107 Kir Noor, 76, 126 valley of, 28 disappearance of waters = of, 28, 29 character of plain of, 29 old water-level lines around, 29 earth from, under mi- croscope, 127 road to, from Chagan- oussu, 28 Kiungchau (F), 112, 116, 118 : Kiuyung (H), 114 Kiyungkwan, marble arch of, 12 Klaproth, 70 on Min mountains, 66 comparing dates of He- brew, Brahmin, and Chinese deluges, 44 map of Central Asia by, 43 Kobi, magnetic iron sand at, 88 European iron furnace at, 88 Kohsowa, 114 Komangadake (Sawara- dake) volcano, 82 crater of, 82 pumice eruption of, 82 destruction of cone of, 82 gases from, 83 Komung mountain, 114 de Koninck, on fossils from China, 54, 55 Koyeh mountain, 113 Krafto (Sagalin), 79 Krapotkin, Prince, 68 Ku (C), 57, 60, 110, 113 Ku (1), 111 Ku mountain, 116 Kuchau (F), 58, 115, 117 coal field of, 65 calcareous sandstone near, 52 Kudo, silicious schist of, 104 metamorphic near, 101 Kumaishi, pumic-tufa at, 102 Kung (C), 59, 114 Kung (H), 57, 110 Kung mouutain, 56, 110, 111 Kungchang (F), 57, 60, 110, 113, 117 Kungchau (F), 111 Kungching (H), 58 Kunnui, 99 deposition of auriferous - gravel of, 106 auriferous gravel of, 105 gold-washings at, 91 terraces near, 90 amygdaloid ‘at, 100 Kur river, 68 Kuren (Urga), 75 Kurile islands, axis of, 106 ashes of Komangadake earried to, 82 Japan and Formosa, N. E., 5. W. trend of line connecting, 1 Kusih mountain, 116 Kusung mountain, 111,114 Kwaihochuen river, 60 Kwang (C), 46 Kwangchau (F), 115,118 Kwangling (H), 56 — “fire mountain” near, 55 Kwangning (H), 61 Kwangping (I), 46, 56, 109 Kwangsi province, 58, 61, 65, 66, 112, 116, 118 marbles of, 53 Kwangsi (C), 116 Kwangsin (F), 52,58,111, 114, 117 coal field of, 65 Kwangyin, sacred cavern of, 52 Kwangtung province, 58, 61, 112, 115, 116, 118 Kwangyuen (H), 60, 111 Kwantung (H), 59 Kwantung (pu), quarry of lava at, 32 Kwei (C), 57 Kwei (H), 61, 116 Kwei coal field, 6, 64, 121 basin, plants from, 119 analysis of coal from, 124 Kweichau province, 58, 61, 63, 66, 111, 115, 117 Kweichau (F), 59, 60,111, 5 Me, aly Kweichi (H), 111 Kweilin (I), 58, 66, 116 Kweiyang (F), 115 Kweiyang (C), 58, 111, 15) = rocks Kwenlun mountains, ranges branching off |: 9) “a from, represented in China, 66 INDEX. Kwungming (1), 112, 116 Labor and material, cost of, at Yurup mines, 103 cost of, on Yesso, 81 Laccopteris, 120 germinans, 121 Laicha Ho, analysis of an- thracite from, 124 Laichau (F), 46 Laiping (H), 61 Laiyang (H), 58 limestone quarries near, 52 Laiyung mountain, 114 Laiwu (H), 110, 113 Lake Baikal, 75 earthquakes at, 76 Lake Lo, 48 Yungtse, 47 basins. of northern China, origin of, 42 loam deposit of north- ern China, origin of, 42 loam of Siwan under microscope, 126 in a crateriform valley, near Iwanai, 94 Lake-terrace deposits, 23 deposit, description of 39 Lakes of northern China, islands in ancient, 40 isolated, 41 extent of ancient, 44 diminution in yolume of, 41 isolated, in southern Mongolia, 26 origin of the ancient, of | northern China, 42 time of disappearance of, 45 Lamasery near Yingma- chuen, 30 of Boroseiji, 26 of Churin chelu, 74 Lamotsang, 115 lanceolata, Zamia, 121 lanceolatus, Podozamites, 120, 121 Zamites, 121 Lanchau (F), coal-basin of 57, 60, 63 Langsien cave, 58 Langtsung (H), 59 Lanki (H), 58 Lankiung (H), 59 Lanshan (H), 60, 113 Lantien (H), 117 mountain, 117 Lantienta, 61 Lantsan river, 61, 66 Lapis-lazuli, 117 Latsz, mountain, 57 Lauhukau, 58 Lavas of Mongolia, 42 Lava of the plateau, 75 resting on granitic and metamorphic rocks, 75 fragments of, 72 of plateau, character of, e at Kwantung (pu), 32 Lava-quarry at Kwantung (pu), 32 | Liangchau (F), 57 |Lava-Quarry, stream in valley of Si Ho, 27 dykes on Yesso, 106 flows on Yesso, 106 on the Raiden mountain, 94 bed at cape Shiraita, 99 amorphous, at Hira- tanai, 102 of Setanai, description of, 99 Lead, 110, 111, 113, 114, 115, 116 mines of Ichinowatari, 80 production of, and cost of working, 81 smelting process Ichinowatari, 81 veins, minerals of, at Ichinowatari, 80 mines of Yurup, 102 amount and cost of pro- duction at Yurup, 103 Leang mountain, 113 Leanghien mountain, 113 Leangkung mountain, 117 Lena river, 67, 76 Letter from A. M. Edwards on infusorial earths, 126 at Liangshan (A), 117 | Liangtang (H), 113 Liau river, 57, 64 N.E., S. W. trend in lower course of, 1 Liautung, 57, 64 promontory. N.E.,5.W. trend of, 2 Liayang (H), 113 Liaying (H), 117 Li, Chinese, 50 mountain, 60, 117, 118 (C), 111 Lien (C), 112 Lienchau (fF), 58, 115 Lieutungping, 57 Likiang (F), 59, 61, 118 Lime, 62 Limekilns near Peking, 12 | Limestone, 13, 44, 63, 65 in China, localities of, | 56, 57, 58 near Nagasaki, 107 of Nankau pass, 21 silicious, 22 Devonian, 62 in the coal-measures, 21. islands in gulf of Pe- chele, 63 fragments of, in green- stone-porphyry con- glomerate, 37 caves in, 12 silicious, of Kiming, 36 at Siuenhwa (F), 12 fragments in porphyry conglomerate, 13 of Chihli, 10 anticlinal ridges of, on the Yangtse, 63 description and mode of occurrence of, in Chihli, 12 135 Limestone and granite in the coast range, 68 near Chauchuen, 34 broken through by por- phyry, 13 poverty of, in fossils, 6 in amygdaloid, 22 on Meiling pass, 52 near Yingting (H), 52 in Liautung, 64 on the North river, 52 near Laiyang (H), 52 near Yenchau (F), 52 silicious, of Hwaingan beds, 36 in Tomari gravel, 99 of the Gobi under mi- croscope, 126 . indications of, in Min mountains, 66 resting on gneiss near Hwaingan, 35 varieties of, in Senji hills, 72 in Mingan hills, 71 with graphite, 74 great thickness of, 5 overlying metamorphic schists, 5 near lake Bilika Noor, 71 on the Yangtse, 4 ridges below Hwang- chau (F), 7 Devonian, flanking the granite axis, 5 quarried at Nanking, 8, 51 chert in, 6 on the Yangtse, char- acter of, 5 breccia near Shauchan, Lindley, 121, 123 linearis, Pterozamites, 120 Ling (H), 56 Lingan (F), 112, 116 Lingchi, coal at, 11 Lingfung (H), 56 Lingling (H), 58 Lingpau (H), 114 Lingshi (H), 56 Lingtse (H), 60, 110, 114 Lingtung (H), 117 Linkiang (F), 58, 114 Linkiu (H), 56 Linku (H), 60, 110, 113 Liping (F), 111 Lipu (H), 58 Lishui (H), 114 List of minerals of China, 109 Lithology of region north- west of Peking, 34 Litien, 116 Liuchau (F), 61, 112, 116 Liulu mountain, 56 Liulungtsa, 112 Liushan, rocks of, 52 Liutung (H), 60 Liuyang (H), 58 Liyang (H), 110 Loam of terrace deposit, erosion of, 40 terrace, in valley of the Si Ho, 28 origin of the lake, of northern China, 42 136 Loam, calcareous, of an- cient lake (terrace) deposit, 40 deposits on the plateau, 75, 77 Lockhart, Dr. W., 54 Lodestone, 109, 110, 111 Lohliang (C), 112 Lohnan (H), 113 Lohngan (H), 113, 117 Loma (Ts), 116 Longan (H), 110 Longitudinal valleys in Eastern Asia, 1 Loshan (H), 59 Loti (F), 112 Loting (C), 112 Lotsing (H), 117 Lotsung mountain, 110 Lotu, 57 Lower plateau, 31 Yangtse, observation along, 7 Loyang (H), 57 Lucan gorge, 6 sandstone at the, 6 Luchau (F), 46, 57 Lu (C), 59, 60, 114 Lufung (H), 116 Luhkiang (H), 57 Luhkiuen (H), 112 Luhngan (C), 46 Luitsz (H), 116 Luki river, 115 Lulung (1), 60, 109, 113 Lunan (C), 116 Lung (C), 110 Lungan (F), 59, 109, 113, 116 Lungchi (H), 112 Lungchi mountain, 56 Lungkien mountain, 115 Lungmun mountains, 57 gorge, 2, 45, 63 Lungmun (H), 109 Lungmun (Ts), 115 Lungnan (F), 114 Lungngan (F), 60,111,115 Lungsu mountain, 112,115 Lungtang mountain, 111, 115 Lungtsiuen (H), 58, 60,115 Lungtsungyen, 116 Lupan (H), 114 Lusan (H), 57 Lushi (H), 114 Lutientsang, 116 Maanmiau, 31 action of spring near, Maanshan, 56 coal at, 11 Macdonald, J. A., 14, 123 Maching (H), 111 Macombii, Otozamites, 120 Magnesite in lead veins, 80 Magnetic iron in trachytic rock at Hako- dade, 79 in Kunnui gravel, 91 sand at Kobi, 88 magnifolia, Strangerites, 120 Mailla, 44, 45 Malachite, 113 INDEX. Malayan peninsula formed by mountains of the N. 5. system, 2 Malung (C), 112 Malung (Ts), 116 Mammoth, remains of, in Siberia, 77 Manau mountain, 118 Manchuria, 68 volcanic action in the mountains of, 76 Manchurian rivers, races of, 108 Manganese at Kunnui, 91 carbonate of, in Yurup veins, 102 Mang mountain, 109 Mangninchuenkau, 57 Mantau, 116 Maples on Yesso, 93 Map of China, 45 general sketch, of Ge- ology of China, 63 Maps of changes in the course of the Hwang Ho, 47 Marble in China, 6 localities of limestone, in China, 56, 57, 58 arch of Kiyungkwan, 12 ornamental, 12 mountains of Kingyuen (F), 53 in Shihtsien (F), and Chinyuen (F), 63 Marco Polo, 66 Marine terraces of Japa- nese coast, 108 Marshes of the delta-plain, 47 Mats used in gold-washing at Kunnui, 92 Matzmai, 106 Mau (C), 60, 114 Mau mountain, 57 Maumotosz‘, 118 Mei (C), 59, 60, 117 Mei (H), 110 Meiling pass, 65 argillaceous sand- stone and lime- stone on, 52 probably a low range, 3 Mergen, 68 Mesozoic plants, 119 Metamorphic argillite, 105 at Yurup, veins in, 102 argellites of Kakumi, 84 region east of Kalgan, 3, 36 : rocks on the Yangtse, 4 of northern China, of different ages, 41 in Central China, 66 near Siuenhwa (F), 235 at Chifu, 63 of the Gobi desert, 67 at Mt. Oyama, 107 of southeastern peninsula of Yesso, 89 older, of western Yesso, LO4 ter- Metamorphic rocks of Kudo, 101 of Oduta, 100 schists at the Lucan gorge, 6 of Barrier range, 25, 32 under lava of pla- teau, 27 near the Té Hai, 30 strata on Kiusiu, 107 coal-bearing rocks of Ousubetz, 105 Method of washing gold at Kunnui, 92 Miautsz‘ an aboriginal people in the Nanling, 3 Mica of syenitic granite at Nichinbe, 100 Micaceous schist Poyang lake, 65 series, schists of, on either side of Barrier range, 36 schist in the Liushan, §2 in the Kingan mountains, 68 in hills of Senji, 72 on the Gobi, 74 and chloritic schists in Kunnui gravel, 105 Microscope, examination of earths under, 126 Mien (H), 110 Mien (C), 60, 111, 114 Mienning (H), 111, 114 Miloh mountain, 114 Min (C), 60, 117 Min river, granite on, 65 Mineral Productions China, 109 | Minerals of China, list of, 109 miscellaneous, in Chihli, 116 in Shansi, 116 in Fuhkien, 118 in Kwangtung, 118 in Kwangsi, 118 in Yunnan, 118 in Hunan, 117 { in Kweichau, 117 in Chehkiang, 117 in Shensi, 117 in Kansuh, 117 in Shantung, 117 in Honan, 117 in Hupeh, 117 in Sz‘chuen, 117 in Kiangsi, 117 Mines of coal near Nan- king, 8 in Japan and China, 80 of Yurup, 102 Ming (H), 112 Mingan hills, 70, 71 loam deposit in, 77 Mingkwang, 116 Ming Ti (‘lung Han dyn.), 48 Mining, Chinese method of, 20 method of, in Tatsau anthracite seam, 16 at Yurup, 103 > Miscellaneous minerals, 116 near of Mitan gorge, 66 Miyun (H), 60, 109, 113 Mochada, height of the Amur river at, 68 Mobpeh mountain, 118 Mokwei, 112 Mollusks, recent, in ter- race-clay of Yesso, 106 Monbetz, ammonites and obsidian from, 106 Mongin mountain, 116 Mongolia, topography, etc., of southern, 70 volcanic formation of southern, 70 earths from, under mi- croscope, 126 winter climate of, 70 Mongolian Table-land, 67 southern edge of, 25 . character of eastern edge of, 68 character of north- “ern edge of the, 74 Monterey, infusorial earth of, 126 Moteta, tufa-conglomerate at cape, 99 Moyu, 115 Mud and steam vents on Esan, 86 flows of Esan, 86 Mulberry at Kunnui, 93 Munghwa (T), 112 Mungmitosz, 118 Mungtsz (H), 116 Mungying (H), 113 Muntakau, 56 analysis of anthracite from, 124 anthracite at, 11 anthracite district of, 18 Murray, Mr., 68 Murrayana, Coniopteris, 123 Murchison, R. I., 55 Murchisoniana, Cyrtia, 54 Murkwoching, syenite near, 35 Mwanching (H), 109 Nagasaki, neighborhood of, 107 coal near, 107 argillaceous schists and limestone near, 107 pluto-neptunian de- posit near, 107 Nai (creek), 90 Nambu, Prince of, 88 Nan mountain, 114 Wanchang (Fu), 58, 60, 111, 114 Nanhai (H), 115 Nanhiung (F) and Shau- chau (F), limestone and sandstone with coal be- between, 52 Nankau pass, 21 rocks of, 10 mountain range of, 63 granite in, 34 Nanking, 46, 65, 110 limestone quarried at, 8, 51 Nanking, coal mines near, 8 red sandstone opposite, 8 to Canton, geology of the route from, 51 WNanling mountains, 3, 63 branches of, 3 Wanngan (F), 52, 111, 114 Wanning (F), 58, 61 Nanping (H), 112, 115 Nanpu (H), 59 Nanshan mountains, 58 Wantsung (H), 114 Nanyang (F), 110, 114 Wanyang (H), 110 Wanying (C), 112 Nanying (H), 112 Warin Gol, 26 Wative copper in jasper, 91 N.E., S. W. system of up- heaval, 42, 67 uplift on Yesso, 105 ridges in Northern China, 10 d trend in §. E. coast of China, upper Yellow river, lake Baikal, Kamschatka, coast of Manchuria, 1 trend in rivers of East Siberia, 1 trend in E. Asia, gulf of Pechele, middle Yangtse, delta-plain, Liau river, Lower Amur, gulf of Pen- jinsk. Inthe shores of sea of Ochotsk and bay of Bengal. . In islands of Formosa, Japan, and Kuriles, 1 trend in Stanovoi and Yablonoi ranges, in mountains of Trans- Baikal, in Byrranga mountains, 1 system of elevation, 65 Neapolitan solfatara, 86 Wehon, 54 Wekiang (H), 59 Wephrite in Tomari gravel, 99 in limestone, 99 Nesho mountain, 58 Newberry, J. §., 119 New Mexico, fossil plants from, 120 Neyang (H), 110 Negan (C), 116 Wean (H), 60 Neganchi (H), 112 Wegani (H), 56,59, 109, 113 Neganfung (Ts), 115 Weganhiang (H), 58 Weganhwa (H), 110, 111 Nganwhui province, 52, 57, 66, 110, 114 synclinal axis in, 65 Neganki (H), coal at, 65 Neganking (F), 110 114 Weganloh (F), 114 Neganning (C), 59 Neganshun (F), 117 Nibitzunai, terrace deposit at, 94 Nichinbe, greenstone of, 18 August, 1866. INDEX. WNichinbe, syenitic granite near, 100 Nien mountain, 117 WNientau, 115 Ning (C), 117 Ninghai mountain, 112, 115 Ninghia (F), 57 coal basin of, 63 western limit of ancient lakes, 43 Ninghwa (H), 112, 115 Ningkiang (C), 66 Ningkwei mountain, 110, 113 Ningkwoh (F), 57, 114 coal field of, 65 Ninglau mountain, 116 Ningpo (F), 60, 115 Ningteh (H), 112 Ningtsing mountain, 115 Ningurh (4), 59 Ningyuen (F), 59, 60, 111, 114 Ningyuen (H), 110, 113, 117 Nippon, N.S. trend of northern, 107 Nitan mountain, 115 Witanai, bed of infusorial earth near, 88 infusorial earth from, under microscope, 126 Nitre, 116, 117, 118 Niyang (H), 110 Nobori (to climb), 94 North and south system of | upheaval on Yesso, 106 North Atlantic, 69 Worth Carolina, fossil plants of, 119, 120 Northeast system of up- heaval on Yesso, 106 Worth river, sandstone and limestone on, 52 Northwest system of up- heaval on Yesso, 106 Norway, 69 Noumin river, 68 N.S. system of mountains, 2 trend of Sagalin, 107 trend apparently con- fined to Western China, 2 system of elevation affecting younger strata, 107 Wuculina? in the terrace- clay of Kunnui, 91 N. W. uplift on Yesso, 105 system of elevation af- fecting oldest metam roeks, 107 Oaks on Yesso, 93 Obokodake mountain, 105 Observations in the pro- vince of Chihli, 10 Obsidian from North Yesso, 106 obsoleta, Crania, 54 Ochotsk, sea of, 67 Odaszu bay, 93, 98, 100, 106 Oeynhausianus, [teroza- mites, 120 Olivine, 38 Olannoor, valley of, 71 Old water-level lines around the Kir Noor valley, 29 Olo, 116 omphalodes, Spirorbis, 54 | Ono, plain of, 80 Outline of East Asia caused) by N.E., S. W. disturb- ance, 42 Ores of copper, silver, lead, tin, quicksilver, in Chihli, 113 in Shansi, 113 in Shensi, 113 in Kansuh, 113 in Shantung, 113 in Kiangsuh, 114 in Nganhwui, 114 in Honan, 114 in Hupeh, 114 in Sz‘chuen, 114 in Kiangsi, 114 in Hunan, 115 in Kweichau, 115 in Chehkiang, 115 in Fuhkien, 115 in Kwangtung, 115 in Kwangsi, 116 in Yunnan, 116 in Corea, 116 Origin of the ancient lakes of Northern China, 42 orientalis, Sphenopteris, 121, 122, 123 Orkhon river, 74, 75 steppes of, 76 Oron lake, seals in, 76 Orthoceras from China, 55 Orthography of Chinese names, 109 Ortous, terrace deposit in the land of the, 43 Oscillations, recent, of the surface of China, 9 in the valley of the Yangtse, 9 Ossiferous caverns, 13, 56 Ostree, fossil at Kunnui, 91| Otoshibetz, terrace clay | with shells near, 90 Otozamites Macombii, 120 Ouenkoto, 101 Ourang daban mountains, 2, 63 Oussu, 96 Ousubetz, 97 penal establishment of, 101 coal series near, 105 to Iwanai, 98 Oouta rocks, relative age of, 104 metamorphic rocks at, 100 ‘ Oxide of iron deposited from springs, 96, 101 Oyama mountains near Yo- kohama, 107 Oyasu, rocks at, 89 Pa (C), 60 Pah (H), 59 Pacific Ocean, north, 69 Pacific coast, infusorial beds on, 126, 127, 128 Palagonite tufa near Yu-| rup, 104 on Yesso, 105 157 Paleozoic, skeleton of the plateau probably, 75 Palisade, 57 coal near, 64 Pallas, 76 Pang (H), 60 Pangkwang, near, 52 Pangshan (H), 59 Pangshui (H), 60, 114 Pang (Ts), 115 Parallelism in Siberian mountains, 67 line of reference for, 1 in Fastern Asia, 1 Pass of Nankau, 21 Passes of the Meiling, 3 Patang, 55 Patung (H), 57 Pau mountain, 113, 118 Pauhung, 116 Pauking (F), 58,111, 115 Pauning (F), 59, 60, 111 Paungan (C), 56 Paushan (H), 118 Paushan, 60 Pauteh (C), 44 Pauting (F), 56, 109, 113 Pautsing (H), 117 Pechele, gulf of, 49, 67 N. E., 5. W. trend in gulf of, 1 Pecopteris, 119 dentata, 122 denticulata, 122 falcatus, 120 Stutgardtensis, 121 Whitbiensis, 120, 122 Pecten in terrace clay of Kunnui, 91 Peh mountain, 113 Pehho (H), 117 Pehliu (H), 116 Pei Ho, 44, 48 Peikang mountain, 58 Peinien mountain, 115,117 Peita mountain, 57 Peishi mountain, 58 Peisuh mountain, 114 Peitutsung, 57 Peiyun cave, 58 Peking, 46, 63, 68, 113, 121, 122, 124 plain of, 44 on border of delta plain, 46 table of the coal series near, 11 Pekuen, the engineer, 44 Pelaifung mountain, 57 Pema, 110, 116 Penjinsk, N. E., S. W. trend in gulf of, 1 Permian, 67 Perry, Japan expedition, 79 Peshan mountain, 56 Petersburg, Va., infuso- rial earth, 88, 126, 127, 128 Peting mountain, 116 Petroleum at Yamukshi- nai, 90 in Chinese salt walls, 53 Petung (white copper), 114, 116 Peyinkung, 115 coal mine 138 Phonolithic lava at Futoro, 100 Phylotheca, 119 Physical geography of Cen- tral Asia, 77 Pihshan (H), 59 Pin (C), 61, 110 Pinghiang (H), 58 Pingi (H), 116 Pingliang (F), 110, 113 coal basin of, 63 Pingliang (H), 110, 113 Pingloh (Ff), 58, 61, 112, 116 Pingloh (H), 58, 61, 113, 116 Pingnan (H), 58 Pingtan, limekilns at, 52 Pingting (C), 56, 110, 113 Pingwu (H), 60 Pingyang (F), 56,109,113 Pingyang (H), 57, 112,115 “ Pit of Heaven,”’ 57 Pitchstone, 98, 105 Plain of Peking, 44 of Siuenhwa (F), 22 of Kir Noor, character of, 29 of the Tungting lake, 7,8 of Hupeh and Hunan, a swampy region in early historical times, Plains of South Mongolia, 70 of Mongolian plateau, 73 Plants, fossil, from China, 119 Plateau of Mongolia, con- formation and height of, 75 ascent to, 25, 70 plains of the Mongolian, 73 rock of the skeleton of the, 75 valleys on the, 26 profile of, 75 former volcanic activity on, 76 formerly covered by a sea from the Caspian to the Arctic, and to mountains of North China, 76 volcanic formation of, 26 the lower, 31 volcanic rocks of the, 38 lower and higher, due to dislocation, 39 of terrace-loam, 32 Plateau-edge near Hanoor, height of, 25 Plicated strata of quartz schist at Kudo, 101 Plications of the strata in the Kwei coal field, 6 Pluto-neptunian rocks of Yesso, 104, 105 deposit about Nagasaki, 107 deposits of trachytic porphyry, 25 Podocarpites acicularis, 123 INDEX. |podocarpoides, Taxites, > 1283 | Podocarpus, Taxites, 123 Podozamites, 119, 123 Emmonsii, 120, 121 lanceolatus, 121 lancolotus, 120 Population of Yesso, 79 Porphyry, 11 at Chaitang, 14 in Tatsau coal basin, 16 in Kingan mountains, 68 in limestone, 18 felsitic, 18 hornblendic, 18 Porphyries at Chingshui, 17 of South Yesso, 89 of the Wangping basin, 18 of Hiamaling, 41 Porphyry dykes in gra- nite, 72 in clay slates near Oyasu, 89 in Nankau pass, 21 at Hiamaling, 13 Porphyry, claystone, on the Ousubetz creek, 101 trachytic, 25 trachytic, on the Gobi, 74 trachytic, of Kalgan, 23 greenstone, conglome- rate, 86 Porphyry conglomerate, origin of, 13 of Chaitang, 41 thickness of, 12 in Wangping coal basin, 11 Porphyry-breccia near Chauchuen, 34 Porphyry, quartzose, 18 quartziferous, gravel, 25 quartziferous, near Shkahe, 84 quartziferous, of the Raiden, 94 _ white quartziferous, of Yesso, 104 white, in dykes at Ka- kumi, 84 younger than stone, 14 younger than coal mea- sures, 18 Poyang (H), 60 Poyang lake, 52, 65 rocks at outlet of, 7 Precipitation smelting of lead ore in Japan, 81 Preparation of ore at Ichi- nowatari, 80 Present course of Hwang Ho, 49 Price of coal at Tashihtang mine, 20 Prince Krapotkin, 68 | Principal coal mines of Chaitang district, 14 Productus subaculeatus, 54 Protogine in gravel of the Yang Ho, 35 Pterozamites, 119 lime- Pterozamites, linearis, 120 Oeynhausianus, 120 Sinensis, 120 Puchau (F), 109 Puchiau, mountains of, 44 pugnus, Terebratula, 55 Puhkiang (H), 59 Pumice of Komangadake, 83 mantle of Komangadake volcano, 82 subaerial deposits of, 84 with quartz crystals at Isoya, 93 Pumice-tufa of Yesso, 105 near Tomarigawa, 102 at Kumaishi, 102 Pumiceous tufa at Abura, 99 Pumpelly, R., report to Chinese Government on coal, 14 Pungchi (H), 57 Punglai (H), 110 Pu'rh (FF), 59, 116 Pusung (H), 115 Putai, rate of growth of delta at, 49 Pyunsz, 120 coal at, 10 Quartz in trachytic rock of Hakodade, 79 in trachytic rock of Totohoke, 86 ‘in trachytic porphyry, 74 crystals in porphyry, 84 erystals in pumice at Isoya, 93 double pyramid erys- tals of, in Kakumi porphyry, 84 condition of, in rocks of Esan volcano, 86 varieties of, in trachytic porphyry, 37 veins and masses in metamorphic schists on the Yangtse, 4 veins of Yurup, 102 veins with iron and copper pyrites near Oyasu, 89 Quartziferous porphyry, 18 near Shkabe, 84 trachytic porphyry, 105 Quartzite, ridge of in cities of Hanyang (F) and Wuchang (F), 7 in limestone, 6 in the Mingan hills, 71 in Kunnui gravel, 91 Quartz-schist at Kudo, 101 Quicksilver, 113, 114, 115, 116 racemosa, Tymfanophora, 123 Radde, M., 68 Raiden promontory, lava and tufa-conglomer- ate of, 94 mountain, as seen from the sea, 98 Rapids of the Yangtse, 5 caused by granite, 4 silt deposits in, 9 Realgar, 116, 117, 118 Recent lake deposits of valley of Yang Ho, 22 formation at Tsingtan, 8 deposits of gravel and clay in valley of Yangtse, 8 change in the lower course of the Hwang Ho, 49 sandstone and _ con- glomerate in valley of Kir Noor, 28 terrace deposits on Yes- so, 106 deposits of Yesso, 104 marine strata of south- ern Yesso, 89 Red sandstone on the Mei- ling, 52 of Itu, 7 “Regent's Sword,” 64 Relative ages of some older rocks in western Yesso, 101 Resume of geology of Yes- so, 104 Retrograde formation of valleys in terrace deposit, 40 reticularis, Terebratula, 55 Rhabdonema, 127 Rhinoceros tichorhinus, 77 Rhynchonella from China, 54 Hanburii, 54 Yuenamensis, 55 Rice and silk cultivation on Yesso, 80 Richmond, Va., infusorial earth of, 88, 126 coal basin, 122 Ritter, Carl, 43, 44, 52, 53, 66, 75 Rocks of the Kwei coal field, 6 coal, of Sz‘chuen, 6 at outlet of the Poyang lake, 7 of hornblendic series older than micaceous series ? 41 of granitic and erystal- line metamorphic series, distribution of, 34 of Ichinowatari series, 105 of eastern Altai moun- tains, 74 of western Yesso, 104 of the auriferous gravel of Kunnui, 91 Rock-crystal, 116, 117, 118 Rocky mountains, 69 Rogers, Prof., 126 Roman mission of fiwan, 33 “Russia and Mountains,” 55 the Ural Sagalin (Krafto), 79 | analysis of coal from, | 125 N.S. trend of axis of, 107 Saidoma, veins near, 89 Sagami, serpentine on, 108 | Salmon in the Toshibetz, 93 Salt wells, 57, 64 table of, in China, 59 of §Sz‘chuen, scription of ; depth of ; cost of ; inflammable gas from ; evapora- tion of salt from ; oil in, 53 deposits of Sz‘chuen, 7 of western China, 64 at Wushan (H), 64 at Chingking (F), 64 at Siichau (F), 64 in Shunking (F), and Kiating (F), | 64 age of the, 64 Sanchuen mountain, 113 Sandstone, 72 greenish, 75 caleareous, near chau (F), 52 and slate near Hwui-| chau (F), 52 at Kingtsewan, 52 red, opposite Nanking, 8 below Tungliu, 8 ferruginous, at Hwang- chau (F), 7 at Sankiangkau, 7 of the Lucan gorge, 6 calcareous, of Kwei coal field, 6 micaceous, of Kwei coal field, 6 Gobi, under microscope, 127 of the steppe deposit, 73 in Mingan hills, 71 and conglomerate beds of southern Yesso, 104; near Achase, 98 of coal series of Kaiya- nobetz, 97 in slate at Shiwokubi, 89 voleanic, of Yesso, 105 Sangpuhia, 115 Sanhotsa, 112 Sankau (H), 114 Sankang Ho, 42 valley of the, 32 Sankia, 57 Sankiang (ancient mouths of Yangtse river), 48 Sankiangkau, sandstone and conglomerate of, 7 Sanlo (H), 116 Sanmun, gorge of, 45 Sanpu (F), 112 Sansz‘ mountain, 57 Santsingming, 115 Saurin, Mr., 68 Sawaradake volcano; sce de- Kii- Cowangadake, 82, 86, 96 INDEX. Sanyu, 121, 122, 123 Scalaria in terrace clay of Kunnui, 91 Scandinavian peninsula, 68 Schalstein, 22 Schists, metamorphic, of Barrier range, 25 of micaceous series on either side of Barrier range, 36 resting on granite near Kanchau (F), 52 Schlotheimii, Sphenopte- ris, 122 Schmidt on terraces of Amur river, 108 Scoria, volcanic, of Koman- gadake, 83 Scorie in lava-quarry at Kwantung (pu), 32, 39 Sea of Greenland, 69 former, of northern Asia, 17 | Seals in the Caspian, 76 in the Baikal and Oron lakes, 76 Sea-margin around the delta-plain, 47 Selenga, terraces of the, 75 Semi-opal-like rock on Kaiyanobetz creek, 97 Senji, hills of, 72 Seou mountain, 57 Setanai, cliffs of, 99 Serpentine near Yokoha- ma, 107 ; on peninsula of Sagami, Serpentinoidal rock on the Ousubetz creek, 102 Serpula in terrace clay of Kunnui, 91 Sha (H), 115 Shachulung, sandstone and coal near, 52 Shachung, chloritic gneiss near, 35 Shaho (4H), 109 Shak, value of, 82 Shales and sandstone, coal, in Kiangsi, 65 Shang (C), 60, 110, 113, 117 Shangling (H), 61, 116 Shangsz‘ (C), 58 Shangtsau (H), 111, 117 Shangyang river and Cheh- kiang river, granite be- tween, 52 Shansi province, 43, 44, 45, 51, 55, 56, 59, 63, 66, 109, 113, 116 analysis of coal from, 125 native map of, 43 Shantung, 57, 60, 110,3113, 117 gold in, 63 watershed of, 63 boundary of the delta- plain, 46 mountains half inclosed by the delta, 46 Shauchau (F), 52, 58, 61, 112, 118 Shauking (F), 58, 61, 112, 115 Sheh (H), 110 Shells, fresh-water, in ter- race of Té Hai, 42 in terrace deposit, 30 in terrace clay near Otoshibetz, 90 Shen (C), 114 Shensi province, 45, 56, 57, 59, 60, 66, 110, 113, 117 Barrier range in, 63 Shi mountain, 118 Shihping (C), 112 Shihtsien (F), 58, 111,115 marble and caverns in, 63 Shihung (H), 111 Shijoushan, 60 Shikau mountain, 117 Shilieu mountain, 113 Shiling, 56 Shimakomaki, 99 tufa-conglomerate at, 98 Shinan (F), 60 Shinchau (F), 111, 115 Shingking (F), 57, 111 Shinmuh (H), 117 Shipau mountain, 116 Shiraita, tufa-conglomerate at cape, 99 Shirarika, amygdaloid at, 90 Shiribetz river, 93, 94, 96, 98 extinct volcano of, 96 Shiribuka creek, 97, 98 Shishan, hills of, 7 Shitan, 56, 57 Shiwokubi (cape Blunt), 89 Shiyen, 56, 62 mountain, 58 Shkabe, hot springs of, 84 Shuking classic, 45, 47 of Confucius, record in, of a delnge, 44 Shukwang (H), 46 yearly growth of delta at, 50 Shuikin (H), 60 Shuiyin mountain, 113 Shunking (F), 59 salt deposits of, 64 Shunteh (I), 56, 109 Shuntien (F), 56, 60, 109, 113 Si Ho, 27, 66 mountain, 114 Siang (C), 116 Siangtan (H), 52 Siangtung, analyses anthracite from, 124 Siau Ho, 116 Siau (H), 57 Siauku shan, 7, 51 Siaunienfang, 116 Siautungko, 56 Siayang (H), 110 Siberia, 67 N.E., 5. W. trend of rivers in eastern, 1 Sichang (H), 114 Sieh mountain, 59, 114 Sienping (H), 112 Sihiang (H), 60 Sihma (T), 116 Sihungnien (H), 113 Siliceous schist of Wosat- zube, 104 of 13 99, Sliceous-limestone, 22 at Kiming, 36 of Hwaingan beds, 36 at Siuenhwa (F), 12 Silicified wood, 72 Silk culture on Yesso, 80 Silt deposits in the rapids of the Yangtse, 9 Silver, 109, 110, 111, 113, 114, 115, 116 Sinchau (F), 58, 61, 116 Sinching (H), 110 Sinensis, Pterozamites, 120 Singan (H), 58, 110, 115 Singan (F), 60, 110, 113, 117 Singchaukung, 116 Singhiung (C), 112 Singho (H), 112 Singtanghia, 115 Singyang (H), 117 Sinhwui (H), 115 Sinians, 69 analogous to the Appa- lachians, 62 Sinian system of elevation, 67 revolution begun after deposition of Devo- nian limestone, 68 revolution, determina- tion of eastern continental out- line by, 68 termination of, 62 system on Yesso, 107 Sinim, 67 Sining (F), 60 Sining (H), 56, 60 Sinpaungan, 56 loam from, under micro- scope, 127 Sinyang (H), 113 Sinyu (A), 58, 114 Sipeh mountain, 59 Siuenhwa (fF), plains of, 22, 56, 109, 113, 116 coal-basin of, 63 Siuenwei (C), 112, 116 Siuhing (H), 112 Siwan, Roman mission of, 33 loam from, under micro- scope, 126, 127 terrace deposit at, 33 houses in loam at, 43 syenite of, 35 Siyen mountain, 109 Siying (H), 58 Siyin‘sz, metamorphic schists near, 33 Skunope, 82, 84 Slate and red sandstone near Hwuichau (F), 52 Snakes on the Ousubetz ereek, 101 Snow -capped peaks in Central China, 63, 66 south of the San- kang Ho, 33 Southern China, 66 in the Nanling mountains, 3 in Shansi, 21 Soda - efflorescence Gurban Noor, 27 in at 140 Soda-efflorescence in valley of the Kir Noor, 28 Solfatara Komangadake, 82 of Esan, mud flows of, 86 Solfataras, destructive ac- tion of, 84 Sonora, fossil plants from, 126 Sources of data for general sketch of geology of China, 51 Southern limit of the higher plateau, 31 Mongolia, volcanic for- mation of, 26 the limit of a former ocean, 42 Soyachi, 115 Soyang (H), 56 Soyang (T's), 116 spatulatus, Taxites, 123 Sphene in granit», 4 Sphenopteris, 119, 120 denticulata, 122 dichotoma, 122 hymenophylloides, 122 orientalis, 121, 122, 123 Schlotheimii, 122 tridactylites, 122 Spirifer from China, 54 disjunctus from China, 54 Chechiel, 55 Verneuillii, 55 Spirorbis from China, 54 omphalodes, 54 Sponge spicule, 126 Springs of cha!ybeate water at Kudo, 101 calcareous deposit of former, 28 action of, in valley of Kir Noor, 28 of, near Fungching, 31 Sse Ma Tien on history of Yellow river, 47 Stalactites, 56,57, 58 in the Ichang gorge, 5 in Taingan (F) and Ki (C), 63 Stamping machinery at Ichinowatari, 81 Standard line of reference for parallelism, 1 Stanovoi mountains, 67 N.E., 5. W. trend of, 1 Steam coal at Futau mine, 14 in crater of Hsan, 86 temperature of, on Mt. Iwaounobori, 95 Steppe deposit, 74, 75 of plateau, 75 structure of, 71 erosion in the, 77 of the plateau, age of, 76 Steppes of Mongolian pla- teau, 73 Stictodiscus, 127 ‘*Stone swaliows,’’ 62 Strangerites magnifolia, 120 Stratiform structure of vol- canic formation of the pla- teau, 39 INDEX. Strogonoff bay, 97, 106 Stutgardtensis, Pecopte- ris, 121 subaculeatus, Productus, 54 Subaerial deposits on Yes- so, 106 of volcanic ashes, 84 Subjugation of the Yellow river in early times, 47 Subterranean river courses in Kwangsi, 53 Suchau (F), 57, 114 Stichau (F), 57, 59 Suchau (F), coal-basin of, 65 crevasse of Yellow river in, 49 Suenhwa (H), 58 Suh (C), 60 Suingan (H), 112,115, 117 Suiting (FF), 59, 60,111,117 Sulphate of iron, 116, 117, 118 Sulphur, 117, 118 process of working, on Esan, 87 mode of occurrence of, on Esan, 87 furnaces on Esan, 87 production of, on Esan, 88 cost of production of, on Esan, 88 formation of, on Koman- gadake, 83 occurrence of, on Iwaou- nobori, 95 net-work of, veins in Mt. Iwaounobori, 95 amount and cost of pro- duction of, at works of Iwaounoboii, 97 columnar structure in mud stream produced by erystals of, 87 and alum on Esan, 86 Sulphur-works on Esan, 87 on Iwaounobori, 97 Sulphuretted hydrogen in spring of Shkabi, 84 in gases of Iwaou- nobori, 95 Sulphurous acid and steam, action of, on rocks, 86 in gases of Iwaou- nobori, 95 Sulungpu, 57 Summit-level of the Im- perial canal, 48 Sung mountain, 58,110,113 Sung (H), 110, 114 Sungari river, 64, 68 Sungchi (H), 112 Sungchi river, 61, 111 Sungho (H), 117 Sungkia mountain, 113 Sungshan, 60 Sungyang (H), 60, 115 Sutsuwei (T's) 116 Sutzu, rocks near, 98 Syenite of Siwan, 35 dykes of, in schists near Siwan, 35 Syenite under lava of pla- teau, 27 near Murkwoching, 35 fragments of, in the tra- chytic porphyry tufas of Kalgan, 35 near Futoro, 100 at Oduta, 100 Syenitic granite on the Yangtse, 4 near Siwan, 33 at Nichinbe, 100 age of, on western Yesso, 101 of Yesso, relative age of, 104 rocks on the Gobi, 74 Synclinal ridges at Chai- tang, 14 Sz‘chau (F), 111, 115 Sz‘chi river, 115 Sz‘ching (I), 118 Sz‘chuen province, 51, 57,| 59, 60, 64, 66, 111,114, 117 coal rocks of, 6 salt deposits of, 7 Blackiston’s observa- tions in, 62 highlands of western, 63 salt wells of, 53 upper Devonian fossils from, 55 Sz‘kiautungtsing, 116 Sz ‘ling, 113 Sz‘nan (F), 111, 115, 117 Sz‘ngan (H), 116 Sz‘ngan (I), 61, 116 Sz‘ni mountain, 113 Table of recognizable events| in geology of China and Mongolia, 77, 78 of the coal series near Peking, 11 of coal, alum, limestone, fossils, caves, stalac- tites, etc., in China, 5G, 57, 58 of the mineral produc- tions of China, 109 Table-land of Shensi, 66 in Kwangsi and Kwei- chau, 66 in Yunnan, 66 in Shensi and Kansuh, 3 of Central Asia, 10 Tael, value of, 53 Tah (H), 117 Tai (C), 113 Taichau (F), 58, 112, 115 | Taihu lake, 57 Taihusz‘, 114 Taingan (I), 57, 110, 113, 117 : Taiping (I), 57, 58, 110 Taipingyin (Ts), 116 Taiting (F), 115 Taiwan (F), 60, 118 Taiyuen (H), 59, 109 Taiyuen (F), 56, 59, 109 Takeda, Mr., 88 Takwan (F), 116 Tala (plain), 73 Talco-argillaceous schist in the Mingan hills, 71 Talcose schist in hills of Senji, 72 Tali (F), 58, 59 Talo lake, 46 plateau west of delta- plain, 46 Talu (T's), 116 Tamchintala plain, 71, 73 erosion in, 77 Tameti (Ts), 112 Taming (F), 48, 116 Taming (H), caverns of, 63 Tan mountain, 56, 57 Taney mountains, 57 Taning (H), 56, 117 Tankingshan, 60 Tangtang (T's), 116 Tangyueh (C), 116, 118 Tashi mountain 110 Tashitung mine, analyses of anthracite from, 19, 124 *| Tashuikung, 115 }Tashuitang, 112 Tatan, 56 Tating (F), 111, 115 Tatsau anthracite mine, 15 56 assay, production and cost of an- thracite of, 16 analysis of anthra- : cite of, 123 Tatsing river, 48 present outlet of Hwang Ho, 49 Tatsingitungchi, 109 Tatso (H), 111 3 Tatsoh (lH), 59, 60, 117 Tatung (F), 56, 59, 110, 113 116 coal basin of, 63 fire mountain near, 55 analysis of coal from, 125 Tatung (H), 59 Taulichuen, 26 Tawan mountain, 115 | Taxinee, 123 Taxites, 120 podocarpoides, 123 Podocarpus, 123 spatulatus, 123 Tayang mountain, 113 Tayau river, 61 Taye (H), 111, 114 Taylor, R. C., 53 Taywu (H), 111 Tchihatcheff, 67 | Te Hai, 76 valley of, 30 water of, salt, 30 terrace deposit in val- ley of, 50 earths from, under mi- croscope, 126 fresh-water shells in ter- race of, 42 connection of the val- ley of with Hwang Ho valley, 43 garnetic gneiss and gra- nulite near, 35 and Kir Noor valleys, origin of, 42 Tehhwa (H), 112 Tehyih mine, analyses of ' anthracite from, 19, 124 | Tekang, 110 tenellus, Hymenophyllites, | 122 Terebratula cuboides, 55 pugnus, 55 reticularis, 55 in terrace clay of Kun-} nui, 91 Terrace-bluff near Yurup, 90 Terrace-clay deposits on Yesso, 106 deposit, recent at | Kunnui, and | shells in, 91 with shells near Otoshibetz, 90 Terrace-deposit, 23 | between the Siang | river and Yuen river, 8 between Payang and Tung‘sz, 8 below Tungliu, 8 distribution of, in Northern China, 39 description of, 39 valley of Yangkau 32 in valley of Kwan- tung (pu), 32 in valley of Kir Noor, 29 in valley of the Té Hai, 30, 126 in tributary of the Té Hai, 31 in valley of the Si Ho, 40 in system of Yang Ho and Sanka: Ho, 39 between Chatan and Kiming, 359 between Paungan and Tatung, 39 on Kiming moun- tain, 39 around Siuenhwa'! (F), 39 in Kalgan gorge, 39 * in valley of the/| Siwan, 39 on pass between) Yang Ho and. Hwaingan creek, | 39 in gorge of Yang-| kau, 39 at the Té Hai, 39 at the Kir Noor, 39 in valley of Chau- chuen, 34 near Kiming, 34 at Siwan, 33 deep gullies in, 40 fossil remains in, 34 remains of deerand other quadru- peds in, at Siwan 34 in valley of the Yel- low river, 43 dwellings excavat- ed in, 33, 40 at Yokohama, 107 recent on Volcano bay, 90 INDEX. Terrace loam in valley of the Si Ho, 28 Terraces of the Yangtse valley, 8 of the Yangtse; height | of the, 8 in Sz‘chuen, 8 on China coast, 108 of recent deposits at Chaitang, 14 of recent lake deposit in the valley of Yang Ho, 22 near Gashun, 72 of Hakodade, 79 near Sutzu, 98 of Japanese coast, 108 Terrace-formation at Na- gasaki, 107 Tertiary coal, 62, 119 | Teutai, 26 Te‘yang mountain, 110 Tibetan highland, 9 and Sz‘chuen sources of the Yangtse, water- shed between, 63 Tichi river, 61, 111 tichorinus, Rhinocerus, 77 Tie mountain, 110, 111,112 Tiekung mountain, 109 Tienching, 32 Tienmun (H), 114 Tienshan mountains, 42 volcanic action in, 76 Tientai (H), 115 Tientai mountain, 115 | Tientsin, formerly on the sea-shore, 50 Tientsingyang, 115 Tiewei (H), 59 Tiling mountain, 110 Timbering, cost of at mimes of Ichinowatari, 82 of coal mines in China, 19 Tin, 110, 113, 114, 115, 116 Tingchau (FI), 112, 115 | Tingpun (H), 59 Tingsiang (H), 59 'Ting Wang (Chow dy- nasty ) Yellow river in reign of, 47 Tingyuen (H), 59, 112 Tishan (H), 111 Tishan mountain, 111 | Tisung (H), 112, 115 To mountain (H), 113 Tomari gawa, 105 creek, material trans- ported by, 99 pumice tufa near, 102 Topaz, 118 Toshibetz river, 105 mouth of, 99 flats of the, 100 terrace deposit in val- ley of the, 106 gold-washings of Kun- nui on, 91 Totohoke, rocks of, 85 trachytic rocks of, 85 Touchstone, 118 Toumey, Prof., 128 Tourgen Gol, 29, 43 Trachydolerite, 39 Trachytic rocks of the plateau, 38 Trachytic rocks of Hoko- dade, 79 of Iwaounobori, 94 with veins of sul- phur on Iwaoun- obori, 95 with tubular struc- ture, 98 on Raiden moun- tain, 94 of Komangadake, 83 Trachytic porphyry, 42 of Kalgan, 23 of Kalgan, descrip- tion of, 37 dykes of, 38 gorge in, near Kal- gan, 33 on the Gobi, 74 tufa of, 23, 37 near Sutzu, 98 Trans-Baikal, N. E.,5.W. trend in mountains of, 1 Trees in valley of Kir Noor, 28 absence of on the table- land of Mongolia, 72 Trend, E. W. system of, in China, 2 N. E., 5. W. system of in Eastern Asia, 1, 2 N. S., apparently con- fined to Western China, 2 Triassic coal, 119 Triceratium, 127 tridactylites, Sphenopte- ris, 122 Trout in the Toshibetz, 93 Tsang mountain, 58, 115 Tsanghoh (H), 118 Tsangkia shan, 60 Tsangting (H), 112, 115 Tsau (H), 57 Tsau lake, 46 Tsauchitsing, 59 Tse mountain, 112 Tseh (C), 113 Tsehchau (F), 56, 110,116 Tsenngan (H), 58 Tsepe mountains, 57 Tsetse (Ts), 112 Tseuhong, 56 Tsianglo (H),112 Tsiehlui (Ts), 112 Tsienchau (FI), 112 Tsienkiang (H), 61 Tsienngan (H), 60,109, 113 Tsienshan (H), 58, 114 Tsietsz‘tang, 116 Tsilitutsz‘, 116 Tsin (C), 57, 110, 113 Tsinan (F), 46, 57, 110 increase of Tatsing river at, 49 Tsing (C), 61, 111 Tsingchau (F), 57, 60, 110, 113 Tsinghai, 50 Tsingloh (H), 56 Tsingloh (H), coal basin |. of, 63 Tsingnan (H), 110, 113 Tsingnien (H), 59 Tsingping (H), 114 Tsingshui (H), 113 141 Tsingtan built on conglo- merate terrace, 8 Tsingtsa, 112 Tsingtsing (H) ,111 Tsingyuen (H), 59 Tsinhien (H), 111 Tsinki (H), 58 Tsinngan (f1), 57 Tsinyuen (H), 113 Tsiuenchau (F), 58 coal in, 65 Tsiweitsz‘kung, 115 Tsoking mountain, 115 Tsu mountain, 60, 113 Tsuhiung (F), 59, 61, 116 Tsuhhiung (H), 61, 116 Tsuhtung (F), 112 Tsukintsing, 59 Tsungara, rocks on straits of, 104 straits of, 89 Tsungho (H), 112, 115 Tsungking (H),60 ~ Tsungku (H), 110 Tsungnan, 117 Tsungnan (C), 112 Tsungnan mountain, 113 Tsungni (H), 114 , Tsunhwa (C), 109 Tsuni (F), 61, 115,117 Tsunkiang river, 60 Tsutsesantung, 58 Tsutsu (Ts), 112 Tsuyutsung, 112 Tsz‘ (C), 56, 59, 109, 111 Tsz‘ mountain, 109, 110, 114 Tsz'‘ river, 65 Tsz‘hu mountain, 111 Tsz‘kiang (H), 115 Tsz‘nien mountain, 115 Tsz‘yang (H), 59 Tsz‘ye mountain, 115 tubzformis, Aulopora, 55 Tufa of Yurup mountains, 104 palagonite, on Yesso, 104, 105 of trachytic porphyry at Kalgan, 37 of greenstone porphyry, 22 of trachytic porphyry, fragments of syenite in, 35 red and brown at Fu- toro, 100 voleanic, of Yesso, 105 pumiceous, at Abura, 99 of trachytic porphyry, 23 Tufa-conglomerate, vol- canic, 105 of South Yesso, 89 on the Raiden mountain, 94, 98 between Yurupand Volcano bay, 103 at Cape Moteta, 99 near Yurup mines, 102 near Kumaishi, 102 at Futoro, 100 on the Ousubetz creek, 101 covered by lava- bed near Abura, 99 142 Tufa-conglomerate, at Setanai, 99 at Cape Shiraita, 99 at Shimakomaki, 98 at Achase, 98 near Odaszu, 93 west of Volcano bay, 90 near Totohoke, 85 at Isoya, 93 on Iwanai bay, 97 with spines of an Echinoderm near Washinoki, 90 relative age of the, 104 Tufa-sandstone at Abura, 99 Tula river, 74 Tung mountain, 114, 115 Tungchau (1), 56, 57, 60, 110, 117 Tungchuen (F), 57, 59, 61, 111, 112, 114, 116 Tungfung (H), 57, 110 Tungjin (1), 61, 111, 115 Tungkwei (H), 56 Tungkwei mountain, 114, 115 Tungliang (H), 111 Tungliu, red_ sandstone near, 8 Tunglu (H), 58 Tungnan (H), 112 Tungnien mountain, 58 Tungpu (Ts), 116 Tungsan, 118 Tungsan (H),110 Tungshan (4H), 114 Tungshi mountain, 116 Tungting lake, ancient bed of, 7 effect on, of changes in the fall of the Yangtse, 9 plain of the, 64 Tungting shan, 60 Tungtsz‘ (H), 61, 117 Tungwei (H), 57,118 Tungyueh (‘T), 118 Tungyuyen, 116 Tushikau gate of the Great Wall, 2, 63 Tutinza, 70 quarries near, of tufa and porphyry, 25 Tuyun (F), 115 Tymfanophora racemosa, 123 Ugundui mountain, 70 UVlandzabukdaban, clay, slate, and gueiss in, 72 Ulanhada, 33 Ulannoor, valley of, Ungyuen (H), 112 Upheaval of the Mongolian plateau, 44 of South Mongolia, 42 Yesso a point of inter- section of three lines of, 106 Unio in creeks of Yesso, Unstratified granitic rocks, 72 Ural mountains, 68, 77 Urga (Kuren), 72, 75 INDEX. Urtai, road from Kalgan to, 25 Urus, Bos, 77 Usu, volcano of, 83 Usuri river, 64 Valley of the Té Hai, 30 of the Yang Ho, 22 Valleys, longitudinal, eastern Asia, 1 on the plateau, 26 of southern Mongolia, 70 retrograde erosion of, in terrace deposit, 40 geoclinal, of northern hemisphere, 68 Vegetation near Iwanai, 94 “Vehicle of fluidity,” 87, 88 Vein-quartz near Shkabe, 84 in Veins of quartz east of Ha- kodade, 89 lead, at Yurup, 102 manner of occurrence of, at Ichinowatari, 105 Ventilation of coal mines by fan-blowers, 19 Vermiform fossil in argil- lite, 90, 102, 104 at Isoya, 93 in argillite at Kun- nui, 91 in argillite near Achase, 98 | Verneuillii, Spirifer, 55 Virginia, fossil plants of, 120 infusorial earths of, 125, 126, 127, 128 Vitim river, 76 Volcanic-ash beds of Yes- so, 106 Volcanic ashes at Isoya, 93 from Isoya under microscope, 127 infusoria in, from Isoya, 127 Volcanic cones visible from Iwaouno- bori, 96 abundant on Yesso, 106 Volcanic plateau,character of surface of, 26 region of southern Mon- golia, in prolonged axis of the Tienshan, 42 rocks of Mongolia, 42 of Chihli, 10 on the Gobi desert, scorie, 74 zone of southern Mon- golia, 42 tufa-conglomerate, 105 fossil in, 106 near I¢hinowatari, 82 breccia near Shkabe, 84 formation of the plateau of Mongolia, 26, 38, 70 around the Kir Noor, 28 around lake Baikal, 75 Volcano of Esan, 86, 105 of Iwaounobori, 94 ascent of, 94 of Komangadake, 82 ascent of, and vege- tation on, 82 Volcano bay in Yesso, 79, 83, 90, 104, 105 terrace deposits on, 106 view of, from Ko- mangadake, 83 Vriess, 85 Wacke, 31 near Kunnui, 91 Waitso (H), 56 Wan (H), 59, 60, 113 Wanchau (1), 57, 65, 115, 117 Wangkiang (H), 60 Wanglung cavern, 57 Wangmatsien mountain, 58 Wangpei (Ts), 115 Wangping (1), 56, 109 coal basin of, 10 Wanngan (H), 52 Wantsuen (H), 56 Wantsui (H), 58 Warm springs on the Oussubetz creek, 101 on the Raiden mountain, 94 at Yunogawa, 89 of Kakumi, 85 of Shkabe, 84 and cold, at Yurup, 103 Water communication, navigable between sources of Siang river and a tributary of the Siriver, Waterfalls on the coast of Yesso, 85 Washinoki, 91, 106 tufa-conglomerate near, 90 Watersheds, alluvial, 28 of the Upper Yangtse, Cambodia and Sal- ween rivers, 2 between the Té Hai and Hwang Ho, 43 Watershed, remarkable, in valley of Kwan- tung (pu), 32 in valley east of Té Hai, 31 between the Gobi basin and Arctic ocean, 74 between Japan sea and Volcano bay, 102 Water-willows on Yesso, 93 Western Hupeh, 68 Siberia, former sea of, 76 coast of Yesso, excur- sion to, 90 Wei river, 44, 46, 66 Weining (C), 111, 115 Wreitsang (H), 111 Weitsz‘ (H), 116 Weiyuen (H), 59, 111 Whetstone, 118 Whitbiensis, Pecopteris, 120, 122 White porphyry, blocks of* on Hsan, 86 quartziferous porphyry on the Raiden moun- tain, 94 White sea, 69 Whitney, Prof. J. D., 120, 126 Wild roses at Hakodade, 80 Williams, 8. W., 109 Winning of coal in Chinese mines, 20 Winter climate of Mon- golia, 70 Wood, silicified, 72 Woodward, Mr., 55 |, Wosatzube, silicious schist of, 104 black hornstone at, 85 warm spring in the sea at, 85 Woshimanbe, terrace near, 93. Wuchang (F), 111, 114 Wuchang (H), 111, 114 Wuchau (F), 58, 61, 118 Wuchuen (H), 115 Wuishan, clay-slate and granite in, 52 Wukang (C), 115 Wukang (H), 115 Wungan (H), 114 Wunghi (H), 113 Wuuning (H), 112 Wushan (H), 59, 111, 117 Wiushikia, 56 Wiutai shan, 63 Wutaiyau, 56 Wutih (Han dyn), changes of Yellow river in reign of, 132 B.C., 47 Wuting (C), 58, 59, 112, 116, 118 Wuting (H), 116 Wutsz‘ mountain, 118 Wutungtu mountain, 112 Y (C), 56 Ya (C), 60 Yablonoi mountains, 67 N.E., 5. W. trend of, 1 Yachau (F), 114 Yai (C), 116 Yaluh river, 64 Yamukshinai, mineral oil springs at, 90 Yang mountain, 116 Yangchi, limestone near town of, 7 Yangching (H), 56, 110, 113 Yang Ho, 42 valley of, 22 terrace deposits of the upper, 32 gorges of the, 44 recent lake in val- ley of, 45 Yanghochiao, 59 Yanghwa, 117 Yanghwashan, 60 Yangkiang (H), 112 Yangsantung, 58 Yangshan (U1), 112, 115 Yangtse, Kiang, 44, 45, 51, 66, 67, 121, 124 rapids of the, 5 Yanetse, N. E.,S. W. trend of middle course of, 1 flows alternately in longitudinal and transversal valleys, 3 from Hankau to the sea, 7 ridges crossing the, 65 formerly entered sea through three arms, 48 changes in the fall of, 9 recent terraces in val- ley of, 8 absence of eruptive rocks on, 62 Yangtsung (H), 112 Yao, great tiood in the reign of, 44 Yau (C), 59, 61 Yauking (F), 58 Yching (H), 56 Yedo Bay, 107 country around bay of, 107 Yehchintsung, 57 Yellow river, or Hwang Ho, 2, 43, 44 N.E., S. W. trend of upper, 1 explanation of maps of lower course of, 47 historical changes in the course of, 46 in the time of Yu, before 602 B. C., 47 in time of Ting Wang (Chow dyn.), 47 changes in, under Wentih, 160 B. C., 48 changes in, 11 B.C., 48 under the Tang and five suc- ceeding dynas- ties, 48 from A. D. 70 till 1040, 48 under Sung dy- nasty, A.D. 1048-1194, 48 under Kin dyn., 48 under Yuen and Ming dyn., 48 great divergence of lower arms of, during 3,000 years, 48 INDEX. Yellow river rises in Kwenlun moun- tains, 45 an object of con- stant terror, 48 recent shifting of mouth of, from Yellow sea to gulf of Pechele, 49 channel of the, be- tween Shansi and Shensi, 44 great floods referred to overflow of, 45 Chinese histories of, 47 Biot on changes in course of, 47 dykes of the, 47 subjugation of the, in early times, 47 great overflow of, to northeast, 47 great difficulty in controlling, 48 the bed of, higher than adjoining plains, 48 Barrow’s estimate of silt discharged by, 49 importance of, in time of war, 48 Yellow sea (or Hwang Hai), 44, 49 Yen mountain, 110 Yenchau (F), 58, 60, 110, 112, 113, 115, 117 limestone mountains near, 52 Yenching (H), 110 Yencht (H), 56 Yenchuen (H), 57 Yenking (C) the eastern limit of ancient lakes, 43 Yenngan (F), 57 Yenping (F), 112, 115 Yenshan mountain, 61 Yenshi mountain, 58 Yenting (H), 111 Yentsang (pu), 59 Yenyuen (H), 59, 60, 111, 114 Yentsin, 48 Yesso, Japanese island of, 79, 107, 108 geologicalitineraries in, 79 a point of intersection of three systems of elevation, 106 ammonites from, 106 analysis of coal from, 125 Yesso, coal at various points on, 106 infusoria in volcanic ashes from, 127 infusorial earth from, under microscope, 126 rock skeleton of south- ern, 105 submerged during de- position of volcanic conglomerate, 106 volcanic cones numer- ous on, 106 forests of, 79 population of, 79 rice and silk culture on, 80 roads in, 79 Yew, 123 Yih (H), 110, 113 Yih mountain, 113 Yihte (H), 57, 110 Yin mountain, 115 Ying (C), 60 Ying mountain, 114 Yingkiang (H), 117 Yingliang mountain, 113 Yingmachuen, — garnetic gneiss at, 36 Yingte (H), 61 Yingting (H), limestone and cavern near, 52 Yingwo mine, analyses of anthracite from, 19, 125 Yinkung, 116 mountain, 115 Yintau (C), 57 Yintie mountain, 58 Yinyen, 113 Yinyu, 113 Yochau (F), 61, 111, 115 Yohyang (H), 111 Yokohama, neighborhood of, 107 country south of, 108 diorite, gabbro, and serpentine near, 107 Yoyang (H), 56, 109, 114 Yu (C), 110, 113 Yu (H), 113 Yu (C), 56, 114 Yu drains the Empire, 45 Yellow river in time of, 47 Yuen river, 65, 66 Yuhwang mountain, 113 Yuhopu, 59 Yuenamensis, Rhyncho- nella, 55 Yuenchau (F), 61,115,117 Yuenchu (4H), 113 Yuenmau (H), 58, 118 Yuenmo (H), 59 Yuhlin (C), 116 Yuki (H), 112,115 143 Yukung, 47 Yukungchuchi, 47 Yulin (I), 56, 59 coal-basin of, 63 Yulin (C), 58 Yulin (H), 56, 59 Yung (H), 59, 61, 111, 112 Yungchang (F), 57, 58, 61, 66, 112, 116, 118 Yungchau (F), 58, 111,115 Yungchun (C), 112, 115 Yungking (H), 114 Yunglung (C), 59 Yungmen (H), 112, 116, 118 Yungngan (H), 116 Yungngan (C), 61 Yungning (C), 116 Yungpeh (T), 59, 61, 112, 116 Yungping (F), 46, 56, 60, 109, 113 Yungshun (F), 111, 117 Yungsui (T), 115, 117 Yungtsang (H), 60, 111 Yungtse, lake, 47 Yungyang (F), 114 Yungyang (H), 59, 111 Yunko mountain, 57 Yunkung shan, 57 Yunnan province, 58, 59, 61, 64, 112, 116, 118 hydrography of, 66 Yunnan (I), 112,116,118 Yunogawa, warm spring at, 89 Yunseh (H), 116 Yuntsung (T's), 116 Yunyang (F), 57 Yurup, 105 creek, 90 lead mines of, 102 amount and cost of lead production at, 103 village of, 104 Aino village near, 90 Yushan (H), 114 Yushan (H), 111 Yutse (H), 109 Yuyang (C), 60, 114 Yutsung (H), 109 Yuyau (H), 115 Zamia lanceolata, 121 Zamites lanceolatus, 121 Zeolite in amygdaloid of Shirarika, 90 Zincblende in copper vein at Saidoma, 89 in Kakumi veins, 85 in lead veins, 80 in Yurup veins, 102 Zircon-sand Kunnui gravel, 91 in PUBLISHED BY THE SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION, WASHINGTON CITY, AUGUST, 1866. Pree i" yaoi eae cel Pies te her Ret ACT ial Sree Cuapter II. Section along the Yangtse Kiang from the Pacific Coast to Pingshan (hien) in Western Sz‘chuen. The portion of the section lying between the coast and the coal-field of Kwei is based on the observations of the author; the remainder is deduced from the observations of Capt. Blacki- ston, and from the study of the mineral productions of the province of Sz‘chuen. The horizontal distances are taken from the Admiralty charts of the river between the coast and the Tungting lake ; thence to Pingshan (hien), from Blackiston’s chart of the Upper Yangtse. The vertical distances east of the Tungting lake are from the Admiralty surveys; west of the Tungting lake they are merely estimated. 19 August, 1866. (145 ) by: : 3 : Cian ae : r oe a ¢ . = eye 4 c eae ; , B, ae i) ’ vi > o t F Tar Ney et ‘ A) 4 ‘ AY ro f : See = i ; ’ . : et y “s A 4 ake ; = oW = Phe ‘ I { 7. 7 ~ t Ni i 1 Plate 1 FEES Coul Series” : Limestone Tamrestone ~ : amestone —~“Coul'Series imestoue Coal Series Limestone Coul Seri ~ Limestone Coal Series _ Lucan Gorge ee i Ss Granitic. coy ee LE __Zunting Zake eee C, 5. Sandstone = Ye ene Le : Hankaw Recent Terrace C. 8. Arg, Schist ©, S. Arg, Schist ©.S, Arg. Schist C.S, Arg, Sch. nSe Quartaite Fin 1 TaN i Wa SS C.S. Sandstone Rec. Terrace C. S. Sandstone Limestone Kiukiang Tungliu C, S. Sandstone? Limestone? Limestone? ¢.s. RS ieane Sandstone? 1X aa Pt. a Limestone? Limestone? C. 5, Sandstone naman? Nanking Chinkiang = (ire AE, IE C. S. Sandstone C.S, Sandstone = Eats of the Pacific Coast. LEX abo Sandstone Clay Schist Conglomerate Coal Series generally Limestone Se a Sy reeagey pew Bess) ber Aron ey) i SS ——— Recent Chinese Coal Measures Deyonian Metamorphic Granitic Pacific Coast to Pingshan in Sz‘chuen. Hoyiz. Scale 6.28 miles to 1 dee. inch, Heights 4500 feet to 1 dee. inch, i) Seibel 2 See Carrer IV. Route Map of the Yang Ho District. This map is intended to show roughly the geological and topographical features of a portion of the boundary between the Great Plateau of Central Asia and the mountains of China. The survey was made by the author from observations with a dioptric compass, the distances being measured by timing a horse whose gait was well known. The work was plotted in the field on a Mercator basis. The route followed in the mountains, immediately west of Peking, is not indicated ; on the rest of the map, from Changkiakau (Kalgan) westward, it is marked by the, generally zigzag, line running through most of the villages. Going westward from Changkiakau (Kalgan) by the northern, and returning by the southern route, the plotting overlapped at Changkiakau by five and a half miles, an excess which represents the final, uncompensated, error of the work. The positions of Siuenhwa, Tatung, and Tungching, are from the Jesuit astronomical observations ; that of Peking is from those of the Russian astronomers. The section lines of Plate 3 are represented on this map. (147) Plate 2 “Unowa(y "gLoz0sa Ty =a) —=ee [na Hesse oe] ESS Ee See] ‘systg oryduo wea yy ‘sounseayy Aaky dao neoqye] oy} jo ‘qsodaq aovaiay, aqueay ‘uo SOUT yeop ssouty9 aNAovay, ULSLyy SYOOY O1woO A. WOT OYv'T “ATITAIWAd TAVYHdVaY ONDIad 7 aN LOINLSIG OHDNVA ee =) l aH 40 a : dVW AULNOY Bunobunt He Li SS ( NVOIDIT We 8) Sre Cuapter IV. Geological Sections in Northern Chihli and Southern Mongolia. Siuenhwa to Daikha Noor. Nankau to Daikha Noor. The heights are merely estimated, excepting that of the edge of the plateau, near Hanoor, which is from the measurements of Messrs. Fuss and v. Bunge. Unfortunately the capital letters indicating breaks in the course of the section lines were omitted on the map, Plate 2. (149 ) Plate 3 Valley of the Tehai IKirnoor Kirnoor M Hoyurtolo Gol BSB! Taulichuen tf, LLL) i n \ i ( \ | | | ? he “ I ul I 5400 feet Borotseji f rin | Hanoor iil ill | | | t Kalgan | CHIN == = = ENG: HEH Va ee | z ie i E A ee Stiuenhwa aN See ae nS RERES PROS G: RY Siuenhwa to Daikha Noor. Dislocation | LANCIA Lower Plateau " ll Barrier Range ue Valley of Yang Ho RS) SSS = = — Kiming Mt. Papaw Mt. Nankau Nankau to Daikhanoor. =] |, WY ese) Loam of the Volcanic Rocks of the Trachytic Chinese Coal Devonian Metamorphic Ancient Lakes. Plateau. Pophyry. Measures. Limestone. Schists. Horiz, Scale 10.46 miles to 1 dec. inch, eights 5000 feet to 1 dee. inch, ee tet pee teat Granitic Granitic Rocks or Rocks, Metam, Schists. . Laity ash Pep eD ed iene aa = “ . i < . 5 u . ' PLATE 4, See CuHAprer V. Maps Representing the Historical Changes in the Course of the Yellow River, or Hwang Ho. Map I. Lower course of the Yellow river from the time of Yu down to B.C. 602. Also the Map II. Map III. Map IV. Map V. Map VI. ancient mouths of the Yangtse Kiang. Course after the first great change during the Chow dynasty (B. C. 602). Course during the third century, B. C. Course resulting from changes about 132 B.C. Second great change about 11 B.C. The channels as they existed during the Tang and five succeeding dynasties, from A. D. 70 to A. D. 1048. (151) lites G ul f Tientsin Or 7 xe coe ulf of Pechele ° Sea of Gulf Pechele Tientsin ° oy of Pechele Yellow % = ‘Kaifung c oe ee y i - ; mn yo 7 7 Pu m. ; i” “a} k . i We - ; iu i ri, ! 7 i . ry me ( cule . sa Dp \qy, he rs r . = - ‘ = 7 . a . - . uf 2 . ru Avge PLATE 5. SEE CHAPTER V. Maps Representing Historical Changes in the Course of the Yellow River, or Map VII. Map VIII. Map IX. 20 . Represents the last change, which occurred within the last ten or fifteen years. . Comprehensive map of the Yellow river, including the delta-plain and the ancient lake Hwang Ho.—Continued. The course under the Sung dynasty, A. D. 1048 to A. D. 1194. The course under the Kin dynasty. The course under the Yuen (Mongol), and, so far as the channel running due east from Kaifung is concerned, under the Ming and Tatsing (Manchu) dynasties down to the middle of the present century. ‘That portion of the Imperial canal lying north of the Yellow river is indicated, it being mainly in the channel excavated by the river during the Kin dynasty. system, and the supposed former channel of the river through the lakes to the Gulf of Pechele. August, 1866. 153 ) 118° a Gin Gulf of Pechele OUD E a M Hwang Hai or Yellow Sea Ancient Lake System Delta Plain of the of Northern China. before forming of ch Hwang Ho. A Shensi and Shansi TP pie We Ia b See Cuaprer VI. Hypothetical Map of the Geological Structure of China, based on Observations in the North and in the Basin of the Yangtse Kiang, and on a Study of the Mineral Productions of the Empire. The geographical basis of this map is taken from Arrowsmith’s map, published in Blackiston’s “Five Months on the Upper Yangtse.” I have altered the position of the Lower Yellow river on the map, to make it agree with its present course, (155 ) OZL SIL i 1 atydaounjoyy pur oyturwtgy [>] auosouLy “MOAR [7 Aad Od “H oyAyoury pur oyjeseg (GE sequsvoyy [vop esouryg [ Arsqdiog oy kor], aw Aavyway, 80g WUNLOAULS AHL oO dV-IN TVOILAHLOd AH PLATE 7. See Cuaprer VII. Map of the Sinian (N. E., 8. W.) System of Elevation in Eastern Asia. The broken line, A, B, indicates the great synclinal axis, and the dotted line, C, D, the main anticlinal axis. Section across the Table-Land of Central Asia, from the Plain of Peking to near Kiachta in Eastern Siberia. Ser Caaprer VIII. The heights in the northern and southern thirds of the profile are from the measurements of Messrs. Fuss and yv. Bunge; those of the central third, being off from their route, are merely approxi- mated. (157 ) “ucydiog onkyoray, “2 ‘seavy soyjo pur oyyeseg -y “ysodep oddayg 7 ‘somsvopy [vo “f ‘ouoysoMIT] UOAI ‘2 “IRI JO syooy orydiomezoyY ‘p “vyoSuoyy Jo syooy, orydiowejoy_ “9 "VUIND “N JO SISOS oydiomujoyy “9g ‘oyyutay “p = c ESPN & Lo yo BEY ‘ a s 2 3 Sie is QF 8 7 Ss FS s =s S\y > cS a Sy) S 2 2 2 8 38 a Ss xs a q SS = ) nas = z ry gq 7 3 a =| a § 3 = ~ = a o , & it = S| Ay By t ainan & BE. of Paris. 70 K. of Ferro, 90 hon tT) . Si as Hi ie Pi A as: See Cuarpter IX. Geological Route-Sketch. Southern Yesso. The geographical basis of this map is taken mainly from an unpublished Japanese survey of Yesso, in the Imperial Archives of the vice-royalty of Yesso. Profile of the West Coast. Section from the Japan Sea to Volcano Bay. (159) eae Plate 8 F § - Yuwaonobort Mg (Solfatara) P : Mt. Wakadaszu s : fe. pt Se (Large Cone ) j i Tex 7 fe 4 £ ‘ f e s en F E Setanai |S = 3 = 8 = S S iS = 8 “BALOLIVULOT, OF TOO “D Wo ysvog “AA Jo epyorg Ainuma GEOLOGICAL ROUTE-SKETCH, SouTHERN YESSO, JAPAN. Al. Alluvial and Beach. V.A. Volcanic Ashes. G. River Gravels, R.T. Recent Terraces. L. Lava. T.C. Zufa Conglomerate. P.T. Pumice Tufa. 33 Coal. Ar, Metamorphic Argillite. Q. Quartzite. Sl. Cg. Clay Slates and Conglomerate. C.G. Conglomerate ang Granulite A.P. Aphanitic Rock. Gr. Granitic and Syenite Series. Rae eel Go. En foe PLAY Eo: See Arpenprx No. 1. Fossil Plants from the Chinese Coal-bearing Rocks. EXPLANATION OF THE FIGURES. Sphenopteris orientalis “ “ Podozamites Emmonsii Pterozamites Sinensis . Taxites spatulatus Hymenophyllites tenellus Pecopteris Whitbiensis Podozamites lanceolatus August, 1866, PAGE, 122 122 121 120 123 122 122 121 Plate 9 \ \ AN AK AQ MW j Yj pr ) VOSSIL TLANTS FROM THE CHINESE COAL-LEARING ROCKS. es Tien es ah ‘) + SH ts ieee ae r ion Lae Gril, Ht Bene! es nae 3 a a sie a Nines Ls} A 3) chai bil ieee ll Sigg agi te SHOWING Rene DISCOVERIES TRACKS ann SURVEYS. - OF THE ‘ CEXPUORING BX DITTON OF 1860 AND 1861 e TT. TEANSE SM. COMMANDING NEWLY PROJECTED FROM REVISED MATERIALS DISCUSSED FOR THE SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION Assistant 1S Const Sunway =) WASHINGTON D.C ianuany 1805 Seale i200 000 ee 7) ee Tao ‘S a OS tarrisen Mae +" mycket ie a Y Vergy, a Se er S by cape Fon stititin \ oF eariune 32 15 span Mts rote sap duce eruterce yo Via cant) Ritter tay pe Lyon Bund BY Nv A. SCHOTT units Alene \s farthest May A We Kates Repo | | Sound Uscovered | De Hayes in May iio) L912) 1D } [Mount Carey H ; | . wud Wily “pr Haye 5 Prinstrittn Mesut ui : . niece ae al C j ; \. ) ( a Piivinws tury caspe Anblarst PPiriliy a | Herbert Ib North) Gael py Neo SMITHSONIAN CONTRIBUTIONS TO KNOWLEDGE. 196 Divs rexL OBSERVATIONS IN THE Noho wih Co Ss BoA Ss. ’ BY ISAAG I, HUMOS, We COMMANDING EXPEDITION. MADE ON THE WEST COAST OF NORTH GREENLAND, THE VICINITY OF SMITH STRAIT AND THE WEST SIDE OF KENNEDY CHANNEL, DURING 1860 AND 1861. REDUCED AND DISCUSSED AT THE EXPENSE OF THE SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION. BY CHARLES A. SCHOTT, MEMB. AM. PUIL. SOC. PHILADELPHIA; ASSISTANT U. S. COAST SURVEY. [AccEPTED FOR PUBLICATION, ruBRuUARY, 1865.| 1h ema Ie CONTENTS. { i PAGE a INTRODUCTION . j : ; ° : : : ‘ : oll 4 | Part I.—ASTRONOMICAL OBSERVATIONS. Introductory remarks 0 : 1 Note on reduction of astronomical absonreisions . 6 6 0 : ° 2 Geographical positions, record, and results. > 0 : : 5 3 Observations for latitude of Port Foulke, Smith Strait 5 6 ; : 0 9 Observations for longitude of Port Foulke, Smith Strait ‘ : : : : 10 Geographical positions, continued : i : : 3 ; 9 : 19 Survey of Smith Strait : 3 6 : : : : : : 23 Geographical positions, continued 0 6 : : : 26 Pendulum experiments, Harvard Observatory, Coninttlee, Mneeatchneetts : é : 29 Formule and method of reduction : : : : : . : ° 33 Observations for local time, Port Foulke : : : 0 : . c 37 Pendulum experiments, Port Foulke . ° é Q : 42 Bearing of pendulum experiments on the value of the ee Pomorension : 68 Illustrated by a large track chart, showing the region of Dr. Kane’s and Dr. Hlenyen? explorations, newly constructed from additional materials collected by Dr. Hayes in 1860 and 1861 _ . : 6 Title page Also illustrated by a smaller chart of the ientiy of Port Foulke, So surveys by Dr. Hayes . . : : : . : 4 : : 70 Part II.— MAGNETIC OBSERVATIONS. Introductory remarks . 0 : : 6 : 0 9 13 Differential declination observations oh Port Foulke : : : : . 3 74 Diurnal variation of declination : : ¢ ¢ 0 0 ° 0 79 Determination of magnetic declinations ‘ : 6 0 6 . : 83 Determination of magnetic intensities . : : 0 0 : 3 : 92 Determination of magnetic inclination . : : 9 ¢ : i 5. Oy Remarks on the aurora borealis : 5, AN® Illustrated with a diagram of the supa setavom anil a elant showing an § iso-mag- netic lines for the vicinity of Smith Strait 3 0 ‘ 5 5 Ile Part III.—TIDAL OBSERVATIONS. General account of observations and description of gauge 115 Record of observations 116 Determination of the mean level of the sea 132 Gay, iv TABLE OF CONTENTS. PAGE Variation in the mean level depending on the moon’s declination : : 6 5 Be) Effect of changes of atmospheric pressure on the tidal level . : : i . 140 Effect of the wind upon the mean level of the sea : : 5 d 5 uel General table of observed times and heights of high and low ntenS 6 : 6 . 148 Half-monthly inequality in time and height. ; c : . 146 Effect of changes of the lunar parallax on the half-monthly eenuanite : 5 Aly Effect of changes of the moon’s declination on the half-monthly inequality . : . 154 investigation of the diurnal inequality in height and time. ; . 0 a Ally) Separation of the diurnal and semi-diurnal waves : : 6 0 . 159 Investigation of the form of the tide waves . : : . 0 9 5) Gi Progress of the tide through Baffin Bay : 0 : . - 162 Average depth of Davis Strait, Baffin Bay, and Sith Seth 6 : - 1638 Tilustrated with six wood-cuts and three plates 3 ‘ s : 3 164 Part IV.—METHOROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS. General remarks : é : 5 : ; : » : 5 ley Temperature, at Port Foulke (Illustrations 1, 2, 3). Comparison of thermometers and record of aoe temperature . : 6 6s Daily mean temperature : : ; 0 d ¢ go digi Annual fluctuation of the temperature of the air a 3 5 0 3 a2) AK Diurnal fluctuation of the temperature of the air ; : : ; . 182 Supposed dependence of the winter temperature on the lunar heer; ‘ c . 186 Relation of the atmospheric temperature to the direction of the wind é ; eeliS6 Effect of a fall of snow (or rain) on the temperature . : : 9 CG . 188 Effect of clear and cloudy weather on the temperature : . 0 é 6 Le Observations of the direct heating power of the sun a) LO Observations of temperature made by Dr. Hayes on his rontien Serna : : gi EN Atmospheric Pressure, at Port Foulke (illustrations 4, 5, 6, 7). Record of barometric observations —. A : é 6 é : we LOA: Diurnal fluctuation of the atmospheric pressure ; 5 : : : . 216 Annual fluctuation of the atmospheric pressure ; : : 6 ; a BAIS} Mean atmospheric pressure at the sea level. 5 : : 6 5 a. Mile) Monthly and annual extremes of pressure ; : 0 . 5 PALS) Relation of the atmospheric pressure to the direction gf the “hia : ¢ ; 5 Pails) Barometric oscillations during storms . , 5 4 : ¢ 0 - 220 Note on atmospheric moisture . 5 221 Wind, at Port Foulke. Record of wind, direction and force . : : ¢ 5 ‘ 5) BIB} Method of reduction and resulting directions . 3 3 ; 7 és G1) PD) Relative frequency of each wind and of calms é : : 6 : 6) 3, SBE Average velocity of wind : : : : : : 6 9 5) Bate) Occurrence and duration of storms. 0 : : : : 9 = | 239 APPENDIX, containing a record of the weather and miscellaneous notes ° ° » 241 LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS. PLATES. PAGE 1.—Chart, showing the discoveries, tracks, and surveys of the Arctic Exploring Expedition of 1860 and 1861: I. I. Hayes, M.D., commanding. Newly projected from revised materials, for the Smithsonian Institution, by Charles A. Schott. Scale 1 : 1,200,000 Title page 2.—Chart, showing the vicinity of Port Foulke, the winter-quarters in 1860 and 1861 of the Arctic Exploring Expedition of Dr. I. I. Hayes. Reduced and projected from the original chart for the Smithsonian Institution, by Charles A. Schott. Scale 1 : 170,000 70 3.—Chart of Iso-magnetic lines in the vicinity of Smith’s Strait. Constructed for the Smith- sonian Institution March, 1865 112 4.—I. First series of tides at Port Foulke, November and December, 1860; and second series of tides at Port Foulke, June and July, 1861 164 5.—II. Second series of tides at Port Foulke, June and July, 1861 (continued) 164 6.—III. Port Foulke tides. Separation of the diurnal and semi-diurnal waves, November and December, 1860 164 WOOD-CUTS Pendulum used in experiments 29 Diurnal variation of magnetic declination in enter at Port Foulke 81 Tide gauge used at Port Foulke 115 Diagram showing form of tide wave (marked A) 132 Half-monthly inequality in time of tides at Port Foulke (reeked B) . 149 Half-monthly inequality in height of tides (marked C) 151 Composition of waves (marked D), November 30 and December 8 160 Cotidal chart of the West Greenland seas (marked E) 163 Annual fluctuation of the temperature of the air at Port Foulke 181 Annual inequality in the diurnal amplitude of the temperature at Port Foulke 185 Diurnal fluctuation of the temperature; mean annual value 185 Diurnal fluctuation of the atmospheric pressure ‘ ; é 217 Oscillation of the barometric column during storms. November 9, 10, 1860 . 220 sf ‘i i Reise February 10, 1861 220 a3 xe 06 a April 17, 1861 221 Gye) JEN Nis OO WG 1 We Tue observations of which the record and results are given in the following pages were made during the expedition to the Arctic regions in 1860-61, under the com- mand of Dr. Isaac I. Hayes. The principal objects of this expedition were to extend the exploration of Dr. Kane towards the north, and to make such observa- tions of a scientific character as might tend to increase the existing knowledge of the Physical Geography, Meteorology, and Natural History of the region within the Arctic circle including the coasts and islands on either side of Smith’s Straits. The inception, organization, and equipment of the expedition were due to the energy and perseverance of Dr. Hayes, who succeeded in awaking a popular interest in the enterprise, and in obtaining the aid of scientific institutions and liberal indi- viduals in carrying out his design. The larger part of the outfit was from voluntary contributions. The instruments were principally supplied by the Coast Survey, the Smithsonian Institution, and the Hydrographical Bureau of the Navy Department. The articles for collecting and preserving specimens of natural history were fur- nished by the Smithsonian Institution, the Academy of Natural Sciences of Phila- delphia, and the Museum of Comparative Zoology at Cambridge, Mass. The original plan contemplated the employment of a small steamer and a schooner, but the means obtained were only sufficient to fit out a sailing vessel of 133 tons burthen, drawing eight feet of water. The party consisted of fifteen persons, ex- clusive of the commander, besides those engaged after the expedition arrived in Greenland. The astronomical, magnetical, and meteorological observations were principally under the direction of Mr. Augustus Sonntag, a native of Northern Germany, who had made himself favorably known by his scientific publications. He had accompanied Dr. Kane’s expedition as astronomer and physicist, and, after his return, had made a magnetic and geographical survey in Mexico. He resigned the position of assistant in the Albany Observatory to join the expedition under Dr. Hayes, from which he was destined never to return. The expedition left Boston harbor on the 9th of July, 1860, and, after sailing through a dense fog which continued seven days, or until after passing Cape Race, met with favorable winds which enabled it on the 30th of July to cross the Arctic circle. ‘The first iceberg was seen July 23d, 8 P. M. Land was made on the 31st, and proved to be Disco Island. August 5th, at midnight, the explorers reached the Danish settlement Proven, on the western coast of Greenland. Disappointed in obtaining dogs, they put to sea again on the morning of August 12th, and on the same day were at Upernavik, the residence of the chief Danish trader. Here they ( vu ) vill INTRODUCTION. were detained four days in collecting dogs and procuring suitable garments of skins and furs to withstand the Arctic winter. Through the kindness of Mr. Hansteen, the governor, they obtained the services of three Esquimaux hunters, and also of a Dane as interpreter. Leaving Upernavik, they were beset by an immense number of icebergs, some of them upwards of two hundred feet in height and a mile in length, the motion of which was principally due to the undercurrents, and therefore sometimes contrary to that of the wind. On the evening of August 21st they arrived at Tessuissak, also a Danish station, of which the geographical position was determined by Mr. Sonntag, where they obtained another supply of dogs. From this place, they entered Melville Bay on the 23d of August. The wind had prevailed for several days from the eastward, and had apparently driven the ice towards the American side, opening before them a clear broad expanse of water. They did not meet with field ice until the 25th; through this they were so fortunate as to find an opening, and soon entered the northern water about twenty miles south of Cape Alexander, the jutting point on the Greenland side of Smith’s Straits. This strait was entered on the 27th of August, but their efforts to find a navigable opening were interrupted by a heavy gale, which continued with great force for three days. It was not until after having been twice blown out that they effected a permanent lodgment in the straits on the second of September. Failing to find an opening toward the west, they sought one higher up, near Cape Hatherton; but, when off Lyttleton Island, the schooner became so much damaged by collisions with the ice, that they were obliged to seek anchorage. They put to sea again on the 6th, but, failing to make headway, and the tempera- ture having fallen to 12°, they were obliged to seek winter-quarters, which they found in Hartstene Bay, ten miles northeast of Cape Alexander. ‘This was in a harbor to which the name of Port Foulke was given, in honor of one of the promi- nent patrons of the expedition. From subsequent observations this place was found to be in 78° 17 39” north latitude, and longitude 73° 00’ 00” west of Greenwich, twenty miles south of the latitude of Rensselaer Harbor, Dr. Kane’s winter-quarters, and distant from it by the coast line about fifty-five st. miles. In preparation for the winter, a house was built on shore to receive the stores, and the hold of the vessel was converted into a single room for the men. The deck was roofed over with boards brought from Boston for the purpose, and with these accommodations the ship’s company lived in health and comfort during the winter. Game was found in abundance, the hunters rarely returning empty-handed. Reindeer in herds of ten and fifteen were frequently seen. The dogs, thirty in number, according to Esquimaux custom, were only fed every second day, and often devoured an entire reindeer at a single meal. Soon after entering into winter-quarters an observatory was erected near the vessel, under the direction of Mr. Sonntag. It consisted of a wooden frame eight feet square and seven feet high, covered first with canvas, then with snow, and lined throughout with bear and deer skins. In this observatory the pendulum apparatus was vibrated for nearly a month; and on completing the series of observations with it, the magnetometer was substituted in its place. Near the observatory a INTRODUCTION. 1x suitable shelter was also erected for the thermometers. These, which were mostly filled with spirits of wine, were in part a present from Mr. Tagliabue, of New York They were observed, with the other instruments, each hour during the whole twenty-four every seventh day, and three times a day in the interval. In addition to these observations, the temperature was noted every second hour by a thermo- meter suspended from a pole on the ice. In the autumn, Dr. Hayes, in connection with Mr. Sonntag, made a survey of a glacier which had been named by Dr. Kane “My Brother John’s Glacier,” and which is in a valley near the head of the bay in which the vessel was wintered. It was nearly two miles from the sea, which it is gradually approaching; and in order to determine its rate of progress, a base line was measured along its axis, from either end of which angles were taken to fixed objects on the mountain on each side. These measurements were repeated after an interval of eight months, and the result indicated a downward movement of ninety-four feet. The sun was absent one hundred and thirty days, and during that long period of darkness the whole party enjoyed remarkably good health. This was in a great measure due to habits of regularity as to exercise and cleanliness enjoined on every member of the expedition, as well as to the abundant supply of fresh food. With the advance of winter, however, there came a serious misfortune, which almost paralyzed further effort; a disease which for several years had prevailed throughout Greenland broke out among the dogs, and before the middle of December the number of the pack was reduced to eleven. As the plan of extending the explora- tion was based on the use of these animals, it was absolutely necessary, at whatever cost of labor or expense of means, to obtain another supply, and for this purpose Mr. Sonntag volunteered to venture on a journey across the ice to a settlement of Esquimaux on the other side of Whale Sound. He started on this perilous enter- prise on the 22d of December, accompanied by a young Esquimaux, and furnished with a sled drawn by nine dogs. In attempting to cross a wide crack in the ice which had but lately been frozen over, he fell in, was thoroughly wetted, and, before he could reach a place of shelter, was so chilled as to become insensible, and he died soon after. This event, which cast a profound gloom over the whole party, was a great loss to science. Mr. Sonntag had received a thorough mathematical educa- tion, was well trained in the use of instruments of precision, and, had his life been spared, would have extended the series of observations, and would have thus added to the value of the materials obtained. Fortunately he had completed the pendulum experiments, the principal astronomical determinations, commenced the magnetic and meteorological observations, and trained the assistants in the use of instru- ments. After his death, the observations were continued, under the immediate direction of the commander, by Mr. Radcliff, assisted by Mr. Starr and Mr. Knorr. Having, in the spring, obtained from a band of Esquimaux which visited the vessel a new supply of dogs, some of which also died, leaving but two teams of seven each, a journey was made to establish a depot of provisions at the north, for use during the contemplated explorations in the opening of summer. Upon this occa- sion, Van Rensselaer Harbor, the winter-quarters of Dr. Kane, was visited, but no Xx INTRODUCTION. vestige of the vessel which he had left there was seen. It had probably drifted out to sea with the ice, and subsequently been crushed and sunk. The principal expedition from the vessel, which at first consisted of all the avail- able members of the company, started on the fourth of April. It was furnished with a life-boat twenty feet long on runners, two teams of dogs, and provisions for seven persons for five months, and an additional supply for six persons and one team for six weeks. The intention was to cross directly over the ice of Smith’s Straits to the western shore, and thence to continue the exploration northward as far as circumstances would permit; but this plan was frustrated by the condition of the ice and open water, which compelled them to travel along the eastern shore. The ice in the strait did not, however, improve as they advanced, but was crowded into ridges and hummocks more extensive than had ever before been seen; and finally, after three weeks’ trial, it was found impracticable to transport the boat, prepared expressly for exploration in the polar water, across the straits, and Dr. Hayes was reluctantly obliged to send it back with most of the party, reserving for the further exploration three picked companions, two sleds, and fourteen dogs. With this reduction of force, the perilous journey was continued; but the hum- mocks became worse, and although the distance was only about forty miles in a direct line from the western coast, fourteen days were consumed in the journey. The route they pursued was nearly the same as that followed m 1854 by Dr. Hayes under the direction of Dr. Kane, and an opportunity was thus afforded to make some important additions and corrections to the sketch of the shore line which had formerly been given. It was found that a channel or sound opening _ westward from Smith’s Straits, separated Ellesmere Land from Grinnell Land, and that in the mouth of this sound are two large islands, to one of which the name of Bache, and to the other that of Henry was given. On the 12th of May Kennedy Channel was entered and the coast followed as it trends nearly due north to Ritter Bay. This point was reached on the 16th, when two of the party became exhausted by fatigue, and the exploration was continued for three days longer by Dr. Hayes and his assistant, Mr. George F. Knorr, and reached, May 18th, the latitude 81° 37’, about forty-one nautical miles beyond the limit of exploration under Dr. Kane and on the opposite side of the channel. To the highest point actually attained the name of Cape Lieber was given, and that of Church to a remarkable peak in the vicinity. On the north of Cape Lieber there opened a large bay, to which the name of Lady Franklin had been assigned by Kane; also on the north were seen a head- land called Cape Beechey, and beyond another high point which was named, in honor of His Majesty the King of Denmark, Cape Frederick VII., and still farther in the distance a third projecting point was observed, which was designated Cape Union. Returning upon the same track, the expedition reached the vessel after an absence of fifty-nine days, only seven dogs being alive, rendering further exploration in this way impracticable. 'The remainder of the time until the vessel was released from the ice was devoted to such surveys as could be made in the vicinity of Port Foulke, and the continuance of the observations of physical phenomena. They were joined by a tribe of Esquimaux inhabiting the coast between Smith’s INTRODUCTION. x1 Strait and Cape York, numbering in all about eighty souls, who built snow-houses in the vicinity of the vessel, and maintained themselves by hunting the walrus and seal. They sailed from the winter harbor on the 14th of July, and after much difficulty reached the west coast ten miles below Cape Isabella, and from an elevation of about six hundred feet Dr. Hayes obtained a view to the northward. In that direction the ice was everywhere unbroken, and as it did not appear probable that he could obtain for the schooner another harbor farther north, and as only five dogs remained without means of obtaining a new supply, he was reluctantly obliged to abandon the field, and direct his course homeward, trusting to be able at an early day to renew the exploration with a small steamer and under other more favorable conditions. Entering Whale Sound, an excellent opportunity was presented for delineating the shore-line of that inlet; through a clear atmosphere the land from the north around to the south could be traced, thus proving the inlet to be a deep gulf which, in honor of the discoverer, was named the Gulf of Inglefield. Leaving Whale Sound and proceeding southerly, the survey was complete of north Baffin’s Bay from Cape Alexander to Granville Bay. After laboriously working the way through “pack ice” for one hundred and fifty miles they entered the southern waters, and reached Upernavik on the 14th of August, and Disco Island on the 31st of August, being at both places kindly and hospitably received by the Danish officials. At Godhaven they were informed by Inspector Olrik that he had received orders from his government to afford such aid to the expedition as was in his power, thus exhibiting that characteristic generosity and intelligent appreciation of science which marked its action towards all previous expeditions of a similar character. Leaving Greenland they arrived in Boston, after a stormy passage, on the 23d of October, having been absent 15 months and 13 days. During the whole cruise effort was constantly made to obtain specimens of geology and natural history, and though the party was small, valuable collections were obtained, embracing dredgings, plants, birds, and a large number of skulls of Esquimaux. On the return of the expedition the records of the observations, excepting those relating to natural history, were given in charge to the Institution for reduction, discussion, and subsequent publication. ‘They were placed in the hands of Mr. Chas. A. Schott, of the U. §. Coast Survey, and have been prepared by him for the press at the expense of the Smithsonian fund. The foregoing sketch has been taken principally from the report of the lectures given by Dr. Hayes before the Institution in 1861. He has since, however, pub- lished a narrative in full, from which a minute account can be obtained of all the events of the expedition. JOSEPH HENRY, Secretary S. I. SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION. B June, 1867. PAR Eel: ASTRONOMICAL OBSERVATIONS. - S! ne s elon ‘ ’ ™ me a) Ae ois ‘ i 1 Ca b ‘Wie v f < 2 ah / » . . Ps ste RECORD AND RESULTS OF ASTRONOMICAL AND GEODETIC OBSERVATIONS. General Remarks.—The Arctic explorations made under the direction of Dr. Isaac I. Hayes, principally comprise the west coast of Smith Strait and Kennedy Channel, the existence of which had previously become known through the expe- dition under Dr. Kane, in the years 1853, °54, ’55. The scientific materials obtained by the expedition and referred to me for reduc- tion and discussion by Professor Henry, Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution, are presented under the general heads of astronomical, magnetic, tidal, and meteorological observations. The observations, especially the meteorological, are discussed on the same general plan as that adopted in the discussion of those of the expedition under Dr. E. K. Kane,’ and also that under Sir J. L. McClintock,” as published by the ‘Smithsonian Institution. The results, therefore, admit of the strict comparisons which have been made whenever practicable, and which give an additional interest and value to the series of publications of which this forms a part. The present division under the title of Astronomical and Geodetic Observations, contains the determination of geographical positions, the results of surveys, and the pendulum experiments for relative force of gravity. Connected with this part is a large chart embracing the region of the exploration under Dr. Kane and that under Dr. Hayes, constructed from the additional materials collected by the latter, and also a smaller chart of the vicinity of Port Foulke, from original surveys. The greater and more valuable portion of the observations was made by Mr. August Sonntag, astronomer and physicist to the expedition, and second in com- mand. Sy his early death the expedition sustained a great loss, and we have espe- 1 Smithsonian Contributions to Knowledge: Magnetical, Meteorological, Astronomical, and Tidal Observations in the Arctic Seas, by Elisha Kent Kane, M. D., U.S.N., made during the second Grinnell expedition in 1853, 1854, and 1855; reduced and discussed by Charles A. Schott. Four parts, separately published in 1858, 1859, and 1860. 2 Smithsonian Contributions to Knowledge: Meteorological Observations in the Arctic Seas, by Sir Francis L. McClintock, R. N., made in Baffin’s Bay and Prince Regent’s Inlet, in 1857, 1858, and 1859; reduced and discussed by Charles A. Schott. May, 1862. 1 April, 1865. 2 t RECORD AND RESULTS OF cially to regret the scanty material for the determination of the longitude of Port Foulke. It was also his intention to have the pendulum experiments repeated during the following warm season. i The expedition was supplied with the necessary instruments; among these may be mentioned a prismatic reflecting circle, a Wirdemann sextant, a vertical circle, and theodolite, all contributed by Prof. A. D. Bache; there were also three mean time (box) chronometers, one of these (No. 2007) an eight day chronometer. One ° of the chronometers was purchased from Willard, one hired from Bond, and one was lent free of cost by the brothers Negus; besides these Dr. Hayes purchased a pocket chronometer from Bond & Son; the pendulum was made by the same firm. Reduction of the Observations.—The astronomical data required in the reduction were taken from the “ American Ephemeris and Nautical Almanac.” All mere logarithmic work will be suppressed, but such intermediate results will be given which assist in forming a proper estimate of the value of the observations and of their treatment. Separate results are in all cases preferred, unless the increased labor of computa- tion counterbalances the advantage of comparability of individual results. They permit the recognition and consequent rejection of any defective observation in the series, and at the same time furnish the means of estimating or computing the pro- bable uncertainty to which the final result may be subject. This, however, does not exclude the combination of a few readings to a mean reading or the arrangement of individual observations into groups, provided the interval of time is sufficiently short for second differences to have any appreciable effect. We may thus combine, in a measure, the advantages of the two methods. The refractions have been computed from the tables in Captain Lee’s ‘“ Collection of tables and formule, etc.” They are Ivory’s, and were considerably extended so as to meet the requirements of an arctic climate. I have preferred them to Bessel’s, principally on account of their greater facility of application; they give a slightly higher value for very small altitudes. Temperatures are recorded on Fahrenheit’s scale, and the readings of the barome- ter are noted in inches and fractions of inches. Mr. Sonntag had made preliminary computations of his observations which greatly facilitated the present reduction. It is to be understood that the observa- tions were made by him, unless otherwise stated. ASTRONOMICAL AND GEODETIC OBSERVATIONS. 3 GEOGRAPHICAL POSITIONS. Proven, North GREENLAND, STATION. NEAR THE GOVERNOR’s HousE. Observations for time, August 6th (A. M. 7th), 1860. Double altitudes of the sun with Wiirdemann’s sextant. Indext {=22" 5” : a 35 Correction —15’ Pocket chronometer 2 ) Pocket chronometer 2 1) 8 06™ 108 57° 18’ 00” 8? 09™ 568 56° 41’ 35” 06 54 23 10 10 27 44 20 07 36 28 20 ih ly 50 20 2© 20 8 08 19 56 30 20 Sit by 57 57 10 -08 55 34 15 12 23 58 01 00 09 21 37 05 a 09 06 00 Temp. + 48° F., pressure 29™.80 at + 62 F. Index all aie Correction —27’’.5 Let @ = latitude ) : = oe. then cos tan SR —sin @ sin 8 = declination cos @ cos 8 ¢ —hour angle Approximate latitude 72° 23’, approximate longitude 3" 42™ west of Greenwich. The first column of the following table contains the mean chronometer time 7, the second the altitude corrected for index error, refraction, parallax (in altitude), and semi-diameter. ‘The refraction was computed for the first and last, and interpolated for the middle times. The third column contains the hour angle computed by the above expression; converting ¢ into time and applying the equation of time, the Kae chronometer correction AT was found as given in the last column. sign { gaining indicates chronometer \ on on local time; | ay indicates © rate. For the \ losing first and last set > ==—1’ 45’’.9 7 =1' 44'.7 m=+7’'.5 and §= + 16° 18’ 8” for the middle. T n aT SPCR O33 28° 23’ 56/7 —44° 15’ 13” +1" 01™ 338 S 8. Bly 28 30 55 —43 44 43 36 8 P10) 9 33:3 28 36 41 —43 19 18 36 8 Te Bey 28 43 05 —42 50 52 34 Mean, +1 01 34.7 * To the reading of the are I shall give the sign +, to that on the are the sign —, in order to obtain at once the index correction. In the record the observer always notes the index error and the correction has therefore the opposite sign; in this paper the sign was at once changed. This note applies to the sextant as well as to the reflecting circle. Double altitudes of the sun with reflecting circle. RECORD AND RESULTS OF we v/ vy / aA Index an ae es i ; , correction +52’’.5 Pocket chronometer. 20 Pocket chronometer. 2 {0} sk 20" 518 58° 55! $20” gi 95" 038 58° 197 { 80” 30 50 60 40 8 21 48 59 Ol 180 8 95 40 58 23 1b 20 26 08 40 40 8 93 18 58 toi a 8 27 42 59 39 450 8 24 09 A iy ee 8 98 18 Bao 100 10 40 +39" 30% 9 230) 40" See ie Index 439 40 30 99 >» Correction + 62/75 For the first and last set r——1' 42’’.8 T,—=—l’ 41/1 m=+7''.5 and 5 =+16° 17! 59” for the middle. FE h t aT S28 91™ 198.5 HY OE Oyayee —40° 3h" 33/7 +15 Q01™ 378 8 23 43.5 29 20 20 —40 00 48 40 8 25 21-5 BG) DIB). B38} —39 36 12 40 8 28 00 29 338 41 —38 57 29 37 Mean, +1 01 38.5 Observations for time, August 7th. Double altitudes of the sun with reflecting circle and sextant. Index correction +1’ 9’’ Reflecting circle. Pocket chronometer. 20 Pocket chronometer, 20 Qh 41m 593 51° oa! § 40” gh 46m 938 51° gg { 40" a 40 a 20 (30 00 2 42 47 50 BY D 2 47 26 51 93 190 26 20 40 10 2 44 17 51 48 {5 2 48 24 50 13 {5} 20 20 2 45 17 Bll a 136 2 49 09 50 07 Nee , a Index ey A ‘ correction 20’/ Sextant. Pocket chronometer. 20 Pocket chronometer. i 2© oh 56m 2418 50° 09’ 407’ Qh 58m 598 ] 48° 48’ 05/7 57 18 05 00 J 59 40 | 42 00 57 50 00 40 3 00 O09 a 40) T=+51° B— 29.8 at 60° Index {+39 5 {correction —92/’.5 7 ——2! 01” 7,—=—2' 07" n,—=+8'’ = + 16° 13’ 31’’ and + 16° 13/ 18’ for first and last set. ay h t AT OBA OME OSA 95° 45/ 03'’ 54° 38’ 417 +12 01™ 378 2 44 47 Ps). Ys). D5} OMe Om Or 38 2 46 54.5 25 26 49 ys) dle BY 40 2 48 46.5 295 19 34 56 14 31 36 DA BYf UGS} 24 44 38 58 23 43 43 Ode BY). BBB 24 34 59 58 58 43 46 Mean, +1 01 40.0 ASTRONOMICAL AND GEODETIC OBSERVATIONS. 5 Observations for time, August 7th (A. M. 8th). Double altitudes of the sun with reflecting circle. +32’ 30'' —30! 0’ Index on 7 ey ig 42 correction +1’ 22’'.5 Pocket chronometer. 20 Pocket chronometer. 20 20" 20/7 bh g ° / h m 3 fo) / gh 21™ 05 pre a1 {20 gi 26 43 59° OL eo 30 (20 8 22 16 BT 30 ab B a7 89 | 59 06 47 20 20 00 10 8 23 35 a a oe 8 28 36 58 10 han 60 50 8 2 14 58 51 30 8 29 15 58 13 40 a © B— goin ° (+32’ 30/7 —30/ 30’ : RaleH T— + 50°, B= 29.80 at 63 Index 1 4 A correction +1’ 5 hence: 7 =—1’ 45/73) 7, =—1! 43.6 2,=+17'.4 and 6=+16° 00’ 53” for the middle. Le h t aT 82 21™ 408.5 98° 57! 46/7 —40° 28’ 40/7 +12 01™ 448 8 24 24.5 29 06 22 —39 48 OF 42, 8 Qt 11 29 15 II — 30) MG ey - 41 8 28 55.5 99 20 47 —38 39 46 44 Mean, +1 O1 42.7 Double altitudes of the sun with reflecting circle. Aug. 8th. or ” __20/ ” Index (age mi Ze oa t , correction +57'’.5 Pocket chronometer. 2© Pocket chronometer. 20 gh 19" 008 530 96 a0. gh g9m 998 54° 04 7m 40 50 9 19 49 53 20 eo 2 23 09 53 58 60 260 2 (20 20 2 20 43 Bb Ge 2 24 02 52 49 a 40 40 2 21 33 54 10 130 2 24 36 52 4d +60 T = -+-52°, B=29'.80 at 62° 432 30 —30 10 {? correction +1’ 07'’.5 hence: r=—1’ 54''.3) 7, =—1’ 55''.8 2, =+7'’.6 and 5=+15° 56’ 388” for the middle. r 40M , Tides / +32’ 40/7 —30’ 30/ Gt! h t aT BS IO G5 26° 56’ 24/7 +48° 55’ 03/7 +12 01 338 2 21 08 26 49 54 +49 21 09 34 2 22. 45.5 26 48 51 +49 45 34 34 2 24 19 26 388 02 +50 08 40 33 Mean, +1 O1 383.5 RECAPITULATION OF CORRECTION OF PocKET CHRONOMETER ON PROVEN TIME. AT August Tth, 9 A. M. ol IRS. BYES tn, © AVS ANE 38.5 a Tth, 4 P. M. 40.0 8th, 9 A: M. 42.7 Co Bib, BP, WE 33.5 Mean, +1 O01 387.9 6 RECORD AND RESULTS OF Observations for latitude, August 7th. Reflecting circle. Circummeridian altitudes of the sun. 9r DD sy ” Index { $35 a S a t, correction +1’ 07/7.5 Pocket chronometer. 20 Pocket chronometer. 20 aA 10" 50™ 078 68° 15/ os 11* 02" 558 61? 11! 1a 20 00 10 51 32 68.17 49 11 04 20 or ae 2@ 20 10 54 02 67 14 Bb 1) 205" 62 68 19 180 10 55 10 67 15 180 11 07 08 68 19 185 99/ iad 2n/ I} T= +54°, B =29.80 at 60° Index ice eo) ame nee , correction +50/’ +32 20 —80 40 Intermediate set of observations with W.’s sextant. / AA 990/ aA Index ei Be rues ee t Correction —27//.5 Pocket chronometer. 2 © Pocket chronometer. 20 102 56™ 578 67° 16’ 20/7 11? 09" 3818 68° 19’ 10” Di HB 17 10 10 36 18 20 58 47 17 0 ll 290 18 20 20 : 20 HO” By ahy | (Xs) 1) a) JOR 312} Be | 67 14 50 ll 00 52 19 20 13 42 14 15 OLA 20 15 14° Qt 14 10 We have, according to Gauss’ method of reduction (Chauvenet’s Spherical and Practical Astronomy, Vol. I, p. 244), with the assumed longitude 3".703 west of Greenwich :— 6 = sun’s declination at apparent noon. 6 6 —— ft LOS MORO ones oS & cc mean w 3 : 5 ==-E16 16 092 Ad = hourly increase of declination, + for sun moving northward ——42°.3 ¢,= meridian zenith distance = ¢—d —56° 06’ 55” = hour angle of maximum altitude (in seconds of the chronometer) = [9.40594] = ; the angular brackets include a logarithm. COS @ COS } x A= i} @ z for the sun and a mean time chronometer. sin C, k* — a tabular number having for its argument §7— dZ#, that is, the daily rate of the chronometer less the daily increase in the equation of time £, which is positive when additive to apparent time. 6 =—T.4, ST= +155, k, =[0.00009], A — +0.35004 and § ——380°8. ¢—Am + 6, + y where m is a tabular number depending on the hour angle reckoned from the instant the sun reaches its maximum altitude, — Am ? the reduction to the observed zenith distance and y — A ASTRONOMICAL AND GEODETIC OBSERVATIONS. af Mean time of apparent noon. é 0 0 0 : +5™ 25°.8 Chronometer error. . : : 5 : : . —1 O01 39.3 Chronometer time of apparent noon . . a . . 11 03 46.5 3 : : : : : : 0 5 3 : : —30.8 Chronometer time of sun’s maximum altitude. j 5 OB UBS » From reflecting circle, with 7 = —1’ 24’7.6 i DAES n= +" T h mA h+mA 10" 50™ 49°.5 BIB) yall’ ZI? 107’ BIO) Bey Og 10 54 36 83 52 36 52 28 Il 03 37.5 33 58 35 0 35 11 06 30 33 53 (OT 7 14 83 53 26 From sextant, with 7 =—1’ 26/72 7,=—l1! 26’7.2 ny= +7!’ 102 57%™ 53°.3 Bio ye} ZO 207" Bo By Gil 11 00 46.7 33 52 31 4 35 11 10 29 33 51 59 36 35 iat 133" Ssh 33 51 29 72 41 33 52 43 Mean, by circle and sextant > : . 383 53 05 90+6,+y é : : : : . 106 16 09 ? Satieragiarns neu een Paul GOP sO sen 04 This latitude was also determined by Kane, July 19, 1853, A. Sonntag, observer= lefound a2 222i oSke The mean of the two determinations, or 72° 23’ 01’, has been adopted as a reliable latitude of the Governor’s house at Proven. Observations for longitude, August 7th. Chronometer comparisons; a7’ = + 1" 01™ 37°.9 for pocket chronometer. Chronometer. Pocket chronometer. Mean time. AT 2007 i Bes 02 30™ 475.6 1 Bes Wi) —8" 40” 34%.5 1062 | S) il4 0 381 21.6 | HBR 58). 5) | —3 41 00.5 740 6) 1) 0 32 29.5 1 34 07.4 —3 40 52.6 (N. B. Another comparison on the 6th shows the correctness of the above.) The correction and rate of the three chronometers were determined at Boston, July 7, 1860, by Williard, as follows :— AT at Boston on Boston ratesy 4/2 onGreenw. time AZ'onPréven time Long. of Préven CHAGO RSG Greenwich time. August 7. August 7. west of Greenwich. 2007 +1™ 355.3 + 08.4 +1" 475.7 —8)8 AO BYEB 3» 49m 998.9 1062 +0 57.0 + 0.2 +1 03.2 —3 41 00.5 3° 42 03.7 740 i VAT 0.0 +1 14.7 —3 40 52.6 3 42 07.3 Mean 3 42 11.1 The longitude determined approximately by Kane, in 1853, was 3" 42™ 308 (see p. 41 of his Astronomical Observations). 1 Smithsonian Contributions, 1860: Kane’s Astronomical Observations in the Arctic Seas, p. 36. 8 RECORD AND RESULTS OF Port Foulke, OxnservaTory, SmirH STRAIT. Port Foulke, a short distance to the northward and eastward of Cape Alexander, Smith Strait, was the winter quarters of the expedition during 1860-1861; the astronomical and magnetic observatory is situated at the head of the bay. Observations for time. September 9th, 1860. Double altitudes of the sun with reflecting circle. (+32! 50” —30' 20/7 an ee | Index (432 60 230) 0 Correction +1’ 17/7.5 Pocket chronometer. 2 (0) Pocket chronometer. 20 h m 8 o) y ( 00" h ™ 3 {e) {? 50’" 4> 09" O1 24° 23 1.00 CU yt Us} 24° 45 150 (50 20 Os BS 24 18 120 18 07 94 Al 20 (30 (37 10 11 Ol 94 13 L10 19 04 24 136 30 | 20 2 2 § 40 50 Zh tas OAL 25 03 130 4 21 10 23 «22 40 (3 (40 14 14 25 «00 130 22 «06 23 18 130 20 Be 15.) Of 24 56 ie 93 14 93 13 430 99f y y aA T = +26°.0, B= 29™ 80 at 62° Index ee ayes HA \ Correction +1’ 05” Assumed latitude 78° 17’ 39/7, assumed longitude 4".865 west of Greenwich. Reducing these observations by the formula 8 vy; sin }t = Ve 2 [6 + (P—9)] sin 3 [6 calla) a cos @ cos 6 we have for each set: 7 —— 4’ 32.7 To A AO O Tih) te Seed T g > t ALTE O= 106540) | HE, A OEY, abe 004 5217 +51° 08/ 18’ 4 20 09:3 78 04 02 +5 00 46 | +53 09 O04 Converting into mean time and comparing with the chronometer time, we find the chronometer corrections :— —50™ 35%.0 and from second set =) Oo One AT=—50° 35.1 Observations for time, September 9th (10th A. M.). Strong wind, affecting the artificial horizon Double altitudes of the sun, with reflecting circle. . §-+89' 40”. 31’ 00" erie ren Index 1 +33 * 10 30 30 t Correction +1’ 5 Pocket chronometer. 2© Pocket chronometer. 20 10" 8" 498 260 55 $30” 1o* 14m 99° ago gor {20 x (60 : (40 9 5 26 59 4 49 15 02 28 24 1 O9 A 9 9 50 9 9 9 (40 10 07 N02 si 15 4 28 26 130 20 20 10 11 02 28 09 G6 10 16 50 27 98 ‘55 3 (20 < (50 1 4s 28 12 + o9 1728 27 380 449 (40 (60 9 9 9 34 < 12 20 28 14 359 LS ss 27 384 4 49 ASTRONOMICAL AND GEODETIC OBSERVATIONS. 9 T= + 23°.5,B= 29'".50 at 68° Index ae ae ce mf Correction + 1/ 3/’ 7 = —A! 02! 6 lI DOL ao 2,=+8/'3 T Fa > t E AT 10" 107 33.82 {| 76° 15’ 33/7 | +-4° 438’ 48/7 | —39° 08’ 12/7 | —8™ 17.87 | —O® 50™ 23.87 10 16 20.7 76 04 22 +4 43 42 —s3i 41 00 | 3) ill —0 50 22.5 These observations were no doubt affected by the strong wind, the result will therefore not be used. Observations for time, September 10. Double altitudes of the sun, with reflecting circle. +32’ 40/7 —30! 40” Index igo A) aa) 20 ‘ Correction + 1’ 5’’ Pocket chronometer 2© Pocket chronometer 20 3h 38" 205 25° 55) 4 20" 3h 49m 568 26° 3g/ § 20" 00 100 39 00 OF Bil Bn 43 33 26 35 {0 39 36 25 49 +50 A 26 32 he 26 20 3 40 36 26 4g 130 3 45 07 26 05) olen mi 18 26 45 47) 45 40 25 99 tec 41 48 26 42 ae 46 23 25 19 a0 : 2/ 40/7 31" OO! ; T = + 27°.5, B = 29.50 at 64° Index ace mo = i i Correction ++ 57’’ hence: 7» =—4/ 12//.2 7, = — 4! 15/4 n,=+8''.3 ie 4 > E t AT "443° 13/ 39/7 —3™ 998.4 |[—0® 50™ 33°.6 +44 22 42 —3 22.4 |—0O 50 30.2 Mean ; : 0) 100) 2 3le9 35 40™ 055.3 | 76° 54’ 08” | 44° 38/ 34/7 3 44 38.6 17 04 09 +4 38 30 Observations for latitude, September 9th. Reflecting circle. Circammeridian altitudes of the sun. (+89 10” —31/ 20/7 +32! 10” —81' 20/7 Aue ee82) 208 M237 20 1 A) en ao fj Coseeton spel es (Applies to readings taken before 0 47™.) Index Pocket chronometer 2 iS) Pocket chronometer 2 © 30!’ (50! h mm 398 90 / b Om g [e) f} 02 49" 8 33 55 0» 59™ 93 33° 6 119 ap (50 43 19 33. 6 eb 58 05 835 425 f 00 40 44 35 88 7 400 8B a 20 20 0 45 34 34 10 139 0 55 17 84 8 335 $50 i 40 45 18 34 10430 BR ie 34 8 130 48 98 34 10419 56 38 34 8 ‘Lep April, 1865. 10 RECORD AND RESULTS OF 20 20 VP vs ok 49" 398 342 9! Ve oO 57™ 958 33° 4/ a0 40 20 50 24 34 9 4 5r 58 82 33 4 ie 2 (40 29 00 51 24 B49 130 BO OF 33 4 00 Fs + OOM BY 2? +239" 40" —=30/50” T = + 289.0, B= 29'.80 at 622 Index | SN Meg 5 Hee an. r= —3/ 21/78 n,=+8''.1 Correction + 1’ 09’’, applies after 0 47™ We have further — 5=-+ 5° 04’ 03''.3 C—NSe wows On4 kt = [0.00024 ] 4=+5 04 06.0 67T=+ 35.2 A= 0.21119 N19 Geol 6L= — 20.6 ss =—68°.6 y =—0''.5 Mean time of apparent noon . 6 : : : . . . —OF 2m 59°83 Chronometer error. ; . ‘ A f i : i 5 ob) BO Ba, Chronometer time of apparent noon : : 4 : é : 0 47 36.2 3 ; : , ; y =) i “ORG Chronometer time of sun’s maximum altitude 5 i : : 0 46 27.6 Tv h mA htmA OF 43™ 988.7 16° 46’ 09’’ 4’! UG a@? 18s" OR S4 Ce boat 16 46 380 0 30 0 50 29.0 16 46 20 7 oT OMOS Odeo: 16 46 08 18 26 OOD eu a'Ss0 16 45 48 38 26 0 58 21.3 16 45 28 59 27 Mean, rejecting first value. : . 16 46 27 QOS sea Le pike Ue) aN SIM OG drouuan OG >. : ‘ ; , : JS dy Bose 1/8 Observations for Longitude of Port Foulke. The material for the determination of longitude is very scanty, and the separate results cannot be made to harmonize as well as is desirable. It was Mr. Sonntag’s intention to observe as many eclipses of Jupiter’s first satellite as could be procured ; unfortunately of this class of observations there are but four now available. The chronometric determination is very unreliable, although the indications of the three chronometers kept tolerably well together as far as Préven, we find them, a month later, diverging to the extent of four minutes; it is evident, therefore, that they sustained considerable disturbances in their rate, undoubtedly produced by the con- cussions of the vessel with waves and ice. A third way by which I hoped to obtain at least a closely approximate result is partly astronomical, partly geodetic. The meridian of Van Rensselaer Harbor, Dr. Kane’s winter quarters in 1853—’54~’55, is well determined astronomically by moon culminations, eclipses, and occultations, and by adding the geodetic difference of longitude between the two observatories, as measured on the track chart, a longitude for Port Foulke was obtained more in excess of its most probable value as that by the chronometers was in defect. We have, therefore, to infer that the distance between Smith Strait and Van Rensselaer Harbor was overrated by Kane. I proceed to give the numerical results by each of the three methods. ASTRONOMICAL AND GEODETIC OBSERVATIONS. 1h The following four eclipses' of Jupiter’s first satellite were noted by the pocket chronometer :— 1860. November 18 (19th A.M.). Disappearance 11" 05™ 55%. A. Sonntag, observer. Jupiter much waving, time uncertain to 20°. 1861. January 30 (31st A. M.). Disappearance 122 27™ 46%. 4. G. Radcliff, observer. Note as above. 1861. February 6 (7th A. M.). Disappearance 22 21™ 42°. H. G. Radcliff, observer. Planet unsteady, time uncertain to 5%. 1861. February 8. Disappearance 8" 51™ 23°. H. G. Radcliff, observer. Very slight snow falling, time uncertain to 20°. The same magnifying power of telescope was used in the above observations. _ We have no comparisons of chronometers on November 18, and as the pocket chronometer was allowed to run down between October 31 and November 29, its rate is determined from observations on October 17 and October 31, and its cor- rection from observations on November 29. Observations for time, October 17th, 1860. Double altitudes of « Lyre, with reflecting circle. Index Hey an we ie au a Correction + 1’ 10’ Pocket chronometer 2% Pocket chronometer 2 10" 00™ 268 g4° 51’ ten 108 19™ 968 83° 40’ ep 1 26 46 ee 13 19 34 Ie 2 20 40 16 Weg 8 28 Ae 20 40 3 56 32 ee 15 30 22 55 5 22 21 5 16 43 16 ae 6 45 i 4 ee 11 45 6 H10 20 40 48 Bsa 18 56 0 ea 9 21 83 5S 0 20 13 82 54 lee 10 32 51 eo 21 02 49 150 10 11 37 45 tee 22 08 49 Lab =—2°,B=20%800ats19° Index FT) E) gy ta tof Com’ +1” 80” These observations will be combined two by two. Refraction r for first observations —1’ 10’’.3, for last —1’ 12’’.9 Star’s declination 6 = + 38° 39’ 34’’.9, right ascension 18" 32™ 13%.5 sin h —sin » sin 5 cos @ cos 0 The hour angle ¢ is found from cos ¢ — 1 Three other observations were found to be occultations of the satellite, not eclipses; they are of no value for our purpose. 12 RECORD AND RESULTS OF Sidereal time at mean noon 13" 45™ 38°.5; the sidereal time is converted into mean time, and A7’ is the chronometer correction on mean local time. T 105 00™ 56° 10 Index | gh +32’ 00" +32 20 Pocket chronometer 08™ 268 09 10 11 26 40 h 42° 937 42 58’ i} 39 39 04 66° 67 t 43/ AT Sie | 4A BOG 39 7h), Ol 10 —48 55 26 —48 54 31 —49 00 38 —48 56 31 —48 58 14 —49 03 40 A uO S 47 —49- 03 SAS OSs Distal O SNe Observations for time, October 31, 1860. Double altitudes of o Lyre, with reflecting circle. T = + 1.95, B= 277.744 at 34° r=—l1' 10" 8 and 7, =—1’ 13''.7 5 = + 38° 39’ 83.8 OIE Spee a ne ae ae ata ny Mean correction + 1/23’’.8 2% Pocket chronometer 2% 84° 34’ vio gh 21™ 918 EE Thi? oan 29 140 92 93 ile, 49™ 405.1 19 44.9 | 19 38.6 | 1062: 1°. 9 | tl AG) ileal 20 43.2 20 36.9 C209: IL © fl AG). DBT 14 RECORD AND RESULTS OF Chronometer comparisons: March 8, 1861. Correction of pocket chronometer — 4™ 135.9 Pocket chronometer. Mean time. Chronometers. Correction on mean time. Be Bes BiH Be. tet OBE Tl 2007: 82 22™ 208 ed AU BO) 8 Bk) 7) iu 8 34 57.1 1062: 8 24 25 A AG) ©) 8 BG 5) 8 oy) CHL il 740: 8 25 465 —4 50 23.9 Rate, fo for 2007: + 18.04 1062: — 0.07 740: —0.62 Pocket chronometer, — 2.50 Chronometer comparisons, January 31, 1861. AT Nov. 29. oT AT Jan’y 31. Hee ae Chron’s Jan’y 31. Mean time. ee 2007: —4> 49™ 408.1 | +1904 | —4® 48™ 358 | 02 24™ 408 | 2007: 55 10™ 278) +21™ 528 | —2™ 485 1062: —4 49 21.4 |—0.07 | —4 49 26 |0 25 35 | 1062: 5 12 27 | +238 O1 |—2 34 740: —4 49 23.1 | —0.62 | —4 50 02/0 26 32 | 740: 5 13- 47 | +23 45 | —2 47 P. chr.; — 06.3 | —2.50 —2 44 Mean : , - —2 43 AT January 31, 1861 : : : 3 5 — 2m 438 Satellite I, disappearance 12 27 46 Local mean time of eclipse 12 25 03 Greenwich mean time Wee) le. 28 Longitude Port Foulke 4 52 38 west of Greenwich. The local time for the two eclipses in February is obtained by means of chrono- meter comparisons on the 7th, and the rates of the chronometers and their correc- tions are previously determined. Chronometer comparison February 7th, 1861. = « Chronometers. AT March 8. AT Feb’y 7. Pocket ch’r. Mean time. aT Pocket chr. 2007: 72 27™ 365 | —4™ 47™ 56.9 | —4" 48™ O's Ob 4om 155 QZ IDOE —3™ 068 1062: 7 30 53 | —4 49 27.9 | —4 49 26 2 44 19.5 2 41 27 —2 53 740: 7 33 39 | —4 50 23.9 | —4 50 05 2 46 40 2 43 34 —3 06 Pocket chr. —0 04 13.9 —3 O01 Mean : é 6 —3 Ol Satellite I, disappearance. : : é si Spada alle yA, Local mean time of eclipse. ; é : ory AGE IRS) Gu Greenwich mean time . : j : : 5 dg) vill. Be Longitude Port Foulke . : : : s . 4 52 48 Correction AZ of pocket chronometer, February 8 —3 04 Satellite I, disappearance. : é : 5) 38 Bil 28} Local mean time of eclipse . : : : a 8 43 lg Greenwich mean time . : : : : 5 1 SO". 62 Longitude Port Foulke . : : : , . 4 51 33 RECAPITULATION OF RESULTS FoR LONGITUDE OF PorT FOULKE FROM OBSERVED ECLIPSES OF JUPITER’S FIRST SATELLITE. 1860. November 18 F : : Abo ule 1861. January 30 : : . . 4 52 38 1861. February 6 : : . 4°52 438 1861. February 8 : ; : 42 D133 Mean 4 52 01 +168 west of Greenwich. ASTRONOMICAL AND GEODETIC OBSERVATIONS. 15 ' The following time observations were reduced for the purpose of comparing the rates of the chronometers as found at Boston with rates determined at Port Foulke. The chronometer corrections are known from observations of September 9th, and of September 22d, 1860. Observations for time, September 22d, 1860. Double altitudes of a Lyre, with reflecting circle. (Sah 0” 040" SE OO Index al OO 4 WD LO &O 5 Correction + 56.’’7. Pocket chronometer. 2° Pocket chronometer. 2 90” aes 00” Oe 2ige Bee 90° 192’ 120 11® 08" 94 SO Bey (50 20 10 10 45 55 90 02 159 09 29 52 00 (20 (40 10 48 15 89 49 20 OMS 45 160 (40 eg § 60 10 49 45 40 160 at ay 39 150 9 2 10 ag § 40 10 51 37 31 +00 12 40 33 430 9 (40 (30 10 52 48 24 160 We Oil 26 140 (20 = 60 10) 54 112 Wy 120 1G BS 17 40 (50 (40 1055, 23 10 1 40 16 50 09 140 (50 (10 IQ) O° OF 92 150 ily 8 04 140 (20 (40 10 58 20 88 55 110 18 45 86 58 180 Index between the two sets. Index at the close of the observations. (+0' 40” +1' 10" +0/207) (+0! 50” -+1/ 20/7 +1/ 20'') V+0 50 +1 20 +030 5 UO 40° ei 10 i 2D. {5 Correction + 48’’.3 Correction + 66''.7 T = + 20°.7, B= 29.72 at 58° 7 =—61'".6 and 7, =— 65/”.0 5 = + 88° 39’ 35”.1 a= 18 327 142.2 Sidereal time at mean noon 12" 07™ 04°.7 A h t AT 105 44” 568.5 ANS) (OBS Aly?” +529 39’ 59!’ —50™ 458 10 49 00 44 51 5% 53 43 09 —h0) 86 HO) 5 2)) AlQe5 44 43 23 54 30 33 —50) 40 10 54 47.5 44 36 25 55 08 48 —50 42 10 57 38.5 44 98 54 55 49 48 i) 0 il O08 G5 AST Ong: 58 40 10 —50 48 Wi Th. wal a3} by) bY 59 14 02 =) Oran ih 116} 2Y0),5) 43 44 26 59 48 03 —50 41 Wil. QTL 43 36 16 60 380 55 —50 41 Wl 2 Ng) 43 30: 15 61) 402) 3 —50 43 Mean —50 43:3 + 0°.9 Chronometer comparisons: September 9, 1860. Correction of pocket chronometer —50™ 35*1. Pocket chronometer. Mean time. Chronometers. AT DIS rps ONS) 1? 36™ 465.4 2007: 62 29™ ae er OTS ERG 98 25.3 i Sy 60,4 1062: 6 7 —4 49 09.8 29 05.5 1 38 380.4 740: 6 28 —4 49 29.6 16 RECORD AND RESULTS OF September 10, 1860. Correction of pocket chronometer —50™ 31°.9 Mean AT (9 & 10th) 0» 41™ 22.50 OB bre Oko Osa: 2007: 42 43™ 4h (597109849 eB OE ITE) Al 25.2 SOM ROoee 1062: 4 40 mae AO AO Geri —4 49 08.3 42 05.3 byl Bey 740: 4 41 —4 49 26.6 —4 49 28.2 a oT sT A September 22, 1860. Port Foulke Boston. aoe THES BPS USES LS OO OPO) OXKN CS IGS Gye ak IR GyCE (9) +15.06 + 08.4 +0°.6 SSeS Q LE OD MwAsTO es MO GC 2teelo iO Dhar Ole Oa: —0.29 + 0.2 0.0 HA TOS ln Osea bid: AOS ol OM OS a 4 ae Oe 46) —0.49 0.0 —0.2 The adopted rate is found by givirg the weight 5 to the Port Foulke rate to make some allowance for the effect of the greater cold at this place. There are no means of obtaining sea rates for the chronometers. We have accordingly the following chronometric results :— AT July 7th AT September 9th AT September 9 & 10 Longitude of on Greenwich time. on Greenwich time. On Port Foulke time. Port Foulke. 2007: +17 358.3 +2m_ 148 i pis 1108 4h 54™ 968 1062: +0 57.0 +0 57 —4 49 08 4 50 05 740: +1 -14.7 +1 02 —4 49 28 4 50 30 Mean ‘ j 2 4 ole 4 OE rO6S A result to which we can attach but little value. The determination of the longitude of Port Foulke by means of the known meridian of Van Rensselaer Harbor, and the geodetic difference of longitude with Port Foulke, involves as an intermediate step the position of Cairn Point if we wish to deduce the most reliable result. Cairn Point is the northern terminal cape of Smith Strait, as Cape Alexander is that of the southern, both located on the Greenland shore. At Cairn Point numerous measures were taken, important for the geography of the strait, besides it served as a point of departure for the northern journeys. Before, however, giving the astronomical observations at this point, the remaining time observations taken at Port Foulke, and required for the determina- tion of the longitude of Cairn Point and other stations, will first be given. Observations for time, Port Foulke, May 29th, 1861. Altitudes of the sun. S. J. McCormick, observer. Chronometer 2007 © Tey Om 1242 30° 45’ 40'" T = + 32° 10 55 43 20 B= 29.72 at 56° 11 30 42 30 Correction for index, dip, refraction and parallax = — 5’ 04” N. B. Refraction very great when these sights were taken. Semidiameter 15’ 48’’ T fe > t E AT 7 10" 56.3 | 59°05’ 26’ | 421° 49’ 40’. | 36°39’ 10" | —9™595.6 | 4" 47™ 408.6 Altitudes of the sun, June 7th, 1861. 8. J. McCormick, observer. Chronometer 2007 © i mh 58™ 198 | 30° 0910” | T=+4 3920 58 43 08 10 B= 29-72 at 54° 59 OT 07 10 Corrections as above. Semidiameter 15’ 47’’ Ordinary refraction fh (4 5 t E aT We 58™ 40°47 | 59° 41-07" | +229 49’ 09'" | 48° 03/267" | ——Im 25"3 | 4h 47m 52.3 ASTRONOMICAL AND GHODETIC OBSERVATIONS 17 Altitudes of the sun, June 8th, 1861. S. J. McCormick, observer. Chronometer 2007 © 72 46™ 238 80° 42’ 50’ | e340 46 49 41 50 B= 29.69 at 49° 47 16 41 00 Corrections as above. Semidiameter 15’ 47/’ Ordinary refraction. JH t 3 t E aT 7 46" 4923 | 59° 07 24/" | 429° 54’ 80’ | 45° 02’ 59” | —1™ 145.0 | —4 44™ 515.3 Altitudes of the sun, July 7th, 1861. 8S. J. McCormick, observer Chronometer 2007 © 3 te BOF OR 30° 4’ 40’’ T = + 48° 59 41 2 30 B = 29.64 at 58° 8 00 34 0 30 Correction for index, dip, refraction, and parallax —5’ 07’’.0 Semidiameter 15’ 46//.2 io} 8 O1™ 175 29° 58’ 40’’ Ol 55 57 20 02 45 56 00 T £ > E ND POF AO | 59° 46' 47” +22° 32’ 46” | 46° 58’ 4” +4™ 365.4 | —4> 47™ 185.0 8 O01 59.0 59 52 O01 +22 32 45 47 30 50 +4 36.5 | —4 47 19.2 Mean : é . —4 47 18.6 Altitudes of the sun, July 13th, 1861. S. J. McCormick, observer. Chronometer 2007 © 7» 58™ 508 29° 20’ 50” T= + 43° 59 30 19 00 B = 30.09 at 57° 8 00 09 17 00 Correction for index, dip, refraction, and parallax —5/ 09// it! (2 d t E aT 759" 295.7 | 60° 80/26” | +219 46/03” | 46° 49756’ | +5™ 9685 | —4> 47™ 1155 Omitting the result of May 29th, on account of unusual refraction, we have the following chronometer corrections and rate :— Port Foulke. Chronometer 2007 a 8T 1861. March 8 ES ARS) 1861. June 7 —4 AT 529.3 + 08.6 1861. June 8 —— AAT OES 1861. July 7 —4 AT 18.6) +1.12 1861. July 13 —4 47 11.5) The correction and rate of the pocket chronometer we obtain from the following chronometer comparisons. The pocket chronometer had run down March 18 and was set approximately to mean local time March 22. Comparisons for the observations at Cairn Point. Chronometer comparisons April 8th, 1861, at Port Foulke. Pocket chronometer. Chronometers. AT Port Foulke. oe an te z Rock ehehrony a JP 49™ 598.9 740: 62 33™ —4> 51™ 20°6 12 41™ 398.4 —8" 198.8 ik Bl | BG) 1062: 6 33 —4 49 43.1 1 43 16:9 —s 19.6 I 6B OYLe) 2007: 6 33 —4 47 55.1 4A 0459 —8 19.3 Mean A ; > —8)) 1956 6" 34™ 123 of 2007 = 6 36™ of 1062 6 36 of 2007 = 6 39 25°5o0f 1740 3 May, 1865, 18 ~ RECORD AND RESULTS OF Chronometer comparisons, April 16th, 1861, at Port Foulke. Pocket chronometer. Chronometers. AT Port Foulke. See a Te ere SP G2 AS 2007: 82 36" Ah Alm 5486 BP 48m 058.4 =o O374 Bi) (5,4) 1062: 8 40 =A AD ATG 83 HO! NOs —3} Gayl AS OE malas 740: 8 44 Awe oO yl a 6} OD) —— ORs Mean 5 : . —8 533 8" 43™ of 2007 = 8? 44™ 53° of 1062 8 45 of 2007 =8 48 44.5 of 1740 67 of pocket chronometer = — 4°.2 Cairn Point, Smirnu Srratrr. Observations for latitude of Cairn Point, April 12th, 1861. Meridian altitude of the sun. S. J. McCormick, observer. 20 AO OMS “OL T= —— 5° Index correction + 2°70 B = 29,90 at 66° Altitude . . . 20 O07 30 Approximate longitude 4" 514" west of Greenwich. Refraction—par. — 2 50 Semidiameter . + 15 59 Maxe altsee en 120) 20039 6 at appa’t noon 8 51 23 ? 78 30 42 Latitude of Cairn Point. Observations for latitude of Cairn Point, April 15th, 1861. Meridian altitude of the sun. §S. J. McCormick, observer. 20 ADS OO" Ol reek) Index correction + 2 0 B = 80.21 at 56° Altitudercs a) an, 220.0) Refraction—par. — 2 44 Semidiameter . + 15 59 Wilkie Gl o-oo) PA By TB) 6 at appa’t noon 9 56 11 9 (8 80 58 Latitude of Cairn Point. The difference between the maximum altitude and the meridian altitude, owing to the change in the sun’s declination, amounts in the present case to 0’’.5, and may therefore be neglected. Taking the mean value of @ we find the latitude of Cairn Point, 78° 30’ 49” Observations for time and longitude of Cairn Point, April 15, 1861. Double altitudes of the sun. 8. J. McCormick, observer. Pocket chronometer. _ 2© 3> 99m 498 33250? T= 10° 80 36 46 B = 30.19 at 55° 831 09 49 Index correction + 2/ 0/7 Tix di oOr n= 8! Semidiameter = 15’ 58/’ ae (6 3 t E AT SP80R 298 | T2208) 82h le ego 59! 08 anil sb 0S 4G OA a 68o hi | ire aekolle Pocket chronometer, 47’ on Port Foulke time, —8 49.4 Longitude of Cairn Point, east of Port Foulke, 0 58, ASTRONOMICAL AND GEODETIC OBSERVATIONS. 19 Adopting the value 4" 52™ 0° for the longitude of Port Foulke, we have the longitude of Cairn Point 4" 51™ 02°; the observer used a smaller difference of longi- tude from which I infer that the chronometer correction of the 8th was preferred with an average rate of —2*.5, in this case we have AT on Port Foulke time =—8" 37°, hence the latitude of Cairn Point 4" 51™ 14°, which is adopted (see also determination from bearings further on). Returning to the longitude of Port Foulke, by means of the known meridian of Van Rensselaer Harbor determined by Kane, we have the astronomical longitude of the latter place, as computed by me from moon culminations, occultations, and an eclipse’ 4" 43™ 31%, also Cairn Point west of Van Rensselaer Harbor by Kane’s large track chart 11™ 32°, and by the above, Port Foulke west of Cairn Point 46°; hence longitude of Port Foulke 4° 55™ 49%, a result certainly too large, which can only be accounted for by an over estimation of the distance between Kane’s winter quarters and Cairn Point; this apparent excess amounts to 135 miles in linear measure; part of it, however, we must attribute also to the meridian adopted for each of the observatories.” For the longitude of Port Foulke the value 4" 52™ 00° or 73° 00’ west has been adopted. The probable uncertainty of this value is one statute mile. The following positions were determined by Dr. Hayes (or party) on his trip across the strait and up the west coast of Kennedy Channel in April and May. He started from Cairn Point April 20, 1861. Camp Separation, SmirH Sounp. Observations for latitude of camp, April 25th, 1861. Meridian altitude of the sun. 8. J. McCormick, observer. 2© 48° 24’ 00 T=—12° Index correction . + 1 00 B = 29.9 at 51° as recorded at Port Foulke, it Altitude : ... 24 14 00 answers as a rough approximation. Refraction—par. . — 2 20 Semidiameter . . + 15 55 Approximate longitude 4" 483™ west of Greenwich. Maximum altitude 24 27 35 Sat apparent noon 13 20 30 ? 78 52 55 1 Smithsonian Contributions, 1860: Kane’s Astronomical Observations in the Arctic Seas, p. 33. 2 T have also attempted to work out a result for longitude from three observed double altitudes of the moon’s lower limb February 17, 1861; the observations, however, were found too crude, the sextant reading was given to the nearest minute only, RECORD AND RESULTS OF Camp Frazer, Smiru Sounp. Observations for latitude of camp, May 14th, 1861. Meridian altitude of the sun. Dr. I. I. Hayes, observer. 20 Pocket sextant? . 58° 16’ T = + 28° Index correction .— 1 28 B = 30.3 at 67° approximately. 56 48 Approximate longitude 4" 423™ Altitude . . . 28 24.0 ' Refraction—par. . — 1.8 Semidiameter . . + 15.9 - Maximum altitude 28 38.1 Sat apparent noon 18 44.4 ? 80 06.3 Farthest Camp, Krnnepy CHANNEL. Observations for latitude of camp, May 17th, 1861. Meridian altitude of the sun. Dr. I. I. Hayes, observer 2© Pocket sextant . . 56° 52! T = + 22° Index correction. .— 1 31 B = 30.0 at 53° approximately. BY) ik Approximate longitude 4" 353™ Altitude diay eum. euen noi OFo Refraction—par. .— 1.8 Semidiameter a+ 15.8 Maximum altitude . 27 54.5 6 at apparent noon . 19 26.0 ® Sess 5) Camp Leidy, Smitm Sovunp. Observations for latitude of camp, May 20th, 1861. Meridian altitude of the sun. Dr. I. I. Hayes, observer. 20 Pocket sextant... 61° 14! T = + 22° (about) Index correction .— 1 30 B = 29™.7 at 52° approximately. 59 44 Approximate longitude 4" 44™ Altitudes.) 0h. 1229 915250 Refraction—par. . — ets Semidiameter . . + 15.8 Maximum altitude 380 06.1 6 at apparent noon 20 04.6 ? 19 58.5 journey, was handed to me by Dr. Hayes for examination. cularity of the two mirrors quite perfect; the index error by means of a sharp vertical line, was 1° 30’ on the are, and by means of four measures of twice the sun’s diameter 1° 382’ on the arc, the 1 This pocket sextant (Gilbert’s No, 3) left in the same condition as on the return from the northern correction was therefore —1° 31/.6. February 5, 1862.—Cuas. A. 8. I found the adjustment of the perpendi- ASTRONOMICAL AND GEODETIC OBSERVATIONS. 21 Deep Snow Camp, Situ Sounp. Observations for latitude of camp, May 21st, 1861. Meridian altitude of the sun, Dr. I. I. Hayes, observer. 2© Pocket sextant . . 61° 48’ T = + 22° (about). Index correction .— 1 32 B = 30'".0 at 60° approximately. 60 16 Approximate longitude 4" 51™ INH o 6 « o BO O80 Refraction—par. . — 1.7 Semidiameter . . + 15.8 Maximum altitude. 30 22.1 6 at apparent noon 20 16.9 ? 79 548 Camp Hawks, Smiru Sounp. Observations for latitude of camp, May 22d, 1861 Meridian altitude of the sun. Dr. I. I. Hayes, observe. 2© Pocket sextant . . 62° 34’ T = + 20° (about). Index correction .— 1 82 B = 80.1 at 58 approximately. 61 02 Approximate longitude 4" 53™ INH 5 5 6 5 GH) Gila Refraction—par. . — 1.7 Semidiameter . . + 15.8 Maximum altitude . 30 45.1 Sat apparent noon. 20 28.8 ? 19 43.7 Small berg Camp, Smit Sounp. Observations for latitude of camp, May 23d, 1861. The meridian altitude of the sun is recorded 2© 62° 58’ with a ? attached. As the resulting latitude is the same as that of the preceding camp, and the. position of the camp on the track chart disagrees with it, I shall make no use of this observation. Scouse Camp, Smiru Sounp. Observations for latitude of camp, May 23d, 1861. Meridian altitude of the sun, lower culmination.t. Dr. I. I. Hayes, observer. 2© Pocket sextant . . 21° 40/ T = + 18° (about). Index correction .— 1 31 B = 29.9 at 65° approximately. h 20 09 Approximate longitude 4" 523™ Altitude. . . . 10 045 Refraction—par. . — 5.5 Semidiameter . . + 15.8 Minimum altitude . 10 14.8 6 at apparent midnight 20 45.8 ? 79 29.0 1 For upper culmination, @ = 90 + 6—h For lower culmination, p = 90 —5 +h ets 22 RECORD AND RESULTS OF Determination of Longitudes for the Northern Journey.—Vhese principally depend upon observed bearings of known headlands to the south, and some sextant angles. A few chronometric determinations depend upon the following chronometer correc- tions as found at Port Foulke, April 16th, and May 30th, and June Ist, 1861. For rate we are obliged to use the previously determined value, viz: §7’=— 2°.5 since the pocket chronometer had evidently stopped more than an hour on or before May 13, occasioned by a neglect to wind at the proper time April 16, 1861 A7 at Port Foulke = — 8" 53°.3 Chronometer comparisons, May 30th, 1861, at Port Foulke, two days after Dr. Hayes’ return. Pocket chro’r | Chronom’r AT of 2007 dT of AT of 2007 Mean time of | aT of pocket chr. a May 30. 2007. June 7 and 8. 2007. May 30. comparison. May 30. Ge. OO sre PE TN fee RN AUN Ca EY OE Peers are SAL |e AMO) TS} ELE) | ATES TUS GELS) Mean time of AT of pocket chr. 3T of pocket chro- Junior: Janet: comparison. June 1. domes B45 622 I Ba | el cs yO) 8? 47™ 075.8 ato E Om 1akG —2°.6 Foggy Camp, Smiru Sounp. Observations for longitude, May 13. I. I. Hayes, observer. ocket chronometer. 2© by pocket sextant. Bo BB GPP | 40° 37/ Assumed latitude 79° 55/.5, longitude 4" 47™ 20 T = + 20° (about) 3 58 48 42 28 B = 307.0 at 51° approximately. Be He) 5P} 42 22 Index correction — 1° 28’.0 4 00 26 42 17 Refraction—par. 27 38 59 42 42 22.3 Ri 9 SN 5 Sie SSS BOY Ig? tO Oeil One HH = — 3™ 539.4 Mean time of observation, BS Gs Bee Chronometer time, 3 56 47 AGH +1 19 48 AT Port Foulke, +1 12 58 Deduced from correction of May 30th. Difference of longitude, 6" 50° Foggy camp east of Port Foulke. Longitude of Foggy camp, 4" 45" 10° (See determination from bearings further on.) Camp Hawks, Situ Sounp. Observations for longitude, May 22. I. I. Hayes, observer. Pocket chronometer. 2© by pocket sextant. eT OORMOD: 29° 24! T = + 138° (about). bb 19 B = 30.1 at 58° approximately. 12 05 14 Index correction —1° 32/.0 Ge) Akl OG mB) TG) Approximate longitude, 4° 53™ 20 (fe BS (Oey 30° 24’ Refraction—par. —4’.0 WZ, Ys) 18 eae 0,0) 30 21 his V4205"0 = 200398 0M fT SON Ta ve eames Mean time of observation, Saabs Chronometer time, Uf 1D} “8383 AT - 15 14,32 AT Port Foulke, =e 2 3.6 Deduced from correction of May 30th. Difference of longitude, + 1 a6 Camp Hawks east of Port Foulke. Longitude of Camp Hawks, 4 50 04 (See determination from bearings further on.) ASTRONOMICAL AND GEODETIC OBSERVATIONS. 93 Magnetic Bearings for Position of Camps and Headlands. The numerous magnetic bearings, taken at important positions on land and upon the ice, were made use of for the construction of a chart,! scale 1: 1200 000. ‘The chart depends upon the astronomical results just deduced; by means of these and a critical use of the bearings and sextant angles, the western shore line and that south of Smith Strait were finally laid down. Ali detail is taken from Dr. Hayes’ original track chart (scale 1: 600 000), to which I have closely adhered, as far as the above material would permit. The longitude of Cairn Point, from observed bearings, is as follows :— From bearings at Cairn Point, 72° 50’ ue “ “ Littleton Island, 73 10 id 6 “ McGary Island, 73 05 By chronometer, 72 48 Adopted longitude 72° 59/ 97 The longitude of Foggy Camp, from observed bearings, is as follows: 71° 33’, from chronometric determination 71° 17’ giving the former result the weight 2, the weighted mean becomes 71° 28’, which has been adopted. The longitude of Camp Hawks from bearings is 73° 24’, from chronometric determination 72° 31’ giving the former result the weight 2, the weighted mean becomes 73° 06’ or 4° 52™ 24°, which has been adopted. Dr. Hayes reached Cairn Point May 27th, 35 A. M., and Port Foulke May 28th, 10 A. M. Survey of Snuth Strait. On the 27th of October, 1860, Mr. Sonntag measured a base line on the ice from the outer point of the third or Starr Island, near Port Foulke, bearing mag- netically S. 4° 20’ W. The length of this base, from two measures with a 91 foot line, was 9097 feet, or 2772.9 metres. The position of Cape Isabella and of Cape Patterson, on the coast opposite, were determined from angles measured at the extremities of this base. Readings of theodolite :— Mean. At Third Island: Base end, IGS Dil? 52’ 5QE"| 193° 517.9 50 53 53 Cape Patterson, 312 43 45 312 44.8 44 47 Cape Isabella, 348 13 13 348 14.0 15 15 At opposite end of base: Third Island, 116 30 29 30 116 29.5 3 28 30 Cape Isabella, . 92 03 04 04 92 03.8 04 04 04 Cape Patterson, 57 12 12 ot «12.2 13 12 Isabella, 19 117.8 Cape Patterson, 1° 49’.8 Solving the triangles : ai Island, 154 22.5 and <~ Third Island, 118 52.9 Base end, 24 25.7 Base end, BY) y-33 1 See large chart accompanying this paper. to} to} 24 RECORD AND RESULTS OF We find the distances: — Third Island to Gape Isabella, 34.12 st. miles, or 29.65 naut. miles. sf Cape Patterson, 46.39 sf 40.30 “ The latitude and longitude of these capes we deduce from the known position of Third Island,! viz: latitude 78° 17’ 45”, longitude 73° 06’ 00’, and the known variation, viz: 92° west. Forming the spherical triangle pole, Third Island, Isabella (or Patterson) of which is given the colatitude of Third Island, the distance to Isabella (or Patterson) and the included spherical angle, we find— Cape Isabella, latitude 78° 22/.4 longitude 75° 307.8 Cape Patterson, “ 78 46.1 * 75 30.5 We have also a direct determination of the latitude of Cape Isabella by Dr. Hayes, viz:— Meridian altitude of sun, lower culmination, July 28th, 1861. 26 Observed double alt., 14° 1’ 30/7 T= + 49° Index correction, 0 00 B = 29.9 at 58° Observed altitude, T O° 45 Refraction—par., — to dey Semidiameter, + 15 48 Minimum altitude, tt. OO) We 6 at apparent midnight, 18 47 09 Q 78 22 OT which agrees closely with the above geodetic latitude. McGary Island, orpostre Lirr.eron Istanp, Smiru Srrarr. Observations for latitude of McGary Island, at southwest end of Island, July 6, 1861. Meridian altitude of the sun. I. I. Hayes, observer. 2© 68° 04’ 00/7 T = + 42° Index correction, . + 1 00 B= 292.4 at 54° Altitude, 34 02 30 Assumed longitude 4” 535™ Refraction—par., — 1 20 Semidiameter, ate 15 46 Maximum altitude, 34 16 56 6 at apparent noon, 22 39 59 > 78 23 03 Latitude of MceGary Island. On the 12th of June 1855, Kane? determined the latitude of Littleton Island and found 78° 22’ 01’. I adopt the mean of these determinations, or 78° 22’ 32” for the channel between the two islands. 1 See accompanying chart of Port Foulke and vicinity, scale 1:170 000. 2 Smithsonian Contributions, 1860: Kane’s Astronomical Observations in the Arctic Seas, p 44. ASTRONOMICAL AND GEODETIC OBSERVATIONS. 95 Littleton Island, Smirx Srrarr. Observations for time and longitude, July 21 (22d aM, M.), 1861. Chronometer 2007! 3 34" 03° T 3" 35™ 03.0 58° 55’ 04!’ 3 40 038.7 58 49 14 Chronometer 2007.? Double altitudes of the sun. H. G. Radcliff, observer. 20 62° 42’ 40/7 T = + 340 43 10 B = 29.6 at 72° 44 10 Index correction + 1’ 04’’ Semidiameter sy! 22” 2© r=! 37'' Oe 61 50 00 n= 8!’ 51 40 54 10 3 t E AT AD 18” BAY? ||) alge wey Bey” +6™ 075.6 —4h 48™ 545.1 20: 13) 22 —I18 39 26 +6 07.6 —4 48 33.8 Mean P j 5 ath ds ul Observations for time and longitude, July 26th, 1861. Corrected alt. © Te Sl Oe 27° 33" 50”’ T = + 440° 53 19 27 28 55 B = 297.88 at 55° 58 12 27 18 «Ol 8 02 21 27-08 31 04 53 27 02 43 06 49 26 57 42 T c by t E AT i BOE OB || BHO 2b 087 || iG gy" OB” | 45° 16’ 20’* | +46" 11%.5 | —4" 49™ 03%.2 1861, July 21 1861, July 26 Longitude of Littleton Island. AT Litt. Island. AZ Port Foulke. Litt. Is. west. —4h 4gm 448 —4h 47™ 098 1™ 495 —4 49 03 —4 46 57 | 2 06 Mean 5 ; 5 It eye If we reject the second set of observations on the 21st, the two results for differ- ence of longitude become 1™ 52* and 2™ 06%, the mean 1” 59° is adopted. The longitude of Littleton Island becomes therefore 4” 53" 59°, which agrees well with the geodetic determination, for which see chart of Port Foulke and vicinity. This chart puts Cape Alexander in latitude 78° 10’.5. Dr. Kane found, June 17, 1855, the latitude 78° 09’.3, a result which agrees well enough with the chart. 1 The chronometer minutes have been changed from 35™ to 34™. 2 The above times are the observed times — 3™ 07°.3, by which correction the observer intended them to represent Greenwich time. 4 May, 1865. 26 RECORD AND RESULTS OF Gale Point, NrAR Cape ISABELLA, SMITH STRAIT. Observations for latitude at anchorage off Gale Point, July 27, 1861.1 Meridian altitude of the sun. §S. J. McCormick, observer. Gale Point bears S. W. (true), and Cape Isabella N. E. by N. (true). Observed altitude © 30° 45’ 40” Approximate longitude 5? 5™ Dip and index correction, — 3 19 30 42 21 Refr’n—par. — 1 30 Semidiameter, + 15 48 True altitude, 30 56 39 6 at apparent noon, 19 08 08 ? 78 11 29 Observations for longitude, sights taken from a grounded iceberg off Gale Point. Double altitudes of the sun. 8. J. McCormick, observer. July 28 (29th A. M.) Pocket chronometer 2 (0) gb 39" 585 55° 29 30!’ T=-+ 50° 40 22 | 31 50 B = 29.8 at 54° ; obeak 40 56 34 40 Approximate longitude, 5" 6™ 20 Index correction, 0’ 0’’ 2 41 25 55 386 «600 Refr.—par. —1’ 42’’ 42 03 38 20 Semidiameter, +15’ 487’ 42 1 39 50 h = 28° 01! 37”' SIGS Zo? Bis" t =— 36° 19’ 00” E= + 6™ 10° Chronometer time of observation, gh 41™ 118 Reduction? to refer pocket ch’r to ch’r 2007, —I1 33 (2007) Chronometer time of observation, 2 39 38 Mean time of observation, 21 40 54 AT off Gale Point, —4 58 44 AT Port Foulke, —4 46 55 (see preceding table of a 7’and 6 7'of 2007) Iceberg off Gale Point, W. of Port Foulke, 11 49 Longitude of position, 5 03 49 west of Greenwich. The following observations on Upper Baffin Bay conclude the series of geogra- phical positions :— Netlik, soUTHERN ENTRANCE TO WHALE Sounp. Observations for latitude at north point of harbor, close to Esquimaux huts, August 5, 1861. Meridian altitude of the sun. 8. J. McCormick, .observer. 20 59° 01 20/7 Index correction, 0 00 T=4 47° ) pe ewe ene ny - about Altitude observed, 29 30 40 B = 29".9 at 50°) Refr’n—par., — 1 35 Approximate longitude, 4° 46™ Semidiameter, +15 49 h 29 44 54 6 at apparent noon, 16 52 40 ? TT OT 46 1 There is some doubt about the date; the record gives 28th, but the statement that the position is about 10 miles south of Cape Isabella and the plotted position on the track chart, accord well with the corrected date, and with the above resulting latitude. 2 Chronometer comparison: 2007, 6" 34", Pocket chronometer 6° 35™ 33°. 2. ASTRONOMICAL AND GEODETIC OBSERVATIONS. a7 Observations for longitude, August 4 (5th A. M.). Double altitudes of the sun. §. J. McCormick, observer. Pocket chronometer. 2 © Q® 90™ 178 53° 33’ 30’ Mes ob BX 20 49 34 40 B 29.9 at 5005 bout 21 O07 36 10 Index correction 0’ 0’' Mean, 2 20 44 53 34 47 Refr’n—par. — 1’ 50’’ Reduction to 2007,— 1 50 Semidiameter + 15’ 49’ T 2 18 54 h= 27° 01 29° 6 = 16° 54’ 21"’ t=—36 42 40 H= + 5™ 41° Mean time of observation, 21" 38™ 505 Chronometer time, 26 18 54 AT Netlik, —4 40 04 AT Port Foulke, —4 46 36 (see preceding table of a 7’ and 87 of 2007.) Netlik east of Port Foulke, 6 32 Longitude of Netlik, 4 45 28 west of Greenwich. Upernavik, NortH GREENLAND. Observation for latitude, August 16, 1861. Meridian altitude of the sun. 8S. J. McCormick, observer. 20 61° 13’ 50” Index correction, 0 00 T=+4 51° Altitude observed, 30 36 55 B = 29.9 at 51° Refr.—par., — 1 30 Assumed longitude 3 44™ Semidiameter, +15 51 h 30 51 16 6 at apparent noon, 13 38 03 ? 72 46 47 Dr. Kane, in 1853, found this latitude 72° 46’ 12’ (Sonntag observer; see p. 37 of Kane’s Astronomical Observations); according to Captain Inglefield the latitude is 72° 46’ 51’; the mean of the three determinations is 72° 46’ 37’. Observations for time at Upernavik, August 15, 1861. Double altitude of the sun. S. J. McCormick, observer. Chronometer 2007 2© 62 35™ 248 52° 00’ 30’ T=+50° 35 59 51 57 20 B = 29.9 at 54° 36 24 51 54 40 Index correction, 0’ 00'’ 36 53 51 50 50 Refr’n-—par., — 1 40 37 20 51 48 20 Semidiameter, +15 50 3T «438 51 45 30 38 0%. ~« 51 42 10 h = 26° 09’ 01”’ 6 = + 13° 54’ 59” 388 30.5 51 40 50 t =42 45 10 H= + 4™ 108 Mean, 6 37 02.8 51 50 01 1 Chronometer comparison: 2007, 7" 42™, Pocket chronometer, 7" 43™ 50°. 28 RECORD AND RESULTS OF Mean time of observation ; 4 : 5 OD ays Tale Chronometer time’ . 3 : s ; : 6) 934 41 ADU. : 2 : 3 ; ote BO. BO AT Port Foulke : 5 : : 3 7th AB. BH) Difference of long. Port Foulke and Upernavik iO TOS Longitude of Upernavik according to Inglefiedd 3 44 I1 Longitude of Port Foulke : ; : . 4 51 16 west of Greenwich. (If the times had been noted by 2007, this longitude would be smaller by 2" 22°). These time observations at Upernavik I have introduced to show that their tendency is still more to lessen the adopted longitude of Port Foulke, or else to increase the adopted longitude of Upernavik; placing but little confidence in the result, I make no further use of it. RECAPITULATION OF PRECEDING RESULTS FOR GEOGRAPHICAL POSITIONS. Longitude west of Greenwich. Locality. Latitude. Inare. In time. Port Foulke, Observatory, Smith Strait . SD Wl! BOY CEO, OO? OO” Littleton Island, Smith Strait .- . is 22.5 McGary Island, 96 ss : é : 23.1 Cairn Point, 5 Cape Isabella Off Gale Point, Cape Patterson, ef Camp Separation, Smith Sound . Foggy Camp, i He Camp Frazer, es as Farthest Camp, Kennedy Channel Camp Leidy, Smith Sound . Deep Snow Camp, “ if Camp Hawks,? Scouse Camp, Netlik, Whale Sound . Upernavik, Upper Baffin Bay Préven, Governor’s house . 1 T suspect that the above times were noted by the pocket chronometer, and not by 2007. I have, therefore, subtracted 2™ 228 to refer to 2007. 2 On the unrevised track chart of Dr. Kane’s the cape, forming the southern promontory of Dobbin Bay, is named after Dr. I. I. Hayes; but on the chart accompanying Dr. Kane’s narrative of his expedition (see Vol. I) the cape appears as Cape Hawks, and the more northern and eastern cape, where Dr. Hayes first made the west coast of Smith Sound, is inscribed with the discoverer’s name. This last designation was retained on the Smithsonian chart accompanying the astronomical obser- vations of the Kane expedition, and is adhered to now with the approval of Dr. Hayes. ASTRONOMICAL AND GEODETIC OBSERVATIONS. PENDULUM EXPERIMENTS. 29 The pendulum observations were made for the purpose of ascertaining the relative force of gravity at Cambridge, Massachusetts, and at the winter quarters of the expedition in North Greenland. The pendulum was expressly made for the occasion by Bond & Son, Boston. It is an invariable, reversible, brass pendulum, perfectly symmetrical in all its parts, as shown in the annexed figure. It is very nearly synchronous, though not convertible, as its form at once indicates. Its total length is 5 feet 7? inches, width 1.4, and thickness 0.7 ‘inches; distance between the knife-edges 39.4 inches. The steel knife-edges are 14.2 inches from the ends of the bar, 3 inches long, 0.3 inches high, and 0.27 inches wide at the base; their. section is triangular. The weight is 21.92 pounds, hence its specific gravity 85 nearly. The knife-edge, which runs through a perforation of .the bar, rests upon steel plates. They are screwed to a brass plate, and supported by a heavy block of wood, which is fastened to the case in which the pendulum swings. ‘There is no adjustment for horizontality of the supporting steel plates other than what is given by the vertical position of the case. The arc of vibration is read off on a scale at the bottom of the case, which has a glass door in front permitting a view of the whole pendulum. Two thermometers are permanently fastened inside the box, one just above the support, the other on a level with the swinging knife-edge. There is a preliminary reduction of the observations at both stations by Mr. Sonntag; the present independent reduction differs from it by a more complete and critical use of the materials; no attempt, however, of combining the resulting number of vibrations at the two stations had been made by Mr. Sonntag. The following explanatory note is extracted from the record of the experiments at the Harvard College Observatory :— . “ Pendulum suspended in transit room of Observatory of Har- vard College, Cambridge, and its vibrations observed by G. P. Bond, Director, and T. H. Safford, Assistant.” In the following pages are the times read off from the record sheet of the electric register. The signals always commence with the transit of a mark on the pendulum from right to left, seen in the telescope (which does not invert). Different marks were used for different sets,’ but the same mark was always observed both right (R.) and left (1). of real size. 1 1 1 Owing to defective illumination the point first selected, which was the knife-edge, could not always be seen, and others were taken—all of them near the axis. 30 RECORD AND RESULTS OF The pendulum vibrates nearly at mean solar time, temperature at 71° Fah. The register clock gained daily 2°.9 on sidereal time. The “arc” denotes the angle between the extreme right and left positions of the pendulum. The geological formation is drift overlying the silurian rocks. Pendulum Experiments. Vibrations observed at the Observatory of Harvard College, Cambridge, Massachusetts, July 3 and 4, 1860.1 : G. P. Bond, Director of Observatory, observer. July 3, 1860. No. 4 faces telescope |14" 07™ 295.9 L and swings. 31.9 16> 06™ 395.3 33.9 41.3 R. 36.0 43.3 135 57™ 158.2 at 12"5™ upp.ther.72° 8 F. 37.9 45.3 17.2 low. ‘* 69.8 47.4 19.2 observer, G. P. B. R. 49.4 21.2 15 03 34.0 at 15" 4™ upp. ther. 71.8 51.4 23.2 9¢ 36.0 low. “ 69.8 53.4 25.2 38.0 are 1.50 55.4 27.2 40.0 57.4 29.3 42.0 59.4 x 31.2 44.0 7% 01.3 33.2 46.0 « 03.4 48.1 05.4 Thy. 2 50.1 07.4 13 57 38.2 52.1 09.4 40.2 54.0 11.5 42.3 56.1 13.4 44.3 58.0 15.5 46.3 17.4 48.2 x L. 19.4 50.2 at 135 59™ are 30.10? 15 04 23.2 52.2 25.2 R. 54.3 27.3 17° 09 16.3 at 17" 8™ arc 0.48 56.3 29.3 18.4 58.2 31.2 20.4 58 00.3 33.2 22.4 35.2 24.4 Bian: 37.3 26.4 « 14 06 52.8 39.3 28.5 54.8 41.3 30.5 56.8 43.3 32.5 58.8 45.3 34.5 07 00.8 at 14% 7™ are 2.84 47.3 02.9 x 49.3 L. 04.8 17309 51.5 06.8 R. 53.5 08.8 16 06 04.0 at 16% 7™ are 0.81 55.5 10.8 06.2 at 16 9 upp. ther. 719.7 57.5 12.8 08.1 low. “ 69.8 59.5 14.8 10.2 bar. 20.924 inches 10 01.6 12.2 at. ther. 74° F. 03.6 L. 14.1~ 05.6 X 14 07 17.9 16.2 07.6 19.9 18.2 09.7 21.9 20.2 116 23.9 22.2 13.6 25.9 24.2 15.5 27.9 X 17.6 ' Some experiments made July 2d and 3d, with knife edges No. 3 and No. 1 facing the telescope and swinging, are here omitted. It was found, after reversing the pendulum end for end, that the wooden case interfered with the free action of the pendulum (in position, side No. 4 facing the telescope and swinging). The case was screwed closer to the wall, altering by 1° or 2° the inclination to horizontal plane of the faces on which the knife edges rest when pendulum is oscillating. : 2 Recorded 29.10. 3 Recorded 16 ASTRONOMICAL AND GEODETIC OBSERVATIONS R. 3% 05™ 235.2 L. 175 56™ 345.0 at 175 56™ are 0.33 25.3 4» 23m 108.7 36.1 at 17 59 upp. ther. 70°.8 27.3 12.6 38.1 low. “ 68.7 29.3 14.6 40.1 bar. 29.901 31.2 16.6 42.2 at. ther. 73 33.3 18.6 44.2 35.3 20.6 46.1 37.3 22.6 48.1 x 39.3 24.7 « 50.2 26.7 52.1 L. 28.7 54.2 3.05 46.3 30.7 56.2 48.3 32.7 58.2 50.3 34.7 7 00.0 52.3 36.7 54.3 38.6 at 4% 25™ are 1. 39 L. 56.3 X 17 57 09.3 58.3 R. 11.2 06 00.3 4 26 28.2 13.2 02.3 30.3 15.2 04.3 32.3 17.2 06.4 34.3 x 19.2 08.3 at 3" 07™ are 3.46 36.4 21.2 38.3 13.2 R. 5.2 3.13 46.6 L. 27.2 48.6 4 26 45.3 ¢ 29.2 50.6 47.3 31.2 x 52.6 49.3 33.2 54.7 51.3 x 35.2 56.6 53.3 37.3 58.7 55.3 39.2 14 00.7 x 41.2 02.6 R. 43.2 04.7 5 38 57.7 45.2 06.7 59.7 47.2 08.7 39 01.7 49.2 10.7 03.6 51.2 Stopped for the night. 12.7 ; 05.6 July 3 (4th) 1860. Found pendulum 14.7 07.6 x still vibrating at 7 A. M. 09.6 Reversed to face No. 2. L. 11.6 3 14 19.7 13.6 R. 21.7 15.7 3 02 38.8 at 2" 50™ upp. ther. 68°.6° 23.6 17.7 40.8 Glo & O78 | 25.7 42.8 bar. 29.812 | 27.7 L. 44.8 at. ther. 71 29.7 5 39 22.8 at 5" 40™ arc 0.72 46.9% at 3" 0 are 3.82 31.7 24.8 48.9 observer, G. P. B. 33.7 26.7 50.9 35.8 28.8 52.9 37.6 X 30.8 54.8 39.8 32.8 x 56.8 41.7 34.8 43.7 36.8 L. 45.7 38.8 3 03 07.9 47.7 40.8 09.9 49.8 11.8 51.7 R. 13.8 53.7 6 19 52.0 15.8 55.7 at 3" 16™ arc 3.09 54.0 17.9 56.0 19.9 R. 58.0 21.9 x 4 22 29.7 at 4" 20" upp. ther. 69°.2) 20 00.0 23.9 31.7 se low. 67.5 02.0 25.9 33.7 04.1 27.9 35.7 06.0 29.9 37.7 08.1 31.9 39.7 10.1 33.9 41.7 35.9 43.6 X L. 38.0 45.7 6 20 15.2 47.6 17.1 R. 49.7 19.1 3 05 17.3 51.6 21.2 19.3 53.8 23.1 21.3 55.6 25.1 x 32 RECORD AND RESULTS OF 6» 20™ 278.2 7 07 08 7 08 29.1 at 6" 21™ are 0.50 31.1 upp. ther. 71.3 33.2. low. “ 0.4 R. 59.6 01.5 03.6 05.6 07.6 09.6 x 11.6 13.7 15.7 17.6 1927 L. 24.7 26.7 28.7 30.7 at 74 9™ are 0.33 32.7 upp. ther. 72.5 34.7 x low. “ 172.0 36.8 at 74 19™ 405.0 the vibra- 38.8 tion of pendulum was 40.8 from left to right, the 42.7 central transit occur- 44.8 ing at the even second. Reversed to No. 1. R. 7 24 48.1 Pendulum was reversed 50.1 at about 75 LO™; face 52.1 No. 1 swinging and 54.1 towards the telescope. 56.1 58.1 25 00.2 X observer, G. P. B. 02.1 04.1 06.1 08.1 10.2 12.2 L. 7 25 17.1 at 75 25™ arc 4°.45 7 27 7 30 19.1 wow G2 BO BO bo bo SS eae bbe be bo R. 24.6 26.5 28.5 x« 30.5 32.5 35.5t 37.6 39.6 41.6 43.5 X 45.6 47.6 49.6 51.5 R. 31.0 at 72 29™ are 4.30 33.0 35.0 7" 30" 375.0 39.0 x 41.0 43.1 45.0 47.0 L. 7 30 50.0 at 74 30™ are 4.17 52.0 54.0 56.1 58.0 « 31 00.0 02.1 aT (Ss) [oe 9} h 39™ upp. ther. 73°.3 Lowel enaza9 aI oo ao is oe iJS) 2 oo -1 R. 12 14 35.9 at 12 08™ are 0.26 38.0 at 12 14 upp. ther. 7 7 2 40.0 w low. “ 3 3: 2. s WWWwWWNWONNNNHEE eH BESSSSSSNSRSsoaeS cocormooooooseoooNeS R. 48.5 50.5 52.5 54.5 X 56.5 58.6 18 00.5 L. 12 18 07.4 09.4 11.4 13.4 12 17 12” 18™15*.5 16 (17 56 2 56 19 18 . B. 21. =T O09 woven” bpp SH Se bib we x L 12 22 42.1 44.2 46.2 48.2 50.3 x - - - at 12" 24™ upp. ther. 72°.8 §4.2 G3 Owens 56.2 bar. 29.790 58.2 at. ther. 74 Reversed to face No. 3, swinging and towards the telescope. R (?)2 observer, G. P. B. 21.0 23.0 25.0 x- 27.0 29.0 31.1 L (2)? 38.0 40.0 42.1 x 44.0 46.1 48.0 R. 48.7 at 16" 15™ upp. ther. 70°.2 50.7 ss low. ‘ 69.0 arc 0.43 21.6 at 174 18™ are 0.25 23.7 25.6 27.6 29.6 L. 32.7 upp. ther. 70°.0 34.7 low. ‘“ ~ 68.9 36.7 & bar. 29.830 38.7 at. ther. 71. 40.7 The last sets of observations, face Nos. 1 and 3, were taken without any alterations of the case from its position for Nos. 2 and 4. ' Should be L. 2 As assumed by Mr. Sonntag; left blank in MS. To judge from the rate of the clock it should be L. and R. [Scu.] ASTRONOMICAL AND GHODETIC OBSERVATIONS. 30 FORMULA AND METHOD OF REDUCTION. 7 To render the results obtained at different places comparable with each other, the observed number of vibrations require the following corrections, that for rate of clock having first been applied. Reduction to Infinitely Small Are. The duration of a vibration in any small are is always greater than in an infinitely small arc, the correction to the observed number of vibrations is therefore additive. Let A = the initial semi-are of vibration a =the terminal semi-are of vibration N —number of vibrations in a given time; M sin (A+a) sin (A—a) __ N M sin? 1° Ar—a then the correction —= N —_— / d : 32 (log. sin A—log. sin a) 32 log. A—log. a At Cambridge the number, N, of vibrations in a mean solar day is about 86420, at Port Foulke about 86550, and since I, the logarithmic modulus — 0.4342945, the an becomes [9.55295] and [9.55361] respectively logarithm of the factor NV - 3 for these localities. Correction for Temperature of Pendulum. For a higher temperature than the adopted standard temperature, the pendulum becomes longer, and the number of vibrations are diminished; the correction to N is therefore positive, for a lower temperature than the standard temperature, the correction is negative. ,» Let e = coefficient of expansion of the material of the pendulum bar ¢ = observed temperature {= standard temperature then the correction = N © (t—t) 2 The average temperature of the pendulum, when swung at Cambridge, was about 71°, and at Port Foulke about 23° Fah. I have therefore adopted 50° Fah. as a convenient standard temperature. Reliable determinations of e for 1° Fah. seem to vary between 0.0000104 and 0.0000105, taking the mean and using WN as above we find for the coefficient of t—#, the value 0.4511 for Cambridge, and 0.4518 for Port Foulke, or the logarithmic factors [9.65428] and [9.65494] respectively Correction for Buoyancy. As the pendulum was not swung in a rarified medium to ascertain the correction for buoyancy and resistance experimentally, we use the coefficient determined by Bailey (see Vol. VII, p. 27, Memoirs Royal Astronomical Society). 5 May, 1865. 84. RECORD AND RESULTS OF Let @= reading of barometer in inches, and reduced to 32° Fah. ¢—=temperature,of the air in degrees of Fah.; then the correction to the number of vibrations made in a mean solar day by a brass pendulum = 0.3541 B 1 + 0.0023 (¢— 82) The average reading of the barometer (reduced to 32°) at Cambridge is 29'".72, and at Port Foulke 29.82, the observations have therefore been referred to the convenient average reading 29".8 by the formula 0.3541 (38 —%) 1 + 0.0023 @— 32) The average ¢ at Cambridge is 70°.9, and at Port Foulke + 22°.8 hence the cor- rection for Cambridge 0.325 (@—29.8), and for Port Foulke 0.362 (6— 29.8). The reduction to vacuum is always additive. ‘The variations from the average ¢ at either place are small. ‘ Reduction to the Level of the Sea. Let NV —number of vibrations at the elevated station N, = corresponding number at the sea level H =the elevation and R= the earth’s radius, then the reduction to the number of vibrations in a day (see Vol. VII, p. 28, Mem. Roy. Ast. Soc.) 0.666 N =e correction which is always additive. For Cambridge we have 0.00276 H, and for Port Foulke 0.00277 H, the elevation, above half tide being expressed in feet. - From the preceding record the following abstract of observed times, arcs, temper- atures and atmospheric pressure has been formed. The first column contains the number of observed times united into a mean; the second column the average clock times of vibrations from right to left; for an odd number of times the mean corresponding to the middle one is set down; for an even number either the first or last observation was omitted; the middle times, in all cases are marked thus x in the preceding record; the third column contains the arcs of vibration; when not directly observed they were interpolated by a graphical process, the arcs are inversely as the squares of the times, and the curves constructed on a sufficiently large scale proved them to be quite smooth and regular ; the fourth column contains the average temperatures observed or interpolated. The next column contains similar information for vibrations from left to right, and the last column gives the observed height of the barometer when referred to tem- perature 32° Fah. The first means for face 3 have been corrected by subtracting one second to refer to “right” and “left” respectively. ASTRONOMICAL AND GEODETIC OBSERVATIONS. By) Reduction of Pendulum Experiments made in July, 1860, at Cambridge, Mass. Clock times, R. c 0 Clock times, L. 13 57™ 23°21 : 5 13% -57™ 485.25 14 O07 02.81 é : 27.91 15 03 46.03 . : 35.26 16 14.16 ; ; 59.38 17 26.43 : ; 05.57 a 48.14 : ; 31.20 aT Oo Ol 09 C9 09 TOO B® CO CD CO aT aT aT et aT tT RO LO LO G2:10 LO 19 Cow TtR wo wT 12 56 25.002} 3. 56 42.04) SOO} == 1,004 16 19 52.70 A 59. 20 07.60 16 18 25.69 2 59. 18 36.70 The following reduction gives, in the first place, the intervals of the clock times obtained, for face 4, by subtracting the first mean from the fourth, the second from the fifth, and the third from the sixth; for face 2 by omitting the means at 4 hours as they will contribute almost nothing to the accuracy of the result, and then pro- ceeding as in the preceding case for face 4; for face 1 by the same treatment after omitting the central mean, and for face 3 by subtracting the first from the second and third means. These clock intervals are next reduced to mean time intervals by application of a correction for rate (7). It was found convenient to apply this correction separately for rate of clock on sidereal time, for which purpose a small table was computed extending to 5 hours, and secondly for acceleration of sidereal on mean time. 36 RECORD AND RESULTS OF The mean time intervals, expressed in seconds, are followed by the corresponding number of vibrations performed in the intervals from which, by proportion, the number of vibrations N performed in a day are computed. ‘The corrections for arc, temperature, and atmospheric pressure were computed by the formule given above. Correction Mean time | Number | Corres. No. Corrections for for rate. intervals. |of vibr’s.| in a day. Arc. Temp. Atm. pr. Vibr’s right Face | 4. 2 08™ 50.95 7709°.58 | 7710 | 86404.71 | +1.39| 49.47] .00 | 86415.57 3 02 23.62 10913.39 | 10914 | $6404.80 | +0.91| +9.29 15.00 253 02.11 10353.43 | 10354 | 86404.74 | +0.30| 49.11 14.15 Vibr’s left 209 11.13 7729.71 | 7730 | 96403.24 | +1.89] 49.44 86414.10 3 02 37.66 10927.38 | 10928 | 86405.92 | +0.91| +9.29 16.12 12 52 55.94 10347.27 | 10348 | 86406.10 | +0.30| +9.11 15.51 86415.07 f Clock intervals. Vibr’s right LEGS) 2 2 36 20.81 s 9354.89 | 9356 | 86410.26 + 8.57 : 86420.46 Bib ByLib : 11642.49 | 11644 | 86411.20 +8.75 21.21 63 54 08.96 b 14010.13 | 14012 | 86411.54 +9.11 21.53 f Vibr’s left ¢ A 2 36 10.91 5 9345.02 9346 | 86410.68 +8.57 : 86420 84 3 14 28.82 32. 11636.57 | 11638 | 86410.62 +8.75 20.61 3 53 57.08 8. 13998.23 | 14000 | 86411.83 + 9.11 21.82 86421.08 ) Vibr’s right 9G | Ue 4 49 49.88 5 17341.82 | 17344 | 86410.86 5 : 86422.48 94 50 25.99 | : 17877.83 | 17380 | 86410.78 ; 22.33 94 51 52.17 ° 17463.78 | 17466 | 86410.98 ; 22.30 Vibr’s left 1 4 50 03.86 : 17855.76 | 17858 | 86411.16 } 86422.78 #4 50 33.95 ba 17385.77 | 17888 | 86411.06 ; 22.61 #4 51 52.19 se 17463.80 | 17466 | 86410.90 S 22.22 86422.45 ) Vibr’s right 1DEED |) 7 3 23 28.70 3. 12174.96 | 12176 | 86407.38 | 41.10 Y); 86417.82 4 22 01.62 3. 15678.18 | 15680 | 86410.02 | +0.68 4 20.00 } Vibr’s left 93 23 26.56 33. 12172.82 | 12174 | 86408.36 | +1.10.} : 86418.80 14 21 55.66 : 15672.24 | 15674 | 86409.68 | +0.68 E 19.66 86419.07 We have therefore the following resulting number of vibrations performed at Cambridge in a mean solar day, the temperature of the pendulum being 50° Fah., and the atmospheric pressure 29.8 inches (with the mercury at the temperature of freezing water), ASTRONOMICAL AND GEODETIC OBSERVATIONS. Bri First position of pendulum. After reversal, end for end. Face 4 swinging, 86415.07 Face 1 swinging, 86422.45 CAO 3 86421.08 98 3} 86419.07 Mean, 86418.08 Mean, 86420.76 Mean of two positions . ‘ : : . 86419.42 Correction for 80! feet elevation above half tide + . : F k 5 : 29, Resulting number of vibrations at the level of the gea in the latitude of Cambridge 86419.64 The Cambridge Observatory is in latitude 42° 22’ 51.5 Observations connected with Pendulum Experiments at Port Foulke. The following observations for local time at Port Foulke were taken for the special purpose of furnishing the chronometer rate required for the pendulum experiments. The observed double altitudes of a Lyra, September 22d and October 17th, 1860, given in the preceding part of the astronomical record, belong to the same series. Observations for time, October 1, 1860. Double altitudes of o Lyre, with reflecting circle. A. Sonntag, observer. Index | ce aa ey oe a a Correction + 1’ 11’’.7 Pocket chronometer 2% Pocket chronometer 2% 10® 34™ 088 81° 53’ ae 10" 44™ 038 86° 56! La 35 20 46 110 44° 54 an 36 09 41 on 46 04 44 10? 31 08 35 3 47 18 Bo en 38 08 30 ‘tg 48 09 32 12 38 57 24 a 49 02 26 6 39 57 20 430 49 44 23 140 40 55 15 440 50 28 19 130 49 13 « 08 fio 51 55 ia V6 43 08 01 {89 52 49 05 a seal WO EN RY Ik PX — PO Die in 9 90N90 = T = + 16°.5, B = 29.693 at 20 Index $7 Ai ee aay an ; Corr’n + 1’ 08’'.3 (As in preceding cases, the observations were combined two by two.) Refr’n for first pair — 1’ 04’'.7, for last —1’ 06'’.6 x's declination 6 = + 38° 39’ 35’’.4, right ascension a = 18" 32™ 13%.9 Sidereal time at mean noon 12" 42™ 33°.6; the sidereal time is converted into mean time, and AT’ is the chronometer correction on mean local time. 1 Annals of the Observatory, Vol. 1, Part I, p. xvi. 38 T 10> 34" 445 Double altitudes of a Lyre, with reflecting circle. aL AQ Le AQP oe 1” Index 41) A) 0 BD a TO Pocket chronometer Qx 10" 46" 595 86° 04 SD 48 37 85 5A eo 50 19 45 190 51 31 38 ee 53 32 25 So 54 32 19 tea 55 35 14 a 56 25 09 ae BT 45 00 ee 58 35 ga 55 110 i OO 1) AT ae 01 07 40 28 02 10 34 Ned 03 Ol 29 ey 03 49 24 156 05 06 15 So ene (Yat a T = + 13°.6, B= 29.841 at 27° Index 1a toe ial ONO YT, RECORD AND RESULTS OF h 48° 54’ 30’’ t 58° 54’ 40'' Observations for time, October 2, 1860. = —1]! 13/7.3 8 = + 38° 39! 35//.4 Sidereal time at mean noon, ue chronometer 11" 20" 35 +1! 30” +1 30 458 4] 35 49 37 23 14 35 59 41! 00” +1 10 Correction + 1’ —50 58.4+0%9 A. Sonntag, observer t Correction + 0/ 48’’.3 2% 820 43/ eee gy le. a a 0 iN a 0 12 af 81 57 {40 wit ole 35 410 28 130 23 a ar {00 rl ne 16’’.6 \ Corr’n = +17 15” ASTRONOMICAL AND GHODETIC OBSERVATIONS. 39 T h t AT 108 47™ 488 42° 59’ 14’ 63° 43’ 30! —48m 498 10 50 55 42 50 17 64 29 25 52 10 54 02 42 40 43 65 18 26 44 10 56 00 42 35 19 65 45 57 52 10 58 10 42 28 32 66 20 30 44 11] 00 43.5 42 21 24 66 56 42 44 Il 02 35.5 42 15 29 67 26 42 46 ell 04 27.5 ADA OR Reit 67 56 18 40 ii Bil 1s 41 19 58 72 05 09 53 11 23 12 Aalto 8 12 BB 50 11 25 00 41 08 19 73 038 09 48 11 26 54.5 41 02 20 1 82 BB 44 11 29 05.5 40 55 538 74 04 50 48 11 381 16.5 40 48 50 74 39 49 39 11 33 17.5 40 42 25 75> 11 34 33 rejected Tl 385 27.5 40 386 38 75 40 10 49 Mean é : 5 HIB AS Se (05.17 Observations for time, October 9, 1860. Double altitudes of o Lyre, with reflecting circle. A. Sonntag, observer. (+1' 90'' +1’ 00’’ fh iY 10’ a Index TAI id 40 50 40 50 Correction +1’ 3 Pocket chronometer 2 Pocket chronometer 2x Lm 33% 42% 84° 40! Bo. 10" 50™ 08° 83° 09! co 34 32 36 459 50 54 s2 ot 15H 85, 29 30 a0 51 43 53 130 some 25 130 59 85 48 tp ne | i ba | owiR y 0 ere pa | a ee: en | off el aes 45 18 30 “a 11 00 02 2 1 2 ae 26 Pe 0 55 81 57 140 46 52 22 i ee 58 3 47 58 15 100 2 48 45 ie 48 42 10 es 3 36 41 ao . of 4 ’ RO f? A , A T = +4 19°.5, B= 30.072 at 30° Index is a i ou a a a a \ Corr’n + 1’ 59".5 r= — 1’ 08".7 r,=—l 127.3 6 = + 38° 39’ 35.3 == IGP BO ey Sidereal time at mean noon, 13 14 06.1 40 10" 34 ft! Index Pocket chronometer 54™ 478 10° 56 58 4 01 3) RECORD AND RESULTS OF t 67° 10 67 3 / 00” Observations for time, October 10, 1860. Double altitudes of a Lyre, with reflecting circle. +1’ 40” +1 30 +1/ 20" +1 T = + 12°.5, Bar. 307.050 at 25° =—1' 15.3 r= — 1’ 12.9 Dy 10" 55™ 248 11 23.5 14.5 46.5 26.5 03.5 19.5 08 UB 4 5 = + 38° 39’ 35.2 Sidereal time at mean noon, * h 41° 03’ 00 Index 19/’ +0’ 40'") +0 40 § Pocket chronometer 05™ 385 ne (+1 20 +1 20 +0 40 § aT —48™ 568 —48 54.9 + 056 A. Sonntag, observer. 7 15 16 (+1' 30” +1 20” 40 50”) a= 182 BI" BET 13 18 02.6 Correction = + 1’ 08/'.3 2%, © ggr 40" 81° 03/4 49 80 54 +50 48 § 39 16 Correction + 1’ 10” —48 50.1 + 11 24 ASTRONOMICAL AND GEODETIC OBSERVATIONS. 41 RECAPITULATION OF OBSERVED CORRECTION OF PockET CHRONOMETER AT PorT FOULKE, IN CONNECTION WITH PENDULUM EXPERIMENTS. 1860. 1860. 1860. 1860. 1860. 1860. September 22 at 11" chronometer time October October October October October fh! ih all @) Jil @) UL ly Ue AT on mean time. —50™ 43°.3 + 0°.9 4 i —)d0 58.4 0.9 f —48 46.8 0.7 2 i —48 54.9 0.6 . s —48 50.1 11 of oe —48 58.5 0.7 The chronometer changed its correction about 2".2 between 9 A. M. and 3 P. M., October 2d; retarded or stopped in consequence of a hair having become entangled in one of the hands. The actual rate of the pocket chronometer, during the pendulum experiments, is found by means of comparisons of the pocket chronometer with three mean time chronometers ; comparisons were made at the beginning and end of each daily set of pendulum experiments. Chronometer comparisons for correction and rate of mean time chronometers 2007, 1062, and 740. (Those for September 22d have already been given.) Rocket chronometer. Mean time. Chronometers. 11> 25™ 24°50 | 102 34™ 2556 | 2007: 32 26™ 26 54.0) | 10) 35. 55.6) |) 1062) 3 25 28 31.2 | 10 3% 32:8 740: 3 2" October Pocket chronometer. Mean time. Chronometers. 11® 027 15%.3{ 10° 13" 2855 | 2007: 3" 05™ Aer) |) IM 18 SO) UOee3 & O83 4 21.0 | 10 15 34.2 740: 3 05 October Pocket chronometer. Mean time. Chronometers. 10" 39" 02°.0 92 50™ 078.1 | 2007: 28 41™ 39 41.9 9 50 47.0 | 1062: 2 40 41 21.9 9 52 27.0 740: 2 42 October Pocket chronometer. Mean time. Chronometers. 105 527 048.0 | 102 03" 135.9 | 2007: 28 54™ 52. 42.2 | 10 03 52.1 | 1062: 2 53 53 22.5°| 10 04 32.4 740; 2 54 October Pocket chronometer. Mean time. Chronometers. 10" 05™ 23%.0 Oe NG OYE | Oye OF = 06 51.4 Q ik 629) |) NOBQs QD ly Oe BRI Q) 1S BRO 740: 2 8 October 31, 1860. a7 Pocket Pocket chronometer. Mean time. Chronometers. 9B O4™ 508.0) |"82 35™ 3428) | 20072 12 96" 25 53.6 | 8 36 38.4 | 1062: 1 26 26,3930) 58) 38> 23858 740; 1 27 6 May, 1865. October 1, 1860. AT at Port Foulke. —4" 51™ 348.4 —4 49 04.4 —4 49 27.2 2, 1860. aT —4" 51™ 315.5 | Two sets -of comparisons were —4 49 03.8 taken, according within a frac- —4 49 25.8] tion of a second. The value given is the mean. 9, 1860. AT —4" 50™ 528.9 | Two sets of comparisons were —4 49 13.0 | taken; they do not differ by —4 49 33.0 | more than 0*2. 10, 1860. AT —4" 50™ 46%.1 | Two sets were taken; greatest —4 49 07.9 difference 08.4; the mean is —4 49 27.6 | here given. 17, 1860. AT —4» 50™ 35°.5 | Mean of two sets; values do not —4 49 07.1 | differ by more than a fraction of —4 49 26.4 a second. chronometer — 49™ 158.2 + 08.7. aT ——4h) 507 255.9 —4 49 21.6 —4 49 36.2 - 42 ; RECORD AND RESULTS OF If we combine the values of AZ’ for October 1 and October 2, viz: —4" 51" 335.0, —4* 49™ 03°.8, —4" 49™ 26°.5 respectively, also the values for October 9 and October 10, viz: —4" 50™ 49°.5, —4" 49™ 10°.5, —4" 49™ 30°.3 respectively, we deduce the following table of daily rates :— Daily rate of mean time chronometers. - 2007 1062 740 1860. September 22, 17" chronometer time | +0288 4.05.86 ; 28.64 1860. October Dea 3 ore oe : 1860. October 10, 3 “ “ a Ose Fe ee 1860. October 117, 14 “ “ ire ie Laieo 1860. October 31, 13 “ “ an Ut aia: eek PENDULUM EXPERIMENTS AT PORT FOULKE. Explanatory Remarks and Record of Observations. The pendulum was swung at the Port Foulke Observatory on the same knife edges as at Cambridge, the experiments extending over fourteen days between September 26th and October 12th, 1860. These observations were made by Mr. August Sonntag, assisted by Mr. H. Radcliff. The initial letters of the observer's name are attached to each set of experiments. The following information is taken from notes made by Mr. Sonntag. ~ “From a preliminary set of observations on the morning of September 26th, it was found that at a temperature of 22° Fah. the pendulum made very nearly 3607 vibrations in 3600 seconds of the pocket chronometer. The time was noted when the swinging knife-edge passed the zero of the gradu- ated arc. The pendulum being at rest, this zero appeared 0°.05 to the right (in an inverting telescope) of the point of the knife-edge, producing a small difference in the intervals when the pendulum was swinging from left to right and when swing- ing in the opposite direction; the mean of the intervals, however, is not affected thereby. The observations were always commenced with a set marked ‘Left,’ the pendu- lum when seen through the inverting telescope appearing to swing from left to right ; immediately after a set is taken with the pendulum appearing in the opposite direction marked ‘ Right.’ Each set consists generally of eleven observations at intervals of ten seconds, the mean is given at the bottom. ‘The times are recorded by means of the pocket chronometer. ‘The semi-arcs are recorded, counted from the middle either way. The azimuth of the plane of vibration was nearly N. W. and 8. EK.” The following description of the Observatory was received from Dr. Hayes: The Port Foulke Observatory was a small frame structure, eight feet square, by seven feet high in the centre, the roof pitching only one way. It was covered on the outside with canvas, and was lined internally with bear, seal, and other skins. To give greater warmth and solidity the snow was, during the winter, banked up around it, covering it almost completely. It was erected on the first of a series of terraces which lay northeast from the anchorage, and its foundation was thirty-eight feet above the mean tidal level. The rock on which it stood was primitive (a dark reddish-brown syenite), which rose on either side of the harbor into hills from six nay ASTRONOMICAL AND GEODETIC OBSERVATIONS. 43 to eight hundred feet high. It faced to the southwest, its axis being nearly in the magnetic meridian. The pendulum apparatus was erected in the autumn. The foot of the box con- taining it rested upon the solid rock, and the instrument stood in the S. E. (mag.) corner, facing N. W. (mag.). Experiments, set 1, face 1. September 26th P. M. 1860. Observer, A. Sonntag. | 2° 49" 295.5 39.0 BewWNre oO bo bo bo bo bo R. 2h 50™ 468 3 02 13.08 6 42 35.5 6 43 25.17 £9 52.68 | © L. 2" 53™ 095 3 08 21.18 6 5 1 Omitted in 54 48.8 54 09.06 mean. R. A byes: SASS 6 56 6 56 03.83 Pock. Chron’r 3h Deduced hourly rate 08.30 (between and 6"). at 25 48™ are (1°.85 j 1.78 temp. (27°.5 Fah. 1 24.5 bar. 29.720 at 299.5 at 28 58™ arc (19.58 1 1.50 at 6" 40™ are (0°.18 1 0.12 (0.17 at 6" 57™ arc 10.10 temp. (23.3 22.0 bar. 29.810 at 32.8 Chronometer comparisons A.M. No. | gt 41™ 598.0 = 12 43™ by 2007 § 42 39.8 4] 1062 | 43 16.3 42 740 | P. M. 00.2 40.7 17.2 1.0 42.2 2007 1062 740 } 2007 | 1062 | 740 21 21 22 03 4 5 bo bo bo mom Re Oo bl 44 RECORD AND RESULTS OF Set 2, face 1. R. 7 33 02.5 | at 72 25™ are (1°.52 {1.42 temp. § 24.3 (23.0 bar. 29.810 at 32°.0 7 30 03 1 32 35.5 Rs at 7" 35™ are (1°.30 —|——__— 1 1.22 4 29 19.95] 7 81 45.63 7 38 7 48 1°.10 h Ling >, at 72 48™ arc 1.08 temp. on 05 7 44 25.0 © 43.86 | 7 43 10 50 5 | at 10" 45™ are (0°.19 {0.13 ) at 10" 54™ are (0°.19 10 52 { 0.13 54.85 |10 49 01.85 |10 51 16.05 | 10 53 10.91 10 57 10.8 Chronometer comparisons 20.7 Pock. Chron’r P.M. 30.6 11" 56™ 018.5 = 3" 57™ by 2007 40.4 56 40.9 55 1062 | 50.6 58 17.3 57 740 § 00.6 10.6 20.6 30.3 40.2 een 6" and 12") + °.14 24°. at 11> 0™ temp. tae bar. 29.700 at 279.8 * ~ Deduced hourly rate (betw ASTRONOMICAL AND GEODETIC OBSERVATIONS. 45 Experiments, set 3, face 1. September 27 A. M. L. R. L. R. fio 18 48 | 10 21 128 |10 24 41 |10 26 46 | at 10*18™ are (29.05 : 58.3 22.8 51.2 BB corr, (UGO tL Leth 08 32.5 01.5 06 Ps 18 49.5 11.3 16 | bar. 29°%,752 at 21°.5 28 52.8 21 26 LS, 888 |S 08 |S) Se ML 83 48 12.8 41 45.8 57.8 29,5 51 56 08 32.5 01.3 06 ors iN 18 49 : 11 16 at 10" 29™ one 4 1.60 [10 20 27.8 |10 22 525 |10 26 21 |10 28 96 (te J 10 19 38.04] 10 22 02.61/10 25 31.15 | 10 27 35.98 [Cr coca eae ce a a fay Se a HE : fio 31 567 | 10 34 39.3 |10 87 16.2 |10 89 485 | at 10" 49” are {1°40 06.8 49.3 26 58.4 he 16.8 59.1 35.9 08.7 26.8 09.4 45.8 |, 18.17 36.1 19.2 56 28.5 Him AGS | anid, OQ How, OS eek, BO 56.6 39.3 16 48.6 06.8 49.2 25.8 58.6 17.0 59.2 35.1 08.5 27.0 09.1 45.8 18.5 [10 33 37.0 | 10 36 19.0 |10 38 55.8 | 10 41 285 110 32 46.79 |10 35 29.21|10 38 05.91/10 40 38.56 10 43 33 | 10 45 32 237 153 | 2 39 11.8 | at 23smare (0°16 ! 43 41.8 25 21.5 (23°.2 1 0.10 53. 51.8 35 31.5 | '™P- ) 21.0 : 03.2 02 45 41.5 | dar. 29.726 at 24.0 13 12 55 51.8 Des ose Ass 5108 | AIS 05 Ast ons | 32.8 31.5 15 11.5 43 41.8 25 21.8 53 51.8 35 31.5 ean 03 02 45 41.5 [at 246" are 4" og 10 45 128 |10 47 19 2 38 55 2 40 51.3 ie f10 44 22.98|10 46 21.86| 2 38 05.03| 2 40 01.59 2 41 30.5 | 2 43 312 | 2 46 20 2 48 16.7 40.8 41 29.9 26.1 50.5 51 40 36.8 00.5 01 49.8 46.8 | 10.5 il 00.1 56.5 [AS S053 NE Ol mem, To) Eee, Onn 30.5 31 20.2 16.6 40.5 41 3 26.6 50.5 51 40 36.6 00.5 00.8 49.7 46.4 2 4B 108 | 2 a i 2 48 00 249 56.6 2 42 20.51 | 2 44 21.00] 2 47 09.97 | 2 49 06.64 46 bo 5 ol Lo > RS CONS FA ee SO 13.45 Ge B Go G9 L2 Go GD G9 Oy G2 G2 He 09 09 O1 0D Gd o> OL O-T RECORD 2 53 13.90 Pock. Chron’r + *.02 Deduced hourly rate (between 9" and 3") AND RESULTS OF Chronometer comparisons A. M. 35 «42.8 3 P.M. 9g 34™ 03°77 = 1* 35™ by, 2007 | 4 1062 | 36 19.7 740 | 41 04.5 2007 | 42 42.7 1062 | 46 19.8 740 | Experiments, Set 4, face 3. September 28. 0 51 43.25 1 00 lH. R. 28.3 38.3 48.3 58.3 08.3 18.2 28.2 38.1 48.2 58.2 08.3 18.24 17.3 27.3 07.07 0 55 O1 30.8 0 56 40.8 38.06 1 04 1 03 13.11 Per2) Lor TI 12 59:89 0 55 50.95 1 04 18 28 37.8 47.8 57.9 H.R. 08 IEE) 27.8 37.9 47.7 1 05 57.9 1 05 07.88 1 36 58 1 37 47.98 0 56 53.8 03.8 13.8 23.5 33.5 43.5 53.5 03.5 13.5 23.3 a 0 58 33.3 0 57 48.55 1 06 227 1 07 12.59 1 38 52.5 02.8 12.8 22.5 82.5 42.5 at 0" 50™ are {19.56 at 0 40 01.38 temp. 20°.2 ie 297.536 at 279.5 / 21.0 either side of this mark. (1°.42 h mM op p) at 0° 59™ are {1.22 at 1" 084™ are ee at; 1* 49m 1 39 42.61 The time was noted when the | knife-edge passed a mark 0°.1 to the left (in inverting tele- | scope) from the zero line. The } elongations were equal on | ASTRONOMICAL AND GEODETIC OBSERVATIONS. 47 L. R. L. R. 9 48 50.5 | 2 45 57 5 00 82.8 | & OD oh at 28 50m (260.4 00.3 OT 42 35 temp. 1 24 3 10.2 17 52 A moe 20.3 27 02.5 55 bar. 29.516 at 29°.3 30 37 12 05 A.S. 40 AS, 68 || Ao Sb 22 A S15) 50 56.8 32.3 25 00 06.8 42.9 34.8 (00.99 10.5 16.5 52 45 at 55 0™ are - 0.02 20 26.5 02.5 55 og.05 = 0-02 9 45 30 9 47 36.5 \| 5 02 12/3 7] 5 04 05 temp. ( 24.3 9 44 40.16 | 2 46 46.81] 5 O01 2219] 5 03 14.98 | bar. 29.508 at 32°.5 5 94 32 506 28 || 09 Gis) BH isl Ie.) 42 36.8 31.4 30. 52 46.8 41.3 39.8 02 56.8 51.3 50 12 06.8 01.7 00.2 A Se PAL BS TEL IR, TUL IR IR, 10.9 31.5 26.5 21.3 20.1 41.8 36.5 31.2 30.2 51.3 46.5 41.3 40.2 02 56.5 51.3 50.2 5 06 12 5 08 065 | Bil OLS] 6 18 Ooi 5 05 21.87 | 5 OF 16.64] 5 10 11.38].5 12 10.08 09 13 39 5 15 35.3 Chronometer comparisons 48.7 45.3 58.7 55 6 Pock. Chron’r| 0 4™ 8°3 = 42 5™ by 2007 08.9 05.4 4 45.2 3 1062 18.8 15.5 Ba 5 22.47 4 740 | H.R. 28:5 | H.R. 25.3 oS 38.6 35.6 tale A BS 88 8 20 2007 “48.6 45.3 228 40 45.9 3 1062 58.7 55.8 Bos 41 29.3 40 740 | 08.8 05.4 sat : 5 15 18.8 5 IG 16.8 2 = ll ————— _———— iS) Ss 5 14 28.74] 5 16 25.41 ac Experiments, set 5, face 3. September 29. 0 45 43.5 0) 47 82:8 +10) 49 25:3) | 0 51 24 at 08 442™ are (1°.96 3. 2 : emp. 1 15.8 13.8 02.8 55.3 54 93.5 12.8 05.3 04 bar. 29.596 at 14°.2 JAG BAS |S Sas |S IS JAS 4 43.5 32.5 25.5 24 53.5 49.3 35 34 3.5 52.5 45.3 44 (19.48 118% 02.5 SES 54 at 08 534" are 5 Leet 0 47 23.5 0 49 12.5 0 51 05.5 0 53 04 {Hebe 0 46 33.58 | 3 48 22.56} 0 50 15.31 | 0 52 14.03 48 RECORD AND RESULTS OF L. R. 0 54 05.2 OSG 2 15.2 31.6 25.2 41.4 34.9 51.4 44.8 01.4 (280, Dein bf | del, Jey ley 04.9 21.5 14.8 31.4 24.8 41.4 34.6 51.4 0 55 44.8 0 58 01.5 0 54 54.91 | 0 57 11.49 1 03 23.5 1 05 16.5 33.5 26.5 43.5 36.5 53.5 46.5 04 56.5 As Ss WB PANS S| O85 23.5 16.5 33.5 26.5 43.3 36.5 53.5 46.5 1 05 03.5 1 06 56.2 1 04 13.53 | 1 06 06.47 24 4 57 17 34 27 44 37 54 47 04.3 57 ING Shi elle A.S. 07 24 17 34 27 44 37 54 46.8 4 57 04.5 4 58 57 4 56 14.07 | 4 58 06.98 5 03 33.3 5 05 24 43.2 34 53. 43.8 03.3 53.8 3.2 04.1 HOR 22302) — | ees Ree 4 33.2 24.2 43.2 34 53.2 43.8 03.3 53.8 5,105) 1352 5 OT 04.0 5 06 13.95 L. 0 58 28.4 38.2 H. R. SoOOF, GC De A.S8. 48.5 4 52 08.65 4 59 39.7 49.6 59.8 09.9 19.9 H. R. 30 39.6 49.6 59.8 09.8 DOM 9s8 29.77 | 5 00 R. 1 O01 21.1 50.8 1 02 01.0 1 01 11.02 59.9 4 55 05.5 4 54 15.44 5 01 40.4 50.4 00.6 10.7 20.6 30.6 40.3 50.4 00.4 10.4 20.4 5 02 During the last sets of obser- vations a very heavy gale shook the skins with which the observatory is lined, but it appeared not to affect the motion of the pendulum. at 1" 023" are (19.52 U 128 at 45 51™ arc at 4 50™ 14°.5 temp. 16.6 (0°.2 1 0.02 1 bar. 29.658 at 20°.0 npgmare | 00-22 at 4" 59 Oso) 0.01 Chronometer comparisons Pock. Chron’r Or 08" 125.0 = 4" 9™ by 2007 8 47.1 7 1062 9 24.0 8 740 4 31 1382 8 382 2007 82 47.8 1062 33 25.2 740 ASTRONOMICAL AND GEODETIC OBSERVATIONS. 49 DS Ee, Experiments, set 6, face 8, October 2. L. 10 12 32 42 52 02 12 22, 32 42. 52 02 10 14 12 A. S. 10 13 22.08 22 13.2 23.2 10 10 31 54 04 45.00 10 23 03.15 R. L. 10 14 382 10 18 13.00 | 10 17 10 25 35.85 | 10 27 10 34 O07 2 15 16.5 10 35 46.5 | 2 17 265 16 36.55 10 34 56.75 | 2 2 21 38.8 2 2 24 15.7 25.6 35.4 45.3 55.4 05.6 15.6 25.5 35.2 45.4 55.4 2 25 25 2 22 28.81] 2 7 May, 1865 10 16 25.5 05.46 R. 10 18 20.8 30.5 40.5 50.5 00.5 10.5 20.5 30.5 40.5 50.5 10 20 00.5 10 19 10.53 10 30 10 29 387.45 2 17 47.0 57.3 07.3 17.5 27.5 87.5 47.3 57.5 07.3 17.3 27.3 37.35 10.5 20.4 30.4 40.3 50.2 00.2 10.4 20.3 30.2 40.2 27 50.1 2 27 00.29 9 a at 10" 11™ are (19.95 ) 1K at 10" 0™ temp. bar. 29.762 at 22°.0 (15°.0 1 16.0 h 9(¢ylm » §1°.69 at 10% 205™ are 11.49 at 10" 31™ are (1°.47 U 1.25 at 2" 15™ are (0°.23 temp. §238°.2 { 0.03 q 21.0 par. 29'",898 at 30°.5 50 RECORD AND RESULTS OF at 2° 30™ are (0°.21 01.8 0.01 11.8 Comparison of chronometers 21.8 Pock. chronom’r | 9" 32™ 25%.7 = 12 33™ by 2007 § 31.7 33 55.5 32 1062 41.7 35 32.8 34 740 | 51.7 01.8 | N. B. Of this set no use has | The chronometer changed its cor- 11.8 been made. rection 2™ 10° between 9 A.M. 21.7 and 3 P. M. (October 2). For } 31.7 later comparisons see further } — on. 41.75 Experiments, set 7, face 3. October 2. at 2" 46™ are 19.3 "8. | at 2" 542" are (19.55 48 29 oy Go Ty esi 2 47 39.46 32.05 | 2 51 29.03 | 2 53 27.75 23 1 2 59 16 3 01 04.8 at 3" 4™ arc 19.43 é 26 14.8 1.21 35.8 24.7 at 3" 5™ 45.7 34.6 | temp. §27°.0 55.8 44.5 C 24.5 H.R. 05.9 | H.R. 54.5 16 04.7 25.8 14.6 35.8 24.5 45.7 34.4 2 59 03.1 3 0 55.8 3 02 44.5 2 56 22.24] 2 58 13.08] 38 0 05.85 | 3 01 54.60 (7 8 10) 7 10 12.5 at (pimarce | (( 20 22.5 q 32 38. : at 72 5™ 42 temp. : 52 bar. 29'7.840 at 269.0 02.3 12.5 22.3 32.3 42.3 7 11 52.3 7 08 59.79 | 7 11 02.27] 7 138 08.96 | 7 15 05.77 ASTRONOMICAL AND GEODETIC OBSERVATIONS. 51 L. } (7 16 54.5) 19.2 21.9 16.8 Chronometer comparisons 04.8 29.2 32 26.6 Pock. chronom’r 14.8 39.3 42 36.7 30 17™ 1485.7 = 7» 20™ by 2007 § 24.8 49.2 52 46.6 43.6 18 1062 | | 34.5 59.2 02.2 56.7 21.0 20 740 | WA. S. 44.4 -S. 09.2 ofsh | Ae sts) WO' 15.0 10 48 2007 | 54.3 19.2 21.9 16.7 43.3 47 1062 | i 29.2 32.1 26.7 21.0 49 740 | 14.5 39.2 42.1 36.8 | 24.4 interpolated 24.5 49.1 51.8 46.5 | Deduced hourly rate (between — 59.1 7 23 02.0 7 24 56.6 3" and 7") = + *.05 1 17 44.45 09.19 | 7 22 1202) 7 24 06.68 Experiments, set 8, face 4. October 3. 58.8 | 11 05 11 07 40.5 | at 11®12™are (19.97 1.88 at 11" 0™ temp. (18°.2 18.0 bar. 29.810 at 24.5 The time was noted when the knife-edge No. 4 passed over | a mark 0°.05 to the left (in | inverting telescope) of the zero | of the are. POM rRWNRrOOF DDOOOOOOOS Or Or Or CO Or Or Or Cr Or Or at 11 10™ are (1°.70 7 1.60 The pendulum gained 6.85 vibra- | tions in an hour on the pocket chronometer. ; at 11" 20™ are §1°.47 : ; : - 35.4 1.38 Hil 13 11.2 : : 11 18 45.3 11 12 21.10 15.91 | 11 16 : 11 17 55.50 fu 20 46 11 52 56. 11 54 51.3 R11 22 25.8 18.8 | 11 54 36.: 11 55 31 11 21 36.06 28.95 | 11 53 , 11 55 41.23 52 0 47 06.5 16.3 3 14 RECORD AND RESULTS OF 3 06 25.23 18.3 28.3 38.3 48.3 58.3 0 49.03 8 08 20.3 3 09 10.16 R. 03 8 13.8 23.5 33.2 43.5 53.5 03.8 13.8 23.5, 33.5 3 02 43.58 3.10 09.1 OR 38.7 3 11 48.6 ————————— 3.10 58.94 [=| cs) 3) law oom — a’ 4 2 + a S || a ~~ Se ras Sa Sa) = ns} ) A 3 O01 53.5 at 3" 1™ are { at 3" 0= 20°.5 temp. { 20.0 bar. 29.774 at 279.0 Chronometer comparisons Pock. chron’r 10" 08™ 16°.8 = 2" 11™ by 2007 | 09 43.7 21.7 1062 740 2007 1062 740 | 2007 | 1062 740 Experiments, set 9, face 4. October 4. 1] 24 34.8 44.8 11 28 05.5 11 27 16.388 at 11" 285m are (1°.5 ASTRONOMICAL AND GEODETIC OBSERVATIONS. 53 L. 11 29 36.2 46.1 56.1 06.3 16.3 26.2 36.2 46.2 56.1 : 06.2 08.9 fll 31 16.2 18.8 11 30 26.19 28.94 | 11 34 HOOP w PO sesooos S| STR WN HOME ww DO SD ED S S|) SUC Cx CAEP SUCK OB CREEK nwwlalaARRaATHDANARH — nO H loop oo S;essse m | oom Or oo 29.8 3 39.5 49.5 59.8 at 32 55™ are He C2 bo rer er) at 4> 0™ temp. { bar. 30.010 at 33°.0 OP OD H OOP op tO WOOOSDOOOOO Oreo C9 OD G9 CO ETO G9 GO 3 56 19 03 ooo Chronometer comparisons 4 05 22 : ¢ ; : Pock. Chron’r 31.9 ‘ Y 4., 10% 25™ 188.8 = 25 28™ by 2007 | 41.7 5. : : 26 44. 27 1062 | 52 ; Re 34. Qt 22. 28 740 | 02 56. A 12 | H.R. : 8), 5 JR : 51 ; 54 2007 22, : ; 6 52 ot 53 1062 | 31.8 5 i ; i OB, 54 740 | 41.7 : ; : Deduced hourly rate (between 51.8 ; : : 10" and 5") = —°.21 4 07 O18 ° { 06 11.88 | 4 08 16.64] 4 09 59.46) 4 Experiments, set 10, face 2. October 5. 10 58 05 11 00 11 01 56.5 at 10" 553™ ate. (1°.92 06.5 $ U 1.76 16.5 | at 10° 30™ temp. ( 24°.8 26.3 1 24.2 36.3 | bar. 297.970 at 270 46.3 56.3 06.5 34.8 10 ¢ 10 59 44.5 WL HOSP OLEH S O92 G9 U9 GD CO OD Go CD CD OO CO wo 0) G9 COV OV VN ON OG 16.5 96.3 at 11" 4™ are 36.3 11 03 10 57 00.03 8 3. 11 02 46.39 54 111 05 34.8 f11l O07 15 lia 06 25.04 11 14 192 Hil 15 52 i—_—_____. f11 15 02.02 0 50 47.93 L. 22 32 42 52 02.2 12 22 32 42 27.8 0 51 37.5 WwWwweowewe DH Soo R OOD MNOS Nb wo enc oo 0 G9 OO 33.46 RECORD AND RESULTS OF R. IO 32 L. Il 09 28.5 41.7 38.3 51.8 48.4 01.8 58.5 12 08.7 H.R. 21.8 |H.R. 18.6 31.6 28.5 41.7 38.5 51.7 48.4 01.7 58.5 11 09 11.7 | 11 11 08.4 11° 16) 07 11 55 37.5 17.2 41.8 24 51.5 37 07.5 Ay 17.3 AS! © 5K IS OH 07 37.3 17 41.8 26.1 51.5 36.8 07.8 Meat 4618 eb 7s 11 16 56.95 |11 56 27.42 0 51 585 | 8 43 50 08.5 00.2 18.5 10.3 28.5 20.3 38.3 30 ALS8) 48:55) AS S40 58.5 50 08.5 00.2 18.8 10.3 28.8 20.2 0 53 3885 | 8 45 29.8 0 52 4854] 3 44 40.12 16.8 11.3 ANG [Sh PARA |P1sk Re: 1 PLB} 36.2 31 46.2 4] 56.8 51.2 06.5 01.4 a ee R. 11 11 19.4 29.6 39.3 49.3 59.5 09.6 19.4 29.4 39.2 49.2 I 12 59.8 Ht. R. 11 12 09.39 ll 57 40 50.2 LE 59 11 58 3 45 53 20.3 30.18 AWS: Ch H SOR OO bo bo bo BS bo 19 3 47 3.46 42.77 Jab es L929 3 55 29.94 53 56 at 11> 14™ are (1.948 7 1.32 The pendulum gained 6%.62 on the chronometer in one hour. | at 1" 0™ temp. (( bar. 29.950 at 31°.5 26.! at 3" 43™are § 09.29 {— 0.03 at 3" 40™ temp. (30°.0 bar. 29.908 at 30°.0 0 27.0 ASTRONOMICAL AND GHODETIC OBSERVATIONS. 55 L. R. . R. 3 56 34.5 38 58 31.5 Comparison of chronometers 44.6 41.4 Pock. Chron’r | 9" 57™ 228.8 = 2" 0" by 2007 | 54.8 : 51.5 57 ). 1062 | 04.8 01.8 59 : 740 14.8 11.7 H.R. 24.6 21.4 33 : 2007 34.5 31.2 34 ; 1062 44.6 41.3 36 : 740 54.7 51.2 i 04.8 01.3 Deduced hourly rate (between 3 58 14.7 11.5 © 10" and 4") = + °.03 3 57 2467 3 59 21.44 Experiments, set 11, face 2, October 6. 10 51 19.5 2 110 55 11.2 | 10 57 12 at 10" 48™ are 29.5 22 te 39 : 31.5 | at 10" 35™ temp. ian 41.5 51.5 |bar. 29™.760 at 25°. 02 : 12 21.5 81.5 41.5 | at 10" 59™ are 10 : 2 51.5 10 52 09.30 |10 54 04.09 }10 56 00.85 01.68 i OB WAH jal OS wl i wy oe 20.4 | at 11" 12™ are 26.3 35.6 30.5 36.3 45.6 40.5 | at 11" 45™temp. (24°.7 5 55.6 50.6 | bar. 29.788 at 33° 1 27.0 © 05.1 00.5 MSG [eR 1k. TO. 25.1 20.4 35.5 30.4 45.4 40.4 55.5 50.3 1 04 56.2 |11 06 51 | 11 09 05.6 | 11 11 04 06.25 111 06 01.08 | 11 08 15.63 | 11 11 51 04 3 18 04 3 : at 3" 18™ are 13.8 : 23.5 ; at 3° 20™ temp. 33.5 : bar. 29.772 at 33°.0 43.5 11 49 58.96 | 11 51 : 38 18 53.95 56 RECORD AND RESULTS OF L. R. L R. 8 21 49.5 3 23 42 3 27 34.8 3.29 31.6 ! 59.5 52.3 45 41.6 09.8 02.3 55 51.6 19.5 12.3 05 01.6 29.6 22.3 15 11.7 ASS BOND) PARTS 3252) aIPAU TS i 2439 nA R Ss 2iled: 49.5 42.3 34.8 31.4 59.5 52.2 44.7 41.4 09.5 02.3 54.8 51.5 19.5 12.2 04.8 01.5 3 23 29.5 3 25 22 3 29 14.8 3 31 11.5 3 22 39.54 | 3 24 32.21 | 3 28 24.87 30 21.53 3 31 20.8 3 33 13.2 Chronometer comparisons 30.3 23.2 Pock. Chronom’r | 40.3 33 10° 08™ 258.1 = 98 11™ by 2007 50.3 43 09 46.2 10 1062 00.3 53. 10 24.9 11 740 FH. R. 10.3 | H.R. 03.2 20.3 13.2 4 45 25.9 8 48 2007 30.2 23 46 46.4 47 1062 40.2 33 47 25.2 48 740 | 50.2 43 Deduced hourly rate (between ¥ 3 33 00.2 3 34 53.1 10" and 4") = — 08.01 ) 3 32 10.26} 8 34 13.09 i a Experiments, set 12, face 2. October 8. 410 50 11.38 | 10 52 00 10 54 O01 10 56 25.8 | at 10" 49™5 are (19.97 21.2 10.2 11 39.5 1.75 \ 31.2 20 21 45.3 | at 10" 35™ temp. (25°.8 ; 41 30 308 55.5 ; 25.0 51 40 40.7 05.5 | bar. 30'.064 at 26°.8 Ars (Sp) OIL ACS. 50 A-8. 50:5 | A. S. 15.5 11.2 00 00.8 25.5 21 10 10.8 35.5 31 20 20.5 45.3 41 30 30.6 55.3 | at 10" 58™.5 are §1°.74 10 51 51 10 53 39.8 |10 55 40.5 | 10 58 05.5 1 Le H10 51 01.08 | 10 52 50.00] 10 54 50.75 | 10 57 15.47 #10 59 22.3 /11 01 21 11 03 11.9 } 11 05 12.6 32.2 31 21.6 22.6 42.2, 41 31.8 32.5 52.2 50.9 41.8 42.5 02.2 01 51.6 52.4 [486 1a) PLOY BT, TRS til H.R. 01.8 |} H.R. 02.5 22.2 21 11.8 12.6 32.2 30.7 21.7 22.4 42 40.8 31.6 32.4 , 52 50.7 41.7 42.3 11 01 02.1 | 11 03 00.9 | 11 04 51.5 | 11 06 52.2 H11 00 12.16 | 11 02 00.91 | 11 04 01.71 | 11 06 02.45 8 May, 1865. ASTRONOMICAL AND GHODETIC OBSERVATIONS. 7 L. R. L. R. 2 58 25.8 38 00 20.5 3 02 13 3.04 04 at 3" 6™ are § 0°.22 35.5 30.5 23 14 0.02 45.5 40.2 33 23.8 temp. (26°.3 bar. 30.012 at 34.0 H 55.5 50.3 43 33.8 U 28.5 i 05.5 00.5 53 43. [ACRE TES TASS OH AGI: ORB AGIs By! 25.5 20.2 13 04 35.5 30.2 23 14 45.5 40.1 32.8 23.5 55.5 50.2 43 33.8 3°00 05.5 3 02 00.3 3 03 53 3.05 43 2 59 15.53 | 3 01 10.32] 38 03 03.00 | 3 04 53.84 3 06 32.7 | (8 08 25.5) | 3 10 06.3 3 11 55.2 | During these observations the 42.6 35.3 16.3 05.2 wind was strong from the south, 52.6 45.3 26.3 15.2 shaking the observatory. 02.7 55.3 36.3 25.2 12.7 05.5 46.2 35 Chronometer comparisons 1H. R. 22.6 |. R. 15.4 | H.R. 56.2 45 10" 09" 05.8 =2" 11™ by 2007 82.5 25.3 06.2 55 10 43.3 11 1062 | 42.4 35.3 16.2 05 11 22.6 12 740 52.3 45.2 26.2 IS, 414 00.7 8 16 2007 02.3 55.2 36.3 25.1 14 43.0 15 1062 3 08 12.5 ---- 3 11 46.1 3 13 35.1 16 22.3 Wy 740 = aes a eae mee ——| hourly rate (between 10" and 4?) 3 07 22.54 | 3 09 15.33] 3 10 56.24) 3 12 45.10 =+05,09 Experiments, set 13, face 2. October 9. 11 12 55.5 |11 14 50 11 16 41 11 18 30 at 11> 127 are (19.87 05.5 00.2 51 40 U 1.68 15.5 10.3 01 50 at 11> 0™ temp. (25°.8 25.3 20.2 11 00 bar. 30.126 at 279.5 \ 25.6 35.5 30.2 21 10 A.S. 45.3 |A.S. 40.2 |}A 8S. 381 A.S. 20 55.3 50 40.8 29.8 05.3 00 51 39.8 15.5 10.2 01 49.8 25.3 20 11 59.8 | at 115 203" are (19.62 11 14 35. 11 16 30.1 | 11 18 21 11 20 09.5 q 1.44 I 13) 45:39 | 11 15 40:13 1) Ly 30:98 11 19 19°88 F1l Q1 34.4 |11 23 21.3 [11 25 14.2 | 11 27 13.1 44.6 31.2 24 22.8 54.5 41.2 34 32.8 04.6 51.2 43.8 42.7 14.5 01.2 54 52.7 fH. R. 244 |. R. 11.2 | H.R. 041 | H.R. 02.8 34.3 21.1 14.1 12.8 44.3 31.2 24 22.7 ! 54.3 41 33.8 32.6 04.4 51.2 43.7 42.7 $11 23 14.4 11 25 01.2 Il 26 53. Il. 28 52.6 p11 22 24.43 | 11 24 11.18 | 11 26 03.95 | 11 28 02.75 58 REUVORD AND RESULTS OF R. S25 Ors : 3 380 55.8 | at 8" 25™are (09.92 29.5 05.8 | temp. (299.5 ' 0.02 55 Le 25.5 | bar. 30.070 at 30°.0 35.5 45.5 55.5 05.5 ; 15.5 32.8 95.5 | at 8" 33™ are (0°21 3 80 42.5 0.01 3 26 09.28 28 02.02 | 3 29 52.80 3 33 32.5 39 27.3 i Chronometer comparisons 42.4 37.2 ; 28.8 | Pock. Chronom’r H 52.2 47.2 50. 38.6 | 10° 36" 15.2 = 28 38™ by 2007 oT.1 § 48.5 37 : 1062 07.1 58.8 38 21. 740 | plat, dled . RK. ; . KR. 08.8 | 27.2 18.8 4 07 é 2007 | 37 28.8 09 5 1062 § 47.2 38.5 10 11 740 9 57.2 45.6 48.4 | Deduced hourly rate (between | 3.37 07.1 3 88 55.7. | 3 40 58.5 10" and 4") = + *.03 92.32 | 8 36 17.15 | 8 38 05.86| 3 40 08.67 Experiments, set 14, face 4. October 10. 45 12 04 36 i at 128 0™ are ebiey temp. §21°.0 U 20.5 1.42 bar. 30°°.204 at 19°.7 1 The pendulum gained 6.6 vibra- | tions in an hour on the pocket chronometer. WHOM R WHOM BD bo BS bo FO LO fo WO LO WO DworDwwwann ; at 0" 83™ are (1°.42 12 06 16 12 08 11 REZ 0 O01 42.33 35.08 | 0 05 26.02 | 0 07 20.87 y12 02 8 — 0 09 47.7 0 17 45.5 | at 0" 20™ are (1°.16 57.8 ; 55.5 (1.05 07.6 05.6 17.7 15.6 27.7 } 25.5 37.6 BR. 28. PR: 35.5 47.5 : 45.4 51.5 E : 55.4 07.6 : : 05.6 17.6 00.8 15.6 0 11 247.5 OF We OK9e 100 1989535 0 10 37.62) 0 12 2834] 0 16 20.89 | 0 18 35.52 ASTRONOMICAL AND GEODETIC OBSERVATIONS. R. 0 22 59 a 0 24 38.6 0 —— 4 15 42.15 oe 4 23 21.3 51.1 425 01.4 4 24 11.26 4 4 23 48.97 4 11 07 17 27 36.5 46.5 56.5 06.6 16.8 26.8 36.5 4 12 46.5 4 11 56.72 4 19 381.8 Experiments, set 15, face 4. R. 4 13 901.8 4 13 51.40 4 21 (SO Oe Oo 2) PRRARRAAAD Hm TOS OR DO i Pock. chron’r 59 at 4" 10™ are at 4" 19™ temp. j 24° 5 1 0.03 bar. 30,168 at 25°.0 Chronometer comparisons H 11> 42™ 382 = 3" 44™ by 2007 § 49 43 1062 | 43 44 740 f 2007 § 1062 | 740 | Deduced hourly rate (between 11" and 5") = + °.05 E 03.85 9 05 O1 9 05 9 06 51.5 01.6 11.6 21.5 31.5 41.3 51.5 01.5 11.5 21.5 9 08 31.3 9 07 41.48 par. 29,843 at 15°.0 October 11. at 95 1™ are at 9" 0™ temp. 17.0 at 98 9™ are _(1°.50 U 1.42 60 RECORD AND RESULTS OF L. R. i 9 11 00.4 9 12 51.1 d 48.5 | at 9" 20™ are (19.32 01.2 58.6 / 1.22 11.2 d 08.7 21.1 18.6 28.7 H. R. 38.6 48.6 58.5 : . 08.7 27.7 18.6 9 14 81 9 16 381.7 9 18 28.6 19 11 50.28] 9 18 41.10] 9 15 47.87 | 9 17 38.61 LAL 109 1 12 57.8 1 14 483 at 1? 14™ are (0°.18 19 07.8 ; at 1" 10™ temp. (20°.0 ( 0.03 17.8 : 20.0 27.9 : ; Dar. 29.805 at 22.3 387.5 47.5 57.5 07.5 : 17.5 § 38.8 27.5 : at 1" 19™ are (0°.14 1 12 48.8 1 14 387.5 : ¢ 0.06 LE SOS | S24 7258 7) le S823 aaa on £ Iie) roa é 1 22 53.6 | 1 24 42.2 03.8 52.3 | Chronometer comparisons 02.3 | Pock. Chronom’r } 12.8 8b 24™ 05%.0 = 08 26™ by 2007 22.2 24 : 1062 | 82.1 : 740 | 42.1 52.1 } 4 2007 | $ : 02.2 b 4 1062 | 45.7 4, : 12.2 ‘ 3. 5 740 | 1 20 55.8 1°22 44.5 1 24 22.1 | Deduced hourly rate (between } — —S —————_ 8" and 1") = —*.06 1 20 05.97 | 1 21 54.73 | 1 23 43.54 32.19 Experiments, set 16, face 1. October 11. 51 58 at 1" 47™ are (19.73 6 OTR WHOM wD HDHWNWNWNNWNNWNHNNP DWM MNMN GH HAMANN MR WD HOR WD H go 0 Go Go CO GO G8 GO OO WO YO Or Or Or G1 OV OF OV OV OV GC GEN Lo for) 1 48 33.05] 1 ASTRONOMICAL AND GEODETIC OBSERVATIONS. 61 L R. L R 1 56 32.3 1 58 25.1 2 00 14 2 02 00.8 at 2° 4™ are (32 42.2 35 23.8 10.8 q 1.26 52.2 45 33.8 20.7 02.3 55.1 43.6 30.6 12.2 05.2 53.7 40.5 H.R. 22.2 |. B. 15 H. R. 03.9 | H. BR. 50.4 32.1 25a la 13.8 00.6 42.2 3 23.8 10.7 52.1 44.8 33.8 20.6 02.2 55 43.5 30.6 1 58 12.3 2 00 05 2 01 538.6 2 03 40.5 1 57 22.21 1 59 15.08 2 01 03.75 | 2 02 50.62 6 08 42.2 6 10 32.8 6 12 31.8 6 14 20.5 at 6" 8™ are (0°.13 52 42.8 41.8 30.5 | at 6" 10™ temp. (249.5 ( 0.08 02:2 52.8 51.8 40.5 ( 23.0 12.2 02.8 02 50.5 | bar. 29.786 at 24°.0 22.3 12.8 11.8 00.5 ASS BB AS 22.3 ||AoS. SL. | AS 10.6 42 32.8 31.8 20.5 52 42.8 41.5 30.5 02.3 52.8 51.5 40.5 12.2 02.8 01.8 50.3 at 6" 17™ are (0°.12 6 10 22 6 12 12.8 (db 11 6 16 00.5 U 0.08 , 6 09 32.13] 6 11 22.80] 6 13 21.65) 6 15 10.49 6 17 09.3 6 19 02.2 6 20 49 6 22 39.6 19.4 12.2 59 49.7 29.2 22.1 09 59.8 39.2 31.9 19 09.8 49.2 42 28.9 19.7 ED Re 5952) ER Re O28) | ERR 88h7 > ER OR 2955 09.4 02.2 48.8 39.6 | Chronometer comparisons 19.3 12.2 58.6 49.5 | Pock. Chronom’r 29.1 22 08.8 59.5 | 5" 51™ 065.5 = 9" 55™ by 2007 + 39.1 31.8 18.8 09.6 52 43 4 53 1062 6 18 49.1 6 20 418 6 22 28.7 6 24 19.5 54 95.8 55 740 Seca rags a eee Eee ——| Deduced hourly rate (between 6 17 59.23 | 6 19 52.05] 6 21 388.85 | 6 23 29.62 1» and 6") =—*.19 YT ES I Experiments, set 17, face 3. October 12. 10 19 25.5 {10 21 14.3 | 10 23 03 10 24 56 | at1l0P19™are (19.56 35.5 24.3 13 06 (1.47 45 3 34 23 16 at 102 18™ temp. (199.4 55.5 44 33 25.8 | {19.2 05.5 54 43 358 | bar. 20.374 at 19.6 1525) ALS) 04:2 1 7AN Si) 53 A.S. 45.8 : 25.5 14.2 03 55.8 35.3 24 13 05.8 45.3 34 23 15.8 59.3 44 33 25.6 | at 10> 27™ are (19.39 110 21 05.8 |10 22 54 10 24 42.8 |10 26 35.6 | {1.30 10 20 15.41 | 10 22 04.09 | 10 28 52.98 | 10 25 45.82 54.6 04.7 14.5 24.4 34.3 110 28 44.60 2 42 35 44.8 54.8 04.8 14.8 24.8 54.5 44.5 54.8 04.8 44 14.8 2 43 24.76 1 2 51 55.84 a RECORD AND RESULTS OF - os Oo bo Rte) =) porFonrrWwWNnrotpe, G2 99 G2 G2 Oo GY C9 Go Co Ge oe bo bo 02 DO DO DO DO EE OD OD 10 31 10 30 33.26 2 44 380 89.8 49.5 59.5 09.8 19.5 29.5 39.5 49.5 59.5 46 09.5 45 19.60 A.S. 9 a 9 a 2 52 56 8- 06.8 16.8 26.8 36.5 46.5 56.6 06.7 16.6 26.6 54 36.5 H.R. 9 a 2 53 46.65 10 31 383.9 04.1 10 33 14.1 10 382 24.03 wb re SO OP & bO bo bo co bo OD GO w coc 48 2 47 58.2 2 47 08.23 2 54 45.4 55.4 H. R. bo 56 55 2 R. 10 33 34.8 44.7 i. R&R. 2 >) 10 34 24.7 2 48 59.08. a bo vo bo bo bo H. R. U115 at 2" 49™ are (02.19 (23°.0 (0.02 at 10" 36™ are) (1°. 27 temp. 1 91.3 bar. 29'.430 at 50°.0 at 2" 50™ are (0°.15 1 0.05 Chronometer comparisons Pock. chronom’r 92 57™ 10%.5 = 1° 59™ by 2007 j 5Y 46.7 58 1062 § 58 24.7 59 740 4 2) 23 1178 6 25 2007 | 23 47.7 24 1062 § 24 28.7 25 740 Deduced hourly rate (between 107 and 2") = — 0°.20 The following table contains the individual results of the observed number of vibrations in a given interval. The first column indicates left or right vibrations, alternately; the second gives the chronometer intervals derived from the preceding means of each set of observations; the third contains the correction for rate of chronometer for the intervals; the fourth the intervals corrected for rate and expressed in seconds of mean time; the fifth the corresponding number of vibra- tions. These were obtained by working out for each of the 16 sets the number of vibrations the pendulum gained upon the seconds of the chronometer in one hour, thus confining our attention to the successive means of the preceding record and their elapsed times, and subtracting the fraction of seconds of each from the preced- ing mean (remarking whether the seconds are odd or even) we find, by taking the differences of seconds and corresponding elapsed times collectively, the number of ASTRONOMICAL AND GEODETIC OBSERVATIONS. 63 vibrations in excess of a certain chronometer interval expressed in seconds. When reduced to the corresponding value for one hour, we havye— Horstace =| ane cam 0.0iL BSS eG) ail ae eal td ee Cote es hu oe Coe Or Osan ane eeaeay OP(O and on the average 6.75 vibrations in excess of the number of seconds in an hour. It appears that the rate of the chronometer in sets 1, 3, 7, and 15 differed most from this mean, the Ist and 15th falling short of it, and the other two exceeding it; the number of vibrations for these sets were deduced under the supposition that the motion of the pendulum was more regular than that of the pocket chronometer. The following three columns contain the corrections for arc, temperature, and atmospheric pressure, as explained above. The last column shows the number of vibrations of the pendulum in a mean solar day. Chronometer Corr’n | Mean time | No. of |Corresp. No. Corrections for intervals. for rate. | intervals. | vib’ns. | in a day. are. | temp. eee Set 1. Face 1. September 26, 1860. SB HIS YB} 13918%.17 | 13944 | 86560.36 | +1.06 | —11.62 | —.01 | 86549.79 | 49.10 13907.94 | 18934 61.88 96 « i 51.21 § 10.27 14409.07 | 14436 61.48 -90 50.75 | 44.09 14382.89 | 14410 62.84 84 52.05 § 42.34 14381.14 | 14408 61.36 15 50.48 } 42.17 14380.97 | 14408 62.38 10 51.45 | Mean . . . | 86550.95 | Set 2. Face 1. September 26. 11989.27 | 12012 | 86563.80 | + .76 ; 86552.70 § 11988.87 | 12012 66.68 12 55.54 11970.89 | 11994 66.76 67 55.57 11959.07 | 11982 65.66 6 54.44 11905.29 | 11928 | 64.80 ay : 53.02 | 11897.13 | 11920 6 54.77 SB, AP 6 tL SF o fe, I, 86554.42 | Set 3. Face 1. September 27. 15507.08 | 15536 | 86561.12 | +1.16 : $6548.47 15479.07 | 15308 61.46 1.08 48.73 15409.44 | 15488 60.14 96 47.29 | 15405.10 | 15434 62.08 90 49.17 15263.26 | 15292 62.68 74 49.61 | 15217.51 | 15246 61.74 10 48.63 15187.62 | 15216 61.42 67 48.28 15155.42 | 15184 62.92 63 49.74 DHARWAD Ree er ereegr eran +4++t++++ Mean . : ; $6548.74 64 RECORD AND RESULTS OF Chronometer Corr’n | Mean time | No. of |Corresp. No. Corrections for N intervals. for rate. | intervals. | vib’ns. | in a day. arc. | temp. eae pr. Set 4. Face 3. September 28. fou. | 42 09™ 388.94 | + *.21 | 14979815 | 15008 | 86566.40 | + .68 | —11.66 | —.10 | 86555.32 HR. | 4 09 36.92 | + .21 | 14977.13 | 15006 66.52 -66 ee BY 55.42 Hv. | 4 09 30.92 | + .21 | 14971.13 | 15000 66.60 64 if % 55.48 | | pw. | 4 09 33.09 | + .21 | 14973.30 | 15002 65.62 61 cf st 54.47 Ht. | 4 O08 53.09 | 4+ .21 | 14933.30 | 14962 66.04 56 ff ef 54.84 HR. | 4 08 56.97 | + .21 | 14937.18 | 14966 66.68 08 a if 55.45 Hu. | 4 O9 20.86 | + .21 | 14961 07 | 14990 67.60 50 nf sa 56.34 j BR. | 4 09 12.82 | + .21 | 14953.038 | 14982 67.40 Ad * se 56.13 Mean . é . | 86555.43 § | Set 5. Face 3. September 29. tL. | 4 05 385.07 | — .70 | 14734.37 | 14762 | 86562.20 | + .96 | —15.64 | —.05 | 86547.47 HR. | 4 05 52.88 | — .70 | 14752.18 | 14780 62.92 293) is “ 48.16 | fo | 4 05 58.76 | —.70 | 14758.06 | 14786 63.56 .88 is a 48.75 ft HR. | 4 05 52.95 | — .70 | 14752.25.| 14780 62.52 84 af a 47.67 HL. | 4 05 34.86 | — .70 | 14734.16 | 14762 63.24 18 a “ 48.33 | f R. | 4 05 18.98 | — .69 | 14718.29 | 14746 62.64 14 fe “t 47.69 fu | 4 05 05.00 | — .69 | 14704.31 | 14732 62.70 10 a if AT.71 fe. | 4 05 02:93 | — .69 | 1470224 | 14730 63.12 .66 e i 48.09 | Meant), ay a SeotTaen Set 6. Face 3. October 2. s foe | 403. 1452 HR. | 4 03 24.35 tL. | 4 038 20.44 2 3 ; tr. | 4 03 18.98 | This set is not used, owing iu. | 4 02 02.31 to a defect in the indica- r.|4 O1 24.44 tions of the chronometer. Stic 4) Ol 08F42, AR. | 4 Ol 04.30 Set 7. Face 3. October 2. fu | 4 21 20.33 | + .22 | 15680.55 | 15710 | 86562.26] + .83 | —11.44 | +.01 | 86551.66 Hr. | 4 21 30.22 | + .22 | 15690.44 | 15720 62.76 19 a st 52.12 L. | 4 21 39.93 | 4+ .22 | 15700.15 | 15730 64.26 14 if < oso HR. | 4 21 38.02 | + .22 | 15698.24 | 15728 63.80 70 of se 58.07 | Hou | 4 21 99.21 | + .22 | 15682.43 | 15712 62.92 .65 te se 52.14 | foe. | 4 21 56.11 | + .22 | 15716.383 | 15746 63.10 62 o i 52.29 | fu. | 4 22 06.17 | + .22 | 15726.39 | 15756 62.68 61 es S 51.86 } R. | 4 22 12.08 | + .22 | 15732.30 | 15762 63.10 .60 ne a 52.27 | Mean . : 5 86552.37 ASTRONOMICAL AND GEODETIC OBSERVATIONS. 65 No. of vib’ns. Corrections for arc. | temp. eae Corresp. No. in a day. Mean time intervals. Chronometer Corr’n intervals. for rate. Set 8. Face 4. October 3. | L. | 3" 57™ 568.95 | + %.24 | 14277819 | 14304 | 86562.24 | +1.07 | —18.92 .00 | 86549.39 R.| 3 5T 54.65 | + .24 | 14274.89 | 14302 64.10 1.03 sa a 51.21 L | 38 57 54.87 | + .24 | 14275.11 | 14302 62.76 96 e a 49.80 fr. | 3 57 54.738 | + .24 | 14974.97 | 14302 63.60 .92 a 4 50.60 tL | 3 56 49.06 | + .24 | 14209.30 | 14236 62.34 80 i e 49.22 R.|3 56 438.03 | + .24 | 14203.27 | 14230 62.60 TT ot 4 49.45 L. | 3 56 44.98 | 4+ .24 | 14205.22 | 14232 62.88 74 4 cS 49.70 R.| 3 57 12.84 | + .24 | 14233.08 | 14260 63.42 oti sf te 50.21 86549.95 | Set 9. Face 4. October 4 16483.18 16514 86561.54 : 86550.80 16490.75 | 16522 63.72 3 52.94 16490.96 | 16522 62.60 : 51.79 16493.06 | 16524 | 62.06 6 51.22 | 16544.73 | 16576 | 63.28 65 52.39 16546.74 | 16578 | 65.22 0 52.30 16542.88 16574 | 62.52 a 51.57 16542.86 16574 62.62 6 51.65 POAR AN AH PT SS Sa Sa STS Mean . : . | 86551.83 Set 10. Face 2. October 5. 17260.23 | 17292 | 86559.02 | + .89 86549.56 § 17268.07 | 17300 59.86 85 50.36 | 17260.13 | 17292 59.52 -19 49.96 | 17260.09 | 17292 59.72 76 50.13 | 17216.31 | 17248 59.02 69 ; 49.36 17228.31 | 17260 58.92 66 49.23 | 17226.33 | 17258 58.84 63 49.12 | 17232.19 | 17264 59.48 61 49.74 | DPeAA Ree PN a a Sa Se SS a +4++t++4+4++ Mean. . . | 86549.68 | Set 11. Face 2. October 6. 16004.61 | 16034 | 86558.66 | + .77 | —11.89 | —.01 | 86547.53 § 16002.40 | 16032 59.80 13 ie nS 48.63 § 15998.65 | 16028 58.48 69 AT.27 15990.49 | 16020 59.46 .65 48.21 | 15858.58 | 15888 60.28 OT 48.95 15860.41 | 15890 61.16 00 49.81 15834.59 | 15864 60.48 08 49.11 15842.60 | 15872 60.36 50 48.96 DH PeP Pee PT Sea a ar a a Mean . : : 86548.56 9 May, 1865. Chronometer intervals. RECORD Corr’n for rate. AND RESULTS OF Mean time | No. of intervals. | vib’ns. Corresp. No. in a day. Corrections for are. | temp. se Set 12. Face 2. October 8. oP ae Bee 4h 08™ 14°.45 08 08 07 07 07 06 06 20.32 12.25 38.37 10.38 14.42 54.53 42.65 ease oS wo ~y So aT 9 © 9 ¢ Tat ++t4++444 (St) wo Tt 148945. 82 14900.69 14892. 62 14858. 74 14830.75 14834.79 14814.90 14805.02 14922 14928 14920 14886 14858 14862 14842 14830 86557.66 58.34 58.84 58.50 58.76 58.48 58.02 57.48 ; +1.00 | —10.67 | +.08 95 i 86548. 07 ¢ 48.70 | 49.16 § 48.77 48.98 | 48.67 4 48.18 } 47.60 | 86548.52 | Set 13. Face 2. October 8); Pt at a Se SS a SaaS ++4+t++44 15144.02 15142.02 15141.95 15145.80 15118.02 15126.10 15122.04 15126.05 15172 15170 15170 15174 15146 15154 15150 15154 86559. 62 59.66 60.08 60.86 59.92 59.36 59.76 59.66 $6550.29 | 50.28 | 50.67 | 51.38 | 50.38 | 49.79 # 50.15 | 50.02 86550.37 | Set 14. Face 4. October 10. PS Se SS a Seat Sa +t+++++4+ 15014.60 15016.538 15016.34 15010.34 14984.35 14988.38 14870.57 14850.77 15042 15044 15044 15038 15012 15016 14898 14878 86557.68 58.04 59.14 59.22 59.44 59.22 59.38 58.44 stel0.0 65 62 60 505 02 45 43 86545.96 46.31 | 47.38 | 47.44 | 47.61 | 47.36 | 47.45 46.49 } Mean 86547.00 | Set 15. Face 4. October 11. PO Oe eo LPP PPR 14987.50 14983.48 14987.07 14987.31 14895.44 14893.38 14875.42 14873.33 15016 15012 15016 15016 14924 14922 14904 14902 86564.30 64.46 66.78 65.40 65.64 66.02 65.98 66.52 + .82 18 86550. 72 | 50.84 | 53.12 | 51.68 | 51.86 | 52.21 | 52.15 | 52.67 | Mean 86551.91 ASTRONOMICAL AND GEODETIC OBSERVATIONS. 67 == Chronometer Corr’n | Mean time | No. of |Corresp. No. Corrections for N intervals. for rate. | intervals. | vib’ns. | in a day. are. | temp. os pr. Set 16. Face 1. October 11. L. | 4" 20™ 595.08 | — §.82 | 15658°.26 | 15688 | 86564.10 | + .79 | —12.11 .00 | 86552.78 kr. | 4 21 00.82 | — .82 | 15660.00 | 15690 65.50 76 ss an 54.15 | zr | 4 21 09.04 | — .82 | 15668.22 | 15698 64.20 12 et i 52.81 R. | 4 21 06.96 | — .82 | 15666.14 | 15696 64.68 69 MY MY 53.26 § zu. | 4 20 387.02 | — .82 | 15636.20 | 15666 64.66 64 7 yt a 53.19 } rR. | 4 20 387.02 | — .82 | 15636.20 | 15666 64.66 61 “ “ 53.16 zu. | 4 20 35.10 | — .82 | 15634.28 | 15664 64.22 .58 e a 52.69 | R. | 4 20 39.00 | — .82 | 15638.18 | 15668 64.76 .05 * oS 53.20 Mean. 2 =. | 86553058) Set 17. Face 3. October 12. tL. | 4 23 09.85 |— .88 | 15788.47 | 15818 | 86561.60 | + .67 | —13.24 | —.15 | 86548.88 § R. | 4 23 15.51 | — .88 | 15794.63 | 15824 60.68 64 ft 4 48.93 mu. | 4 238 15.25 | — .88 | 15794.37 | 15824 62.08 -61 a ee 49.30 R.| 4 23 13.26 | — .88 | 15792.38 | 15822 62.04 af) ie # 49.24 | L. | 4 23 11.94 |— .88 | 15790.36 | 15820 62.18 .O5 e a 49.34 | R. | 4 23 13.39 | — .88 | 15792.51 | 15822 61.32 .53 fs 48.46 | L. | 4 23 11.32 | — .88 | 15790.44 | 15820 61.74 52 g oe 48.87 } R. | 4 22 57.42 | — .88 | 15776.54 | 15806 61.382 .50 by Ms 48.43 | Mean . : ¢ 86548.93 | We therefore have the following resulting number of vibrations performed at Port Foulke in a mean solar day, the temperature of the pendulum being at 50° Fah., and the atmospheric pressure 29.8 inches (with the mercury at the tempera- ture of freezing water). First position of pendulum. After reversal end for end. Face 4 swinging, 86550.17 Face 1 swinging, 86551.81 Face 2 . 86549.28 Face 3 swinging, 86551.18 Mean, 86549.72 Mean, 86551.50 Mean of two positions . : : : : ; ; . 86550.61 Correction for 40 feet elevation above half tide. ; : + 0.11 Resulting number of vibrations at the level of the sea in the latitude of Port Foulke . : : : : 5 . 86550.72 The Port Foulke Observatory is in latitude . : : GSO We? BOY" At Cambridge we have an excess of 2.68 vibrations in a day in the second position when compared with the first; at Port Foulke this excess is 1.78 vibration, from which numbers we infer that the pendulum has undergone no change. Finally we have from the relation of g: g,=N?: M,? force of gravity at Cam- bridge to force of gravity at Port Foulke as (86419.64)° to (86550.72)°; however, if we reject the number of vibrations at Cambridge, face 4 swinging, as too small, since at Port Foulke the number for this position is quite accordant with the num- 68 RECORD AND RESULTS OF bers of the remaining positions, we have to combine the mean of faces 1 and 3, or 86420.76 with face 2, or 86421.08, we find 86420.92, and adding the correction for elevation we have the proportion g : g,=(86421.14)’ » (86550.72)”. Bearing of Preceding Pndulum Experiments on the Value for the Earth's Com- pression.—lf there was no local disturbance in the force of gravity arising from irregular distribution and various densities of masses in the vicinity of the station, the observed number of vibrations at any two stations remote in latitude would suffice to deduce the earth’s compression, and in proportion as we increase the number of pendulum stations the deduced value for the compression will gain in reliability, it being improbable that the local disturbances should all tend the same way. From two stations only we can obtain but a first approximation, thus from our observations let N, = observed number of vibrations in a mean solar day in latitude ¢, . 6 (5 Ny == 3 66 4 14 ¢ Pu N =number of vibrations in the same interval at the equator ”, ==a function ot the earth’s ellipticity then the relation N,2 = N? (1 + n sin *p) furnishes the two equations (86421.14)? = N? (1 +n sin? 42° 22’ 51.5) (86550.72)? = N? (1 +n sin? 78 17 39 ) and solving these, we find for the Hayes pendulum N= 86304.26 and n= 0.005965. We have further by Clairaut’s theorem eee ae ainenes @O Narce @ee 2 x 289 b 372 a value very much smaller than that arising from the assemblage of the best pendu- lum results (;1¢, Baily in Vol. VII, Mem. Roy. Ast. Soc.), but if combined with them would tend to diminish the value of c, and bring it nearer to that found from the geodetic measures (,1, Lt. Col. James, Account of the Ordnance Trigonome- trical Survey of Great Britain and Ireland, London, 1858). Values as small as that found above have, however, been observed before, see “an account of experi- - ments for determining the variation in the length of the seconds pendulum at the principal stations of the trigonometrical survey of Great Britain. By Cap. H. Kater.” Phil. Trans. Roy. Soc., 1819, Part 3, p. 423; also “ Figure of the Harth,” by G. B. Airy, Ast. Roy., Encyclopedia Metropolitana, 1830, p. 230. According to daily’s formula V= (7441625711 + 38286335 sin’ L)* we should have nearly 112 vibrations more at Port Foulke than at Cambridge, whereas by direct observation we have 131 nearly.’ Respecting the horizontality of the supporting plates of the Hayes’ pendulum, the record at either station makes no mention, but as a deviation can easily be detected, I do not apprehend any source of error on this account. A special 1 The maximum increase in the number of vibrations (in a day) of the seconds pendulum is about half the number of seconds in the maximum deflection of the plumbline (Capt, Clarke in Lt. Col. James’ Ordnance Survey, pp. 590 and 594). ASTRONOMICAL AND GEODETIC OBSERVATIONS. 69 examination was made of the perpendicularity of the knife-edges to the longitudinal axis of the pendulum, also of their plane which should pass through the same axis —the test was found satisfactory. On this part of the theory of the physical pen- dulum, the paper “ On the Pendulum,” by J. W. Lubbock, Phil. Trans. Roy. Soc., 1830, Part 1, p. 201, may be consulted. There is reason to suppose that the sup- port of the pendulum case at the stations was sufficiently massive to guard against induced vibrations. A fine mark on the supporting plate seems to have been used to secure an identical contact with the knife-edges; there are also two guiding pins to indicate the central position of the bar between the plates. The plates show no wear, and the knife-edges appear in perfect condition. It is very desirable that the Hayes’ pendulum be swung at a number of other stations' for the purpose of combining the results, and if possible to connect them with the accumulated series given by Baily. The connection could be made by swinging the pendulum at Captain Sabine’s station ot 1822-23 in New York City (or as near to it as possible, since the old site of the Columbia College is now inaccessible to such operations. Localities like Washington, D. C., and Key West, Florida, would be well suited for new observations, and if combined with any made at New York would furnish a valuable contribution to our present knowledge of the earth’s compression as resulting from experiments of vibrations. * As pendulum observations have a direct bearing upon the larger geodetic operations for ascéer- taining the earth’s figure, and have recently again been considered for introduction in the Russian and Indian arcs, I have taken occasion to bring the desirability of swinging the pendulum at some stations of the United States Coast Survey, to the favorable consideration of the Superintendent. OT. GL 0% 00,82 Ot mT? Z DSI purpioqyng S UT soytun R ee T.8Z ws SS IT Wy, Z7I\S Soa My re pooaoyy — aX TT | xneurmbsy WZ WY Youluay adrg TRY TOTO Sane 7 = av ‘yooy uayting ‘Yq Toapuroy ° ry f anpummbsa ‘4d osuor € S ZU 000‘0LT: LT arvog Hg, ‘4d osizang “GOST "BOS 2 ‘LLOHOS ‘V Sa'TUVHO ANIKI\\W Yy ull, SNOLIWNAT fig ‘uoynjysuy upwuosyjrmg ay) of Qunya yourbr.0 woLfpavaloid pup paanpa; aT SHAVH TI I 1d Jo uoytpadxg Sursojdxgy oyory ay} JO ‘T9ST-O9ST UL ‘SAozaeNbsoyU Ay OU, ¢ : H uas[yo| edrp AWIMNOA LUOd : Jo Aymior, ay} Surmoggs PST MOVOTAT LUuvao 2 waapu AIBN IPT ee O39 MEL ; bp She ier ch U ~ - - : hee yh 7 « 9 x S 3 ots f s - : 7 4 fv - . PART Ul. MAGNETIC OBSERVATIONS. K : - a wie hanes ut RECORD AND RESULTS OF MAGNETIC OBSERVATIONS. Introductory Remarks.—TVhe present, second part, of the records and results of the Arctic Expedition of 1860 and 1861, commanded by Dr. Hayes, will contain the magnetic observations and their discussion. These observations will be given under the heads “ differential observations” and ‘absolute determinations. The former comprise a series of hourly readings of the declinometer on 15 days between November, 1860, and March, 1861, at Port Foulke, the winter quarters of the expedition; also three daily readings, for the same period, at stated hours. The latter class of observations includes many deter- minations of the declination, the dip, and the intensity of terrestrial magnetism at stations in the north of Greenland, on Smith Strait, and northward on Smith Sound. The declinations were chiefly determined by means of solar bearings, but there are also a few determinations with the declinometer. The magnetometer (or declinometer) and dip circle, and a Smalkalder azimuth compass, used by the expedition, were furnished by the liberality of Prof. A. D. Bache, Superintendent United States Coast Survey. Besides these instruments, the expedition was provided with two small compasses and other ordinary ones; one small azimuth compass was loaned by the Bureau of Topographical Engineers. Description of Instrwments.—The magnetometer, made by W. H. Jones, of Lon- don, has an azimuth circle of six inches diameter, and can be read to 20’ by means of the verniers. The magnet is suspended in a box over the centre of the circle, the suspension tube is eight inches long. Two magnets, each three inches long and 0.3 inch in diameter, with mirror attached, are provided, also a collimater magnet 3} inches long, and but 0.3 inch of outer diameter. Ordinarily the ivory scale above the eye end of the telescope is used for reading the deflections when mirror magnets are suspended, for the determination of absolute declinations an extra telescope can be fastened to the projecting arm of the alidade, the collimater magnet is then suspended, the glass scale of which is illuminated by a small reflector. An inertia ring, thermometer, and other necessaries are also provided. The dip circle was made by Patton, of Washington, new needles have been supplied by Mr. Wirdemann, they are about 8 inches in length. There are also two magnets for the reversals of the poles. A three legged stand accompanied these instruments. 10 June, 1865. ( 73 ) 74 RECORD AND RESULTS OF For the instrumental constants, see determinations further on. Wiirdemann’s prismatic azimuth compass reads from south through east to 860°; the other small compass reads from north to west. The magnetic observations were commenced by Mr. A. Sonntag; after his death, in December, 1860, the care of the magnetic determinations devolved upon Mr. H. G. Radcliff, wno was assisted by Messrs. C. C. Starr and G. F. Knorr, and also by the commander of the expedition. The instrumental constants necessary for deducing the results for horizontal force and for scale value of the differential observations were made by me in Washington in June, 1862. The geographical positions and chronometer corrections required in the discussion will be taken from the preceding astronomical paper (Part I of the scientific con- tributions by the expedition) without further special reference. DIFFERENTIAL OBSERVATIONS AT PORT FOULKE. These observations were made at the observatory (of which a general description has already been given); Dr. Hayes wrote to me the following note respecting the mounting of the instrument. ‘The magnetometer was mounted in the centre of the room upon a stand made of two kegs whose heads being removed, and the ends carefully fitted together, were filled with beans and water. These were of course soon frozen into a solid mass, and the lower keg being placed upon the solid rock through a hole cut in the floor, the support for’ the instrument was as firm as pos- sible. No stove or other artificial means of warmth was at any time used.” Diurnal Variation of the Magnetic Declination.—For the purpose of investigating the diurnal march of the horizontal needle, hourly observations were recorded on 15 days, at Port Foulke, between November 26, 1860, and March 4, 1861. As the diurnal excursions of the magnet frequently exceed the range of the scale fastened to the telescope, the horizontal circle had to be shifted in order to bring the direction of the magnet at all times within central range of the telescopic scale; the record consists therefore of readings of the azimuth circle and of readings of the reflected scale. The observers are indicated by their initials, R. for Radcliff, K. for Knorr, and S. for Starr. The instrument having been properly adjusted, the following readings were taken :-— “MAGNETIC OBSERVATIONS. Scale Readings of Declinometer. 15 1860. Nov. 26-27. Nov. 27. Dec. 3-4. Dec, 12-13. Dec. 18-19. Dec. 24-25. Sot Aa Rs 1288335) 0S 241.3 R. | 354.4 I, || Bako ix, | Bf & 25.3 28.2 R 23.5 35.3 31.0 Inst. moved in cleaning 30.9 26:5 26.1 35.2 33.8 38.3 30.9 27.0 24.6 35.1 34.5 42.1 35.8 28.9 25.5 35.1 33.7 44.2 35.0 K. | 24.4 K 25.2 K. | 35.2 R. | 34.3 R. | 42.9 K. 34.8 25.1 25.9 35.5 33.3 43.0 36.4 24.6 25.1 35.5 34.8 43.7 36.5 26.4 25.9 35.0 34.3 44.1 Inst’'t | 8 26.4 S. 35.2 K. | 35.0 8. 44.5 R. upset 25.1 35.1 34.5 44.6 30.2 26.3 35.3 35.7 29.1 31.1 27.3 35.5 36.0 29.4 31.9 R. 27.5 R. | 35.6 8 36.2 K. | 29.8 8 31.7 27.5 35.7 36.9 29.9 33. 27.6 35.8 36.7 29.9 34.6 27.4 35.9 86.2 29.9 82.7 K. 27.8 8. 35.9 K. | 35.8 8. 29.5 K. 33.2 27.9 35.9 35.0 29.3 81.5 27.8 35.9 36.0 29.0 32.3 27.7 35.9 37.0 30.2 31.1 8. 27.3 K. | 35.8 R. | 36.2 R. | 30.3 R. 29.4 27.6 35.6 35.1 30.4 29.9 27.3 35.2 35.6 29.3 28.3 27.2 35.2 | 35.1 28.1 Correspending Azimuth Circle Readings. 8 A.M.) 24° 40’) 8 A.M. 33? 00'/8 A.M|34° 20" 8 AM|sse 00'| 8 A.M.|33° 00") 8 A.M.| 33°00’ 7 P.M.'33 00 | 1 132 BO 10 “ |25 00 | 7P.M./29 00 76 RECORD AND RESULTS OF Scale Readings. 1860. 1861. Dec.31. Jan. 1. Jan’y 14-15. Jan’y 21-22. Jan’y 28-29. Feb’y 4-5. | 274.2 R. 27.2 26.0 26.1 27.1 | 24.5 26.0 23.9 26.5 27.8 28.3 28.6 29.1 29.4 28.7 bo oo a NODRARAWEDDNDWROTROTODOWNH UL bo aT a 8. oo wo a AUK GWMWM AH SSost Ss R. : Ke) (3388 8. i 33.9 34.0 34.0 31.0 32.4 30.1 29.8 31.2 33.5 34.1 34.0 34.9 35.4 36.0 35.5 34.9 35.2 36.1 37.5 36.4 36.5 34.1 34.2 33.3 Le Ca Ge) lal eo) ho LO LO GD LO OD GD CD GD OD OD NO BO LOD BO PO OD PO YO BO DO DO OD OHDSSSEHSSSSSOH HAT WW TH HH HOU pp PDH RROD RADWODHMHOWNOWEH op 09 O2 09 C9 0D OD OD WED CD ED ED ED OD OD OD CD ED OD OY OD LO WUIW ROHR SSWWNWNAMNSOMWARHARAMNAS DNWNWNMNMNWWWWNWHWNMWONNNMNNNNWNWNWWW Pb bv BO 9 TAT GO GO ATH TN SO CeCe) Fe SO PS eo Circle Readings. .| 28° 00") 8 A.M.| 28° 00’) 8 A.M} 28° 00 8 AM 27° 00'| -M.| 277° 00/8 A.M.1/ 27° 00! 4 Wind blowing from N. E. (true), and heavy snow drift during the observations. MAGNETIC OBSERVATIONS. rau Scale Readings. Mean local time. February 11-12. February 18-19. February 25. March 4-5. 8 A.M 341.3 R. 341.6 K. 362.8 8. BO pl Ri. Dees 36.9 35.9 35.4 38.1 10 “ | SG. 36.5 30.1 37.7 iE eG 31.7 36.1 35.3 37.8 Noon | 37.3 Instrument moved 36.8 35.4 1P.M 33.9 S. 31.0 R. 37.0 K. 35.9 S) MG I BS} 30.1 38.3 35.1 8 & 36.7 33.3 37.1 35.0 2 op 35.1 35.8 35.8 85.2 ang ! 36.0 K. 35.1 S 38.6 R 36.8 K GS 38.6 35.2 38.5 38.1 ine 38.3 37.3 38.7 38.5 Sie 39.0 37.8 38.8 38.0 he 38.8 R. 37.9 Kk 38.8 8. 39.3 R. 1@ 39.7 37.4 38.7 39.2 eae 39.3 38.6 38.6 38.9 Midnight! 41.6 40.3 39.5 1A.M.} 43.1 S) 37.2 R. 39.1 8. Dias 39.9 36.6 39.3 3 & 39.8 36.5 39.4 aot 36.6 36.7 38.5 Saat! 38.3 K. 37.0 S 37.2 K 6 38.0 36.2 i 38.1 ee 37.4 35.5 38.5 Baa 35.9 33.0 38.8 Circle Readings. 8 A.M. | 26°20’ | 8 A.M. | 26°20’ | 8 A.M. | 26°20’ | 8 A.M. | 26° 20/ Light wind and snow) | P. M. « «| Wind blowing heavy | Clear, with wind from from 8. W. (true) | Calm and clear dur-| from N. (true),| N. EH. (true) dur- until8 P.M.,when| ing the above ob-; and snow drifting.| ing the above ob- the wind blew] servations. Observations dis-| servations. stronger and snow continued at 11 drifting. P.M. on account of wind. We have now to express the preceding numbers in units of the same scale, and to refer them to the same zero for each day. The determination of the scale value at Washington gave 1 division = 10’.14 since in the present record the last figure is noted as a decimal. ‘The given reading of the circle is taken to refer to the centre of the reflected scale or to the division 30, the excess above 30 converted into parts of a degree, has been added to the circle reading and the defect below 30, after conversion, has been subtracted from the circle reading, the latter being expressed in degrees and fraction of a degree. Increasing scale numbers correspond to an easterly movement of the north end of the magnet; increasing circle readings are likewise in the direction from north to east. The correction for torsion (for deviations beyond 30.0 divisions) has been rejected by the observer as too small to affect the results. 718 f RECORD AND RESULTS OF The observations on November 26 and 27, 1860, will be omitted in the following table owing to the break in the series on the 26th, and the incompleteness on the 27th. The first two readings, December 24, 1860, require to be changed to conform to. the readings of the day; these readings, after conversion, are 33°.71 and 33°.71; they have been changed into 27°.42 and 27°.42 by the following process of inter- polation : If we compare the readings December 24 at 10", 11, 12, 1, 2, 3°, with the readings at the same hours on the three days of observation preceding, we find the corrections —6.31, —6.47, —6.64 to be applied to the latter to produce the series on December 24, and applying these quantities to the readings at 9 A. M., we find for that hour, December 24, 26°.96. Again, the mean reading at 9 A. M., before the break from 5 observations, is 33.34, and from 8 observations, after the break, 27.48, difference —5.86 ; and applying this to the actual reading December 24, 9 A.M., we find the value 27.85; the mean of these two values is 27.40. By the same process for 8 A. M., we find 27.44, the mean 27.42 is given in the table. The break in the series mounted therefore to 6°.29, The value for noon, February 18, is the mean of the values for 11 P.M. and 1 P.M.; the instrument does not appear to have been permanently disturbed. The aneonmpliatts readings of February 25th are omitted. Hourly readings of the declinometer at Port Foulke, expressed in degrees and fraction ; increasing numbers denote a movement of the north end of the magnet towards the east. Dec. - | Dec. Dec. 7 bj a 3 b Feb. Feb. 3-4. . | 18-19. | 24-25. belly . | 14-15. 21-22, 9. . | 11-12. | 18-19. .|33.937/383°.91/33°. 86/279. 421279.53/279. 68/279. 63/279. 34/279. 53/279. 64/279. 06)279.11/27°. 88} 33.24 ‘ 33.17 | 27.42 | 27.53 | 27.68 | 27.71 | 26.95 | 27.51.) 27.66 | 27.49 | 27.32 | 27.70} 34.17 | 33. 33.64 | 26.73 | 27.32 | 27.70 | 27.49 | 27.08 | 27.19 | 27.68 | 27.46 | 27.42 | 27.63 § 33.92 6 33.76 | 27.38 | 27.34 | 27.71 | 27.58 | 27.10 | 27.25 | 27.68 | 26.62 | 27.36 | 27.65% 34.07 6 33.68 | 27.72 | 27.51 | 27.80 | 26,70 | 27.12 | 27.00) 27.17 | 27.56 | 26.93 | 27.24 | 34.02 | 33. 33.73 | 27.51 | 27.08 | 27.64 | 26.65 | 27.80 | 27.32) 27.41 | 26.99 | 26.50 | 27.32 | 33.56 | 27.52 | 27.32 | 27.66 | 27.01 | 27.41) 27.27 | 27.02 | 27.30 | 26.35 | 27.19% 38.81 | 27.64 | 26.97 | 27.61 | 27.08 | 27.46 | 27.75 | 26.97 | 27.46 | 26.89) 27.17} 33.73 | 27.71 | 27.41 | 27.66 | 27.34 | 27.39 | 27.73 | 27.21 | 27.19 | 27.30] 27.21] 33.84 | 27.78 | 27.63 | 27.59 | 27.14 | 27.59 | 27.78 | 27.59 | 27.34) 27.19] 97.47 } 33.76 | 27.80 | 27.71 | 27.61 | 27.49 | 27.68 | 27.80) 27.70 | 27.78 | 27.21 | 27.70% 33.96 | 27.85 | 27.76 | 27.66 | 27.80 | 27.92] 27.89 | 27.68 | 27.73 27.56 | 27.76 34.01 | 27.90 | 27.85 | 27.73 | 27.76} 27.94 | 27.84 | 27.83 | 27.86 | 27.64 | 27.68 | 34.04 | 27.97 | 27.90 | 27.88 | 27.90 | 28.04 | 27.84 | 27.91 | 27.81] 27:66] 27.91 | 34.16 | 27.98 27.78! 28.13 | 28.03 | 27.87 | 27.84 | 28.01 | 27.98] 27.58} 27.89} 34.13 | 27.97: 277. 73 28.08 | 27.92 | 27.89) 27.84 | 27.92 | 27.91) 27.73 | 27.83 | 34.04 | 27.98 | 27.88 | 28.13 | 28.07 | 27.89] 27.91 | 27.83 | 28.29 | 28.07 | 27.94 33.97 | 27.92 | 27.83) 28.13 | 28.07 | 28.01 | 27.80 | 27.87 | 28.54 | 27.54 | 27.88 | 33.84 | 27.88 97.85 28.07 | 28.02 | 28.18] 27.81 | 28.03 | 28.01] 27.44 | 27.91 34.01 | 27.838 | 27 83 28.22 | 28.20 | 28.37 | 27.89) 28.26 ; 27.99 | 27.42 | 27.93 34.18 | 28.03 | 27.73: 27.93 | 27.85 | 28.35 | 27.84 | 28.08 | 27.44 | 27.46 | 27.76 | 34.04 | 28.05 | 27.75 | 28.10} 27.70] 28.28 | 27.78 | 28.09 | 27.73: 27.51 | 97.54 | 33.86 | 28.07 | 27.73 27.98 | 27.61] 27.87 | 27.75 | 27.70 27.68, 27.37 | 97.704 3.94 | 27.88 | 27.68) 27.82 | 27.58 | 27.63 | 27.75 | 27.72 | 27.58 | 27.25 | 97.76 | 33.86 27 68 ate 27.75 | 27.85 | 27.87 | 27.73 | 27.56 ; 27.32 | 26.84 | 27.81 | MAGNETIC OBSERVATIONS. 79 As the series is a short one, I give the separate means of 6 and of 7 days to compare with the mean of 13; these partial results confirm the general regularity of the diurnal variation, and show that we may place confidence in the result deduced from the aggregate values. Diurnal Variation of the Magnetic Declination at Port Foulke, Smith Strait, December to March, 1860-61. Mean local Mean Mean Mean Mean Mean Mean time. of 6 days. of 13 days. | local time. of 6 days. | of 7 days. | of 13 days. 8 A. M. 30°.63 28°. 92 8 P.M. 30°..96 279.79 x 30.49 5 28.87 9 31.02 27.87 30.57 , 28.81 31.07 27.89 30.66 28.86 11 31.06 27.87 30.76 28.79 | Midnight, {$31.07 28.00 31.05 27.96 31.02 27.92 31.06 28.01 31.05 27.83 31.05 27.80 31.00 27.67 30.93 27.61 30.87 27.50 30.64 X28.72 30.68 28.74 30.66 28.83 30.75 28.91 30.82 29.00 30.79 29.08 30.89 29.20 OTR OH Co bo West elongations are indicated by a___, and east elongations by {. Taking the mean of the two values at 8 A. M., and subtracting each hourly value from the mean of the whole (29°.11), we obtain the diurnal variation as given in the following table ; the values are given in minutes. For comparison I have added the diurnal variation observed at Van Rensselaer Harbor by Dr. Kane ;' these results are given in two columns, the second one containing the variation after the omission of the larger disturbances. To separate in our series the disturbances from the regular readings would not lead to any satisfactory results, as the observations are much too limited in number; no very large disturbances, however, are recorded, so that we may with equal advantage compare the Port Foulke results with others, including or excluding the larger disturbances. By the additional comparisons with Point Barrow,” Toronto, and Philadelphia,’ we may be enabled to generalize certain features in the diurnal variation of the north-magnetic hemisphere. Van Rensselaer and Port Foulke are stations situated to the nort/wward of the magnetic pole (of dip 90° and horizontal force 0). 1 See my discussion of Dr. Kane’s Magnetic Observations in the Arctic Seas, in the Smithsonian Contributions to Knowledge, November, 1858. 2 Phil. Trans. Royal Society, 1857, Part II, Art: xxiv. On hourly observations of the magnetic declination made by Captain R. Maguire, R. N., and the officers of H. M. 8. Plover, in 1852-53-54, at Point Barrow. By Maj.-Gen. E. Sabine. The comparison with Toronto is taken from the same paper. 3 Smithsonian Contributions to Knowledge, June, 1862. Discussion of the Magnetic and Meteoro- logical Observations made at the Girard College, Philadelphia, 1840 to 1845, Part I. By A. D. Bache, LL.D. RECORD AND RESULTS OF Comparative Table of Diurnal Variation of the Magnetic Declination observed at some stations situated to the northward, southward, eastward and westward of the Magnetic Pole. West deflection from the normal position is indicated by a + sign, east deflection by a — sign. West elongations are indicated by a X affixed, east elongations by the sign f. Mean local time. Midnight 1 A.M. 9 3 4 5 6 : ‘ 8 9 0 1 ll Noon TEE N1oo Ol CFL eR Port Foulke. December to March, 1860-61. Van Rensselaer Harbor. January Same, to March, omitting 1854. large dis- turbances. —28! —28 fod did JL te DPmODOW OC x bo 02 bo bo G2 LO eS ts OO Oo ~) ++ ais ere ar rar opararorarar || Parae mom 109 0 OUND aT bo HT BO 05 OLD H AT LO oO a or | = jm Point Barrow. Omitting larger disturbances, 1852-54. 1st) ++ DePIOWW UNDE DWAIN AKOROD: lok x Toronto. Omitting larger dis- turbances. Philadelphia. Winter Same, months, omitting 1841-45. large dis- turbances. | 2 oo | S (=r) AMNNWNWWASCSDOMNOAMNP WW? [ele lel ee laees| ae i See ES) NH OW DOHOUNNWOROOCOHUU: ++ ++ ++ ! ror tL ILL lpWWI SHWE SSSSSS x + AS SPP wwWNopmmprnsoSs OH ROO REK HD OH DP aTH aoe Sean os = CO —0.3 —1.0 —l.4 —1.4 —1.0 Pieetrerarsrorsese a | Soos Northward and Eastward. Southward of magnetic pole. The geographical position and declination of these stations are as follows :— Port Foulke Van Rensselaer Point Barrow . Toronto . Philadelphia Magnetic pole ac-) | cording to Ross 5 Magnetic pole ac-) | cording to Evans) | He bo OD et on (DOr OWE 108 12 W. 41 EK. 1 WW | | Third Vol. of Toronto | Obs. Lond., 1857. 'Part XII of Diseus- sion of Gir. Col. Mag. | (May, 1864). observed ) Phil. Trans., 1834, LSS) Sal viol le Actas nile constructed ) | 1858 $ | Map of isogonic lines. Comparing the Port Foulke and Van Rensselaer Harbor diurnal progression, we notice a close correspondence, viz: a maximum west deflection about 1 P. M.; a maximum east deflection between 2 and 3 A. M.; a normal position of the needle about 64 P.M. and 7 A, M.; in fact the only noticeable difference is a less range MAGNETIC OBSERVATIONS. 81 of motion at Port Foulke (42’) when compared with that of Van Rensselaer (69’) ; this may be due to the short series of observations at either place, and partly also to disturbances. The horizontal force at Port Foulke being smaller than at Van Rensselaer, and the former station having been occupied during a maximum of the ten or eleven year inequality, the latter during a minimum of that cycle, we should have expected the greater range at Port Foulke. The two diurnal curves are further illustrated by means of the accompanying diagram. DIvRNAL VARIATION IN WINTER. Midnight i RPoOoUONAT KR WH Midnight Bbit BY) Gy Pi) aI5j it) By) 9) by 1K) Ih A) OS) BM) BEY + (West) — (East) Comparing the diurnal progression of the several stations, we find them to exhibit the maximum west deflection about 1 P.M., which, I believe, holds good for all places in the north magnetic hemisphere. It has also lately been observed, quite close to the magnetic pole, by Sir Francis L. McClintock’ at Port Kennedy, in latitude 72° 01’, and in longitude 94° 19’ west, magnetic declination 135° 47’ west (1858-59). At the Whalefish Islands (Boat Island @ = 68° 59’, 7, = 53° 13’) near Godhaven, Lieut. Foster” found, in June, 1824, the maximum west deflection about 1+ P.M. The morning maximum east deflection appears to be subject to certain fluctuations, but it keeps within the limits of midnight and 9 A. M.; its epochal variation is mostly due to the interferences of the disturbances which, for 1 Phil. Trans. Roy. Soc., 1863, Part II. Results of hourly observations of the magnetic declina- tion made by Sir Francis L. McClintock and the officers of the yacht “ Fox,” at Port Kennedy, in the Arctic Sea in the winter of 1858-59, ete. By Maj.-Gen. E. Sabine. ® Phil. Trans. Roy. Soc. 1826, Part IV. Observations on the diurnal variation of the magnetic needle at the Whalefish Islands, by Lieut. H. Foster, June, 1824. 11 June, 1865. §2 RECORD AND RESULTS OF stations near the pole, may reach magnitudes sufficient even to overpower the regular solar diurnal progression. It will be observed that at Port Foulke the motion of the north end of the needle from early morning till about one hour after noon, is westerly, magnetically, though in reality it is easterly, as the needle points sowth of west. For the sake of illustration we will suppose an observer stationed at the magnetic pole near King William Island, and two needles placed in his meridian, one north the other south of him, also two needles placed in his parallel, one east the other west; these needles will point with their north or marked end towards him when in their normal position (which, for instance, always happens some hours before noon), but early in the morning, upon turning successively to them he will find them all deviating to his left, and an hour or two after noon he will find them deflected to his right ; they have all moved in the interval from left to right, though in reality the marked end of the northern needle moved from west to east, that of the southern needle from east to west, and that of the eastern from north to south, and of the western from south to north; however, the motion of the eastern needle appears earlier, and that of the western later, by the amount of their difference of longitude with that of the observers, the motion being governed everywhere by local solar time. The declinometer was also observed nearly every day at 8 A. M. and 2 and 10 P.M., between November 12, 1860, and March 9, 1861. There are, however, several interruptions, and the instrument has been moved in the interval. The only use I propose to make of this series is to ascertain the angular motion of the mag- net between 2 and 10 P. M., and to form from it an estimate of the diurnal range. Declinometer Record at Port Foulke. Scale Readings. 2P.M.|10P.M.] 1860. 2P.M.|10P.M.| 1860. 2P.M.;10P.M.} 1861. 2P.M./10P.M 38.8 | 40.0 | Dec. 21 | 33.5 | 36.3 | Jan. 16 | 28.5 | 35.8 | Feb. 10 | 29.3 | 46.0 39.2 | 40.5 22 | 38.4 | 35.8 | Circle | 28° 0’ | 27° 0/ VOU BOS) |) BOY 87.2 | 43.2 23 | 384.1; 38.0 17! 82.1 | 34.6 12 | 30.7 | 42.1 37.8 | 46.2 94 | 43.0 | 29.9 18 | 33.8 | 36.5 13 | 86.9 | 39.3 39.0 | 42.9 Circle |25° 207\28° 00/ 19 | 33.7 | 35.2 14 | 35.9 | 39.7 36.4 | 44.1 25 | 18.0 | 29.4 20 | 28.4 | 34.6 NB) Wh BIL} || (Gk) 41.5 | 42.0 26) 26.1 | 29.3 21 | 32.4 | 35.2 IGS) GES) Hh OES Y 42.0 | 42.4 27 | 25.1 | 29.4 22 | 39.9 | 35.5 17 | 34.2 | 29.8 87.2 | 46.5 28 | 25.4 | 29.7 Circle | 23° 0/| 27° 0/ 18 | 30.1 | 37.4 43.1 | 46.5 29 | 28.8 | 28.7 23 | 25.0 | 36.7 19 | 35.8 | 37.1 27.9 | 36.5 30 | 28.4 | 29.2 24) 14.8 | 37.5 20 | 36.35 | 36.7 43.3 | 44.3 81 | 26.0 | 28.7 25 | ¥1.3 | 39.9 21) 26.7 | 35.1 25.9 | 27.5 1861 Ga Weycss Bee 22 | 33.8 | 41.3 26.2 | 27.7] Jan. 2 | 26.1 | 34.2 2% ) 28.0 | 35.9 8) 28E) |) eh!) 24.7 | 27.4 3 | 28.4 | 30.8 28 | 31.6) 35.0 24 | 83.2 | 39.2 33.2 | 38.3 4} 22.7 | 30.3 Ae BPN | Boes 25 | 38.3 | 38.7 25.6 | 42.1 5 | 27.1 | 380.6 380 | 84.1 | 34.9 26 | 88.5 | 38.7 34.6 | 386.0 Gi oF 2 21980 Bi I Bis i oitial) 27 | 27.8 | 38.9 85.5 | 35.7 7 | 28.0: |. 30:8 | Feb. 1 | 32:8 | 29:5 28 | 26.6 | 38.5 85.6 | 35.7 8 |. 28.5 | 29.3 2 | 28.4 | 36.0 |March1 | 30.0 | 24.6 34.0 | 35.6 QE Slee ORS 38 | 33.1 | 35.4 2 | 35.5 | 29.9 35.6 | 24.4 10} 29.0 | 29.6 4 | 30.1 | 36.0 3 | 36.9 | 38.6 25.1 | 35.8 IL | 27.7 | 30.8 5 | 82.4 | 35.0 4 | 35.1 | 39.2 34.0 | 34.8 12 | 26.3 | 28.5 6 | 33.0 | 35.3 5 | 38.3 | 38.9 33.3 | 36.9 13 | 28.6 | 29.8 7 | 34.4 | 35.6 6 | 387.6 | 39.8 ST) 3828 14 | 24.1 | 30:2 8 | 34.3 | 34.7 7 | 36.1 | 39.2 30.5 | 36.2 154) 22846 Q9k3 9 | 34.5 | 384.9 8 | 38:5 | 39:0 MAGNETIC OBSERVATIONS. 83 In the above record I have given the circle reading in those cases only when the circle had been shifted between the two hours of record, its reading from day to day being otherwise of no consequence. If we take the difference each day of the tabular numbers, we find, from 104 days, the average difference 4.42 divisions, or 45’, by which quantity the north end of the needle moved easterly between 2 and 10 P.M. By the preceding diurnal curve we must add 1’ before 2 P. M., and add 4’ after 10 P. M. in order to get to the extreme range, which is therefore 50’, a value preferable to that given before. At Philadelphia the ratio of the diurnal range in winter, to that of the whole year, is as 5.6 to 7.9, hence applying the same ratio to Port Foulke, we find the probable diurnal amplitude of the declination, on the average throughout the year and for an epoch of its greatest value in the ten or eleven year cycle, to be 1° 10’. ABSOLUTE DETERMINATIONS. Observations and Results of Magnetic Declinations. The declination observations made in connection with the survey of the west coast of Smith Sound and Kennedy Channel, in the spring of 1861, will be given first, next those observed in Smith Strait, and last those determined in North Green- land. ‘There are 14 stations in all. An approximate correction for diurnal variation was applied to refer the observed declination to the mean declination of the day; this correction was derived from the mean diurnal progression as found at Port Foulke and Van Rensselaer Harbor. Cairn Point, Smirn Srrair. Observations of magnetic declination, April 9, 1861. 8. J. McCormick, observer. Double altitudes and bearing of the sun. Sextant: 2 © : : : 25° 14’ | Latitude, 9 = 68° 30/.8 Gi fa LRU OBE 25 02 | Longitude, a= 4" 51™ 565 COs COs 6 24 53 Mean, 25 03 ©’s decl’n, 6 = 7° 49’ 15” Put tg W= Wg) td Index correction, +1 | Hour angle, ¢= 45 15™ 145 cos t ae 12 32 then cos A = BG GID a al cold ——w Refraction—par., —4 Hi 3 WO Wey? Y/ Ze ) Semi-diameter, + 16 Azimuth, A = 65° 42/ Observed altitude, h. 12 44 | d Mag. bearing 8.176 00 W. Mag. decl’n, +110 08 at 43> Observation of magnetic declination, April 12, 1861. 8S. J. McCormick, observer. Bearing of the sun at noon. ; : : Tee NER OCW Hence magnetic declination : : 5 . +1109 0’ 84 RECORD AND RESULTS OF Observations of Magnetic declination, April 15, 1861. I. I. Hayes, observer. Bearing of the sun. (Pock.) chron’r correction A 7’ April 15 —i7™ 51% fans Observed time of QO. é : oO 28) OO Put gM = ae Mean time of observation (14th) . - 23 07 09 Equation of time / . : : c +1 13 then tgA = ligt cos A : ety sin (» — 1) Hour angle ¢ : : : : .—0 51 38 S=+ 9° 55’ 25” YU= 10 10 34 A=— 13 38 ° Magnetic bearing, 262 15 (By Wiirdmann’s compass, counting from 8. through E.) Magnetic decl’n, +111 23 RECAPITULATION OF RESULTS. Approximate 1861. Observed declination. Time. correction for diurnal Dec’n. variation. April 9 + 110° 18’ 4 P. M. — 25! + 109° 53’ Cel +110 00 Noon —28 +109 32 a ls) +111 28 11-A. M. —22 +111 01 Mean , ; . +110 09 Foggy Camp, Smiru Sounp. Observations for magnetic declination, May 13 (P.M.) 1861. I. I. Hayes, observer. Bearing of the sun.t P. chron’r A 7’ = + 17 19™ 48° o = 79° 55/.5 Observed time |O 4 17 20 a == 42 45™ 528 Mean time of ob’s, 5 37 08 H+ 3153) Oss = 18033095” t 5 41 O1 M='6 09.3 A=88 41.6 Magnetic bearing |O— 16’ 164 14.0 Magnetic declination, +107 04.4 or + 106° 53’ when corrected for diurnal var’n. Camp Hawks, Smiru Sounp. (Two miles from Irving Island, Dobbin Bay. ) Observations for magnetic declination, May 22 (P.M.) 1861. I. I. Hayes, observer. Bearing of the sun.? - P. chron’r aT = + 12 14™ 398 @ = 719° 437.7 Observed time @ 8 02 50 a= 4" 52m 248 Mean time of ob’s, 9 17 22 wD} +3 34] @’ss= 20° 33’ 15” t 9 20 56 M=—26 00.2 A=142 090 Magnetic bearing 102 30.0 Magnetic declination, +115 21.0 or + 115° 38’ when corrected for diurnal var’n. * Another observation ©|.168° 25’ at 4" 15™ 58% has been rejected. 2 Of the following observation I have made no further use: At 7" 28" 45° angle between sun *— and Kast Cape, Irving Island, 76° 8’, magnetic bearing of Cape 43° 15’. Computing from these data we have azimuth of Cape 30° 10/ east of north, and magnetic declination + 106° 35’. MAGNETIC OBSERVATIONS. 85 Cache, on old Floe, Smiru Sounp. Observations for magnetic declination, May 23 (A. M.) 1861. IL L Hayes, observer. Bearings of the sun.? Pocket chronometer, May 30, Port Foulke, aZ’= + 1° 12" 17° 67 = — 2.5, + 1T May 23, Port Foulke, AT=+1 12 34 Difference of longitude, + 28 AT Cache, +1 13 02 At 9" 56™ 30° sun ( bears 65° 22/ > = 792 30/ ig 10 13 27 e 75 30 a = 4" 51™ 328 uw 10 15 07 s ef 6) 35 at 10 19 06 as e 76 15 3, = 20° 45/ 25” Mean 10 15 53 i He 16 OT 8,= 20 45 37 P. chron’r, AZ’ + 1° 13™ 028)+ 18 13™ 025 M,=— 21° 09/55” M,,=— 20° 53'56” Observed time, 9 56 80| 10 15 538 A,= 168 50.3 A,,= 173 26.6 Mean time of ob’s, 11 09 82] 11 28 55 B= 65 22.0 ye 4G Ore E +3 29 + 3 29 Mag.decl’n,=+125 47.7 |Mag.decl’n,=+110 26.4 = || t 11 13 Ol] 11 32 24; Weight 1 Weight 3 Magnetic declination, = + 114° 17’ or 113° 52’ when corrected for diurnal variation. Scouse Camp, Smit Sounp. Observations for Magnetic declination, May 23 (24th, midnight), 1861. I. I. Hayes, observer. Bearing of the sun. Pocket chronometer a7’ + 1" 13 02 | »@ =79° 29/ Observed time 0 40 00 | » = 4" 51™ 328 Mean time of obser’n (23d), 13 53 02 | 8 = 20° 46’ 42 yD} +3 29 | M=—23 28.7 t 13556) ol) Al" 20,0 4055 Magnetic bearing of © 40 35.0 Magnetic declination, +111 44.5 or + 112° 06’ wnen cor’d for diur’l var’n. : Potato Camp, Smiru Sounp. Observations for magnetic declination, May 24 (P. M.), 1861. I. I. Hayes, observer. Bearing of the sun. P. chr. May 30, Port Foulke a7 = +1? 127 175| - o= 79° 04 sf = — 2.5 + 14 i 4h 50™ May 24, Port Foulkeay +1 12 31 Difference of longitude, + 2 00 5= 20° 547 57” AT Potato Camp, : +1 14 31 M= — 39 9.8 Observed time 6 34 00 4= 121 07.4 Mean time of observation, 7 48 31] © -nag. 133 30.0 EL + 3 25 | Mag. decl’n, + 105 23 or 105° 34’ when cor- rected for diur’l var’n. t oly a6 1 An observation at Small berg Camp, on the morning of the same date, was found erroneously recorded, and has therefore been omitted. 86 RECORD AND RESULTS OF Camp Separation, Smiru Sounp. Observations for magnetic declination, May 24 (25th A. M.), 1861. I. I. Hayes, observer. Bearing of the sun. P. chr. May 25, Port Foulke a7 = + 1> 12™ 308 aes "8° bev Difference of longitude, + 3 32 a= 4" 483m T Camp Separation, ap LG 02 Observed time, 12-58-00 FS BOS Hy? ay” Mean time of obs’tion (24th), 14 14 02 M=— 24 53.6 Lt se 3 24 A= 212 33 14 17 26 | Bearing ® 42 45 | Magnetic declination, + 104 42 or + 105° 04’ when corrected for diurnal variation. Last Camp, Smiru Sounp. Observations for magnetic declination, May 26 (P.M.), 1861. I. I. Hayes, observer. Bearing of the sun. P. chr. May 26, Port Foulke, a7 = + 1" 12™ 26° meas YEO BEY Difference of longitude, + 3 32 rs Gage AT Last Camp, +1 15 58 Observed time © 5 47 30 a NS BY Bx Mean time of observation, 7 03 28 Ni = 53> BOs Et + 3 18 Alm OE ASkS 7 06 41 .|Mag. bearingp141 00 Maenetic declination, + 108 31 or + 108° 36’ when cor- rected for diurnal var’n. Starr Island, Porr FouLke, Smiru Srrarr. October 27, 1860. August Sonntag, observer. By means of the observed bearing of the base line and the agreement of the observed and computed latitude of Cape Isabella (see astronomical part) we have the magnetic declination + 109° 45’ o = 78° 17.8 2 = 73° 067.0 Northumberland Island, ofr souru stpE, WHALE Sounp. August 3, 1861. The record of this observation not being quite complete, the observer’s result, or + 106° 00’, is adopted. Publi oumely SO) WO! MAGNETIC OBSERVATIONS. 87 Netlik, WHALE Sounp. (For result by declinometer see further on.) Observations of magnetic declination, August 4 (5th A.M.), 1861. S. J. McCormick, observer. Bearing of the sun. Observed time, pocket chronometer, 2% 20™ 448 Chronometer correction a 7’ mA A AN oy TT° 077.8 Mean time of observation (4th), Hl BS BO |) op 4h 45™ 288 Kquation of time Z — 5 41] 8 16° 54’ 21/” Hour angle ¢ —2 26 51) M= 20 45.8 A=—39 57 @ magnetic bearing, S. 68 00 W. Magnetic declination, + 107 57 or + 107° 87’ when corrected for diurnal variation. For a second determination see further on. Port Foulke, Surry Srrait, July, 1861. Observations for magnetic declination at the Observatory. H. G. Radcliff, observer. Instruments used: Portable declinometer and theodolite. Observations for azimuth of marks B and C. July 9 P. M., 1861. The horizontal circle of the theodolite reads in a direction from south towards east. Bearings of the sun. ark or Pocket 2 : Mark or Pocket : . an chitonometer. Cinlo Benches. Limb. chronometer. Chale nonthings. Ol GF OB! BLS 56° 56/.5 DYILAO lO 6 06 45.0 57 18 L$) B 40 00 02 ©| G2 Bile See AG OM a iy: 31/.5 B 40 00 02 (0) 32 45 49 56 55 Gi 25 24.5 B 40 05 05 Ol G 22) 8 52 00 01.5 C 167 28.5 26.5 lO 6 24 07 52 14.5 15.5 Ol 6 43 20 46 20.5 20 B 40 00.5 02 {O) 6 44 36 46 37.0 36.5 Cc 167 24 24 We have from the astronomical paper the chronometer correction of 2007 on mean time, July 9, 1861 —— 4" 47" 17°, and from the chronometer comparison, pocket chronometer, 2" 03" 35°.8 = 2" 3" by chronometer 2007; hence AT = —4* 47" 53°; we have also the observed times of the sun’s centre, from the above: 6" 05™ 12°, 6 23" 22°, 6" 32" 20°, and 6” 43" 58° by chronometer. The correspond- ing derived hour angles are 1" 12™ 25%, 1° 30™ 35°, 1° 39™ 32°, and 1° 51™ 10%, and the computed azimuths, 20° 08’.3, 25° 08’.5, 27° 35'.8, and 30° 46’.5 (all west of south); hence by means of the corresponding circle readings 57° 07’.7, 52° 07'.9, 49° 43’.4, and 46° 28.’5, in connection with the mean reading of B 40° 01’.6, and of C 167° 25’.4 we obtain the Azimuth of B. Azimuth of C. By WA.9) 87° 15'.2 azimuth of B 387 «614.8 127 23.8 angular difference By I By 1e.4t 90 08.6 H. of S. Mean, 37 152 W. of S: 88 RECORD AND RESULTS OF Ser 1. OBSERVATIONS FOR DECLINATION, July 10, 1861. The horizontal circle of the declinometer reads in the direction from south towards west. The pointing is upon the axis of the collimator. Between. 2" and 3" by chronometer, the collimator magnet read 134° 56’ 20” and 134° 57 00”, and the azimuth mark B 284° 26’ 30” and 26’ 30”, also C 156° 26’ 00” and 26’ 40’. We have consequently at 92" A. M. 180° + collimator, 814° 56’.7 314° 56/.7 Mark B, 284 26.5 C, 156 26.3 30 30.2 158 30.4 Azimuth of B, W. of N. 142 44.8 Azimuth of C, 270 08.6 Magnetic declination W.112 14.6 Ill 38.2 Mean, = +111 56 Ser 2. July 11, 1861: Between 8" 35" and 9° 35" by chronometer, the collimator magnet read 134° 56’ 0” and 56’ 40’, and the azimuth mark B 284° 26’ 10’ and 26’ 40”, also C 156° 26’ 40” OBSERVATIONS FOR DECLINATION. and 26’ 40’. Hence for 44" P. M. 180° + collimator, 814° 56’.3 814° 567.3 Mark B, 284 26.4 C, 156 26.7 380 29.9 158 29.6 Azimuth B, 142 44.8 Azimuth C, 270 08.6 Magnetic declination W. 112 14.9 ATS 73950 Mean, = +111 57 Correction for diurnal variation to set 1, — 22’, and to set 2, — 12 , hence corrected mean + 111° 40’. Netlik, WHALE Sounp. Observations with portable declinometer and theodolite. H. G. Radcliff, observer. Observations for azimuth of mark A. August 4, P. M. 1861. Bearings of the sun. Mark or Limb. Pocket chronometer, Pocket chronometer. Mark or Limb. Circle. Circle. AA 8° 34’ 36! (o} 48™ 988 70° 50’ Bl! ©| | lo™44™ 45" | 71 48 3 fo) 50 “41 70 50 51 lO | ee I al 283 43 ms 8 34 36 From the astronomical paper we have, for August 4 (P. M.), the pocket chrono- meter correction AJ’ = — 4" 41™ 54°, Observed times of the sun’s centre 10" 45™ 53° and 10" 49™ 35° by chronometer. The corresponding computed hour angles are 5" 58" 14° and 6" 01" 57°, and the azimuths 93° 29'.2 and 94° 23'.3 (west of south); hence by means of the corre- sponding circle readings 71° 43’.0 and 70° 50'.5 in connection with the mean reading of the mark A 8° 35’ we obtain the azimuth of the mark. 156° 377.2 156 38.8 156 38.0 .W. of S. MAGNETIC OBSERVATIONS. 89 OBSERVATION FoR DECLINATION. August 4 P. M. Between 10" 35" and 11" 25" by chronometer, the collimator magnet read 10° 37 00’ and 37 40”, and the azimuth mark 273° 42’ 20” and 43’ 40”. We have— 180° + collimator, 190° 387'.3 Mark A, 273 43.0 276 54.3 Azimuth of mark W. of N. 23 22.0 Magnetic declination W. 106 27.7 at 61 P. M. or + 106° 25’ when corrected for diur’l var’n. Combining this result with the first obtained by S. J. M’Cormick, and giving the weight 2 to Radcliff’s determination, and the weight 1 to M’Cormick’s, we find the resulting declination + 106° 49’. Upernavik, Norru Grerennanp. August 16 P. M., 1861. Observations with portable declinometer and theodolite. HH. G. Radcliff, observer. Observations for azimuth of mark A. Bearings of the sun. Pocket A Mark or cket Q ae chronometer. Circle. Limb. smeanaee Circle. A 266° 45/.5 47’ KO) 10" 49™ 058 145° 15/ 14/ A 266 45 46 A 266 47 46 ©| 10" 27™ 498 148 06 05.5 Ol 10 31 02 147 18 18 iO) 10 29 55 148 05.5 05.5 lO 10) 33) 20 147 18 18 A 266 47 46 A 266 45 46 (6)} 1@ 38) ail 145 15.5 14.5 The astronomical paper furnishes A7 ——3" 41™ 52° (sufficiently near for Aug. 16). We have the observed times of the sun’s centre 10" 28™ 48%, 10" 32™ 115, and 10" 40" 58°, the corresponding computed hour angles 6° 43™ 01%, 65 46™ 24°, and 6" 55™ 115, also the computed azimuths of the sun 75° 44’.8, 74° 57’.0, and 72° 53’.0 (W. of N.); the corresponding circle readings are 148° 05’.6, 147° 18/.0, and 145° 14’.8; the mean reading of the mark A, 266° 46’.2 and its azimuth 14° 95/.4 14 25.2» Mean 14° 25/0 E. of S. 14 24.4 OBSERVATIONS FOR DECLINATION. August 17, A. M., 1861. Between 2" 0™ and 3" 0™ by chronometer, the collimater magnet read 161° 13’ 30” and 14’ 00’, and the azimuth mark A 219° 21’ 30” and 22’ 00”; we find 180 + collimator, Sl® TB Mark A, De) DALEY 121 52.0 Azimuth of mark W. of N. 194 25.0 Magnetic declination W. 72 33.0 at 10"50™ A. M., correction for diurnal variation —21/. A result which appears to me rather doubtful, though not differing more than 24° from Captain Inglefield’s determination in 1854, which was 75° W. The 12 June, 1865. 90 RECORD AND.RESULTS OF diurnal variation and the disturbances in these high latitudes comprise so large a range as to require many and continued observations of the magnet. The result of the following observations, taken by Mr. Sonntag, at Proven, accords well enough with the supposed distribution of magnetism as marked upon the Admiralty Chart of Baffin Bay of 1859 (No. 2177). Proven, NorrH GREENLAND. August 8 (P. M.) 1860. Instrument used: the theodolite. Observer, A. Sonntag. Bearings of the sun. Limb. Pocket chronometer. Circle. Magnetic meridian. ©| 1202218 29° 29! 30! 332° 02) IO 1 21 24 29 49 50 03 0) Ie ey AM) 29 36 37 03 Ol 1 22 50 28° 50 50 02 iO 1 26 51 28 30 31 ©| 1 27 46 27 40 41 152 36.6 O| 1 28 35 27 26 27 30.6 ro) 1 29 40 OO 46 We have from the astronomical paper the correction of the pocket chronometer, August 8, 1860, A7 = + 1° 01™ 38°; the latitude @ = 72° 23’ 01”, and the longi- tude 27 = 3" 42" 11°.1. We find the hour angles 2° 18™ 01° and 2" 24™ 33° for the two sets, and the corresponding azimuths of the sun 39° 01’.5 and 40° 48’.0. Maenetic meridian. é : : LS ZOMIGES 152° 19/.3 Circle reading . 5 6 : : 5 OE) RB 27 50.8 Difference : : : : ; e200 5340 124 28.5 Azimuth of sun 5 : : Q 5° a) OI) 40 48.0 Magnetic declination W. . 838 51.5 83 40.5 Mean declination + 83° 46’ or + 83° 24’ when corrected for diurnal variation. RECAPITULATION OF OBSERVED DECLINATIONS. West (magnetic) declination is indicated by a + sign. No. Locality. Latitude. |Longitude.| Declination. Date. Observer. 1 | Proven, North Greenland, | 72° 23’ |°55° 33’] + 83° 24’| Aug. 1860| A. Sonntag Starr Island, Smith Strait,| 78 18 | 73 06]+109 45) Oct. “ 6g 3 | Cairn Point, :; 78 381 | 72 59|+110 09| Apr. 1861 | I. I. Hayes and ) F S. J. M’Cormick § | 4 | Foggy Camp, Smith Sound| 79 55 | 71 28]+4106 53] May, “ | I. I. Hayes 5 | Camp Hawks, ss 19 44°73) 206) |) Ells: 884) “ tc 6 | Cache on Floe, ye 79 30 72 3 | +113 52 6 “ “ 7 | Scouse Camp, i 79 99 142 58] tino 06) “ i 8 | Potato Camp, tf 79 04 | 72 30/4105 34] « “ “ 9 | Camp Separation, “ US BSW A ORS | Gels) Oo «“ “ 10 | Last Camp, GB 78 38 | 72 08]4108 36 “ “ “ 11 | Port Foulke, Smith Strait,|78 18 | 73 00 | +111 40|July “ Fi. G. Radcliff 12 | Northumberland Island, wT 11 | %2 20) +106 00 |-Aug: i) = = == <= Whale Sound, 13 | Netlik, of (7 08 Veil 22) -EN0Gs 49n) ug H. G. Radcliff & 7 S. J. M’Cormick § 14 | Upernavik, N. Greenland,| 72 47 | 56 03/4 72 12) “ af H. G. Radcliff =o me MAGNETIC OBSERVATIONS. 91 On the accompanying chart of iso-magnetic lines in the vicinity of Smith Strait, the isogonic lines are shown by full lines; they depend upon eleven observed declinations, those at Camp Separation and Potato Camp were excluded on account of instrumental defect and discordance, and Kane’s determination at Van Rensse- laer Harbor (D = 108° 12’ W., June, 1854, latitude 78° 37’, longitude 70° 53’) was admitted without correction for secular change, which is at present too imper- fectly known and is certainly less than the errors to which the observations are liable. The following simple expression for the distribution of the magnetic declination is sufficient for our case :— D= D, + cA + yAA cos where D =resulting declination, at adopted epoch in latitude }, longitude % D, = mean declination at epoch, in mean latitude ¢, and mean longitude 2, Ad = $o—$, and AA =A—A, These eleven observations give as many equations of conditions of the form 0=D,—D+ «Ap + yAA cos @ from which « and y can be eliminated by the ordinary process. Wretind 23-109 sor Oy == The U eg = UCT and D =+109°.97 + 1.61 Ag + 14.65 Ad cos @ by means of which equation the isogonic lines for 105°, 110°, and 115° have been located on the chart; the epoch is 1861. The observations are represented as follows :— Observed D. Computed D. Difference. Starr Island é ; ; ; F +109°.75 +111°.57 — 19. (3) Cairn Point : : ; ; ‘ +110.15 +111.49 —1.34 Foggy Camp. ; : : ; +106.88 +109.64 —2.76 Camp Hawks . : ‘ : ‘ +115.63 +113.29 +2.34 Codie am Nea, | sent Bo ge +113.88 +112.63 +1.25 Scouse Camp. : : 5 : +112.10 +112.59 —0.49 Last Camp : : : ‘ é +108.60 +109.18 —0.58 Port Foulke 5 5 : 5 : +111.67 + 111.27 : +0.40 Northumberland Island ; ; ; +106.00 +107.42 — ila) Netlik é ; : : , : +106.82 +104.27 +2.55 Van Rensselaer Harbor . ; ‘ +108.20 +105.64 +2.56 Probable error of any single determination + 1°.3, and of any resulting line on chart + 0°.4 nearly. These lines, when prolonged in one direction, must necessarily ~ pass through the geographical pole, and in the other they extend to the magnetic pole. 92 RECORD AND RESULTS OF MAGNETIC INTENSITIES. Observations and Results. Wasuinaton, D. C., June, 1862. The following observations were made by myself at Washington, D. C., for the purpose of determining certain instrumental constants required for the reduction of the intensity observations made by the expedition. The instrument was received here in May, 1862; it had not been used since its return from Greenland. Determination of Moment of Inertia of Ring C. Dimensions: Outer diameter, 2.335 inches ) aesen Inner o LIB - 8 J Weight, 572.62 grains Moment of inertia A, = $ (7? + 7,7) w. Where r and 7, (im feet) equal outer and inner radius and w the weight, we find log k, = 0.63771 at 81° Fah. log k, = 0.63775 at 85“ the linear expansion being 0.0000105 parts for each degree; the thickness of the ring is 0.147 inch; it is of bronze. perature, 81° Fah. Determination of Moment of Inertia of Magnet Z 6 and its Appendages. Station, Coast Survey Office, Washington, D. C., June 13, 1862. Determination of value of one division of scale on telescope. Azimuth circle. Scale divisions. Delian Oe 18’ 20/” 300.8 295.2 Forming the differences we have 9 16 20 17 00 59.5 64.1 17° 22’ 45’ = 1028.8 divisions or 0 383 40 84 40 579.0 575.5 1 division = 1.014 5 15" 10 16 00 301.7 298.4 The azimuth circle reads in the direction from S. towards W., and an increase of scale reading (on telescope) corresponds to an east movement of the north end of the magnet. Change of magnetic moment of deflecting magnet (Z 6) for 1° of temperature, gq = 9.0002. HiXPERIMENTS OF VIBRATION. Ser 1. Magnet Z 6 suspended. Chronometer Kessels 12417, fast of mean time 2" 32, gains daily 6%. Charles A. Schott, observer. No. of vibrations. Time. Temperature. | Extreme scale readings.| 300 vib’ns at 84°.0. 0 Qh 37™ 49°.0 85° Fah 359 and 241 20 38 57.7 40 40 06.6 60 41 16.1 80 42 24.7 100 43 33.6 200 49 18.9 300 SommOsd: IE AE 320 56 12.6 14.9 340 oT 22.0 15.4 360 58 31.0 14.9 380 50 40.1 15.4 400 3. 00 49.1 83.0 F 319 and 277 15.5 Mean : : 5 Nf. ih), 1183 “a MAGNETIC OBSERVATIONS. 93 Coefficient of torsion. Tors. circle. Scale. Differences. iti 301.6 and 295.2 Observed time of 300 vib’ns, 1085°.13 2.6 Time of one vibration, 3.4504 267 299 303 Correction for rate, —0.0002 4.5 Rea ORS 9 87 300 293 a BuO 1.4 and when corrected for torsion and re- 177 301 294.8 ferred to temp. 85°, lg 7? = 1.07597 Mean (of 4) : é 5 P11 es O15 EXPERIMENTS OF VIBRATION. “Set 2, with inertia ring. No. of vibrations. Time. Temperature. | Extremescale readings.) 150 vib’ns at 85°. 0 At 09> 298.7, 86° Fah. 356 and 246 20 11 36.0 40 13 49.3 60 16 03.5 80 18 16.6 100 20 30.8 150 26 04.6 NSA) 170 28 17.0 41.0 190 30 31.8 42.5 210 382 45.5 42.0 230 384 59.4 42.8 250 387 12.7 84.0 332.2 and 268 41.9 Mean —. : . 16 42.02 Coefficient of torsion. Tors. circle. Seale. Differences. 177° 298.2 and 302.5 Observed time of 150 vib’ns, 10028.02 3.6 Time of one vibration, 6.6801 267 303.8 304 Correction for rate, —0.0004 5.7 87 293.5 303 qT, 6.6797 1.8 and when corrected for torsion, 1717 301.0 299 lg 7? = 1.64975 Mean (4). : 5 BAS = B88 EXPERIMENTS OF VIBRATION. Set 3. No. of vibrations. Time. Temperature. | Extreme scale readings.| 200 vib’ns at 8309.5. 0 ALA NOTES 83° 252 and 355 20 : 48 16.1 Ai) 49 25.3 60 50 34.7 80 Sl 43e7 100 52 52.6 200 58 38.5 Ib? Bileee 220 59 47.6 31.5 240 5 00 56.6 31.3 26 2 05.5 30.8 280 3 147 31.0 300 4 423.9 84 324 and 280.6 31.3 Mean 5 : : 5 : : : sive 31.18 Observed time of 200 vibrations . : 5 GONE IG Time of one vibration. ; : : : 3.4559 Correction for rate . : : ; : . —0.0002 Es Wie te eal wl AL i a Rag Re alse And when corrected for torsion and referred to 85° Fah., : : lg T? = 1.0778 By set l we have. , : , : : ‘ : ? : lg T? = 1.07597 Mean : : , ; ; : ; . 1.07667 Lh o4 RECORD AND RESULTS OF 2 The relation K—=-K, (a=) gives Igk—0.19972 We have therefore ly (x°/:) = 1.19402 for temperature 85° Fah., and taking the coefficient of expansion of steel = 0.0000068 we find also lg (77/:) = 1.19378 for temperature 45°, Determination of Magnetic Moment of 76 and of the Horizontal Force. Experiments of deflection. June 13, 1862. Magnet Z 6 deflecting at right angles to magnet Z 1 suspended. Deflecting distance 1.35 feet.t Circle readings, 11" 0". Temperature, 85°. Magnet. |North end.| Order. A. B. Order. 1 ro" 347) 00!" 34” 40/7 2 WO BIO? |) BP AO” 40 A | - 3 00 | 2° OO | = Saesae co aT icy) bo oo i=) ie) oo 5 ve Sy 10 34 10 Ww. Bk 8 2-1 4 ww | E. Ve 8x OO 38 00 W. W. 8 1 3 40 5 00 EH. 9 7 36 00 36 40 W. 1 | se ap | a ao | Mean, 7 36.9 1 04.1 2u=6 32.8 At IES By Temperature, 85° ey 1G) sul) Line of detorsion, 177° For the determination of the coefficient P depending upon the distribution of the ; free magnetism in the magnets, we have seven sets of observations of deflections at distances of 1.0 (in one case of 0.9) and of 1.8 foot. By means of the distances r and 7, and the corresponding angles of deflection w and wu, we have [pigias rr? sin wy—Ty 7 sin u 7° sin U,— 7° sin w The observations themselves will be found in their proper place in this paper, s Uy Locality. Date. eS @ oo Cambridge, 1860. July Port Foulke, | 1861. July 9° 39/ 02" 94’ 15/7 | 59 19 58 14 21 45: ce Upernavik, August 1 Godhayn, September 2 to G9 09 o9 OO OD 3 2 7 oe 8 9 6 7 Sin ae SE SoocoooeS This large value of P is occasioned by the fact that the two magnets are of equal size, : 1 Correction for defect of wooden Scale + 0.0003 foot. MAGNETIC OBSERVATIONS. 95 The horizontal force XY, and the magnetic moment m of magnet Z 6', are obtained from the formule 2 nk m : (xk 2 arch Sek PU. OF (1 = Sie AG 2 Lr. 1 Tn addition to the above observations at Washington, I have made the following with the magnets exchanged, from which we obtain an independent result. EXPERIMENTS OF DerLections. June 14, 1862. Magnet Z 1 deflecting at right angles to magnet Z 6 suspended. Deflecting distance 1.3 foot (correction + 0.0003). The record and order of observations are the same as in the set of deflections given in the text, and are here given in a more condensed form Set 1. 1 Bl Temp. 86° Fah. MAGe dr OY pe BO)” I)? 949° 13/ 4g// VA" 95" Qu = 5° 35’ 167.9 1, 10, PE AS) PXI) 50 30 Wy, ee) aE ald) 14 50 Peers = 947 48 40 50 20 942 12 00 12 45 24" 48 25 49 20 W. 242 10 00 OMS W. BH. 247 47 20 48 20 242 10 00 10 50 = Bi 70.8 Line of detorsion 211° 125252 Temp. 90° Set 2. Distance 1 foot. 1 40" Temp. 91° 251° 06’ 10” 06’ 40’’ 938° 51’ 00” Hil” yy é BE. E. 251 07 00 08 00 W. 238 51 00 Bi Ag | eae ek ie" oer Apil Os 8 09 20 238 57 10 57 00 W. BH. 251 12 00 13 00 Wie PBR At OO 58 20 i, 3 119} 116) 119} Ppt ey) 14 00 238 58 00 59) 2 2h 40™; at temp. 92° From these deflections we find P = —0.01365 and lg * = 8.73381 EXPERIMENTS OF VIBRATION. June 16, 1862. Magnet Z 1 suspended. Inertia ring C. Chronometer 1287, gains 6° a day. No. of Extreme | 150 vibrations vib’ns. Time. Temp. scale at 719. readings. 0 5 172-5280 709 240 20 20 23.5 and = 40 22 55.8 365 Observed time of 150 vib’ns, 11375:25 60 20 27.0 Time of one vibration, 7.5816 80 27 58.8 Correction for rate, —0.0004 100 30 30.3 150 36 49.0 18™ 575.0 7.5812 170 39 21.8 58.3 and when corrected for torsion and 190 41 52.5 56.7 referred to 89°.7 Fah. 210 44 24.0 265 57.0 lg 7? = 1.76132 230 46 55.8 and. 57.0 250 |- 49 27.8 22 330 57.5 Mean 4 3 LOMO Neo) 2s 96 RECORD AND RESULTS OF Combining the deflections with the vibrations, we find — From first set From last set Mean, 4.283 X= 4.286 and m= 0.3062 at 85° Fah. 4.279 0.3057 0.3060 0 6p Time. 12™ 485.5 14 06.5 15 25.0 16 43.3 18 01.9 19 19:0 25 50.5 27 10.4 28 28.3 29 46.5 31 05.0 32 23.6 Magnet Z 1 suspended without ring. 200 vibrations Extreme Temp. scale readings. 78° 270 and 330 | 286 and 78° 315 Mean We find lgk, = 0.63779 ig lgk = 0.19809 mX = 0.00537 at 78°. 13™ 028.0 04.0 03.3 03.2 03.1 04.6 IB}, OBE S37( at 89°.7 for Z 1 Observed time of 200 vib’ns, 783°.37 Time of one vibration, 3.9168 Correction for rate, —0.0002 3.9166 and when corrected for torsion and referred to 89°.7 Fah. lg T? = 1.18702 X = 4.323 and m= 0.2342 at 89°.7 Fah.; magnet Z 1 To compare the above values for the horizontal force with similar determinations at Washington, I have given a complete table of results, as far as known to me. See U. 8. Coast Survey Report of 1861, Appendix N. 22, also Coast Survey Report of 1863. From my observations, in 1858, in connection with Kane’s Arctic Expedition, I deduce X = 4.255; and for 1862.5 we have the means of the three values given above, or 4.296. Year. |Observer. Locality. Year. |Observer. Locality. x 1 | 1842.5 | Lefroy | Capitol Grounds | 4.347] 10 | 1856.7 | Schott | Coast Sur. Office | 4.309 2 | 1844.5 | Locke | Georgetown 4.282) 11 | 1856.7 oa Capitol Grounds | 4.308 | 3 | 1844.5 ss Capitol Grounds | 4.313] 12 | 1858.3 sf Coast Sur. Office | 4.255 | 4 | 1844.5 B Mag. Obs’y, Cpt. | 4.282 | 13 | 1859.6 tt Eee Dns 4.307 | 5 | 1845.2 | Lee Coast Sur. Office | 4.240 | 14 | 1860.7 a Se aia aa ves 4.319 } 6 | 1845.9 oe on 4 os 4.233 | 15 | 1862.5 ve ee 4.296 | 7 | 1851.5 | Dean | Georgetown 4.229] 16 | 1862.6 o SEAS Deane 4.2.96 | 8 | 1855.7 | Schott | Smithsonian Inst. | 4.338 | 17 | 1863.6 f OCC NiG ie 4.282 9 | 1855.7 = Georgetown 4.250 Mean 1853.6 4.2877 | Mean, omitting Georgetown values, 4.295 | These values were determined with different instruments and magnets; the X at Georgetown heights appears to be smaller than the Washington value proper (the two positions are 4 miles apart). MAGNETIC OBSERVATIONS. 97 OBSERVATIONS AT CAMBRIDGE, Mass. July 3, 1860. Harvard College Observatory. A. Sonntag, observer. Experiments of vibration. No. of vib’n. SODTRORWHHO — Left to right. 12" 18™ 53°.2 No. of vib’n. SUMaOTOMORWHDRH OS — 20 00.9 Right to left. 128 20™ 498.5 57.2 21 04.8 12.3 20.0. 27.4 39.0 42.5 50.1 57.7 05.2 bo bo Magnet Z 6 suspended. Time noted by sidereal chronometer Bond 236. Temperature, 76° Fah. No. of vib’n. Left to right. _| Time of 50 double 50 TW CN OSL 6™ 165.5 51 17.1 16.3 52 24.8 16.5 Set 1. 53 32.2 16.4 Time of a double 54 39.7 16.5 vib’n, 7°.5296 55 47.3 16.5 56 54.8 16.6 oT 26 02.3 16.5 58 09.8 16.5 59 17.3 16.4 60 24.8 16.6 Mean : : 6 16.48 Arc at commencement) 150 and 460 “end f1so 420 No. of vib’n. Right to left. iiede Gi 20 Goris vibrations. 50 128 27™ 065.3 6™ 16°.8 51 13.8 16.6 52 : 21.2 16.4 53 28.8 16.5 Set 2. 54 36.2 16.2 Time of a double 55 43.9 16.5 vibration 7°.5282 56 51.2 16.2 57 59.0 16.5 58 28 06.3 16.2 59 14.0 16.3 60 21.5 16.3 Mean : ; . 6 16.41 Are at commencement (170 and 435 Cee TICl liao 410 Time of 2 vibrations, 7.5289 Correction for rate, —0.0206 (By sets 1 and 2), 7.5083 EXPERIMENTS OF VIBRATIONS, continued. Temperature, 74° Fah. No. of vibration. Left to right. Time of 200 double vibrations. 200 125 43" 59°.3 25" 068.1 201 44 06.8 06.0 202 14.4 06.1 203 22.7 06.9 Set 3. 204 29.2 06.0 Time of a double vibration, 205 36.9 06.1 78.5309 206 44.3 06.1 207 51.9 06.1 208 59.4 06.1 209 45 07.0 06.1 210 14.6 06.4 Are, 252 and 338 Mean, 25 06.18 June, 1865, 13 98 No. of vibration. 200 201 202 203 204 205 . 206 207 208 209 210 Are 250 and 340 RECORD AND RESULTS OF EXPERIMENTS OF VIBRATIONS, continued. Temperature 74° Fah. Right to Left. 128 45™ 565.0 46 03.7 11.1 Mean, Time of 2 vibrations . Correction for rate By sets 3 and 4. By sets 1 and 2. 27) = IV = Time of 200 double vibrations. 25™ 06°.5 06.5 06.3 06.5 06.2 06.4 06.3 06.3 06.1 06.3 06.2 25 06.38 Set 4. Time of a double vibration 75.5316 7.5106 weight 4 7.5083 weight 1 7.5101 at 749.4 Fah. 3.7550 bb And when corrected for torsion and referred to temperature 729.75 Ig 7? = 1.14976. Observations for Torsion. Tor. cir. Scale. Differences. 69° 298.6 and 308.8 : © 6.8 159 308 313 17.0 339 285 302 10.0 69 295 312 Mean (4) . 8.45 = 87.57 EXPERIMENTS OF DEFLECTION. Magnet Z 6 deflecting; Z 1 suspended. Distance 1.0 foot. Magnet. S. end east N. “ west S. ce ce N. “ east N. end east Ss. “ west N. (73 ae Sap east Circle reading. 145° 54’ 20’’ 145 45 40 126 40 40 126 23 00 Distance 1.3 foot. 131 43 00 131 48 20 140 34 00 140 34 00 From lg mX = 0.04019 and lg 1 7 = = ChUPAY) AG Set 1. Hein || Mee ae Sac 126 32 Temperature, 72°.5. ee 131 46 eae 140 34 July 3, 1860. Temperature, 73°. Uy A 05 oF 13’ 05/7 00 Oo ae). 0 = we find X — 3.607! and m = 0.3070 at 73° 1 For comparison the following four values were taken from the Coast Survey Report of 1861, Appendix No, 22. No. Year. 1842.5 1842.8 1845.5 1856.6 1860.6 ore WD Cambridge » = 42° 23’ and a = 71° 07’ Observers. xX Locke 3.657 Lefroy 3.665 Locke 3.618 Friesach 3.542 Sonntag 3.607 EE LLL — Faecal Ny Sea MAGNETIC OBSERVATIONS. 99 Proven, Nortn Greentann, August, 1860. Magnet Z 1 suspended. A. Sonntag, observer. August 9 P. M. Set 1. Vibrations. 200 vibrations. L. to R. 0 Qh 00m 125.0 200 gh om 39:88) 21" 278.8 R. ton. IL 18.5 201 46.8 28.3 Tp Win 25.0 202 53.0 28.0 R.toL 3 31.3 203 59 Pier L. tor. 4 37.8 204 22 05.5 eT R ton, 5 43.8 205 12.8 29.0 L. tor. 6 50.8 206 18.8 28.0 eo uO, 4 1 57.2 207 25.8 28.6 200 vibrations = 1288%.32 L. tor. 8 01 03.3 208 32.0 28.7 1 vibration 6.4416 R. to L. 9 09.8 209 38.8 29.0 L. tor. 10 16.2 210 44.9 28.7 Are: 152 and 454 218 and 343 Mean, 21 28.32 at 41° Fah. Set 2. Vibrations. L. tok. 30 Q> 03™ 245.6 230 Qh 94™ 5385 | 21™ 283.9 R. ton. 31 30.8 231 25 02 31.2 i to R. (32 37.5 232 06.8 29.3 R. toL. 33 44.0 233 15.0 31.0 L. toR. 34 50.2 234 19.8 29.6 200 vibrations = 1290°.39 R. toL. 385 56.5 235 27.8 31.3 * 1 vibration 6.4520 L. tor. 36 04 03.2 236 32.8 29.6 R. ton. 37 09.2 37 40.8 81.6 L. tor. 38 15.8 238 45.8 30.0 R. ton. 39 22.0 239 53.7 31.7 L. tor. 40 28.9 240 56.0 30.1 Arc: 180 and 442 222 and 333 Mean, 21 30.89 at 41° Fah. Set 3. V ibrations. L. to RB. 0 ON BS OBA.) 200 gh 54m 5533 Oe 83833; 11 R. to L 1 29.0 201 55 O17 32.7 L. to RB. 2 35.6 202 08.0 89.4 R. to L 3 41.6 203 14.8 33.2 L. to RB 4 48.2 204 21.0 32.8 200 vibrations = 1292.72 R.toL. 5 55.1 205 27.4 32.3 1 vibration 6.4636 L. to RB 6 34 01.3 206 34.0 BO. R. to L T 07.3 207 40.0 82.7 L. to R. 8 14.2 208 47.0 32.8 R. to L. 9 20.8 209 53,2 32.4 L. tor. 10 HO || MO 59.8 32.8 Are: 143 and 518 228 and 368 Mean, 21 32.72 at 39° Fah Set 4. Vibrations. L. tor: 30 OS BO" BEY 230 gh 58™ 082.2) | Qe sis R. ton 31 49.8 231 15.2 32.4 L. tor. 382 50 932 21 31.0 R. toL. 33 56 233 28 32.0 L. tor. 34 37 3 234 33.8 30.8 200 vibrations = 1291°.54 R. ton. 35 09 235 40.8 31.8 1 vibration 6.4577 L. tor. 36 16 236 47 31.0 R. toL. 37 22, 237 53.8 31.8 L. tor. 38 28 2938 59.8 31.8 R. ton. 39 35 239 59 06.8 31.8 L. tor. 40 41.8 240 12.8 31.0 Arc: 158 and 470 228 and 350 Mean, 21 31.54 at 39° Fah. 1 That Z 1 was suspended is proved also by the resulting X; Z 6 ought to have been suspended. 100 RECORD AND RESULTS OF The mean of four sets gives 1 vibration 6.4537 at 40° Fah. The value of m for 7, 1, as determined at Washington at 89°.7, = 0.2342, at 40° it becomes 0.2365 ; we have also lg (°k:) = 1.19239 at 89°.7, and 1.19209 at 40°. Correcting for tor- sion we find lg mX = 9.57134 and X = 1.576. Port Foulke, Smiru Srratr. Observations at the Port Foulke Observatory. Set 1. Deflections. 3°39" P.M., July 2, 1861. Magnet Z 1 suspended, Z 6 deflecting; distance 1.3 foot. Magnet. North end. Circle. Temperature. EK. HK. BS Gee AY HSaalOM 40°.5 aw “s 388 54 00 54 +50 Dy 282 bil 020" as W. 10 00 40 01 40 ab & 10 04 00 04 10 39 W. 9 40 20 41 40 O e 9 42 10 43 10 2u=29 46 38 se K. 39 29 20 30 10 es i 382 26 40 27 «40 39.8 Mean ; } ; 89:83 u=14 39 25 Set 2. Deflections. Distance 0.9 foot. 4» 38". W. E. 76 15 20 15 20 39 ie or 76 17 00 17 00 2u=101 05 58 “re W. SOOM LOR SO 11 00 & 3385 09 20 10 00 EK. Y 3838 01 40 02 00 38 fe “f 3a 59. 30 60 20 Qu= 98 24 26 oe E. N69 23250) 24 00 te ye 76 26 40 26 40 39.2 Mean 3 : 5 okey tl uw = 49) 52) 36 Set 3. Deflections. Distance 1.0 foot. A.M. July 7, 1861. E. K. 26 44 40 45 00 44,2 “ Ww 26 48 20 44 00 2u— 68) 24 25 fe W. 318 19 20 20 00 fs cs 318 19 40 20 20 45.0 WwW “ 318 19 40 20 40 “ ug 318 19 40 20 20 43 Fu— 68 26) 20 a a0) 26 46 20 47 20 Oy “f PAR Chay = XN) 46 00 43 Mean : 6 : 43.8 OO Bvt ey 2h Observations for Torsion. Torsion circle. Seale. Differences. 280° 30! 300 118 370 30 311.8 ae —_— 109 190 30 999.0 ee Mean (4) = 10.0 = 107.1 986 80 300.5 ce Set 4. Deflections, Distance 1.3 foot A.M. July 7, 1861. W. EB. 1° 47’ QO" 44’ 20"! 42° “ “ 7 47 20 47 40 | Qu = 30° 94! 15” “ W. 337 19 40 20 40 49 “ “ 337 19 20 20 40 | E. “ 337 25 20 8. Wh ALG “ “ 337 25 20 26 00 | 2u=30 28 10 “ BE. 7 53 20 54 20 | 41.2 uf “ 7 53 20 54 20 40 Mean -, ; peal! a= I}, NS} Gil MAGNETIC OBSERVATIONS 101 Set 5. Vibrations. July 7, 1861. Magnet Z 6 suspended. M. T. Pocket chronometer; rate nearly zero. Temperature, 51°. Number. Chronometer. Number. Chronometer. 300 vibrations. 0 11 01" 21° 300 UE BSS G2 aa HEP 10 02 29 310 386 24 3305) Observed time of 20 03 36 320 Bi ey Bs) By8 300 vibrations, 2035%.5 30 04 44 330 388 40 BOM Time of one, 6.7850 40 05 52 340 a) alr Bi) f9)5) 50 06 59 350 40 55 oe. By 100 12 38.5 200 23 57 ay 5y51,5) Are: 204 and 402 at beginning, or 0 ‘ 294.5 305 at end, or 350 vib’s. Observations for Torsion. Torsion circle. Scale. Differences. ° 140 Aiea fo Ps 930 286 84.7 Mean (4) =17.5 = 17.7 14.5 50 300.5 Set 6. Vibrations. P. M. July 8, 1861. Magnet Z 6 suspended on 4 fibres. Temperature, 41°. Number. Chronometer. Number. Chronometer. 300 vibrations. 0 1 B=" OF 300 WS Alpes ORE Bon 090) 10 14 10.5 310 48 09 83 58.5 Observed time of 20 15 18 320 AG) iy) a BY 300 vibrations, 2038.86 30 16 26 330 yl) 25) ae So) Time of one, 6.7962 40 ile Gis} 340 51 32.8 33) 0950 50 18- 42 350 52 40.5 G33} yeh ta) 100 24 21.2 200 By ZH 33 58.86 Are: 205-— 395 at 0 264 335 at 200 283 317.5 at 350 vib’s. Set 7. Vibrations. Temperature, 40°. 0 gr 04™ 08s 300 Be BI OP 33" 575.0 10 05 15 310 Be) NALS a3 ° OVD Observed time of 20 06 22 320 40 20.5 B33 Hes) 300 vibrations, 2038%.25 30 07 30 330 ANE 2825 BS BS.5) Time of one, 6.7942 40 08 38 340 42° 37, 33 59.0 50 09 46 350 43 45 33 59.0 100 15 26 200 26 46 33 58.25 Are: 180 and 420 at 0 254 343 at 200 279 321 at 350 vib’s. Set 8. Deflections. P.M. July 8, 1861. Magnet Z 1 suspended, Z 6 deflecting; distance 1.0 foot. Mean ; : o BYo9 WS33 HS BF Set 9. Deflections. Distance 1.3 foot. eee) sen io) ib cy | ange oe 8" 8 bo 2¢ Q ee ee oa Mean , A 5 Beh O= 5 08 OS 102 RECORD AND RESULTS OF Set 10. Deflections. July 9, 1861. Z 1 suspended, Z 6 deflecting; distance 1.0 foot. E. i. 11° 07’ 20'' 08’ 20'’ 42°. ae Rnma “ W. 302 40 40 41 40 49.5 2 BS EK. 10 45 00 45 50 43 as “ W. 302 15 30 16 10. 48 Bib OS aad 88 Mean : a a Gah ®) u=34 14 04 Observations for Torsion. Torsion circle. Scale. Differences. Ce : 27.5 Mean (4) = 13.9 =14’.1 360 286.5 14.5 90 301.0 : Set 11. Deflections. Distance 1.3 foot. July 9, 1861. W. 38219 22’ 407’ xo Ol 48,95 © Gyn? ap “ E. 351 43 00 43 50 46 bes IU" Aa Be HK W. 319 31 10 32 «00 44 Gyre “ E. 350 50 10 51 20 Aq HO Th NO Mean : a; . 46.4 u=15 24 53 Set 12. Vibrations. Temperature 39°. P.M. July 9, 1861. Z 6 suspended. 0 gh 50™ 548 300 LOL Vamsi 33™ 375.0 10 52 O0.5 310 DB CL) S33} BOL6) ‘ Observed time of 20 530809) 320 26 48.5 Be), .a),6) 300 vibrations, 2019%.08 30 54 16.5 330 27 «56 33 39.5 Time of one, 6.7303 40 5b 23 340 29 02 83 39.0 50 KO) 83 350 30 10 33 40:0). 100 10 02 06 200 LS pelyino 33) 39208 Arc: 204 and 462 at 0 255 363 “ 200 280 319 ‘ 350 vib’s. Set 13. Vibrations. Temperature, 41°. P.M. July 9, 1861. 0 IE By aii 300 112 57 BO 30> 390. 10 94 51 310 58 30 ae BLO) 20 25 58.5 320 59 38 3}, B8),5) Observed time of 30 27 06 383 12 00 45.5 33 39.5 300 vibrations, 2019%.25 40 28 12.5 340 Oe 5} 383 39:5 Time of one, 6.7808 50 29° 21 350 03 00 a BSW) 100 34 59 200 11 46 10 x) BE Re) Arc: 170 and 435 at 0 262, 840 “ 200 288 SLD 93 52) villas The combination of the deflection and vibration results is shown in the following table. ‘The first three deflections having no corresponding vibrations, the value of m was deduced from the remaining five results viz: 0.316 at 41°.6 Fah., hence for the temperature ¢ of these deflections we have m = 0.316 (1 —0.0002 (¢ — 41°.6)). The vibrations have been referred to the temperature of the deflections by correct- ing the squares of the times by 1 —q (¢’ —2), the temperature of the deflections being ¢ and that of the vibrations ¢’ ; they were also corrected for torsion ( et =) The average value of P has been used. MAGNETIC OBSERVATIONS. 103 a a eS m > Set. dl == t Set. lg mX Igm xX m 1 9.45303 39.°8 — | ----- - ee Wy -- - 2 9.46389 38.7 nn - tee 1.089 - - 3 9.46412 43.8 — |.----- - see 1.082 -- 4 9.46934 41.4 5) 9.5303 - 9.49985 1.073 0.316 8 9.46150 37.9 6 9.52832 9.49491 1.080 0.313 9 9.46666 38.5 7 9.52844 9.49755 1.074 0.314 10 9.46438 43.9 12 9.53615 9.40026 1.087 0.316 11 9.47442 46.4 13 9.53604 9.50523 1.074 0.320 | at 41°.6 Netlik, WHALE Sounp. August 4, 1861. Set 1. Vibrations. Magnet Z 6 suspended. Temperature, 48°. Chronometer 4" 40™ 04° fast of Greenwich time. Qa Qh 95™ 53® 300 Pe iO BOR 33™ 39°.0 10 27 O01 310 3 00 40 33 39.0 Observed time of 20 28 08 320 Ol 47.5 33 39.5 300 vibrations, 2020°.08 30 29) 15 350 02 55.5 33 40.5 Time of one, 6.7336 40 30 22 340 04 03 33 41.5 50 al 29 359 OS 0.4 33 41.0 100 387 06.5 200 2 48 19.5 33 40.08 Aro: 170.5 and 425 at 0 261 342 “ 200 278 322 ‘ 350 vib’s. Set 2. Vibrations. Temperature, 46°. 0 3 10™ 493.5 300 3h 44m 94s Bis eal nis) 10 ll 50 310 45 32 33 42.0 | Observed time of 20 12 57.5 320 46 39.5 33 42.0 300 vibrations, 2021°.83 30 14 04.5 330 47 46 83 41.5 Time of one, 6.7394 40 15 12 340 48 54 33 42.0 50 16 20 350 50 02 3342.0 _ 100 21 56.5 200 3 387 10.5 83 41.83 Arc: 190 and 425 at 0 255 345 ‘ 200 278 322 “ 350 vib’s. Observations for Torsion. Torsion circle. Seale. Differences. 60° 30/ 300 Terao oy 3000, Mean (4) = 17.1 =17/.3 330 30 986 Site Mean (4) = 17.1 =17/.: 60 30 300.5 ; Set 3. Deflections. Magnet Z 1 suspended, Z 6 deflecting. Distance 1 foot. P.M. August 4. Ww. E. 39° 24’ 10!” 24? 40!" 49° Baka Sy ANI “ W. 332 54 00 54 50 40 AM epg area E. g 332 45 20 45 40 39 mi “ E. 39 24 00 24 40 38 Poe = CC ee Mean 39.7 u=33 17 12 104 RECORD AND RESULTS OF Combining the mean of set 1 and set 2 (6.7364) with the angle of set 3, correct- ing the first for torsion and referring it to 39°.7 Fah., we find ly = 9.45364 and X=1.110 lIgmX =9.53614 m =0.312 at 39°.7 Fah. Upernavik, Nortu GreenLAnp. August 16, 1861. At flagstaff. Chronometer 8° fast of Greenwich time. Set 1. Experiments of vibration. Temperature, 47°. Magnet Z 11 suspended. 0 5 b™ 478 300 5® 50™ 388 34™ 51° 10 16 57 310 51 47 34 50 Observed time of 20 18 06 520 52 57 34 51 300 vib’ns, = 2091°.17 30 LOG 330 54 07 34 51 Time of one, 6.9706 40 20 25 340 55 IT 34 52 50 PAL Bb 350 56 27 || 34° 52 100 27 24 200 39 «(O01 34 51.17 Are: 193 and 413 at 0 266 334 “ 200 282.5 318 “ 350 vib’s. Set 2. Vibrations. Temperature, 47°. 0 6" 00™ 008 300 6" 34™ 488 34™ 488 10 Ol 10 310 85 58 34 48 Observed time of 20 02 20 320 36 (08 34 48 300 vibrations, 2088%.08 30 03 29 330 38 17.5 34 48.5 Time of one, 6.9608 40 04 39 340 389 27 34 48 4 50 05 49 350 40 37 34 48 100 3 200 23 12 34 48.08 Are: 194 and 399 at 0 261.5 338 “ 200 280 320 “ 350 vib’s. Set 3. Vibrations.? Temperature, 46°. 0 He OIL IS 300 7) 35™ 098 By bees LENCO) 10 02 27 310 | 36 18.5 By Gils) Observed time of 20 Od 23625 320 | 37 28 By LEG) 300 vibrations, 2091°.08 30 04 46.5 330 | 38) 23K 34 50.5 Time of one, 6.9703 40 05 56 340 3 47 34 51.0 50 07 06 350 | 40 57 34 51.0 100 127753 200 24732) 34° 51.08 Are: 192 and 415 at 0 265 Boome 200 284.5 315.5 “ 350 vib’s. Set 4. Deflections. Magnet Z 1 suspended, Z 6 deflecting. Distance 1 foot. E. E. 45° 32! 40!" 33/ 40° 480 “ W. 352 52 40 | 53 20 | 44 Bu 1027 200% : E. 45 23 30 Ol OO al cma Date “ W. 35008) 50) 58) SO ln ee CS) ED, BE) Mean ‘ 4 fn A682 3 OX PAL WB * The correctness of the record is sustained by the resulting X. * The record of 300 to 3850 vibrations is 1™ too small, as appears plainly by comparing the times of 0, 100, 200, and 300 vibrations. E E. “ W. W. i. e W. Deflections. 80// 40 40 00 Mean MAGNETIC OBSERVATIONS. 105 Distance 1.3 foot. By 21 40 24 40 40’’ 40 10 47° am (o) / Ad i 2u = 28° 15’ 55 i Onan 1h Be ae w=11 37 53 The mean result of set 1 and set 2 is 6.9654 at 47°, and of set 2 and set 3, 6.9653 at 46.5; if we correct these for torsion, and use lg a°k (for Z 1) = 1.19212, and lgm (for Z 1) = 9.37310, the vibrations give X= 1.355 and 1.355, For the deflections we use lgm (for Z 6) 9.49164 and 9.49178 (the value of m being 0.310 at 50°) and The mean value of the four determinations is 1.558. The magnetic moment of Z 6 appears to be very nearly constant, which is due to the age of the magnet; at 50° Fah. we have 0.308, 0.315, 0.311, 0.309, and 0.308 as found at Cambridge, Port Foulke, Netlik, Godhavn, and Washington, find X = 1.349 and 1.372. respectively. Godhavn, Disco Isuanp, GREENLAND. August and September, 1861. Station in the garden at the rear of the Inspector’s house. September 7, 1861. 26™ 43°.0 26 26 26 26 26 26 44.5 Observed time of 44.0 300 vibrations, 1604°.08 44.0 Time of one, 5.3469 44.5 44.5 44.08 Temperature, 38°. 26™ 44°.0 26 26 43.0 Observed time of 44.0 300 vibrations, 1603%.58 43.0 Time of one, §.3453 43.5 44.0 QC 5Syy Z 1 suspended, Z 6 deflecting. Distance 1 foot. 46° 47 Qu = 39° 04’ 10” 47 46 46 46 2u==39 58 20 45 45 Set 1. Vibrations. Z 6 suspended. 0 2h 28m 428 300 2 55™ 258 10 29 34.5 310 56 19 20 30 28.5 320 57 12.5 30 31 22 330 58 06 40 32 15.5 340 59 00 50 33 09 350 59 53.5 | § 100 387 35.5 200 2 46 30 Arc: 207 and 402 at 0 Temperature, 38° 261 339 “ 200 288 812 “ 350 vib’s. Set 2. Vibrations. 0 3" 28™ 308 300 3» 55™ 14° 10 29 24 310 56 07 20 30 17 320 57 O01 30 31 11 330 57 54 40 32 04.5 340 58 48 50 32 57 350 59 41 100 37 25 200 3 46 19.5 Arc: 185 and 425 at 0 257 347 “ 200 280 320 “ 350 vib’s. Set 3. Deflections. K. ! EK. 244° 20’ 40/7 21’ 40” 5 W. 205 380 40 31 40 W. E. 245 16 00 17 00 e W. 205 58 00 98 20 E E. 244 19 20 20. 20 o W. 205 28 20 29 10 W. i. 245 17 50 18 40 ef W. 204 12 40 12 40 Mean During the above set a a little. 14 July, 1865. 46 u=19 45 38 strong wind was blowing which disturbed the magnet 106 RECORD AND RESULTS OF Set 4. Deflections. Distance 1.3 foot. September 7, 1861. E. E. 233° 43! 40/7 44’ 10" 45° « W. 216 23 10 93 20 44 2u = 17° 20! 40” W. E. 234 10 00 11 00 40 ee “ Ww. 215 31 40 32 10 40 pire a Mean) Wen a adoro n= 8 8 49 Correcting for torsion and for difference of temperature we find ig = 9.24322 and 9.24404 hence X = 1.763 and 1.762 lgmX = 9.73564 9.73622 and m= 0.309 0.309 at 46° at 42° RECAPITULATION OF PRECEDING VALUES OF HorIzONTAL FORCE. No. Locality. Latitude. Longitude. x Date. Observer. 1 | Cambridge, Mass.. . . | 42° 23’ 71° O7 3.607 | July, 1860 | A. Sonntag 2 | Proven, North Greenland | 72 23 55 33 1.576 | Aug. 1860 | A. Sonntag 3 | Port Foulke, Smith Strait |. 78 18 73 00 1.084 | July, 1861 | H. G. Radcliff 4 | Netlik, Whale Sound. .| 77 08 T1 22 1.110 | Aug. 1861 | H. G. Radcliff 5 | Upernavik, N. Greenland | 72 47 56 03 1.358 | Aug. 1861 | H. G. Radcliff 6 | Godhavn, Disco, G6 69 12 53 28 1.762 Sept. 1861 | H. G. Radcliff 7 | Washington, D.C., U. 8. 53 77 00 4.296 | June, 1862 | C. A. Schott The horizontal component X of the magnetic force is expressed in English units (feet and grains). To the above two stations (Port Foulke and Netlik) at and near Smith Strait, I have added the following three stations occupied for horizontal force by Dr. Kane’s party in 1854 and 1855. Van Rensselaer Harbor, » = 78° 37’ 7s KO (sha X = 1.139 (1854) Hakluyt Island, 17 23 73 10 1.344 (1855) Near Cape York, 76 03 68 00 1.573 (1855) The observed horizontal force H, at these five stations, is represented by the formula H = 1.250 —0.11 Ag —0.21 AA cos » where Ag = @ —77°.50 and A” = A —71°.29 It was found, however, that the determination at Hakluyt Island, where the horizontal force appears too large, had the effect of inclining the isodynamic lines more than was warranted by values of more southern stations. I have, therefore, given the determination at Hakluyt the weight one-half, and find H = 1.250 —0.07 Ap —0.30 Ad cos by means of which equation the isodynamic lines of 1.0, 1.1, 1.2, 1.8, and 1.4 were laid down on the chart. The observations are represented as follows :— Obs. H. Comp. H. Diff. Port Foulke ; : A : : . 1.084 1.089 —0.005 Netlik : : ‘ : i s a ULI) 1.270 —0.160 Van Rensselaer Harbor. 3 : Foals) 1.196 —0.057 Hakluyt . : : : : : . 1.344 1.132 +0.212 Near Cape York : : 3 ; ONS 1.588 —0.015 The probable error of a single representation is +0.10, and of any resulting line +0.05 nearly. MAGNETIC OBSERVATIONS. 107 MAGNETIC INCLINATION. Observations and Results. Port Foulke, Smiru Strait. July, 1861. Observations at the Port Foulke Observatory. Set 1. Needle II, marked end South. July 4, 10°13" A. M. Circle Hast. Circle West. Face East Face West. Face East. Face West. N. S. | N. . Ss. N. S. N. Ss. 84° 55/ 85° O17 84° 45/ 84° 45/ 85° 15° 85° 07 85° 15/ 85° 15’ 85 00 85 00 84 45 84 45 85 15 85 07 85 18 85 15 Mean. . . 84° 53/ 85° 13/ Mean. : : 5 Do BY Needle IJ, marked end North. Circle West. Circle Hast. Face West. Face East. Face West. Face East. 85° 00/ | 85° 00/ 85° 15’ | 85° 08/ 84° 45/ 85° 00/ 84° 45/ 84° 45/ 84 52 84 538 85 15 ‘85 08 84 45 85 00 84 52 84 52 Mean . . 85° 04! 84° 50’ Mean , F . 84° 57’ Dip by needle IT, 85° 00/. Set 2. Needle III, marked end South. July 4, 11" 43™ A. M. E. W. 85° 00! | = 85° 07! 85° 00/ 85° 15/ 84° 55/ | 84° 45/ 84° 60/ 84° 55’ 15 20 15 30 60 60’ 45 40 85° 13/ 84° 53’ 85° 03/ Needle IIT, marked end North. W. E. 85° 00’ 84° 55/ 85° 00/ | 84° 55! 85° 30/ 85° 45/ 84° 45’ 84° 65! 07 | 60 08 60 | 30 49 45 | 50 85° Ol’ 85° 14/ 85° O47 Dip by needle III, 85° 05/ Set 3. Needle II, marked end South. July 5, 1059" A. M E. W. 85° 30/ | Bae Bay 84° 15' | 84° 16’ 85° 15’ | 85° 13/ 85° 15’ | 85° 00’ 15 30 17 17 oY 15 15 05 84° 59/ 85° 12’ 85° 02’ Needle II, marked end North. . W. E. 85° 15! | 85° 17’ 85° 20/ | 85° 15/ 84° 45/ | 84° 59! 84° 53! | 84° 45’ 10 05 25 15 45 52 45 50 85° 15/ : 84° 46/ 84° 00’ Dip by needle II, 85° 01’. 108 RECORD AND RESULTS OF Set 4. Needle III, marked end South. July 5. E. W. 84° 50’ | 84° 50’ 85° 00’ | 85° 15’ 85° 15/ 85° 20’ 85° 13’ | 85° 02’ 30 30 15 25 00 | 07 20 13 84° 57’ 85° 11’ 85° 04 Needle III, marked end North. W. E. 85° 38/ 85° 30/ 85° 28’ 85° 20/ 84° 55’ 85° 187 84° 30’ 84° 247 40 30 28 20 67 | 13 60 | 62 85° 217’ 84° 56’ 85° 11’ Dip by needle III, 85° 087 Set 5. Needle II, marked end North. July 7 P.M. W. EK. 84° 61’ 84° 67! SH aie? 85°: 30/ 84° 30/ 84° 30’ | 84° 55’ 85° 00’ 55 | 50 32 | 30 26 30 17 | 20 85° 16’ 84° 48’ 85° 02’ _ Needle IT, marked end South. 84° 40/ | 84° 26! 84° 38’ 84° 45/ | 85° 00/ 85° 05’ | 85° 10’ 85° 08/ 32 38 60 | 60 00 | 03 TBS | 05 840 49! 85° 06’ 84° 54’ Dip by needle II, 84° 58’ RECAPITULATION OF RESULTS FoR Drip AT Port Fourks, July 4—7,.1861. No. Needle. Dip. Set 1 II 85° 00’ Cian. il 85 05 “3 IT 85 O01 Resulting mean dip, 85° 02’ cid III 85 08 5 II 84 58 Littleton Island, Smiru Srrair. July 26 P.M. Set 1. Needle II, marked end North. 85° 15! | 85° 10/ 84° 20’ | 84° 20/ 84° 40’ | 84° 45/ 84° 25’ | 84° 30/ 20 20 25 25 63 55 30 30 84° 49/ 84° 40’ 84° 44’ Needle IJ, marked end South. W. E. 84° 15’ | 84° 10° 84° 40’ 849 45! 849 59/ | 84° 50’ 84° 60’ | 85° 05’ 15 15 40 45 60 52 55 00 84° 98’ : 84° 56! 84° 42!’ Dip by needle IT, 84° 43’ MAGNETIC OBSERVATIONS. 109 Set 2. Needle III, marked end South. i. W. 84° 48’ | 84° 48’ 84° 35/ 84° 35/ 84° 15’ | 84° 10’ 84° 40’ 84° 40’ 48 48 42 42 22 22 30 | 30 84° 43/ 84° 26’ 84° 35’ Needle III, marked end North. W. E. 84° 22’ | 84° 15’ 84° 30’ | 84° 30’ 85° 05’ | 85° 05’ 85° 00’ | 85° 05’ 30 30 40 45 15 15 10 15 84° 30! 85° 08’ 84° 49’ Dip by needle III, 84° 49’ RECAPITULATION OF REsunts ror Dip av LirrLeron Istanp, July 26, 1861. Needle. Dip. Set 1 II 84° 43’ oo, Iil 84 42 Resulting mean dip, 84° 43/ Gale Point, Capocan Inter, Smita Srrarir, July 28, 1861. Set 1. Needle III, marked end South. W. E W. E. Wau. E. 85° 07’ 85° 00/ Somellou | 85° 20’ 85° 45’ | 85° 35/ 85° 15/ 85° 20/ 00 03 18 20 45 35 ON 10 85° 10 85° 26’ 85° 18’ Needle III, marked end North. E. W. 85° 35’ 85° 30’ | 85° 05’ | 85° 10’ Sdans oy | 85° 40’ 85° 15’ | Shows 45 | 40 20 15 30 30 10 15 85° 25’ : 85° 24’ i 85° 24/ ; Dip by needle ITT, 85° 21’ Hakluyt Island, orr WHALE Sounp. August 2 A. M., 1861. Set 1. Needle II, marked end South. a0 W. 85° 00’ 85° 00’ 85° 207 | 85° 15/ 84° 45’ 85° 00’ 84° 45’ | 84° 45’ 00 | 00 25 20 45 | 00 55 50 85° 10’ S40) 51 85° 00/ Needle II, marked end North. W. EB. 84° 45” 84° 50/ | 85° 00! 84° 65' | 84° 55’ 84° 50’ 85° 20' 85° 15/ 40 45 00 | 55 65 | 60 | 20 15 84° 53/ 85° 07! 85° 00’ Dip by needle II, 85° 00’ 110 RECORD AND RESULTS OF Netlik, WHALE Sounp. August 4 P. M., 1861. Set 1. Needle II, marked end South. E. W. 84° 50/ SACD! 84° 55! Sacro! 84° 60’ 85° 00’ 84° 45! 84° 45' 60 | 60 60 | 60 50 | 00 40 40 84° 517’ 84° 50’ 84° 53’ Needle II, marked end North. W. E. 84° 30/ 84° 40/ 8o° 15! Sdemmlio” 84° 65’ | 84° 60’ 85° 25! Saclay 30 | 30 30 30 50 50 25 | 20 84° 57! 85° 09/ 85° 03! Dip by needle TI, 84° 58’ Godhavn, Disco IshAnD, GREENLAND. August 31, 1861. In garden at the rear of Inspector’s house. Set 1. Needle II, marked end South. E. W. 81° 60’ SHINS): 5)! | 81° 30’ 81° 30’ 82° 197 82° 12/ 81° 45/ 81° 45’ 45 | 37 30 | = 830 00 | 00 30 | 30 31° 40’ 81° 52’ 81° 46/ Needle II, marked end North. W. E. 81° 492’ 81° 492/ 81° 30’ 81° 30! 82° 15/ SU Oy 82° 00! | Seo 6) 45 | 45 3 | 45 00 | 45 00 Ou 81° 40’ 82° 03’ Sle il? Dip by needle II, 81° 49’ Set 2. Needle III, marked end South. September 13, 1861. «i. W. 81° 45’ | 81° 40/ 81° 45’ | 81° 40/ 81° 35/ | 81°. 32/ 81° 45/ 81° 50’ 45 40 45 40 45 45 45 50 81° 42’ 81° 43’ 81° 43’ © Needle III, marked end North. W. E. 82° 00’ 82° 00’ 81° 45’ 81° 50! iSyatey lis | 82° 15! | 81° 75! S22rnlo! 05 | 15 50 | 60 18 Ny! 50 | 00 81° 58! 82°. 10’ 82° 04’ Dip by needle ITT, 81° 53” RECAPITULATION OF RESULTS FOR Dip AT GODHAVN. August 31, and September 13, 1861. No. Needle. Dip. Set 1 | II | 81° 497 sa] Ill Sl 53 Resulting mean dip, 81° 51’ MAGNETIC OBSERVATIONS. 111 RECAPITULATION OF OBSERVED Dips. Observations by H. G. Radcliff. No. Locality. Latitude. |Longitude.| Dip. Date. 1 | Port Foulke, Smith Strait. . . . | 78° 18’) 73° 00’| 85° 02’) July, 1861 2 | Littleton Island, Smith Strait . .|78 22] 173 30] 84 438 ss Gi 8 | Gale Point Cadogan Inlet. . . .| 78 11] 76 28] 85 Q1 & 4 | Hakluyt Island, off Whale Sound . | 77 23} 73 10) 85 00) August, 1861 5 | Netlik, Whale Sound ct! ss (7 08} 71 22) 84 58 i “s 6 | Godhavn, Disco Island, Greenland . |.69 12/53 98] 81 51 Aug. and Sept. 1861 To the above material available for the construction of an isoclinal chart of the vicinity of Smith Strait, I have added the following three determinations from Dr. Kane’s expedition: Cape Grinnell,’ latitude 78° 34’, longitude, 71° 34’, dip 85° 08’ in August, 1853. Marshall Bay,’ latitude 78° 51’, longitude 98° 54’, dip-84° 49’ in September, 1853. Van Rensselaer Harbor, latitude 78° 37’, longitude 70° 53’, dip 84° 46’ in June, 1854. The observed inclination J at these eight stations is represented by the equation— iS RON —0.09 Ag + 0.12 Ad cos where Ap = @ —78°.18 and AX = A —72°.86 The isoclinal lines on the chart were computed by the above formula; as in the case of the declinations and horizontal force determinations, the effect of the secular change between the interval of the two expeditions has been neglected. The observations are represented as follows :— Observed I. Computed I. Difference. Port Foulke . ; : : 2 ‘ 85.903 84°.98 +0.°05 Littleton Island F i F : ‘ 84.72 84.98 — 0.26 Gale Point ; ; : ; : ; 85.35 85.07 +0.28 Hakluyt Island . : : : 0 : 85.00 85.06 — 0.06 Netlik F ; ; . j j j 84.97 85.04 —0.07 Cape Grinnell . : : Bene : 85.13 84.92 +0.21 Marshall Bay . : : : : : 84.82 84.83 —0.01 Van Rensselaer Harbor . F j 3 84.77 84.90 —0.13 The probable error of any single representation is + 0°.13, and of the resulting lines + 0°.05 nearly. The chart embodies the collective results for magnetic distribution at and near Smith Strait by the two American Polar Expeditions, and the years 1861, 1858, and 1858, may be taken for the respective epochs to which the graphical represen- 4 Called ‘‘ Bedevilled Reach” in the magnetic paper, and in the original record; it / pparently com- prised the coast between Capes Inglefield and Ingersoll. See chart in Vol. I of his narrative. See also Smithsonian Contributions to Knowledge: Magnetical Observations in the Arctic Seas, by E. K. Kane, M. D., U.S.N., ete. ete., reduced and discussed by C. A. Schott, p. 35 (published in November, 1858). The longitude has been slightly improved. 2 For latitude and longitude see Astronomical Observations in the Arctic Seas, by E. K. Kane, M. D., U.S.N., ete. ete., reduced and discussed by C. A. Schott, p. 41, Smithsonian Contributions to Knowledge (May, 1860). 112 RECORD AND RESULTS. tations of the distribution of the declination, horizontal force, and inclination more strictly refer. ‘The necessary use of systems of straight lines forbids their extension beyond the area marked out by the position of the observing stations. Remarks on Observations of the Aurora Borealis. It is a remarkable fact that during the winter 1860-1861 but three auroras were seen and recorded, and these were feeble and short displays. Possibly some more may have occurred, but they were too faint to be recognized. The following notices are extracted from the records :— “ January 6, 1861. 11 A.M. Red aurora seen in the north, extending from horizon to zenith; lasted about 15 minutes. 75" P.M. Aurora seen extending from N. to S. about 380°; lasted nearly half an hour. 9 P.M. Aurora seen the same as 7" 45", about 10 degrees nearer the horizon. “ January 11. Heavy mist hanging over the ice all day. 3 P. M. Aurora observed in the west; extended to the zenith; lasted about 10 minutes. “February 16. An aurora visible at 9 P. M. in the west; lasted about 10 min- utes; 25° to 30° high.” The direction in which the last two auroras were seen coincides in general with the direction of the north end of the magnetic needle, and with the position of an area of open water, present throughout the winter, and extending within a few miles to Port Foulke. This last remark may be of interest to those who are inclined to consider a large area of rising vapor as a favorable circumstance for the appear- ance of the aurora.'| The noted paucity of auroral displays is unfavorable to the hypothesis of the coincidence of a maximum frequency with that of the solar spots, the greatest range of diurnal motion in the horizontal magnetic needle and the ereatest number of magnetic disturbances, for all of which latter phenomena the years 1860-1861 include or approach the maximum value. 1 Meteorological Observations in the Arctic Seas, by Sir Francis Leopold M’Clintock, R. N., 1857-58-59. Smithsonian Contributions to Knowledge, May, 1862. Tabulation of auroras, with observations and notes by Dr. D. Walker. Pe CHART of ISO-MAGNETIC LINES in the VICINITY oF SMITH’s STRAIT Constructed for Smithsonian Institution March 1865, (C.A.S.) Cape, Union © Magnetic Station of I. 1. Hayes’ Expd. Het : * 5) nu » LE. K. Kane’s ,, 1853-4-5¢ Isogonic Lines: — — — Isodynamic (Hor. F.) Lines. Isoclinal Lines. i—_, Cue Tsabettu||S Upper \\ BARPIN BA PART bin 0” —) TIDAL OBSERVATIONS. 7 15 July, 1865, ClIss) RECORD AND RESULTS OF TIDAL OBSERVATIONS. THE observations of the tides made by the Arctic Expedition of Dr. I. I. Hayes, at Port Foulke, Smith Strait, in 1860 and 186], consist of two series; in the first are recorded the observed times and heights of high and low water in November and December, 1860, the greater part of it com- prising half-hourly observations. ‘The second series consists of observations of time and “ height of high and low water in June and July, 1861. ‘These observations were taken every ten minutes about the time of high and low tide. The total extent of these two sets of observations is nearly two and a half months ; a few accidental interruptions, however, occur in each series. The tide gauge was of simple and effective construction, as shown in the annexed wood WY q\\l= = \ cut. It was a pulley gauge mounted upon the ~ = ice field in the harbor. ‘The pulley and rope were supported by a tripod mounted over the hole cut through the ice; the tide rope was anchored at the bottom, and, in the first series, was divided off in feet by proper marks; in the second series a pole was inserted upon which the scale of feet was marked. The tide- rope was kept stretched by a counterpoise; this weight rose and fell with the tide. A gauge of such construction may be liable to disarrange- ment from the following sources: the rope may stretch, or the ice-field may have a slow motion and consequently incline the rope, or the stone may drag along the sloping bottom from the effects of currents or ice motion; if, from any cause, the apparatus fails, the zero level of the scale is easily lost, and generally cannot be recovered. Gils) 116 RECORD AND RESULTS OF Sources of error in our observations have been specially examined, and such cor- rections as were found necessary have been applied. The results show the careful and conscientious manner in which these observations were made. For comparison with the results at Van Rensselaer Harbor! from Dr. Kane’s observations in 1853 and 1854, the reductions are made on a uniform plan, as far as practicable, and in each case special reference is given. Respecting the free access of the tide wave to the place of observation, the locality was suitably selected (see the small chart accompanying the discussion of the astronomical observations, Part I of this series). The apparatus was mounted in close vicinity to the brig, near the head of the port. The observers, Messrs. H. G. Radcliff, G. F. Knorr, and C. C. Starr, are indicated, in the record, by their initials. Record of Tide Observations at Port Foulke, Smith Strait. First Series. 1860. Nov. 17 P. M. Tig Om | 9b 35™= Toe 62 OOS SNES L. W. H. W. : 10 00 10 #1 8 00 10 8 Not recorded 1210" 18 11% LOZ OR Oy Oy SEW j . W. NOs 3} P.M. USL ‘ Noy. 19 A. M. H. W. 18 : | H. W. Not recorded Not recorded L. W. Not recorded Nov. 21 A. M. H. W. Not recorded * Tidal observations in the Arctic Seas, by E. K. Kane, M. D., U.S. N.; made during the second Grinnell Expedition in 1853-54-55, at Van Rensselaer Harbor. Reduced and discussed by Charles A. Schott. Smithsonian Contributions to Knowledge, Vol. XIII, 1860. * Between November 19 (P. M.) and December 10, inclusive, the new tide rope was used. TIDAL OBSERVATIONS. November, 1860. 117 Mean time. A.M. 24th 27th 28th 29th is aT —" — SZ ore SACR OWA NOUAROORHORP NOOR e 11% om 10 10 10 8 10 0 9 10 99 99 0 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 1 7 8 . 8 9 9 WNOASCHrN FORE RW 5 e WOMOAARDRRADTAWS Fj — i i _ rWTEPNOCWOARDODHATADORDAK ft gin 0 10 POWDOAWNCTSOMBDWOSCAMAMONWS 13% om ADownmnowoocooOrNrFonrcs 13% gin 12 8 ak @ 10 10 OCOMMDMDAMADT-10 0 SCNWATACOCCONNANWNOCOOWOSOOA ON 118 RECORD AND RESULTS OF November, 1860. } Mean time. P.M. 21st 23a 24th 26th 27th 28th 29th ob 30" 10% ye i 10% gin 11% (as 14% om 15 gin 10 17* 0] 19% 8% 6 30 30 — — SOS OMHROAAMNDONOHOMADONSOHAS | | t ; i i ! i i 30 30 30 — SCHWOSMNOTHMOSOO, BPOOAWDOWMOOrDND — — 30 COMA OCR OCOONOF, FP RWNNRFOCOOrRATHE ocomumrotwsNeonoo:, owe 30 — 30 ra 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 30 = coomeroweoOor,aATO, WNROUwOCSH — RFP RPOTONMNOROHR OR ORDOTArFSOrF@ACL Seounrwmeoeewmoocoosoocoonmnaanmnowos — SSonmorRoOoNnNKRMOHROWOOOMFH TIDAL OBSERVATIONS. 119 December, 1860. Mean time. A. M. 4th! 5th 8th 16% ou 13% gin i 10% om 3 ob 380@ 1 ft gin 1116 3 | | 30 ‘= 30 — 30 30 _ _ | a — 30 — 30 — — WHF OTNACWHOTAROWOUNUDSODS a SCARMUTCSCHENOTDOCCOWOHHYONKFR OHO’ 30 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 — 30 BDO SCHOWMDUNUNDHSOORDSOMORS 1 SORDMNCHORSCORBBOONNNSSCS — — 30 _ MoeoewrwooanwoonwnwoowoortcS coo a =) 30 DOSS SCMOMOHBAWONAWOWHKH WOSNDHOCwMOANWDMNONUMDMOONTDOWRBOS bo 1 _ } Observers: : A ee ‘ ; " S. 4i to 8 R. 8} to 12 1 Between 24 and 94 the tide rope was foul of the specimen rope; at 103 it was taken up, repaired, and put down again. 1:20 RECOKD AND RESULTS OF December, 1860. } Mean time. P. M. Ist 2d 5th 6th 7th QB 30™ DXi gin 9 ()ft oi 1st Hin 3 i 16% om 14% yn 13% gin 10 30 ' _ ASCSCNHWREKrEAKRORF RAD — — — — — MOK DWDOOANKFODOCONOOCRSACK HS 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 *SCOGDOCMOSDNOKrON OOF O-at- —_ = cocoocooomrPoocooooCoOorR OA O So —_ = é PORPROTMNOAOAWSOOMDOOCOOSCOROOKrS SOMORMAWDOHE HORDE OWONOCHNW +b SOADSCOROCrFNOCOFOWOCWMONWN OS ao) — WBOSCOCOAwWwWoeoo OF RD:1 DOOMOON _ f=) WADAROKR KF ORWORDOCOHOF SFO OAROAS TIDAL OBSERVATIONS. December, 1860. 121 10th A. M. L. W. 00" 10% om L. W. 380012 12 BO) _ 13) vaeal'2, K. Tide rope taken } up and remarked, and put down _ again. i H. W. ; Not observed 12th A. M. L. W. 00™ 11 G2 a0) 5 1 11 10 llth A. M. ESEWAl oe Not observed H. W. Not observed P.M. - L. W. 30 30 16 July, 1865. 14th A. M. L. W. 5h 30” 6 11 6 12 1110: 9 1 In VX qh 002 jaf qin Tf 8 wy 4 8 12 10 R. P. M. lith A. M. H. W. 19 19 19 R. L. W. Incorrectly observed P. M. H. W. G2 bo bo ic) So bo bo bo P.M. H. W. | 00™ 20% gin 30 20 5 | 20 0 16th A. M. H. W. 1122. RECORD AND RESULTS OF December, 1860. P. M. E003 Iho) 6h SNe TSO! GB BOS Tye OS) ge go> neeTOs H. W. al 8) WY aL @ 1S ae hoe te): 1g 9 | fo gpe ignrsal ele 15 6 | 16 380 pals 3 730 1 (0 R: S. if 13. S 2 Be 10 7 30 17 9 LW Rey 130 P.M. anv K. L. W. 11 ly 8 6 18 2 H. Ww. ‘iT ap ne 6| K. 4 17 10 Uke A 14 @ | L. W 12 16 0 | A 21 @ 12 13 3 A j 1 A) “18 8 1) A) UT L. W. 5 18 0 1 15 11 | 12 30 13) 93 1 15 Bt NO 280) 1B OF WB S18) -@ 1 13 3 : 3 Tie 30m se ny i 802° WH © | 11 1210! 6 i 9 1 BO 18° 8 12 15 2 2 15 4 | tl QOL. 19 i R 1) Bo a. Oe 13 10 5 12 13 3 zi oa fs ike ; R L. W. 1 15 Q 10 mM Ta W280, 1 2 P. M. 10-30) 13) 89.9 15 2 11 1 lO BO. 1 23d A. M ent Q1st A. M. 1 230 13 3 R 6 30 17 8 ; H. W. 4 18 2 12 UB 3} 5 1G. @ BW: oa 1g. 8 Not observed S. P.M. 5 80 GMO) cee es H. W. 6 MO is ey eG L. W. 92d A. M. MP ayy Ge eR BO B- @ K VR) WR ST H. w. 5 1G Oy ae 18 38 10 1 QW EABO VS OB So aye ON ee A 18 10 10 BO TB a cB if BG 1 OPS 19 0 The rope used November 17 and 18 was measured, and its 36 feet mark was found to be 30 feet 8 inches; a proportionate reduction of the readings, as recorded, is therefore to be made. A new rope was used between November 19 and December 10; the distances from foot mark to foot mark, along its: range, are recorded as follows :— 0 to 1 foot > - - - inches 11 to 12 feet 11 inches 1 2 10.5 12 13 10 2 3 11.25 13 14 11.5 3 4 11.12 14 15 10.25 4 is) 10.5 15 16 10.5 5 6 11.25 16 17 11 6 7 11.5 17 18 13 u 8 10.25 18 19 9.5 8 9 11.75 19 20 Ta) G10) 10 20 21 13.75 HO ati 11.25 21 22 13 From the above the following table of corrected measures has been made out :— Mark on rope. Corresponding true reading. Mark on rope. Corresponding true reading. 0 feet 0.0 feet 11 feet 10.1 feet 1 1.0 12 11.0 2 1.9 13 1Ue®) 3 2.8 14 12.8 4 3.7 15 TBE 5 4.6 16 14.6 6 5.5 17 15.4 7 6.5 18 16.5 8 7.4 aly) 17.3 9 8.3 20 18.8 10 9.2 21 20.0 22 21.0 TIDAL OBSERVATIONS. - 123 This table might be used for correcting all observed heights of the tide between November 19 and December 10; but I thought it preferable to suppose that the rope was at first correctly marked but changed afterwards. An examination of the mean level of the sea indicated a small but somewhat abrupt increase in the reading after the first high water of November 29th, and again a similar increase after the first high water of December 4th; I have therefore applied no correction to the readings of the rope between November 19th and November 29th, 2 P. M.; and have applied half the correction between the last named date and December 4th, 6 A. M. It seems that the apparatus was not in good working order during the last high tide as the readings for four hours indicate some defect. After December 4, 6 A. M., the full correction was applied. On the 11th of December the rope was taken up and re-marked, and the readings from and after this date must be taken as correct. To obtain a closer determination than half an hour of the time of high and low tide, the heights were plotted and a curve drawn through the points with a free -hand from which the time was made out with an uncertainty generally not exceed- ing ten minutes. The times and corresponding heights will be given after the record of series two of observations; see Table I. Record of Tide observations at Port Foulke, Smith Strait. Second series. 1861. June 6 A. M. 9» 30™ 20.3 11" 10™ 17.85 June 8 A. M. Se HOS Gi ; H. W. 45 L. W. L102 00" 17.8 : 4" 10™ 13% 0 .85 10 3 4 B 12.85 8 ni ? : a 15 af 7 AWRAMMANMNBODWO mH to R. June 7 A. M L. W. 3 116%, 12. SH DH HOM S, Ou 8. Powis 3: re) Oreo June 9 A. M. 50 00 124 RECORD AND RESULTS OF Second series, 1861.— Continued. June 9 A. M. L. W. 5h 00m 197.8 10 15 20 4 30 15 40 wl 50 0 6 00 0 10 0 20 oll 30 2 S. H. Ww. f10 30 18.0 40 1 50 4 11 00 55) 10 .65 20 ot 30 8 40 8 50 MO 2 00 ao 10 .65 R. P. M. L.. W. 4 10 12.55 20 35 30 15 40 0 50 =---- SOON eT 10 otf 20 .65 30 .65 40 .65 50 1 6 00 15 KR. P. M. ; H. W. iil 00 21.6 H 10 8 20 22.05 30 2 40 5) 50 130 2 00 A 10 A 20 4 30 230) 40 25 Re June 10 A. M. L. W. 52 90™ 19% 9 30 at 40 .45 50 4 6 00 5B 10 .05 20 0 30 0 40 .0 50 .0 7 00 05 10 15 20 Ro. 1B. H. W. 11 00 18.2 10 6) 20 6 30 8 40 a) 50 3619.0 12 00 .05 10 all 20 oll 3 all 40 all 50) «618.9 K. P. M. L. W. 5 00 ©12 Ou i on So i=) i e eNO eh tress erate SP SOOOOOO SOHN S Or 1030 08 50™ 22% 8 1 00 otf 10 .65 20 sta) K. June 11 A. M. L. W. 5 40 13.2 50 12.9 6 00 ati 10 45 20 33 30 15 40 0 OMe 7 00 9 10 A) 20 29 30 9 40 095 50 12.05 8 00 2 K. P.M. H. W. 0 00 18.5 10 otf 20 st) 30 .8 40 a9) 50 3u) 1 00 29 10 .85 20 8 30 18) Ss. L. W. 5: 3} 12.4 40 503) 50 at 6 00 £9, 10 11.95 20 9 30 a9 40 38) 50 a) 7 00 9 10 12.0 20 nll 30 2 R June 12 A. M. H. Ww. Ob 10™ 21%. 4 i Or Oo f=) bo Bree OE aesnoe hae eae POM WNW HH OOD 09 S DARRARSAAASSMRA bo S BAMArr NAR ws A -T S o i bo a oo S bo bo bo bo bo bo} on 8b 10" 12%9 20 A K. June 13 A. M. H. W. 0 40 20.7 50 29 100) > Qie2 10 BOD 20 510) 30 6 40 atl 50 7 2 00 off 10 ofl 20 .65 30 4 K. L. W- 7 00 12.9 10 atl 20 lS) 30 Re 40 1 50 .0 8 00 11.9 10 9 20 12.1 BO K. P. M. H. W. 100 17.9 10 18.1 20 2) 30 685 40 45 50 6 2 00 15 10 fi) 20 15 30 arid) 40 15 50 15 3 00 55 10 45 K. L. W. ADs vss 30 .25 40 2 TIDAL OBSERVATIONS. 125 Second series, 1861.— Continued. June 13 P. M. 8" 20" 13%.35 As BO 12.0) 4h oom 18%.4 L. W. L. W. : 40 18.95 6 LO® BO2 Ws, 82 00™ 138.15 c 50 95 15 : 00 8 15 : : 2 45 11 qn K.- or mas AONWHSOoSABI 1 2 i oo itt OUT at a K. Strong wind from S i June 16 A. M. Sw. Strong wind from S. W. ! 2 P. M. 3 bo 09 bo SDDHHDDBDOSDONRAMW K. — _ 0 9 all 4 2 atl .0 ay) 39 wl 9 8 Pole carried away by a strong 8. K. W. gale bo DH HH wWwWRMDOHR DOS > OR tO wae Strong wind from S. W. June 17 A. M. The anchor of the | June 18 A. M. pole was taken up, and the pole repaired and re- placed. The bot- tom is sloping, and the zero point therefore differs from that of the former ob- servations. 00 16.6 P. M. 10 4 H. W. “ 20 oll 3 40 : Strong wind from 30 ~=—-:15.9 50 8. S. W. 40 .6 08 ao S. } Strong wind from | S. W. i = Naoosooonvn-at Is Wo — (o.0) RECORD AND RESULTS OF Second series, 1861.— Continued. June 18 P. M. ! L. W. H 11" 50™ 15%.35 f 12 00 oll i 10 14.9 20 6 30 A 40 3 50 all 1 00 05 10 0 20° «1359 30 9 40 al’) 50 oy) BOD. eh 0) 10 gal 8. | Strong wind from i 8. W. June 19 A. M. H. W. 6 30 18:6 40 75 50 8 7 00 95 NO. ILO 20 05 30 A 40 alt 50 0 8 00 0 100 18:9 20 19 S. | Strong wind from S. W. P. M. L. W ORO 0) es a3225 10 0 20 12:9 30 att 40 5 50 36) 1200) 45 10 4 20 3 30 4 40 45 50 at) R. } Strong wind from 8. W. H. W. CSOD MOAT 40 oy) 50 20.15 7 00 A 10 -65 20 oY) 30 21.05 40 2 50 35 8 00 45 10 55 20 6 30 65 40 65 50 6 9 00 6 10 5 R. Strong wind from 8. W. L. W. Not observed June 20 A. M. H: W. 7 40 18.65 50 15 8 00 95 10 .95 20 19.05 30 05 40 -05 50 -05 9) 00 0 LOR Sa95 20 8 Pee L. W. I OOS alia LO L289 20 9 30 5 40 5 50 45 2, 00 45 10 45 20 45 30 45 40 45 50 6 Pole taken up oO i=) S Naw adamnwosd: June 21 A. M. L. W. 1330 14. (Su) oS _ Reena eles irae ee eo ATO ONS 6 DO OVO OD oT = i S a bo bo fo) — DIINO C.Sn9 3" 00™ 10%.85 10 00 on =) CU 09 09 Go OD Ro Oren or oO bo La el el el ee Oona A wom) Or _ —) bo par 1 1 1 1 June 22 A. M. S ww He Hoo 10" 40™ 99" 5 1l 00 June 23 A. M. ae = 4 30 bo i=) ra oS 10 50 18. 11 00 © —) ASSSOSS HHO 5 00 a) 6 00 6 10 50 21. Il 00 22. (Se) o DWHMAAIHHONW WL On On on TIDAL OBSERVATIONS. Second series, 1861.— Continued. June 23 P. M. H. W. H 11 50™ 92% 75 0 00 15 10 o f(t) 1 20 1 Ss. June 24 A.M. L. W. & 8X) aoa 40 0 50 =: 10.85 6 00 8 10 af 20 6 30 6 40 6 50 6 7 00 6 10 atl 20 29 S. H. W. Wil i@- Wee) 20 5) 30 att 40 9 50 19.0 12 00 oll 10 2 20 aD) 30 0) 40 sil 50 0 1 00 18.9 S. P. M. L. W. id ike 20 a) 30 ~=—:10.95 40 34) 50 8 6 00 8 10 8 20 85 30 9 40 11.0 Ss. H. W. '11 00 20.9 j 10 21.3 20 .65 80 3622.0 11® 40™ 22%. 12 00 XS) —) THO Ow Nw OD 8. June 25 A. M. as S So © OTTTHOSLD Orn TEES ON es Sp or or o _ _ “a or —— i) mR OW WWR OER DSO 5 R. Heavy gale from S. W. June 26 A. M. H. W. 0 00" Q1*.4 10 .65 (SY) So bo bo on S S RURAMNR WIS R. Heavy gale from S. W. nr (sy) oS RWW HHSSwwBNNDowWrse R. Heavy gale from Sanwa is S _ Jo) re) S oo S S DSOSSSSuemruIarE (Sy) So — oo K. Heavy wind 6" 50™ 12%] 7 00 8 00 12 K. Heavy wind. June 27 A. M. H. W. IT 00 bo rary = S S bo ee ecm ete oe eC DSSHBBDOARTE (Se) i=) bo pany K. Strong wind. bo =) RRR RR ROO Or or oO L. W. (200m) Larios 10 1 rR) =) S WD DODD UHAMWI Ss bo So S bo Hee Hoos, or 1) oc —) 128 RECORD AND RESULTS OF Second series, 1861.— Continued. June 28 P. M. SUC Om Moz 8h 40™ 18.75 _M. : 1» 00™ 141.15 poe 85 10 25 3° 307 18%.6 e 4 40 a) 50 A bo G2 G9 Go IB 09 bo bo bot ‘ero on bx Go bo bo bo bo G9 Yo He R. June 29 A. M. H. W. 2 16.4 June 30 A. M. al 0. ug 8 8 of K se otf at al 8 8 8 : .8 i July 1 A. M. } ‘ tf : | Uncertain. Guy } caught and not discovered _ till too late. 1G), WHOSOSSOSOSSOSOH ww SHH LPNNWNH or K. July 3 A. M. 6 DORR Rim RP Oo bo eee eee LO TIDAL OBSERVATIONS. 129 Second series, 1861.— Continued. July 3 P. M. i. W. 4> 00" 14%.4 P. M. P. M. ae 7h 00m 17%.65 10 ff) ed L. W. > Wa 10 5 20 6 spree Walls 35 30™ 13.95 0" 00™ 14%.6 0 2 R. Ca aha M68 10 5 30 9 x0 Be 50 A 20 4 40 18.0 H. W a0 5 4 00 Ki 30 3 50 0 8 30 182 AW 5: 10 ai 40 25 | 8 00 0 40 3 BO 5 20 i 50 2 10 0 50 3 mice ice 30 i 1 00 15 20 0 9 00 3 “0 es 40 15 10 1 30 0 10 3 a0 B 50 9 20 1 40 0 20 3 a 5 00 14.05 30 1 50 17.9 30 25 8. 40 1 9 00 8 40 2 a 50 15 S. 50 0 Ba Wa eer H. W. 2 00 2 K 10 00 23.8 10 3 P. M. eae 10 Ss L. W. P.M fo . 20 24.9 1 00 14.05 L. W an ot 30 25 i. W. 10 13.9 2 30 13.3 a i 40 3 6 40 19.7 20 8 40 25 20 i 50 3 50 8 30 65 50 p) aa ag, | HL Oo 3 7 00 9 40 6 3 00 2 al GA i: 10 2 10 20.0 50 5 10 2 th % 20 15 20 05 | 2 00 AB 20 25 30 23.95 30 oO} 10 5 30 3 Doubtful, as the 8. 40 85 20 5) 40 4 pole was covered 50 A 30 5 8. 8. 2 Oe ob ees July 8 A. M. a1) ie 8 40 15.6 L. W. a : BQ melee July 7 A. M. 4 00 14.75 ion 1 3019.9 oie “ L. W. A Gh : vo 10 4 20 35 50 AD 40 20.1 eink 3 40 14.9 30 15 9 00 4 50 25 uy Bote 50 85 40 05 10 3 8 00 A 4 00 4 50 13.9 S 10 55 Bel 2 40 4 10 55 5 00 8 20 7 50 4 20 45 10 7 30 8 10 00 4 30 B85 20 7 July 4 A. M. 40 9 10 6 40 .85 30 1 ee , on a 20 i 50 85 40 8 Ss 5 00 .35 50 95 0 30 16.55 10 a) 10 35 S 40 A i a 20 A 50 2 2 30 at) H. W. il OW) OB aye ye R. 10 30 20.5 10 15.9 AS 40 6 20. 15 Noy CasenveHl H.W BO nes 30 6 A. M. | B0 TELS i OO of 40 45) July 5 A. M. H. W. 40 20.15 10 otf 50 A L. W. 9 00 19.8 50 3 20 6 2 00 25 | 2 80 14.75 10 20.0 | 10 00 35 30 5 10 2 40 65 20 ail 10 A S. 20 15 50 6 30 il 20 A 30 0 3 00 5 40 ail 30 A P.M. 40 0 10 4 50 15 40 4 Thy We 50 0 20 A 10 00 15 50 A 3 HO 1% 3 00 05 30 4 10 th 11 00 3 4 00 55 10 15 40 4 20 05 10 2 10 4 Ss 50 4 R 8. 20 3 meesalyy 16Gb RECORD AND RESULTS OF Second series, 1861.— Continued. July 8 P. M. L. W. 45 30" 13%.15 40 1 50 05 5 00 05 10 1 20 25 30 3 8. H. W. f 10 30 23.7 40 8 50 9 H 11 00 24.1 ; 10 2 20 2 30 25 40 25 50 15 2 00 23.95 8. July 9 A. M. L. W. 5 00 13.4 10 2 20 all 30 0 40 12.95 50 of) 6 00 a0) 10 95 20 13.0 R. 11" 00™ 20.45 6 iat H. W. MABDRAN LORS: (oe) to SSOSOSSSOOND bo (oe) July 10 A. M. L. W. 20™ 13%.9 30 off 40 3) a3) 5 -65 5h SHwWwWwerwwNHesS On oo DOH HE bo bo H. W. 12" 50" -21%9 115 50m Q4tt9 1 00 2 12 00 3 10 15 10 .B5 20 1 20 5 R. on ce Eb. M. 50 oh L. W. an 5 6 20 13.0 muah 30 12.9 : 40 9 50 9 July 11 A. M. 7 00 9 u, We 10 13.0 5 380 13:7 R. 40 8 50 sil July 12 A. M. 6 00 EY) H. wW. 10 AW 0 30 23.4 20 4 40 5 30 25 50 6 40 15 1 00 6 50 all 10 .65 7 00 sil 20 .65 10 sll 3 5D 20 2 40 5 30 eae RN ie! es 2 40 g 4 L. W. ; 7 00 19.2 H. W. 10 1 11 50 20.5 20 0 12 00 ai 30 0 10 9 40 0 20 21.0 50 05 30 sll 8 00 l 40 all The times of the preceding record were taken from a watch set approximately to local mean solar time; the following comparisons between this watch and mean time chronometer No. 2007 were made for the purpose of obtaining the watch cor- rection and rate. Watch and Chronometer Comparisons for the correction of the times of the Tidal Record. Date. . Watch. Chronometer. Date. Watch Chronometer. June 6 8) 56™ 008 =e 3m June 28 Ps TS CO ee Ww SP Oe + T NOW Oe 4b oe eee 2 55 a BO) Shoo KOON apace Mis 1 32 ue arr asue) 10 17 29 sf 3. (OT July 1 8 39 02 cf 1 40 fe lal: By OB) BA iy WO. Jes) ss 2 8 30 09 se i 3 Gee alte 9 08 43.5 A. M. aieelall FOES ita} 8 34 22 “ 138} Baas) OS) AUD) Ss PA Sy 1 46 oo es Siolliivolll ut 1 58 PAO) Sy ODN QOsD ence 1 09 if 6 9 04 00 ne 2 14 ee PAI 8 48 20 ap 1 56 of 1 Oy BD) OM iy 8 Ws alg Unb} 8 40 28 ee 35 oe 8 8 40 02 ae Ths 5) Watch stopped (before the 25th) Bias) 8 45 03 Wy 2 02 GB 20 OX8 Te eb 2 ne 2iWwAC Ms 0 48 N®) Salts teoyT at IL) 8B} TIDAL OBSERVATIONS. 151 The following resulting chronometer corrections (A7’) of the eight day chrono- meter No. 2007, on Port Foulke mean time, is extracted from the discussion of the astronomical observations of the expedition (Part I). Tame 1, WAR a i Se ey Tuly MOMNSCW ik Beh es —4 47 15 Hence daily rate. 5 : : 5 v= 4+1%.1 With these data we find the corrections AT to the watch as follows :— June 6, al= — 0™.9 June 21, aT = +20™.1 July 38, AT= 4177.2 Peet = 0,4 E255 ar Goll a) dl +18.7 et) + 17 BAS, + 3.2 see G +4292.7 soul + 1.6 co) keh — 2.2 are (3 +25.3 Cua lire +14.6 Ca, +11.0 os 8, +27. “19, 417.9 July 1, 4.13.6 ~ % 4+29.6 8 OX). +18.9 A + 15.4 GO, +31.8 Average daily rate, June 6to June 21. : wo Se of Gt «June 30 to July 10. : . +21 The preceding observations, taken at regular intervals near the time of each high and low water, generally suffice to fix the epoch of the highest and lowest level within five minutes. The readings appear quite regular, and are evidently but little affected by agitation of the surface against which the surrounding ice acted as a complete preventive. The mean time during which the same, highest or lowest, readings are recorded has been adopted for the epoch of high or low water, though in some cases a closer process has been attempted by considering the readings pre- ceding and following. If the anterior and posterior slopes of the wave were the same, the average times of any two equal readings of height would give a.closer determination ; for instance, for low water, June 6 P. M., we have— Reading 11.9 feet at 3 : : : : «¢ 8" BO 11.95 feet at 3" 35™ and 45 10™ mean, 3 52 12.0 feet at 3 20 4 25 & 3 52 12.05 feet at 3 10 4 30 “ 8 50 Adopted epoch ; 3 5 @ Ol On the other hand, if the shape of the wave is unsymmetrical, and this is the rule in our case, we find by attempting the above process that the successive times show a regular progression; for instance, the low water, June 7 A. M.— Reading 12.1 feet at : : : : : mrad 0m 12.15 feet at 4" 30™ and 4° 55™ mean, 4 42 12.2 feet at 4 25 Bo) “ 4 47 12.25 feet at 4 20 5 20 i 4 50 Here we have to adopt 4" 40™ as the epoch of low water. A graphical process appears to be the best in all cases. Suppose the observations, taken at regular (or irregular) intervals, plotted by rectangular co-ordinates (times and corresponding heights), and a number of parallel level lines ruled across the crest (or trough) of the wave. Halving the length of each of these lines (within the curve) and uniting their middle points by a curve, that curve will generally intersect the wave nearly at right angles, and indicate the highest (or lowest) point in it. 132 RECORD AND RESULTS OF The second part of Table I contains the observed times of high and low water, corrected for error of watch. The adopted watch corrections for June 22d, 23d, and 24th, were +18, +15, and +12™ respectively. For June 29th, the correction was +10": and for July 11th and 12th, +33 and +34". Determination of the Mean Level of the Sea. An inquiry into the reading of the mean level of the sea is important in more than one aspect; first, we may test the value of our observations with respect to the invariability of the zero point of the scale which may change from the following causes: a gradual lengthening of the rope; a gradual shifting of the weight by which it is anchored on the sloping bottom by the action of currents, or by ice, and possibly also by a motion in the ice-field itself upon which the tidal apparatus rested, and finally by a change in the position of the weight after the rope had been taken up for repairs and was replaced. Secondly, by marking, at certain epochs, the half- tide level of the sea, which is subject to smaller fluctuations than either the average level of high water or the average level of low water, we may ascertain any relative change in the level of sea and land produced by geological causes. All levelling operations must also be referred to a certain tidal level. Thirdly, since theory points out certain fluctuations in the tidal level of the ocean due to the differential action of the sun and moon, their study and comparison with observation will bring them to a practical test. There are other interesting questions connected with the subject of our inquiry, namely, the effect upon the level of the sea, of a change in the atmospheric pressure as indicated by the readings of the barometer, and also the effect of the wind, with respect to direction, duration, and strength, upon the average height of the sea. The change of the sea level for a given rise or fall of the barometer has only been ascertained for a few places, and the measures fail to show a satisfactory agreement. The effect of the wind is of an entirely local character. The mean, or more properly the half-tide level, is the one to which all heights should be referred; on the average, therefore, we will have at high tide an equal sectional area of water above, and at low tide an equal sectional area of deficiency. Owing to the daily inequality and the halfmonthly inequality, which have to be eliminated, the following process for finding the half-tide level was employed. Diacram A, TIDAL OBSERVATIONS. 133 Referring to the annexed diagram (A) to illustrate the numerical method, the mean reading of two successive high waters is taken and placed opposite the read- ing of the intermediate low water (see series of upper circles in diagram), next the mean of these successive values is placed opposite the intermediate high water. In like manner the mean of two successive low waters is taken and placed opposite the intermediate high water (see series of lower circles in diagram), and their means again are taken; we thus obtain on each horizontal line two values, one high the other low, exactly corresponding in epoch, the mean of which is that of the half tide level as set out in the last column, thus :— Date. Phase. Readings. Means. Means. Half tide level. } 1861. July 2 16.0 Reta 18.6 15.05 14.1 ; TENT 20.1 15.05 17.17 16.0 ; 17.15 18.4 15.05 17.20 14.1 17.13 20.5 3, 14.55 16.95 15.0 b 16.81 18.0 13.4 | PRS ee et The following table contains the date, time of high or low water, and correspond- ing height (corrected if necessary in accordance with preceding remarks), and the half-tide level as made out by the above process; the remaining columns contain the moon’s declination at noon of each day, also the moon’s parallax for the same epoch, together with the atmospheric pressure (reduced to the temperature 32° Fah., and the prevailing direction and force of the wind during each day. Tanie I.—Observed times and heights of high and low waters at Port Foulke, latitude 78° 17’.6, longitude 4 52™ 0° west of Greenwich. Also the corresponding half-tide level, the moon’s decli- nation, the moon’s parallax, the atmospheric pressure (at the temperature of the freezing point of water), and the true direction and force of the wind. Series I. November and December, 1860. Morning | Observed |} Deduced | Moon’s | Moon’s} Atmos. Direction or height half-tide | declina- |paral’x.] press. of afternoon.| in feet. level. tion. wind. Observed mean time. Sa e [=7) oO gh 95m ee —21°.0 | 56.4 199™7 | calm 8.2 P72) 5507) |) 9919 PRP RP ee pe eee 134 RECORD AND RESULTS OF Series I. November and December, 1860.— Continued. Observed mean time. TORS SOs 'mwonwmawaAnwmoarawaownon pay en a pen en ese a SCEPOR TWO WOR TN DOH OAHTAORHRDOMNODHEKHROTHROROROROW! mH Morning or afternoon. ~Observed | Deduced height | half-tide in feet. level. 11.03 11.11 11.26 11.42 11.51 11.50 pany py 00 STR SO GO SO G9 TO fa Pea eadronanwnNwnonweku4wy, tt al Jl fa — — i mH — — wNowTORDOACNOD|®D: no bo e bo _ MSHOSANOORAOSOSAOSWASSOARADANTOA PANS, i it i it MODEPNWDACHHHHODMDDOOW — San ge SS NDOMNHOD eet ee bo La} Moon’s declina- tion. I ' Moon’s | Atmos. paral’x.} press. 54/.3 | 30.1 54.1 Direction] F calm calm calm TIDAL OBSERVATIONS. 135 i Series I. November and December, 1860.— Continued. ; High Observed | Morning | Observed | Deduced j Moon’s | Moon’s| Atmos. |Direction Force 4 | Date. or low Monnctiine: or height half-tide declina- paral’x.} press. of of | 4 tide. afternoon.) in feet. level. tion. wind. wind. 4 i Dec. 6 H. AA M. 17.4 14.33 j fs L. 10 55 M. 12.3 14.17 39.2) | 59/3) | 29.8) N. EE 7 ne H. 6 35 A. 17.5 13.96 L. 5 ee 8) A. 9.0 13.91 1 H. 6 55 M. 16.7 153, O53 cf LL. 0 15 A. 12.6 13.98 —9.3 | 59.5 | 29.8 | N. EB 7 ef H. 6 40 A. WB 14.11 8 L. 0 30 M. 9.2 14.17 ns H. 7 30 M. 18.0 14.08 | —14.9 | 59.6 | 298 | N. EB 8 of L. 1 45 Ne 11.8 13.96 4 H. 7 30 A. 17.3 13.95 9 L. 3 00 M. 8.3 13.72 if H. 8 40 M. 18.8 13.30 | —19.7 | 59.6 | 29.7 | N. E 8 i L. 2 30 A. 9.2 13.30 H. 8 45 A. 16.5 13.55 10 L. 2 30 M. Gy 13.92 if H. §) ib) M. 20.0 ~--- | —23.3 | 59.3 | 29.6 | N. Hi. 8 iL. 3) lb A. 11.0 oo ee “ H. - ee A. --- ---- idk L. ---- M. --- er ce ~ H. ---- M. --- ---- | —25.4 | 59:0 | 29.8 | N. E 4 4 is 4 30 A. HOM ---- ‘ H. 10 38 A. 19.7 ---6 12 L. 4 30 M. 11.4 16.52 “e H. 11 00 M. 23.0 16.50 | —25.9 | 58.4 | 30.2 | N. B 1 “ i 1) * A. 11.9 16.45 i H. Wit U5 A. 1907 16.40 13 L. 5 00 M. 11.0 16.39 ae H. 11 15 M. 23.0 16.37 | —24.7 | 57.8 | 30.1 | N. H 6 - L. 5 30 A. 11.8 16.46 - H. 12 00 A. 19.7 16.65 14 L. 6 00 M. Le 16.73 M H. @) aly A. 23.8 G02) || — PPL |) He |) YO.9 calm a L. 6 45 A. IL 7 16.73 15 H. 0 45 M. 19,7 16.65 L. 7 00 M. 11.8 UGS | Ile Ges |) eb WN Ie 15} 4 si H. 1 00 A. 23.0 16.56 “ L. eels) A. 12.0 16.56 16 H. 1 45 M. 19.2 16.60 as L. ko) M. 12.3 UGGe || ZED) HHLG |) POL! |] IN, 18} 5 “é H. 2 00 A. 22.8 16.83 ; S|) ie 8 00 A. 12.8 ---- ; 17 H. 1 45 M. 19.7 ---- { of I: ---- M. --- ---- —9.3 | 55.1 | 29.6 calm i H. 2 30 A. 221 === “ I. 9 00 Ine O07, ---- 18 HH. 3 00 M. 18.6 16.50 L. 9 00 M. 13.3 16.35 —4,2 | 54.6 | 30.0 calm “ H. 3 00? A. 20.7 16.35 sf L. 9 380 A. 12.9 16.41 19 H. 3. 45 M. 18.4 16.45 Coo aT 9 30? M. 14.0? | 16.42 | +0.9 | 54.3 | 30.1 | variable] 3 Oi i 3 30? ike 90.2? | 16.42 CG L. 10 15 A. 13'3 16.50 20 H. AAS M. 18.0 16.45 : sf L. 10 30 M. 15.0 16.21 +6.1 | 54.2 | 30:3 |-S. W. 6 “ H. &) 1) A. 18.8 ---- 6 Ti: 100 A. 12.8 Secs 196 S RECORD AND RESULTS OF Series I. November and December, 1860.— Continued. H High Oncorred Morning Observed Deduced Moon’s | Moon’s | Atmos. |Direction| Force | Date. or low Gating or height | half-tide | declina- |paral’x.} press. of of tide. afternoon.| in feet. level. tion. wind. | wind. | Dec. 21 ER || oeeaa M. --- 2055 a6 L. 11" 00" M. 15.1 ---- |+11°.0 | 547.3 | 30-6] calm ee i. 5 00 INs 18.0 ---- ce L. OLA’) A. 13.2 16.14 22 H. 6 45 M. 18.2 16.06 + L. 10.0 A. 15.2 15.98 | +15.5 | 54.5 | 30.5 calm Cb H. 7 00 A. 17.3 16.07 23 L. 0 45 M 13.2 16.15 te HH. 8 00 M. 19.0 16.23 | +19.5 | 54.9 | 30.3 calm < L. 1 Bx) A. 15.0 ---- a6 Hi. i BO) A. 18.2 ---- i Series II. June and July, 1861. f June6 | 4H. 10 09 M. 17.85 | ---- H Gs L 38 50 A. 11.95 ---- | +299.8 | 54.6 | 29.5 | N. E. 8 nf H 10 29 A. 20.8 15.70 7 i. 4 39 M. 12.1 15.68 a H. | ----- M. 18.1? Ns es |) SSOVE Is i Ys) |) COR INS 18h 3 8} af 6 18.05 +24.9 6 18 16.40 —= “9 aw " 18.06 + 23.3 ay 19 16.45 + 0.9 G 8 17.92 +20.4 ab 20 16.33 + 6.1 se 9 17.60 +164 oe 21 16.14 +11.0 eee) 17.89 +11.6 ag 292 16.04 +15.5 ci TO 17.61 + 6.0 a 23 16.19 +19.5 Gr an) ---- + 0.2 An examination of the figures makes it evident that the zero shifted between November 28th and 30th, from some unexplained cause, by about 2.4 feet, and again on the 4th and 10th of December by 0.7 and 2.5 feet respectively, on which dates the tide rope had been taken up and replaced. These displacements are all in the same direction, indicating deeper water. In the second series there are breaks between June 20th and 21st, between June 28th and 29th, and on July 6th, of —0.7, +0.9, and +1.2 foot respectively, all in consequence of a derangement of the apparatus as stated in the record. The breaking down of the apparatus on June 17th does net appear to have affected the mean level reading. Variation in the Mean Level of the Sea.—In accordance with the equilibrium and wave theories (533) of “Tides and Waves,” by G. B. Airy, Astronomer Royal, 140 RECORD AND RESULTS OF Encyclopedia Metropolitana, the variation of the mean level of the sea depends upon the changes of the moon’s and sun’s declinations, but as the latter goes through its changes in half a year, and as the zero levels of our two series are dis- connected, we can only examine the lunar effect, which can be expressed by C sin *0, where the constant C’ amounts to a few inches to be determined by observation. The constant C is greater in low and high latitudes, and very small in middle lati- tudes. The oscillation will go through its changes in half a lunation (14? days), and we may expect high level at the greatest declination, independent of the sign, and low level when the moon is in the equator. ‘The breaks in our mean level readings, as examined above, sufficiently demon- strate the insufficiency of the accuracy of our observations for so delicate an inquiry as the variation in the mean level; in some portions of the series the dependence of this level upon the declination appears systematic, but is hidden in other por- tions by irregularities. In Series I the mean of three readings of the level for 6 = 0 (after applying the corrections indicated) is 16.67, and for § = + 26° from two readings is 16.88 feet, range 24 inches; in series II the mean of three readings (after applying the corrections indicated) is the same (17.80 feet) for 6 = 0 and 6 =+ 25°, on the average therefore we would only have between one and two inches of oscillation. But few investigations into the variations of the mean level have been made, and more complete comparisons of observation and theory, on this point, are very desirable. Effect of Changes in the Atmospheric Pressure upon the Tides.—Considering the short series of observations any result for the dependence of the changes of the height of the barometric column upon those of the sea level can only be a first approximation, the result deduced from the observations is nevertheless entitled to some confidence. The treatment adopted was the following :— The mean levels, each day, and for each series independently, were grouped in two columns for days with barometer below, and for days with barometer above its average value (30.01 inches for Series I, and 29.65 inches for Series II). The cor- responding difference from the average value was also set down, and then the mean of the whole series taken, thus :— For Series I, average level 16.7, average depression of barometer 0.22 ss a UGG, elevation sf 0.24 Or —1 inch of change of level for 0.46 of change of barometer. For Series II, average level 18.0, average depression of barometer 0.15 e g Wh <2 & elevation a 0.17 Or —2 inches of change of level for 0'°.32 of change of barometer. From the two series combined we obtain therefore a change of —3 inches for a change of ? inch (nearly) in the barometric column; in other words, a rise of one inch of the barometric column will be accompanied by a corresponding fall in the level of the water of four inches nearly. This result is also affected by any wncompensated part, by reason of the short series of observations, of the effect of the variation in the mean level, and also of the effect of the wind. TIDAL OBSERVATIONS. 141 Investigations made by different methods for a few places, give very discordant results ; for London, Mr. Lubbock found 7 inches, for Bristol, Mr. Bunt found 13 inches, and Sir J C. Ross, in a late number of the Philosophical Transactions (for 1854, Part IL), deduced from observations at Port Leopold, in latitude 74° N., longi- tude 91° W., nearly the same value as that given for Bristol, stating that the effect is nearly in the inverse ratio of the specific gravity of the two bodies (mercury and water). The subject is open to further investigations, and considering that an increase or decrease of atmospheric pressure in any one place must necessarily be accompanied by currents restoring the disturbed equilibrium, the phenomenon would seem more complex than might at first be supposed. Liffect of the Wind upon the Mean Level of the Sea.—As this effect is of an entirely local character, the result will be of importance only in so far as it affects the local phenomena of the tides; in refined tidal discussions the effect of the wind must be eliminated, and for predicted tides the possible influence it may exert, specially when for spring or neap tides, may become a matter of grave interest. Looking over the columns of the wind record in Table I it appears that the prevailing wind is either N. E. or S. W.; there occur some calms and a few entries of variable winds. Tabulating, for each series of observations separately, the mean level reading, referred to the same zero by application of the corrections given, for days of N. E. wind, for days of S. W. wind, and for days of calms (including variables), the fol- lowing results were obtained :— Series I. Mean level with N. E. wind 16.6 feet (15 observations), with calms 16.6 feet (10 obser- vations), with 8. W. wind 16.8 feet (3 observations). Series II. Mean level with N. E. wind 17.5 feet (6 observations), with calms 18.0 feet (15 obser- vations), with S. W. wind 17.9 feet (13 observations). With consideration of the number of days of observation in each case, the effect of the wind appears very small, with N. E. wind the level is depressed a small fraction of a foot, and with a S. W. wind elevated by the same amount. A north- east wind blowing off the land, and a southwest wind blowing on it, would produce the effect as stated. ‘Two causes operate against a considerable change in the level, first the open strait giving free passage to accumulated waters, to the northward or southward, and secondly, the protection of ice-fields, preventing the wind from act- ing on the surface of the sea. We have seen that the effect upon the naan of the tides produced either by the regular oscillation of the half-tide level, or oy the irregular changes in the atmo- spheric pressure and the action of the winds, is sufficiently small at Port Foulke to be safely left out of consideration in our subsequent investigations ; the corrections alone will be needed which refer all observations to the same zero of the height scale ; they are for series [: Between November 17th and 28th, +5.6 feet ; between November 30th and December 3d, +3.2 feet; between December 5th and 10th, +-2.5 feet. For series II: Between June 6th and 20th, +1.4 foot; between June 142 RECORD AND RESULTS OF 21st and 28th, +2.1 feet; and between June 29th and July 5th, +1.2 foot. The mean level reading for Series I is 16.7, and for Series II 17.9 feet; these levels, however, are disconnected. General Character of the Port Foulke Tides.—We find by the subsequent,analysis of the two series of observations, with respect to the half-monthly and the diurmal inequalities, that their general character is very much the same as that exhibited by the Van Rensselaer Harbor tides, a result which was to be expected since the two localities are but 55 statute miles apart (following the sinuosities. of the coast line), with no apparent special configuration of the shore which might exert an influence on the tidal feature. The establishment at Port Foulke is nearly half an hour less than that of Van Rensselaer Harbor, consistent with the northerly (and easterly) propagation of the tidal wave. ‘The average range of the tide is almost exactly the same at the two places. There is at Port Foulke a considerabie diurnal inequality which almost reaches, at certain times, that limit beyond which a single- day tide is produced; the diurnal inequality in the height of high water is greater than in the height of low water; these features of the diurnal inequality are also common to the two localities. We shall now proceed with the special investigation of the inequalities commenc- ing with that which runs through its period in half a month. For this purpose Table II has been prepared. The second column contains the time of the moon’s transit over the Port Foulke meridian, interpolated from the American Nautical Almanac; the lower transit is distinguished by being placed between brackets. The epochs of high and low tides are taken from Table I. Mean time has been adopted throughout, as no special advantage can be derived from the use of apparent time for so short a series of observations. ‘The transit of the moon given is that one which immediately precedes the time of high or low water; the lunitidal intervals are given accordingly ; those within brackets depend upon the lower transit of the moon. ‘The fact that various anterior positions of the moon are required for the explanation of various tidal inequalities justifies us in using, in a first investigation, the preceding transit; the subject will again be referred to in connection with the moon’s parallactic and declination effects. The reason why no one anterior lunar epoch will answer, even for ports on the same coast and at no very great distance apart, must be sought for, I think, in the compound character of the wave, com- posed of propagated and direct effects, the velocity of the various parts being differently affected by the variations in the depth of the sea over which these waves pass. TIDAL OBSERVATIONS. 143 TABLE II.—Time of the moon’s upper and lower transit over the meridian of Port Foulke; time, height, and establishment of high and low water. EE Series I. November and December, 1860. Time of Lunitidal interval of Height of Moon’s upper _ Date. and lower tran-| ; | sit. high water. | low water. high water. low water. | high water. low water. | Nov. 17 (3" 44™) ---- ---- | ------- | ------- --+- hanes “ 4 10 Qh 95m} gh o5™ | (10m 41™) | (az 21") | g2%o | 13%8 18 (4 33) 2 50 9 30 10 40 17 20 |+ 19.9 | 15.9 H 4 57 3 25 10 00 (10 52) (1T 27) 21.2 1 14.9 19 (5 19) aoc0 || Sanoo | cooDpSosS |} olbooge --- ---- e 5 41 4 30 10 15 (tat — Lb) (16 56) 20.8 18.83 20 (6 02) 4 45 | ----- ll 04 | ------ 17.6 acer < 6 23 oe So 10 45 | ------- (16 43) --- | 13.7 21 (6 48) oe 11 50 | ------- Wy 2g =-- 15.3 < 7 03 5 20 (10- 37) 18.9 22 (a 23) 7 25 0 25 12 22 (7 42) 19.0 13.3 ee 7 43 tT 15 0 30 (11 52) WT 2% 19.6 15.3 23 (8 03) 8 00? 1 15 12 lege (17 52) 19.8 13.8 ev 8 23 T 30 2 30 (1 27) 18 47 19.6 15.2 24 (8 44) 9 25 2 15 13 02 (18s 12) 21.2 13.3 es 9 06 8 10 3 30 (11 26) LON Of ONC 14.3 25 @ 28) |) 2cseso coca a oo 00S eso n0 poo pooo B GC) BO). | sedcltes Siege secqes || cooos eas Daas 26 (10 14) 10 00 8 25 12 10 (17 57) 21.2 12.2 f 10 38 10 00 4 15 (11 46) 18 25 20.4 13.2 27 (11 03) 10 30 4 00 ll 52 (17 46) 23.6 12.1 i TEE 2/9) 10 45 4 40 (11 42) 18 02 20.6 13.3 28 (11 56) 1l 00 4 35 11 31 (17 32) 24.0 11.2 i 10 55 5 380 (10 +59) 18 01 20.3 12.6 29 0 24 li 40 4 45 OG (16 49) 24.6 11.6 6 5 21.1 6 24.0 6 20.2 : 7 23.3 2. 6 WB) 12.2 8 22.9 12.0 T 19.4 12.6 8 21.8 12.2 8 18.7% 12.5 0 22.5 12.6 9 19.0 14.4 20.3% 12.5 19.9 14.8 20.0 11.5 19.2 0 19.8 0 20.5 1 19.8 3 21.3 2 19.0 2 22.5 3 ee 4 4 5 144 RECORD AND RESULTS OF Series I. November and December, 1860.— Continued. Time of Lunitidal interval of Height of Moon’s upper and lower | transit. high water. | low water. high water. low water. | high water. low water.| 11*.0 | 2) (oe) md o (0" 33™) IES Tes 16" 57m 1 Feel il ON oe ON ee OM OME DASMNONOWOWS mIAHAONWOWMH-+T OPWWWWDPDrNrrE OOS SOVVDDMDAWMDAARGAAND SS OP iS 09 TIDAL OBSERVATIONS. 145 Series IJ. June and July, 1861.— Continued. Time of Lunitidal interval of Height of Moon’s upper Date. and lower transit. high water. | low water. high water. low water. | high water.|low water. |} June 19 (92 03™) (CO Bee 1 Om Ine Tg (17 47™) 20.5 15%.3 ‘is 9 33 8 53 t 8 (il 50) ly O5 23.1 13.7 20 (10 03 8 54 ---- Int Bil} So See6 20.5 --- se 10 34 9 44 2 34 (11 41) 17 ‘Ol 23.8 13.8 21 (11 05) 9 50 3 20 11 16 (ig 149) 20.5 14.6 os ll 37 10 50 4 15 (11 45) 17 41 24.2 12.4 22 mS ocob 5 40 | ------ (18 35) 20.9? 13.4 ss (0 7) ll 37 5 18 (11 30) 17 41 24.8 12.6 23 0 38 11 50 6 06 ll 12 (17 +59) 21.1 12.8 sf (1 06) 5 34 16 56 12.4 24 1 35 0 13 6 8 | Gl Op) | Giz. 4) 24.9 12.7 @ (2 00) 0 381 6 10 10 56 1G BS 21.3 12.9 25 2 26 0 48 vo ly (10 48) (17 17) 25.0 12.8 sf (2 50) i Ue vw Ol 10 46 16 35 21.4 13.4 26 3 14 1 30 7 49 (10 40) (16 59) 24.7 13.1 os (8 37) 2 038 U4 10 49 16 29 21.1 13.9 27 4 00 PA AU 8 46 (10 40) (17 (09) 24.1 13.5 ce (4 20) 2 40 8 10 10 40 16 10 21.0 14.7 28 4 40 2 24 9 03 (10 04) (16 43) 23.2 13.9 “ (5 01) 3 18 8 58 10 38 16 18 20.7 15.3 29 5 292 SIO 3) (10 18)? (16 58) 22.5 14.6 oy (5 42) 4 10 9 55 10 48 16 33 20.7 16.4 3 03 4 46 10 36 (il 04) (16 54) 21.9 14.8 (6 24) 5 16 ll 07 11 18 17 04 20.6 16.9 July 1 6 45 A ip Tn OB | GO 28) || Gly om) 20.4 15.2 me (7 07) 6 29 Il 44 21.0 2 ie 29 6 10 0 54 (11 03) 18 09 19.8 17.2 aw (7 52) 7 46 0 40 We} Uy (17 33) 21.3 15.3 3 8 15 7 12 iL > Bll (11 20) 18 22 19.6 17.2 sé (8 40) 8 42 1 42 12 27 (17 50) 21.7 15.3 4 8 OS 8 28 2 58 (11 48) 18 43 19.2 16.2 ss (iS 0)) © ils) 2 24 12 14 (17 44) 22.1 14.6 5 9 56 9 20 3 5D (11 50) 18 50 19.5 15.6 sf (10 23) 10 06 8 21 12 10 (17 51) 23.9 14.4 6 10 50 MQ) ily ---- (uit 84) |} a Gace 21.4 --- Ks (i117) 10 43? 3 58 11 53? (17 35) 23.4? 15.4 7 Il 44 10 54 5 14 (ais 37) 18 24 20.4 14.3 sé IL 1G} 4 35 Il 382 (17 18) 24.3 13.7 8 (0 10) ll 33 5 47 (11 23 18 03 20.7 13.7 DS 23 (17 13) 13.0 6 24 11 27 17 47 24.3 12.9 6 05 (11 03) (17 03) 20.6 12.4 6 21 Wik OB 16 53 24.0 13.5 GO By (11 09) (16 44) 21.3 13.1 if Bil 11 40 Wy 11 24.5 12.1 ¢ ug (10 46) (16 37) 21.2 12.9 8 04 10 42 16 57 23.7 12.0 19 July, 1865. 146 RECORD AND RESULTS OF Half-monthly Inequality.—The theoretical formula for the half-monthly inequality in time is, according to the equilibrium theory, Te es AE, h’ +heos 2p where h and h’ represent the elevations of the spheroid due to the sun and moon respectively, @ the angular distance of the moon from the sun, and @’ the angular distance of the pole of the spheroid (or of high water) from the moon’s place. In reality, however, the pole of this spheroid follows the moon at a certain distance, the mean value 2’ of which is known as the “‘mean establishment,” and which cor- responds to a distance of the sun and moon of ¢—a instead of g. This retroposition of the tide, which is mostly the effect of friction, has been called the “age” of the tide. The above formula, in conformity with the wave theory, then assumes the form ray hain 2 (=a) tan 2 (0’—2’) h'+ h cos 2 (p—a) the mean establishment A’, the ratio of the solar and lunar effect z and the angle D / of retardation a are to be determined from the observations. The theoretical expression for the half-monthly inequality in height is, according to the equilibrium theory, jee "| (i? + + Qh! h cos 29) where y represents the height of the pole of the equilibrium spheroid above the undisturbed mean level of the surface, this expression must be changed, in accord- ance with the wave theory, into the following’ pe J (12+ 12+ 21 hcos 2 (¢—a)) the values of h’, h and a must be found from the observations. In order to compare our observations with these theoretical expressions the luni- tidal intervals and heights of Table II were first arranged according to the time of the moon’s transit; the total number of observations being comparatively small, the results by the two series were at once united, for which purpose the heights of the second series were all diminished by 1.2 foot to reduce them to the same plane of reference. No distinction was made between upper and lower transits. For the high waters as well as for low waters twelve groups of lunitidal intervals and coyr- responding heights were formed, and the values of each group, extending over one hour, were united into a mean, of which process the following is an example :— ” sin 2 (m—s — 4 Art. (535) Tides and Waves. tan 2 (9—a) = — Si sua 2 (fae a a) and M'’ + 8" cos 2 (m—s—a) y= | (mr +2 Mf" §""' cos 2 (m—s —a) + 5!’ TIDAL OBSERVATIONS. 147 For Moon’s Transit between 2 and 3 hours. First Series. Lun. interval for Height of high water. high water. Lun. interval for Height of transit. low water. low water. C’s transit. ia 15" 17 9 12% 3 42) (16 03) (12.2) 22) (16 53 (12.0) 48 16 27 12.3 15" 10 30" 23 8 42) (0 18) (19 7) 22) (10 88) (23.0) 48 10 57 19.2 on bo bo Ww bo >_> bo bo bo LO Second Series. (19.1) 22.4 (23.8) 20.2 (23.5) 23.3 (20.0) — => =>? > = “— Lo bo bo bo bb bo bo bo bo WO bo bb =? = 21.6 The greater the number of values the more will the wncompensated part of diummal inequality, declination effect, and parallax effect, disappear from the mean results. No observation was rejected. The following table contains the mean hourly values for the high waters and low waters :— For high water. For low water. Number Number of of observations. observations. *C’s transit. | Lun. int’l. C’s transit. | Lun. int’l. Height. h to _— a 27" pS Deve 11%.8 29 02 11.9 29 11.9 28 12.5 28 13.3 27 13.6 26 14.3 26 14.2 21 13.1 30 12.8 29 12.6 25 2 11.9 2u™ Wy 59 40 30 28 50 09 45 49 o4 At 33 ROO Oe a lt OM OM OM SO) Fe ORO RCO SCONE a ae DOR C—OW WTNH DOW ly HODDMADNMERWNWOHOS a 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 i 8 9 0 1 ao 13.8 no 2 on From this and the preceding table we find :— Height of average high water level . : 6 . 20.5 feet Height of average low water level 6 6 : . . 12.8 feet 148 RECORD AND RESULTS OF Hence average rise and fall of tide 7.7 feet; at Van Rensselaer Harbor this quantity was 7.9 feet. Height of highest high water level . 0 : . 24.6 feet Height of lowest high water level . : . . 17.3 feet Hence extreme fluctuation in high water level 7.3 feet; at Van Rensselaer Har- bor the corresponding quantity was 8.4 feet. Height of highest low water level . : : . 16.0 feet Height of lowest low water level . : i . 10.8 feet Hence extreme fluctuation in low water level 5.2 feet ; at Van Rensselaer Harbor the corresponding quantity was 9.0 feet. The extreme fluctuation in the water level observed was 13.8 feet; at Van Rensselaer Harbor this quantity was 16.6 feet. The mean establishments at the two places compare as follows :— Mean establishment of high water at Port Foulke, 11* 13.8 Mean establishment of high water at Van Rensselaer Harbor, 11 43.3 Diff. 297.5 Mean establishment of low water at Port Foulke, Ire 1k) Mean establishment of low water at Van Rensselaer Harbor, 17 48.0 Diff. 28".5 The determination of the constants in the formula for half-monthly inequality, in time, is as follows :— For high water: By interpolation, the mean interval occurs at 0° 38".4, hencea= 9° 36/ For low water: By interpolation, the mean interval occurs at 0 42.0, hencea=10 30 For high water: By a graphical process the greatest range in the interval is 1" 25" = 21° 15/ its sine? is 0.3624 For low water: By a graphical process the greatest range in the interval is 1? 26™ = 21° 30’ its sine is 0.3665 The mean establishment for high water a’ = 11" 138".8 = 168° 27’ The mean establishment for low water 17 19.5. =259 524 We have consequently the following expressions :— From 181 observed high waters, tan 9 (’— 168° 27’) UE 0.3624 sin 2 (Ge g° 36") 1 + 0.8624 cos 2 (p— 9° 36’) and from 129 observed low waters ' ' 0.3665 sin 2 (¢— 10° 30’) tan 2 (0'— 259° 522’) = — wes Ta : ( 2) 1 + 0.3665 cos 2 (p — 10° 30) By means of these expressions the inequality in time has been computed, the agreement with observation is shown in the following table, also by the two diagrams in which the observed quantities are indicated by dots. 1 Tn the manner in which = is deduced above it is preferable to use the sine instead of the tangent, h as by Mr. Lubbock’s process. See also Phil. Trans. 1836 (4th series of papers on Tides), by the Rev. W. Whewell. TIDAL OBSERVATIONS. 149 Half-monthly inequality in time. In high water. In low water. C’s transit. | Observed. | Computed. | Difference. | (’s transit. | Observed. | Computed. | Difference. oF 27a + 3™ + 3™ om OF 27™ + 4™ + 4™ om 1 29 —15 —13 —2 I 2) —l7 —12 = § 2 29 —34 —28 —6 2 29 —29 —2T — 2 3. 29 —3 —39 0 3 28 — 3) —38 + 3 4 28 —4A6 —42 —4 4 28 —48 —43 — 5 5 30 —24 —32 +8 By Bi —28 —35 + 7 6 30 — § — 5 0 6 26 —— 9 — 9 0 C2 oroill +24 +7 t 26 +24 +28 + 1 8 22 +35 .- +40 —) SB +50 +40 +10 9 30 +40 +41 —ll 9 30 +34 +41 — 7 10 29 +33 +32 +1 10 29 +32 +33 — | 11 28 +19 +18 +1 iil) +22 +20 + 2 The. comparison is shown to better advantage in the diagrams. For high water. For low water. g 450m Ss 40 = > 30 3 20 a 10 o ae 0 b | 10 8 20 3 30 40 —50 0h 123456789101112 012345678 910111% Moon’s transit. Moon’s transit. The range of this inequality amounts to 1" 26™ for either the time of hign or of low water; this is about a normal value. At Van Rensselaer Harbor it amounted, however, to the unusually large value of 1" 52”. The determination of the constants for the halfmonthly inequality in height is as follows: First, for the retard ; the epoch of the highest and lowest reading of high water differs from that of the syzygy and quadrature, on the average by 52", hence a = 18°, similarly the epoch of the extreme readings of low water differs nearly 32”, hence a= 9°. Second, for the range ; the inequality in the height of high water is 2.4 feet; half of this, or 1.2 is the coefficient: the inequality in the low water is 2.5 feet; its coefficient, therefore, 1.25. The mean of all the heights of high water being 20.55, and of all the heights of low water 12.83, we have at once the approxi- mate expressions for the half-monthly inequality in height, for the high waters y = 20.55 + 1.2 cos 2 (p— 18°) for the low water y = 12.83 — 1.25 cos 2 (p — 9°) 150 RECORD AND RESULTS OF This form was also used by Mr. Whewell (Phil. Trans. 1834, Art. II) as a first approximation, and was applied by me to the Van Rensselaer Harbor tides, For short series it is quite sufficient, and in the present case the results found by it and by the more rigorous form given below hardly differ by as much as one inch in the extreme. To find the ratio of the solar and lunar tide we have the greatest or spring tide range, 21.7 — 11.8 — 9.9 feet, and the least or neap tide range, 19.3 — 14.38 —5.0 feet; the former being the sum, the latter the difference; 2.45 h a LSS = 0),Sy ence the ratio 7b 0.329 For substitution in our formula given at the head of this article, we take for h the half of the difference between the highest and lowest high water, or the differ- ence between the highest and lowest low water, which is 1.22, the corresponding h’, by means of the above ratio, is 3.72, hence the expression [a7 + 1.22 + 2x 3.72 x 1.22 cos 2 (@— 13) ] and computing the inequality by this expression the mean of all the ordinates will be found = 3.81, which constant we subtract to obtain the inequality itself; we have therefore for high water the halfmonthly inequality ae {583 + 9.1 cos 2 (p— 13°) ] —3.81 and for low water es |[2533-94 cos 2(@—9°) | —3.83 The comparison between observed and computed heights is shown in the follow- ing table and by diagrams. ‘The observed inequality was found by subtracting the mean of the whole from each single value. The results computed by the approximate formule are marked “ app.;” those by the more rigorous formule are marked “rig.” ee Half-monthly-inequality in height. In high water. ‘ In low water. C’s tran. | Observed. ee Temes Difference.} (’s tran. | Observed. eee oes Difference. Om 27™) +115 | +117 | 4111 0*.0 OE Di] MESO) 8} + 0%.3 129 +0.75 | 41.14 | 41.09 —0.3 1 29 —0.9 —1.1 —l1.1 +0.2 2 29 +1.05 | +0.79 | +0.81 +0.2 229) ——039 —0.7 —0.6 —0.3 3 29 +0.65 | +0.24 | +0.33 + 0.3 3 28 —0.3 —0.1 0.0 —0.3 4 28 | —0.35 ; —0.37 | —0.27 —0.1 4 28 +0.5 +0.5 +0.6 —0.1 By 8 —0.85 | —0.91 | —0.90 0.0 5 27 +0.8 +1.0 +0.9 —0.1 C0 — le 5a len Sanat S 0.0 6 26 +41.5 Spalo®: s|. cyedtodl +0.4 eGo | 1D al Teal 5 pelle 0.0 (ae 6 +1.4 +1.1 +1.0 +0.4 8 22 | —0.75 | —0.85 | —0.83 +0.1 8 21 + 0.3 +0.8 +0.7 —0.4 9 30 | —0.15 | —0.23 | —0.12 0.0 9 380 0.0 +0.1 +0.1 —0.1 10 29 +0.35 | +0.38 | +0.46 —0.1 10 29 —0.2 —0.6 —0.5 +0.3 Il 28 +0.65 | +0.89 | +0.89 —0.2 Wh) 2s —0:9 —1.0 —1.0 +0.1 The low waters are not as well represented as the high waters. TIDAL OBSERVATIONS. 151 For high water. For low water. Half-monthly inequality in height. 0h123 45 6 7 8 91011125 0h12345 67 8 910 11125 Moon’s transit. Moon’s transit. The range for inequality is the same for high and low waters, wuereas at Van Rensselaer Harbor the latter was considerably greater; the more rigorous expres- sions for the halfsmonthly equality for this place are’ For high water y= J[ 18.25 + 12.0 cos 2(g—15°) | erin For low water y= [1830 13.0 cos 2 (p— 15°) | — 4.12 1 These equations should be substituted in the place of those given p. 71 (lines 3 and 5 from top) of the Van Rensselaer Harbor tidal discussion. The observed and computed inequality compare as follows :— For high water. For low water. C’s transit. Observed. Computed. Difference. Observed. Computed. Difference. ov +1%.4 +1%3 {0}, ile} NH +0%.4 1s +1.3 +1.3 0.0 —1.5 —1.7 +0.2 Qe +1.1 +1.0 +0.1 —1.0 —l.1 +0. 3k +0.4 +0.5 —0.1 05% —0.3 —0 4 4h —0.3 —0.3 0.0 +0.5 +0.5 0.0 5s —1.1 —1.0 —0.1 +1.4 +1.1 +0.3 63 —1.6 —1.6 0.0 +1.7 +1.4 +0.8 7s —1.38 —1.6 +0.5 +2.0 +1.4 +0.6 84 —0.9 —1.0 +0.1 +1.1 apll.il 0.0 9s —0.2 —0.2 0.0 +0.1 +0.5 _ —().4 104 +0.38 + 0.5 —0.2 —0.8 —0.3 —0.5 11g +0.9 +1.0 —0.1 —1.3 —l.1 —0.2 Comparing these remainders with those given on p. 71, and deduced from the approximate equa- tions, it will be seen that the representation is equally good by either form. 152 RECORD AND RESULTS OF depending on the ratio of solar to lunar tide oe = 0.376, which is preferable to the value (0.367) given in the text (p. 71), the spring range being 10.8, and the neap range 4.9 feet, values which approximate closer to the Port Foulke results. In the notation of Art.’s (536) to (540), Tides and Waves, we have from the time ve : S inequality, for Port Foulke Ta 0.364, and from the height inequality p= 0.829; the heights generally give the smaller value, but that deduced from the times is theoretically the more correct one. ‘The retard of the tide from the time-inequality is a= 10° 3’, and from the height-inequality a= 11° 0’, the latter is, theoretically, the preferable value. The average daily separation of the sun and moon is 48".8;- hence the time in which the moon moves through this angle or the age of the tide 11 equals is x49 0.9 of a day (215 hours); by this interval the spring and neap tides follow the syzygy and quadrature respectively. The retard, as found at Port Foulke and Van Rensselaer Harbor, is comparatively small. Effect of Changes of the Lunar Parallax on the Half-monthly Inequality.—From a short series of observations, like the one now under consideration, we can only deduce approximately the changes which the half-monthly inequality undergoes in consequence of variations in the lunar parallax, and the same remark applies to the changes produced by variations in the moon’s declination. The method followed in this discussion is nearly the same for the parallactic and declination effects, and applies for high and low water and for times and heights. The luni-tidal intervals and corresponding heights were rearranged with reference to small and large values of the parallax; it is, however, not the parallax belonging to the epoch of high or low tide which was employed, but one anterior to that time, the retroposition depending on the retard of the tide as determined in the preceding article. As the average age amounts to nearly a day, the parallax preceding the effect by that inter- val was used in the tabulation. No distinction is required for upper or lower tran- sits. The first group consists of intervals and heights for parallax between 54’ and 57’, the second for parallax between 57’ and 60’. The means being taken for each hour of the moon’s transit, the following tables were obtained. The letter P stands for parallax; the inequality for the average parallax (57’) is added from the pre- ceding investigation. TIDAL OBSERVATIONS. 153 a Tasie ITI.—Lunar-parallactic effect on the Half-monthly Inequality. For high water. For low water. P=55/.2 P= 58/.8 P=55/.5 P=58/.7 Lun. int’l. Height. | Lun. int’l. | Height. | Lun. int'l, | Height. | Lun. int’l. | Height. OE Oe | 1s Bie2 | Bless TE Wee |] AAG) TPS AS |) BPE I Ie TGS |] TRS bs 1 30 Iolo 21.6 10 59 21.2 17 «(O01 12.3 Wy Oil 11.7 2 30 10 45 20.2 10 38 22.1 16 44 12.1 16 53 11.9 3 30 10 34 21.3 10 36 21.1 16 52 12.6 16 40 12.4 4 30 10 36 19.8 10 16 30.7 16 45 13.7 16 31 12.5 5 30 10 53 19.6 10 44 20.0 16 53 13.8 16 51 13.3 6 30 10 52 19.1 | (C10 52) LON 17 «14 14.5 16 59 13.8 7 30 ll 52 18.9 Ill 28 20.1 17 538 14.7 17 23 13.2 8 30 11 56 19.6 11 38 20.3 18 26 14.0 17 53 12.3 9 30 12 06 20.2 ll 38 20.7 18 11 13.0 17 23 12.6 0 30 ll 54 20.9 ll 28 20.9 Lie 58 12.8 17 39 12.2 1 30 Il 32 21.1 ll 34 21.4 17 36 12.0 17 52 11.7 a een, | W 17 | 20.3 | al 08 | 20.8 | lt 25 | ayy) ay 1) |) Te We have therefore for the non-periodical effect of the parallax in time and height the values :— tite Ee euneieste Jiniie jpeneilloes Pena Lunar parallax. i i oT IT 19h a in 08 59 iy 1a" 583 Represented by the formula Represented by the formula 11® 147 —3™ (P —517’) 17” 1937 —4" (P —517’) An increase of lunar parallax is followed by a decrease of the mean establishment for high as well as for low water. Mean height of high water. Lunar parallax. Mean height of low water. Lunar parallax. 20%.3 55! TBS AL 554’ 20.55 57 12.8 57 20.8 59 12.4 583 An increase of the parallax is followed by an An increase of the parallax is followed by a increase in the mean height, at a rate of 0.13 | decrease in the mean height, at a rate of 0%2 for 1’ of parallactic change. for 1’ of parallactic change. The range of the tide is consequently increased by 0.3 nearly for a parallactic increase of 1’. For the periodical part we form the following table by subtraction of the mean values in Table IIT. + Interpolated, number of observations insufficient. 20 A. M. 232 0! P. M. 1 es Deck 552 lie RS Me Wf BIB, NE il lg ena OE AGE ME PHL GB. 12s Jie 2 I1 1861. June 15,- 7-A. M. 16 4 P.M. 1g) Boe DYE}. 7 A. M. 3 OM Ones mela On the average, therefore, the diurnal inequality in the height of high waters dis- appears 1.9 day after the moon’s passage over the equator; the corresponding quantity at Van Rensselaer Harbor was 1.6 day. 1 This rule depends also on the particular transit of the moon first fixed upon to connect with the tide, and the desirability of extending the establishment,beyond twelve hours; thus the rule for high water, given by the Rev. W. Whewell for our Atlantic coast (6th Series of Tidal Researches, Phil. Trans. 1836) will be found the opposite of that given in our U, 8. Coast Survey Reports for the Pacifie coast of the United States. Port Foulke follows the rule of the latter, TIDAL OBSERVATIONS. 157 The apparent retard of the low water epoch is as follows :—— C’s declination zero. Inequality vanishes. Interval. 1860. Nov. 22%, 02 A. M. Wee, We Ges INE Ge ies Dee, &, Wi Ie, IL CMG © AoW WO: 1 1861. June 1, 0 A.M. June ll 4 A.M. 10 4 OTs, Wy IN, « 94 0 A.M. 8 17 5 (July 7 0 A.M. 98, 7 A. M. ‘ee onion ae 10 14 On the average, therefore, the diurnal inequality in the height of low water disappears 9.8 days after the moon’s passage over the equator. This difference in the epoch of the inequality in the height of high and low water, amounting to 7.9 days, is significant. With respect to the retard we remark, gene- rally, for tidal waves that their oscillations are augmented by the continued action, in the same direction, of the force having the same intervals as those oscillations; they will, therefore, go on increasing for a considerable time after the forces have gone on diminishing ; here the retard is due to an accumulated effect. It is plain that this explanation cannot apply to the epoch of the diurnal wave which shows an epochal difference of nearly eight days for high and low water, but must be the effect of interference of the diurnal and semi-diurnal wave. ‘The subject of separation of these two waves will be taken up and analyzed further on. By means of the.diagrams on Plate I we find the maximum range of the diurnal inequality in height for high water to be 3.8 feet, determined from five cases, each giving the same amount. For the low water diumal inequality range the values are more variable; they are 2.0, 3.7, 2.8, 2.2, and 2.0 feet, on the average 2.4 feet. The last three values belong to the summer series, and are probably affected by the solar action. The variations in the moon’s parallax also affect the diurnal inequality, and there are indications of an increase for a larger parallax; our series, however, are too short to pursue this subject any further. According to Sir J. Lubbock (Phil. Trans. 1837) the lunar portion of the diurnal inequality can be represented by dh = C sin 20’ for the heights, and Gy Crit 1+ A cos 29 In these expressions the value of §’ must be taken for an anterior date, which for the high water height inequality in our case is two days. Dividing the intervals between the moon’s zero declination in six equal parts, and measuring for each the ordinate of the inequality and tabulating the corresponding declinations, without regard to sign, we obtain the following results for the inequality in height of high water from the two series. Each value is the result of five separate measures, and the computed value is derived from the expression dh = 4.6 sin 20’. for the times. v Observed dh Computed dh 0° 0.0 0*.0 12 1.8 1.9 22 3.2 3.2 25 . 83,5) 3.5 22 3.1 3.2 12 1.8 19) 0 0.0 0.0 The inequality in the heights of low water cannot be expressed in this manner, as the more complex figure on Plate I sufficiently indicates. 158 RECORD AND RESULTS OF That low water which follows the moon’s upper transit (about 17 hours) when she has north declination is the lower of the two, provided it happens ten days after the zero declination ; if before, it is the higher of that day. A similar restriction, of two days only, applies to the rule for the highest high water. Diurnal Inequality in Time.—The inequality in time is best exhibited by means of diagrams, the abscissee of which are the times of high or low water, and the ordi- nates the corresponding lunitidal intervals, both taken from Table II. Lunitidal intervals from the upper transits are indicated by dots; intervals from the lower transits by small circles. ‘The observations of the winter series proved somewhat too rough for the elucidation of this inequality—they were taken every half hour ; the diurnal inequality, nevertheless, is sufficiently indicated to make out its general law. I shall here confine this investigation to the second series, for which we have observations every ten minutes; the results are given on Plate II for high water and low water separately. ‘The inequality, proper, is shown underneath, where the middle line between the full and broken curves of inequality is straightened out and forms the axis of abscissze, upon which the time inequalities, as ordinates, have been plotted. From these curves we find the retard of the time inequality for high water from three intersections with the axis equal 11.0 days, and that of low water equal 2.2 days. A comparison of these time-curves of Plate IJ with the height- curves of Plate I, imdicates a strong similarity in character between the height inequality of high water and the ¢ime inequality of low water; for these curves the average epoch is two days, and the alternation each semi-lunation of the signs or full curves above and below the axis correspond ; a similar correspondence of epoch, which is on the average 10.4 days, and of alternation of the signs exists in the time inequality of high water and the height inequality of low water. This is not an accidental relation, but has been recognized at other stations, the first and conspi- cuous notice of it I find in the U. 8. Coast Survey Report for 1853, p. *79 in the tidal discussion by A. D. Bache, Superintendent, of Rincon Point, San Francisco, California. The greatest range of the time inequality is for the high waters 46™, and for the low waters 58", the first from two, the last from three determinations. Respecting the relative magnitude of the inequality we have, on the one hand, the smaller time and greater height inequality in high water, and on the other, the greater time and smaller height equality in low water. A similar relation of magnitudes occurs at Rincon Point, but it is the reverse of that just stated, in conformity with the more prominent development of the diurnal inequality in the height of low waters in San Francisco Be The interval of that high water which follows the moon’s upper transit Ghent 11 hours) when she has north declination will be the smaller one, provided it happens 11 days after the moon’s zero declination ; if before, it will be the greater of the two of that day. The interval of that low water which follows the moon’s upper transit (about 17 hours) when she has north declination will be the greater of the two pros vided it happens two days after the moon’s zero declination; if before, it will be the earlier one. The reverse takes place for south declination, or for lower transit. The time-inequality of the low water of the second series can be represented well TIDAL OBSERVATIONS. 159 enough by the approximate formula dh) = 102 tan 0’, the declination of the moon being taken for an anterior epoch of twe days. y Observed df Computed dp 02 0= om 3 42 25 22 41 41 25 48 48 21 Pa 40 12 24 22, 0 0 0 The curve thus computed is represented on Plate I1; see bottom diagram. Cor- responding to this curve the bottom diagram of Plate I shows the computed height inequality for high water. Separation of the Diurnal and Semi-Diurnal Waves.—The compound wave actu- ally observed consists of the diurnal wave, to which the diurnal inequality is due, and of the ordinary semi-diurnal wave which produces the ordinary tides. For a complete study of these waves it is necessary to have them in their separate forms. The manner in which this separation will be effected is the same as that employed in the U. S. Coast Survey; it was originally proposed by Assistant L. F. Pourtales, in charge of the tidal party, about the year 1855,’ and has taken the place of the more laborious analytical process previously employed; the graphical process of Mr. Whewell’s was applied only to observed high and low waters, and consequently gave but few points of the diurnal wave.” In Series II the high and low waters alone were observed, which renders it quite unsuitable for the purpose of separation. I was therefore obliged to select the least interrupted portion of the half-hourly obser- vations of Series I. The compound (observed) wave, and its two component waves from November 21 to December 11, 1860, are shown on Plate III. The graphical process of separation is as follows: After the observations are plotted and a tracing is taken, the traced curves are shifted in epoch 12 hours 24 minutes forward, when a mean curve is pricked off exactly between the observed and traced curves; the same process is repeated after the paper was shifted 12 hours 24 minutes back- wards, when a second pricked curve is obtained; the mean pricked curve then represents the semi-diurmal wave. To obtain the diurnal curve we have only to lay off the differences between the observed curve and the semi-diurnal curve. The process is simplified by blacking the under surface of the tracing paper with a lead pencil and running in with a free hand the intermediate curve by the pressure of a steel point which leaves a sufficient mark on the paper; the average of the two curves thus traced gives the semi-diurnal wave in quite an expeditious: manner. Nevertheless the discussion, by separate waves, of any lengthy series of observations remains a laborious task. On Plate III the observed heights, reduced to the same plane of reference or zero level, are shown by dots, and connected by a full line; some omissions in the observations are supplied by dots; the average level reads 16.7 feet. The semi-diurnal wave is shown by a curve of dashes, and the diurnal 1 See my discussion of the Van Rensselaer Harbor tides, p. 78, where the method is first pub- lished, by permission of A. D. Bache, Superintendent U. 8. Coast Survey. 2 See Sth Series of Researches of Tides. Phil. Trans. 1837. 160 RECORD AND RESULTS OF wave by a full line constructed over the average level as an axis of abscissee. The combination of the two component waves will show the features of the diurnal inequality ; thus, the upper of the two annexed diagrams exhibits the position of the semi-diurnal wave on Novem- ber 30, when the inequality in the height of high water is greatest, and when the low waters show no inequality since they are affected alike. On the contrary, the lower figure exhibts the position on December 8, when there is no inequality in the high waters, and the greatest inequality in the height of low water. In the upper case the maximum ordinates or the high waters of the two waves coincide ; in the lower case they are opposed, or the high water of the diurnal wave coincides with the low water of the semi-diurnal. As the semi-diurnal wave progresses or gains on the diurnal all possible variations are gone through successively. For the upper diagram the time of the first low water will be earlier or its luni- tidal interval shorter, and the time of the second low water will be later, or its luni-tidal interval will be greater; the time of the intermediate high water will not be affected. For the lower diagram the time of the first high water will be later, and that of the second earlier; the interval of occurrence between these high waters will therefore be considerably shortened. The time of the intermediate low water will not be affected. The average range of the diurnal tide for the period represented on Plate IIT is about three feet, and for the semi-diurnal about seven feet, the greatest and least ranges for these waves are four feet and two feet nearly for the first, and ten feet and four feet nearly for the last. The diurnal wave gra- dually increases in size from the time of the moon’s zero declination to the time of its maximum declination, as shown on the Plate. The epoch of the diurnal wave appears to remain sensibly the same during the twenty days for which it has been brought out; that is to say, its high water appears to occur at noon, and consequently its low water at midnight; the variations from these hours are confined within an hour before or after. The Van Rensselaer Harbor tides afforded but a bare glimpse at the diurnal tide which occurred between October 30 and November 22, 1853, there also its high water appeared to hang about the hours two or three after noon, and its low water the same number of hours after midnight; but as theory points out a different relation than that of solar time, and consequently a gradual slow shifting from the solar hours, and as our series is too short to show its conformity or non-conformity therewith, we are compelled to leave this interesting branch of the discussion. Owing to the variation in the epoch of the diurnal wave, its rate of progress from Port Foulke to Van Rensselaer Harbor cannot be made out directly, since the observations were not contemporaneous, although future observations at some TIDAL OBSHRVATIONS. 1G southern point of Baffin Bay would probably enable us to trace its course north- wards through this channel Investigation of the Form of the Tide Waves.—The compound character of the wave requires a separate investigation of the forms of the diurnal and of the semi- diurmal wave. We have seen that the diumal wave undergoes smaller fluctuations of range than the semi-diurnal, in which latter the spring and neap tides are fully developed. To obtain the average slope of these waves the time between two suc- cessive low waters was divided in six equal parts, for each of these phases the ordinates were measured from the low water level. The ordinates of 20 diurnal waves and of 38 corresponding semi-diurnal waves, were thus ascertained and their mean values taken. Applying to these measures Bessel’s circular function’ the average forms of these waves, from twenty days of observation, are given by the following expressions :— For the diurnal wave 1*,.50 + 1.56 sin (6 + 270°) + 0.08 sin (20 + 185°) For the semi-diurnal wave Salo oe (Oust (Olt 2 too) = Ondiesin, (20) 1942) The observed and computed values agree as follows :— fo} Diurnal wave. Semi-diurnal wave. Observed. Computed. Difference. Observed. Computed. Difference. 0 —0* +01 38) —0.3 2, +0.1 A ; —0.1 3 5. +0.1 olf ‘ 0 S a S = CorwonWnrsas [+ ossess —0.1 +0.1 a2 | 0 0.6 2.3 3.1 2.2, 0.7 0.0 In the above expressions the angle @ counts from low water (0°) to the following low water (360°), for the first wave it passes through its values in a day nearly, for the second in twelve lunar hours; the ordinates are expressed in feet. The diurnal curve appears to be nearly symmetrical, but the preceding slope of the semi-diurnal wave appears steeper than the following slope; the difference, however, is slight. The difference in the establishments of high and low water is 6" 05".7, which represents the duration of fall, the duration of rise consequently is 6" 18".7; the rise occupies therefore more time than the fall; the difference is 18". At Van Rensselaer Harbor this difference was 15", the water also rising longer.* This appears to be the rule for all localities which receive the direct ocean tide wave ; the form of the wave, however, changes when ascending a shallow bay or a river, and reverses the duration of the tide, making the rise the shorter. 2 Development of Bessel’s function for the effect of periodic forces, etc , U.S. Coast Survey Report for 1862, Appendix No, 22. 2 Tn the discussion of the Van Rensselaer Harbor tides, p. 80, the reverse is inadvertently stated. 21 August, 1865. 162 RECORD AND RESULTS OF Progress of the Tide through Baffin Bay.—In the following table I have collected all the tidal information I could find respecting establishment and range of stations on the west coast of Greenland, for the purpose of showing the northerly propaga- tion of the tide wave through Baffin Bay. ‘This locality is well suited for testing the theoretical deductions, according to the tidal theory of canals, the bay being sufficiently regulary and of great length, with the full Atlantic tide thrown into it at its southern end. Its tides will therefore be of a derivative character chiefly, since any forced tide produced in it must be, comparatively very small, and would pro- duce waves of an undulatory character. For this purpose it would be very desirable to obtain some sets of unexceptionable tidal observations’ on both shores of the bay, each extending over at least two lunations. Longitude High water] Rise and fall west of | lunitidal Locality. Latitude. |Greenwich. interval |spring | neap Authority or reference. F. and C. | tides. | tides. Julianshaab, 60° 35/ 5B 5® |) British Admiralty Tide Tables Frederickshaab, 4] 92 |§ for 1865. Holsteinborg, Capt. Inglefield, 1853. Whalefish Islands, 4 Parry’s Third Voyage. Godhavn, - Map, in Narrative of Kane’s First Voyage. | Upernavik, : Capt. Inglefield, 1854. Wolstenholm Sound, ?)| MS. furnished by the late hydro- grapher to the Admiralty. Port Foulke, : é .0 | Dr. Hayes’ Obser’s, 1860-61. Van Rensselaer Har. : 2 ; .9 | Dr. Kane’s Obser’s, 1853-54. To trace the cotidal lines or the high water ridges of the tidal wave, as it pro- eresses, it is preferable, for comparison, to use the mean for the above vulgar estab- lishment; 10™ were therefore subtracted from the interval at full and change. To correct for the moon’s motion in the interval, 1" is subtracted for every half hour of interval; adding the west longitude from Greenwich we obtain the correspond- ing Greenwich time or the cotidal hour and minute. Cotidal hour and minute. Mean Correction Locality. establishment. for € Longitude. Julianshaab Frederickshaab . Holsteinborg Whalefish Islands, Godhayn . : Upernavik . : Wolstenholm Sound. Port Foulke ‘ Van Rensselaer Harbor Hy H He GO CO G2 CO CD C2 1 Suitable localities would be Cape Farewell, Cape St. Lewis in Labrador, Cape Walsingham, and Ponds Strait. It is to be regretted that no tidal observations were made in Kennedy Channel, ag by means of these the question of its open or closed character, to the northward, could be partly answered. TIDAL OBSERVATIONS. 163 These cotidal lines, which connect all places having high water at the same (Green- wich) time, are laid down on the accompanying chart.’ The tide wave consumes very nearly eight hours in travelling from the southern cape of Greenland to Smith Sound. ST. MILES. i 1 100 200 300 400 S00 600 ! ll Average Depth of Davis Strait, Baffin Bay, and Smith Strait.—By means of the preceding cotidal hours and the known distances of the localities in connection with the theoretical deductions of Art. (174) “Tides and Waves,” we find the average depth of the sea along the channel-way as follows :— Davis Strait. Distance from Julianshaab to Whalefish Islands 680 statute miles nearly ; difference in cotidal hour 3.5, hence velocity in statute miles per non 194, and corresponding depth 2510 fect or 418 fathoms. 1 The general cotidal chart constructed by Mr. Whewell, more than thirty years ago (and repro- duced in the astronomer royal’s essay, ‘Tides and Waves’), is very defective to the eastward” of New Foundland, as will appear in attempting to join our cotidal lines with it; it is due to the total neglect of the powerful retarding influence of the banks of New Foundland. 164 RECORD AND RESULTS. Baffin Bay. Distance from Whalefish Islands to Port Foulke 770 statute miles nearly ; difference in cotidal hour 4°.35; hence velocity in statute miles per hour 177, and corresponding depth 2095 feet, or 349 fathoms. Smith Strait. Distance from Port Foulke to Van Rensselaer Harbor 55 statute miles; difference in cotidal hour 0".35; hence velocity in statute miles per hour 157, and corresponding depth 1663 feet, or 277 fathoms. The average depth, according to the above, of Davis Strait and Baffin Bay is, therefore, about 383 fathoms, the length of the free tide wave nearly 2300 statute miles, with a height between trough and crest of about 74 feet. The average depth, as found from the velocity of the tide wave, appears to accord well with the few soundings we possess, and the result I consider entitled to confidence. ie 19 ‘Novembe Diurnal ides mber at Port A_Patersen sé “05 U9SLI3eT er MO] go aT ur Ajrpenbaut qeurmney ‘|qayes MOT Jo & @ asl O08 62 8% Le 9% St 7 snp | ge ‘T9eT Ame y ung’ Se prods pelea lal | Bi imu] daquiava(y | r ‘0998L 19equta,eq yp TOQUIOAON | SOE eseoaalig = coke kes pue Teumrp om jo woneredas | ! 2 5 Bae SHdIL @IINOU 1YOd as St caaeiog 5 [eshare ees ae Lele eat | [ey EeNiefe | i | Susie) Pin oe. _ | METEOROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS. i heath RECORD AND RESULTS OF METEOROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS. Tue fourth and last part of the publication of the records and results of Dr. Hayes’ Arctic Expedition of 1860 and 1861, herewith presented, comprises meteor- ology, and will be given under the subdivisions, temperature, atmospheric pressure, and wind. By inspecting the general track chart and the special harbor chart of the winter quarters, illustrating Part I, or the astronomical results, it will be seen that Port Foulke, latitude 78° 17’.6 N. and longitude 73° 00’.0 W. of Greenwich, has a free exposure to the westward (true), directly facing Smith Strait and nearly opposite Cape Isabella. ‘The harbor is on the south side of the entrance to a large fiord, at the eastern terminus of which is situated Lake Alida, which receives the drainage of a large glacier named by Dr. Kane “ Brother John’s glacier.” This glacier pro- trudes into the upper end of the fiord and forms part of an immense mer de glace extending far into the interior, and is connected with the great Humboldt glacier. Dr. Hayes travelled over this glacier, in an easterly direction, for fifty-three miles. The locality may be said to be, climatologically, an anomalous one, as it is fully under the immediate influence of the upper north water and the smaller water areas of Smith Strait. The sea, here, does not freeze over entirely during the winter, but presents large patches of open water which exercise a powerful influence over the climate of this region. Dr. Hayes remarked that during the winter of 1860—1861, the open sea could always be found a few miles to the westward of his anchorage. The comparative mildness of the climate makes it possible for the Esquimaux to reside habitually during the winter in this high latitude, and the vicinity of the port abounds with animal life which was almost entirely absent at Van Rensselaer Harbor, but a short distance to the northward and eastward. This contrast in the climate cannot be better illustrated than by stating the fact of the temperature simultaneously recorded on March 18, 19, 20, 21, 1861, at Port Foulke and at Van Rensselaer Harbor, then revisited by Dr. Hayes, at the former place it was —24°.7 and the latter —50°.7 as observed by him, showing a difference of not less than 26° of greater cold at Van Rensselaer Harbor. On August 26th, 1860, Capes Alexander and Isabella were first sighted; on Sep- tember 9th, at 5 P. M., the vessel was safely moored for the winter at Port Foulke, GG) 168 RECORD AND RESULTS OF Smith Strait; the interval between these dates was consumed in the attempt of beating in and through the strait. During this interval the climatic relations were so nearly the same as those at Port Foulke that we may conveniently commence the meteorological record with September 1, 1860. The observations extend to July 14th (10 A.M.), 1861, at which date the vessel was unmoored and pulled out of the harbor; crossing the strait, the schooner anchored for several days in the vicinity of Cape Isabella; on the 29th she was off Gale Point; and on the 31st some short distance to the southward of Cadogan Inlet. We may, therefore, com- bine, without much risk of error, the recorded observations during the latter half of July with the preceding record, and thus form a continuous meteorological record for Port Foulke, extending over eleven months. A proper method of interpolation will enable us to deduce a mean value for each meteorological element for the twelfth month, and the annual mean values may safely be made out. The results will be further illustrated by comparison with those obtained from Dr. Kane’s' and Sir F. L. McClintock’s’ expeditions, as published by the Smithsonian Institution in 1859 and 1862. Taking the refraction into consideration, the sun’s upper limb would, in the lati- tude of Port Foulke, astronomically disappear after October 25th noon, and reappear at noon February 15, thus remaining below the horizon for 113 days, or nearly three and two-third months. Owing to the surrounding cliffs the sun did not make its appearance at the harbor until February 18. TEMPERATURE. The expedition was supplied with about two dozen thermometers of different kinds, graduated according to Fahrenheit’s scale, excepting two, which were divided in degrees of Reaumur. Some were spirit, others mercurial thermometers; there was also one metallic thermometer. Three of the instruments were considered of standard excellence, and of these No. 3 was selected by Mr. Sonntag as the standard, to which accordingly the indications of all others will be referred. Thermometers Nos. 1, 2, 3, are standard instruments. No. 3 was selected as the most reliable. (They are, no doubt, spirit thermometers.) Nos. 4, 5, 6, ordinary thermometers (supposed spirit thermometers). Nos. 7, 9, mercurial thermometers. Nos. 8, 10, 12, 15, ordinary thermometers. M, a metallic thermometer by Beaumont, of New York. 1705, 1657, maximum thermometers; they are mercurial. 1 Meteorological Observations in the Arctic Seas, by Elisha Kent Kane, M. D., U.S. N., made during the second Grinnell Expedition in search of Sir John Franklin, in 1853, 1854, and 1855, at Van Rensselaer Harbor and other points on the west coast of Greenland. Reduced and discussed by Charles A. Schott. Smithsonian Contributions to Knowledge, 1859. 2 Meteorological Observations in the Arctic Seas, by Sir Francis Leopold McClintock, R.N., made on board the Arctic searching yacht ‘ Fox” in Baffin Bay and Prince Regent’s Inlet, in 1857, 1858, and 1859. Reduced and discussed, at the expense of the Smithsonian Institution, by Charles A. Schott. Smithsonian Contributions to Knowledge, 1862. METEOROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS. 169 1597, 1639, minimum thermometers; no doubt spirit thermometers. 1663, 1704, both mercurial thermometers; the latter a black bulb. A, B, two Reaumur thermometers. 1644, 1648, hygrometric and black bulb thermometers. To allow for errors of graduation the following comparisons were made :— 1. Comparisons of thermometers at the temperature of freezing water, Port Foulke, Smith Strait, September 12, 1860. The thermometers were immersed in a bucketful of melting ice. A. Sonntag, observer. The readings are taken at intervals of five minutes. Number or designation of thermometers. 5 6 1597 | 1639 | 1657 2. Comparisons at low temperatures, Port Foulke. suspended on the east side of the Port Foulke meteorological observatory, facing March 24, 1861. 31°.7 | 31°.4 31.3 | 31.3 31.5 | 31.3 31.5 | 31.3 31.5 | 31.3 0.5 |-+0.7 31°.4 | 329.3 31.5 | 32.2 32.0 | 31.7 32.2 31.6 | 32.1 +0.4 |—0.1 northeast, and were read.at intervals of five minutes. 31°.2 31.2 31.5 31.3 leo 40.7 Number or designation of thermometers. Mean, Correction, The small correction of the metallic thermometer at this extremely low tempera- ture is a satisfactory proof that the low temperatures are correctly ascertained. 92, October, 1865. | (Sh) bo fo) oo G9 OD CO GD U9 BOIRO Saal eet are ten SSOMNMDMDMS The thermometers were 170 RECORD AND RESULTS OF 3. Other intermediate comparisons by A. Sonntag. October 6th A. M. Bo Koda IP iL, Bo Quit Jey ike ue | Mean } Correction . ¥ October 10th noon, ne 11th A. M. GO TT Te AE Gi LIPS INE ob 12th A. M. 1 Mean ¥ Correction . Correction . 4. Additional comparisons of thermometers Nos. 4 and 6 with the standard ; these comparisons being very numerous, the results only are given here. Correction to | Number of Date. Temperature by No. 4. Fearrationg November 29. 4 ; : 21° os 26a : : . | between 12° and 138° December 18—March 28 . : sf 2 and —10 February 4—April 3 . ; “« —12 and —19 January 2l—April 2 . : “ —21 and —28 January 23—March 26 . 3 “ —30 and —38 Number of Date. Temperature by No. 6. Beta September 12. s : 3 319.3 November 27—November 29 : between 11° and 14° November 25—November 30. and 0 November 12—-Novemher 26 ; and —10 November 13—November 26 : and —20 November 19—November 21 5 and —29 The following corrections were adopted for No, 4:— Temperature by No. 4. Correction. + 32° +0°.2 +22 +0.2 +11 + 0.2 ay —1.4 SEG —2.5 —25 —3.2 —3.4 METEOROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS. 171 A number of simultaneous readings of thermometers Nos. 3, 1, 9, A, 1663, also of a few others, were taken daily between November 12, 1860, and J uly 12, 1861, at the hours 8 A.M., 2 and 10 P.M. Of these readings such use will be made as circumstances seem to require. There are occasionally omissions in this record. Between November 26, 1860, and March 4, 1861, hourly readings of the same thermometers were taken on fifteen days (at intervals of. one week). Comparison of thermometers No. 3 and No. 13. These thermometers were read together frequently between April 7, 1861, and July 6, 1861; the following corrections to No. 13 were deduced from these comparisons :— Temperature by No. 13. Correction. Number of observations. —299 +1°.4 T ——Il(0) —=(059 17 + 1 (I) 25 +17 +1.6 25 +25 . ap il.§ 54 +35 +1.2 14 +45 —1.2 27 +53 —1.9 3 These comparisons being made in the air, are yet sufficiently numerous to give a reliable correction. Most of the meteorological instruments were kept in a large box on shore near _ the astronomical and magnetic observatory, in the rear of the harbor. The record of the temperature of the air comprises daily bi-hourly observations (with occasional omissions) between September 1, 1860, and July 31,1861. Ther- mometer No. 7 was used between September 1 and November 7, on which date No. 6 was hung up, No. 7 having been carried away. November 12th, thermome- ter No. 6 was taken to the meteorological box on shore, and No. 4 substituted, hung on a pole erected on the floe ice near the schooner. On April 5th, No. 13 was substituted for No. 4. On March 16th, the thermometers were changed in position at the box on shore, and on May 25d they were returned on board. 172 RECORD AND RESULTS OF Temperature of the air, in shade, observed near and at Port Foulke, Smith Strait, September, 1860. Day of Mean of the | 2h 4 6 SO | Som, | a 4 6 8 | 10 | 12h {12 values month. by No.7 1 --- 19°.5 | 20° 21° 22° 22° 22° 22°.5 | 24°.5 | 26° 25° --- 22°.4 | 2 --- --- --- 22 22.5 20 20 --- === --- --- --- 21.1 § 3 --- --- --- 23 23 24 24 24 24 22 22 --- 22.9 4 --- --- --- 24.5 24 21.5 18 17 16.5 16.5 17 ye 20.2 5 --- --- --- 21 21.5 22.5 --- --- --- 29 29 --- 23.8 6 --- --- --- 29 30 29 28 26 28 26 25 24.5 27.7 a 27° --- --- 27 27 26 24 23 23 22.5 22.5 | --- 24.9 8 --- --* --- 23 24 24 24 24 24.5 24 22 --- 23.4 9 --- --- --- 28 28 27 26 25.5 23 22.5 21.5 | 21 24.9 10 e-- --- --- 24 24 26 * 28 26 25 28 28.5 | --- 25.4 11 --- --- --- 27.5 29 31 31 31 30 30.5 82 29 29.5 12 33.5 30 --- 26 24.5 24 24 24.4 24.2 24 24.5 | 23 25.8 13 24 25 25 25 24.8 27 26 25 24.2 24 23 22 24.6 14 20 22 22 --- 20 24 24 --- 24.8 25.5 26 22.7 23.0 15 23 22.5 20 20 22 --- 27 27.5 27.3 26.7 26.5 | 26 24.4 16 30 28.5 30 82 32 --- 31 31 30.5 27.5 26 24.8 29.6 17 25 25 23 23 22.3 --- 23.5 23.5 22 --- 21 18.8 23.6 18 17.5 18 19 21 21 22.5 23 22.5 21 20.5 19 17.5 20.2 19 14.5 15.5 iy 18.5 19 21 21.5 20.5 UB YE 15.8 15 15 17.4 20 14.5 17 17.5 18 19.5 20 21 20.5 18.2 19.5 19.5 } 19.5 18.7 21 19 20 --- 23.5 21.5 20.5 22 23.5 25.7 --- --- 24.5 22.7 22 26 27 --- 26.3 26 27 30 30 24 21.3 21 19.3 25.4 23 16.5 15.5 --- 15.3 14.5 --- 17 19 16.5 16 17 17 16.3 24 17 16 --- 17 allots 19.5 21 20.5 21.5 21 21 --- 19.0 25 17.6 19 21 20 --- --- 20 20.5 --- 18 18.5 16.5 19.2 26 --- 19 19.5 17 16 18 18.3 Al --- 16 15.5 14 17.0 27 --- --- 14 15 --- --- --- 19.5 19.5 --- --- 21.5 17.5 28 23 22.5 22.5 22 --- --- i? --- 16.8 17 13 10.3 18.4 29 7.5 9 8.5 7.3 10 9 10 9 8 8.5 9 8.5 8.7 30 --- 10 9.5 10 925 10 10.5 11 11 11.8 11 11.3 10.4 Thermometer No. 7 hung on a pole on the floe ice near the vessel. This thermometer is used till Nov. 7th. October, 1860. Mean of pA 4 6 8 10 Noon. 2 4 6 8 10 125 |12 values by No.7 14°.5 | ---]| 14°.5| 14°.5 | 14°.5 | 13°.5 | 13°.5 14° 16° 16° 16°.2| 20° |+15°.1 17 19.5 24 23.8 24.5 24.5 22.5 23 20 17 ==: 13.6 | 420.4 --- 13 14.5 15 --- =-- 25 26 25 25 23.5 24.5 |+20.4 25 --- 24.5 23.5 24.5 24.5 24.5 25 24.5 25 24 24.5 | 424.5 23.5 24 --- 25 24.5 24.5 24 20.5 20 18.5 17.5 17.8 |+22.0 17 16.5 19 20 20.5 22 23.5 23 23 23 23 24 |+421.2 24 --- 14.5 23.2 23.5 24 25 25 25.3 25.5 27 --- |423.7 --- 26 27 27 27 27.5 28 28 27.5 27.5 27 26.5 |-27.1 27.5 26.5 --- 27.5 26.5 27.5 27 26 25 23 19 20 +25.2 § 21 16 --- 16 15 11.6 14.5 14.5 15 15 12 13.5 ]+-15.0 | 10.5 10 --- 6 11.5 12 12.4 17 11 12 10 11 +10.9 { 7 u 9 9 8.7 13 10.5 14 15 15.5 15 10 +11.1 10.5 9.5 10 8.5 9.3 8.8 --- 4 3.5 | —0.5 | —1 —3 +5.5 jj —2 —3 —2 —0.5 | —1 —l —2 —1.5 | —2 —2 a4 —8 —2.4 | —T —6 —6.5 | —5 —4 —+t —5 —3 —3 —2.5 | —3 —5 —4.5 | 0 oe eey) EOE) LO EGS ie yf Teo) I Ila La, @ )| G0 | SUIS pe} | SLR) |) ae PEC AS Si Sak ae Peto. a Eas ea UR. 7b cL | SL) TERY Tf SLs ees a | Wee Wa ea ee eae | —5 —6 —5.5 | —4 —3.5 | —3.5 | —5 —5.5 | —6 —6 —6 —6 —5.2 | 3 go | SERB | RG eee eS Pate Pos ey ey ey ey he —3.5 | —2.5.| —3 — —3.5 | —4 — —3 —3 --- --- | +2 —2.3 SER) pea) eG Vas Ny ane) I ei Mec Paes 1) thay | es | 8 fy) IgA =) | al Bo5 8 Boel ises fas) || a |i =a.) abl SEB OND —5.5 | —6 —6.5 | —7 —2.5 | —3 —3 —5 —T —T —7.5 ; —8 —5.7 —10 —9I --- |—13 —T —5 —T —6 —6.5 | —6.5 | —7 —7.5 | —&.0 —10 |—10 |—11 /|—10 --- --- --- | —7 —T —7.5 | —8 —8.5 | —8.7 | --- /—1l1 —10.5 | —6 --- --- | —3.5 | —3.5 | —4 —5.5 | —5 —4 —6.0° Le | eee Si) ESI” | ees |] 8} By |) ay |f teaiss |} eit Oem ||) Hag Fa ee mae al yaaa |e QI) ters |) tei 0 0 0 O || ia SEH PROPS I SE) oh aie args i) ESS fp SEY |) fe |) ten 6s. een 0 || ea | +1 +2 +0.5 | 41.5 0 0 —0.5 | —3 —0.5 | $1.5 | 41.5 0 +0.3 METEOROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS. 173 e Temperature of the air, in shade, observed at Port Foulke, Smith Strait. November, 1860. | Day of Mean of J the Qh 4 6 8 10 Noon. 2 4 6 8 10 12h | 12 values} il || —ie 0° 0° | =-0°.5/ 0° | 41° | 41° | +0°.5] 02° | —0°.5] —1°.5] —3° | —02.3 2|/—3 | —45 | —4.5 | —1.5 | —2 | —3.5 | —45|)—2 | 41.5] +1 | +0.5 | —1.5 | —2,0 | 39) =—2 | 2a} —4 | A | SSS GS Ss SS 5 || 8) ad | 28 | He | ee Po] a Pe a Sa a en @ |) 13 | 5 | —1.5 | —15 | —2 | —5 | —6.5 | —7 | —7 | —7.5.| —7.5]/—8 I—10 |—12 | —6.3 6|—11 |—8 |—11 (—10 |—lo |—8 |—9 |—9 |—s8 |—9 |—10 |—10 | —9\4 | 7 Ssoc IG) (130 TO |e) eae | Saeg 8 | —3: | —3.51) —3' | —1.51) ol | +4t | aor | por | tor | —at | 441 | 451 | 10.6 SO} 5 | ot | 45h) at fpaae | 7.58) 7.5) ae | tau | 431 | aor | var | a9 § g10 } 2" | 2.5") +21 | —4t | 51 | 61 | —6" | —6.5"| —7.51] —8' | —9! | —9.511 —4.6 | V1 |—12' |—12' | —9.51| —6.5') —5! | 4.51] —5.51/ —5.5!| —5.5!| —4.5t/ —3t | 4.91] 6.5 J 12 | —5.5'| —5' | —51 | —5' | —3.5'| —3) | ---- | +53 | +5 | 44.5] +45 | 44.5] —5.6 | 134.5 | 5 | 5 | +45) +4 | 43 | 135 | +4 | 155 Y | ALG | coco |) L5H | 14a) 8) | 8-5 jad) Oey] 6 ee ee] ea | teal) |) ea | || Seis 15 +5 | +38 | 445) +4 | +4 | 3.5 | 1.5 | 1 | —25 | —3) | 3.5 | 9 +0.5 18 |/'eeos|| cocoa Sues 0 0 0 0 0 O fil) a8 |) 85 || a6 | iy ||/—4A |= | 20s 0 ) 0 O |=—O8 |i | es | ss | —S —1.5 | S19 || 8 |i soos | soeo||—) Jail |] Gi —4 | —3:5 | —8 | —2.5 | —2.5 | —5 88} | 219 |—1 j—12 j—11 | 10.5 |— 10 | —7.5 | —7.5 | —8 | —9 | —9 |—10 " |—10 —9.6 | 220 )—11 J—11 [-12 |—15 [15 |—17 |—17 |—15 |—13 |—12 |-12 |—11.5 |—13.5 | aM i Imo (ell [ns [Ei iO |eno jos fee |e ea O || x6 S22)) Pa | St Fab | 3 | 8.5 | 5 a | 3 | a | ek | SE | 4s |) Bos | OB | SLR | SP RY cs LS | IL 5 fae | 23 | sun 0 +3.8 | g24)—1 |—2 |+2 |—1 | +3 |46 | 438 | 425/42 |4+2 | 42 | 425] +1.8 | A 25 | +2.5 3 3 5 jer (PSI aig | rey eng) ene) ena} +9.7 | 26 |411 | +4! | 47! | +7.5%/4+134 |410 |410 |413 11 | +8 |412 |413 |-+10.0 } 27 | +9 di i410 [410 J413 |417 |425 [422 [421.5 [421.5 |419 |418 |+416.4 | 28 )+20 [421 [427 |432 |425- [427 |498 425 [425 [425 [196 ‘4194 |195.4 | 29 [424 [423 |421.5 [421 |417 |4+15 |417 |4+18 |421 |422 |419 | ----]+119.8 | 30 [+19 17 i417 416 [415 1415.5 [415 [415 [415 [415 [413 [410 |+415.2 | 1 Thermometer No. 6. 5 Thermometer No. 4; used till April 5, 1861. 2 Thernsometer No. 3. 4 Recorded negative; supposed by mistake. December, 1860. 4-9°.5| -=-- |412° |412°.5| +7° | +8° | 49° | 4+9°5|410° | 49° |410° [410° | 4-99, AQ |] tgp PA cass] sly | Belen | a | 2 O. | |jetn | ata O |=6 Jk iene em fap feng ea Ena fee em Say 3) (isp) at |) 2322 Eee) en Ly a on oy is ao] a1 ep fans an Een” Pons Bong (Bon ean ey By Bo (S45 Sia) 174 RECORD AND RESULTS OF Temperature of the air, in shade, observed at Port Foulke, Smith Strait. January, 1861. 10 Noon. 6 10 —21° |—23° —23°.5 ---- —26 |—27 —25 —20° —27 |—30 ‘ —31 —3l1 —28 —29 |—28.5 6 —22 —15 —18 —20 |—20.5 —28 —29 —34 —32 |—32.5 b —16 —22 —25.5 —-17 |—16 , —14.5 —25 —18 —ll |—14 ~5 |—15 —21 —16 —13 =|—11 -5 |—18 |—17 |—16 —24 —20.5 |—19 —17.5 |—17 |—16 —9 ---- —10 |—10 —11.5 |—13 |—14 —13 —16 —14 |—13.5 —18 |—19 |—17 —10 5 |—14 —17 |—19 —18.5 |—19 |—16 |—13 —17 —12 —5 —8.5 —6.5 | —7.5 | —4 —l1 —17 —1l4 |—15 —21 |—20.5 |—20 —21 —22 —28 |—28 —29 |—25 |—23.5 —19 ---- —18 |—18 2 ‘ —25 |-24 |—27 —30 ---- —30 |—30 —25 |—20 |—14 —17 —14 —20 |—21 z 5 |—-24 |—26.5 |—28 —28.5 —32 —32 |—32 : 5 |—30 |—380 |—27 —29 —32 —24 |—25 —26.5 |—25 |—26 —29 —26 |—25 |—25 |—28 3 7.5 |\—28 |—80.5 |—32 —34 —36 |—384 |—38 |—38.5 5 |—39 |—35 |—43? —32 —28 |—24 |—22 |—22 —26 |—28 |—33 —39 —42 |—39 |—35.5 |—25 5 d —23.5 |—25 |—25 —26.5 —27 |—24 |—26 |—25 —28 |—27.5 |—27 —27 —24 |—22.5 |—17 |—17.5 —19 |—20 |—17 —19 5 |—18 |—18 |—20 |—19.5 —23 |—25 |—28 —24.5 —21 |—22 |—24 |—25 —26.5 |—28 |—26 —26 —27 |—26 |—25.5 |—25 —27 |—27 |—25.5 —35 5 |—386 |—383 |—34 |—32 , é —30 |—380 |—27 On the 23d, 10 A. M., mercury in a glass vial froze on the ice in front of the ship. Thermometer No. 9 remained ! stationary at —36°.8 at the observatory. Mercury thawed at 2 A.M. January 24. January 25, Thermometer i | No. 9, mercury froze at —36°.5. February, 1861. PAN QE Si 4 10 2 10 12 by Nod dl 99° —29°.5 =P 7 (ae jae =f 1 1D)” ally SB = 200 ao Loh SO | OR ul | eon, : iy | 998) Sooo |AAG ol} SG) ag} NG [=a OM}. | OX0) =O 020) e190 LEsIG). Jey ay | O96 i} ahs ale) ; 16) «| —28 Oh | NON. | Oy] OE ef EOL iB EBB |= 80 EO OS). oy (BOE) | y ya , 5 eo gt5y | ==119 as secs NG iy E=ORY = OO) ea) LOY) oye BOR eG EO) g 159). |5=03.5) |=-26 : (3 (3) | 28 eo Gi 20 a | == 9 mye (bean eat HS) ail Talos oa =e Lally Sits) 0) ; 6X) || OS 018 oS), es} Seo =O lee a\—35 OR! | 93 EO | PEO) fs |B Be 8 | 2029) ; Oi? 9) Be Se yh Oy ase gl = Seba ole5 8H} LSP) RB By | | By : eo S05, | 28) ‘ —30 |—26 wg 33 35 31 30 1: | f arog 2385 SOB ER BS oe PO Gaia ee Ged |e a |—20.! Ben) on oR eg IE oyS —30 S555 ay : SOND | 29 al==30 —30 soe5 iz) | ia} En ta aire G20 Ey |) eb 6) BS ESOS) ©} | j = TOma at S855 [EN)) ESlg- 5] a8 © EG: Ens |\—16 JCA 7 |} —20 |—20 '—25 |—26 |—20 |—16 |—10 OP al ? 5 |—15 Boo6 —16 17 Ga 75 = 18ns——lg -=a16 eal || =o =H, SEGA ENG Sa ne: aG a8) a9 —21 |-24? |—25? 4 |-16.5 |—17 |—20 | | 9 —18 |—19 desa |-)- Eas A) So. GRE eee) joan i) 9) || — Onn BOA aes O5 ail 25 | EK) SG iy, ER —18 ‘ —14 So 0 February 18,sun seen above the horizon; February 25, 2 P.M., sun shone on deck ; and at 2} P. M., observatory. METEOROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS. 175 Temperature of the air, in shade, observed at Port Foulke, Smith Strait. March, 1861. t) i | Day of : Mean of ; | the Qh 4 6 8 10 Noon. 2 4 6 8 10 12h {12 values} ) mouth, by No. 4. 1 |—16° |—16° |—19° |—23° |—24° |—23° |—21° |—22°.5/—20° |—18° |—14° | —8° |—18°.7 2 —9.5 | —9.5 | —9 —9 —9.5 | —9 —9 —13 —14 —14 —13 —15 —1l1.1} 38 |—14 |—12 |—16 |—15 |—-14 |—12 |—11 |—17 |—14 |—14.5 |—14 |—17 —14.2 } 4 |—22 sooo E983 [19 [MO [19 Jeng Io =o fae ae 5 | SL) 5 |—26 —27 —29 —29 —27.5 |—29 —30 —32 —32 ---- |—33 ---- |—30.1 6 |—35 |—35 |—35 |—32 ---- |—28 |—22.5 |—23.5 |—23.5 |—25.5 |—30 ---- | —29.0} 7 j-25 |—23 (—22 |=24 |—23 |—23 |—18 |[—19 |—21 |—22 —22 |—22.5 | —22.0 | 8 |-23 |—27 |—19 |—13 |—14 |—14.5 |—10 |—13 |—12 |—11.5 |—11 j|—11 —14.9 j 9 |-14 —l4 ---- |—17 —15 —12 —4 —T —9 —10 —12 —15 —12.0 10 |J—11 ----|-15 |—17 |—16 |—15 |—12 |—12 |—10 |—10 —10 |—11 —12.7 | 11 ---- |—14 —10 —12 —13 —13.5 |—10 —11.5 |—14 —15 --15 ---- | —13.0 i 12 |—-16 |—16 |—18 |—15 |—15 |—14 |—13 |—13 |—14 |—15.5 |—16 |—20 —-15.5 jj 13 |-20 |—23 |—25 |—24.5 |—18 |—18 |—12 |—17 |—27 |—28 —31 |—83l --22.9 ! 14 |—31.5 |—34 |—30 |—20 |—25 |—22 |—20 |—21 |—25 |—25 —25 |—28 —25.5 15 |—381 |—32 ---- |—27 |—28 |—26.5 |—16 |—20 |—24 |—25 —-32.5 |--34 —27.1 16 |—85 |—88 |—385 |—32 |—31 |—29 ---- | ---- |—22 |—20 —18 |—28 —28.2 17 |j—20 |—20 |—24 |—25 |—27.5 | ---- |—21! |—-23! |—28.5 30 31 33.5 25.0 } 18 |—384 |—34 |—81 |—16 |—16.5 |—17 |-—-15' (—15.5!| ---- |—23 —27.5 |--17 —21.6 19 |—18 |—19 |—19 |—22 |—20 |—18.5 |—17.5!1—19! |—20 |-—14 —15 |—20 —18.1 | 20 j-21 |—27 |-—14 |—13 |—15 |—15 |—14! ---- |—21.5 |—25 —-25 |--27 —-19.3 | 21 j—29 |—28 ----|-28 |—25 |—22: |-21 |——24'! |—21 ---- |—25 29 —25.0 22 |—31 ---- |—33 |—24.5 |—25 |—26 |—22! |—21.8!/—28 |--31 —31 |--32 —27.6 23 ---- |—30 /|—30 |—30.5 |—28 |—28" |—21' |—20' |—27 |—30.5 |—33 ---- | —27.8| 24 135 |—37 |—38.5 |—384 |—32 |—30' |—26! |—27' |—28 31.5 |-—32 31 31.0 25 |—28 |—22 |—20 |—19.5 |—14 |—11 |—-18! /!—19! ---- |—-22 —25 |—29 —20.1 | 26 |—30 |—32 |—32 |—30 |—30 |—28! |—22' |—16' |—13 |—13 —17 ~+=|-21 —22.9 | f 27 |—24 |—23 ---- |—-12 |—11 |—12 |—10 |-14 —9I —9 —l14 |—10 —13.8 H 628 —9 ---- | —5 —2 —5 —5 —5.5 | —2 —4.5 | —-5 —T —s —5.4 h 629 ----|—11 |—19 |—16 |—12 |—10 --6 --8.8 | —8 —7.5 | —8.5 | ---- | —10.5 f 30 |j—11l |—12 |—12 —9 —8 ---- | —7! —T —6 —7.5 | —9.5 |—16 —9.14 i 3 —19 —22 —21 —17.5 |—11 —10! —6! —l1 —6 —l1 —15 —-17 —12.7 } March 16, 2 P. M., moved the thermometers from the front to the rear of the meteorological box on shore, to protect them from the sun. ' Readings by thermometer No. 3. April, 1861. Day of Mean of 4 | the Qh 4 6 8 10 Noon. 2 4 6 8 10 1Qh 12 values] H month, | by No.13. e621 |--15° |—18° |—22° |—19° |—19°.5|—15°! |—10°5'| - --- |—11° |—15° —l1° |—18° |—18°.4] 62 |-156 |—-17 ---- |—17.5 |--16 |—15.5 |--15.5 |—16°.5|—17 ----|—16 |—18 —20.0 4 a 3 |—-17 ---- |—21 —19 |—23 |—22.5'/--18' |--17 |—20.5 |—18.5 |—21 |—22 —23.5 | 54 |—22 |—23 |—21 ---- |--17 ---- |—12.8'| ---- | =--- |—19 —-22 |—22 —22.0 4 eo | ald) Poses jail ails) —12 |—13? |—12 |—12 |—13 —15 |—16 —15.6 § 26 |—15.5 |—15 |—13 |--10 |—10 |—12.5 |—12.5 |—14 |—15.5 |—15.5 |—19 |—23 —14.6 } R 7 |j-238 |—25 ---- |—-20 |—21 |—21.5 |-20 |—24 |—24 |—23.5 |—23 |—23 —22.5 § aS 25 27.5 25 24 22. |—21 |—20 [|—-21 |-—22 ---- |—23.5 |—25 —23.2 f 29 |-24 |—24 ---- |—20 |—20 |—18.5 |-17.5 |--18.5 |-20 |—19.5 |--19 |—19 —20.2 | 10 |}—20 |—19 ---- |—15 |-—15 |—16 ---- |—18.5 |—21.5 | ---- |—27 |—27 —19.8 § Jl J—26.5 |--27 ----|-26 |—26 |—24 |—21.5 | ---- |—19.5 |—18 —17 +=|—16 —22.4 § 12 |-14 |—14 ---- |-11.5 | --7 6 5 8 10 11 15 17 —10.9 | 13 |—15 —15.5 | ---- 11.5 7 10 10 |—-11 |} -11 —l1 12 |—12 —11.6 14 |-13 |-13 |—13 |--13 |—13 |—11 —l1 —ll1 —11.5 |--12 —-15 —15 —12.6 Te |S eh ea ES a eat) a at) erie} albyctas alts =) alt} —12.7 16 j—16 |—16 ---- |—10 —-8 —9 —T —8 —8 --8 —l1 j|—l1 —10.4 17 |-12 |--12 ---- |—10 —-8 —3 —0.5 | —0.5 | —1 +1 —-2 —3.5 | —5.2 1 || =B | aA Pesce] OF Ween ea ea a seco |) CL a |) epi 19 (ETO |-ER@ |oese | ten I tba eg eh eR I Lf EM] cal —0.3 ) 80 =e Pee Paces | aun Weta Sea ea ee Pe Ef te tbe} 0.9 21 $2.5 | +2 +2 +1.5 0 —1.5 | —3.5 | —5 —6.5 | —8 --8.5 | —9 —2.8 22 --8.5 | —8 ---- | —2.5 | —2.5 | —2.5 | —3 —4 4 —4 --8 —8 —5.0 23 —8.5 | —9 —6.5 | —2.5 2.5 —2.5 4 4 4 —4 --4 —4 —4.6 24 —5.5 | —5.5 | —3 —2 0 +1 +1 0 —0.5 | —4 —4t —5.5 | —2.3: 25 —6 —6.5 | —7 —8.5 | —10 | —9.5 | —9 —9.5 |--10 |—10 —-10.5 |—10.5 | —8.9 26 |—14 (—16 |--13 —9 —6.5 0 —-l —1 —3 ——5.5 | —9.5 —11 —7.5 |i pH | O27 —8 —T —-6 6 6 6.5 6 —6 —6 —6.5 | —7 —T7 —6.5 | f 28 —9 —8§ ---- | —6 —-4.5 | —3 —-3.5 | —5 —6.5 ) —8 --9.5 | —8 —6.5 j | 9) 78 | SB cece || A | 2518 | 203 | © | ea) |) SL |) SLD | ew || alg) 30 Or. | Su | hs | os | ae) Seer | eee | ee: | 4425 |) -4t5 |) a5 | 20 |) =F ato 1 Readings by thermometer No. 3. 2 All the following readings by No. 13; thermometer No. 4 was taken in and No, 13 hung on the portside, i} forward, facing east, and in the shade. 176 RECORD AND RESULTS OF Temperature of the air, in shade, observed at Port Foulke, Smith Strait. — May, 1861. Mean of | Noon. 4 by No.13.4 sae so0 4° 1.5 --- 10.5 12.5 12 23 24 --- ig! 21 25.5 27 34.5 --- 27 --- 31 34 --- --- 38 --- 34 34 33 30 33 21 27 21 19 12 20 10 14.5 17 amc -- 28 -- 22 21 21.5 22, 24 29 30 30 32.5 36 28 37 30.5 2 -- 26 28 é ¢ 27.5 25 23.5 24 : : BE 23.5 17 18 18 : .o 9. 19.5 te} ey) () w bo DODHUH HE RWAWRADNUNDHANADANOARARWE: bo orto bo bo 90 CVO WWwWNWNHNNWNHEH SSE PNOSIAS Sw EPNWNNWNNHHENRP RE RrPNWww PMNADODDMWNWDOOO OOM May 9th, the thermometers on shore were placed in a large box to protect them from the rays of the sun. | | May 23d, thermometers brought on board. ' Recorded by thermometer No. 3. June, 1861. Mean of | H [Qh [12 values f month. by No. 13.4 1s° |419°.6f 18 19.5 | 21 28 21 19 19.5 31 30 31 32 31 30 30 33 35 35 33.5 32 42 38 37 39.5 38 33 38.5 : 0 35 36 35.5 38 ‘ : 35 OMIM PwWYe SSRES PERN HOE He 09 09 02 08 08 G2 0 02 OD 09 HR DNC RD DAOWONHDWHDDHDAHHHADD wrt ' Recorded by No. 3. mga METHOROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS. 77 Temperature of the air, in shade, observed at and near Port Foulke, Smith Strait. July, 1861. Mean of Noon. 12h |12 values by No. 13. 41° p : 38 0 37° |4-38°.7 34 : : 35 36.3 47 3 ‘ 3. : soc |] Gab 39.5 | 39 3. 3. § 32 38.0 49 3. 36 42.4 42 36 41.6 44 44.7 38 39.7 41 43.6 41.2 39.0 49.5 38.3 41.5 42.4 35.8 MWe Howond WP TOUR Bp OO 0 oe Owe we ' Pulled out of Port Foulke. The original record after July 14, noon, is by “sea days,” or astronomical reckon- ing, which is here changed to civil reckoning. Notes to preceding Record. tNovember, 1860. The five readings of the 7th, recorded by No. 7, and the five readings of the 12th, recorded by No. 4, as well as the reading by No. 3, on the 9th, were referred to No. 6 by application of the corrections —10°.3, —11°.7, and —10°.5, respectively. March, 1861. The readings by No. 3 were referred to No. 4 by applying the correction (with sign reversed) as made out from the comparisons. April, 1861. All the readings preceding 2 P. M. on the oth, taken by thermometer No. 4, were referred to No. 13. Daily Mean Temperature of the Air, in shade, observed at Port Foulke. Twelve observations a day, taken at equi-distant intervals, give so nearly the same result as hourly observations (within less than +0°.04) that no further correction is required. The values of the daily mean temperature, given in the table, were obtained by adding the correction for error of graduation to the daily means as set out in the preceding record. * Occasional omissions in the record were supplied by interpolation before any means were taken. As this interpolation was made in the most simple manner, the interpolated values themselves need not be shown. 23 October, 1865. 178 RECORD AND RESULTS OF March. wills June. July. .4/4+16°.1 21.4 21.4 25.5 23.0 22.2, 24.47 '—91°.5 13.1 —16.6 —23.9 — 33.4 = O° PDP Rw OWS ly +21°.3/4+39°.1 21.1 21.4 26.9 29.0 27.0 29.4 29.2 35.3 33.5 34.4 33.9 34.1 + (ey) ° 2) iS SEASON SE RSW SAASANWHMMAW SW OA Wi Ow to % = F969 CHOCO So bo bo DO DO OO Oe oe al Wor =) SH OSC Si ye wet Horwormparmon Rr rNPNNWNRrHNWONDRrFRrFNONWNWNNNNWNWNNWNMHWNHWHk es il 4. 8. 5. 4. 5. 6. 0. 6. 5. 4. °. 0. 4. il 8. 9. 3. 6. 1. 0. 0. 8. 8. 9. 9: 1. lee ele lola tele! WMT ATHOWAMANWSSWON: SCWNWNWOHATNW DWaATSIOWOb wwwwww wk Re SAS SY Co) OG ke 5 DOWD eaATWAIREW OC CD DR OWI ADHONSWORWONNDROSOWSONNANDSs, DNWONWWWNNHNNNFKRNWHNWWwWWwWANmWe bh PN Dee Fae ESC OY WHrEOO aparece |p |e Mean,|+ 22.60 8 . o1/—25. —— OPE +23. +33.85 Annual Fluctuation of the Temperature of the Air. The annual fluctuation of the temperature at Port Foulke is represented by the above monthly means and an interpolated value for the month of August. For the purpose of comparison and interpolation the observed mean temperatures at Van Rensselaer Harbor’ and at Port Kennedy’ are placed together with the correspond- ing values at Port Foulke. The interpolated temperature for August is obtained as follows: August warmer than June at Van Rensselaer Harbor, 1°.70; at Port Kennedy, 1°.84; mean, 1°.77; which, added to the observed temperature of June at Port Foulke, gives 35°.62 for the temperature of August. In the same manner the comparison of the July and August temperature gives August colder than July 4°.77, hence temperature of August 35°.77. Again, the comparisons with Septem- ber give for the preceding month 37°.55, giving to this last value the weight one- half, and to the others the weight one each, the temperature for August becomes 36°.07, all expressed in degrees of Fahrenheit’s scale. 1 Middle of page 29 of discussion of Dr. HE. K. Kane’s Observations. 2 Second table of page 20 of discussion of Sir F. L. M’Clintock’s Observations. METEOROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS. 179 Port Foulke. Van Rensselaer. Port Kennedy. 1860-61. 1853-4-5. 1858-59. = 789 18/ 78° 37! 720 01’ A=73 00 70 53 94 14 January. ; 3 . : ¢ —25°.97 —28°.22 —34°.40 February . j . : ‘ . —24.88 —26.43 —37.08 March ‘ : : : : : — 22.32 —34.88 —18.22 April : : ; ; : : —11.01 —10.35 —2.92 May. : ; ; ; : : 423.77 +13.45 ; +15.04 June. : : 6 : : : + 33.85 +30.12 +35.11 July . : ; : c : : + 40.54 +38.19 +40.12 August . p : 6 : : (4+ 36.07) +31.82 + 36.95 September : : : : : + 22.60 +13.45 +25.43 October . ; : : : : +7.60 ==3558 +7.44 November. : P i ? : +2.84 —21.95 —11.60 December . : : hone ‘ —— esi — 31.12 — 33.63 Syimtiye®. te Ie ger ae nee nen aed —3.19 —10.59 —9.04 Summer . : ; 4 : : (+36.82) +33.38 +37.40 Autumn . : : : : : +11.01 —4.03 +7.09 Winter . P : : 3 : —21.22 —28.59 —35.04 Year. & 4 2 : : : (+5.86) : +1.85 At Port Foulke every month, excepting April, was warmer than the correspond- ing month at Van Rensselaer Harbor, and on the average of the year the tempera- ture was 8°.32 milder than at the latter place, and 4°.01 milder than at Port Kennedy. Port Foulke agrees more nearly with Port Kennedy in not showing the excessive cold spring and cold autumn of Van Rensselaer, but differs most con- spicuously from either by a mild winter. The summer temperatures differ least, as the presence of ice and perpetual snow tends to keep the temperature near the freezing point. The range of the summer and winter mean temperature is 58°.0, at Van Rensselaer Harbor 62°.0, and at Port Kennedy 72°.4. This difference between the extreme seasons is gradually increasing as we proceed northward on the west coast of Greenland, thus— Jacobshaven ‘ 2 . p—69° 12’ difference 41°.6 Omenak . “ ‘ : : 70 41 fe 45.8 Upernavik. : : : : 12 AT a 47.7 Wolstenholm Sound. , : 6) 33 3 66.7 Port Foulke . 4 : : 78 18 a 58.0 Van Rensselaer Harbor . ; 18 37 se 62.0 The difference of Wolstenholm Sound appears to be anomalous and must be accounted for by local influences. To express the observed temperature fluctuations analytically by means of Bessel’s periodic function, requires, strictly, months of equal length, especially when the annual range of temperature is considered. This is effected in the present investi- gation’ by dividing the year into twelve normal months of 30.42 (nearly) days, and 1 In the meteorological discussions for Van Rensselaer Harbor and Port Kennedy an attempt was made to do this by an approximate method, but the following strict process, now pursued, will not be found too laborious, For common years: Retain only 0.42 of January 31 as belonging to that 180 RECORD AND RESULTS OF of 30.5 days for common and leap years respectively. New monthly sums and means were then taken. Tn the formula’ T—A+ B, sin (0+ C) + B, sin (2) + C,) + B, sin (39+ C,)+....- T represents the temperature for any part (month or day) of the year, and the angle § counts from January Ist (0° A. M.) at the rate of 30° a month or 59’.2 and 59’.0 a day for common and leap years. For Port Foulke we have :— T=+6°.064+33°.11 sin (0+242° 14’) +6°.32 sin (29+119° 3’) +0°.74 sin (89+318°) For comparison, the expression for Van Rensselaer Harbor was found :— T= —2°.20 + 35°.59 sin (04+ 251° 43’) +6°.72 sin (204+ 69° 47’) +3°.20 sin (80+ 17°) And for Port Kennedy :— T =+2.02+39°.20 sin (0+249° 05’) +0°.80 sin (29+ 256° 56’)+1°.06 sin (80+ 275°) The observed and computed mean monthly temperatures compare as follows; the months are of equal length, and it will be seen that the temperatures of the actual months differ but little from those of the normal months. Port Foulke, 1860-61. Normal month. Observed Computed Difference temperature. temperature. 0.—C. January . : 5 ; : : —25°. 97 —22°.94 —3°.03 February . F : ‘ ; : — 24.63 —27.90 +3.27 March ; : ; ; ; —22.41 —o}),'¢) +0.38 April ; ; : 9 : : —9.95 —5.25 iia ra tomieh Bile en peep Pea ie hea 424.81 +18.98 June. : ; ‘ 5 : +34.52 +37.43 Eales ee he Tb +40.53 +41.56 August September October November . December . (436.07) +22.50 +17.46 4+-2.96 Sian +33.88 4.29.27 +10.87 —0.72 —12.67 ~ Seasons and year. Spring Summer Autumn —2.52 (+387.04) +10.97 Winter . < ; 3 4 : —21.26 4 Year : : ; ; : ‘ + 6.06 month (and consequently cast over 0.58 of it to February); include with February, March 1, and 0.83 of the second; with March, April 1 and 0.25 of the second; with April, May 1 and 0.67 of the second; with May, June 1 and 0.08 of the second; with June, July 1 and 0.50 of the second; with July 0.92 of August 1; with August 0.33 of September 1; with September 0.75 of October 1; with: October 0.17 of November 1; with November 0.58 of December 1. For leap years: Retain only 0.5 of January 31, casting the other half into February; with February include March 1; with March 0.5 of April 1; with April May 1; with May 0.5 of June 1; with June July 1; with July 0.5 of August 1 (leaving the other half to be counted in with August); with September include 0.5 of October 1; and with November 0.5 of December 1, 1 For a further development of these functions to suit yarious numbers of observations in a cycle, see U. S. Coast Survey Report for 1862, Appendix No, 22, METEOROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS. 181 The average representation of the mean temperature of any one month is +2°.4, and of the mean annual temperature +0°.7. According to the above formula the warmest day is July 15th, temperature +41°.6, and the coldest day February 16th, temperature, —28°.0. The annual mean temperature is reached on April 22d, and November 14th. On the annexed diagram the curve represents the computed annual fluctuation, and the dots the observed mean monthly temperatures. ANNUAL FLUCTUATION OF THE TEMPERATURE OF THE AiR AT Port FouLKE. +469 42 38 34 30 26 pril rm a May January November December January b i oI 3 Lal 2 o & ao} Ss) = Ss 7 dd bays fo} 2 June > July B August = September ~ October GS = = fey The monthly range, that is, the difference of ‘the highest and lowest mean temperature of any day of the month, is greatest in November (41°), and least in July (19°). The lowest temperature recorded (and corrected for index error) was —45°.4 on January 25th, 1861, 6 A. M., and the highest temperature recorded was +61°.0 on July 5th, 1861,2 P.M. On the 28th of July, 1861, at Cape Isabella, in nearly the same latitude as Port Foulke, the temperature rose to +63°.0 at 10 A.M.; the vessel was then among the floe ice.! The extreme range of temperature experienced was therefore 108°.4 of Fahrenheit’s scale ; at Van Rensselaer Harbor the extreme range was 117°.4, and at Port Kennedy 104°.8. The difference in temperature of the atmosphere at Port Foulke and Van Rensse- laer Harbor, due to the cause stated in the introduction to the meteorological part, 1 The minima thermometers (1597 and 1639) were exposed too late in the winter (March Ist) to record the lowest temperature. The maxima thermometers (1705 and 1657) recorded +67°.0 June 22d; but the two instruments differed then 8° in their indications, and their errors of graduation were not determined. No. 1657 broke July 2d, and No. 1705 was not read after July 12, 1861. 182 RECORD AND RESULTS OF we have found to be 84° on the average during the year. In March, 1861, Dr. Hayes visited the harbor, and recorded the following temperatures by thermometer No. 10. March 18th 10 P. M. Temperature —47° Wind N. Force 2 “19th 8 A. M. oS —26 (in sun) Calm aS Asya 9) 1 VE a —48 AWauuntcl NE sya 31st “20th 6 A. M. i —66.5 Sau NG peel Go BOHN C12, WE a —46 ieee Me OS) Pale OBIE st —68 Hie SN Sum “21st Noon “ —50 Ee IN ae) Applying the correction for errors of graduation, we obtain the following com- parisons of temperature. Port Foulke. Van Rensselaer. Difference (R—I’). March 18th 10 P.M. . : 4 : —30°.7 —43°.4 —12°.7 aS IGANG) BNI 0 é : —16.9 —44.4 — 2.5 oe 20th 6 A.M. . 3 6 : —16.4 —62.9 —46.5 a 20th 9 P.M. . R 0 : —28.2 —42.4 —14.2 om 21st 6 A.M. . . 0 a —31.2 —64.4 —33.2 e 21st Noon 3 0 9 2 —25.0 —46.4 —21.4 The average difference on these four days is 26° nearly, and the greatest difference observed, March 20, 6 A. M., is 465°, Van Rensselaer Harbor being so much colder. The greatest cold recorded by Dr. Kane (February 5th, 1854) was —66°.4, which exceeds the above on March 21 A.M., by 2° only; the month of March was decidedly the coldest month according to Dr. Kane’s observations. During the above four days of comparison the wind at Port Foulke was N. E. on the average; at Van Rensselaer Harbor it was N. Diurnal Fluctuation of the Temperature of the Air. Taking monthly means of the observed temperature at each hour of the day, and referring the readings by thermometers No. 7 and 6, in November, to thermometer No. 3 used during the second half of that month, we have the following bi-hourly mean values from which to deduce the diurnal fluctuations. Month. MW fo} fe} he} fo} fo} fe} fo} fo} | fo} | September|+-20.95|-+-21.26/4+-21.42/4-21.60 : 3 .48|-+22.37)4-21.77|4-21.60/-+-21.26 +20.48 October | 45.72) +5.79| +5.57) +6.11 : 5s U5) 47.71), 47.30] --'7.09 | November| -+2.06) +1.98] +2.92) +2.79 nf J) .26| +3.64] +3.87] +-3.54) +3.42 4.2.49 | December | —9.55|—10.43/—10.91|—11.32 76: : .56| —9.69|—10.78|—10.73|—11.36 —10.16 January |—23.47/—23.11/—23.63|—22.66 42, 29,93 | 22. 84| 23.18 —23.09|—23.89| —23.21 —23.11 | February |—23.82/—24.07/—22.95/—21.27|—21.27 aC -11|—21.20)/—21.56]/—21.75/—21.63 —22.75] 4 March —22.29|—29.97|—22.39|—20.24| 19.55 s 4.64/—15.96 —18.10|—19.14] 20.48 —21.78| } April —13.63|—14.07/—12.50|—10.67|—10.02 ; .00| —8.94|-—9.89|—10.55|—12.39 —12.97 | May +18.34)-+20.26 4-21.43|423.62) 4-24.43 .92|+4+24.60|4-24.35|-+-24.00/4-22.19|-4+20.61'4-19.48 | June 430.78 +32.30/433.25 433.85 435.07 .78|-+-36.59|4+35.88/-+35.15|+ 34.08/4-32.57 +31.58) | July steel pact ea pega ce +43.33 .98|4-44.78|-+-44.51/-+.43.18)442.14/1.41.69 +.39.16 a www wb PB Bo ~T-T METHEOROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS. 183 The above figures were next referred to standard thermometcr No. 3, and further corrected for effect of annual change. The diurnal effect of this change was com- puted by the preceding formula for 7, and the daily increase of temperature found as follows :— January . : . —0°.28 July : : . —0°.10 February. : . —0.02 August . : . —0.36 March . 3 - +0.39 Septem ber : . —().39 April ‘ é - +0.77 October . F . —0:39 May 3 : - +0.78 November é . —0.40 June 5 ; a) SP O.Be December : . —0.38 for the middle of each month. Without regard to sign, one-half of these quantities will be the correction for 0 A. M. and 12 P.M.; at noon there is, of course, no correction, and for the intermediate hours the correction is proportional to the interval from noon; the A.M. and P.M. corrections at the same hours are the same, but with signs reversed. An examination of the diurnal fluctuation in July, August, and Senicmben. at Van Rensselaer Harbor and at Port Kennedy, shows that the August value is quite well represented by a mean of the July and Septem- ber values; the August value for Port Foulke has consequently been interpolated by means of the two adjacent months. Diurnal fluctuation of the temperature. (Corrected for errors of graduation of thermometers, and for effect of annual change.) A.M. . M. Month. 4 10 fe} fe} fe} fo} fe} fo} January . . |—26.67|—26.27|—26.81|—25.74|—25.47|—25.24 —25, 86)/— | ee 21'—26.09 —25.84 February. . |—26.96 —27.23|—26.01 24.21] 24.21) 24.01 22.99 24.14 24.53 —24.73 March . |—25.14/—25.90|-25.30/—23,04|22.34|--20.66|—17.03 —18.51] —20.89| 22.04 93.51 24.95 April . . . |-13.74|—14.18|—12,90|—11.38|—10.86| —9.56| —8.76| —9.86|—10.96 —11.65|—13.31|—13.87 May . . . |4-20.28|422.18|423.33|4 25.50/+26.27|4-26.72|+26.33/+26.01|+25.58 +-23.67/4+-21.98| June . 432.41|4 33.78|4-34.64|-4-35.18|+-36.30|4 36.82|437.40|4-36.85|4-36.23 35.21 July. +39.48|-+-39.80|+-40.15|-+-41.68|-4 42.52|-+-42.26 4-43. 68\4.43.45|4-42. 44 ee (August) . . |430.58|-4-30.92|4-31.21| +32.11|-4-32.59|432.73 433.61|4-33.46|+ 32. 69/-1-32.23 September. |4-21.79|+-22.13|+22.32| 4 22.54|-4-22.70|4-93.19|4+-23.51/4+-23.43 4-22. 87)+.22.73 October . . | +6.56| 46.66] +6.47| +-7.05| +7-81| 4+-8.53| +8.80| +8.77| +8.40| +8.22| November . | +1.90| $1.85] +2.82| 42.73] +2.95] 4.3.22] 43.29] 43.70] +:3.97| 43.67 December « |—11.56)—12,84) 13.00) —13.41 12.76] —12.63 —12.48| —11.60|—12.65 12.57 13.23, 11.89 If we subtract from each value the respective monthly mean, the residuals will represent the diurnal fluctuation proper, a + sign indic temperature than the mean of the day. The last two lines show the diurnal fluctuation for Van Rensselaer and Port Kennedy for comparison. a 5 © 184 RECORD AND RESULTS OF Qn Noon. 2 January . . |—0°.64 -78|+0°.29 -56 |-++0°°79|+.0°.17 —0°.01} February - | —2.01 +0.74 b +0.94 | +1.96 —0.83 | March. . —2.70 —0.60 b +1.78 | +5.41 —2.52 4 April . —1.99 +0.37 -89 | +2.19 | +2.99 —2.12] May . - | —3.77 +1.45 22 | +2.67 | +2.28 : —3.31 june; = —2.70 +0.07 -19 | +1.71 | +2.29 —2.31 July . . .|—2.01 +0.19 d +0.77 | +2.19 b B —2.07} j August . —1.47 +0.06 5 +0.68 | +1.56 —1.45 September —0.81 —0.06 b +0.59 | +0.91 —0.92} October . . |—1.08 —0.59 b +0.89 | +1.16 —0.57 November . |—1.13 —0.30 ; +0.19 | +0.26 —0.34 December. . | +0.98 —0.87 .22 | —0.09 | +0.06 10.65 | Spring. . . |—2.82 +0.41 A 2.21 : —2.65 | Summer . . | —2.06 +0.11 , 5 i F i —1.94} Autumn . . |—1.01 —0.32 i 3 b L —0.61 | Winter . . | —0.56 +0.05 Lb bile —0.06} | P. F. Year . |—1.61 +0.06 : . ; —1.32| | v.R. Year . |—1.74 +0.17| +1. ; ' —1.64] | P.K. Year . | —1.87 4.0.25 | 11. De 308 —1.87] The diurnal variation, on the average during a year, as deduced for Port Foulke and Van Rensselaer Harbor, shows a remarkable accordance for these localities ; the range at the former place is a little smaller than at the latter, viz: 3°.38 and 3°.64, which is due to the equalizing effect of open water. The warmest and coldest observing hours are 2 P.M. and 2 A.M. The range at Port Kennedy is a little greater than the above, 4°.12, on account of its smaller latitude. ‘The spring, summer, autumn, and winter ranges at Port Foulke were as follows: 6°.88, 4°.07, 1°.89, and 1°.67, respectively. In the month of December, when the sun is most depressed below the horizon, the diurnal variation becomes less regular, and approaches towards vanishing altogether. Annual Inequality of the Diurnal Fluctuation of the Temperature. The annual inequality is best exhibited by the monthly mean values of the diurnal range; these values for Port Foulke, Van Rensselaer Harbor, and Port Kennedy, are as follows :— Daily range of temperature. Port Foulke. Van R. Port Ken. Port Foulke. Van R. Port Ken. January, 1°.43 1°.55 1°.41 | July, 4°.26 Broa 6°.97 February, 4.24 3.07 1.49 August, 38.03 5.30 2.63 March, 8.87 5.66 9.55 September, 1.83 5.55 2.94 April, 5.42 9.09 7.42 October, 2.94 1.67 2.18 May, 6.44 7.34 7.94 November, 1.55 1.00 2.17 June, 4.99 5.10 9.60 December, 0.18 1.65 0.84 This table exhibits more strikingly the difference in the climate of the two locali- ties which at Port Foulke is the more equable. ‘To obtain the November and December range, which is marked by the accidental irregularities of the tempera- ture, an average value near the hours of maxima and minima has been used. METEOROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS. 185 ANNUAL INEQUALITY IN THE DIURNAL AMPLITUDE OF THE TEMPERATURE AT Port FouLkKeE, 99° 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 am mow mb aS oo = a 2aSaaeR seda so2558 8 BRE SS bas SES & Ela Ge) ener Ele er ia BHAT ERhANROGAS . The daily range is greatest in spring, in March it attains its maximum value, then falling a little and rising again in May, it diminishes till December, when it reaches its minimum value. The great rise in spring is due to the immediate effect of the sun before it has power enough to melt a sufficient quantity of ice to check it. The small depression of the curve, in the spring and early summer, and shown by the three localities discussed, is most likely due to the increasing vapor. A more full material for discussion would probably bring out a small increase in the range late in summer or early in autumn, at a time when the freezing process again comes into powerful action. Of such an increase we have at present only a trace. In the following expression of the diurnal fluctuation during the whole year, the angle @ counts from midnight at the rate of 15° an hour. ‘To this expression those for the other localities were added for comparison. Port Foulke, ¢=-+1°.57 sin (9 + 235° 8’) + 0°.02 sin (20 + 195°) + 09.11 sin (89 + 148°) Van Rensselaer, = + 1.85 sin (0 + 24455) + 0.08 sin (20+ 97 ) + 0.03 sin (30 + 308 ) Port Kennedy, ¢= +4 2.02 sin (0 + 252 57) + 0.25 sin (20+ 117 ) + 0.09 sin (30 + 251 ) The probable error of any single representation, for Port Foulke, is £0°.08. DivgNat Fuucrvation oF THE TEMPERATURE. Mean ANNUAL VALUE. OS 4 4 8 10 Noon According to the formula the temperature rises till 2 P. M., when it attains its greatest value; it reaches its lowest value at 25 A. M., and its average value about 8 A.M. and 8 P.M. 24 November, 1865. 186 RECORD AND RESULTS OF Supposed Dependence of the Winter Temperature on the Lunar Phases. The supposed lower temperature about the time of full moon when compared with that about new moon, during mid-winter, noticed by some Arctic explorers, and which received confirmation from observations during two winters at Van Rensselaer Harbor, and partial confirmation from observations during two winters in Baffin Bay and at Port Kennedy, is not sustained by the observations at Port Foulke, as may be seen from the following collection of mean daily temperatures, each the mean of five days, two of which precede and two of which follow the lunar phase ; to allow for the annual change of temperature the alternate means are set out. ‘These alternate mean temperatures, and the observed temperatures, are then compared by subtracting the temperature at the new moon from that at full moon ; a negative sign indicates greater cold at full than at new moon. Observed Alternate Difference temperature. means. October 29, 1860 5 : ; : é 0 ONT November 13, ‘ : : ; : : +4.5 November 28, , ; : ; : ol Uris) December 12, : : : ; : —19.0 December 28, ; : j : ; —18.0 January 11, j ; : : . ind January 26, : : ; 6 ; —28. February 9, 5 5 E : P —25.7 February 25, : 6 é : : —21.2 March 11, : : ‘5 : : —17.6 March 26, ; ; 5 : j —21.3 April 10, : ; : : : —18.2 April 24) ; 3 : : —6.2 May 9; ; ; é ; c + 28.4 | & [o) lee liste lela bo bo Oo bo NO Are Re wDMon — pan Cc ho DoTp PP bd Tey fseeet | FIRS CONC) S28 OS OOH Co HR oH OO OO a + Or O D O O @ O a O O O @ O ® If we take the differences from the middle of December to the end of March, the temperature would appear 2°.5 colder at full than at new moon; the high tem- perature about November 28, and the low temperature about December 12, how- ever, are such strong contradictions to the supposed law, as to deprive the results collected by the expedition of any decisive value. About November 28, the pre- vailing wind was S. W., charged with heat and vapor from the open water spaces of North Baffin Bay; about December 12, the prevailing wind was N. E. Neither Port Foulke nor Port Kennedy are favorably situated for the experimental study of the phenomenon. Relation of the Atmospheric Temperature to the Direction of the Wind. The method pursued to ascertain the elevating or the depressing influence of the various winds on the temperature of the air, is as follows: The average daily tem- perature for each day of the year was computed by means of the expression for 7, this was readily done by the use of the formula for a number of equi-distant inter- vals, and by the application of the principle of interpolation “into the middle” (which secures the proper value to third differences inclusive). The previously used correction for graduation of thermometers was next applied with sign reversed so as METEOROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS. 187 to give the daily normal reading for comparison with the actual reading on that day as observed. For the hours 8 A. M. and 8 P. M. this comparison is strict since the diurnal fluctuation at these hours is nil; but for the comparisons of 2 A.M. and 2 P. M. a new set of tables of normal temperatures weye constructed by applying the correction for maximum diurnal fluctuation at these hours to our first table of nor- mals. We thus have four comparisons, at equal intervals, four observations each day; these differences of temperature were tabulated and inserted in the proper column for the direction of the wind then observed. There were nine such columns, one for each of the eight principal directions and one for calms. The mean differ- ence for each wind, for a period extending over a season, very nearly indicates the elevating or depressing influence of each wind. A + sign indicates warmer, a — sign colder temperature than the normal. An extension of this investigation to twelve hours a day would only add to the labor without materially affecting the result. By the process adopted the influence of the wind will be found independent of the annual and diurnal fluctuation of temperature, and any possible tendency of the wind to blow from a certain direction at the same time each day can be taken into account. The results for the hours 2 A. M., 8 A.M., 2 P.M., and 8 P.M., do not mate- rially differ; thus for the N. E. wind we find at these hours —1°.9, —2°.1, —1°.7, and —1°.8 respectively, and for the warmer S. W. wind at the same hours, +2°.6, POS, =P Os enndl Oe As there are but few entries of winds from the north, east, south, west, and north- west, the results were contracted in two means, one for the winter half of the year (October to March inclusive), the other for the summer half (April to September inclusive). The blanks in the table indicate too few observations to give any reliable result ; numbers between brackets are of little value. Elevating (+) or depressing (—) effect of the winds on the temperature of the air. N. N. E. E. 8. E. | Winter half year . | +2°.5 | —1°.6 | ---- | +3°.5 Summer ‘“ . | —0.2 | —2.2 | ----| —0.3 ; \Stemp c.g | ELS PSG [ESI@ |) supe (eceainy) ee) (Clee e8) Number of entries 36 637 T 49 1 11 Hf The northeast and east winds are cold winds, the southeast, south, southwest (and probably west also) are warm winds; calms depress the temperature. The northeast wind is cold all the year round, and the southwest is warm, particularly in the winter; during winter calms are accompanied by a lower temperature; during summer by a high temperature, in opposition to the winds. The distribution of the winds is very irregular; the prevailing wind, northeast, blows longer than all the other winds together, in which time that of the calms may also be included. If we take for the effect of south and west winds the mean of the effect of the adjacent winds, and subtract 0°.5 from all numbers, we find the values given below. 188 RECORD AND RESULTS OF Port Foulke Van Rensselaer $= 78° 18/ $ = 789 37! a=73 00 True direction of wind. : +0°.8 E. —2.4 —1.6 E. +1.9 +1.3 WwW. +0.7 WwW —0.1 N. —0.8 We have, therefore, for comparison the following expressions’ :-— Port Foulke . . . . ¢=+ 192 sin (6 + 249°) + 19.2 sin (26 + 126°) Van Rensselaer Harbor . . c=+ 1.0 sin (6 + 286 )+ 0.3 sin (26+ 335 ) Baffin Bay (9 = 72°.5, 2 = 659.8) ce = + 1.5 sin (6 + 338 )+ 0.8 sin (204178 ) Port Kennedy . ; ; . r=+ 0.9 sin (6+ 320 )+ 0.4 sin Q0+ 26 ) The angle @ counts from the north (or belongs to a true north wind) in the direction east, south, etc. Effect of a fall of Snow (or Rain) on the Temperature. The effect produced by the change of latent into sensible heat, during the pre- cipitation of snow (or rain), is far greater than the effect of the variation in the direction of the winds. At Port Foulke it snowed on 94 days in eleven months; the total number of hours of precipitation during this time was 656. It rained on 15 days in June, and July, and November; total number of hours 79. This is considerably more snow and rain than at Van Rensselaer Harbor, where Dr. Kane noted snow during 680 hours, and rain during 60 hours, in seventeen months. The snowy and rainy days are distributed over the year as follows :— In September . j ae 0 In March. 8 “« October : : a LO ovAyorilles. 8 “November . : 5 = IY “ May 9 ‘ouDecember=. . ec “« June 16 “ January : . a eS “ July 13 “ February. ; Ba a yl The elevating effect on the winter temperature is as decidedly brought out as the depressing effect on the summer temperature ; the former, however, is six times as great as the latter. If we compare the observed temperature (at the hours 2 A. M. and P.M., and 8 A.M. and P.M.) with the corresponding normal temperature during each fall of snow (or rain) according to the method pursued-in the preceding investigation, we find from 85 cases in the winter half of the year (October to March inclusive) the elevating effect on the average = 8°.6, and from 86 cases in the summer half of the year (April to September) the depressing effect on the average 1°.5; during the whole period, therefore (in 11 months), the average effect was +3,°5; at Van Rensselaer Harbor the corresponding quantity was 47°.7. 1 See p. 30 of reduction of Sir F, L. McClintock’s Meteorological Observations, METEOROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS. 189 The maximum elevating effect in winter amounted to 36° (November 28, 1860), and the maximum depressing effect in summer to 9° (July 25, 1861). This annual variation is well shown in the table given for Van Rensselaer Har- bor, where the maximum effect was on the average in January +19°, and the opposite effect on the average in June —1°.3, and is, indeed, a most marked feature at either locality. 2 Effect of Clear and Cloudy Weather on the Temperature. To ascertain the effect upon the temperature of a serene and cloudy atmosphere, the temperature observed on clear days (or at least three-quarters clear), and on cloudy days (or at least three-quarters cloudy), was compared with the normal temp- erature of the day; a + difference indicates warmer, a — difference a colder day than the normal; for this investigation the year was again divided into two seasons. The clear days preponderate in the winter season, the cloudy days in the summer season; thus in December 18 4 January there are 4 19 clear days, and but | 1 cloudy days, and in June and February NG 1 July there are 4 and 8 clear days, and 16 and 15 cloudy days, In winter (October to March inclusive) on the average from 82 clear days the temperature was ower 3°.5 than the normal, and in summer (April to September inclusive) on the average from 41 clear days the temperature was higher 0°.8 than the normal; a clear atmosphere consequently produces opposite effects in the sum- mer and winter seasons. In winter on the average from 31 cloudy days the temperature was higher 7°.0, and in summer on the average from 48 days it was lower 2°.1 than the normal value. The explanation of these results is obvious: In winter, under a clear sky, radiation soon lowers the temperature, whereas a clear sky in summer by permitting greater insolation, ~vill increase the temperature. In cloudy weather in winter, radiation is stopped, and with an atmosphere nearly or quite saturated with moisture the temperature must rise ; in summer insolation is prevented, and consequently the temperature will remain lower than its normal value. . 190 RECORD AND RESULTS OF Observations of the Direct Heating Power of the Sun. For the measure of the direct heating effect of the sun, two black bulb thermome- ters were exposed on the floe near the ship. B. B. thermometers, Nos. 1648 and 1704. Temperature in sun, at Port Foulke. 1648. 1704. 1861. Feb’y 26th | —17°.5 | —15°.5 | at 23 P. M. 4 27th | —18.0 | —17.5 ie ne em2Zethe | —— loro eli liaso) eared March 4th | —16 at 23 P.M., —18° at 3 P.M. as 6th | —22 — il at 2 P.M., —23°.5 and —21° at 3 P. M. 0 ith | —19 —18 atieomees Me af 8th | —11.5 | —10 at 3 P.M., —12° and —10° at 4 P. M. a6 thi —5 at 3 P.M:, —9.5 and —8° at 4 P.M. a 11th —9I —4 ie oO 12th | — 112 —— lel at 3 P.M., —12.5 and —12.5 at 5 P.M. 0 isthe —— 16 —l4 at 5 P.M. OB Meta |) OP —20.6 | at 3 P.M., —22 and —20.5 at 5 P.M 6 5 the|) 22 —18 ey. &) 1B Gun —2 at 3 P. M., and —3° at 5 BP: M. “ 17th le3] G m2 cl +7 at 3 P/M, and —[-5 at 5 Pom: GS) pyal +1 at 1 P.M., +3° at 3 P.M., +2° at 5 P. M. Ge eka +] ay 12, ING ea ens IE IE, KS} ei &) 1B, INL, “26th hi) ane ib IN, OS) ep 3 12 WL, Sens & IP, IML. SS ee2oth +6 at 1P.M., +6 at 3 P.M., —1.5 at 5 P. M. “ 30th —5 |at 1P.M.,—25at3P.M SO siist +14 at 1P.M., +4 at 3 P.M April 1st +8 at 1P.M., +8 at3 P.M sf 3d —10 at 1 P. M., —5 at:3 P. M., 0° at 5 P. of. 4th +21 at 3 P.M., —5 at 7 P. M. sf 8th —l1 at 1 RP Me 13 1at'3) Bove ss 9th —12 at 1 P.M., —5 at5 P.M. «12th +14 at 5 P.M. Ce BAN i at 3 P.M. tf 14th —6 aby dP SMe 9) at?3) PM ee 15th +1 at 3 P.M. -esGth +3 at 11 A. M. Bo ilo —5 at 11 A. M. as 18th +13 at 11 A.M., +18 at 1 P.M. Snow melting on side of ship. 20th +10 at 11 A. M., +23 at 1 P. M. of +19 at 3 P.M. | =a atiOMe. Me Ga Ae +17 at 1P.M., +13 at 3 P.M., +9 at 5 P.M. t Ber Deyo +2 at 9 A.M. +21 at 11 A.M.,4+18at1P.M.,+5at3P.M.{ oy 26th +12 at 9 A. ve 3 +28 tf IS) es By | ao Fite +6.5 }at 1P.M., +5 at3P.M., +4 at 5 P.M. 0 at 7 P.M. Ge) ASHE) +5 at 11 A.M., +8 at 1 P. M., +5.5 at 3 P. M. iy 29th +10 at 3 P. M. ey OWA +13 at 11 A.M., +17 at 1 P.M., +18 at 83 P. M. May Ist +15 at 9 A.M. Te 1 P.M. 3P.M., 5P.M., +13.5 at 7 P.M. }- ‘ 2d +8 at 11 A. M., 5 P.M, 413 at 7 P. M. ; ee 3d +25 at 11 A. Mu +24 at 1 P. M., +22 at 3 P: M. a 5th +20 at 9 A. M.. +29 at 11 A. M., 424 at1P.M., 3 P. M. +25 at 5 P. M. a 6th +35 at 1P.M,3P.M., +35.5at5 P.M., +31 at 7 P.M. * uf Tth +30 at 11 A. M., +34 at 1 P. M., +32 at 3 P. M. The above observations were made in clear weather. METEOROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS. 191 Observations of Temperature made by Dr. Hayes on his Journey to the Northward,in April and May, 1861. On this journey Dr. Hayes reached his extreme northern latitude, at Cape Lieber, of 81° 37’, in longitude 694° west of Greenwich, on the 18th of May. The follow- ing temperatures were recorded by him :— May Scouse Camp, No Hut Camp, imipe Camp, Near Cape Hawks, Cape Hawks Camp, Near Cape Hawks, ¢ = 719° 29 ~=72 53 o=19° 44/ rae OG Near Cape L. Napoleon, OG 6c be Foggy Comp. Near Frazer Camp, Frazer Camp, bc 6“ Tired dog’s Camp, Jensen’s Camp, “ce 73 ag ca 1 Recorded by G. F. Knorr, during Dr. Hayes’ absence. ~ = 79° 56’ n=T1 28 = 80° 06/ » = 80° 48/ @ = 79° 58’ at “cc tole PS Ub Wot PTRARTIOHS as tole lol Wb ib — | or ere: or) tole toletol= PRE fo} fe) =] > a [) fo) =) SCHOPB MOROMOFRB OROCHNDW == “s Ky = In sun +28° oc “ +27 +193 +47 +44 +36° in sun +50 “ +18 ““ +36, « +58insun. Light south wind +30° Fog In sun 38° a3 be 48 42 49 bc (73 Fog In sun 36° “a (73 40 Fog Snow Wind and snow throughout the day Wind and snow Weather thick, strong N.W. wind; light’ snow Light S. W. wind, cloudy; light snow 192 RECORD AND RESULTS, ETC. Near Deep Snow Camp, ¢ =79° 55/ Temp. +22 | Cloudy; snowing. ce “ce Camp Hawks, p= 79° 44/ Light N. W. wind; cloudy +19° in sun +32 +429 ~=13 06 wl Near Smallberg Camp, ¢ = 79° 33/ 73 bc 6“ = 42, 53 blF Pele wi> bd Near Broken Sledge Camp, 6c “ce 3 = 79° 04/ a= 72 e=i8 a=72 Near Potato Camp, and near Camp Separation, 6c “ec tole ARDOAHRBIAANDSD we x To complete the record of the weather during the above period, the following note is added: — 1861. April 21. Near Cairn Point. Storm stayed April 24. | “ The following table contains the mean daily temperature in the shade derived from the above by application of the known average value of the diurnal variation taken from the table p. 39 of my discussion of the temperature observations at Van Rensselaer Harbor, and the preceding table of the diurnal fluctuation at Port Foulke, after changing sign in the latter. Date. 5 0 Mean temperature|Port Foulke, mean 1861. May. Locality and latitude. of dae temp. of day. 5 Scouse Camp, ¢ = 719° 297 No i +14°.6 6 us i +6.2 = 93.2 7 No Hut Camp, +8.9 +22.5 8 Pipe Camp, +17.6 +27.9 9 ef bi ----- +29.3 10 Near Camp Hawks, = ---- +32.0 11 Cape Hawks Camp, o = 79° 44’ +15.2 +30.0 12 Near Cape Hawks, +13.5 +33.6 13 Foggy Camp, =19 66 +19.0 +35.8 14 Frazer Camp, e=80 06 +23.4 +33.5 15 Tired dog’s Camp, +22.6 +33.2 16 Jensen’s Camp, ~=80 48 +23.1 +32.0 17 06 G + 23.2 $27.3 18 is cs +16.6 +20.4 19 * Bik +14.5 +16.9 20 Camp Leidy, o = 719° 58’ +15.2 +16.8 21 Near Deep Snow Camp, @=79 55 +10.1 +20.9 292 Camp Hawks, eo=719 44 +8.5 22.2 23 Near Smallberg Camp, o=19 83 +16.2 +20.9 24 Near Broken Sledge Camp, 4+-15.0 +24.1 25 Near Camp Separation, @=78 53 +20.0 +24.9 26 we ag ce +13.0 +30.6 On the average, therefore, it was 10°.7 colder on the route across Smith Sound, and up the west coast of Kennedy Channel, that at Port Foulke. At Jensen’s Camp, where we have observations on four days, it was on the average 4°.8 colder than at Port Foulke; the difference of latitude of these places is 2° 30’. ATMOSPHERIC. PRESSURE. THE atmospheric pressure was observed by means of a mercurial barometer sus- pended on board the schooner; its index error, if any, is not known. ‘The readings are given in English inches, and those of the attached thermometer in degrees of Fahrenheit. . The observations here recorded commence with September 1, 1860, and extend to August 1, 1861; the record is nearly complete for the hours 8, 10, noon, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, P. M., but for midnight and the morning hours 2, 4, 6, it is defective, and in April, May, and June, observations at these hours are altogether wanting. For the reduction of the readings to the temperature of freezing water, Table XVII, C, of Guyot’s Meteorological and Physical Tables (Smithsonian Miscellaneous Collection) was employed. The approximate reduction of the readings of the barometer to the level of the sea is +0.006 inches. ( 193 ) 25 November, 1865. 194 RECORD AND RESULTS OF Readings of the barometer and attached ‘thermometer near and at Port Foulke, Smith Strait. September, 1860. 292.95 2917.56 29" 76 29.70 10 29875 Noon 29.75 | 55° | | Means of f 30 values 29.790 29.773 Barometer below deck. ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE. 195 Readings of the barometer and attached thermometer near and at Port Foulke, Smith Strait. September, 1860. 2h 8 19 Midnight 299.45 290.75 29%.'75 29".75 | 68° | 29.75 29755 | Means of 99 440 | 60, 1 | 29.776 ¥ 30 values) 1 Barometer placed on deck. 196 RECORD AND RESULTS OF Readings of the barometer and attached thermometer at Port Foulke, Smith Strait. October, 1860. Qh 10 Noon 292 66 .88 .98 87 13 29%".72 82 30.04 29.88 30.00 2.9'7.55 2917.55 293". 55 28.917 | 29.420 | 670 | .5d0 .530 444 3879 476 154 176 170 2932555 # Mean of p ol values 29.624 29.628 29.631 ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE. MS) T) Readings of the barometer and attached thermometer at Port Foulke, Smith Strait. October, 1860. ls) Ry a ° cs oe =a co PAN 10 Midnight. 29.60 OMTADOPS COL 297.60 29.65 84 29.65 29™.70 |2 2969 85 .98 84 15 30.20 O1 f Mean of | 9 ‘ 31 values} 29.631 29.638 29.639 198 RECORD AND RESULTS OF Readings of the barometer and attached thermometer at Port Foulke, Smith Strait. November, 1860. [Day of the — month. 10 Noon 29.678] 2 297". 652) 2 291.600) 28° } .688 | 2 Tod | Qe -800 | 23 30.036 30.036 | 2é 30.036 | 28 112 120 | 2: .120 206 .208 208 108 | 2 .108 .086 29.772 29.772 29.772 80.100 80.150 | : 30.186 29.952 29.904 | : 29.908 30.478 80.550 | é 80.572 728 726 118 522 .500 | : 478 -456 448 | 3! 312 152 116 .090 29.972 29.956 | 2 29.932 112 | 2 742 -100 -628 .636 700 -820 844 .852 -812 -810 800 .830 852 .900 80.074 80.046 30.092 29.950 29.946 29.876 926 .984 50.006 972 30.000 30.700 724 --- --- --- 632 -086 30.146 30. 066 30™.084 074 104 --- --- --- 202 206 .308 246 29.924 a Sr OO OAD LP COD eS — bk ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE 199 Readings of the barometer and attached thermometer at Port Foulke, Smith Strait. November, 1860. 4 10 Midnight. 297.576 | .818 30.036 124 232 .058 29.772 30.188 29.950 30.638 22 ATA BIO | 090. 29.928 694 750 .900 824 912 30.192 29.812 30.000 154 .730 456 mle 212 .132 29.980 297". 582 29.978 297.610 .950 30.046 124 249 .000 29.772 30.158 .100 -692 -108 452 .802 098 29.878 .658 .800 .858 .800 922 30.184 29.838 30.038 929 crs, 744 856 .200 .236 076 29.976 29.628 962 30.056 .106 .258 -000 29.750 30.064 154 .698 674 428 800 074 29.870 650 .800 870 .818 .952 30.180 29.824 30.024 312 152 276 .200 236 .002 29.978 29.636 30.154 | Means | 30.095 30.093 | 5 | 30-101 | 3 30.096 30.094 | 28.5 200 RECORD AND RESULTS OF Readings of the barometer and attached thermometer at Port Foulke, Smith Strait. December, 1860. 29.865 10 Noon 295" 838 29". 836 30.268 307.216 A87 162 29.824 eielel -810 104 183 104 -676 -863 30.298 321 -000 29.889 676 127 30.145 .192 311 735 .099 -424 496 -T40 642 413 04 .140 29.749 910 30.297 ATA .106 29.785 712 178 TTA 802 atl 674 .896 80.250 257 .016 29.871 612 -T49 80.133 168 | 803 702 634 -400 450 172 488 3892 864 .082 29.726 872 307.299 AT2 062 29.745 114 -786 -TT4 806 718 744 -963 30.274 229 .038 29.815 046 152 50.038 -162 386 672 -691 002 -0D2 - 786 493 -390 3873 098 | Means 30.118 | 53.4 30.105 | 53.1 ' Barometer brought below and hung in the companion-way. ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE. 201 Readings of the barometer and attached thermometer at Port Foulke, Smith Strait. December, 1860. gh 10 Midnight. 30.312 ° 130.324 30.346 | 42° |30.352 30.368 456 432 -453 -416 .360 --- 078 .065 .008 29.986 29.945 2.9%". 895 29.736 29.728 29.742 | 3f 122 122 --- 718 124 149 152 162 195 176 148 -750 196 . t 148 132 844 : 812 172 .685 : -760 742, 817 : .836 817 30.010 ; 30.092 30.128 820 : 898 .169 : 100 .040 : 057 29.882 ; 29.882 469 E 265 -806 : 894 30.096 ; 30.064 143 : 104 088 : .684 6138 : 049 684 6 676 270 : 212 -965 3 648 .819 452 443 872 29.985 750 -740 Means | 30.116 ott || BOs .4 | 30.109 26 Wovember, 1865. RECORD AND RESULTS OF Readings of the barometer and attached thermometer at Port Foulke, Smith Strait. January, 1861. Qh 4 29.522 ; \ 29.513 29.516 10 Noon 29™.556| 68° |29.549 29.563 29.939 | 67.3 | 29.938 ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE. 203 Readings of the barometer and attached thermometer at Port Foulke, Smith Strait. January, 1861. 6 Midnight 29.7606 443 512 878 .976 984 -620 30.268 29.886 .830 80.450 29.946 .266 .562 148 30.256 000 -364 .284 025 110 29.601 438 O12 .968 956 .965 632 30.274 29.850 .988 30.472 29.848 29.624 442 .990 30.012 29.900 973 -666 30.250 29.812 -961 30.516 29.778 .268 -600 926 30.345 .520 318 292 -082 -064 .182 .060 29.944 176 622 30.028 .032 29.944 929 30.084 29'".536 -436 -608 80.028 29.890 968 -160 30.250 29.806 30.042 494 29.718 294 620 66.°5 68 66.5 29™ 420 -610 80.054 29.868 924 824 30.236 29.788 30.036 472 29.700 .282 684 978 30.424 .o16 300 -320 29.984 30.076 .164 .012 29.950 158 662 30.076 29.946 874 946 30.052 297.886 29.932 70.3 | 29.956 29.953 29.951 204 RECORD AND RESULTS OF Readings of the barometer and attached thermometer at Port Foulke, Smith Strait. February, 1861. tet oa a Qh 4 6 8 10 Noon Vo feose 2) We ee DES ee bomisiGll 6s \29 Gol ae) o G40 70 | Pe eee ee ire as ea ee ye oat 824 | 75 Ole | pone en Meee eae OO SS Taine Tie IONE | Te... XO. 1S || ne eae ee sce ona eel aie mei csees ts. eC Ok .062| 64 | 29.968 | 67 5 29.980] 720 |29'.992) 65° [29m 974! 58° | 29.988 | 64 .026| 71 | 30.052 | 70 Ho eee ee clea ae eRe ine) Ob eee TS) | 20.648 | Go ip ooo See Ses Sse SESS Le CnT Gd 6 | KOOASG) | 20.014 | oF Bib | Seay | RECO ERE Se COOP EE) | Oa onTGo: loa oaragsO0ll TON Teecreltell wil OF fee 2) PR lee OSE Ee Meee) EE Lalas oil a 900 | 73 782 | 70 10 --- --- --- --- --- --- .168 | 75 -100 | 75 -088 | 70 Ty Se ee OE Tae aes Ou ioiinalee dene)! 60 648 | 58 12 | 29.884|57 | 29.900]50 | 30.002] 45 |30.048/50 |30.098|60 | 30.126 | 59 Bae eel Sea ee seh yor al ees COR ate 262 | 64 256 | 66 U4 Ee ES PRON 9 501) 41. 5)"29 898) | Colao seer Ce Teche eA lcoe WoOa ee ass] Soon las eno | Ge) | 60.020 | 70 16 =-- --- --- --- --- --- .870 | 45 29.914 | 53 29.924 | 66 Ties) Pee Neeru seas a nai aulfnmume Us| ALGINAL ch 940 | 65 922 | 68 US |S SMe ASS 2 eral tere) i Ime gO) Wem calms Oper lie 930] 70 | 19 | 29.894 | 61.5 | 29.850| 57 | 29.808 | 54 750 | 67 118 | 66 100 | 69.5 | BO, A SN 00 OOS 20 HIE Oe Go) Nomeoe lhe Fete) MOO 108/72 | Sn PE Nc eee Ne St Reon tes 824/62 | .904| 60 OP NERS RoR ee heen |) Soe oes (RUDI GD | R000 186.8 | B0008 | Ge DB a MAIN a2 2) NE Se 22 | ORE ORs onilo) idea aime = 10 |e el RRO glia) 24 --- |---| --- )---f --- | --- | 29.878 | 74.5 | 29.840] 66 | 29.838 | 73.5 | 25 --- |---| --- |---| --- |---| 688/625] 668/745] .650) 74.5 | 26 --- --- ane BS --- --- 464 | 49 .026 | 69 .560 | 74 27 --- --- --- --- --- --- .632 | 47 .718 | 74 SOG) ft | 28 --- --- “+: --- --- --- 674 | 61 .686 | 68 -624 | 69.5 | Means 29.843 | 63.6 | 29.855 | 67.5 | 29.844 | 67.9 | ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE, 205 Readings of the barometer and attached thermometer at Port Foulke, Smith Strait. February, 1861. Day of the b month. 2 10 Midnight. 29.592 .968 30.130 29.992 30.078 29.824 30.024 29.866 656 134 728 30.140 | 168 | 29.848 30.000 29.914 | 918 | 30.000 29.708 .688 .850 30.037 .030 29.818 .636 512 700 636 CMOADNFP WHY =H 78° |29.616 30.246 204 29.848 .860 - 962 29 624 30.036 .160 29.972 80.078 29 828 30.012 29.912 458 450 864 30.288 178 29.896 30.064 29.868 29.638 30.042 150 29.968 30.092 29.822 30.062 29.974 .512 442 924 30.292 154 29.900 30.050 29.850 939 30.000 29.692 . 130 924 30.0388 .008 29.776 .628 .038 762 638 | 29.642 299.926 29.952 | Means | 29.843 | 29.877 29.872 206 RECORD AND RESULTS OF Readings of the barometer and attached thermometer at Port Foulke, Smith Strait March, 1861. 10 Noon 29.588 29.568) 29%". 504 29'".626 t .658 29". 678 .692 192 640 -480 .514 -480 .684 .644 .790 30.094 29.860 .924 .814 30.146 014 29.604 30.0382 29.948 30.124 | 6 .082 3802 -106 -446 232 29.818 30.340 .560 29.806 950 295.734 694 808 674 438 434 520 520 652 104 794 30.074 29.874 | 900 | 880 | 30.148 29.986 632 30.056 024 | 166 | 198 | 416 | ¢ .138 449 .230 29.766 30.428 500 29.808 962 Means 29.903 | ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE. 207 Readings of the barometer and attached thermometer at Port Foulke, Smith Strait. March, 1861. Qh 10 Midnight. 29.652 106 172 686 419 462 .028 022 618 164 196 30.030 29.848 954 .850 30.042 004 29.608 30.009 012 .160 154 304 150 484 196 29.818 30.462 462 29.780 -934 29.686 132 760 -T12 428 -466 976 O14 .092 .864 .854 30.062 29.884 870 30.042 29.892 604 30.010 014 134 178 284 154 .o14 .168 29.680 - 136 - 160 .828 .398 522 572 -618 576 .988 -910 30.046 29.914 .902 30.000 .028 002 29.738 30.052 042 124 .234 294 -168 .146 29.800 30.522 .304 29.842 55.5 976 JT14 162 -692 .38d2 .o14 -628 -672 564 30.014 29.918 30.042 -868 30.072 29.988 962 188 30.076 072 108 254 -268 204 -492 138 29.858 30.548 -184 29.844 30.000 29.676. 29.954. | 29". 660 720 730 -686 342 .006 600 712 006 30.006 O14 002 29.958 -838 30.072 29.994 974 .832 30.002 .012 074 .242 202 244 462 .100 29.886 30.648 -158 29.854 978 29'".650 29.909 68.9 66.8 | 29.945 29.948 29.938 908 RECORD ANR RESULTS OF Readings of the barometer and attached thermometer at Port Foulke, Smith Strait. April, 1861. 10 Noon. 29.770 30.200 £294 -198 494 920 .312 138 378 29.847 .832 30.054 .208 150 29.880 30.222 29.946 042 824 30.208 29.778 .992 -940 30.232 -268 488 400 -092 29.798 30.322 .256 -466 158 488 |29'". 844 30.332 .238 30.150 ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE. 209 Readings of the barometer and attached thermometer near and at Port Foulke, Smith Strait. oh April, 1861. 29 838 29.890 30.3852 -196 490 198 264 29.886 926 30.124 092 -086 29.624 -600 -992 30.100 29.872 30.050 29.908 30.174 274 432 294 29.974 (29%. 940 80.338 297.976 30.382 -196 -680 -616 038 .008 -300 29.910 - 920 994 30.142 .284 29.592 584 80.144 004 29.908 80.036 .000 .208 348 -450 234 29:986 10 Midnight. 307.006 27 80.141 November, 1869 59.4 30.156 | 60.7 | 30.158 210 RECORD AND RESULTS OF Readings of the barometer and attached thermometer near and at Port Foulke, Smith Strait. May, 1861. Noon. 292.938 29.968 30.018 299.912 .856 .138 30.096 | 50.5 | 30.068 273 894 .362 .636 662 B94 | 62. B74 484 A492 .352 | 61. : 362 444 i 498 232 ee 202 .268 BT. 252 110 | 58. .132 268 294 .348 346 230 ; 246 366 848 | 5: B52 022 ie 29.900 29.964 964 .888 2 .884 126 5 746 668 TE 134 30.038 | 51. 06 30.068 006 29.970 29.876 .866 926 | 57. 906 .900 aye 688 642 644 792 136 142 800 782 166 718 | 43. 162 | Means | 30.068 54.0 | 30.062 56.8 | 30.064 ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE, 211 Readings of the barometer and attached thermometer at Port Foulke, Smith Strait. May, 1861. oe 2h 4 6 8 10 Midnight. 1 29.2929] 52° |29™.904) 52° 129.942] 44° |29™ 986] 59° 130.020] 63° =inke so0 2 -800 | 70 -198 | 62 -186 | 55 -876 | 51 -008 | 67 -~-- Soc 3 30.066 | 66 30.072 | 68 30.082 | 64 --- --- -180 | 65 aoc >. 4 412 | 64 448 | 63 464 | T1 30.522 | 67 oy 8 | Gilby || woo eyo 5 --- --- .614 | 64 -600 | 60 .580 | 62 -542 | 64 oS hoyaed 6 -418 | 60 428 | 67 -438 | 66 -456 | 68 472 | 68 oo coo 7 474 | 55 -474 | 63 476 | 66.5 .432 | 67 Ald | 68.5 | = -- Oe 8 -374 | 65 -418 | 65 -428 | 66 -450 | 62 452 | 65 Soe wikis 9 .416 | 49.5 424 | 49.5 .398 | 48 .372 | 50 -362 | 55 SoC Wore 10 .250 | 68 .232 | 71 .234 | 71.5 -220 | 66 .224 | 66 Soc Se 1H .248 | 65 -240 | 66 .212 | 59.5 -200 | 62 -190 | 64 oo5 Ba 12 .164 | T4 176 | 69 .194 | 70 -204 | 63.5 .218 | 63 os0 ees 13 .292 | 50 --- --- .840 | 538 .876 | 55 Sere DiS Sey See 14 .800 | 61 .274 | 63.5 .272 | 63 -246 | 638 .264 | 65 Doo Be a 15 .252 | 67 .266 | 65 .284 | 66 -318 | 69 .336 | 66 ooe ia 16 .856 | 54.5 822 | 57 .3808 | 59 .270 | 54 238 | 57 S96 ee 17 29.924 | 48 29.938 | 55 29.948 | 60 29.950 | 53 29.966 | 55 SO mers 18 -988 | 64 -986 | 60.5 -962 | 59.5 .932 | 64 .940 | T1 =[=J= aoc 19 .842 | 5T -828 | 65.5 .844 | 64 -812 | 65.5 812 | 64 aO6 Re es 20 .742 | 68 -T16 | 66 728 | 64 .674 | 73 -664 | 66 ods OF 21 -748 | 50 .814 | 54 874 | 61 .928 | 63.5 .958 | 62.5 Solo ae 22, 30.066 | 52 80.074 | 48 30.068 ; 53 30.058 | 61 80.048 | 56 Sieve Se 23 29.936 | 50.5 .010 | 70 29.972 | 71.5 | 29.968 | 72 29.954 | 70 SOS mates 24 .882 | 58 29.880 | 63 -886 | 53 -906 | 61.5 .896 | 54 Sos moan 25 .880 | 49.5 .924 | 55 .924 | 56 -936 | 62 .928 | 63 soos ene 26 .866 | 51 -886 | 50.5 .854 | 50 -796 | 50.5 -780 | 49 = == maps 27 .606 | 56.5 .560 | 46.5 .554 | 48.5 -560 | 48 -566 | 54.5 === sled 28 -786 | 58 .814 | 55 .812 | 52 .808 | 52 -780 | 57.5 =< eee 29 142 | 57.5 (12) 64 -720 | 50.5 -128 | 50.5 -720 | 50.5 y= Soo 30 -TT2 | 52 -188 | 59 -T76 | 56 -166 | 53 -TT0 | 55 =e Dm es 31 See || 865) ~154 | 54.5 154 | 55 3 {(OX0),||) B56) she | 5D ooo Baio Means | 30.061 | 58.4 | 30.069 | 59.8 | 30.069 | 59.2 | 30.071 | 60.3 | 30.077 | 61.2 212 RECORD AND RESULTS OF Readings of the barometer and attached thermometer at Port Foulke, June, 1861. Smith Strait. 10 Noon. 29".738 -640 .092 -684 -688 .960 678 49° 50 52 55 47 46 29.706 638 082 708 -684 008 .698 712 642 29.692 636 578 -710 -694 -500 670 672 -638 .084 728 -916 944 932 782 30.048 004 29.778 -890 30.022 29.932 .884 674 084 -642 -546 -518 42] 476 | Means 29.736 ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE. 213 Readings of the barometer and attached thermometer at Port Foulke, Smith Strait. June, 1861. 2h ; 10 Midnight. 29 692 29.708 53° |29™.706 29.674 292.688 632 ; 612 | 632 , 632 | 49. 610 .616 | 5’ 612 | 604 584 584 116 730 | 14 ase 160 674 688 | 650 654 650 529 22 | 540 564 508 738 694 720 134 158 2692 see 674 692 666 654 642 . 658 cee 668 542 551 | 548 530 522 126 138 5 786 786 798 960 951 942 | 30.020 | 5¢ Soe S08 916 924 | 5S 29.948 942 30.030 30.014 30.018 | F 30.038 30.046 See 016 002 | 29.984 29.960 29.799 29.828 29.888 | £ 912 aoc 30.026 30.004 30.036 | 5: 30.023 30.044 29.986 29.946 .5 | 29.9981 53 | 29.898 29.892 742 TT9 112 168 5 176 820 990 996 sec 978 30.060 30.076 30.050 30.052 | 50.5 | 30.026 22 aoe 20.918 29.926 29.804 29.878 23 | 29.912 914 906 | 5: 888 : 892 24 670 682 674 616 670 25 586 568 568 594 586 26 522 5A 632 640 614 27 564 : 544 556 546 ; 534 28 516 510 : 524 510 : 502 29 456 443 | 5: 444 404 : 448 30 466 468 ; : 30. 472 Means | 29.740 | 53.5 | 29.743 8st : o} 53.7 | 29.747 | 5- 214 RECORD AND RESULTS OF Readings of the barometer and attached thermometer at Port Foulke, Smith Strait. July, 1861. 10 Noon. 29'".850 80.046 29.836 980 994 -820 750 722 .682 -569 .568 710 564 .810 950 “848 “870 297.778 -984 .882 .832 750 668 -628 604 000 664 622 -T70 .888 .812 .840 766 -980 29.400 -504 450 | -716 108 -356 -646 -682 30.038 29.763 -900 -830 -992 950 .818 -988 926 192 -650 _ .658 612 -612 -450 -662 -656 -800 .894 186 -850 836 .990 29.420 -492 484 376 19.374 466 29.739 54.5 ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE. IN a Readings of the barometer and attached thermometer at Port Foulke, Smith Strait July, 1861. pce an 4 6 8 10 Midnight. 1 |29™.364| 58° [291.372] 58° |29.370| 58° |29™342/ 56° [29346] 55° --- --- i] 2 498 | 51 466 | 55 459, | 53 424 | 56 PATS 5S). Wo ae 3 528 | 58 510 | 56 584 | 55 612 | 62 SOSURD. mllse oer | coc 4 HG |G || seo eco ll” 7e0166 820 | 58 S| GOH aes | ce) 5 -700 | 58.5 .702 | 56.5 -656 | 57 .636 | 56 .546 | 58 --- i 6 494 | 54 498 159.5 | .526 | 58 SOIL MOAN rk econ Ele ee pe u .649 | 58.5 .644 | 58 626 | 57 -617 | 56.5 .612 | 55.5] --- ===) 8 -886 | 63 --- --- -900 | 63 .904 | 58 .904 | 57 O98 soe | 9 30.058 | 61 30.050 | 59.5 | 30.038 | 57 30.034 | 59 30.062 | 58 --- --- 10 29.598 | 58 29.572 | 58 29.602 | 57 === --- | 29.652 | 54 --- ---| 11 -928 | 56 .926 | 58 .924 | 58 29.900 | 57 .820 | 54 IS =-- 12 -T76 | 56 .988 | 56 -992 | 58 30.044 | 60 --- --- --- --- 13 30.129 | 57 30.057 | 57 80.058 | 57 -006 | 57 30.052 | 56 coe See | 14 29.960 | 54 29.928 | 54 29.900 | 55 29.886 | 55 29.888} 55 |29".884] 53° 15 .893 | 54 .904 | 53 30.033 | 46 .950 | 47 .878 | 46 .950 | 45.5 f 16 .898 | 49 .985 | 50 29.878 | 51 .968 | 50 30.044 | 50 .933 | 52 17 978 | 50 .900 | 45 .942 | 51 .876 | 51 29.954 | 51 .924 | 48 18 -808 | 53 .838 | 51 .855 | 51 .820 | 51 -750 | 45.5 -750 | 48 19 .673 | 66 .635 | 64 .681 | 84 .618 | 73 .635 | 63 .592 | 62.5 | 20 .634 | 54 .618 | 51 .672 | 53.5 .642 | 50 704 | 55 ofl} DB | 21 .682 | 70.5 .640 | 70 .590 | 63 .656 | 70 .608 | 60 .570 | 76 22 .563 | 67 .528 | 73 --- --- .500 | 72 .700 | 76 .o21 | 72 23 .648 | 73 616 | 77 -650 | 64 614 | 57 700 | 55 100 | 55 24 --- --- .650 | 78 .T15 | T4 .670 | 65 .650 | 72.5 .620 | 73 25 .682 | 76 .684 | 79 .788 | 78 150 | 72.5 -756 | 69.5 .T58 | 84 26 .928 | 75 .966 | 72 -880 | 65 .882 | 62 -938 | 61 .936 | 58 27 870 | 54.5 .880 | 55 .870 | 55 .930 | 55 .850 | 54 .830 | 54 28 === --- --- D0 --- --- -750 | 53 -764 | 55.5 .758 | 56 29 .894 | 61 .934 | T1 .910 | 72 .848 | 72.5 -884 | 65 -868 | 58 30 .900 | 54 -900 | 54 .985 | 54 -970 | 50 30.000 | 50 30.005 | 53 31 80.054 | 57 -957 | 58 30.070 | 61 .900 | 56 29.962 | 52 29.863 | 51 Means | 29.768 | 59.5 | 29.772 | 60.0 | 29.783 | 59.6 | 29.767 | 58.4 | 29.776 | 57.0 Notes to the preceding Daily Record. September. To obtain the monthly means for the hours midnight, 2, 4, and 6 A. M., the following process was adopted: The monthly means for the hours 8, 10, noon, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 P. M., after supply- ing the few omissions by simple interpolation, were found =29'".686 at 82°; for the same hours the mean for the days September 12 to September 30 =29™.695 at 32°; hence the correction to the mean for each of the hours midnight, 2, 4, and 6 A. M., =—0'".009, which renders the monthly averages for each observing hour strictly comparable. The few omissions in the last nineteen days for the hours from midnight to 6 were previously supplied by simple interpolation. October. The monthly means for midnight, 2, 4, 6 A. M., were found by the same method as in preceding month ; they depend on eight days of observations. January to June. The occasional blanks in the record were supplied by interpolation. July. The same principle of interpolation was applied for the hours midnight, 2,4, 6 A. M., as in preceding September or October. 216 RECORD AND RESULTS OF Resulting monthly averages of bi-hourly observations of the barometer; temperature reduced to 32°. 2 4 6 8 10 Noon 2 4 6 8 10 12 September 29.690 29.681/29.685/29.695)29. 679/29. 682/29. 684 29.689 29.687/29.686)29. 685/29. 686 October -563) .584) .592) .616; .616) .619) .618) .618) .617), .625) .629] .658 November | --- | --- | - -- /30.086/30.086/30.079)/30.088 30.087|30.096/30.094/30.094| - - - December --- |---| --- -051] .039, .029) .035; .036) .037) .022| .023} - - - January --- | --- | --- /29 835/29.825/29.827|/29.832 |29.842/29.844/29.843)/29.841] - - - February --- | --- 1--- | .750) 2.151) 1.739, .7384) .741) .756) .762) 759! - -- March --- | ---|--- -816) .807} .811} .801) .812) .835) .834] .832) - - - April --- | --- | --- |30.059/30.051/30.056/30.050|30.057/30.066/30.070|30.073) - - - May --- | --- | --- [30.000)29.987/29.983)/29. 981 |29. 985/29. 986/29.985/29.989) - - - June --- | --- | --- |29.689) .680) .670| .674| 677] .687| .682) .679) - - - July 107) .707) .677) .671) .687) .690) .686) .688) .730) .688) .701) .67¢ Diurnal Fluctuation of the Atmospheric Pressure. The diurnal fluctuation, on the yearly average, was deduced from the above table as follows: The readings for August were interpolated from the July and Sep- tember readings; from the observations at Van Rensselaer Harbor, Port Kennedy, and Baffin Bay, August mean = July mean — 0.009, also August mean = Septem- ber mean —0'".040; applying these reductions, and taking the mean of the two results, we find for August the readings :— 2b | 4 6 | 8 | 10 Noon 2 4 6 8 10 12 | August ye ae eee eee 29.664 pe Tete. 29.656 To supply the annual means for the hours midnight, 2, 4,6 A. M., we have mean of 8,10, noon, 2, 4, 6, 8,10 for July, August, September, October = 29.668, and for the same hours, mean of the year = 29.828, hence correction to the means of four months at the hours midnight, 2, 4,6 A.M. to refer them to the annual value = + .160. We have consequently for the whole year :— 10 | Noon 6 | 8 ne | ; | | Year Be aero 29.812/29.826)/29.822 | 29.820 shieateleetinn a eee 29.831 ee | | If we subtract from these numbers their average value, we find the diurnal variation proper as given below, to which that of Van Rensselaer Harbor, Port Kennedy, and Baffin Bay (¢ = 72.5) have been added. ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE. Palla| Diurnal fluctuation of the barometer. (+ above mean, — below mean reading. ) Port Foulke Van Rensselaer Port Kennedy Baffin Bay > = 789 18/. 789 37/. 720 01. 720 30’. —0'".006 0.000 —0.019 —0'".010 —.004 +.001 —.028 — 018 —.012 +.001 031 007 +.002 —.003 —.002 —.012 —.002 —.001 +.010 +.007 —.004 —.002 +.008 000 —.004 —.006 42 (Mil +.002 +.001 —.002 +.014 +.010 SL (itl +.002 +.015 +.013 +.005 +.004 +.018 4.013 +.007 +.006 +.009 +.010 +.005 +.003 .000 .000 2 4 6 8 10 A ° a) wow He bo Expressed analytically the above diurnal fluctuations are given by the equations: — Port Foulke, b = 0*.006 sin (6 + 159°) + 0.004 sin (28 + 186°) Van Rensselaer Harbor, b= 0.003 sin (9 +110 ) +0.002 sin (20 + 204 ) Port Kennedy, b= 0.021 sin (6 + 202 ) +0.009 sin (20 +150 ) Baffin Bay, b= 9.013 sin (@ +185 ) +0.004 sin (264159 ) The angle @ counts from midnight at the rate of 15° an hour. The general correspondence of these expressions is quite satisfactory ; the most striking feature is the rapid diminution of the diurnal fluctuation with an increase of latitude; thus the coefficients of either term for Van Rensselaer Harbor are one- half of those for Port Foulke, and taking the average for these localities (@¢—=78° 28’) we have a diurnal range of only 0.013 inch, whereas the upper range for Port Kennedy and Baffin Bay (? =72° 15’) is 0.038 inch; if this rate of diminution continues, the range would be less than 0.001 inch in latitude 813°. The observed and computed diurnal fluctuation at Port Foulke is shown by the annexed diagram. ; Divrnat FLucrvation OF THE ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE. inches +0.012 -008 004 -000 -004 008 _— .012 6 8 10 Noon 2 4 6 By the aid of the curve we find the maximum to occur about 64 P.M.; at Van Rensselaer it occurred about 10 P. M., and at Port Kennedy and Baffin Bay about 71 P.M.; the principal minimum occurs about 3 A. M., at Van Rensselaer the (secondary) minimum occurred about 4 A. M., and at Port Kennedy and Baffin Bay 28 December, 1865. 918 RECORD AND RESULTS OF about 44 A.M. At Port Foulke the secondary maximum and minimum occur about 8 and 10$ A. M.: diurnal range 0.017 inch. - Annual Fluctuation of the Atmospheric Pressure. The monthly mean values derived from the hours 8 A.M. to 10 P. M., which are strictly comparable, intcr se, are as follows :— September 29.686 March 291.818 October 29.620 April 30.060 November 30.089 May 29.987 December 30.034 June 29.680 January 29.836 July 29.693 February . 29.749 August 29.664 The mean of these values is 29'°.826, but the annual mean from 12 values a day was 29.824; we subtract therefore 0'°.002 which gives the following monthly mean barometric pressure, and the annual fluctuation proper, + indicating greater, — less pressure than the mean amount. Annual fluctuation of the atmospheric pressure. Maximum marked by a *. Port Foulke. Port Foulke. Van Rensselaer. Port Kennedy. Baffin Bay. January February March 29'".834 29.747 29.816 +07.010 —0.077 —0.008 +0'".003 +0.073 —0.025 +0. 041 —0.005 +0.235 —= 029223 —0.106 +0.138 April May June July August September October November December 80.058 29.985 29.678 29.691 29.662 29.684 29.618 30.087 30.032 +0.234* +0.161 —0.146 —0.153 —0.162 —0.140 —0.206 +0.263* +0.208 +0.128 +0.167* —0 056 —0.034 —0.081 —0.117 — 0.020 —0.017 —0.022 +0,241* +0.072 —0.025 —0.934 ios —0.039 —0.140 +0.114 —0.066 +0.185 +4.0.259* +.0.062 —0.002 —0.019 —0.020 +0.001 —0.090 —0.185 The true maximum occurs evidently in April, that of November being accidental. The spring maximum (April and May) is well marked for either locality. The minimum at Port Foulke occurred in October; at Van Rensselaer Harbor in Sep- tember. Computed annual range at Port Foulke 0.40 inch; at Van Rensselaer Harbor 0.21 inch. We have also the annual fluctuation at Port Foulke, B= 0.120 sin (6+ 48°) + 0.141 sin (26 + 177°) Van Rensselaer Harbor, B= 0.079 sin(o+ 4) + 0.044 sin Qo +4 294 ) Port Kennedy, B= 0.137 sin(o+ 17 ) +0.106 sin (26 + 232 ) Baffin Bay; B= 0.155 sin (6+ 304 ) + 0.118 sin (26 + 236 ) The angle @ counts from January Ist at the rate of 30° a month. The formula for Port Foulke places a maximum about the commencement of May, and a minimum about the end of August; it requires, however, more than one year’s observation to secure a reliable value of the annual fluctuation. The annual range is twenty times greater than the diurnal range. ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE. 219 Meun Atmospheric Pressure at the Level of the Sca. We obtained the annual average value of the atmospheric pressure = 29'".824 ; the reduction to the sea level is +0'°.006, hence the height of the barometer at the sea level in latitude 78° 18’ —= 29.830 inches. At Van Rensselaer Harbor in latitude 78 37 Ma “ Port Kennedy ce Serer Deo (ill 29.938 <« “ Baffin Bay “e 6 7 BO INO) 5) Average, 754 29.824 << Monthly and Annual Extremes of Pressure. The following table contains the observed maxima and minima of atmospheric pressure in each month; attached thermometer at 32°. ‘The corresponding range at Van Rensselaer Harbor has been added for comparison. Mae nen Mine Port Foulke Van Rensselaer Har. Tange. Tange. September. , : : 30.13 29.27 0'".86 il October . : : ; : 30.22 28.94 1.28 1.28 November : : : : 30.74 29.59 115) 1.30 December i ; : : 30.71 QO 1.54 1.48 January . : : : : 30.45 29.14 1.31 1.3 Hebruary . . 3 6 0 30.20 28.98 1.22 1.61 Mareh . : : , : 30.53 29.23 1.3 1.31 ANyoraill = ‘ ; : ; 30.61 29.44 Io 1.09 May : 5 , : : 30.58 29.50 1.08 1.30 June : ; ; : : 30.01 29.31 0.70 0.78 July : s : : : 30.11 29.27 0.84 0.57 August. : ; : F ---- ---- 0.85! 0.83 Mean === : ; : : 1.11 TENT ! Interpolated. The monthly range is greatest in winter and least in summer. Observed absolute maximum and minimum and extreme range, referred to 32° Fah., and at the level of the sea:— Maximum . : - : : 5 BOE November 25, 1860 Minimum . 3 : : : 5 HS OB} October 16, 1860 Range : 5 : : : : 1.81 The extreme range at Van Rensselaer Harbor was 2.13 inches. Relation of the Atmospheric Pressure to the Direction of the Wind. The changes of the barometric pressure, depending upon the direction of the wind, can only be investigated approximately from our observations, since the wind appears to blow principally from two directions, the number of entries from other directions being exceedingly few; besides, the series of barometric observations does not extend to a full year, and the daily observing hours are not symmetrically dis- tributed over the twenty hours. By means of the preceding formula expressing 220 RECORD AND RESULTS OF the annual fluctuation, the barometric height for each day was computed and sub- tracted from the observed height at the hours 8 A. M., noon, 4,and 10 P.M. These differences (positive for greater, negative for less pressure than the normal) were tabulated according to the direction of the wind. After balancing the resulting average effect for the directions (true) N. E. and 8S. W., and for calms, it appears that the barometric column is depressed about 0.07 during N. E. wind, and elevated about 0™.04 during 8. W. wind and during calms; at Van Rensselaer Harbor the depression during N. E.wind was 0.01, and the elevation during S. W. wind 0.04, and during calms 0.01.1 Oscillation of the Barometric Column during Storms. There are 25 storms recorded (see discussion of winds), during one-third of which the barometer was notably affected; the range was between 0.3 and 0.9 of an inch. The readings of the barometer during the storms of November 9 and 10, 1860, of February 9, 1861, and of April 17, 1861, are illustrated by diagrams. 24 6 810Mt2 46 810N24 6 810Mt24 6 810N24 6 8 inches November 9. November 10. 30.8 atl : 6 YANG ir, \ ronce/or wino.\ 4 08} 2 ot 30.0 eee 29 9 kira eee 8 810N24 6 8 LOMt 2 4 6 810N 24 6 § 10Me inches February 9. February 10. 30.0 29.9 |= SoHb WR eR ON H i) Jo} * See p. 108 of my Reduction of Captain McClintock’s Meteorological Observations at Port Kennedy and Baffin Bay. a vs ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE, 22) 10Mt2 4 6 810N2 4 6 810 April 17. inches 30.4 Note on Atmospheric Moisture. An attempt was made to obtain the vapor pressure by means of hygrometric observations between February 24 and April 16; wet bulb thermometer No. 1644 (covered with a thin coating of ice) was read once or three times a day. Comparing it with No. 3, I find its index correction, from nine comparisons during snow fall, ——1°.8 at the temperature —15° Fah. The observations, however, were found too rough, the greatest precision being required at these low temperatures when the relative humidity can be determined only approximately, though the numerical amount of vapor pressure (hardly exceeding 0.02) may be well ascertained. The dependence of the atmospheric moisture on the direction of the wind was found by means of tabulation of 128 cases of snow or rain with the direction of the wind. During precipitation it blew 56 times from the 8S. W.; it was calm 45 times; and there were but 18 entries, mostly in summer, with N. H. wind; 7 with 8. E., and 2 with W. wind. S. W. is therefore the rainy quarter, as might have been expected, and calms, generally, appear to favor precipitation. WIND. THE direction and force of the wind at Port Foulke was recorded bi-hourly together with the observations of the temperature and pressure of the atmosphere. The record, here presented, will therefore extend over eleven months. Dr. Hayes informed me that the direction of the wind was invariably recorded with reference to the true meridian. The scale of force adopted is the same as that used in the Kane expedition, viz., from 0 (calm) to 10 (hurricane) in accordance with Smeaton’s table. oan F Estimated number|Pressure inpounds} Velocity in st. Denomination of wind. of force. per square foot. miles per hour. Calm Light air . Gentle breeze Moderate breeze. Fresh breeze Strong breeze Fresh gale. Strong gale Storm Tempest Hurricane . SUDA RONPWNHH SO e The force of the wind was estimated by the observers. Q24 RECORD AND RESULTS OF Direction (true) and force of the wind observed near and at Port Foulke. September, 1860. N.N.E.7 as N.N.E.5 calm ealm 6“ “e CcCOn > oO {e) (=) 2 4 6 8 0 2 Se | Hour 2 A.M, } 10 | Noon N. EH. 4 N. Hh. 4 calm September 1, 8 A. M.to 4 P.M. Wind blowing almost a hurricane; hove to under bare poles. September 9, 8 P.M. Blowing in squalls off shore. September 23, 10 A.M. to midnight. Blowing in squalls, and very heavy. September 28, 8 P.M. Wind blowing in heavy squalls. September 29, midnight. Blowing heavy. ——o DIRECTION AND FORCE OF WIND. 995 Direction (true) and force of the wind observed at Port Foulke. October, 1860. Hour 1st 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10th Q2A.M.] N.E.8|N.E.--|] -- - W.-- | calm Galim SSW) sss --- | N.E.-- 4 aS “ calm aes Ne “cc “cc An a Set pee GG 6 N. E. 8 (73 “cc W su eg “ce S W q oc meee ey AEE. 8 “ “cc «6 iG N.-- (a3 “ “c calm N. yy 6 10 sé N. BE. 3 “s us calm es 66 s a6 N. E. Noon ce calm WwW O° ae oc Se Ww pita 3 oc “ “ce 2 N. E. 6 fs W. 4 oe of S. W. 6 a S. 8 N. E. 2) | N. EH! 38 4 N. EH. 5 fo W. 6 of a a S. 7 s N. EH. 1 6 “cc “ec “ce “e cc ce “cc “cc a “ce 8 “ec 73 “ce “ec “e “ec “ce 4c N. EK. 4 ealm 10 N. E. 4 ac “ec (e3 “é “e “ ce N. E. 5 “ 12 se & fe ff oe S. W. 7 f S.8.W.5 fe S. H.-- Hour 11th 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20th 12 A.M.) N.E.1)| calm |N. #.--|N. E.--|N. E.-- --- |N.H.--| N. E.4/N. E.--|N. E.-- 4 N. EK. 6 “cc “ “cc cc oes “ce bc “ac “c 6 aie “é oe ce “ce BABS N. H iL “c “é “c 8 --- i N.E 7) N.E.7| N.E.6/]N:E.6] calm a “ a 10 calm |S. W.-- £6 N. HE. 6 af oY os ss a se Noon be ealm “cc “cc 73 GG cc “ N. E. 8 As 0} a3 “cc “ “ec “ce “c “ce “cc “e v3 4 is3 “ec N is 6 N B 5 ce “cc “ce “ce N. B 6 oe et 46 “cc (73 ce ce “ce “ce ce ce a be 3 oc v9 ce N. QL. 5 ce (73 (73 a3 10 N. HE. 9 73 (73 N. EB. 6 (73 N BR 4 bc iG be “ 12 oo | IN Ios “ é “ 6 G G ce Se e Hour 21st 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 3lst 2A.M.| N. H.2] calm | N. E.--| N. E.--|N.E.--| calm --- |N.E.--|S.W.--|S.W.--] calm 4 “cc ““ “ec “e “cc N. iDhec N secs “ce “a 73 a“ 6 N. E. | “a “ ce Bos (73 calm ce 73 “ce ra3 8 calm |S. W.--| N. EH. 4] calm |N.E.--|N. E.1 a8 calm ob a “ 10 & i s N. H.3|N. EH. 1} calm GB MSeyeas| ss a Noon “e “ce ce (a3 ealm “e bc “c “e ce “c 2, Ge S. W.1| N. B.6 es a s Me a “|S. W. 1) N. E. 2 4 G ealm (73 bc ce qs N W _.|¢ bc (73 ealm (z4 6 ce “cb “ce “el S. W. 9 (a3 “ “é “ “c N. iB 5 8 (73 3 (73 73 (73 “cc “c (73 Sys “cc 73 10 “cc “c ce “cc S. W. 1 bc N E =: “cc Mes oe N. E. q 12 CG ING « «ce Eee “ “ ‘“ ve “c « October 6, midnight. Blowing in heavy squalls. October 7. Blowing in heavy squalls during the entire day. October 8. Blowing in heavy squalls during the day. October 9,10 P.M. Blowing in squalls. October 10,8 A.M. Wind blowing in squalls. October 14,8 A.M. Blowing in heavy squalls. October 29. Wind blowing in heavy squalls throughout the day. 29 December, 1865. 296 RECORD AND RESULTS OF Direction (true) and force of the wind observed at Port Foulke. November, 1860. 8 9 calm | N. E.-- Lo e = 9 =, B a B 9 = B Zz fe] A ie] N. E.--| N. E.--| N. E.--| N.E.--| calm ile oer 1A es (ee) Fe) & cosy A * ee bo A 6c “cb 79 N. E. q é G oc A i vA, e) 5 ie} =, B A A sis on noo Om Sb A eal bo ilesies| (oss oe Hour 21st 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30th 2A.M.| 8. H.--| N. H.--| N. E.--| N. E.--| calm calm calm |S. E.--|] calm |S. W.-- 4 6c 6c cc “cc 6c N. E. 1 “e 6c 73 6c 6 ealm 6c “c cc cc 6 “cc “ (a3 6c 8 CNN IN GR 7 NRO TINE Gio ote] Ne gBING 08 aS We Allen calm 10 a3 3 6c “cc cc 6c 6c 6c oe 66 Noon “ “ “i N. E. 3 6 N 1D 2 cc 3 “c a3 9 cc “ce “ ealm 6c cc 79 73 N. EB } 6c 4 6c bc “@ “ “cc “c S. W. 2 6c 6c 66 6 “ce “ce cc 66 “ce ce “cc 73 N 1D) 4 6c 8 “ 6c “ 6c ce “ “c 6c (3 “ 10 cc “c ce “i ce ““ ““ “c 73 6c 1) PA, Whos) Qe : OWS Weel Al etm | ca | Alii Ales DIRECTION AND FORCE OF WIND. 927 Direction (true) and force of the wind observed at Port Foulke December, 1860. Hour Ist 2 3 4 5 6 a 8 9 10th IQININEIS., Weal SE ieee NT 5 Jdb- ol) erin [eninn llispaalee Nera tel ar leraials || aemuanooll Npaamee 10 GG “cc “ bc “ “ GG cc “ Noon 77 3 “ce “ “ “c “ “ “ “ 9 GG “ “cc “ “cc “ “ “ “c “c 4 “ 6 “ “ iG cb “c “ 6c 6 6c “c “cc “c “c “c 6 “ “ “ + ‘ 8 6c N. E. 9 “cc bc 73 “cs “cc “cc “ce 6c 10 “c “c “cc “c “ “ “ ic “ “ 12 “cb 6c 6“ 6c 6c bc 9 GG “c “6 “ Hour 11th 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20th 2 A.M.) N. E.--| S. E.--|N.E.--| N. B.--| 8. H.--| N. E.-- | N. E.--| S. W.--| 8S. W.--| S. W.--| “ce (73 “ec “cc “ce “e “cr 8 calm w N. E.7| N. H.1|N. EH. 4) N.E.4|N. EH. 4) N.E.5 rf calm |S. W.5/S. W. 6] = SCHOO A I o> Noon 6c 73 6b calm “c 3 “ “ Ss W.3 ‘co 2 |N.E. 3] calm % is a & e Us calm i 4 ealm “c “ cc “ cc “cc “ N. EE. 1 6c 6 S. W. 1 oe co 6“ oc “ ce “ce N E 3 bc 8 6c 6 6c “c “ “c “ “ “ “ 10 6c GG “ce “cc ce “ “ “ N. B ] bc 12 oe aoe ae “ oc 7 “cc 3 bc S. W he “ce Hour 21st 22, 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 dist ISAM -- - ealm calm |N.KE.--|N. E.--|N.E.--| calm | calm | N.E.--/S. E.--] calm § 4 calm “ “ “ “ “ “ nee be “ ealm « 6 ce } “ e Sar Ss “ee sre rs chee ates et “ce 8 oe a fs N. E.2)N. HE. 4) --- | calm --- |N.E.--| calm ec 10 “c “ “ “ic N. E. 3 oes 6c S.W.--IN ar! “ 6c 4 & oy --- |N.E. 4] --- calm | --- |N.E. 3] --- «IN. E. 2 6 oe “ = - “ OPatt= oc soo =| IN, 13 9 raps te “ce 79 E. . W.-- a aS 5 calm | calm |N. E.--;- “ ss a 228 RECORD AND RESULTS OF Direction (true) and force of the wind observed at Port Foulke. January, 1861. 10 N. BE. 5 “ ‘“ ‘“ “ “ SeR ye SulgNee acy GB f Noon %“ 66 be ce ‘cc (73 CG x g 2, Nf 2 “ c cc “ “ “c N. E. 4 6c N. E. 6| N. EB. 3% 4 «“ “ «“ «“ GC eI BPN, Op 3 & cs calm | 6 “ a a N. W. 1 sf calm | N. W.-- a ii 8 68 N. EH. 3 ut S. Ww.i1 N. EH. 2 6 6c “ “ 10 --- uw Gg S. W. 2 “ 6“ ‘“ 6 TG S w.l 12 |N.#B.4 ss sat ‘ N. E.-- UG 06 ealm os calm { 12 A.-M.|S. E.--|N.E.--|N.E.--| calm | calm | calm |S.W.- calm |N.B-2|N Bd “cc “cc ce S. ae “ce 4 SOO 4 & on AA Noon Ke N 3 G8 S W. 9 N E B 73 ‘ ealm “ bc ‘c 9 N. BE. 3 SOc “ “ “ “ Sg 2 “ 1] iG “ 4 Oe TO ME SL yell “ “ “ « |S)w.1/S.W.1 6 “ 3 “ ealm 6c 6c “ « 6c “c 6c 8 66 bb “ “cc bc 3 6c “cc S W i 773 “ 10 “e “ “ “ce 79 3 be 73 “cc oo oe 12 “c 73 c 6c bc 6c “c &c N. Ie INS bc January 13,10 A.M. to 8 P.M. Wind blowing in heavy squalls. Se ee ee ee DIRECTION AND FORCE OF WIND. 999 Direction (true) and force of the wind observed at Port Foulke. February, 1861. 7 8 10th calm calm . W.--| N. (73 a NOODPNWOSCOGE: 5 a calm COOK (o) 2 4 6 8 0 2 23 calm “cc 1 Le oor a A S) iS) i=} ie! wo OD es bo 230 RECORD AND RESULTS OF Direction (true) and force of the wind observed at Port Foulke. March, 1861. rt A z : BOS C's HNO O S00 > ie; Ale B 4 6 8 0 () 2 4 6 8 0 2 pay py en Si .E.--| calm N Ps 6c calm | ag .W. _E. 5 1B}, ‘ f Noon Ww. N. E.-- fl .W. N. H. 4 i Se “e “ce 4 N. E 38} calm | calm § - tt N. E. 1 calm ; --- “ calm | a ee ee eee, ye ee WRT ea Eel phates OTE aes DIRECTION AND FORCE OF WIND. 231 Direction (true) and force of the wind observed at Port Foulke. April, 1861. 6 S.W.-- a3 S. E. 1 calm N. E. 1 N. E. 3 8. W.1 « |NEQ ealm ealm a N. E.--|S. W.-- -- calm a“ 13 A or i=} WODDFPNOCADRe —a April 5. Blowing in squalls throughout the day. April 21. Wind blowing in heavy squalls throughout the day. 232 ' RECORD AND RESULTS OF Direction (true) and force of the wind observed at Port Foulke. May, 1861. 10th calm cc calm “ce May 30,10 P.M. Wind blowing in heavy squalls. May 31. Wind blowing in heavy squalls all day. DIRECTION AND FORCE OF WIND. 233 Direction (true) and force of the wind observed at Port Foulke. June, 1861. Hour 1st 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10th 2A.M.| N. E.--| N. E.--| 8. E.--| N. E.--| calm | N. E.--| N. B.--| N. E.--| N. E.--| N. E.-- 4 (3 73 N. BE ae “cb N. 9b a “cc (73 “ce “c “ce 6 a“ “ “ “cc “cc “ “ce “ ealm cc 8 |N.H.5:| N.E.4|/N.E.3|)N.E.3/N.E.1|N.E.3|N.E.4| NE. 1 is ie 10 cc TG “ «“ 7: 6 “ «“ “ N. E. 2 Noon “ cc “ N. £2 “ “ “ calm cc “ 9 &“ 6c “ me PU c 7; 7 a hes “ “cc 4 “ “ “ calm « “ « IN, Wh Tl CG 7 6 “ 6 “ cc “ N. E. 2 7 “ce Ti 8 a “e 6c “ “ G N.E.3 “ “ v3 10 “ cc 6c “ G “ c «c “ “ 12 & CG iG “ G “ “c «cc “ « Hour 11th 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20th QA.M.| N. E.--| calm | 8. W.--|S.W.1]S. W.--| S. W.--| 8. W.--| S. W.--) S. W.--| -- - 4 “cc “ 6c “cc 6c 6 1G “ 6c Se 6 “ S. Wife bb 6“ “cc “cc 73 “cc “ woe 8 fe si Me aw 8S. W.2|8. W.7/ 8S. W.7|S.W.5] 8. W.5/ 8S. W. 2 10 “ S W.2 ealm “ 6c “cc “ bc “c “ Noon | calm st 8. W. 1 sf ab a @ a6 ne a“ 9 ‘“ 6 “i 6 6c ce & cc “ “c 4 “ S.W.3 “ ce 6c S.W.6 6 bc “ “ 6 A S. W. 2 sf calm Gt a6 a6 a a s 8 6c “c ealm 6c 1G Sow q 6c “c “ “i 10 “ “ G G G eo ik 6c T3 “ “ 12 S. W.-- UG “ S. W.-- “c Sais 6c “ “ “ Hour 21st 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30th 2A.M.| S. W.--| calm calm calm |S. W.--| S. W.--| S. W.--| calm calm calm 4 “ “ “ 66 ce 6c “ INGoe “ “ 6 be “ IW, JdLes “ cc “c “c calm “ 6c 8 --- es a # S.W.7/8. W.7)/S. W.5 ae i ce 10 calm |S. W.1|N. EH. 1 ec ss ne ‘ fs i a Noon iT: “ “ N. 1 7 & 66 “cc & te 9 “cc “ Ope, eee ey “c “ “ “ “ 13 4 oc 6c S.- s S. W. 1 “ bc “ “ 66 “c 6 “c “ “ “c G “ “ 6 6c 8 « calm calm “cc 6c 66 “ “ “ “ 10 “c pea 6“ 6c 73 6c 6b 6c 6b S. W.1 12 Be Roan S. W.-- S. W.- a S. W.-- “ bc 6“ 66 (73 bb June 16, 8 A.M. to midnight. Blowing in squalls. June 17,18. Blowing in heavy squalls throughout the day. June 19. Wind blowing in squalls. 30 December, 1865. 234 RECORD AND RESULTS OF Direction (true) and force of the wind observed at and in the vicinity of Port Foulke. ; July, 1861. ! Hour Ist 2 Si ed 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12th | 2 A.M.\S.W.--|S.W.--| =-- N.E.--| N.H.--| N.E.--| N.- - | N.E.--| N.E.--| N.E.--/S. W.--| calm 4 Bf « 1S. W.--S.W.--| “ Cen WINGRE) Ser= | eietice is ah «" |S.W. 1 6 “cb 6 6c 6c GG bc OG 6c “ 6c ieee N.E. a 8 @ calm | 8.1 S.W. 2)'N.E. 3] N.E. 3) calm a N.E. 1) N.E. 6|S.W. 2) “ 10 calm te sf CB SoMa Llp 2 ai calm 0G ag Ms N.E. 2 Noon ts § calm ae CIN GPE) Seal ties N.E. 2] --- a a w 2 se £¢ oe i ‘ os S.W.1)S.W. 1) N.E.--|S.W. 1] “ 4 OG a “ $.W. 1} calm | calm « |S.W. 2) calm |S: W. 2| calm | N.E. 1 6 |S.wW.1) “ Gb calm os a u calm NSS \kVo ih od calm 8 cc N EK 1 “a ce “cc “ce N.E 1 ce bc Ses reat “cb S W Sel 10 6c 6c “ec (v3 N. B 2) “a N.E 9} S W. 1 (cs ee Ne bc pig ee 12 ee calm ab G3 fs N.- - ee calm |N.E.--| calm |N.H.--| - - - Hour 13th 14! 15 16 Wie 18 19 20 21 22 23d 9 A.M.\S.W.--) calm | calm |S.W.68.W. 7|S.W. 4) S.W. 3|N. H.1|S.W.1/8S. W.3/N. EB. 2 4 @ “ a oe ne oe G6 calm | 8. W. 4 ie 6 --- “ OSE Not. 2 os sf ab S.W.1]/8. W. 2 Gh 8 S \ 4 “e “ce “a “e “ (a3 “ce “c “ce ce 10 6b YAEL bc “cc iS. W. 4 cc 66 (7; bb 66 N. EK. il Noon “et S.W. 1 “e 6c “ce “cc “é 73 “é is “ce 2 ab calm |S.W. 4) “ ‘'S.W. 6/S.W. 3) S.W. 1] calm calm |S. W.2] -- - 4 Saal fe ts IS Wi Gs ab S. W. 1 “ a calm 6 bc “a “ce “ce S.W. 4 (73 calm “ce “ce Sa W. 1 6c 8 calm ot g « |S.W. 6|S.W: 4 Gs we S. W.1/8S.W.2!8. W.1 10 “ GB NS io: Ol 2 2 es S.W. 3 w a sf Ss. W. 1 w 12 « a ‘ft ss |S..W 4 es N. H. 1 a S. W. 3 a ae Hour 24th 25 26 27 28 29 30 3lst 9A.M.| S. W.1 | N.N.E.2|-N.E. 1 | N. EL 1 N. 1 calm E.N. E. 1 calm 4 6c N.N.E. 1 ob “ 6c 73 6c “cc 6 ag GG calm Me calm ee a6 W.N. W.1 8 a MY GG af ee a calm W.N. W. 2 10 N. E. 1 calm is |S. 8. E. 3 ub ac variable W.1 Noon st rf N. E. 1 N. 1 ee ue N. W. 1 N. W. 1 2 --- i calm N. EB. 2 fa 8.8. W.1| S.E. 1 E. 8. E.- - 4 N. E. 2 “ as N. HE. 1 s calm SEM ol saeco 6 |IN.N.E.38 “ ag W.1 es ap 8. 8. W. 2 | EH. by N.-- 8 es 8. HE. 1 N. E.1 | W.N.W. 1 oy : S.S. W. 4 | BE. by N. 2 10 | N.N.E. st ab calm os a 8.58. W. 3 E.- - 12 | N.N.E. 2 calm ab G8 ot variable | S.S. W. 2 | OF if if July 10,8 A.M. Blowing in squalls. ' After July 14, noon, the record is given in “sea days,” or astronomical reckoning, which is here changed to { civil reckoning. i DIRECTION AND FORCE OF WIND. 235 Method of Reduction. The same method of discussion will be employed here as that used for Dr. Kane’s and Sir F. L. McClintock’s observations. Let 6, 6, 65, .... be the angles which the direction of the wind makes with the meridian (true), reckoned round the horizon according to astronomical usage, from the south, westward to 360°, a direction corresponding to that of the rotation of the winds in the northern hemisphere; and %, 4%, 3 .« its respective velocities, which may be supposed expressed in miles per hour, “sil let the observations be made at equal intervals (for instance hourly), Adding up all velocity-numbers referring to the same wind during a given period (say one month), and representing these quantities by 5, 8, § .... the number of miles of air transferred bodily over the place of observation by winds from the southward is expressed by the formula. R, = 8, cos 6, + 8, cos @, + 83 cos 0; + - -- - and for winds from the westward R,, = &, sin 0,+ 8, sin 0, + Ss, sin 0; + -- - - The resulting quantity R, and the angle y) it forms with the meridian, are found by the expressions RoVR2+R and tany—— The general formule, in the case of eight principal directions 6, assume the fol- lowing convenient form :— R, =(S—N) + (SW—NE) V3 —(NW—SE) V3 R,=(W—E)+(SW—NE) V3 + (NW—SE) V3 where the letters S, SW, W, etc., represent the swm of all velocities expressed in miles per hour, during the given period, or the quantity of air moved in the direc- tions S, SW, W, etc., respectively. R, represents the total quantity of air trans- ported to the northward, and R,, the same transferred to the eastward. These formulz, for practical application, may be put in the following convenient form :— Let S—N =a SW— NE=e W—E=b NW— SE=d Then R, = R cos Ya + 0.707 (c—d) R,,= R sind + b + 0.707 (c+d) Since R, Rk, R_ represents the quantity of air passed over during the given period, in the direction 0° 90° »° respectively, we must, in order to find the average velocity for any resulting direction, divide by x or by the number of observations during that period; we then have We Th, ate and Va” n n n A particle of air which has left the place of observation at the commencement of the period — of a day, for instance — will be found at its close in a direction 180° +) and at a distance of R miles, equal to a movement with an average velocity of ue This supposes an equal and parallel motion of all particles passing n 936 RECORD AND RESULTS OF over the locality ; the length of the path described by each can be found by the summation of all the v’s (for each hour) during the period. The great variability in the direction and force of the wind demands long periods for which it may be desirable to bring out resulting values. A subdivision of the reduction into monthly periods has been found convenient.’ No special advantage would be gained by including more than eight directions, and in the few cases where such intermediate directions were recorded they will be referred to the nearest principal direction, and if midway between and occurring more than once, they will be referred alternately to the preceding and following direction. Occasional omissions in the record were supplied by interpolation; it is to be regretted that so many blanks occur in the column for force of the wind. The following table gives the sum of the velocity-numbers for each month and for each of the principal eight directions of wind; also the resulting numbers for each season of the year as deduced from bi-hourly observations by application of the preceding method. The numbers for August were interpolated by taking the mean of the July and September numbers. 0 1342 0 9 1440 12897 6 102 Quantity of air passed over the place of observation, during a year, 59861 miles ; at Van Rensselaer Harbor 12759, Baffin Bay 62993, and Port Kennedy 68103. Applying the formule for reduction to these numbers, they give the resulting quantity of air, R, passed over during the period, and its direction y. 1 A full illustration and example of the method of reduction will be found on page 63 of my reduction of Captain McClintock’s Meteorological Observations. Smithsonian Contributions to Knowledge, 1862, tee ali DIRECTION AND FORCE OF WIND. 2987 Resulting true direction. September October . November December January . February March April May June July August "A U0" tt atta Soh eco ttt | eS Se Autumn . Winter Spring Summer . 2244 a ca Year The resulting direction of the wind at Port Foulke during the period of one year is from the N. E. (true), which agrees with the general movement of the atmosphere in the Arctic regions as made out by Prof. J. H. Coffin ;' the resulting directions at Van Rensselaer’ $. $. W. nearly, and in Baffin Bay (latitude 72°.5, longitude 65°.8) N. W. by N. do not agree with this deduction, but whether this is owing to anoma- lous local influences, or whether it points to a modification of the law can only be: settled when a greater number of observations will have been discussed, at present it appears most likely due to local circumstances. Relative Frequency of each Wind and of Calms. The following table of numbers of relative frequency contains the number of entries, 2, of each wind and of calms. 1860. 1861 True =| is Hi direc- | me A a) th 4 tion. | Sept.| Oct. | Nov. | Dec. | Jan. | Feb. | Mar. |April| May | June) July anes 3 as a | lated < 5 a a 8. 0 | 12 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 6 3) 12 0 1 | 10 N. 28 2 3 0 0. | 33 6 0 0 2 5 16 3 | 33 6 | 23 W. 0 | 19 0 0 0 0 1 0 | 17 0 4 Pale Gs) 0 | 18 6 i. 2 0 0 0 5 4 0 0 0 0} 15 9 2 9 0 | 24 S. W. |] 15 | 58 | 37 | 45 | 34 | 34 | 41 | 97 | 46 |155 |130 72 |110 |118 |184 [357 N.E. |249 171 |199 189 |166 |170 |163 |177 |215 |110 | 83 | 166 |619 [525 |555 /859 |2 N.W.] 5 3 0 0 6 0 0 0 4 0 6 5 8 6 4) JI 8. HB. | 13 2 5 3 | 31 5 | 36 | 21 0 1 5 9 | 20] 39 | 57 | 15 Calms} 48 |105 |116 |135 |130 | 90 |124 | 65 | 90 | 91 j|118 90 |269 | 355 |279 \299 1 Twelfth meeting of the Am. Association, Baltimore, 1858. 2 See note on page 66 of Captain McClintock’s Meteorological Discussions, explaining the change from magnetic to true direction at this harbor. 938 RECORD AND RESULTS OF If we double the numbers in each column, we find the number of hours during which each wind blew, or during which it was calm, for each period. The pre- vailing wind is the N. E., next to it the S. W., while the relative frequency of the calms is between the two; all other winds are about equally unfrequent. Expressed in percentage the frequency of the N. E. is 47, of calms 27, of 5. W. 17, and for the six remaining directions on the average 15. Table of comparison of relative frequency of winds and calms. True direction. Port Foulke. /Van Rensselaer.| Baffin Bay. Port Kennedy. 8. : ° 5 9 5 3 23 410 243 44 S. W.. 5 D 0 . . 764 354 845 159 Wie 3 0 3 . 0 43 116 426 4&8 INE We : 0 : : . 29 330 1233 1670 N. 3 0 0 0 0 0 95 ~ 144 520 121 INES 0 f 0 3 0 2058 27 456 1104 E. : : . : : : 35 56 299 108 Sieble 0 0 : 0 131 411 503 114 Calms : 6 6 0 0 1202 2532 341 561 This table exhibits the extreme variations in the frequency of the winds at dif- ferent localities and in different years; at Van Rensselaer Harbor, with a northwest exposure, the N. E. wind is least frequent; at Port Foulke, with a west exposure, it is the most frequent wind. At the latter place the number of hours of calms is half that noted at the former place. Average Velocity of the Wind. The average velocity of each of the eight principal winds for each season and year 1s found by dividing the sum of the velocity numbers by n, or the number of entries during the period; the velocity is expressed in miles per hour, 5 ? True direction. Velocity. Dias 15 9 4 é HZ sm os co 2) elo fel noo oft Average velocity of all winds throughout the year 19 miles per hour, producing a moderately fresh breeze. ‘The average velocity of th2 air, taking also the number of calms into consideration, is 14 miles per hour. At Van Rensselaer Harbor the average velocity of all winds was 7, in Baffin Bay 17, and at Port Kennedy 18 miles per hour. ‘These numbers are not strictly comparable, since the velocity of the wind at each locality depends upon estimation. The velocities of the N. EK. and 8. W. winds alone are tolerably well ascertained, there being too few entries of other winds. DIRECTION AND FORCE OF WIND 239 With. respect to the application of the law of rotation of winds to this locality, the record, containing mostly N. E. and S. W. directions with many calms, does not appear to be sufficiently well suited to give value to any result that might be deduced. Occurrence and Duration of Storms. In the following list all storms are included during which the force of wind reached the conventional numbers 7 and 8. Date. Duration. Direction. Remarks. 1860. September1 . : : 16" N. E. as 4,5. : : 24 N. N. BE. Ge We, ML x 20 N. E. Barometer fell about 0.55. ae ME}, 2B, BO, 68 N. E. October 6,7,8 . : 48 S. W. Gb 13; 4) 16 N. E. Barometer fell about 0%. 4. i Ig). : ; 4 N. E. a 31, 1 : : 28 N. E. November 9, 10 ; : 18 N.E. and 8. W.| Barometer strongly affected; mer- cury rose 0.85 after the gale. us 14. 16 N. E. Barometer fell slowly. i 1G. 16 N. BE. Barometer fell gradually and slowly. « 22, 23 : 42 N. E. December 1. ; é 18 S. W. ed 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11 126 N. E. January 9 . : , 4 N. E. Barometer fell about 0.3. as 1S : : 10 N. E. Barometer fell about 07.45. February 9 . 5 : 8 N. E. Barometer fell about 0.85. af 24,25. F 42 N. E. and N. | Barometer slightly affected. April ey ee ; 14 S. W. ef 17 0 : 2 N. E. and 8. W.| Barometer rose 0.5 after the gale. i 293 Oe : 10 N. E. Barometer fell about 07.5. May BOL ae ib reat iets 2 N. E. June IG, iy ; 38 S. W. Barometer but little affected. ss 25,16 . : 42 S. W. July WG, ly ; 28 S. W. Of these 25 storms, which were recorded during 11 months, 19 came from the N. E., and 6 from the S. W.; their average duration was 26 hours. During more than one-half of these storms the barometer was not or very slightly affected. The storms appear more frequent in winter than in summer. None of the gales noted can be classed among the rotatory storms, excepting that of November 8 and 9, 1860, and that of April 17, 1861; during these two storms the wind shifted from N. E. to S. W., with an interval of calm in the latter case. APPENDIX. RECORD OF THE WEATHER AND MISCHLLANEOUS NOTKS. Record of the weather kept on board the schooner ‘‘ United States,” and at Port Foulke, North Greenland, between July 11, 1860, and October 9, 1861. 3 The state of the weather is indicated by the following letters (Beaufort’s notation) :— 6 blue sky. p passing showers. clouds (detached). q squally. d drizzling rain. r rain. J foggy. S snow. g gloomy. é thunder. h hail. u ugly (threatening) appearance. t lightning. v_ visibility, objects at a distance m misty (hazy). unusually visible. oO overcast. w wet (dew). z snow-drift. A bar (—) or a dot (.) under any letter augments its signification. In the following record the date adopted is that in accordance with civil reckoning; on the voyage out and on the home trip astronomical reckoning is used in the log-book, which has been changed accordingly. ! Beaufort’s notation is not employed in the records of the expedition, but the state of the weather is described in full. 31 December, 1865. ( 241 ) 242 RECORD OF THE WEATHER Left Boston Bay 54 A.M. July 10, 1869. Thermometer No. 7 was used to indi- cate the temperature of the air. Thermometer No. } 9 was used for temp. of water, the raean of all obser’s during | 24 hours is given. July 11, 1860. July 12. | Wind Att. | Temp.|Wea- Wind Att. | Temp.) Wea- BOHR D. and F. IEE ther. | air. |ther.}| D. and F. ee ther. | air. | ther. 2 | variable | - - -- -- |qr| W. 3 |29.85| 63° |[55°.0] 6 4 “cc ri isp al “ce 6c aii ey pion be 6 ‘ =- == -- b e .90 | 61 54.4 | “ 8 ae -- -- -- Oe | da Wo 8 .90 | 62 54.4] “ 10 N. -- -- -- @ f -- -- -- us Noon N. 3 aie -- -- a et -90 | 61 68.0] “ 2 W. 3 297.75) 67° | 64° f W. 2 30.00 | 68 95.0 | “ 4 wy ot) | OS) 63 sf ef 29.95 | 62 59 ny 6 2 80.10 | 63 58.5) ||“ .95 | 62 54 a 8 sf .10 | 63 56.5 | “ ff -90 | 58 54 fe 10 “ -- -- | 56.5 | “ ae ots} || Bh 52 <5 12 uf 29.80 | 63 56 ef « 95 | 57 53 G | At noon @=42° 24/ a=68° 05’ by obs’n. At noon 42° 36’ 65° 32/ by obs’n. 42. 29 68 24-by Dead reck. 421.338. 65) 25 DRE Temp. water 56°.2; W. var’n 3 pt. TW. 53°:5:5 Wi, Vi. 2 pt: July 13. July 14. ind Att. | Temp.) Wea- ind Att - } Hour ea F. Bar ther. ee ther. ne F. Bar. ther. ae Mie 2 W. 3 -- -- =< c |E.N. E.3)| 29.95 | 62 53 r 4 a 30.10 | 56 52 “ N. E. 3 -- -- -- a 6 G8 -- -- -- se ef 30.00 | 60 53 ) 8 os 115), |) (383 56.5 | m at 29.85 | 59 54.5 | “ 10 a -- -- -- “ |H. N. E. 2} 30.00 | 60 55 G Noon e 29.80 | 62 55 fs ta 00 | 60 54 b 2 S. 2 30.00 | 62 bysy,6) |) & var. 1 00 | 64 68 -- 4 of 00 | 68.5 | 55 2) oy 05 | 66 67 a9 6 a“ 29.90 | 60 55 “f calm 05 | 63 66 -- 8 S. E. 3 -95 | 60.5 | 56 r W. -- -- -- | -- 10 sf -95 | 63.5 | 54 ef se .10 | 62 60 -- 12 E.8. E. 3 .95 | 62 53 fe ff -- -- -- -- At noon 43° 00’ 63° 50’ by obs’n. 42 57 63 57 OD.R. Temp. water 55°.0; W. var’n 1 pt. At noon 43° 18’ 63° 00’ by obs’n. 43 07 62) 35 =D. R. T. W. 569.9; W. var. 1 pt. July 15. July 16. ind Att. | Temp.|Wea- Wind Att. | Temp.|Wea- | EOE ay tet F. IEDR ther. Be ther.} D. and F. Bar. ther. nee, ther. 2 calm 30.10 | 61.5 | 55 -- |H.N. E. 1} 30.00 | 60 54 0) 4 S 10 | 61.5 | 56 -- a -- -- -- 6 es 10 | 62 56 -- a 29.90 | 60 55 A 8 ef 10 | 62 57 -- a -- -- -- @ 10 a panes wie eS tee “e hes oa es ao “e } Noon oy -- -- -- -- “ -- -- -- -- 2 E. 8. E. -- -- -- m | W.S.W. 2 393)965: 64 b 4 |B.N.E.1 -10 | 62 56 ss os .85 | 65 65 . 6 sf -- -- -- CSN WESaWind .85 | 64 65 ae 8 Cr -- -- -- (0) i .80 | 63 57 ns 10 s -- -- -- a y -15 | 60 55.5 | m 12 ns -- -- -- “1 W.S.W. 4 -- -- -- ss At noon 43° 42’ 62° 17’ by obs’n. ASTON MO 2m LOl ce) wEv Temp. W. 569.6; W. var. 13 pts. - At noon 43° 53’ 61° 88’ by obs’n. 43 57 61 29 OD. R. T. W. 579.1; W. var. 14 pts. AND MISCELLANEOUS NOTES. 243 July 17. July 18. Wind Att. | Temp.) Wea- i 2 Bo D. and F. TEE ther. ane ther. De eee a oes Wee 2 W.S. W. 4 29.80 64° |52°.5] m == -- -- -- m 4 | W.S.W.5 .85 | 64 53 st --- -- -- -- ot 6 ae -15| 64 | 53 ss --- -- -- -- | “ 8 “s -70 | 65 55 a --- 297.90} 64° | 55° fs 10 A -70 | 62 58 es --- -80 | 64 54 eS Noon a -- -- == a --- 75 | 62 | 54 Mt 2 se 85 | 64 57 c calm 30.00 | 66 58 oe 4 if 85 | 63 57 “ * 00 | 65 -- oe 6 fs 80 | 63 56 i a 10 | 65 60 eS 8 if .80 | 63 55 m 4% .20 | 62 oi sf 10 =| W.S.W. 4 .80 | 63 54 G5" |) (Si Sh 1h, al .25 | 62 53 cs 12 | W.S.W. 1 .90 | 63 59 SSS 2) .29 | 63 52 “ At noon 45° 2’ 58° 26” by obs’n. At noon 45° 26’ 56° 47’ D. R. 45 ll 58 19 D: RR: IS Wo OBL T. W. 5389.1; W. var. 12 pts. July 19. July 20. Wind Att. | Temp.,.Wea-| Wind Att. | Temp.|Wea- Hour D. and F nn ther. | air. |ther.| D. and F. Bar ther Fie ther. 2 S. S. E. 2 | 30.20 | 62 52 m ,S.8. W. 5| 30.00 | 65 50 if July 19, 7 A.M., 4 “ 20 | 61 51 “ “ eee ae -- |- | sounding 27 fath’ms, 6 |. # 20/59.5|51 | « © 00) 3 GB | GOO enews | oe 8 |SS8E3!/ 95/59 |505| « « | 99.90|59 | 53 en nee, 10 S. 8S. EH. 4 20 | 59 X03) || a 90 | 60 53 TE Noon 80 | T2 Byl6) | ee 95 | 60 53 sf 2 8. S. W. 2 10) ) 675) 53 Ff \S.8.W. 4 -95 | 60 53 tf July 20,8 A. M.; 4 |8.8S. W. 1 00 | 68 53 @ ab .75 | 63 53 c | dense fog; made the 6 calm | 29.90/60.5/51 | “ “ ED IO SS ge CC eee 8) Se Siwen |) foo) 6-55) és 8064 |54 | « EE ee 10 sf .95 | 62 50 a fs -75 | 64 54 |frq 12 8.8. W. 3] 30.10! 62 49 a 5 80 | 63 53 se At noon 45° 45’ 55° 54’ by D. R. At noon 46° 38’ 53° 50/ by land fall. T. W. 51°.8; W. var. 22 pts. 46 21 54 08 D. R. T. W. 48°.3; W. var. 2+ pts. July 21. July 22. . Wind Att. |Temp.|Wea-| Wind Att. | Temp.) Wea- i 10mT D. and F. Bane ther. | air. |ther.} D. and F. ER ther. | air. | ther. 2 S.S.W.4] -- -- -- |rq| 8. W. 6 | 29.85 | 58 51 | fug| July 22,8 P. M., 4 cc 29.80 | 62 53.517 “ .80 | 58 51.5 | « variation 3 pt. W. 6 G 85 | 61 54 “ i“ Le ee sige « by sun. 8 oe .90 | 61 -- | fq ee cet | OY 52 x4 i 10 “ce eae os ae “ce “ 3 56 51 “cc Noon cf -- -- -- if me 45 | 58 Bye) || 8 2 8S. W. 5 95 | 69 3 AUG “ 30 | 56 52 b 4 ss 80 | 64 5 tf 35 | 57 52 on 6 ff 90 | 64 52 o N. W. 4 40 | 56 50 “ 8 S. W. 6 .80 | 63 53 ne “ sot | 5 47 S 10 oH .80 | 63 52 oe ss oa) | OY 47 af 12 ef .80 | 60 52 g a EDOM OO 46 ff At noon 47° 13’ 51° 20’ by D. R. At noon 50° 24’ 50° 55’ by D. R. T. W. 509.0; W. var. 24 pts. TT. W. 499.0; W. var. 3) pts. 244 RECORD OF THE WEATHER July 23. .| Wea- ther. - Wind D. and F. | .| Wea- ther. 29.50 15 80 es SO > bo fo) i=] NOADHLNWO ao b W.S.W. 6 29'".85 Ne Wert lc b “ce July 23, 8 P. M. saw first iceberg to the westward. At noon 52° 0’ 50° 42’ by obs’n. 52 49 51 07 ‘DR: T. W. 42°.6. At noon 54° 93’ 51° 17’ by obs’n. 54 26 ol 10 D. R. T. W. 42°.9; W. var. 32 pts. July 26. |Wea- ther. Wind D. and F. Att. 10 12 At noon 56° 48’ 51° 567 by obs’n. BG Sil Hills Gay Dy 1s ™. W. 44°15 W.. var. 32 pts. At noon 59° 02’ 52° 23’ by obs’n. 59 02 52) 21 D. RB. T W. 44°.0; W. var. 43 pts. July 27. July 28. .| Wea- ther. Wind D. and F. ther. Att. | 29.40 45 .50 10 ae 12 ae July 28,9 P. M. § saw a fog-bow. H At noon 61° 41’ 52° 39/ by D. R. T. W. 429.0; W. var. 5 pts. At noon 62° 28/ 52° 387 by obs’n. T. W. 41°.4; W. var. 5 pts. 62 52 52 37 D. R. AND MISCELLANEOUS July 30. NOTES. Wind D. and F. air. Temp.| Wea- ther. Wind D. and F. Att. Bar. ther. 37° 29275 4 on WOWAODFPNWSOCHRY by 6B — mm “ 8.8. W.8 8.8. W. 6 8.8. W.5 8.8. W.3 W.S.W. 4 297.35] 63° 34 37 37 38 42 40 38 37 38 July 29,10 A. M. | Passed an iceberg towards 8. E., dis- tant 13 mile. 6 P. M. Saw a fog bow, colors of the } spectrum easily dis- tinguished ; passed several icebergs. At noon 68° 35’ 53° 00 by obs’n. 63 31 52 45 D.R. T. W. 34°.6; W. var. 53 pts. 65 16 54 34 T. W. 399.0; W. var. 53 pts. D. R. July 31. Aug. 1. ther. Att. | Temp. lWea- kK ae =) 2 4 6 8 0 10) 2 4 6 8 0 2 es 38.5 at 10 P. M., saw southern shore of Disco Island. Aug. 1,10 A. M. Off west coast of Dis- co opposite Nord ther. ! July 31, 9 A. M. Saw several whales ; | Fiord. At noon 68° 4’ 55° 25’ by obs’n. 68 1 55 4 DR. T. W. 379.7; W. var. 6% pts. At noon 70° 10’ 54° 51’ by obs’n. DAR: 70 O07 54 58 Mt, Niko BESO: Aug. 2. W'S. W. 2 W.S.W.1 calm and light winds “cc 1 73 1 “ee Aug. 2, 6 A. M. A great number of j icebergs coming out } of Omenak Fiord to the E. and N. P.M. Stood along the coast off Swarte- hook peninsula. At noon 71° 17’.5 by obs’n. Ol Oil BHO WO? IO}; Les T. W. 36°.8; W. var. 7 pts. 246 RECORD OF THE WEATHER August 3. Off Swarte-hook ; calm and light airs. August 4. Near Kingatal: Island ; calm and light airs. August 5, noon. Light breeze from N. W.; took pilot on board, and entered Proven at midnight. August 12,4 A.M. Goi under way ; towed out of harbor. At 7 A.M. the carpenter found dead in his bunk. Wind N. W. (true), force 1 to 4 between 4 and noon; force 4 to 3 between noon and midnight. 6 P.M. Passed between the outer islands and sighted Upernavik Island. At 8 P. M. took pilot on board, and entered Danish Harbor at 10 P.M. Buried the body of the carpenter, the Danish priest officiating. August 16, noon to 5 P.M.. N.N. E. wind, force 2 to 1; calm till 9 A. M. of the 17th. Got under way at 4} P. M.; at 5 dropped anchor on account of southerly current. August 17. Got under way at 7 A. M., with a light northerly air. Calm from 4 P. M. till noon next day. August 18,19. Calm. Most of the time at anchor west of Kingitok Island. On the morning of August 20, commenced warping from iceberg to iceberg; towed the vessel for 4 miles; at 2 P.M. aN. W. wind rose; beat between the islands up to Tessusak. August 21,7 A.M. Reached Tessusak Harbor; moored vessel at the mouth of Little Harbor. August 22. Got under way at 4 P.M. August 23. At4 A.M. abreast of Horses Head, distant 5 miles. Wind S. W., force 4 between 4 A.M. and noon. At noon 8 miles west of Devil’s Thumb; wind 8. W. and W., force 4 to 2 between noon and midnight. August 24. August 25. Aug. 24. Much ice } in sight. 6 P.M. { RE ingaralyeod) Anal Att. 4 Cape Walker bears | Bama eiierl| ae aines| Dy ene ig | PE Ines ir. .| N. E. by E., and the | e | Peaked Hill N. by W. 99.90] 45°] 399 | -- | N.N.B.3)| -- Aug. 25, noon. ; Sailing through & small pieces of floe j ice towards Cape | York ; hove to close j under it; sent boat § ashore and brought j off Hans and family. j At 6 P.M. got under { way; stood close 4 along the land, sail- j ing through small § pieces of floe ice. | 30.00 45 On 1c] bo Or Or or Dt 09° TA tA In A A cstlesilsiicsla SB ek 5 to GO GO 0D ED CD CO OD 2) WOoWrrr br rp ! b At noon 75° 22’ 60° 40’ by obs’n. At noon 75° 53’ 67° 39’ by D. R. f 1 2 GO NSD, 1%, T. W. 32°.4. eu ZAG) 2 2h WG T. W. 340.0 Passed Wolstenholm i . o4°.0. : Island ; passed Cape § Perry at 9 A. M.§ Wind moderated ; j pi thick, with snow August 26. August 27. storm. 2 P.M. Pass- { i : ed Hakluyt Island ; § Bart : Hotes WCE Wind . Att. wind heavy; snow } air. | ther.| D. and F. ther. ¥ storm; no land in| Era @ sight; pack to the | S. JB ra north. -- 3 Aug. 27, 7 A. M.f -- | N.N.E.1 Cleared off, heading } h |N.N.E. 3 : towards the land} ee AG north of Cape San- § ; Ne oe marez, distant 127 “INNEL) . 2 miles. Tacked ship, { calm : stood along the land; § 6 3 Cape Alexander and | “ : Sutherland Island § 7 19 in sight. 3 P.M. N. 1B. 8 ‘ Towed the ship to- 2 wards Cape Alexan- | . ders delat. ae AE heavy gale from N. j Temp. W. 32°.1 Temp. W. 32°.8. ss SOEs wi) EIS) enly; hove to near ff pack at 10 P. M. AND MISCELLANEOUS NOTES. 247 D. and F. ther. | air. |ther.} D. and F. : ther. | air. | ther. 2 N. E. 8 -- -- -- |--|] N. E.8 -- -- so joc Aug. 28, 4 P. M. 4 “ a oe aie ee 7 ae ee a _. | Hove to 3 miles to 6 « = Sat A b rT; southward of Su- : : ae oe ~~ | 7 | therland Island. 8 29".70} 58° | 31° ri No E: 7 29.70 62° | 32° nie eon trouble in 10 es 10} 48 | 81 GB || IN, EG .60 |) 56 | 33 b | clearing numerous Noon u -80|} 60 | 31 se Io 1B (7 .60| 60 | 32.5 | “ | icebergs. Aug. 29. At noon half way between Cape Saumarez and Sutherland Island. i -80} 65 | 31 ie squally -60 | 54 | 31 f “ .80) 63 | 30 “from calms| .60) 70 | 32 us) s -80] 60 | 28 “| to heavy .60 | 64 | 380 ie gales -60| 70 | 32 -- Re woO oD > bl -~T So lor) e bo oo August 28. August 29. ane Wind pant Att. |Temp./Wea-| Wind Ban Att. | Temp.|Wea- T. W. 32°.7. TW 3 2959! Hour D. and F. * | ther. | air. |ther.| D. and F. ther. | air. |ther.| Dropped anchor in 4 = fathoms north end 2 squally -- -- -- |--| N. EB. 8 -- | -- -- | -- | of Little Bay N. of 4 ce o0 =- -- So GG 99.70} -- | 26 - - | Cape Saumarez. 6 « rail rom reel: ENG nine SENT leer 3), he Atagte SIM ONC NTS Vessel commenced 8 sf 29.70} 55 | 30 -- “ 15) 5% | 2355 | = - F : h . 10 “ “oO! GB |ao | 22 “ 801 OSI 2815) ||Brci leno genes ene Noon se 70} 65 | 30 -- cs 80| 65 | 23.5] 0 | rounded Cape Alex- 2 N. BH. 2 70) 61 | 30 = G6 80] 67 | 24 “| ander at 63 A. M.; |) Nees 3 70||-60 | 31 | -- Ke 80) 710) | 2405) | = || madethe pack auld 6 | N.E.6|] .70/ 50 | 81 | -- G 60 | G2 al | & | ence 8 N. E. 8 70) -- | 29 -- Ss .80| 69 | 24 Col fiby Cape, stood for 10 Os 70} -- | 27.5] -- : .80| 69 | 24 “| Crystal Palace Cliffs. 12 be -- -- -- --- j 19 -- August 30. August 31. Wind Rar Att. |Temp.,Wea-| _ Wind Bust Att. |Temp.|Wea-| Aug. 30, 3} A. M. We Son.0: j Te Wr 3ilo*0! | 248 RECORD OF THE WEATHER Record of the weather during September, 1860. Hour Ist 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10th 2g Ses oe Be ie Soo eens eae eae oo c Bisse bo 6 4 be --- 7s --- --- --- --- --- --- --- 6 “ce many Ae, Fee Ses Payee an ME US Wer ee rayon = SS See 8 oe m --- b --- == = b --- --- b 10 “e “ce ees en ey ae penne “cc ea lyS ens “cc Noon “ c ee 1s ei RAG if cc See cae 73 2 “ bm Nee hears Oy ie s “ 2a pasate 6 4 “ Brees ee ppt ARN Te “ sau aaa “ 6 b Rat see yin rope “ “ AS be su “ 8 “ ovaries ah ae apse. ia oe “c “ eee b q “ 10 bm --- --- --- --- --- ae --- --- be 12 i --- --- bm --- -- --- --- --- --- BROT OWL | ODEN). | PIO | CO | PRIS |) IO) WP OSLO I SOOO | SO] BOLO Hour 11th 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20th 2 --- ) b -- --- --- Cc bd b b 4 pid en ya! “c b q So oe b ) oO 66 6c “ 6 sm “cc ee De “cc “cc (0) qd bc bb 6“ 8 “ be “ Koes “ “ be bmrgq 6 bc 10 cc 66 “ce b Cc qd b Cc Cc b “ “ce iT Noon “cc b Cc qd “c bc “cc be 6c (0) “ce 3 2 bc se oc b q 3 “ce ce b Cc “ce “ce 4 “cc b Cc “ce “é “ce “ee “ce “ec “e “ 6 O “ “c “c b 6c 6c b 6c be if 8 “ “6 “ b m (0) “ce “ “e ce oO 10 cc bb b b m “ cb bc “ 1] 1D) a3 be “ b m “cc sc ce b m cc “ Hour 21st 22 23 24 25” 26 27 28 29 30th 2 Cc 0 C bq Sh 5 ==: b b 4 (0) a3 “a “cb “cc 0 po eee “ be be 6 bb “cc oe 6c b “cc i eee b 3 bc 8 s cq em “ --- a s i) o bm 10 its ra) b qd “ Sharam “a pele Oz (a) (73 Noon o be e @) --- . --- tf ie b 9 “ce “cc “cc v3 b “ Baers iT b m oe 4 oc b “ce b Cc (0) “cc Ss oc “ce “ 6 6c b Cc cc b Sr Fs 6c 6“ 6b b em be 8 st b se a c Os --- 0z4q bm a 10 oe “cc “ Cc SECS 6c eee “ b qd “cc 12 os m "ag a“ “ce Bares bc s b be “ce Sept. 1,7 A.M. The gale increasing, hove to 6 miles N. W. of Cape Alexander. 6 P.M. Made sail drifting to the southward of the Cape about 10 miles. Rounded Cape Alexander again at 11 P. M. ; western shore distinctly visible. Sept. 2, noon. Entered the pack 1 mile west of Littleton Island ; continued beating through pack west of island ; § anchored on north shore of Hartstene Bay at 4 P.M. in 7 fathoms. Sept. 3, 4,5. At anchor. Sept. 6, 10 A.M. Towed the vessel toward Littleton Island; stopped by ice at north end of channel between MecGary and Littleton Islands. Sept. 7. Came to anchor at 3} A.M. between island and bluff west side of winter harbor. Sept. 8. Commenced warping at 4 P. M. Sept. 9,8 A.M. Warping; at 5 P.M. moored the vessel in winter quarters, head to the east. Sept. 11. Small pancake ice on the water 6 P. M.; strong ice blink in the west at 10 P. M. Sept. 13. « Aurige very bright in N. W.; no other stars visible at 10; stars of second and third magnitude visible at 12. Sept. 14,18. Low mist bank near western horizon. Sept. 19,8 P.M. Pancake ice. Sept. 20, 6 P.M. Fog bank near western horizon. Sept. 21,10 A.M. Pancake ice. Sept. 22. Ice drifting in from outside; mist bank on west horizon. Sept. 23,5 A.M. Ice began moving, and at 6 had disappeared. Sept. Sept. Sept. Sept. Midnight, pulled out of the pack and made sail for Hartstene Bay. 24,10 P.M. Clouds in N. W. illuminated by twilight. 27, 8 A.M. Ice formed around the vessel nearly an inch thick. 28,10 A.M. Ice began drifting out of the harbor; 8 P.M. Fog bank near west horizon. 29, 30. Mist on west horizon. AND MISCELLANEOUS NOTES. : Q49 Record of the weather during October, 1860. Hour Ist 2 3 4 5 6 Cl 8 9 10th 2 b --- --- c osgd --- --- 4 oe b b “ac “cc Se oe “cc “cc at SA SS AS 6 ‘c “c (ts s “ Os Ts “ ee | = koe 8 6“ b Cc “ce “ “ce oO 6c ta) qd 0 b qd 10 “cc “ce b Cc ““ v3 “cc ““ “cc 6c Noon 79 t3 it) 0 bc “cc 6c os 6c 2, “a “cc oc ““c 6c bc (73 ch v3 b Cc 4 73 73 “ 3 cc “i (73 om q (3 3 6 “cc “i os “cc “c 08s 6 “c be “c 8 3 “ “c 13 aS ce “ce oq 3 “ 10 be qd OO --- “cc So “ 3 “ b q b 12 b “ ae 6 c m q “ bc ee tae Hour 11th 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20th 2 --- --- --- --- --- b --- b b 4 aes aay owict 2 es pet “ aie bc “cc “ce 6 apes fae eee mick ys yt s “ ay ie “ i “6 8 --- (0) og beg b Bo be be ws 10 b Cc os 3 b Cc “cc “ ee “cc “cc “ Noon bc 6c (Ts b 6c cb pees \ ta b bc“ “ 9 6c “ bc “ 73 “ aged PRY 3 6c cc 4 b ‘ be “ be “cc Boers “c “ Ot 6 73 “c 6c (13 73 “ be bc “ ie 8 3 ts) 73 cc tO) “ce b “cc 73 “ 10 “ be paper, “c bc ‘ ic 3 bc “ 12 “ch = (xtiex “ce » “c 73 Bere) es bc bc Hour 21st 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 sist 2 b to) b b b b --- b oq 7) b 4 bh “c t5) “cc bc 66 b (73 66 “ac oe 3 cc 3 “ “ “ 6 73 “ “ 6c 6 § bc 73 ay ABR bc b Cc b Cc b Cc “a (73 “cc so 10 3 “c be be “cc 6c ‘cc “ “c 0s 0 Noon “ 6c 6c 6b 6c “cc bc b Cc “ 6b 6c 9 be bc b 73 0 “cc bb be bb 6h “cc 4 (a) b Cc (vs sc 0s be bc “a be (0) “ 6 13 66 66 3 “ 6c “ 6c bc 66 b 8 “c b “ b 0 ‘6 b b “ 73 “c 10 6c c 13 “i (13 b 73 ‘ “c “ “ 12 os 6 6 bc b an oe «“ “cc oc G “ October 2. At noon ice forming upon the surface of the water. October 8,4 P.M. Heavy mist bank on 8. W. horizon. October 12, noon to 6 P.M. Snow 6} inches deep. 32 January, 1866. 250 RECORD OF THE WEATHER. Record of the weather during November, 1860. ‘ Hour Ast 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10th 2 b 7) b b --- b b “S$ b os 4 “ b “ c PER GG 66 tn) ‘6 6 “ 3 (v3 wi ee 66 66 “ “cc a 8 66 b Cc b Cc 3 Cc 66 oO 0s (73 oe 10 b Cc 1 bc 6 oe 6b 6c b Cc 66 66 Noon 6 6c fo) 6c 6c “c 66 0 66 3 9 13 6c 66 66 b b ec 6c 66 (3 6c 4 6c tn) é 6 13 G3 66 3 6 “ 6 bc 6c 6“ “ “ b 66 6c os 66 8 6c b b cc 66 “c os “ “ 10 bc 6 “ “ 66 73 73 6 73 13 12 “cc 6c 73 b 3 0 cope es b bcc “ Hour 11th 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20th 2 b b b b b b 4 66 6 bc 6b ‘6 6 ‘6 ‘eaux 66 a 6 6 6c “c 3 “ 6c 6 Susie. 66 “c 8 os ‘c be cb “ 73 os “ 6c 10 “c 66 6 tn) 73 “cc bc 6 6 “ Noon “ “ 66 be 66 be 6c 6c “ 7) ) “ 6c “ 66 6c O 6c 6 6 4 73 6c ‘6 6c oO 66 a 66 a oO 6 6c bb 66 3 b bc 66 be 6c 6c a 6c 66 “ bb 73 6c 8 ) be 10 66 “ 6 6 66 3 b 3 bc 66 12 eee | bc | é 6b lim 66 73 oye Va 13 66 Hour 21st 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30th 2 b b s s os rs 4 3 “ 13 “c O 6“ 6c ‘ “ 3 6 “b 73 6c “cc 66 “c 6c 6b bc 66 8 “ 6c cc “ “ 6 6 ‘6 b ro) 10 (73 bb be sb Ss 66 66 cb cc bc Noon 6“ “ 6c 6 6c “ 3 66 b ec 6c 2 cc 6 6 08s O 6 73 tn) “c “ 4 6c “ “c s 6 6c O rs 66 s 6 (3 “ 6c 6c 6“ be “ “ “c “ 8 “ (3 “c “ 6c “ 6c “ “ 10 6 “ 6 6b 6 “ s “c “c 6 12 6c “ Ts FMEA 6c “ “ 6 “ ee Ea r) AND MISCELLANEOUS NOTES. Q51 Record of the weather during December. Hour Ist 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10th 2 b ) O ) b 4 Erae “ “ce “ “ “i “ “c “ “ 6 oO “ iT & “c “ “c “ “ 7 @ | be “ “c “ “ “ “ “ “ “ 10 “c “ “ “ “cc “ “ “ “ “ Noon “ b “ “ tc 6c “c “ “c “c 9, “ “ “ “ 6 e “ “ ce te 4 “cc “ “ce to) “ 6c “ “ “ “ 6 ce “ “ “ cc “ 7: “ “c “c 8 “ O “cc “cc “ b “ “ “ “ 10 O 6c “ “ «cc “ “ “ce «“ “c 12 “ Cc “ “ “c “ “c eae aeayes bc Hour 11th 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20th 2 b b b b b s 4 6c 6“ “ “ “c 6c Oo “c “c “c 6 6c (73 “ “ce ce 66 os bc 6c b 8 oO b 6c “ “ 6 “c 6“ “c 10 3 7 66 6c “ 6 “ 6 “ 73 Noon ‘cc 6c 6c “ “c “ “ 66 be 6 9 6c “ “ce “c “ 6 “ 13 “ “ 4 6c “ce 6 6 “ 6 c 6 “ &“ 6 “i “ “ “cc 6c 3 Ts b “ “ 8 6c 6c “ “c 6 “ “ “ 6c “ 10 “ “ “ “ “c 6c “ 73 6c “c 12 73 G3 “ “cc “ c Pixel is “ s | s Hour 21st 22 23 24 2 | 26 27 28 29 30 31st 2 --- @) b b b 4 “c “ 6c “ oc “ “ “c ‘6 6 6 “c 6c “ Be “ 6c 6c “ “c 8 cc bb “ bb ee tye “ bc “ce “cc 3 10 6c “c “ “ 6c dats! “ “ “ “cc G Noon “c “ “c “ “c eae “ 6 & “c “ 9, “cc “ Bien ee “ “ b C 6c 6c “ 6c 7 4 “ce 6c ee “ 5 Ss “ ne 6 & 6 “ 6 be it3 Pane es ob mets bb ae 6c “ v3 “ 8 b “c wp Ve “ Ete “ Coe “c “ “ce “ 10 “ oO 0 & eae Races cep aks “ “ “ cc 12 “ce 6c s “ b «“ 7 “ “ 252 RECORD OF THE WEATHER Record of the weather during January, 1861. Hour 1st 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10th 2 b b b s b 4 66 3 66 66 b 66 6c s 6“ “ 6 66 “ “ 6c 66 “ 6 6 6c “ 8 66 6 6c 66 3 66 “ 6c “ce = 00 10 “ be 6c 6 13 6c “ b 66 “ Noon 66 6 73 ‘cb CG bc “ “ 6c be 9 “ ta) 6c “c “c “c “c bm “ bm 4 6“ 6b “c “c “ “c “ b 7 be 6 bb bb 1 6c 66 bc “ce 6c 73 bc (0) 8 6c 6 “ce “ “ “ “ 6c a om 10 19 66 “ “ 7 “c CG 6c “ s 12 “c b 6c s “c “c “ G “ ms Hour 11th 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20th 2 s b b b 4 “c “ 6c “ 6c “ “cc “ 1G 6 66 bb “cc “ce ‘cc ‘c oc “ “ 8 “ 6c 6c m “6 “ “ “cc 13 z 10 “c 6 zq b “ 6c 6 6b ‘ 6 Noon “ 6b “ 13 66 “ 6c “ be “ 9 tp) “cc “cc “cc “cc “cc “ “cc “ 4 “ 6 a3 “cc “cc “cc tc ‘cc “ “ 6 “ 6 “c “ 6 “ “ “ 6c 6c 8 “ 6c “ “cc c “ “ “ “c “ 10 “ bc s 6c bc “ “b “ 6 6c 12 b iG 6 “ “ “c ‘c 66 “ 3 Hour 21st 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31st 2 b m m os b 4 bc 66 6c 6c 6c 79 be “cc ce 79 “cc 6 “ “ “ “ oc 6c bc “c “ 6c “ 8 6c 6c “cc bm “ “c “c iG 0 “ “c 10 66 6c 6c b “ 3 sm “c be “ 6 Noon 6b bb oc 6c “cc “cc 6c“ “cc bc b m “ 9 66 6c 6c “ “ 6c “c m “c bc “ 4 “ “ cc “cc “cc O t) m b b 6c 6 6c “ ““ “ “ “ “c b 6c “ O 8 3 “c “cc “c “c “ b “c “ cc b 10 “cc “ “ “ e & 6c “ “c 3 “c 12 “ 6 6 “ “ “ “ “cc “ (3 “c January 5,6. Aurora (see magnetic paper). January 10,8 P.M. Heavy mist hanging over the ice. January 11. Heavy mist over the ice. Auroral display (see magnetic record). January 25. At noon read without an artificial light. January 28,2 P.M. Heavy mist bank on 8S. W. horizon. January 30, noon to2 P.M. Heavy mist in 8. W. AND MISCELLANEOUS NOTES. 253 Record of the weather during February, 1861. “ec “cc “cc “ “ “e “cr “ce “ Hour 1st 2 3 4 5 6 "/ 8 9 10th 2 b s b b s 4 sc “ee “cc “cc “ce “ “ “ 6 “ce (T3 3 “cc “ “cc “ce “ “ “ee 8 “cc $s “ec “ce “ce 73 “ce “ “ “ 10 “c “ce “ sc “cc “ce “cc “ ac “ce Noon “cc “ce 73 “ “ “ce iT; “ce Zz “ce 9 “ce (0) b Cc “ec “ce “ce 3 “ “cc ce 4 0 “ m “ce “ce “e “ 3 “e “ 6 s “ce b “ se “ce “ce “ “ “ 8 “cc b “ “ “ “ “e “e ce “ 0 2 “ce “ “ce “ce “ce “ce “c a Hour 11th 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20th 2 ) os b z b b b 4 3 “ “ “ (3 “ “ “ ‘c “ 6 “ce be a“ “ce “cc cc “cc “c bc a3 8 s “ “c “ “ “ “ “cc “c “ 10 6b “ “ “ 3 “ “ “ “ “ Noon “ce “ 6c “c “ “ Snes “c “cc 13 9 “c “ 3 6c “c “c s “ “ ce 4 “ “c “c cc “cc “ “ ce “ “ 6 “ b Zz “cc “ “c “ “ (73 “c 8 Zz “c “ “ “c “ “ “ “c “ 10 “i “ “c “ “ “c “ GG 3 “cc 12 “cc bc 6c 73 (73 cb b 79 3 ce Hour 21st 22 23 24 25 26 27 28th oOo eb “ee Ss “ce “ce “ce “ce “cc “cc 1 ce (0) “ce ce ae “ce “ce “ “é “ “ce (a3 “ “e “ce Noon be 9, “e “ce “ce te iz3 “e a3 “ce “e “e “e be “ce “ sc 4 (a) 6 ““ “ce “ ce “et “ce “ce “ce 8 “cc “ee (a3 “ce “ce “ce “ “ 10 ce “ “e cc ce “ce a3 “ “ce “cc “ce “ “ce ce 12 b s February 16,9 P.M. An aurora visible. February 18. Sun seen above the horizon. February 19. Mock moon observed at 4 A. M.; one image on either side of the moon about 20° distant. February 25,2 P.M. Sun shining on deck. 254 RECORD OF THE WEATHER Record of the weather during March, 1861. Hour 1st 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10th hi Y bc : 3 p “c 6c e 2 6 3 “c b cc “c “ e 6 “ ae ek: “ 8 6c (a) ra) ce oc bc bc (0) b Cc a3 10 6c “cc a3 bc b Cc “ ce “ce 6c b ce Noon b Cc 6c 6c 6c 6c “cc “cc cb b 0 9 Cc os 6c cc “c “ 6c 6c “ s 4 73 6c bc “ a “ “ 6c “ 6“ 6 “ cc “ “ 6 6c “ b “ be 8 Crshen 6c 6c “c “ “ “ “cc a3 10 “ “ “cc “ b 6 “cc “ “ 6c 12 b c “c cc cc “ “c “ “ “ Hour | 1th 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20th 2 b b b b b 4 6c 6c 6c “ “ & 66 6c “ “ 6 6 66 “cc “ “ “c a3 “ 6“ “ 8 Cc b “ 66 “c bc “ “ “ “e 10 “c 6 6 “cc be 66 66 6c “ 6c Noon b 6c “ Z “ 6c 3 “ “c & 9 bb 6b ob bb b bb (73 “cc oc bc 4 se “c “c “cc “cc 6c “cb “ “ “ 6 Zz bc 6c 6 (3 “c “c &c 73 8 66 bc a3 ob “ce “ 6c oc “ 6c 10 66 eV oo “ “cc 6b oc “cc “ “c “ 12 6 b 6“ b ‘6 6c “cc 66 “ a i Hour 21st 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31st 9, ose aa ue : : BO eR ea 2 a eee ne 6 “c “ 66 “ “ 6c &“ “ 3 “cc 8 oe b c “cc ob bc 6c oO Zz 6c Cz b c 10 & “c “ 6c bc “c 6 bc “cc “ Cc Noon “ “ 66 6c “ “c 73 66 6 bz 6c 9 “ “c “ “ “ bb “ “ z Cc “ 4 cc “ be “c 6c 6 “ oO zb Oo tf) 6 “ “ “a “ “ 7 “cc 66 “ “ 8 a bc “c 6c 6c GG (3 “ ze 6c 73 10 bc bc “cc 6c “ 66 “ “ “ c “ 12 6c “ “ O a) “ s b bh Sa b b March 31. Read at midnight without artificial light. AND MISCELLANEOUS NOTES. 255 Record of the weather during April, 1861. or SSCeOaREE =} a Noone bw — (o) WNOADFPWOCKAK LD =) 1 1 Hour 21st April 18. At noon snow melting on side of ship. 256 RECORD OF THE WEATHER Record of the weather during May, 1861. Hour Ist 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10th 2 b b b 8 b 4 6“ 66 ro) s iG “ “c 6 cc 6b 6 “ “ “ 66 “ a3 6c 6c 8 “c cc 6“ 6“ b “ 66 “ 6c “a 10 6“ cc b 66 66 66 66 66 b ts f Noon bc c 6 “ 3 “ c “ “cc 6c 2 “ 6c 6c “ “ “ “c 6“ 6“ 6c 4 6“ “c 3 “ “ Cc “ “ Ts “ 6 oc b “cc “ 6c b 19 “ 6c “c 8 cc “ bb 0 66 6c O “ “c 6c 10 “cc 6 6c “c “ 6c 6 “ “c 7 12 “cc c “cb 66 “ 3 & “ “c 3 a Hour 11th 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20th 2 b b 7) 4 “ 6c “ ‘c cc O a3 cc 3 cc 6 (a3 “ic 3 6c be 6c s 6c s bc 8 “c “ “c “c “i 3 sm os bc “ 10 “ “ “ “ 7 “ “cc 3 b “ f Noon “c “ a3 “ “c “ c “ a3 “c 5 9 “c “cc 3 “ tn) a3 “c “ce ce 6c 4 ‘ os ie = b m @ osm Cc fe 6 bc bc Cc oc “cc ce cc a b “cc 8 “ “c a3 “c Cc ms a3 6c “cc “ 10 3 6c 73 c tn) eri tan 3 bc “c c 12 “ “c b o b tn) 0 6c a3 6c Hour 21st 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31st 2 b ) --- bq 4 3 6c “c 6c 6c “c 3 Sige “ 6“ a] 6 b 6c “ “c “i 6c A ae “ “ b q 8 6c Cc 6c “c (73 “c “ c ‘ G3 “c “ “ “ 6c 6 73 bc 6c (3 “ 10 b Noon s “c “c “c 3 6c Cc s “ 7 “ 9 0 3 6c “cc “c “ 6c ta) 79 bc “ 4 6“ 13 “c “c 6c “ Cc “ es 6 6 “ “ 6 6c “cc cc 6 “ “ esq 6c 8 6“ 3 “ “ 6c “c b 6c 66 “c 66 10 “ Cc «“ 6c co Cc “ b “cc osqlilesq 12 “ “c “ “ 6c “b “c “cc 6“ Rie q May 12. Water running down the hills. May 16,4 and 6 P.M. Thick mist over the hills and over the ice. May 17,8 A.M. to 2 P.M., and 18, 4 P.M. to midnight. Mist bank in S. W AND MISCELLANEOUS NOTES. 257 Record of the weather during June, 1861. j | Hour 1st 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10th i o 2 b | 2 s 7) b 0 b b 4 “ “ce “ “ s “cc ‘c “ce “ce “ 6 “c “ cc ere, m “ b “ “c “c 8 “ c “ rs, ves “ isis “ “ “c “ 10 | Cc | “ “ce 0 “ Cc “c “cc ce 73 Noon “ce i a“ “ce “ce Oo 6c ““c “ ce “ce 0} “ 0. “cc ce Cc “ “cb “ “ec “ el “c “cc “ “ be cc “ “ “ Cc “ “ cc “ce “ “c “c “ 7 b 8 Ss cc t3 “ a3 “cc “cc sc 6“ “ 10~ c 3 “ce “ “ b “c c “ “ 12 b ““ os b “ “ “cb “ « Oo « j } i Hour 11th 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20th 2 @) b b --- 8 q sq 4 ““c “ 79 66 oe ares Mak “cc “cc bc oe 6 “cc “ “ “cc “c Bee “c “c “c b 8 s “c “c “ “c sq Rye et “ce s be 10 tn) 77 6 c “ “cc cq (3 cc “c # Noon “ 3 Cc “ 3 “ “ “ “ b 2 “cc s “cc “cc “cc “cc “cc “ce fp) ce 4 “c nS cs “ “ “ cc “c “ “ 6 “ae oc oc“ cc “e cc “cb cc 3 “ 8 “cc Cc qd b b “ “cc cc “ac 6c cb “ fab 13 (73 “cc 6c ‘ cc “ 5 “cc “c ce “ oa 2 s qo . q c Hour 21st 22, 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30th 2 b b 4 3 GG a3 66 “ “c 6c 6 7] “cc 6 “ “ “c Cc c “ “ “ Cc “ 8 13 Cc “ ore. “ “c “cc “c “ “ 10 bc bc “cc oO r bc ce “ce om r f Noon 6c 73 “cc “ “ “c 6c 7 r Myce D} 6c O “c “c cc 3 “c O “c om 4 “ c “ “c “c “ oO r s “ 6 “ aon e cc “cc “ 6c r ) bc i 8 c b Cc 3 cc 0 s 3 “cc 6“ { 10 c Cc “ “cc a3 Trams 66 cc “ r 12 =m «6 oO “c rq rq 6c b “c 0 June 28. Amount of rain and snow in 48 hours was found to be 0.44 of an inch. June 30. Amount of rain and snow fallen in 22 hours was found to be 0.25 of an inch. ; 33 January, 1866. 258 RECORD OF THE WEATHER Record of the weather during July, 1861. | | 320.4 | 350.1 | 339.8 | 35°.1 | 350.7 | . July 14,10 A.M. Unmoored ship and pulled out of Port Foulke. 7 P.M. Made fast to an iceberg one mile | south of Port Foulke. i July 15. Got under way at 1" 30" P.M.; made the open water at 2" 25™; stood towards Cape Isabella; a} thick fog coming on, moored in 3 fathoms water in channel between McGary and Littleton Islands. July 27, 103 A.M. Got under way and stood towards the west coast; observed latitude 78° 22’ N. among the || floe ice off Cape Isabella. At 53 P.M. (Green. time), in a line with Capes Ingersoll and Inglefield. July 28,3 A.M. Made fast to an iceberg. 6 A.M. Heading for first point south of Cape Isabella. 10 A.M. } Let go anchor, half a mile from shore, in a large bay ten miles south of Cape Isabella, in 9 fathoms water. New ice on surface of water. : } July 29,1 P.M. Up anchor and pulled through ice to the southward. At 3} becalmed; fastened to an iceberg j off Gale Point. 8 P.M. Cast off and commenced warping from floe to floe. 10 P.M. Many narwhals and seals | | in the vicinity of the schooner. At midnight opposite Paget Point met heavy pack ice ; kept along the margin of it. § July 30,6 A.M. Mattie Island bears W. by S.; Cape Faraday N. W. by W.; Gale Point N. by E. 7 P. M. Shut in with a thick fog; tacked ship, head toS. W. 11 P.M. Fell in with the pack stretching E. and W.; ; } wore ship to 8. E. July 31. Wore ship to N. at 10 A. M., Northumberland Island bears 8. E. AND MISCELLANEOUS NOTES. August 1, 1861. August 2. , Wind Att. | Temp.|Wea- ind Att. | Temp. = Hoots ||p: and |) 2 | than laine |then Daa P|) Ba | han ane yee 2 | ELS. EF |29.90) 46° | 32° | f calm |29'7.92| 479 | 39° | 6 4 Sy .80 | 45 33 6b |E.N.E.1 92 | 49 ANG ay |} OG 6 | E.S. EB. 2 .85 | 46.5 | 34.5 | e W. 1 3333) |) iil 42 ay 8 | ES. £.2 -90 | 38 34 b Gh aXe) |) 4383 46 ce 10 | B.S. B.1 .90 | 48 36 o a ~94 | 5] 43 AG | Noon S. 1 -85 | 49 36 Gs ff .85| -- | 88 GG 2 |N.N. E. 1} 30.00 | 50 35 “1 W.S.W. 2 .96 | 46 37 if 4 |E. by N. 1) 29.90] -- | 36 «| W.S. W. 1 .98 | 45 Be es 6 calm 295) | 5h 44 a os 30.00 | 53 oN 8 ae .95 | 51 45 «| N. N. BE. 1) 29.87 | 49 3b4 a 10 W. 97 | 49 40 “ |E.N. E. 2 -90 | 49 33 cu 12 calm .85 | 45 B(() || S. E. 1 90 | 52 32 if Temp. water, 35°.6. T. W. 36°.2 Aug. 1, 4 A. M.f.- Cape Sabine N. #E., } Cape IsabellaN 3 W. | 6 A.M. Mittie Is- land N. W. by W., | Cape Faraday N.W. 2 N., Cape Isabella | N. by E., Coburg Is- land W.S. W., high land on east coast N. E. by E. Aug. 2, 83 A. M. Commander went | ashore ; returned at 11 A.M. At 2P.M. south part of Hak- luyt Island bears 8. (mag.?). 4 P. M., § south point of North- umberland Island S. by W. (mag.). August 3.! -| Wea- ther. Wind D. and F. 2 |N.N.E.3/ 29.95/52 |32 | A 4 “ 85/50 |32.5| f 6 aoe 80/53 |3 “ 8 calm $755 188 | B 0 2 Ss. 1 2/58 By.) || 4 papers = es pS “cc 6 S.S. E. 1 .88 | 55 4] 6 8 INo 1}. I .85 | 53 4] ag 10 ‘“ .87 | 55 43 ft 12 ealm 92) | 53 AM) |, N. E. “cc cc calm calm sc Aug. 4, At anchor. 4S We Sse.) August 6. Wind D. and F. Att. ther. in Att. | Temp.|Wea- ) Eloae i aaa IE ther aint ther. 2 N. W. 2 | 29.98 | 50 38 b 4 N. W. 1 .90 | 50 37 ss 6 a 30.00 | 51 45 ee , 8 oe 29.96 | 52 47 ue fF 10 ch 30.00 | 50 45 Us f Noon a 29.96 | 48 4] ‘s 2 IN. EE 2 .94 | 48 AIG) by || 46 4 Ie J8E aL .95 | 49 48 at 6 N. HE. 3 -96 | 50 46 s | Ne Js, al 95/50 | 46 a 10 “ .90/ 53 | 43 % 12 Gb .88 | 52 39 OG calm oc 1 Remarks noted at end of month’s record. 260 RECORD OF THE WEATHER August 8. August 7.. Wind Att. | Temp. Wea-| Wind Att. | Temp.|Wea- HOES D. and F. a. ther. | air. | ther.} D. and F. IEE ther. | air. | ther. ; 2 Si Oe | aae Sa Hula a, 1 OMEN SEIU c¢ | Aug. 8. Got under | & IN a es me ab ae aah “ 97 | 56 39.5 | 6 | way at 10 A. M. 6 --6 -- -- -- | -- calm 98 58 42 ae ae Ue a tat 8 calm 293.92] 54° | 479.5) b N. 1 -97 | 58 42.5 | “ sland bears 8. E. 7 10 e-- -- -- -- | -- 30.00 | 55 43 “| by E. 3 E., and south Noon calm 95 | 54 41.5 | b a 29.98 | 54 43 «| point of Netlik bears f Pagid a 93 5S oA Tia Mt Wee) NASON S| N54) ei yAlluen acts | Scape eure dey NE el 95063 | 49) Wowie Rookge 5814 ete) a iace, WeaPohamayDedr uo) i" rs ; be INW.1/ 30.09 - i E. (true) distance j 6 -93 | 54 45 N.N.W. 1; 30.02 | 57 46 1 mile; at 43 Fitz-§ 8 calm .91 | 56 42 os aS 00} -- | 46 ‘« | clarence rock bears 10 af .98 | 52 43 ss N. EH. -O1 | 56 42 «| E. (three miles). 4) j 12 “c .93 | 58 41 Cc “ 00 | 55 838 i oe P. M. Commander j went ashore. ARS NAYS BUSSE) MUS ANE Beso. August 9. August 10. i i 1 } Wind Att. Temp. Wea- Wind y Att. | Temp. Wea- Hous D. and F. PER ther. | air. |ther.] D. and F. aR ther. na ther. 2 calm |29.90155 139 | c |E.S.E.1/99.80/51 |38 | 5 | Aug 9) 4 a. mi 4 a SO) BS | BOB i -75 | 50 40 « | Strong current set- 6 i |) BR ISL) |) eisiae BO) Sle A ae oe cieape see malt 8 “ E9054.) | 48 alas a 82) (50) WA Re | a een ee aie 10 Sn .90 | 53 49 oa INES Wied .90 | 54 42.5} “ | southern part of | Noon 87 | 53 48 SOOTINIS Wi 4 .92 | 54 40 «« | Saunders Island S. 4 2 a 90/53 |45 |e KE. 6 80/54 | 44 |be Thee sree a a | y “ . . ape § 4 . ae ay | BS) 47 b i .80 | 50 38 ¢ | Party N. 3. sont 6 oD SS) 2G 85 | 1 37.5 point of Wolsten- § 8 8. 1 87 | 54 AEDs Ieee q .90 | 53 40.5] b | holmS. B.S. Fitz- | 10 |W.S.W. 2 Se OS 42 @ ee ~15 | 52 39 «| clarence Rock N.N. § 12 a 92/52 | 40.81 “ a 30) oe |B 0G | Bb eee AEWidoee0: At noon obser’d lat. 76° 12/ Long. by chr. 70 53 Varn, 106° W. TT. W. 38°.4 August 11. August 12, { Wind \ Att. | Temp.) Wea- Wind Att. | Temp.|Wea- i Hour D. and F. Ba ther. | air. |ther.| D. and F. Bar ther. Sa ther. 2 E. 6 29.82 | 50 39.5 | 6 | INN. BE3 )29:0i% | 53 33 b Aug. 11. At mid- 4 uf .80 | 48 40 ‘i us .80 | 52 BiG), 1). neh porizoutree of | “ “ “cc Q 6c ice from N. E. to S. 6 i 90 47 a ; .70 | 48 8 W. At 9} A. MI 8 90 | 50 39) 75 | 49 34 J | made the pack, ran | 10 « -80 | 50 35 “ GG -15 | 50 36 “| along the margin to} Noon gf 70 | 52 36 ce WUNEING EI: .70 ) 50.5 | 86 “| the south; entered } ry UNG a5) fo) | || Bierebs, | fae .80 | 53.5 | 35 «| the ice at 103. ; 4 “ 80/58) 40) | Wa) INO We Wj e82) 60.5) 845 aoe nes ee 6 es WneOS 38 a calm BOM OO 33 a haling bark “ q 8 |N.NE.4| .74|60 |36 | « “ m8 85.) | 8th e a |isex her veered 10 sf OM ROS 35 ss Ms POON O2Dal OleOle cei ene. ) 12 ge 15 | 54 32.5 | “ JN. by W. 1) .901 49.5 | 3 af Obs’d lat, 74° 19’ At noon lat. by D. R. 74° 097 long. 66 00 at noon long. 60 16 T. W. 35°.0. W. var. 74 pts. T. W. 349.9. - AND MISCELLANEOUS NOTES. 261 August 13. August 14. } Wind Att. |Temp. Wea-| Wind Att. | Temp.|Wea- Hour D. and F. eR: ther. | air. "| ther.]| D. and F. LE ther. ee ther. 2 |W.S.W.1 |29.80] 48° | 33° if W.1 29.68) 57° | 37° o | Aug.13. At 7} A.M. | 4 | variable of | 43 BB WB || IN, IB, a 053 | 8 «| made the land bear- | 6 |W.S.W.1l| .70/48 |34 | « | calm SELON) ks TC UUBE | | SE One) 8 . -78 | 50 36 s a -80 | 57 47 “| island in sight bears } 10 a 10 | 53 38 a) “s 2) | 92 | 4 “ |N. E. by N. 3 N. 4 Noon “ ool jl Ae 40 Cc ff .85 | 54 45.5 | “ | (true). 2 P. M. | 2 |E.N.E.1| .80/64 | 40.5 if SO RSAC A dag) | anes OU 4 ae -88 | 68 39 ff ce -70 | 50.5 | 41 “ an: | 6 E, SONGS [eo | |) MLS] ho /be6 25 |e |e ree 8 me TT | 62 39 s zt -75 | 50 40.5 | “ | Upernavik Harbor. | 10 variable -75 | 66 37 s Ss of) |) Bil 38 ee 12 if .85 | 62 BO || © a .80 | 50 36 gs Lat. by obs’n, 73° 40/ 1 se ANS Long. by chr. 58 46 ee. W. var. 80°. T. W. 39°.4. Aug. 15. Aug. 16 Wind Att. |Temp./Wea-| Wind Att. | Temp.|Wea- BOEE D. and F. IED ther. | air. | ther.] D. and F. ni ther. | air. | ther. 2 calm 29.85 | 52 35 b | N. W.1 | 30.05 | 60 35 m 4 a .80 | 52 S35), 08) || i 29.95 | 58 36 b 6 ef -15 | 50 33 s oe 30.00 | 49 36 of 8 « 70 | 50 42 ee a 29.99 | 55 39 ‘ f 10 oa 80 | 50 48 ws S awit || BY 44 if Noon “ -- -- | 52 a « .98 | 58 oo || & 2 N. HE. 1 -90 | 52 52 ff calm .90 | 56 51 * 4 “ .95 | 50.5 | 50.5) “ | E.N.#E.1 -50 | 54 50 ‘e 6 --- .90 | 51 41 a a -80 | 51 50 sf 8 --- 30.10 | 60 38.5 | “ a -90 | 56 41.8] “ 10 --- .05 | 60 -- a ss .92 | 54 ep) || © 12 N. W. 2 .10 | 60 BIE || 77 i .95 | 52 36 at 40S Vio BOS, Wt, We, GI® 8%, August 17. August 18. ; Wind Att. | Temp.|Wea- Wind Att. | Temp.|Wea- Hour D. and F ae ther. ee ther.| D. and F. IEE ther. | air. | ther. 2 |H.N. H.1] 29.94 | 58 36.5] ¢ PS DS 20 oe ao 4 H .95 | 58 36 “| E.N.E. 1 | 29.90 | 52.5 | 37 b 6 He 38) |) 683 45 “ =<-- =l< 5 no ef 8 ‘ -92 | 53 45 b --- -- -- | 39 H 10 calm .92 | 54 55 fs Coo O° o¢ O° cy H Noon | E.N.E. 1 .90 | 51.5] -- MY --- -- -- | 43 Hy 2 a 93 | 55 51 ce oe: -- oo Saye hens 4 --- -- -- COS INE We 52.929 bu ok 39.5 | -- 6 \H.N.E.1 .82 | 51.5 | 48 af Coc eo a0 oo oe 8 y 85 | 51 42 | NEW 8T | 52 38 -- 10 ees ore she! Pe “ae one a6 5a oc oO 12 --- -- -- | 82 ee N. W. -80 | 53 36 -- wes T. W. 40°.1. T. W. 36°.8. | RECORD OF THE WEATHER a August 19. August 20. | Wind Att. |Temp.)Wea-| Wind . Att. | Temp. Hour D. and F. Bar. ther air. | ther.| D. and F. Bar. ther. | air. 9 SoS 50 oo are =a Aas So MSE ae 4 N. W. -- =- | 36°. |= = calm Se -- | 36° 6 Oe, zie ae ml Nhe hee Ase Loe ae 8 INQ We 1292286) 5093 -- calm 29'-78| 52° | 36 # 610 --- -- -- -- -- --- -- -- -- f Noon | N. W. aud | 49 BOLO coe calm 76 | 49 38 a) aes ate aie ee er aS Bae ie ae 4 calm .82 | 48 44. -- --- -75 | 50 36 6 Lave ae Us. ere Kees wae ie si ae 8 calm -81 | 52.5 | 41 -- --- -- -- | 35 10 --- -- -- -- -- --- -- -- -- 12 calm -- oo || Bo) -- --- -- -- | 35 T. W. 88°.8. Wiese os August 21. August 22. Wind Att. | Temp.|Wea-| | Wind Att. | Temp. Hour D. and F. Bar. ther ad ther.| D. and F. om ther. | air. 2g Ree ie an eam ig oe ye a her Joe Aes Memon ech y all be Wieser « Tae eae 1 8 --- 29.78 | 55 37.5) == | IN. Be 1 | 29572)) 52 37 # 10 --- -- -- -- -- --- -- -- -- k Noon | N. W. 1 72 | 56 A = oie |} ING 10, a 68 | 49 41 H 9 ooo 5.0 -- 56 BS bo -- = eae) 4 --- 69 | 52 40 == Ne 68) 47 45 6 oe a =e Ee Nes ues ae ag fis 8 --- .710 | 52 39 -- N. 1 -- -- | 35 10 --- -- -- -- a6 --= -- -- -- 12 N. W. 1 .67 | 54 BX950) pos Neel: .65 | 40 BE T. W. 38°.3. August 23. August 24. Wind D. and F. | Bar. Temp. Wea- ther. Wind D. and F. Att. Bar ther. N. 1 -- N.1 A 1 bo! TA URS) -T Ct) A, bo 1 1 40 41 oo io =—t! bo hr TW 3923. MWe 3 Soo: AND MISCELLANEOUS NOTES. September 5. September 6. Hour AAs Oo SOS H bo 5 wWwooan-,b a D. and F. Wind Att. Bar. ther. | Temp. Wea- Wind es Att. D. and F. | Bar ther. 11 | 38 air. | ther. BQ | co 9 Oe 2 oO 8. -- -- S. W. 1 /29!. 95) 50°.5 N. 1 81 | 47.5 --- 19 | 47.5 Temp.| Wea- air. | ther. age es 33 b 34.5 | ¢ 31 -- 28 -- Wks Wo Bros te Ube Wie BI2.0, September 7. September 8. Wind Att. | Temp.) Wea- Wind Att. | T . Wea- Hour D. Saal KF. Bar. ther. nine liners D. ea EF. Bar. - ther. sae laren 2 ates oe se Boal be aa ud ac Soe aes 4 - 2-8 -- -- 27 -- --- -- -- | 82 -- 6 --- 29.80 | 51 32 -- --- -- -- -- -- 8 --- -- -- -- -- S. HE. 4 | 29.72 | 50.5 | 37 b 10 --- 86 | 58 34 -- --- -- -- -- Noon --- -- -- -- |--| 8. BE. 4 65 | 50.5 | 39 b D) Pues a un es Ce: aie ae ee onli 4 W. 1 .91 | 55 34.5 | - - S. E. 4 otiKs) || 24 41 -- 6 Ss ae Sd = sea lesa Digs ae ae Seales 8 S. E. 2 -- -- | 34 G S. E. -- -- | 39 -- 10 --- -- -- -- -- --- -- -- -- -- 12 --- -- -- 13 -- calm | -- -- | 38 -- de Wo BUCK: T. W. 37°.3. Hour September 9. September 10. Wind - Att. D. and F. Bar. ther. Bie WNOOADPNWS5 OCOD bl n i S.E. 3 | 29.52 | 52.5 SE4| .52| 55 S.E1| 62/595 Sees elles Temp.|Wea- air. | ther. 37 -- 41 @ 43 0g Ay jl oe oe en 43 -- Wind Att. D. and F. Bar. ther. S. W. 3 | 29.65 | 50 --- 63 | 58 Sh 10, a | 0) B98 air. | ther. Ai |e 45 b 43.5 | -- 34 T. W. 39°.4. January, 1866." 266 RECORD OF THE WEATHER September 11. September 12. Wind Att. Wea- Wind Att. D. and F. ther. ther.} D. and F. * | ther. 29'".65 _ le or a \) 29, 85 15 84 » \ie . 70 A ° S = 87 S. E. -- bo So OS > bO — T. W.. 390.4. September 13. September 14. Wind | Bar Att. Wea- Wind Att. D. and F. : ther. ther.} D. and F. * | ther. MNS No BSS, Me WiYo B60) September 15. September 16. H Wind Att. Wea- Wind Att. our | Dp. and F. . ther. . |ther.| D. and F. ther. +t AND MISCELLANEOUS NOTES. 26 | September 17. | September 18. Wind Att. |Temp.|Wea-| | Wind Att. |'Temp.|Wea- Hour, D. and F. Bar. ther. | air. | ther.}| D. and F. Bar. ther Sie ines 2 --- -- -- -- | -- calm |29'.40; 52° | 379 | o Sept. 17, 95 A. M. 4 --- -- so | © oo |] iS 1a Wl 45 | 56 39 « | Stood out of the 6 28 ee hail Pe | eeceae eer] | aca DE CBO Se Sie Wetellpereoe ee uous 4 ec jo ie | S.E.1 fpoera) ag f35 | ==) 60/59 | 35.5) « Sypdhisieman “rata ooo oo ae ee ate ce F 37 “ ' Noon | N.N.W.1 -90 | 47 39 -- h .50 | 47 37 ce ae INfo Ih -50 | 45 37 b | E.N.E. 4 40 | 48 a8 {fe 4 N. 2 .60 | 50 a4 || 30 | 47 37 a 6 sf .50 | 52 36 o | E.N.E. 7 -50 | 45 35 GB 8 |N.N.W.1 .65 | 56 36 ie is -45 | 50 35 @ 10 N. .50 | 55.5 | 40 GG |) ING 1B, 40 | 53 35 ag 12 calm ot || B83 3 sf 45 | 52 36 sr T. W. 87°.0. At noon lat: 68° 15’; long. 54° 53/ T. W. 36°.8. September 19. September 20. H Wind Att. |Temp.|Wea-| Wind Att. | Temp.|Wea- {sone D. and F. Bar ther. | air. [es D. and F. Bar. ther. | air. | ther. 9 | N.E.8 | 29.50/50 |35 |sr| N.E.5 |29.70|46 |35 | s | Sept. 20. Water} 4 “ 50 | 49 35 “ “ 15 | 45 35 « |thermometer No. 2} 6 « AB Aig BA |e “ 110 || AB | 85 og. || ee a ce 8 “ 40/49 |32 | « « 0 | 255 || B48 || 10 so .50 | 49 35 ff ‘s -50 | 47 35 a6 Noon se 45 | 50 8X55) || @ .60 | 47 40 cq 2 N. E. 7 .10 | 48 36 «| E.N.E. 4 .15 | 49 87 i 4 GG .10 | 49 36 i OY -78 | 50 35.5 | r 6 | E.N.E. 6 .65 | 50 BY) |} -O se -10 | 50.5 | 86.5! e 8 ee .60 | 49 37 se a .80 1 57 35 ag 10 N. EH. 5 .55 | 50 35 He ee .60 | 53 36 oe 12 Se .70 | 50 33 ce | E.N.H.5 .68 | 50 36 06 At noon lat. 64° 50’ by D. R. At noon lat. 62° 39/ long. 56 25 long. 56 20 MY, WiYo BOP. Ie W.. var: 59°; T. W. 39° 2. September 21. September 22. | ind Att. | Temp.) Wea- Wind Att. mp. a Hour aa F. Bar. ther. ee ines D. and F. Bar. es ae ey H 2 |B. N. B. | 29.60/50 | 36 ec |N.N. E -- -- |.36 Cc H 640 «(| ELN.E. 7 55 | 50 37 ‘e o -- -- | 36.5 |eq f 6 | H.N.E.8 60 | 50 37 i oe 29.70 | 51 36 a os rf 60 | 50 31 iP N. 60 | 55 36 a8 H 610 sf 75 | 50 37 H --- .65 | 53 37 G6 | Noon a 60/50 | 38 c --- -70 | 50.5 | 387.5 | h J | ASL INTIS, 7 50 | 50 37 0g Ie Uf .60 | 50 37 c 4 N. E. 60, 51 3 c 70 50 3 Gb 6 | N.N. E. 50 | 50 Bi “1 N. W. 6 60 | 57.5 | 37 if 8 | EH. N. E. 70 | 54 Bia} f 70 | 55 37 GG 10 | N E. 65 54 3 if N.5 70 | 54 37 ff 18} | ae 75 654.5 | 37 e a 80 | 50 87 G6 At noon lat. 59° 23’ by D. R. At noon lat. 56° 28/ long. 55 00 long. 52 56 Wi vars 5 Oo a Wesa0io59: W. var. 44°; T. W.. 40°.7. 268 RECORD OF THE WEATHER September 23. September 24. 5 5 ‘mp./Wea-| Wind sa i ther.| D. and F. 999.75 8. B. 5 |30.10 i 3 Sept. 23. At3 P.M. passed an iceberg j about 5 miles dis- j tant. Rainbow seen. | Sept. 24. At mid- jf night drifted past jf a small iceberg. Bar. At noon lat. 54° 42/ At noon lat. 53° 27’ by D. R. long. 51 48 long. 52 24 W. var. 46°; T. W. 48°.7. W. var. 38°; T. W. 42°.7. September 25. September 26. Wind 0 .|Wea-| Wind D. and F. ther. ir. |ther.| D. and F. N. W. : W.N.W.7 ‘ W.N.W. 8 1 A } 4 i 6 # 8 } 10 ! Noon eae 4 6 8 0 2 SH W.N.W.5 At noon lat. 52°57’ by D. R. At noon lat. 52° 26’ by D. R. long. 51 45 long: 51 12 W. var. 36°; T. W. 43°.3. Wi. var: 33°; T. Wr 439°4) September 27. September 28. Att. -/Wea- Wind | Att. Temp. ther. ir. | ther.} D. and F. Tee | stlvenss| eras 56 W. by N. 54 bc Lyn ¢ 6c 53 cc W. by 8. = tA ° WOMDRENWS CHDHDND =) W. “é W.S.W. 2 var. W. by §. — 46 At noon lat. 49° 5’; long. 48° 55’ At noon lat. 47° 42’; lone. 48° 5/ We var330) DW aiil3: W. var 33°; W. 46°.4. AND MISCELLANEOUS NOTES. 269 September 29. September 30. Wind Att. |Temp.|/Wea-| Wind Att. | Temp.| Wea- HO D. and F. Bare ther. ey ther.}| D. and F. Bare ther ed ther 2 | W.S.W. 2/2995] 57° | 50° | f IN.W.by W./30™.05/61°.5 | 54° | ¢ 4 s .98 | 58 50 co | ENE NEA Ve .10 | 59 54 -- 6 | W.by S. | 30.05 | 58 51.5 | - - ss 00 | 50 53 if 8 |W. by 8. 2 95 | 56 53 ss 00 | 54 54 c 10 W.S.W. | 30.00 | 58 54 CoN PNEINEWere 00 | 53 50 b Noon e 10 | 57 55 as re 05 | 52 AUS) || 2 W. 3 29.90 | 59.5 | 56 “I N.N.W. 2 15 | 52 48.5 | ¢ 4 |W. by S. 3) 30.00 | 58 56 a ff 20 | 54.5 | 50 @ 6 |S.W.by W 10 | 59 56 r \N.W.byW 00 | 55 50 is 8 “ .20 | 62 56 «| N. W. 2 | 29.95 | 55 51 as 10 |W.S.W. 2 -15 | 61.5 | 55 “ IN.W.byW.) 30.05 | 56 50 -- 12 |W.byS. 2] .10 |} 52 55 o | N. W. 2 .10 | 55.5 | 50 -- At noon lat. 47°19’ by D. RB. At noon obs’d lat. 46° 54/ long. 49 27 Clones 5039 W. var. 30°; T. W. 50°.7. W. var. 27°; T. W. 51°.6. October 1, 1861. October 2. Wind . | Temp.|Wea- ind Att. | Temp.|Wea- 1storaP D. and F. Bar. ee ne ther. Dosa 15° |]. Bar. ther. ai ther. 2 | N.W.byN.| 30.00 | 55 50 bc |N.W.by W.4/30. 24 | 55 51 Cc Oct. 1. At noon 4 “ 00 | 54 50 “ “ 10) 55 5] «| cast of lead gave 43 § 6 |N.N.W.4/ 29.90/53 |47 | ¢ ‘ O58, |B OS eve ae 8 |N.N.W.3| 30.10/53 |48 | 5 | N.W. 50) By BB | Eg IN | 10 N. -15 | 52 49 oi N. W. 3 .00| 54 53 ““ | Spoke brig “Liver- | ! Noon “ 201 53 49 Cc “ .00) 55 53 G6 pool,’’ 2} P.M. spoke § 2 NN Wel) O64 NAGS weNc Wed) COS) |G |) Eee So Eo 4 --- 00/52 |48 | “« |NW.byW.6] .20/59 |56 | -- | -9™s°™ 6 var. .23 | 52 48 « | N.N. W. .05) 58 55 -- 8 INE We 121929555 49 “ UN.W. by N.| .10) 58 56 Cc 10 | N. N. W. | 30.10 | 55 52 qr N. 2 .16| 60 55 s 12 o 10 | 55 52 -- i 20) 60 55 es At noon lat. 45° 21’ by obs’n At noon lat. 44° 92’ by obs’n long. 52 36 long. 53 55 W. var. 25°; J. W. 55°]. W. var. 27°; T. W. 58°.9 October 3. October 4. H ind Att. | Temp. a- Wind Att. | Temp.|Wea- Eton Tee m | 22 |) ghee, ie ee D. and F, | B4™ | ther. Bie ther. 2 N. 30.25 | 60 55 -- 8. W. | 29.90 | 68 63) Ir gl 4 N.1 .20 | 60 54 - - | W. by N. .80 | 67 63 se 6 calm 10 | 61 53 o |W.by N. 3} 80.00 | 65 61 b 8 S. S. HE. .00 | 60 54 e |W.N.W.2) .05 | 64 59 ee f 10 S. W. 2 | 29.90°| 59 59 ‘s .10 | 62 56 -- F Noon | 8S. W. 4 .88 | 62 62 0 ss 05/62 | 59 -- H 2 |S.W.byS.4) .85 | 64 62 rq| N.W. | 29.90) 61 63 ) 4 b. W. 3 505) 4] Bt 63 be oe .90 | 61 63 ss 6 W.S.W. .90 | 67 64 o 'N.N.W. 4) .82) 60 55 a 8 |W.S.W. 4 395) |, ¢O 64 e |N.W.byW.| .95 | 60.5 | 55 Tr 10 | W.S.W. 2} 30.05 | 70 64 b | N. by W. -80 | 57 52 a 12 st 29.98 | 69 33 es a .80 | 57 52 o- Si At noon lat. 43° 35’ by D. R. At noon lat. 44° 18’ by obs’n lone. 55 02 : long. 55 00 W. var. 26°; TW. 62°°7. Wo ver, BER ANS Mie BEE, | 270 RECORD OF THE WEATHER. October 5. October 6. Wind Att. |Temp.|Wea-| Wind Att. | Temp.|Wea- |, ekouts D. and F IER ther. | air. |/ther.| D. and F. IE ther air. | ther, 2 No 8B [POE73) BB | BRS c NEB 1 1B 0.25)1579°5)| bo | ve Oct. 6, 5; P. Mig 4 “ £801) Bbe 52) pe Si ae 30) N58 2a i ee Ree aa tse) esos || eo) mle jo |e eo 7 8 i .80 | 55 51 e | B.S. EB. 00 | 59 o4 r | ing nosparson board H 610 ce .80 | 54 52 7) S. 4 .20 | 59 59 c | to repair damages. # Noon ss .80 | 54 51 ot é¢ .28 | 63 61 a fF 2 |N.by W. 4] 30.10 | 54 52.5] e |S. by W.4| .25]| 68 62.5 | “ 4 ef US) 1595) 51 es 5.8. W. .30 | 67 6425 ||“ 6 se .20 | 55 50 -- ie .20 | 67 64 0) 8 + .10 | 56 49 --{5S. WwW. 4 -40 | 66 65 a 10 | N.N.E.3 .30 | 56 51 c ay .10 | 65.5 | 64 b 12 N. EH. 2 35 | 57 51 as i .20 | 62 G3qon |e At noon lat. 43° 27’ by obs’n At noon lat. 43° 05’ by D. CR. long. 56 51 long. 59 28 W. var. 93°. T. W. 58°.8 W. var. 22°; T. W. 68°.4. October 7. October 8. Oct.7,3 P.M. Spoke | bark “Regina.” 4] f P.M. No bottom Wind Att. |Temp.|/Wea-| Wind Att. | Temp.|Wea-| _~ ; j Hour | p. and F Bar. | ther. | air. |ther.| D. and F. Bar. | ther. | air. peer Pa sano 2 BEE |/30130) fedy Kel alone | ae icalmy 030024) NES an | Clay i |e eee 4 |SW.byS.5| .20/62 |58 | « a OB G2 1 C0 0. eae an Gomi 6 ss .30 | 64 62 ss K. 10 | 65 60 “| lead; no bottom ; 65 § ! 8 of .25 | 65 63 “| W. by S. .15 | 64 58 fF | fathoms. i i 10 e 2ONGT | G4r ae E. IN) G8. 4, BS} | West BE INO | Noon |W.S.W.5| .30/66 |65 |o | E.2 600,68) || 5B) te renee ete ea | 2 Ss. W. .20 | 66 63 f \E.S. B. 2) 10} 62 BRO) Ie SF ay tay sarae Saterl 4 uf .20 | 65 62 Ke .06 | 61 57 “| coral, gravel, & shell. 6 |W. by 8.2) .20)65 | 61 «| 8. by E. -10| 62 | 59 “| 0h 25m P.M. Dense } 8 |W.S.W.1| .15|63 | 60 “ 18.8. W.3] .10] 63 | 60 «| fog; made the/land:4 10 “ 20/62 |60 | « « LO GB GO «0 || Beast Se i lar Wie 19 “ S168 G0 [6 a Weeeo G8 (GO. le (eee eee | «At noon lat. 43° 45’ by D. R. At noon lat. 44° 05’ by D. R. long. 63 20 long. 64 31 W. var. 22°; T. W. 59°.5 W. var. 14 pts.; T. W. 57°.9. October 9. H Wind Att. | Temp. Wea- Hour D. and E. Ban ther ae ther. ! 2 |N.N.W. 3} 29.85 | 61.5 | 61 r Oct: OR Moots: 4 N. .90 | 60 60 “ pilot on board ; en- “ “ tered Halifax Har- : N. E.3 eae 5 2p is bor; at anchor until } . H. 3 | 29.90 | 6 52 Oct. 19. 10 “ .85 | 61 53 ee | Noon ae 30.20 | 57 B15) || i T. W..56°:7: 4 1861. October 19. 1 P.M. Stood out of the harbor. i 20, At noon lat. 43° 14’ by obs’n; long. 64° 32/ \ Ce GN G2) I ai “” 66 22 ; Pen an coy sty oc “69 27 PUBLISHED BY THE SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION, WASHINGTON, D. C. June, 1867. Came) Nae Nis eg Sire 2 ee a ip e ‘ i BBR eS miu) ai Ay Ai HANG frat Ay REAM ae CHR 4 ati a Nom Pevey ingot tent I, PRE Eth Ke. PAS A CMT a De eT Pe ey OC hy CL Mn A ee A CMI: SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION LIBRARIE: [—hurd L 9088 01421 0231 ite ea btiey toile hi Wp Wary awe bet bena bor pepe ay gk ee elaitecemausnticagcr ein iet al tenet ecis eer a fecene ite tee Reais WML a aeala arte erate Bie tN CL men ipnt Mili tetas bith alsa! eatin Hota win pk ita tpiva HAY wi uh Ae MY weet ia COOP Br ee se Bi ae ee hn WAGE EMA Ow bp HP toe mentee ened mse QonMLGM ee FB aviiel yy k fhaaee me fader Sie dome) Mh HMM Carnahe Mi E Mini Ete vey s Butbe eHow BONEN eR Mtg Ht we Sih bikee ys yea es erie ye Cijhen epi t TOMAAN RGR TIO oe Ps eM en Wyn y pane hopin ge gba rege i peebayened unre ditregafyety pray dake Be Meee ekg iost egy Were ih hacan Weattiecb ae aie tebg | lg peiineb few SYNE TOY PACER te RITE D RINE A OMAN PoNctieecchtr eM ane CeBTMNTHD MPL M pe Beneh Ri he tusR yet hehe benemcar Orble 7 Ibe C ache ialonanpr FAyIW Hh AT QuQ Men Weg fee k SUA RNa ANEMTQ hep dicdbetvepvert ae MEA) ai te COROT CON TO Se aT SU ae Metall men site hunetiitie Repcosieyseniti fe ANT) sas am Ma dec giag edewe @ Watitarm Lan eatatiete doy ly a incre yes perinrt cbetey Revew Piealeen awe Weviansnnpei adie A fen Fey gte be ao eth WW Wocasintniniee Mig ine awl ite Gi iyratjeMinl tie Vig alae oti py ie gnaw Wea yn Wo theese ela penned fraten sae idvegs We Conwy ag Og io pee see kop wie Vee ean lat peunne ale on bebe bP teeta ner AP Darn ubvibvern yivwlayinsies clnewt 6 Mseerat Da Ricans hen 4h oBANef FM WHF ANA CECE CEN SILTY aie mand dy aa ie ons fH) pede siteName LTA H a eitnae in Ad wa) winfhiniy Vins atiehy igbibee ines Aeneas ia We NTeNMay Sonepat ACHE AL HW Aion ca vy DO ae ‘ ne iN eben at cah WHEL Aye WANED Pwinilee mininamee fopapiee wang heme met by miele ie jpeg | ane fe yl a yeasty iY Mie AihehiNie vam hy Sete sen op IAeRe Ya F SUYTORY Meno Cater Whee Qe haere WE. hae, na) Hy ete I ne i ae feet te sbewnindicergsie ear he eihs Rhtvat sme ene wt Se hs Raker he ty Ree eT Hagin tergity Sa thep rebrand thee rd ih Wien tntereiytarey ala nat i tege bbe mat Seer Sarre Ce CT aT rane I pongtern Hew bt WPA EEA TARE CI EID Cer p aE DETAIL Mel sm me peut kel gbatE en he hT at ein es pin esinnes entra vary HHH AL bese te doomed Pa ie lwey et yee ea Guy hs ey WHER DUN pT BTN ye aeh ' tates RM DUATA Baur a wily aay SUA Re HO nS AT RA Yo wee i ft ye Ruth (OAM aM(NeLeL H ten MH h eit apres Lemeentteh Hea ite EOD CE Wb Ny wey AVE He Mimawige he Mbt any a Nt ee a te i mh H ACC st Wield pe ne Hee eatcqenesies itn peutary lect ies Meu te (ote z Oye pipe DoTHoe AY gyrate ie Ren teNe true Cott Sed CMTE be UMA I at We re O Ce elated pene prey Chena isthigcaier ave nents rn rememmintde te pore wise meatchemedite sears HA LIA AH pats Wiabacnae itung lwy igor Mi Nice AD Mevegieyiotamene nition etint eur ded Ooh ed Siti rec ns i acetal tee me petri ty yey ae td yt vet es AUNeHHe brated deetew sa grbe AAPOR ATES Me AAT tia Mee neh MN ANBLATn Owe so fie bea ee pent Hse Yt iden yous ATE ANTS teeta ge mpiieetery (Ws Me AcH onan Oba iAlceeMisep er NN AE KH ALE Boe te Hee cte ye Magen dearceurpetiay te Wetieegone bel ae fae Gide SCOR RN ean cn a , tee Meee EAE NS Hia AMO hetwatiea NMIOUN on yaeaMRR Mea Abe emia ences cistaueN iN Weipheatelaneearhen ye TUBE sin Sri enna eh Th NY ‘ fy A anc wisie pute n RIM wt inh gH AN ch fit ader cM fT) to arf aveR fy aitHe eh Pie midis ube lata titen: aie ge ay ties siete k mete (et Peek WMH HnimiAi HAVER DING) Himivor nde WM uew hile preantieneg Mt ieet Wg ehla sige eFanatoy wba Wey ys (henge tbe : AWM MN RSW laurel mya! AltA s\C a mee NIM Gola \ieNI ie MPN em bee eye md pope ys ‘ f Him a inne ieee po plgem f Avis " we Pt wpe Line ye rote Writs CTX ASH ttn bmi sant bedrvaNt bene dieere Ales hin C Le Tne Arr AD Bert tS RRS Nene Sree Mite Uke F ay ‘ { ‘ Aras taubad porary ivan paineysmcan dh baoubes ny) Paty le alta Ney ale peetepeas paetirkie igwen Alea Mae MD AMIS veel Me hte Cae Reh LGR LU Reps Revi tey rica nice te bee pet ae yal rhe Mriyene vate be aI eer TATE eye Nyy ft yeild ivy uty Hnavetatp rhea bei AAR RO RCO eS ne re he An ve es diate ete iano ctace els die hea OCHRE CEN NY {rie ecb ela tret rt oe noe eae boll pat etastylae BO i \ i sivaa\ han yh anther antaraylyape tq Hat Siabpysi tellin s He bly teeing Wiesner tk My ‘ ' 4 ea nism ALN ebm Data ud val AN aga A Macarena oe PETE Sra tate A i. eas nenit Haha KATA Mr vlad aie a SS DO LN 1 (hooray : in eee : ’ K AY) Tepe te Ra 5 . ‘ antint : Hhthy vette vin alee i yy beeveae Said ihc aah ann Ch / / uh Cae alae tpn Hate Win Aytestais pet Vi DORM OLAS RMA y Tea eehtn ah OtenNg nigven Aish i ihe Bee a pr gti ORE TRUS ne a i Wen aes 8 eta et ea ) Haibane WN quite th ang ity Pies aha pe Cau ! ‘ RE Se aes! WASSER UGTA TH ‘ A gu MRO ‘ sh Mista Wy Pike Nn D eae Ah fesk ale alt at elediiiny “a i LOUD WE fasts i TACOMA a TIS Pe PRU ae ei Heda ary it A ley Deen UTON i Hud ORC Ne AARC BE ' PAN ea the agian Catt 4 (Lene te Rae er sie igtahe i PARRA RO NPL Aaah WUnisbrguak C tied esa hed vit Cutt, Reason aay 4 eaten nen yn RAE Oe igiaht URE teary MUR . oa teen xi i i rie Te Pe nr a vit i BBR iat BA Whe Ni Wests ih WE tis tay ek ae NAW o Mt aN asa rye td a \ IN ROU crt “ . Sen a Rea META ASG ay TEORTE RED URN ‘ Wen CE eA OA Ba (lay vr , Sudan Uae Hy CMR OA WUVONMI Urb EE Td Ana grRDU CUO Oe Or i SRE se ate ‘i Hite CHEM MR Aten mi BRATS OS Ce ee A Sa MEUIET UE vikvbesy ateGi}cq sage LEGS elit ao aa Aa HN iNeuuubrailaraae (owen une tne ane (cee i SRR Gah ATW asd sae tt Wadi ae tg i quent 4 Nott SINK RATA ASC Ie thee t ASH bie CINCHER TTA REA NANO Cas r Wa WUE R O AC ERE Mal bees o : ' ath ee ih wc taelh ALRITE Ne TC EU GANT CUM CMi eQLGNP EL Maa Tal Cte Vth Ky Chie iy urran iS NN cat ADR Naat Ad Ca Avert wa Wogsl Syn ais SONI RE ODO bon t RCH DL a Ae NaH PUR Cabd UC ORE CR U us Race HRI Ved TROND oy oa eryragrey bela attgey Sy cana aU NER eRU GENUS SAA ANC Soy ieueau ature UREN eaten Nee WECM LIEAA ORL IY ORG UGH ody ata ANG Le MARY BA HO Reds ckgy WAC ESSA Aaa FU eA VAC TARA I( a i COPTIC IEAY RUSH EIN TEP Hae Shp al sehh @ POCA MOLE asad ag CASULA wt. 4) 4 Roe MUthundl WH YRC Rea MMeL acer dlnen Macungie lay SDS aD NVA UGeU tS 8 ay LW ith hny PARTE CaO Mtg NUE CEG Ur be A bot PCT Ce REM TERT OR wy bach ta AWE TURAN ay SSAA aE Tn oO IN VSICOLTRU WMT NDR PRE CLT OEM ET PON DEC 8 ROR BROTH Sees it Wei NSC ks 8 CaneeeCAMGaaly Nua temas cae petatee Uta taanetNTTcaN atten hea ttaK Atch Gee ASE ROOT RRC UTN CC DOMED OR CC RONNIE PII RS VaU EAR AM oe ao eo Oe Tk no OO ve RRA CRO CCM OUT (Wit ae re Mudie cle Gera A AE RNA Ch TTA ee MA CMC NG Ua EDC BATE Wake UU UK Ut tei DROS DUTT TIO I DET YY A Lik SKUUOCHURL RCRA Foro TH a Ae NU Ce UE age TE MEE ICG dl WAM Re HOLT DO OUMNH SuH I PORTO ECR ROR NOCD AS AME UGH ME AACA EA ial Aud (UOUHIAMAR UA sai Aube ay Ut \ POMC De OO NS aM AG A) AC Aca atau USM ask RMAC RM OT OST OO A dentahanatali( ain MaMa AT UUMRONRUA sete Mien Mie i Alndis WLP sh Wd bey AW Wegehede ole d PUNSMi HL MEA AUN sae Wyse Vaasa tty wee UoUey kt ana yen isla, a aU aN ( ys SRC MOOR en Nagin da tt ‘tat EMR RRM RIRYE ATH Or MDP HREM Be i RA Oe a " ROR WE EMME CR etree ettetish et aw uteuul PUTER ST Be Ae CC oC Me EAT RUT OA CCS Rt HANTS aad vecpreseanitrodracest asics Nive Yea beat Grrr Mean at Vi ont BUENA ACR IN PCO Kt ut AC aesdiaiselangh ty ibaa i lly PRACT Tn Tee AV I Bits Qe ARes la Wee AW) Weld CaO SOR UIC PC A a Weiiow oe shied Dees in) SYP Teta tea etre he Ne NOT Me r) OTN wali Py) Ao ANU Nt Ni ‘ Cy ar aes Da) Vi bab 4 wi « Syn a itu WA Ny Al esa UA easton ti it it " NTR A ee nT HO OD ¢ f sys iN ASAE ML tanaresGalhu wnt Nout peng AT Nt nit CO an a walitasteaseatsieecalytel Metso UN esiuicatant may oi ante t iti ‘ De cnn: Waste aye Wh Nyy eth Wout wioteen tel Ve gteed MHRA CRO HH eA TCT Doe nee DSN a ORR A PAS DOMINOS Coan) Saar yw PN chit twcuseet cue Weve tiie Why ceanediietag Ad Queen AresbeceraneuctnecG ed secce a seeliteun Cnt eed BIRTHS AON CH ATC TN TURCICMONC ROTOR TOR Do Be an eT cn Tr ea A ORAS Re UC COSC RCO ESO Da Nal Mae Ollge Ue . SAAN hiner tt nareesisy Jere anand Co RRC a Ae Ate Ete YANG ani 4 TAMMALISUO MUI N AM RNG Medicine net Uaiak aeataNg ke H wae “rw ia A et WECM EEE ADR GEOL ATL We Weare PME MT by ii apa ts ASCs m eb tirtl hye ALA ay lag get Air COMUNE aOR ay LAL TA vt alee abr tt 4 wee DESMO at thy bgt Rite ty MOY 4 Pela srer ue MeN LY! PR laut hk re tina va aay SNe mae Uy Sante t DUIS Tr De SOE ED wig iat COR Oa aC ene tot urossteciataed Aru douiionkldinliicd a aliialay vesdeed RMA i We eat a i evans Witney iy bsi) Aeiearaienteey tee ke Uaioe sey Wea Rec a vines MAAN eda Ge Huot i WV Ea\at Set Mae Wve ah) Ved ENOTES tt AON SAA ny “ ‘| TT MN iat eit AGMA eH Bo 41 Hivaeyevr sii uN) cth os (ashen Agr asyelicenicatice BM cisd at Py Wat PrUWE OO Cer tyme eel bie et Wet bavapie CG bie mabe d tbo AT DOTA NT Sina deta cecatieqem ouetie te ee Ul Qeelid Hala Sew avai Haj IN ewe Wie ADHD Na rite “ \ gana a Wid HUN EAT Th Rn ava Alaiye wna AG ae dedtia A ca COMO VO OU A ey Erk Bam eeb LV Au a Me IEMA Peo Maieainy we rea Ah ear aie ity iy \ DHRC KCI NRW KOR EO TN ar Alea Wc dararten dita eg RTT RNAS DAT ER A TOT a Satta aN a See ee ati eke cnieie Cibo be MeACAC RAE hibvehal eth CGN L dtd ARS ua AME AeA ett ; TW ILOMAUA, QU ILDre DE eM GRECO Tea ee uy eW deka CN A ed NAIK i Meanie NYC MY ORNS A Veer ee ma ieee tee d COO CR ni ANN AN en orate Apres esusi Ge a ( Tes nL ad Rea ate halevieaian sales sue qy 8 Neitee ry poate a ne ahtes Teh aN COA 2 Uae eal HUTS nites ten) sie aa beitah asl) WAN ig " wk aAween " Wie bsG A cum lye War bek ah i NMRA WAanoul ne any rere soos owt t PATA TIN ORK BE a Atos stan yanenl bart ho Orilisgananentna eden ante se RS yA Ms ete PC NRC coe vn na Rd RRO YOY MRC DEM (A MROR eat OCT Pee asa Ng lea! aug iy wha NH Ath Ny Wieisbeg sin gaara OTT STOTT AL TE TPR PERERA Te LoCo Te TERR MDC TT TT PO AW yy suiansdl ash Cth Paki Gey PCR GNYELVS RCA ERAT BTL RS PTY REN TEC CTA YR OO DC wt vay Wien hier Use RSA AUK Utiieth ah WE KLAUS Crise hanes deed Beds teg whey AL OU We OTE AIAG LANALECUHE WOE APPL Le Und brtests Lage CITT CEI PROWL GSU CORK IP OR Oe eee beh Recah e ie eed SADC CO RCA ECU ved eee) PYAR IN RUDE CRATE SCH RAE CORATE Oca Te usu lneal baa ba OI TNA ete Ce TERA COMMU Dn tated ( ats HAY Ten a SAIS RLM GR HOR URSA SAA Ea haart CUAL At wae RR AN HRs ty Me ey a. ie HAA i) 14 OW HER HG a ii (Ope Wie be AL Vee ed iv on) A heey way iH ‘ i i bee here a “aia iy NaTesnsO Nas Sea iauainy AUN ONUI MERE AN COCA ERI HAT TT Wh rer ae MN eel hy SHUR ROC ORCC iit PO ‘ly Aiea AY ? Fin Suva DUC Or a a QsAteAt deoMt QUIETER USUE Hcy eC Uke yy BU EW A RCT MEER RS OR a ASOT RSE NN Gene OM aire ayant sea Wanye eqaca taste inetd hatte Ree oo CO Ona eae HN iit Mis eLeITANSIMMTMSRIAO MCU ATG TIALOT TUN ERSTMRINUS “aA NUea iy Anny a Wilbiragunge ds Hy DOCK UR ACO Cae NEMA RON } AOD Ni eth he mmaavetiarar us areiey RRNA rh Ne RA NU Haaeuiinaty A a stab aeay AR ANS \ vee HE CAN UC totcietared Mia Matccletne A se at PLN HEARTH RRR ATTN PANT CR ; hg ethers § On ely Aruna Pt AN at teh ‘ itary / " AISA Ate bay an tet ut A BA PI ‘ DIORA ie Miley NUTR TH RCM CROAT TT wet ans eMC A jeeylli Gectue Get decd LVN Rona Hulda CORR any A i i OAMARU mis ina a eed ugar ranting Gaur: bana Weteaytiegecry tase aD iube asle AT Anan env A TMC Me Nea ER Ca Pa ANAS ARONA Ne i SAGA ASAE MS UAT in MT Be Ki tacit ah Na ORR ORR Ca SO teh rT Ot IME TP OTT TTB DO TTC nant CLONAL A QIU SOV RIETRRUORRRTTH ROHD KO Waa a Nae WANE ETUC OW Cr an bance QU AE Bet QoHE Hage iy\ Fae eae hate Meat eaten ween iy i Aw NON Ai Wea aly til al yeeen on wad UIE ANH ASA Ut eS Pa HY CARTAN HEA DASA Na ee aes tat HseWiesbaea mati Ri aN Eye it siwinnvisareci snare eve tr Sata eal cee sini tay ‘ne A held tae Rue ates usieanntaeyiniy gedaan ital Seas Ney ' INCI PY MTGE COMORES WOM TN CTC Da ATC at Pn AR ONO PT CR eT WU ee HS Wb et teat invent Atel pase a gy eh eC uli a ego RUAN MMR MN ty DEN Re eR TM A WRATH At GRE RRR MIR Cah SA t WW NAL ty Ted CCT CRRA Os SOO Hater lau \ue teat pone PACH DLN A FG) oat mt an Sy Reece ea vanneulinsg wi iW Mi au + ete ase nt CHIRAC AMHR NMR a} Me Me ele nn TUT GUM R a aa 6H naite okay i iesien ite ERISA CRT TT TT ee ate a isasaturnertanican CAMARA TRU OCC GRO CURS CL LAA ur a AEA SOR Te aC aA Dit ANH 4 AL OOD DURT ROS OO OR OO WANG at FT RACGP CME On RHUL A OO a way We A Thee oS wayne Fee erate fe enpace bt ea vin POR ROT a Me eae CONAN AI URURR TBE COM ACU OAHU A DNRC A TROT OT HANAN RAT ah Nye NUNN Ae ary Wt 1 ORE A Datorerat veiw ROUTH EDO A Wi tm iatie Sa eC We OC a a ve Hash Hiatt sh Gly PRN Rn MY We me ee AO ATA Aa ae ey AH ‘ None wees kee Tie) WAH Da RT tira! Oey Ninauitenstiete Evy thst POMBO CC CA SET NIN th ea ORY oe RL ate us ir oe AU AND Ao vt alien bene) Wi jereue ny DOM RD AM NERS YH RAT HT Pen Oa OY COMIC RHO a waa ae ‘ seth adele tate at wg aay Wa Ieee vege Us Sew ak whe RATS TK MC Me My PU WHC AE ICU eI LUU We Me (mp tem ie prely Soe ctu deh ae vercar teat tiae etal Ary oinacume atusee uliete) OUTRO DT Wen ible here WIC GY ripen pees Vi at neds i | i mys RN 4 eaeoruinioe Vieashn aed i ui vr eating he eee lg tay eT A Wk CR Cae aay ash sition et a Sana ata Salata eetlira at Abeeninteoe sting ORNS eta PAA HT TIA SL eves ealhlye War tient * ey APU A